Release, Inheritance, and Deposit Plan

Inheritance / continuity. This v0.1.3r8 draft is intended to inherit and extend the previously released VP whitepaper record v0.1.2 on Zenodo (10.5281/zenodo.17932567).

Deposit target. The author has reserved a new Zenodo DOI for the next upload: 10.5281/zenodo.18012058. This document is formatted to be uploaded (PDF + source) as that successor record.

What was added to “complete” the package.

  • A dedicated adjudication log (Appendix G) so that each GATE can be assigned an explicit verdict (PASS/FAIL/INC/UNASSESSED) with traceable evidence artifacts.

  • A BibTeX bibliography file (refs.bib) and a full reference list at the end of the PDF.

  • A reproducible Python “gate verdict” bundle that produces the Appendix G rows and (optionally) a regime/complexity diagnostic for residual interpretation.

Note on scientific claims. Adding a verdict ledger does not imply that any specific gate has already been passed; the ledger is a structured place to record outcomes once the relevant tests are executed and the artifacts are archived.

1 PART 01. Executive Summary and Reader Paths

This part fixes the document contract. It declares (i) what the theory is and is not, (ii) how every statement is classified and validated, (iii) how to read the work depending on intent, (iv) the minimal mathematical core that the rest of the document refines, and (v) editorial rules that prevent ambiguity and retrofitting.

1.1 1.1 Purpose, Scope, and Non-Scope

1.1.0.1 Purpose.

The purpose of this document is to present a mathematically explicit, test-oriented theoretical framework (hereafter VP framework) that can be:

  1. stated as a closed set of primitives, axioms, and equations;

  2. specialized by explicit regime assumptions and closures;

  3. used to derive quantitative predictions;

  4. confronted with observational and numerical gates that can yield PASS or FAIL without ad hoc adjustments.

1.1.0.2 Scope (what is included).

The document includes the following classes of content:

  1. Mathematical primitives and axioms: a minimal ontology (objects, fields, distributions) and ledger-type conservation constraints.

  2. Core dynamical equations: balance laws and transport relations expressed as partial differential equations (PDEs) for explicitly defined state variables and moments.

  3. Closures and regime maps: explicit assumptions that reduce the moment hierarchy to a closed system, together with a declaration of when each closure is valid.

  4. Gate physics: threshold rules (on/off, saturation, choking) that generate qualitative transitions and bound fluxes.

  5. Astrophysical and cosmological modules: clearly separated application layers (galactic dynamics, compact objects, jets, redshift, large-scale expansion), each stated as “model card” inputs \(\rightarrow\) outputs \(\rightarrow\) tests.

  6. Verification and falsification protocol: a suite of gates, datasets, and numerical protocols that restrict parameter freedom and prevent retroactive fitting.

1.1.0.3 Non-scope (what is excluded).

The following are explicitly excluded from the claims of this document unless a later section declares otherwise:

  1. Unbounded parameter tuning: Any approach where parameters are freely adjusted per dataset without a single global, locked parameter set is out of scope.

  2. Authority-based validation: No statement is to be accepted because it resembles mainstream theory; acceptance requires derivation from locked inputs and/or passage through explicit gates.

  3. Undefined semantics: Any use of symbols without a fixed, unique meaning (one symbol \(\rightarrow\) one meaning) is excluded.

  4. Handwaving about completeness: If a system is not mathematically closed under declared assumptions, it is not treated as a completed model.

  5. Implicit mixing of “fact” and “mechanism”: Observational facts are distinct from interpretive mechanisms; conflating them is excluded.

1.1.0.4 Minimal objects assumed in-scope.

The VP framework assumes a spacetime domain \(\Omega \subset \mathbb{R}^3\) with time \(t\in\mathbb{R}\) and uses:

  • a microscopic (kinetic) distribution \(f(x,v,t)\ge 0\) on \((x,v)\in \Omega\times \mathbb{R}^3\),

  • derived macroscopic moments (defined precisely in §1.4),

  • explicit balance laws and closure rules declared as part of the model.

1.2 1.2 Claim Tiers: LOCK / DERIVE / HYP / SPEC

Every statement in this document must be assigned exactly one tier. The tiers control what is allowed to depend on what, and what can be modified.

1.2.0.1 Tier definitions.

Let \(\mathcal{C}\) be the set of all claims (statements intended to be checkable). We partition: \[\mathcal{C}=\mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{LOCK}} \;\dot{\cup}\; \mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{DERIVE}} \;\dot{\cup}\; \mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{HYP}} \;\dot{\cup}\; \mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{SPEC}},\] where \(\dot{\cup}\) denotes disjoint union.

  1. LOCK (locked inputs). \(\mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\) contains definitions and axioms that are treated as fixed inputs for the entire work.

    • LOCK claims may not be altered to rescue a failed prediction.

    • LOCK claims must be stated without hidden parameters; all constants must be declared.

    • LOCK claims include: symbol meanings, normalization constraints, ledger constraints, and fundamental admissibility conditions.

  2. DERIVE (derived results). \(\mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{DERIVE}}\) contains propositions, lemmas, and consequences derived from LOCK claims plus explicitly declared closures/regimes.

    • DERIVE claims must provide a derivation chain that can be independently checked.

    • DERIVE claims must declare all additional assumptions as a named set \(\mathcal{A}_{\mathrm{regime}}\) and \(\mathcal{A}_{\mathrm{closure}}\).

    • DERIVE claims are invalid outside the declared regime.

  3. HYP (testable hypotheses). \(\mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{HYP}}\) contains closure choices, phenomenological constitutive laws, and model selections that are not derived from LOCK claims but are proposed to be tested.

    • Each HYP claim must be paired with at least one explicit gate (see §1.3 and §1.6).

    • HYP claims may be replaced by alternatives, but replacement must be logged as a version change.

  4. SPEC (implementation specifications). \(\mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{SPEC}}\) contains engineering choices about software, data formats, numerical schemes, and reporting.

    • SPEC items are not statements about nature; they are constraints for reproducible computation and documentation.

    • SPEC changes do not change physics claims, but can change what is considered reproducible or comparable.

1.2.0.2 Dependency rule (no retroactive rescue).

Define a directed dependency relation \(\rightarrow\) on claims: \(c_i\rightarrow c_j\) means “\(c_j\) uses \(c_i\) as an assumption.” The document must satisfy:

  1. No DERIVE/HYP/SPEC claim may modify any LOCK claim.

  2. If a gate produces FAIL for a prediction, the allowed responses are:

    • revise HYP claims (closures, constitutive relations) with version tracking, or

    • restrict the declared regime of validity,

    but never to alter LOCK claims post hoc.

1.2.0.3 Claim record schema (mandatory metadata).

Every claim must be accompanied by a record: \[\mathrm{Record}(c) = \big( \mathrm{Tier},\; \mathrm{Statement},\; \mathrm{Symbols},\; \mathrm{Assumptions},\; \mathrm{Regime},\; \mathrm{Parameters},\; \mathrm{Predictions},\; \mathrm{Gates} \big),\] where each field is non-empty except that predictions/gates may be empty only for LOCK and SPEC items.

1.3 1.3 Reader Paths: Conceptual / Rigorous / Verification-Implementation

This document is designed to be navigated by intent. The reader should select one of three paths. All paths share the same locked foundation; they differ in how quickly they reach applications.

1.3.0.1 Prerequisite relation.

Let \(\mathcal{P}\) be the set of Parts. Define a prerequisite partial order \(\prec\) on \(\mathcal{P}\): \[P_i \prec P_j \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \text{Part } P_j \text{ uses a LOCK/HYP/DERIVE object first introduced in } P_i.\] A valid reader path is a sequence \((P_{k_1},\dots,P_{k_m})\) such that whenever \(P_i \prec P_j\), the path visits \(P_i\) not after \(P_j\).

1.3.0.2 Path (a): Fast concept.

Goal: understand the ontology (what exists), the ledger idea (what is conserved), and the qualitative mechanism for each phenomenon.

  1. Part 01 (this Part): contract and one-page model.

  2. Primitives/Axioms and core meanings (the minimum definitions).

  3. Closure and regime map (how qualitative behavior splits).

  4. Cosmology module overview and redshift mechanism.

  5. Compact-object and jet mechanism overview.

  6. Model cards and gate summaries.

This path accepts HYP items as provisional and focuses on structure rather than proof.

1.3.0.3 Path (b): Rigorous development.

Goal: verify mathematical closure, check derivations, and understand limits.

  1. Part 01: contract and tier system.

  2. Notation/Units/Scale rules (remove ambiguity).

  3. Primitives/Axioms (LOCK set).

  4. Core balance laws and moment hierarchy.

  5. Closure library and regime declarations.

  6. Gate physics formalization.

  7. Mathematical formalization and consistency proofs.

  8. Only then: astrophysics/cosmology modules.

1.3.0.4 Path (c): Verification and implementation.

Goal: run tests, reproduce predictions, and decide PASS/FAIL.

  1. Part 01: contract and gate philosophy.

  2. Verification suite definition: datasets, metrics, null tests.

  3. PASS.rules and prohibited practices (no retrofitting).

  4. Numerical protocols and reproducible artifacts.

  5. Only then: apply to each module and report outcomes.

1.3.0.5 Mandatory rule for all paths.

No reader path is allowed to treat a HYP statement as established fact. HYP is accepted only conditionally on passing gates.

1.4 1.4 One-Page Core Summary: Stage/Actor, Ledger, Gates, and Regimes

This subsection provides a minimal mathematical kernel that is sufficient to parse all later Parts. Later Parts add rigor, closure catalogs, and tests, but they do not change the semantic meaning fixed here.

1.4.0.1 (i) Stage/Actor decomposition (conceptual).

We model “what exists” as two coupled layers:

  • Stage (background medium): a structured carrier that defines admissible transport and interaction costs.

  • Actor (excitations/matter): localized content that can be stored, transported, and converted.

Mathematically, this is implemented by a three-phase bookkeeping of a normalized capacity: \[e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) + \rho(x,t) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) = 1.\] Here:

  • \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is a background fraction (stage capacity not currently occupied by stored or active actor content),

  • \(\rho\) is a stored fraction (actor in a locally stored state),

  • \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is an active fraction (actor in a transport-capable state).

The normalization is a LOCK statement: it is part of the ledger.

1.4.0.2 (ii) Kinetic primitive and macroscopic moments.

Let \(f(x,v,t)\ge 0\) be a kinetic distribution on \(\Omega\times\mathbb{R}^3\). Define: \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} f(x,v,t)\,dv, \qquad S(x,t) := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} v\, f(x,v,t)\,dv, \qquad T(x,t) := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} (v\otimes v)\, f(x,v,t)\,dv.\] All integrals are assumed to exist in the declared regime; existence requirements are part of the regime declaration.

1.4.0.3 (iii) Ledger balance (core conservation law).

Define the total actor content: \[e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) := \rho(x,t) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\] The fundamental balance law is: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) + \nabla\cdot S(x,t) = 0.\] This expresses that changes in local actor content are exactly accounted for by flux divergence. It is a LOCK balance relation in this document.

1.4.0.4 (iv) Conversion between stored and active states.

A minimal conversion model is expressed by source terms that preserve \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) while redistributing between \(\rho\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\): \[\partial_t \rho = -\mu\,\rho + \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}) + \mathcal{R}_\rho, \qquad \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot S = +\mu\,\rho - \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}) + \mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{a}},\] with the constraint that (for ledger consistency) \[\mathcal{R}_\rho + \mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{a}} = 0.\] Here \(\mu\ge 0\) is a conversion rate (stored \(\rightarrow\) active), \(\Gamma(\cdot)\ge 0\) is a (possibly saturating) reverse conversion (active \(\rightarrow\) stored), and \(\mathcal{R}_\rho,\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{a}}\) are additional regime-dependent exchange terms whose sum must vanish to preserve \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\).

1.4.0.5 (v) Closure and effective transport (example).

The moment system is not closed without a constitutive assumption for \(T\). A common closure class is isotropic: \[T = \kappa_T\, e_{\mathrm{a}}\, I,\] where \(I\) is the identity tensor and \(\kappa_T>0\) is a closure coefficient. Combined with a friction/relaxation operator parameterized by \(B>0\), one obtains an effective constitutive relation of diffusion type: \[S = -D\,\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad D := \frac{\kappa_T}{B}.\] This is an HYP choice unless proven from LOCK primitives; its validity must be gated.

1.4.0.6 (vi) Gate physics (on/off, saturation, choking).

A gate is a rule that restricts processes to physically admissible ranges. Gates are implemented as inequalities and threshold functions, for example:

  • Saturation: \(\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}})\) is bounded, e.g. \(0 \le \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}) \le \Gamma_{\max}.\)

  • Choking: flux magnitude is bounded, \(\|S(x,t)\| \le S_{\max}(x,t),\) to prevent unphysical throughput.

  • Onset thresholds: conversion activates only if a condition holds, e.g. \(\mu = 0 \text{ if } e_{\mathrm{a}}<e_{\mathrm{crit}},\; \mu=\mu_0 \text{ if } e_{\mathrm{a}}\ge e_{\mathrm{crit}}.\)

Gates are not optional narrative devices; they are mathematically explicit constraints that determine qualitative behavior.

1.4.0.7 (vii) Regimes (mixing vs alignment).

A regime is a declared set of assumptions about symmetry, anisotropy, and closure validity. Two canonical regime families are:

  • Mixing-dominated (isotropic) regime: \(T\approx \kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}} I\) and transport is diffusion-like.

  • Alignment-dominated (anisotropic) regime: moments preferentially align with an axis \(k\) (unit vector), enabling channeling and jet-like transport; closures become axisymmetric rather than isotropic.

Every derived prediction must declare which regime it uses.

1.4.0.8 (viii) Redshift as interaction-cost (example observable mapping).

To connect to cosmological observables, an example HYP mapping is an energy attenuation along path-length \(s\): \[\frac{dE}{E} = -\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\, ds \quad\Longrightarrow\quad E(s) = E(0)\, e^{-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} s},\] which yields a redshift-like relation \[1+z := \frac{E(0)}{E(s)} = e^{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} s} \quad\Rightarrow\quad z = e^{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} s}-1 \approx \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} s \quad (\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} s \ll 1).\] The parameter \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) is distinct from \(\kappa_T\); symbols must not be reused with different meanings.

1.5 1.5 Principles to Prevent Terminology and Notation Collisions

Ambiguous notation is treated as a hard failure because it makes the theory non-falsifiable. Therefore, this document enforces a formal uniqueness policy.

1.5.0.1 Uniqueness policy (one symbol, one meaning).

Let \(\Sigma\) be the set of symbols used in the document and let \(\mathcal{M}\) be the set of meanings (definitions, physical quantities, mathematical objects). A valid symbol registry is an injective map \[\sigma:\Sigma\to \mathcal{M}, \qquad \sigma \text{ injective},\] meaning: \[\sigma(s_1)=\sigma(s_2)\;\Rightarrow\; s_1=s_2.\] This forbids the same symbol from denoting multiple meanings.

1.5.0.2 Collision resolution policy.

If a legacy text uses the same symbol for distinct concepts, the upgrade must:

  1. split the symbol into disjoint symbols (e.g. \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) vs. \(\kappa_T\)),

  2. update all dependent equations consistently,

  3. record a mapping table (legacy \(\rightarrow\) upgraded) as a SPEC artifact.

1.5.0.3 Dimensional consistency.

For each symbol \(s\in\Sigma\), the registry must include a dimension \([s]\) such that every equation in the document is dimensionally consistent. A statement without declared dimensions is incomplete and must not be used in DERIVE claims.

1.5.0.4 Reserved and forbidden sets.

  • Reserved symbols are those whose meanings are fixed in LOCK sections and may not be reassigned.

  • Forbidden symbols are those historically overloaded in the legacy text; they must be replaced by indexed or decorated forms until uniqueness is restored.

1.5.0.5 Normalization and positivity constraints (mandatory).

State variables representing fractions must satisfy: \[0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t),\rho(x,t),e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1, \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1,\] and kinetic distributions must satisfy: \[f(x,v,t)\ge 0.\] Any model choice that violates these is invalid.

1.6 1.6 Rules for Relating to Mainstream Theory and Observations

This document distinguishes three categories of statements to avoid conflating observation, standard interpretation, and alternative mechanism.

1.6.0.1 Three-way labeling (mandatory).

Every relevant paragraph or equation block must be labeled as one of:

  1. OBS (Observation): empirical measurement or dataset-derived quantity (e.g. a redshift catalogue, lensing shear map).

  2. STD (Standard interpretation): conventional theoretical mapping used in mainstream models (e.g. metric expansion interpretation for redshift).

  3. VP (Alternative mechanism): the mapping or mechanism proposed by the VP framework.

1.6.0.2 No misrepresentation rule.

If a statement is OBS, it must not be presented as VP. If a statement is STD, it must not be presented as OBS. If a statement is VP, it must explicitly declare its tier (DERIVE or HYP) and its gate plan.

1.6.0.3 Comparative mapping requirement.

When proposing a VP mechanism for an observed phenomenon, the document must provide:

  1. a quantitative mapping from VP variables to the observable (e.g. \(z(s)\) relation),

  2. the STD mapping for comparison (when applicable),

  3. at least one discriminating prediction where VP and STD differ,

  4. an explicit gate with PASS/FAIL criteria.

1.6.0.4 Separation of “fit” and “explain.”

A model that reproduces a curve by unconstrained parameters is not considered an explanation. Explanation is defined here as: \[\text{Explanation} := \text{Prediction from LOCK + declared HYP/closure that passes pre-registered gates}.\]

1.7 1.7 Output Units, File Rules, and Versioning

The document is constructed as a set of output units, each intended to be printable and reviewable in one session.

1.7.0.1 Output unit rule.

Each PART is a single output unit. Each APPENDIX is also a single output unit. Within each unit:

  1. all symbols introduced in that unit must be defined locally or referenced to a LOCK registry,

  2. all assumptions used in derived statements must be explicitly enumerated,

  3. all claims must be tier-labeled (LOCK/DERIVE/HYP/SPEC),

  4. all gates relevant to that unit must be listed, even if they are executed later.

1.7.0.3 Versioning (semantic).

The document version is a triple \((V_{\mathrm{major}},V_{\mathrm{minor}},V_{\mathrm{patch}})\) with the meaning:

  • Major: changes that modify LOCK items or change symbol meanings (should be rare and explicitly justified),

  • Minor: changes that add new modules, closures, gates, or derived content without changing LOCK meanings,

  • Patch: corrections of typos, clarity, and proofs that do not alter any claim statement.

1.7.0.4 Change log requirements.

Every version change must include:

  1. a list of modified claims with their tiers,

  2. a list of modified symbols and their meanings (if any),

  3. a list of gates affected and whether previous PASS/FAIL results remain valid.

1.7.0.5 Hard rule against silent breaking changes.

Any change that breaks the injective symbol registry \(\sigma\) (see §1.5) is invalid unless the major version is incremented and the mapping table is updated.

1.7.0.6 End-of-Part checklist (mandatory).

This Part is complete only if the document satisfies:

  1. a clear scope and non-scope statement (§1.1),

  2. a strict tier system with dependency constraints (§1.2),

  3. declared reader paths consistent with prerequisites (§1.3),

  4. a minimal closed mathematical core summary (§1.4),

  5. an injective symbol-meaning policy (§1.5),

  6. a three-way labeling rule for OBS/STD/VP (§1.6),

  7. a one-Part-per-output workflow and semantic versioning (§1.7).

  8. a proof roadmap tying LOCK/DERIVE/GATE to adjudication artifacts (§1.8 and Appendix G).

1.8 1.8 VP Theory: Mathematical & Empirical Proof Roadmap (LOCK\(\rightarrow\)DERIVE\(\rightarrow\)GATE\(\rightarrow\)ADJUDICATION)

This subsection is a cross-volume roadmap that turns the VP framework into a checkable program. It does not add new physics by itself; it declares (i) minimal mathematical deliverables, (ii) decisive empirical/numerical tests, and (iii) how outcomes are recorded in the adjudication ledger (Appendix G).

1.8.0.1 Four-stage pipeline (deliverables-first).

We summarize the roadmap as a strict pipeline: \[\textsf{LOCK} \;\longrightarrow\; \textsf{DERIVE} \;\longrightarrow\; \textsf{GATE} \;\longrightarrow\; \textsf{ADJUDICATION}.\] Each stage is considered complete only when its deliverables are present and independently checkable.

Stage Minimal deliverables (what must exist in writing or code)
LOCK Definitions of primitives, ledgers, and admissibility constraints (units, positivity, normalization), together with the minimal object registry that prevents notation drift.
DERIVE Derivations that map LOCK objects to quantitative predictions under explicitly declared regimes/closures, including a declared failure mode if a closure is invalid.
GATE PASS/FAIL/INC criteria against public data or internal consistency checks, with fixed protocols and archived computation artifacts (code, hashes, plots).
ADJ A permanent record (Appendix G) that links each gate outcome to its derivation path and its evidence artifact(s), without post-hoc changes to LOCK inputs.

1.8.0.2 (LOCK) Metric and “gravity” mapping: from VP ledger to effective geometry.

A mathematically defensible gravity claim requires an explicit map from VP state variables (ledger quantities) to an effective stress tensor and, if desired, to an effective metric. A conservative target is to define an effective VP stress-energy tensor \(T_{\mu\nu}^{(\mathrm{VP})}\) and demand compatibility with a geometric field equation of the form \[G_{\mu\nu} = 8\pi G\, T_{\mu\nu}^{(\mathrm{VP})}.\] A successful LOCK-level “metric” program must therefore (i) define the VP medium variables used in \(T_{\mu\nu}^{(\mathrm{VP})}\) (e.g. density ledger, lattice stress, compressibility/elastic moduli), (ii) show dimensional consistency and well-posedness in the declared regime, and (iii) recover the correct weak-field/Newtonian limit in the appropriate approximation.

1.8.0.3 (DERIVE) Bridge to particle physics: excitations, symmetries, and Noether charges.

Treating particles as lattice excitations is only a mechanism statement unless it is connected to explicit symmetry structure. The minimal DERIVE program is:

  • define a candidate effective Lagrangian (or Hamiltonian) for VP excitations in a declared regime;

  • identify the symmetry group(s) of that effective theory (global and, if claimed, local/gauge);

  • compute Noether currents and charges, and map them to a unique “ledger” meaning (one conserved quantity \(\leftrightarrow\) one quantum number).

Higher ambitions (full \(\mathrm{SU}(3)\times\mathrm{SU}(2)\times\mathrm{U}(1)\) matching) can be staged, but the first milestone must be an explicit, checkable symmetry-to-charge map.

1.8.0.4 (GATE) Three decisive tests that constrain the cosmology mechanism.

To prevent “explain-by-flexibility”, the following three gates are treated as priority checks for VP cosmology. These are recorded in Appendix G as Gate IDs G2 (already executed in this release), and (planned) G8–G9.

Gate Target observable (OBS) PASS rule (example) Required artifact
A / G2 Time dilation of transient light curves Observed stretch must scale as \((1+z)\) under the VP redshift mapping (no per-object tuning) Fit script + residual plots + locked protocol
B / G8 Bullet-cluster-type lensing–baryon separation Lensing potential centroid must be explainable without arbitrary hidden-mass placement; predicted offset direction/scale must match data Forward model + lensing residuals + code bundle
C / G9 CMB acoustic-peak structure Peak locations (and at minimum the first few relative heights) must be reproduced under the declared VP background evolution Spectrum code + likelihood/residual summary

1.8.0.5 On turbulence-style complexity and regime failures (diagnostics, not excuses).

A single global closure can fit a large fraction of systems while failing on a complex tail. In a related VP volume on vacuum inflow for disk galaxies, the residual tail is summarized by a reduced-\(\chi^2\) based complexity index and a descriptive partition into {laminar, transition, turbulent} regimes (explicitly phenomenological, not literal turbulence) . This document adopts the same philosophy: a “complexity” label is permitted only as a diagnostic that flags stressed closures and motivates explicitly logged next steps (regime restriction or globally locked closure upgrades followed by re-testing). It must never be used to weaken PASS/FAIL criteria or to introduce per-object tuning. For the VP-to-continuum bridge and closure language, see the dedicated VP fluid-dynamics volume .

1.8.0.6 Failure-friendly rule (scientific hygiene).

Every high-level mechanism claim must state a clear FAIL condition. “If this condition is violated, the VP mechanism as stated is false” is treated here as a strength, not a weakness. All such outcomes are recorded in Appendix G and are not overwritten by post-hoc redefinition of LOCK inputs.

2 PART 02. The LOCK\(\rightarrow\)DERIVE\(\rightarrow\)GATE Operating System (Output 2)

This Part specifies the operational rules that make the document falsifiable and non-retrofittable. The central principle is a one-way pipeline: \[\textbf{LOCK} \;\longrightarrow\; \textbf{DERIVE} \;\longrightarrow\; \textbf{GATE}.\] LOCK fixes meanings and axioms; DERIVE produces predictions by admissible inference under declared regimes/closures; GATE evaluates the predictions against formal consistency checks and empirical/numerical tests. Information must not flow backward in a way that silently changes what was assumed.

2.1 2.1 LOCK: List of Fixed Inputs and Lock Conditions

2.1.0.1 2.1.1 Definition of the LOCK set.

Let the total knowledge base of the document at a given version be represented as a structured object \[\mathfrak{T} := \big(\Sigma,\;\sigma,\;\mathcal{A},\;\mathcal{D},\;\mathcal{H},\;\Theta,\;\mathcal{G},\;\mathcal{X}\big),\] where:

  • \(\Sigma\) is the set of symbols used;

  • \(\sigma:\Sigma\to\mathcal{M}\) is the symbol-to-meaning registry (injective; see Part 01);

  • \(\mathcal{A}\) is the set of axioms and admissibility constraints (ledger, positivity, normalization, etc.);

  • \(\mathcal{D}\) is the library of allowed mathematical inference rules and transformations (e.g. calculus, algebra, measure-theoretic manipulations under stated integrability);

  • \(\mathcal{H}\) is the set of hypotheses/closures/regime declarations (non-LOCK choices);

  • \(\Theta\) is the parameter space (partitioned below);

  • \(\mathcal{G}\) is the set of gates (tests) and their acceptance criteria;

  • \(\mathcal{X}\) is the set of datasets and numerical/experimental inputs admissible for gate evaluation.

The LOCK set is defined as \[\mathrm{LOCK} := (\Sigma,\sigma,\mathcal{A},\mathcal{D},\Theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}),\] i.e. the subset of items that must not be modified by downstream gate outcomes.

2.1.0.2 2.1.2 What qualifies as LOCK.

An item is eligible for LOCK only if it satisfies all conditions:

  1. Semantic necessity: it fixes a meaning (definition) or an invariant constraint without which later equations become ambiguous.

  2. Global usage: it is used across multiple modules or is required for the document-wide ledger and unit consistency.

  3. Minimality: removing it would break well-posedness or interpretability, not merely reduce convenience.

  4. Non-retrofit intent: it is not introduced to save a failing prediction for a specific dataset.

Examples include: symbol meanings, normalization constraints, positivity constraints, the basic ledger/balance law form, and fundamental admissibility conditions.

2.1.0.3 2.1.3 Lock conditions as formal invariants.

A lock condition is an invariant \(\mathcal{I}\) that must hold for the document at any time for a fixed version. The core invariants are:

2.1.0.3.1 (i) Injective symbol registry.

\[\sigma:\Sigma\to\mathcal{M}\ \text{injective}, \qquad \sigma(s_1)=\sigma(s_2)\Rightarrow s_1=s_2.\] Violation of injectivity is a LOCK failure and halts derivations until repaired.

2.1.0.3.2 (ii) Dimensional consistency.

Let \([\cdot]\) denote physical dimensions (units). For every equation \(E(\cdot)=0\) in the document, \[\text{all additive terms in }E\text{ must share the same dimension.}\] Any equation with mismatched dimensions is invalid.

2.1.0.3.3 (iii) Ledger admissibility.

For state variables interpreted as normalized fractions, the admissibility set is \[\mathcal{S}:=\Big\{(e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}}):\ 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1,\ \ e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1\Big\}.\] Any derivation that produces values outside \(\mathcal{S}\) without explicitly declaring a different meaning is invalid.

2.1.0.3.4 (iv) Locked parameter subset.

Parameters are partitioned as \[\Theta = \Theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\times \Theta_{\mathrm{HYP}}\times \Theta_{\mathrm{SPEC}},\] where \(\Theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\) are constants declared fixed across all analyses of a given version. If a quantity is in \(\Theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\), it must not be estimated from evaluation data (see §2.4).

2.1.0.4 2.1.4 How LOCK can change (only via version semantics).

LOCK modifications are allowed only as a Major version change and must satisfy:

  1. explicit declaration of which LOCK items change;

  2. an updated mapping table from legacy symbols/meanings to new ones;

  3. a re-baselining statement: prior PASS/FAIL results must be marked as non-comparable unless re-evaluated.

No other pathway can modify LOCK.

2.2 2.2 DERIVE: Allowed Inference and Forbidden Reverse-Injection Patterns

2.2.0.1 2.2.1 Formal meaning of DERIVE.

A DERIVE claim is an assertion \(c\) for which there exists a derivation chain using only: \[\mathrm{LOCK}\;+\;\mathcal{H}_{\mathrm{declared}}\;+\;\text{basic mathematics},\] where \(\mathcal{H}_{\mathrm{declared}}\subseteq\mathcal{H}\) is the explicitly declared set of regime/closure assumptions used for that claim.

We formalize this by a derivability relation: \[\mathrm{LOCK}\ \cup\ \mathcal{H}_{\mathrm{declared}}\ \vdash\ c.\] The proof object (derivation steps) must be reproducible and checkable.

2.2.0.2 2.2.2 Admissible inference rules.

Allowed derivation steps include, but are not limited to:

  1. algebraic transformations preserving equivalence;

  2. differentiation/integration under stated regularity and integrability assumptions;

  3. taking moments of kinetic equations under declared conditions;

  4. applying declared closures to eliminate higher moments;

  5. asymptotic expansions with explicit remainder order and regime condition.

2.2.0.3 2.2.3 Regime declaration as part of derivation.

Every derivation must include a regime statement \(\mathcal{R}\) specifying: \[\mathcal{R} := \big(\text{symmetry assumptions},\ \text{scale ordering},\ \text{closure choice},\ \text{boundary conditions},\ \text{regularity}\big).\] A DERIVE claim without \(\mathcal{R}\) is incomplete.

2.2.0.4 2.2.4 Forbidden reverse-injection: definition.

Let a model instance be defined by a choice of LOCK (fixed), a hypothesis/closure set \(H\in\mathcal{H}\), and parameters \(\theta\in\Theta\): \[M := (\mathrm{LOCK},H,\theta).\] Let \(\Pi(M)\) denote the prediction map producing predicted observables: \[\Pi(M)\in \mathcal{Y},\] and let \(g\in\mathcal{G}\) be a gate acting on predictions and data: \[g:\mathcal{Y}\times\mathcal{X}\to \{\mathrm{PASS},\mathrm{FAIL},\mathrm{INC}\}.\] A reverse-injection is any transformation \[T:\ (\mathrm{LOCK},H,\theta,\ g(\Pi(M),X))\ \mapsto\ (\mathrm{LOCK}',H',\theta')\] that depends on the gate outcome and changes upstream assumptions/parameters, without being recorded as a versioned change and without enforcing proper data separation.

2.2.0.5 2.2.5 Forbidden reverse-injection patterns (explicit list).

The following are forbidden in this document:

2.2.0.5.1 (F1) LOCK rescue.

Any transformation with \(\mathrm{LOCK}'\neq \mathrm{LOCK}\) performed in response to a FAIL is forbidden: \[g(\Pi(M),X)=\mathrm{FAIL}\ \Rightarrow\ \mathrm{LOCK}'=\mathrm{LOCK}.\]

2.2.0.5.2 (F2) Evaluation-data parameter fitting (leakage).

Let \(X_{\mathrm{eval}}\) be evaluation data for a gate. Adjusting \(\theta\) using \(X_{\mathrm{eval}}\) and then re-evaluating on the same \(X_{\mathrm{eval}}\) is forbidden. Formally, if \[\theta' = \mathcal{F}(X_{\mathrm{eval}},\theta) \quad\text{and}\quad g(\Pi(\mathrm{LOCK},H,\theta'),X_{\mathrm{eval}})\] is used as evidence, then this is disallowed unless \(X_{\mathrm{eval}}\) is explicitly redefined as training data and a distinct evaluation set is introduced.

2.2.0.5.3 (F3) Closure selection by evaluation performance without re-registration.

Choosing \(H\) (closure/regime) by trying multiple candidates on the evaluation gate and selecting the best is forbidden unless:

  1. the candidate set is pre-registered,

  2. model selection is performed on training/validation splits,

  3. evaluation is done only once on a held-out test gate.

2.2.0.5.4 (F4) Post-hoc threshold manipulation.

Changing gate thresholds (acceptance criteria) after seeing outcomes is forbidden: \[g \text{ is fixed at version time; thresholds cannot be altered post hoc.}\]

2.2.0.5.5 (F5) Redefining observables.

Altering the mapping from model variables to observables after evaluation is forbidden unless it is declared as a new HYP and re-gated from scratch.

2.2.0.5.6 (F6) Silent regime narrowing.

Declaring a regime after a FAIL in a way that excludes the failing case, without stating the restriction as a new claim, is forbidden. Regime restrictions must be explicit, versioned, and justified by independent reasoning or separate evidence.

2.2.0.6 2.2.6 Allowed responses to FAIL.

If a gate yields FAIL, the only allowed upstream changes are:

  1. modify \(H\) (closures/constitutive laws/observable mappings) as a versioned HYP change;

  2. restrict the regime \(\mathcal{R}\) with explicit declaration and justification;

  3. fix errors (typos, unit mistakes, numerical bugs) as Patch changes, provided they do not alter claim statements or acceptance criteria.

LOCK changes remain forbidden except by Major version policy.

2.3 2.3 GATE: Types of Gates and Formal PASS/FAIL Logic

2.3.0.1 2.3.1 Gate definition.

A gate is a deterministic or stochastic decision rule \[g:\ \mathcal{Y}\times\mathcal{X}\to \{\mathrm{PASS},\mathrm{FAIL},\mathrm{INC}\},\] where \(\mathcal{Y}\) is the space of predicted outputs and \(\mathcal{X}\) is the space of inputs/datasets/simulations. “INC” (inconclusive) is allowed only when explicitly defined (e.g. insufficient data quality).

2.3.0.2 2.3.2 Acceptance sets.

Each gate corresponds to an acceptance set \(\mathcal{A}_g\subseteq\mathcal{Y}\times\mathcal{X}\): \[g(y,X)=\mathrm{PASS}\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad (y,X)\in \mathcal{A}_g.\] When gates are based on a scalar metric \(m(y,X)\in\mathbb{R}\), acceptance typically takes the form \[m(y,X)\le \tau,\] with threshold \(\tau\) fixed by pre-registration.

2.3.0.3 2.3.3 Gate taxonomy (mandatory categories).

Gates are classified into the following types; each module must specify at least one gate from the relevant types:

2.3.0.3.1 (G1) Internal consistency gates.

These gates test self-consistency independent of external data, including:

  • symbol registry injectivity;

  • positivity and admissibility constraints (e.g. \(f\ge 0\), \((e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\in\mathcal{S}\));

  • ledger conservation identities (local and integral forms);

  • well-posedness checks (e.g. closure yields closed PDE system).

Failure of (G1) is a hard stop: no observational comparisons are permitted until repaired.

2.3.0.3.2 (G2) Dimensional-analysis gates.

These verify that every equation is dimensionally consistent and that each parameter has declared units: \[[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}]=[\nabla\cdot S],\qquad [T]=[v\otimes v][f]\,dv,\ \text{etc.}\] A mismatch is a FAIL.

2.3.0.3.3 (G3) Limiting-regime gates.

These ensure the model behaves correctly in specified limits (as declared by the document), such as:

  • low-flux or weak-gradient limit producing diffusion-like behavior if claimed;

  • isotropic limit of an anisotropic closure reproducing the isotropic closure;

  • symmetry reductions (spherical/axial) matching the reduced equations.

These are mathematical/structural gates, not empirical ones.

2.3.0.3.4 (G4) Observational gates.

These compare predictions to observational datasets using fixed metrics and thresholds, e.g.:

  • residual norms with error bars,

  • likelihood ratios with pre-registered priors and degrees of freedom,

  • cross-dataset consistency constraints (one parameter set across multiple phenomena).

Observational gates must declare data provenance and preprocessing steps as part of \(\mathcal{X}\).

2.3.0.3.5 (G5) Numerical gates.

These ensure results are not numerical artifacts:

  • grid/time-step convergence (solution changes below tolerance),

  • sensitivity to random seeds within confidence intervals,

  • stability checks and conservation error bounds.

2.3.0.4 2.3.4 Combining multiple gates.

Let \(\mathcal{G}_{\mathrm{req}}\subseteq\mathcal{G}\) be the required gates for a claim or module. Define the overall decision: \[G_{\mathrm{overall}}(M) = \begin{cases} \mathrm{PASS}, & \forall g\in\mathcal{G}_{\mathrm{req}},\ g(\Pi(M),X_g)=\mathrm{PASS},\\ \mathrm{FAIL}, & \exists g\in\mathcal{G}_{\mathrm{req}},\ g(\Pi(M),X_g)=\mathrm{FAIL},\\ \mathrm{INC}, & \text{otherwise (no FAIL, at least one INC)}. \end{cases}\] Here \(X_g\) denotes the dataset/simulation inputs assigned to gate \(g\).

2.3.0.5 2.3.5 Pre-registration requirement.

For any gate that depends on thresholds, metrics, or dataset selection, the following must be fixed before evaluation: \[(g,\ m,\ \tau,\ X,\ \text{preprocessing},\ \theta\text{-selection rule}).\] Changing any of these after observing outcomes is forbidden (see §2.2).

2.4 2.4 Parameter Policy: No Tuning, or Restricted Degrees of Freedom

2.4.0.1 2.4.1 Parameter partition.

Let \(\theta\in\Theta\) denote the full parameter vector. Partition: \[\theta = (\theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}},\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}},\theta_{\mathrm{SPEC}}),\] where:

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\in\Theta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\): fixed constants (document-wide);

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}}\in\Theta_{\mathrm{HYP}}\): hypothesis/closure parameters (may be estimated under strict rules);

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{SPEC}}\in\Theta_{\mathrm{SPEC}}\): numerical/implementation parameters (step sizes, solver tolerances, etc.; must be reported but not used to claim physics).

2.4.0.2 2.4.2 No-tuning default rule.

The default rule is: \[\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}} \text{ is fixed a priori (not fit to evaluation data).}\] Under the default rule, a model is considered predictive if it passes gates with the pre-fixed \(\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}}\).

2.4.0.3 2.4.3 If fitting is allowed: restricted and globally consistent.

If parameter estimation is permitted, it must satisfy all of the following:

2.4.0.3.1 (P1) Globality (one set across modules).

A single parameter set must be used across all gates in its declared scope: \[\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}}^{\mathrm{(module\ A)}}=\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}}^{\mathrm{(module\ B)}}=\cdots\] unless the document explicitly declares a regime-dependent parameterization with independent justification and separate gates.

2.4.0.3.2 (P2) Data separation.

Datasets are partitioned into disjoint roles: \[\mathcal{X}=\mathcal{X}_{\mathrm{train}}\ \dot{\cup}\ \mathcal{X}_{\mathrm{val}}\ \dot{\cup}\ \mathcal{X}_{\mathrm{test}}.\] Parameter estimation may use \(\mathcal{X}_{\mathrm{train}}\) (and possibly \(\mathcal{X}_{\mathrm{val}}\) for model selection), but final PASS/FAIL must be computed on \(\mathcal{X}_{\mathrm{test}}\) exactly once per model version.

2.4.0.3.3 (P3) Degrees-of-freedom budget.

Let \(k:=\dim(\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}})\) be the number of fitted parameters used for a gate, and let \(n\) be the effective number of independent data points used in that gate. A gate must declare \((k,n)\) and enforce that \(k\ll n\) in a quantified sense. A minimal admissibility rule is: \[\frac{k}{n} \le \epsilon,\] for a small pre-registered \(\epsilon\) appropriate to the application, together with a penalty-aware metric (e.g. information criteria or cross-validation). The specific criterion must be fixed by the gate definition.

2.4.0.3.4 (P4) Identifiability requirement.

If multiple parameter sets yield indistinguishable predictions within uncertainty, the parameters are not identifiable. Formally, if the map \[\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}} \mapsto \Pi(\mathrm{LOCK},H,\theta_{\mathrm{HYP}})\] is not injective on the admissible set (up to observational noise), then the document must either:

  1. reduce parameterization (lower \(k\)),

  2. add independent gates that break degeneracy,

  3. or restrict claims to prediction-level statements that do not interpret the parameters.

2.4.0.4 2.4.4 Prohibited tuning behaviors (explicit).

Even when fitting is allowed, the following are prohibited:

  1. re-fitting using test data after seeing test results;

  2. selecting among many closures/parameterizations using the test gate;

  3. per-dataset parameter choices (unless the dataset itself defines a different regime with independent gating).

2.5 2.5 Reproducibility Protocol: Seed, Version, Archive, Artifact Identifiers

2.5.0.1 2.5.1 Reproducible run record.

Every computational or analytical result that supports a claim must be accompanied by a run record: \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{run}} = \big( V,\; \mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{code}},\; \mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{env}},\; \mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{data}},\; \mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{model}},\; \mathrm{seed},\; \mathrm{time} \big),\] where:

  • \(V\) is the document version (semantic);

  • \(\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{code}}\) is a code hash (commit hash or equivalent);

  • \(\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{env}}\) is an environment hash (compiler/interpreter and library versions);

  • \(\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{data}}\) is a dataset manifest hash (including preprocessing scripts);

  • \(\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{model}}\) encodes \((\mathrm{LOCK},H,\theta)\) uniquely;

  • \(\mathrm{seed}\) is the random seed for any stochastic component;

  • \(\mathrm{time}\) is a timestamp (for ordering only; not part of correctness).

2.5.0.2 2.5.2 Canonical model identifier.

Define the canonical model identifier as a hash of a canonical serialization: \[\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{model}} := \mathrm{Hash}\Big( \mathrm{Canon}(\mathrm{LOCK})\ \Vert\ \mathrm{Canon}(H)\ \Vert\ \mathrm{Canon}(\theta) \Big),\] where \(\Vert\) denotes concatenation and \(\mathrm{Canon}(\cdot)\) is a deterministic canonicalization function (e.g. sorted keys, fixed numerical formatting, fixed symbol names).

2.5.0.3 2.5.3 Canonical dataset identifier.

Similarly, \[\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{data}} := \mathrm{Hash}\Big(\mathrm{Manifest}(X)\Big),\] where \(\mathrm{Manifest}(X)\) includes:

  • raw data source identifiers,

  • preprocessing code identifiers,

  • filters/cuts used,

  • final produced table shapes and checksums.

2.5.0.4 2.5.4 Artifact definition and naming.

An artifact is any output that supports a claim: tables, figures, residuals, fitted parameters, intermediate arrays, logs. Each artifact must carry: \[\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{artifact}} := \mathrm{Hash}\Big( \mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{run}}\ \Vert\ \mathrm{artifact\_type}\ \Vert\ \mathrm{artifact\_payload\_hash} \Big).\] Artifacts must be immutable: changing an artifact requires generating a new identifier.

2.5.0.5 2.5.5 Seed policy.

If a procedure is stochastic:

  1. the seed must be recorded in \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{run}}\);

  2. results must include variability summaries (means/intervals);

  3. numerical gates must include seed-sensitivity checks: \[\mathrm{Var}\big(m(\Pi(M;\mathrm{seed}),X)\big) \le \delta,\] for a pre-registered tolerance \(\delta\).

If the procedure is deterministic, the seed field must still be present (set to a fixed null value) to make the record schema uniform.

2.5.0.6 2.5.6 Archive policy.

The archive is a directory or repository that stores:

  • all run records \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{run}}\),

  • all artifacts with their identifiers,

  • a changelog mapping from claims to artifact identifiers.

A claim without an archival pointer to its supporting artifacts is not considered reproducible.

2.6 2.6 Failure Handling: FAIL Records, Root-Cause Taxonomy, and PR Procedure

2.6.0.1 2.6.1 FAIL is an output, not an error.

Within LOCK\(\rightarrow\)DERIVE\(\rightarrow\)GATE, FAIL is a valid and expected outcome. It is not “wrongness”; it is information about which hypotheses/closures/regimes do not survive gating.

2.6.0.2 2.6.2 FAIL record schema (mandatory).

When any required gate returns FAIL, a FAIL record must be created: \[\mathcal{F} = \big( V,\; c,\; g,\; X_g,\; \mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{model}},\; m,\; \tau,\; \mathrm{result},\; \mathrm{diagnosis},\; \mathrm{action} \big),\] where:

  • \(V\) is the version;

  • \(c\) is the claim identifier that failed;

  • \(g\) is the gate identifier;

  • \(X_g\) is the dataset/simulation used by the gate;

  • \(\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{model}}\) identifies the exact \((\mathrm{LOCK},H,\theta)\) evaluated;

  • \(m\) is the metric value(s) produced by the gate;

  • \(\tau\) is the threshold/acceptance specification;

  • \(\mathrm{result}\in\{\mathrm{FAIL},\mathrm{INC}\}\) (FAIL in this subsection);

  • \(\mathrm{diagnosis}\) is the root-cause classification (below);

  • \(\mathrm{action}\) is the permitted response category (below).

2.6.0.3 2.6.3 Root-cause taxonomy.

Diagnosis must classify the failure into one (or more) of the following categories:

2.6.0.3.1 (R1) Semantic/notation failure.

Examples: symbol collision; undefined symbol; inconsistent meaning; registry injectivity violation.

2.6.0.3.2 (R2) Dimensional/unit failure.

Examples: unit mismatch; inconsistent scaling; hidden unit conversions.

2.6.0.3.3 (R3) Ledger/admissibility violation.

Examples: negativity (\(f<0\)); fractions leaving \([0,1]\); normalization failure.

2.6.0.3.4 (R4) Mathematical closure failure.

Examples: moment hierarchy not closed under declared closure; missing boundary conditions; ill-posed PDE type under assumptions.

2.6.0.3.5 (R5) Numerical failure.

Examples: non-convergence; instability; results sensitive to grid/time step or seed; conservation error above tolerance.

2.6.0.3.6 (R6) Observational mismatch.

Examples: residuals exceed threshold; cross-dataset inconsistency for a single parameter set; falsified discriminating prediction.

2.6.0.3.7 (R7) Overfitting/model-selection leakage.

Examples: parameter chosen using evaluation data; closure selected on the test gate; threshold changed post hoc.

2.6.0.4 2.6.4 Permitted actions by diagnosis class.

Actions must respect the one-way pipeline.

2.6.0.4.1 If (R1)–(R2) occurs:

this is typically a Patch fix (typos, symbol registry repair, unit correction), provided the claim statement is unchanged. After patching, re-run all affected internal gates.

2.6.0.4.2 If (R3) occurs:

either:

  1. tighten admissibility enforcement (e.g. revise numerical scheme or impose gates), or

  2. restrict the regime where the model is claimed to apply,

without changing LOCK meanings.

2.6.0.4.3 If (R4) occurs:

the derivation is incomplete; either add missing closure assumptions as HYP with gates, or retract the DERIVE claim.

2.6.0.4.4 If (R5) occurs:

fix the SPEC (solver, resolution, stability), add numerical gates, and re-evaluate. Numerical repair must not alter physical claims without explicit declaration.

2.6.0.4.5 If (R6) occurs:

the primary allowed responses are:

  1. replace or revise HYP closures/constitutive laws (Minor version),

  2. restrict regime validity explicitly,

  3. retract the claim if no admissible modification exists.

LOCK rescue is forbidden.

2.6.0.4.6 If (R7) occurs:

invalidate the evaluation as non-admissible; redesign the protocol with proper train/validation/test separation and re-register gates.

2.6.0.5 2.6.5 PR (proposed revision) procedure.

A revision is submitted as a PR object \[\mathcal{P}\mathcal{R}= \big( V_{\mathrm{base}},\; V_{\mathrm{target}},\; \Delta\mathrm{LOCK},\; \Delta H,\; \Delta \theta,\; \Delta \mathcal{G},\; \Delta \mathcal{X},\; \Delta \mathrm{claims},\; \mathrm{justification} \big),\] with the following rules:

  1. \(\Delta\mathrm{LOCK}\neq \varnothing\) implies a Major version change.

  2. \(\Delta H\neq \varnothing\) or new gates/modules typically imply a Minor version change.

  3. Pure corrections without claim changes imply a Patch.

  4. The PR must list all impacted claims and gates and specify whether prior PASS/FAIL results remain valid.

  5. The PR must run regression gates: all previously passing internal and numerical gates must remain PASS unless explicitly deprecated.

2.6.0.6 2.6.6 Stop conditions (prevent infinite patching).

To prevent endless post-hoc adjustments, the document enforces:

  1. One-shot test rule: each model version may be evaluated on a given test gate at most once (unless a Patch fixes a non-physics bug and the gate is re-run with identical inputs and acceptance criteria).

  2. Gate integrity rule: acceptance criteria and thresholds are immutable within a version.

  3. Auditability rule: any change that affects predictions must be traceable via \(\mathrm{ID}_{\mathrm{model}}\) and artifact identifiers.

2.6.0.7 End-of-Part checklist (mandatory).

This Part is complete only if:

  1. LOCK is explicitly defined and guarded by invariants (§2.1);

  2. DERIVE is formalized with admissible inference rules and explicit forbidden reverse-injection patterns (§2.2);

  3. gates are defined as PASS/FAIL/INC decision rules with taxonomy and combination logic (§2.3);

  4. parameter policy is declared with default no-tuning and restricted fitting rules (§2.4);

  5. reproducibility identifiers and archival protocol are specified (§2.5);

  6. FAIL handling includes record schema, diagnosis taxonomy, and revision procedure (§2.6).

3 PART 03. Notation, Units, and Scale Hierarchy (Output 3)

This Part fixes (i) a symbol registry that prevents ambiguity, (ii) the state-variable system (including the three-phase bookkeeping), (iii) the constant-separation principle (e.g. \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) vs. \(\kappa_T\)), (iv) a unit-realization anchored to a reference volume \(v^\ast\), length \(a\), time step \(\Delta t\), and speed \(c\), (v) the scale hierarchy and the rules that connect micro/meso/macro descriptions, (vi) systematic nondimensionalization and regime declarations, and (vii) a legacy\(\rightarrow\)upgrade mapping template that makes upgrades auditable.

Throughout, we treat ambiguous notation as a hard failure: if a symbol is used with multiple meanings, the theory becomes non-falsifiable. Therefore, this Part makes notation and units a locked infrastructure.

3.1 3.1 Rules for Constructing the Symbol Registry (Reserved and Forbidden Symbols)

3.1.1 3.1.1 Canonical sets and registries

3.1.1.1 Symbol set.

Let \(\Sigma\) denote the set of all symbols (tokens) that can appear in the document, including Latin/Greek letters, decorated forms (subscripts/superscripts), and indexed objects: \[\Sigma \;=\; \{ s : s \text{ is a syntactic symbol allowed in this document}\}.\]

3.1.1.2 Meaning set.

Let \(\mathcal{M}\) denote the set of meanings (semantic objects): a meaning can be a scalar field, vector field, tensor field, rate parameter, operator, or a well-defined map.

3.1.1.3 Symbol\(\rightarrow\)meaning registry (injective).

A valid symbol registry is an injective mapping \[\sigma:\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\to \mathcal{M}, \qquad \sigma \text{ injective},\] where \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\subseteq\Sigma\) is the set of canonical symbols (the ones that are allowed to appear in final equations as primary names). Injectivity means: \[\sigma(s_1)=\sigma(s_2)\ \Longrightarrow\ s_1=s_2.\] Any need for synonyms must be handled by aliases (see below) rather than breaking injectivity.

3.1.1.4 Alias map (non-canonical tokens).

If alternative spellings are convenient, introduce an alias map \[\alpha:\Sigma_{\mathrm{alias}} \to \Sigma_{\mathrm{can}},\] where \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{alias}}\subseteq\Sigma\setminus\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\). Aliases are editorial conveniences only; all formal statements and derivations must be written in canonical symbols.

3.1.2 3.1.2 Dimension system and dimensional registry

3.1.2.1 Dimension group.

Let the base-dimension set be \[\mathbb{B}=\{L,T,M,\ldots\},\] where at minimum \(L\) (length) and \(T\) (time) are included, and \(M\) (mass) is included if/when a mass-carrying mapping is declared in later Parts. Define the dimension group \(\mathrm{Dim}\) as the free abelian group generated by \(\mathbb{B}\), i.e. elements are exponent vectors. For concreteness, if \(\mathbb{B}=\{L,T,M\}\) then \[\mathrm{Dim}\cong \mathbb{Z}^3,\qquad d = (\ell,\tau,m)\ \leftrightarrow\ [L]^\ell [T]^\tau [M]^m.\]

3.1.2.2 Dimension registry.

Every canonical symbol must have a declared dimension: \[\delta:\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\to \mathrm{Dim}.\] Dimensional consistency of an equation is defined by \(\delta\) and the standard rules:

  • \(\delta(uv)=\delta(u)+\delta(v)\) (multiplication adds exponents),

  • \(\delta(u/v)=\delta(u)-\delta(v)\),

  • \(\delta(u+v)\) is defined only if \(\delta(u)=\delta(v)\).

3.1.2.3 Dimensional well-formedness of expressions.

An expression is dimensionally well-formed if every addition/subtraction occurs only between terms of identical dimension. An equation is valid only if both sides have identical dimension.

3.1.3 3.1.3 Typographic conventions and index rules

To avoid hidden ambiguity, the following conventions are enforced.

3.1.3.1 Scalars, vectors, tensors.

  • Scalars: italic (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), \(\rho\), \(\mu\)).

  • Vectors: bold (e.g. \(\mathbf{S}\)) or arrow notation; in this document we prefer bold: \[\mathbf{S}(x,t)\in\mathbb{R}^3.\]

  • Second-order tensors: bold uppercase or explicit components, e.g. \(\mathbf{T}(x,t)\) with components \(T_{ij}\).

3.1.3.2 Identity tensor and Kronecker symbols.

\[\mathbf{I}\ \text{denotes the identity tensor},\qquad (\mathbf{I})_{ij}=\delta_{ij}.\]

3.1.3.3 Differential operators.

\[\nabla := (\partial_{x_1},\partial_{x_2},\partial_{x_3}),\quad \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} := \sum_{i=1}^3 \partial_{x_i} S_i,\quad \nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} := \big(\sum_{j=1}^3 \partial_{x_j} T_{ij}\big)_{i=1}^3.\]

3.1.3.4 Norms and inner products.

\[\|\mathbf{u}\| := \sqrt{\mathbf{u}\cdot\mathbf{u}},\qquad \mathbf{u}\cdot\mathbf{v}:=\sum_{i=1}^3 u_i v_i.\] For tensors, \(\|\mathbf{T}\|\) denotes a specified matrix norm (default: Frobenius), which must be declared where used.

3.1.3.5 Big-O notation (regime declarations).

For a small parameter \(\varepsilon>0\), \[f(\varepsilon)=\mathcal{O}(\varepsilon^p)\quad(\varepsilon\to 0)\] means there exist \(C,\varepsilon_0>0\) such that \(|f(\varepsilon)|\le C\varepsilon^p\) for \(0<\varepsilon<\varepsilon_0\).

3.1.4 3.1.4 Required fields of each registry entry

Each canonical symbol \(s\in\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\) must have a registry entry: \[\mathrm{Entry}(s):=\big( \text{Name},\ \text{Meaning},\ \text{Tier},\ \delta(s),\ \text{Domain},\ \text{Regularity},\ \text{Constraints},\ \text{First\_introduced},\ \text{Notes} \big).\] Minimum requirements:

  1. Name: the exact LaTeX token (including subscripts).

  2. Meaning: a sentence-level definition that uniquely identifies the semantic object.

  3. Tier: one of LOCK, DERIVE, HYP, SPEC.

  4. Dimension \(\delta(s)\).

  5. Domain: e.g. \(x\in\Omega\subset\mathbb{R}^3\), \(v\in\mathbb{R}^3\), \(t\in\mathbb{R}\).

  6. Regularity: minimal analytic assumptions used in derivations (e.g. \(L^1\) in \(v\), \(C^1\) in \(x\)).

  7. Constraints: positivity, bounds, normalization, symmetry constraints.

  8. First_introduced: where it is defined (Part/Section label).

3.1.5 3.1.5 Reserved and forbidden sets

3.1.5.1 Reserved canonical symbols.

Define a reserved set \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{res}}\subseteq \Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\) of symbols whose meaning is locked and may never be reassigned. At minimum, the following are reserved in this document: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{res}}\supseteq \{e_{\mathrm{bg}},\ \rho,\ e_{\mathrm{a}},\ e_{\mathrm{tot}},\ f,\ \mathbf{S},\ \mathbf{T},\ \mu,\ \Gamma,\ B,\ a,\ \Delta t,\ c,\ v^\ast\}.\] Additional reserved symbols will be declared as the document expands.

3.1.5.2 Forbidden (overloaded) symbols.

Define a forbidden set \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{forb}}\subseteq\Sigma\) that must not appear as a standalone canonical symbol because it is historically overloaded or ambiguous. This Part imposes, at minimum: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{forb}}\supseteq \{\ e,\ \kappa\ \},\] meaning:

  • the bare symbol \(e\) is forbidden (must be replaced by \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\), \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\), etc.);

  • the bare symbol \(\kappa\) is forbidden (must be replaced by decorated symbols such as \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\), \(\kappa_T\), etc.).

3.1.5.3 Collision repair rule (mandatory).

If a legacy source uses a forbidden symbol, every occurrence must be mapped to a canonical symbol by an explicit mapping table (see §3.7). Any unmapped occurrence is an editorial failure and blocks DERIVE claims until fixed.

3.2 3.2 The State-Variable System: Definitions of \(e\), \(\rho\), \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)

This document uses a three-phase bookkeeping system in which background capacity (stage) and actor content (stored/active) sum to unity.

3.2.1 3.2.1 Domain and primitive distribution

Let \(\Omega\subset\mathbb{R}^3\) be the spatial domain, with boundary \(\partial\Omega\) (possibly empty or at infinity). Time is \(t\in\mathbb{R}\). Introduce the kinetic primitive: \[f:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}^3\times\mathbb{R}\to [0,\infty), \qquad (x,v,t)\mapsto f(x,v,t).\] Constraint (LOCK): \(f(x,v,t)\ge 0\) for all \((x,v,t)\) in its domain.

3.2.1.1 Integrability requirement.

At any \((x,t)\) for which \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\) is defined, require \[f(x,\cdot,t)\in L^1(\mathbb{R}^3_v),\] and for defining \(\mathbf{S}\) and \(\mathbf{T}\) require additional moment integrability: \[\int_{\mathbb{R}^3}\|v\|\,f(x,v,t)\,dv<\infty, \qquad \int_{\mathbb{R}^3}\|v\|^2\,f(x,v,t)\,dv<\infty.\] These integrability assumptions are part of the regime declaration whenever invoked.

3.2.2 3.2.2 Active, stored, background, and total fractions

3.2.2.1 Active fraction (moving/transport-capable actor).

Define the active fraction as the velocity integral of \(f\): \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} f(x,v,t)\,dv.\] Dimension rule: \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is dimensionless: \[\delta(e_{\mathrm{a}})=0\in\mathrm{Dim}.\] Therefore \(f\) must have the reciprocal dimension of \(dv\): \[\delta(f) = -\delta(dv) = -3\,\delta(v),\] so that \(\delta\!\left(\int f\,dv\right)=0\). In an \(L,T\) dimension basis where \(\delta(v)=(1,-1)\), this corresponds to \(\delta(f)=(-3,3)\).

3.2.2.2 Flux (first moment).

Define the flux vector \[\mathbf{S}(x,t) := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} v\, f(x,v,t)\,dv \in \mathbb{R}^3.\] Since \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is dimensionless, \(\mathbf{S}\) has dimension of velocity: \[\delta(\mathbf{S})=\delta(v).\]

3.2.2.3 Second moment tensor.

Define the second moment tensor \[\mathbf{T}(x,t) := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} (v\otimes v)\, f(x,v,t)\,dv,\] with dimension \[\delta(\mathbf{T})=2\,\delta(v).\]

3.2.2.4 Stored fraction (locally stored actor).

Introduce a stored fraction \[\rho:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to [0,1], \qquad \rho=\rho(x,t),\] interpreted as actor content in a non-transporting (stored) state. It is dimensionless: \[\delta(\rho)=0.\]

3.2.2.5 Total actor fraction.

Define \[e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) := \rho(x,t) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad \delta(e_{\mathrm{tot}})=0.\]

3.2.2.6 Background (stage) fraction.

Define the background fraction by normalization: \[e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) := 1 - e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) = 1-\rho(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\] It is dimensionless: \[\delta(e_{\mathrm{bg}})=0.\]

3.2.3 3.2.3 Locked admissibility constraints

3.2.3.1 Pointwise bounds (LOCK).

The three-phase interpretation requires \[0\le \rho(x,t)\le 1,\qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1,\qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\le 1.\]

3.2.3.2 Normalization (LOCK).

\[e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)+\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=1 \quad \text{for all } (x,t).\]

3.2.3.3 Admissibility set.

Define \[\mathcal{S} := \Big\{ (e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\in\mathbb{R}^3: 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1,\ \ e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1 \Big\}.\] All solutions and intermediate approximations used for physical claims must remain in \(\mathcal{S}\); leaving \(\mathcal{S}\) is a FAIL unless the meaning is explicitly redefined (which requires Major version changes).

3.2.4 3.2.4 Integral ledger form (optional but consistent with notation)

Whenever the local ledger equation is used, the corresponding integral form is defined as follows. Let \(V\subseteq\Omega\) be a control volume with boundary \(\partial V\) and outward unit normal \(\mathbf{n}\). If the local balance \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = 0\] holds (under required regularity), then \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)\,dx \;+\; \int_{\partial V} \mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x)\,dA \;=\; 0.\] This formula fixes the meaning of \(\mathbf{S}\) as the flux associated with \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\).

3.3 3.3 The Separation Principle for \(\kappa\) and Other Overloaded Constants

To prevent semantic collapse, constants that appear in distinct roles must be explicitly separated by notation and by dimension. Bare symbols that historically carry multiple meanings are forbidden.

3.3.1 3.3.1 Role-based constant taxonomy

We classify constants/parameters by their role and by their dimension:

3.3.1.1 (C1) Closure constants.

Constants that appear in moment closures (e.g. relating \(\mathbf{T}\) to \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\)). Example: \[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_T\, e_{\mathrm{a}}\, \mathbf{I}.\] Here \(\kappa_T\) must have dimension of \(v^2\): \[\delta(\kappa_T)=2\,\delta(v).\]

3.3.1.2 (C2) Transport/relaxation rates.

Coefficients that damp or relax fluxes, typically with dimension \(T^{-1}\). Example (a generic relaxation form): \[\partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} = -B\,\mathbf{S} + \cdots,\] so \[\delta(B)= -\delta(t) = T^{-1}.\]

3.3.1.3 (C3) Conversion rates.

Coefficients converting between stored and active fractions, also typically with dimension \(T^{-1}\), e.g. \(\mu\).

3.3.1.4 (C4) Observable-mapping coefficients.

Coefficients mapping model variables to observational quantities. Example (optical attenuation for redshift-like mapping): \[\frac{dE}{E} = -\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\, ds,\] so \[\delta(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})=L^{-1}.\] This is dimensionally and semantically distinct from \(\kappa_T\).

3.3.1.5 (C5) Geometric or dimensionless factors.

Dimensionless constants (e.g. lattice-geometry factors) must be explicitly marked as dimensionless.

3.3.2 3.3.2 The no-bare-\(\kappa\) rule and naming convention

3.3.2.1 No-bare-\(\kappa\) (LOCK editorial rule).

The symbol \(\kappa\) without a qualifier is forbidden: \[\kappa \notin \Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}.\] Any appearance of \(\kappa\) must be rewritten as a qualified constant with a role-specific subscript: \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}},\ \kappa_T,\ \kappa_{\mathrm{lens}},\ \kappa_{\mathrm{mix}},\ \ldots\] and each must have a distinct registry entry with distinct meaning and (typically) distinct dimension.

3.3.2.2 General separation rule.

If two constants have different roles or different dimensions, they must not share the same base symbol. Formally, if constants \(c_1,c_2\in\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\) satisfy either \[\delta(c_1)\neq \delta(c_2) \quad\text{or}\quad \sigma(c_1)\neq \sigma(c_2)\ \text{(different meaning)},\] then they must be written as distinct symbols and must not be conflated by aliasing.

3.3.3 3.3.3 Example: \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) vs. \(\kappa_T\)

3.3.3.1 Optical/interaction-cost coefficient.

\[\frac{dE}{E} = -\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\, ds \quad\Longrightarrow\quad 1+z = e^{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} s}.\] Registry requirements: \[\delta(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})=L^{-1},\qquad \sigma(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})=\text{``attenuation per unit path length''}.\]

3.3.3.2 Moment-closure coefficient.

\[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_T\, e_{\mathrm{a}}\, \mathbf{I}.\] Registry requirements: \[\delta(\kappa_T)=2\,\delta(v)=L^2 T^{-2},\qquad \sigma(\kappa_T)=\text{``isotropic second-moment scale (variance-like)''}.\]

3.3.3.3 Consistency check.

If an equation uses both, dimensional analysis alone forbids identifying them: \[\delta(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})\neq \delta(\kappa_T) \quad\Rightarrow\quad \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\neq \kappa_T \quad\text{(as symbols and as meanings)}.\]

3.4 3.4 Unit Realization: Reference Volume \(v^\ast\), Length \(a\), Time Step \(\Delta t\), Speed \(c\)

This subsection defines a unit system that is compatible with the VP lattice/cell interpretation while remaining convertible to SI. The unit system fixes how dimensionless fractions and velocity-like moments are measured.

3.4.1 3.4.1 Fundamental reference scales

3.4.1.1 Reference length \(a\) (cell/lattice spacing).

Let \(a>0\) be the reference microscopic length scale (e.g. lattice spacing). Declare: \[\delta(a)=L.\]

3.4.1.2 Reference time step \(\Delta t\).

Let \(\Delta t>0\) be the reference microscopic time increment. Declare: \[\delta(\Delta t)=T.\]

3.4.1.3 Reference speed \(c\) (derived).

Define the reference speed \[c := \frac{a}{\Delta t}, \qquad \delta(c)=L\,T^{-1}.\] In later Parts, \(c\) may be interpreted as a throughput-limited characteristic speed; in this Part it is purely a unit-derived quantity.

3.4.1.4 Reference volume \(v^\ast\).

Define the reference volume by \[v^\ast := \zeta\, a^3, \qquad \delta(v^\ast)=L^3,\] where \(\zeta>0\) is a dimensionless geometry factor (e.g. \(\zeta=1\) for cubic cells). If the lattice geometry changes, \(\zeta\) must be updated, but \(\zeta\) remains dimensionless.

3.4.2 3.4.2 SI realization and conversion rules

To connect to SI, assign numerical values in SI units: \[a_{\mathrm{SI}}\ \text{(meters)},\qquad \Delta t_{\mathrm{SI}}\ \text{(seconds)}.\] Then \[c_{\mathrm{SI}} = \frac{a_{\mathrm{SI}}}{\Delta t_{\mathrm{SI}}}\ \text{(m/s)},\qquad v^\ast_{\mathrm{SI}} = \zeta\, a_{\mathrm{SI}}^3\ \text{(m$^3$)}.\] Any parameter with physical dimension must be convertible by these scales.

3.4.3 3.4.3 Dimensionless variables induced by \((a,\Delta t,c)\)

Define dimensionless coordinates and velocities: \[\hat{x} := \frac{x}{a},\qquad \hat{t} := \frac{t}{\Delta t},\qquad \hat{v} := \frac{v}{c}.\] Corresponding differential operators satisfy: \[\nabla_x = \frac{1}{a}\nabla_{\hat{x}}, \qquad \partial_t = \frac{1}{\Delta t}\partial_{\hat{t}}.\] For flux and second moment, define dimensionless versions: \[\hat{\mathbf{S}} := \frac{\mathbf{S}}{c}, \qquad \hat{\mathbf{T}} := \frac{\mathbf{T}}{c^2}.\] Since \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is dimensionless, these rescalings preserve meaning.

3.4.4 3.4.4 Unit completeness rule

A symbol is unit-complete if its registry entry includes: \[\delta(s),\quad \text{and if dimensional, a conversion to SI using } a_{\mathrm{SI}},\Delta t_{\mathrm{SI}}.\] A DERIVE claim is invalid if it uses any symbol lacking unit completeness.

3.5 3.5 Scale Hierarchy: Micro (Cell/Lattice) \(\rightarrow\) Meso (Astrophysical) \(\rightarrow\) Macro (Cosmological)

This subsection fixes the rules that connect descriptions across scales. The central concept is coarse-graining and scale separation.

3.5.1 3.5.1 Three levels of description

3.5.1.1 Micro scale.

Micro-scale variables resolve cell/lattice structure: \[\ell_{\mu} \sim a,\qquad \tau_{\mu} \sim \Delta t,\qquad v_{\mu}\sim c.\] The kinetic distribution \(f(x,v,t)\) may be interpreted as defined at micro resolution.

3.5.1.2 Meso scale.

Meso-scale variables describe environments near astrophysical objects (e.g. disk/jet regions, halos) where continuum fields vary on scales \[\ell_{\mathrm{me}} \gg a, \qquad \tau_{\mathrm{me}} \gg \Delta t.\] At this scale, coarse-grained fields (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), \(\rho\), \(\mathbf{S}\)) are treated as smooth.

3.5.1.3 Macro scale.

Macro-scale variables describe cosmological-scale behavior with characteristic scale \[\ell_{\mathrm{ma}} \gg \ell_{\mathrm{me}} \gg a, \qquad \tau_{\mathrm{ma}} \gg \tau_{\mathrm{me}} \gg \Delta t.\] At this scale, additional symmetries (statistical homogeneity/isotropy, or controlled anisotropy) may be declared as regime assumptions.

3.5.2 3.5.2 Coarse-graining operator and consistency requirements

3.5.2.1 Smoothing kernel.

Let \(W_\ell:\mathbb{R}^3\to[0,\infty)\) be a smoothing kernel with characteristic width \(\ell\), normalized by \[\int_{\mathbb{R}^3} W_\ell(r)\,dr = 1,\qquad W_\ell(r)=\ell^{-3}W_1(r/\ell).\] Define coarse-grained fields for any micro field \(q(x,t)\) by convolution: \[\overline{q}^{(\ell)}(x,t):=\int_{\mathbb{R}^3} W_\ell(x-y)\, q(y,t)\,dy.\]

3.5.2.2 Coarse-graining consistency.

A model is scale-consistent if:

  1. the coarse-grained fields remain admissible: \[(\overline{e}_{\mathrm{bg}}^{(\ell)},\overline{\rho}^{(\ell)},\overline{e}_{\mathrm{a}}^{(\ell)})\in\mathcal{S} \quad\text{for all }\ell \text{ in the declared scale range};\]

  2. the ledger form is preserved under coarse-graining up to controlled error: \[\partial_t \overline{e}_{\mathrm{tot}}^{(\ell)} + \nabla\cdot \overline{\mathbf{S}}^{(\ell)} = \mathcal{O}(\varepsilon_\ell),\] where \(\varepsilon_\ell\) quantifies unresolved subgrid contributions and must be bounded or modeled.

3.5.3 3.5.3 Scale-separation parameter and multiscale coordinates

Let \(L\) be a characteristic meso/macro length scale of variation of interest (problem-dependent). Define the small parameter \[\varepsilon := \frac{a}{L}.\] A declared continuum regime requires \(\varepsilon\ll 1\). Introduce dimensionless macro coordinates: \[X := \frac{x}{L},\qquad \tau := \frac{t}{T},\] where \(T\) is a chosen macro time scale (see §3.6). In multiscale expansions one may treat \(x\) as depending on both fast and slow variables, but any such two-timing must be explicitly declared: \[x \mapsto (x,\ X=x/L),\qquad t\mapsto(t,\ \tau=t/T).\] No implicit multiscale assumptions are allowed.

3.5.4 3.5.4 Discrete-to-continuum mapping rule (template)

If a discrete cell index \(i\) is used at micro level, with cell centers \(x_i\) and cell volume \(v^\ast\), define discrete occupancies: \[e_{\mathrm{a}}^{(i)}(t),\qquad \rho^{(i)}(t),\qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{(i)}(t)=1-\rho^{(i)}(t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}^{(i)}(t).\] A canonical continuum field associated to \(e_{\mathrm{a}}^{(i)}\) is defined by a reconstruction operator \(\mathcal{R}\): \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) := \mathcal{R}\big(\{e_{\mathrm{a}}^{(i)}(t)\}_i\big),\] for example piecewise-constant reconstruction: \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)= e_{\mathrm{a}}^{(i)}(t)\quad \text{if } x\in \text{cell } i.\] Coarse-graining then produces a smooth field. Any discrete-to-continuum choice must be recorded as SPEC.

3.6 3.6 Nondimensionalization and Scaling Parameters (Dominant-Balance and Regime Declarations)

This subsection provides a complete recipe for nondimensionalization and for declaring approximation regimes via dominant-balance arguments.

3.6.1 3.6.1 Choice of characteristic scales

Select characteristic macro scales \((L_0,T_0,c_0)\): \[L_0>0,\qquad T_0>0,\qquad c_0:=\frac{L_0}{T_0}.\] The choice must be documented for each module (e.g. \(L_0\) could be halo radius, jet radius, or cosmological distance). Define nondimensional variables: \[x = L_0 \hat{x},\qquad t = T_0 \hat{t},\qquad v = c_0 \hat{v}.\] For state variables: \[\hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}} := e_{\mathrm{a}},\qquad \hat{\rho}:=\rho,\qquad \hat{e}_{\mathrm{bg}}:=e_{\mathrm{bg}},\] since they are dimensionless.

For moments: \[\hat{\mathbf{S}} := \frac{\mathbf{S}}{c_0},\qquad \hat{\mathbf{T}} := \frac{\mathbf{T}}{c_0^2}.\] For differential operators: \[\nabla = \frac{1}{L_0}\hat{\nabla},\qquad \partial_t = \frac{1}{T_0}\partial_{\hat{t}}.\]

3.6.2 3.6.2 Dimensionless form of the ledger equation

Start with the local ledger balance \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = 0.\] Substitute the nondimensional variables: \[\frac{1}{T_0}\partial_{\hat{t}} \hat{e}_{\mathrm{tot}} + \frac{1}{L_0}\hat{\nabla}\cdot (c_0 \hat{\mathbf{S}})=0.\] Using \(c_0=L_0/T_0\): \[\partial_{\hat{t}} \hat{e}_{\mathrm{tot}} + \hat{\nabla}\cdot \hat{\mathbf{S}}=0.\] Thus the ledger equation is naturally scale-invariant in dimensionless form.

3.6.3 3.6.3 Dimensionless conversion terms and key dimensionless groups

Consider a generic conversion structure (illustrative, but dimension-complete): \[\partial_t \rho = -\mu\,\rho + \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}), \qquad \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = \mu\,\rho - \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}).\] Here \(\mu\) has dimension \(T^{-1}\). For \(\Gamma\), since it appears in \(\partial_t\rho\), it must also have dimension \(T^{-1}\). Write \[\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}})=\Gamma_0\,\widehat{\Gamma}(e_{\mathrm{a}}), \qquad \delta(\Gamma_0)=T^{-1},\] where \(\widehat{\Gamma}\) is a dimensionless function. Define dimensionless rates: \[\hat{\mu}:=\mu T_0,\qquad \hat{\Gamma}_0:=\Gamma_0 T_0.\] Then the nondimensional equations become: \[\partial_{\hat{t}}\hat{\rho} = -\hat{\mu}\,\hat{\rho} + \hat{\Gamma}_0\,\widehat{\Gamma}(\hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}}),\] \[\partial_{\hat{t}}\hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}} + \hat{\nabla}\cdot\hat{\mathbf{S}} = \hat{\mu}\,\hat{\rho} - \hat{\Gamma}_0\,\widehat{\Gamma}(\hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}}).\]

3.6.3.1 Transport vs. conversion (Damköhler-type numbers).

A conversion-to-transport comparison naturally appears as: \[\hat{\mu}=\mu T_0 = \mu \frac{L_0}{c_0}, \qquad \hat{\Gamma}_0=\Gamma_0 T_0 = \Gamma_0 \frac{L_0}{c_0}.\] Large \(\hat{\mu}\) indicates conversion dominates within one transport time \(L_0/c_0\).

3.6.4 3.6.4 Dimensionless form of a flux-relaxation closure (dimension-complete example)

A common dimension-complete transport structure uses a flux-relaxation relation: \[\partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} = -B\,\mathbf{S}, \qquad \delta(B)=T^{-1}.\] With nondimensionalization: \[\frac{c_0}{T_0}\partial_{\hat{t}}\hat{\mathbf{S}} + \frac{c_0^2}{L_0}\hat{\nabla}\cdot \hat{\mathbf{T}} = -\frac{c_0}{T_0}(B T_0)\hat{\mathbf{S}}.\] Divide by \(c_0/T_0\): \[\partial_{\hat{t}}\hat{\mathbf{S}} + \hat{\nabla}\cdot \hat{\mathbf{T}} = -\hat{B}\,\hat{\mathbf{S}}, \qquad \hat{B}:=B T_0.\]

3.6.4.1 Isotropic closure and diffusion limit (dominant balance).

Assume isotropic closure: \[\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}} \mathbf{I}, \qquad \delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2}.\] Define dimensionless closure coefficient: \[\hat{\kappa}_T:=\frac{\kappa_T}{c_0^2}.\] Then \(\hat{\mathbf{T}}=\hat{\kappa}_T \hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{I}\) and the flux equation becomes \[\partial_{\hat{t}}\hat{\mathbf{S}} + \hat{\kappa}_T \hat{\nabla}\hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}} = -\hat{B}\,\hat{\mathbf{S}}.\] In the strong-relaxation regime \[\hat{B}\gg 1,\qquad \partial_{\hat{t}}\hat{\mathbf{S}}=\mathcal{O}(1),\] dominant balance yields \[\hat{\mathbf{S}} \approx -\frac{\hat{\kappa}_T}{\hat{B}}\,\hat{\nabla}\hat{e}_{\mathrm{a}}.\] Returning to dimensional variables gives Fick-like form: \[\mathbf{S}\approx -D\,\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad D:=\frac{\kappa_T}{B}, \qquad \delta(D)=L^2T^{-1}.\] Dimensionless diffusion number: \[\hat{D}:=\frac{D T_0}{L_0^2}=\frac{\hat{\kappa}_T}{\hat{B}}.\] This makes the diffusion regime a transparent ordering statement.

3.6.5 3.6.5 Regime declarations as explicit ordering statements

A regime is declared by listing dimensionless parameters and their assumed magnitude orderings. Example regime declaration template: \[\mathcal{R}= \Big\{ \varepsilon=\frac{a}{L_0}\ll 1,\ \hat{B}\gg 1,\ \hat{\kappa}_T=\mathcal{O}(1),\ \hat{\mu}=\mathcal{O}(1),\ \hat{\Gamma}_0=\mathcal{O}(1) \Big\}.\] No derivation may use an ordering that is not explicitly declared.

3.6.6 3.6.6 Observable-mapping parameters and their nondimensionalization

Observable-mapping parameters must be dimensionally compatible with the observable definition. For the redshift-like mapping \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\, ds, \qquad \delta(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})=L^{-1},\] a natural nondimensional form is obtained by choosing a length scale \(L_0\): \[\hat{\kappa}_{\mathrm{opt}} := \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} L_0, \qquad 1+z = e^{\hat{\kappa}_{\mathrm{opt}}\hat{s}}, \quad \hat{s}:=\frac{s}{L_0}.\] This emphasizes again that \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) is an \(L^{-1}\) parameter, distinct from the closure-scale \(\kappa_T\).

3.7 3.7 Notation and Mapping Tables (Legacy\(\rightarrow\)Upgrade): Template and Procedure

This subsection specifies how to produce an auditable mapping from legacy notation to the upgraded canonical notation.

3.7.1 3.7.1 Mapping function and correctness requirements

3.7.1.1 Legacy and upgraded symbol sets.

Let \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}\) be the set of legacy symbols found in prior manuscripts. Let \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\) be the canonical set in the upgraded document.

3.7.1.2 Mapping function.

Define a mapping \[\Phi:\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}\to \big(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\cup \mathcal{E}(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}})\big),\] where \(\mathcal{E}(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}})\) denotes expressions built from canonical symbols (to allow cases where a legacy symbol maps to a composite expression).

3.7.1.3 Context-dependence policy.

If a legacy symbol is ambiguous (maps differently depending on context), then \(\Phi\) must be extended to a context-tagged mapping: \[\Phi:\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}\times \mathcal{K}\to \Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\cup \mathcal{E}(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}),\] where \(\mathcal{K}\) is a finite set of context labels (e.g. “cosmology”, “transport”, “background”). Any context-tag use must be explicitly documented. Silent context-dependent remapping is forbidden.

3.7.1.4 Mapping correctness gates (mandatory).

After applying \(\Phi\) to any legacy equation:

  1. Registry gate: all resulting symbols must be in \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{can}}\) and have entries.

  2. Dimension gate: the transformed equation must be dimensionally consistent under \(\delta\).

  3. Admissibility gate: if the equation concerns \((e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\), it must preserve membership in \(\mathcal{S}\) or explicitly state when it can be violated (which requires redefining meaning and thus a Major change).

3.7.2 3.7.2 Mandatory mapping table fields

Each mapping row must contain the following fields: \[\begin{aligned} \mathrm{MapRow} = (& s_{\mathrm{leg}},\; \Phi(s_{\mathrm{leg}}),\; \text{Legacy meaning},\; \text{Canonical meaning},\; \delta_{\mathrm{leg}},\; \delta_{\mathrm{can}},\\ & \text{Tier},\; \text{Notes},\; \text{First use},\; \text{Replacement status} ). \end{aligned}\]

If \(\delta_{\mathrm{leg}}\) is unknown because the legacy text was unit-incomplete, then the row must explicitly state “unknown” and the upgrade must assign \(\delta_{\mathrm{can}}\) and repair the legacy equation accordingly.

3.7.3 3.7.3 LaTeX template for the mapping table

A minimal LaTeX template is:

\begin{table}[t]
\centering
\caption{Legacy$\rightarrow$Upgrade Notation Mapping (template).}
\label{tab:legacy_upgrade_mapping}
\begin{tabular}{lll}
\hline
Legacy symbol & Upgrade symbol/expression & Notes (meaning/dimension/tier) \\
\hline
$e$ & $e_{\mathrm{tot}}$ or $e_{\mathrm{bg}}$ & \emph{Forbidden} legacy $e$; must disambiguate by context \\
$\kappa$ & $\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}$ or $\kappa_T$ & Split by role; check dimensions ($L^{-1}$ vs $L^2T^{-2}$) \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

This template must be expanded with the mandatory fields listed in §3.7.2 if the mapping is used for any DERIVE or gate-critical equations.

3.7.4 3.7.4 Procedure for upgrading a legacy derivation

Given a legacy derivation consisting of statements and equations: \[\mathcal{L} = \{ \ell_1,\ell_2,\dots,\ell_N\},\] the upgrade procedure is:

3.7.4.1 Step 1 (tokenization).

Extract the set of legacy symbols \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}(\mathcal{L})\subseteq\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}\).

3.7.4.2 Step 2 (registry and forbiddance check).

Identify forbidden legacy symbols: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}(\mathcal{L})\cap \Sigma_{\mathrm{forb}}.\] Every element in this intersection must be remapped; otherwise the upgrade fails.

3.7.4.3 Step 3 (define \(\Phi\) rows).

For each \(s\in\Sigma_{\mathrm{leg}}(\mathcal{L})\), define \(\Phi(s)\) (or \(\Phi(s,k)\) with context).

3.7.4.4 Step 4 (substitution).

Replace all occurrences by: \[\ell_i \mapsto \ell_i^\Phi \quad \text{(apply $\Phi$ to all symbols in $\ell_i$)}.\]

3.7.4.5 Step 5 (dimension gate).

Verify dimensional consistency of every transformed equation \(\ell_i^\Phi\) using \(\delta\).

3.7.4.6 Step 6 (semantic gate).

Verify that each transformed statement uses symbols consistent with their registry meanings \(\sigma\) and constraints.

3.7.4.7 Step 7 (claim-tier reassignment).

Assign tiers to upgraded claims:

  • if the legacy step used an unstated closure, mark it as HYP and declare the closure explicitly;

  • if the legacy step used only LOCK items and admissible inference, mark as DERIVE;

  • if the legacy step was an implementation choice, mark as SPEC.

3.7.4.8 Step 8 (archive).

Store the mapping table, transformed derivation, and dimension-check results as artifacts linked to the relevant claim identifiers.

3.7.5 3.7.5 End-of-Part checklist (mandatory)

This Part is complete only if:

  1. \(\sigma\) (injective symbol registry) and \(\delta\) (dimension registry) are defined in a usable form (§3.1–§3.1.2);

  2. reserved and forbidden sets are explicitly stated and enforced (§3.1.5);

  3. the three-phase state-variable system is defined with admissibility constraints (§3.2);

  4. the no-bare-\(\kappa\) rule and separation principle are stated with dimension checks (§3.3);

  5. unit realization and SI conversion rules are defined via \((a,\Delta t,c,v^\ast)\)3.4);

  6. the micro\(\rightarrow\)meso\(\rightarrow\)macro scale hierarchy and coarse-graining rules are defined (§3.5);

  7. nondimensionalization and regime declarations are specified with explicit dimensionless groups (§3.6);

  8. a legacy\(\rightarrow\)upgrade mapping procedure and table template are provided and gate-checked (§3.7).

4 PART 04. Primitives and Axioms (Output 4)

This Part fixes the minimal ontology (primitives) and the non-negotiable axioms used throughout the VP framework. The goal is to make every later derivation a consequence of explicitly stated objects and rules. In particular, we define: (i) the basic objects (VP, reference volume \(v^\ast\), unit axis \(k\), alignment defect \(a_k\)), (ii) the kinetic primitive \(f(x,v,t)\) and its admissibility class, (iii) the ledger axiom (control-volume conservation), (iv) the conversion axiom (stored \(\leftrightarrow\) active with \(\mu,\Gamma\)), (v) the mixing/alignment primitives \((\lambda,b,m_b)\) and their admissibility constraints, (vi) the jammed-lattice (stage) assumption and the conditions for introducing the background variable \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\), (vii) the regime conditions under which these axioms are declared to operate.

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, all definitions and axioms in this Part are LOCK items (in the sense of Part 02). Any later modification requires a Major-version change.

4.1 4.1 Basic Objects: VP, Reference Volume \(v^\ast\), Unit Axis \(k\), Alignment Defect \(a_k\)

4.1.1 4.1.1 Space–time domain and basic measurability

Let \(\Omega\subset\mathbb{R}^3\) be a spatial domain. We assume \(\Omega\) is open and that its boundary \(\partial\Omega\) is either empty (e.g. \(\Omega=\mathbb{R}^3\)) or piecewise \(C^1\) (or at least Lipschitz) so that the divergence theorem applies on admissible control volumes. Time is \(t\in\mathbb{R}\) (or \(t\in[0,T]\) for finite-time problems).

All fields introduced below are assumed measurable in \((x,t)\), and whenever differential expressions are used, the corresponding regularity assumptions are stated as part of the applicable regime (§4.7).

4.1.2 4.1.2 Volume Particle (VP) as a minimal capacity unit

4.1.2.1 Primitive object (VP).

A volume particle (VP) is the minimal capacity unit of the stage: it is not assumed to be a standard point particle, but rather the atomic unit with respect to which the model tracks occupancy fractions. The VP concept is implemented by a reference volume \(v^\ast\) and the normalization constraints on occupancy fields.

4.1.2.2 Reference volume \(v^\ast\).

Let \[v^\ast>0,\qquad \delta(v^\ast)=L^3,\] denote a fixed reference volume. In a lattice/cell realization, one may set \[v^\ast := \zeta\, a^3,\] where \(a>0\) is a reference length scale (cell spacing) and \(\zeta>0\) is a dimensionless geometric factor (e.g. \(\zeta=1\) for cubic cells). The values of \((a,\zeta)\) belong to the unit-realization infrastructure (Part 03), while \(v^\ast\) is the primitive physical reference for capacity accounting.

4.1.2.3 Capacity interpretation.

Occupancy fields in this document are dimensionless fractions of local capacity per reference volume \(v^\ast\). Thus, “\(1\)” means “full local capacity” and “\(0\)” means “no occupancy” in the relevant phase.

4.1.3 4.1.3 Unit axis \(k\)

4.1.3.1 Primitive unit axis field.

Introduce a unit vector field \[k:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to \mathbb{S}^2:=\{u\in\mathbb{R}^3:\|u\|=1\}, \qquad (x,t)\mapsto k(x,t),\] with the LOCK constraint \[\|k(x,t)\|=1 \quad \forall(x,t).\] The unit axis \(k\) represents a preferred local direction used to describe alignment-dominated regimes (e.g. channeling/jet-like transport). The origin of \(k\) (e.g. from rotation/spin or boundary geometry) is not fixed in this Part; later modules may prescribe \(k\) by additional hypotheses. In this Part, \(k\) is a primitive field used to define alignment measures and axisymmetric regimes.

4.1.4 4.1.4 Alignment defect \(a_k\)

4.1.4.1 Primitive defect quantity with canonical definition.

Introduce an alignment defect scalar field \[a_k:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to[0,1], \qquad a_k=a_k(x,t),\] interpreted as a normalized measure of how far the active phase departs from perfect alignment with the axis \(k\). The canonical definition of \(a_k\) is given in §4.5 in terms of the alignment moment \(m_b\) and the axis \(k\); here we only fix its type, range, and meaning.

4.1.4.2 Range constraint (LOCK).

\[0\le a_k(x,t)\le 1\quad \forall(x,t).\] The limiting cases have the intended interpretation:

  • \(a_k=0\): perfect alignment with \(k\) (no transverse defect),

  • \(a_k=1\): maximal transverse misalignment compatible with the bounded bias constraint (defined precisely in §4.5).

4.2 4.2 Minimal Definition of the Distribution Function \(f(x,v,t)\)

This subsection defines the kinetic primitive \(f\) and the minimal admissibility requirements needed to define macroscopic moments.

4.2.1 4.2.1 Velocity domain (support set)

Let \(\mathcal{V}\subseteq\mathbb{R}^3\) be the velocity domain. Two admissible choices are permitted:

4.2.1.1 Option A (bounded support).

There exists a finite bound \(c_{\max}>0\) such that \[\mathcal{V}=\{v\in\mathbb{R}^3:\|v\|\le c_{\max}\}.\] If the document chooses to identify \(c_{\max}\) with the unit-realization speed \(c=a/\Delta t\) (Part 03), then \(c_{\max}=c\) is treated as a LOCK identification within the declared regime.

4.2.1.2 Option B (unbounded support with finite moments).

\[\mathcal{V}=\mathbb{R}^3,\] but \(f\) must satisfy integrability conditions sufficient to define the moments used in the theory (below). In this option, any later assumption of bounded speed must be declared as a gate or additional hypothesis.

For the rest of this Part, \(\mathcal{V}\) is treated as fixed by the chosen regime; all integrals in \(v\) are over \(\mathcal{V}\) unless otherwise stated.

4.2.2 4.2.2 Kinetic primitive and positivity

4.2.2.1 Primitive distribution.

Define \[f:\Omega\times\mathcal{V}\times\mathbb{R}\to [0,\infty), \qquad (x,v,t)\mapsto f(x,v,t).\]

4.2.2.2 Positivity (LOCK).

\[f(x,v,t)\ge 0\quad \forall (x,v,t)\in\Omega\times\mathcal{V}\times\mathbb{R}.\]

4.2.3 4.2.3 Normalization and moment definitions

4.2.3.1 Active fraction (moving/transport-capable actor content).

Define \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) := \int_{\mathcal{V}} f(x,v,t)\,dv.\] This is dimensionless and interpreted as a fraction of capacity: \[\delta(e_{\mathrm{a}})=0.\]

4.2.3.2 Flux (first moment).

Define the flux vector \[\mathbf{S}(x,t) := \int_{\mathcal{V}} v\, f(x,v,t)\,dv\in\mathbb{R}^3, \qquad \delta(\mathbf{S})=LT^{-1}.\]

4.2.3.3 Second moment tensor.

Define \[\mathbf{T}(x,t) := \int_{\mathcal{V}} (v\otimes v)\, f(x,v,t)\,dv, \qquad \delta(\mathbf{T})=L^2T^{-2}.\]

4.2.3.4 Moment existence requirements (admissibility).

At each \((x,t)\) where these quantities are invoked, require: \[\int_{\mathcal{V}} f(x,v,t)\,dv<\infty,\] and additionally for \(\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T}\): \[\int_{\mathcal{V}} \|v\|\, f(x,v,t)\,dv<\infty, \qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}} \|v\|^2\, f(x,v,t)\,dv<\infty.\] These conditions are part of the regime declaration (§4.7) for any claim that uses \(\mathbf{S}\) or \(\mathbf{T}\).

4.2.3.5 Capacity bound for the active fraction (LOCK admissibility).

Because \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is a capacity fraction, we impose: \[0\le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1\quad \forall(x,t).\] This is a LOCK admissibility constraint. Any model or numerical scheme producing \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>1\) (without redefining meaning) fails the admissibility gate.

4.2.4 4.2.4 Stored fraction and background fraction

In addition to the kinetic active fraction \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), we introduce:

4.2.4.1 Stored fraction.

\[\rho:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to[0,1], \qquad \rho=\rho(x,t), \qquad \delta(\rho)=0.\]

4.2.4.2 Total actor fraction.

\[e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) := \rho(x,t) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{tot}}\le 1.\]

4.2.4.3 Background fraction (stage occupancy complement).

\[e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) := 1 - e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)=1-\rho(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\] The admissibility constraints are: \[0\le \rho(x,t)\le 1,\qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\le 1, \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1.\] These are treated as LOCK normalization/admissibility constraints.

4.3 4.3 Ledger Axiom: Control-Volume Conservation (Inflow–Outflow–Accumulation)

The ledger axiom is the core conservation principle for actor content. It is stated at the control-volume level (integral form) and then expressed locally (differential form) when regularity allows.

4.3.1 4.3.1 Control volume and boundary geometry

Let \(V\subseteq\Omega\) be any bounded control volume with Lipschitz boundary \(\partial V\) and outward unit normal \(\mathbf{n}(x)\) defined almost everywhere on \(\partial V\). Let \(dx\) denote Lebesgue volume measure and \(dA\) denote surface measure on \(\partial V\).

4.3.2 4.3.2 Ledger Axiom (integral form)

4.3.2.1 Axiom (Ledger / conservation of total actor fraction).

For every admissible control volume \(V\subseteq\Omega\) and for all times \(t\) where the integrals exist, \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)\,dx \;+\; \int_{\partial V} \mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x)\,dA \;=\; 0. \label{eq:ledger_integral}\] This expresses accumulation \(+\,\) outflow \(=0\) (no net creation of actor content).

4.3.2.2 Closed-system boundary condition (special case).

If \(\Omega\) is bounded and the system is closed, impose the no-through-flow condition: \[\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x)=0 \quad \text{for } x\in\partial\Omega,\] which implies global conservation \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_\Omega e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)\,dx = 0.\]

4.3.2.3 Open-system boundary specification (alternative).

If the system is open, then \(\mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{n}\) on \(\partial\Omega\) must be specified as a boundary input. In this case, the ledger axiom still holds on all sub-volumes \(V\), and global conservation is replaced by boundary-flux accounting.

4.3.3 4.3.3 Local (differential) form under regularity

If \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}(\cdot,t)\) is locally integrable and \(\mathbf{S}(\cdot,t)\) is locally integrable with weak divergence, then [eq:ledger_integral] is equivalent (in distributional sense) to: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t) = 0. \label{eq:ledger_local}\] If stronger smoothness holds (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\in C^1\) and \(\mathbf{S}\in C^1\)), then [eq:ledger_local] holds pointwise.

4.3.3.1 Ledger consistency with normalization.

Because \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-e_{\mathrm{tot}}\), the ledger axiom implies \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) = -\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) = \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t),\] so the background fraction changes exactly as required to maintain \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1\).

4.4 4.4 Conversion Axiom: Stored \(\leftrightarrow\) Active (Fixing the Meaning of \(\mu\) and \(\Gamma\))

The conversion axiom fixes the semantics of storage and activation and introduces the rate objects \(\mu\) and \(\Gamma\) in a ledger-consistent way.

4.4.1 4.4.1 Conversion rates and admissibility

4.4.1.1 Activation rate \(\mu\).

Introduce \[\mu:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to[0,\infty), \qquad \delta(\mu)=T^{-1}.\] \(\mu\) represents the rate of conversion from stored fraction \(\rho\) to active fraction \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

4.4.1.2 Deactivation/return rate \(\Gamma\).

Introduce a nonnegative return functional \[\Gamma:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\times[0,1]\to[0,\infty), \qquad (x,t,u)\mapsto \Gamma(x,t;u), \qquad \delta(\Gamma)=T^{-1},\] and interpret \(\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t))\) as the rate of conversion from active to stored content. We require (minimal admissibility): \[\Gamma(x,t;u)\ge 0\ \ \forall u\in[0,1],\qquad \Gamma(x,t;0)=0.\]

4.4.1.3 Optional saturation bound (admissible hypothesis class).

If saturation is imposed (often used as a gate-ready hypothesis), require: \[0\le \Gamma(x,t;u)\le \Gamma_{\max}(x,t)\quad \forall u\in[0,1],\] for some measurable \(\Gamma_{\max}\ge 0\) with \(\delta(\Gamma_{\max})=T^{-1}\). Whether saturation is required is a model choice; if used in claims, it must be declared explicitly.

4.4.2 4.4.2 Conversion Axiom (local form)

4.4.2.1 Axiom (Conversion / phase exchange without net creation).

The stored and active fractions satisfy: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho(x,t) &= -\mu(x,t)\,\rho(x,t) + \Gamma\big(x,t; e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\big), \label{eq:conversion_rho}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t) &= +\mu(x,t)\,\rho(x,t) - \Gamma\big(x,t; e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\big). \label{eq:conversion_ea}\end{aligned}\] Equations [eq:conversion_rho][eq:conversion_ea] fix the meaning and sign conventions of \(\mu\) and \(\Gamma\).

4.4.2.2 Ledger compatibility.

Summing [eq:conversion_rho] and [eq:conversion_ea] yields: \[\partial_t(\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}})+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = 0,\] which is exactly the local ledger axiom [eq:ledger_local] with \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

4.4.3 4.4.3 Conversion Axiom (integral form)

Integrating [eq:conversion_ea] over a control volume \(V\) and using the divergence theorem gives: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dx + \int_{\partial V}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA = \int_V \big(\mu\rho-\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\big)\,dx.\] Similarly, integrating [eq:conversion_rho] gives: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V \rho\,dx = \int_V \big(-\mu\rho+\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\big)\,dx.\] Adding these two equalities reproduces the integral ledger axiom [eq:ledger_integral].

4.4.4 4.4.4 Admissibility preservation (required as a gate condition)

The conversion axiom is intended to operate within the admissibility set: \[0\le \rho\le 1,\quad 0\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1,\quad 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1.\] Ensuring solutions remain admissible is part of the internal gate system. Sufficient (not necessary) structural conditions include: \[\mu\ge 0,\quad \Gamma(x,t;0)=0,\quad \Gamma(x,t;u)\ge 0,\] together with boundary conditions and regularity that prevent blow-up or negativity. If a numerical method violates these bounds, it fails the admissibility gate even if it matches external data.

4.5 4.5 Mixing/Alignment Axiom: Defining \(\lambda\), \(b(x,v,t)\), and \(m_b(x,t)\)

This subsection introduces the minimal objects needed to describe the transition between mixing-dominated (isotropic) behavior and alignment-dominated (axisymmetric) behavior.

4.5.1 4.5.1 Mixing intensity parameter \(\lambda\)

4.5.1.1 Primitive mixing intensity.

Introduce a mixing intensity field \[\lambda:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to[0,\infty), \qquad \delta(\lambda)=0,\] interpreted as a nonnegative, dimensionless measure of local mixing strength (randomization/isotropization tendency) relative to alignment tendency. Larger \(\lambda\) corresponds to stronger mixing dominance; smaller \(\lambda\) corresponds to stronger alignment dominance. The exact dynamical role of \(\lambda\) is model-dependent and is specified in later Parts (closures/regime maps), but \(\lambda\) itself is a primitive scalar field with fixed meaning and range.

4.5.1.2 Convenient bounded mixing weight.

For later use it is often convenient to define a bounded weight \[w_\lambda(x,t):=\frac{\lambda(x,t)}{1+\lambda(x,t)}\in[0,1).\] This is a deterministic re-parameterization; it does not add content, but it avoids unbounded coefficients in interpolations.

4.5.2 4.5.2 Bias function \(b(x,v,t)\) and its admissibility

4.5.2.1 Bias/orientation function.

Introduce a measurable function \[b:\Omega\times\mathcal{V}\times\mathbb{R}\to \mathbb{R}^3, \qquad (x,v,t)\mapsto b(x,v,t),\] interpreted as a bounded “orientation bias” associated to each velocity state \(v\) at position \(x\) and time \(t\).

4.5.2.2 Boundedness (LOCK admissibility).

Require \[\|b(x,v,t)\|\le 1\quad \forall(x,v,t).\] This bound is crucial: it implies that the alignment moment defined below is controlled by the active fraction \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

4.5.3 4.5.3 Alignment moment \(m_b(x,t)\)

4.5.3.1 Definition.

Define the alignment moment (a vector field) \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t):=\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,v,t)\, f(x,v,t)\,dv \in \mathbb{R}^3.\]

4.5.3.2 Bound (implied by admissibility).

By \(\|b\|\le 1\) and \(f\ge 0\), \[\|\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\| \le \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|b(x,v,t)\| f(x,v,t)\,dv \le \int_{\mathcal{V}} f(x,v,t)\,dv = e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\] Hence, whenever \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1\), we also have \(\|\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\|\le 1\).

4.5.3.3 Normalized alignment vector and degree.

When \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)>0\), define: \[\mathbf{u}_b(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}\in \mathbb{R}^3, \qquad A(x,t):=\|\mathbf{u}_b(x,t)\|=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}\in[0,1].\] When \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=0\), set \(\mathbf{u}_b(x,t):=\mathbf{0}\) and \(A(x,t):=0\) by convention.

\(A(x,t)\) is the degree of alignment of the active fraction: \(A=0\) means no net alignment; \(A=1\) means maximal alignment consistent with \(\|b\|\le 1\).

4.5.4 4.5.4 Canonical definition of the alignment defect \(a_k\)

Let \(k(x,t)\) be the unit axis field from §4.1.3. Define the parallel projection of \(\mathbf{m}_b\): \[\mathbf{m}_{\parallel}(x,t):=\big(\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)\big)\,k(x,t),\] and the transverse component: \[\mathbf{m}_{\perp}(x,t):=\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)-\mathbf{m}_{\parallel}(x,t).\]

4.5.4.1 Definition (alignment defect).

Define \[a_k(x,t):= \begin{cases} \dfrac{\|\mathbf{m}_{\perp}(x,t)\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}, & e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)>0,\\[1.2ex] 0, & e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=0. \end{cases}\] Then \(a_k(x,t)\in[0,1]\) follows from \(\|\mathbf{m}_{\perp}\|\le \|\mathbf{m}_b\|\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

4.5.4.2 Interpretation.

  • \(a_k=0\) iff \(\mathbf{m}_b\) is parallel to \(k\) (perfect axis alignment),

  • larger \(a_k\) indicates a larger transverse component of the alignment moment.

4.5.5 4.5.5 Axisymmetry and aligned-regime admissibility

Axisymmetric (alignment-dominated) regimes require additional structural assumptions connecting \(b\), \(f\), and \(k\).

4.5.5.1 Axiom (Axisymmetric admissibility under alignment).

In an alignment-dominated regime (declared explicitly in §4.7 for each claim), we require that the bias is \(k\)-aligned in the sense that there exists a measurable scalar function \(\beta(x,v,t)\) such that \[b(x,v,t)=\beta(x,v,t)\,k(x,t), \qquad \text{with}\quad |\beta(x,v,t)|\le 1.\] This implies that \(\mathbf{m}_b\) is parallel to \(k\) and therefore \(a_k=0\) in the aligned limit, while allowing partial alignment through the magnitude of \(\beta\).

4.5.5.2 Axiom (Mixing-dominated admissibility under isotropy).

In a mixing-dominated regime, the bias is required to be sufficiently isotropic so that no preferred direction is selected by \(b\) alone. A minimal mathematically explicit condition is: \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)=\mathbf{0} \quad \text{for all $(x,t)$ in the declared mixing-dominated region.}\] Equivalently, \(A(x,t)=0\) and \(a_k(x,t)=0\) there. More refined mixing closures may relax this to small-but-nonzero \(\mathbf{m}_b\) under explicit hypotheses; any such refinement is declared outside this Part as a closure hypothesis.

4.6 4.6 Jammed Lattice (Stage) Assumption and Conditions for Introducing \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)

The VP framework uses a “stage/actor” separation. The stage is assumed to be a jammed (capacity-limited) medium, which is encoded by the three-phase normalization and admissibility constraints. This subsection states the assumption and the precise conditions under which the background variable \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is meaningful.

4.6.1 4.6.1 Jammed-lattice assumption as a capacity postulate

4.6.1.1 Axiom (Finite local capacity).

At each \((x,t)\) there exists a finite local capacity per reference volume \(v^\ast\), normalized to unity, such that the phase fractions satisfy: \[e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)+\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=1, \qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1.\] This is the mathematical expression of the jammed-lattice (capacity-limited stage) assumption. It does not specify microscopic geometry beyond the existence of a fixed capacity.

4.6.1.2 Background variable introduction.

Under this capacity postulate, the background fraction is not independent; it is defined by the complement: \[e_{\mathrm{bg}}:=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}.\] Therefore \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is meaningful precisely when (i) the normalization is meaningful (capacity is well-defined) and (ii) the actor phases \((\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\) are meaningful as fractions of the same capacity.

4.6.2 4.6.2 When the stage postulate is declared to hold

Because the stage postulate is structural, we state explicit conditions under which it is invoked:

4.6.2.1 Condition (S1) Coarse-grained capacity.

There exists a coarse-graining length \(\ell\) (Part 03) such that capacity fluctuations below \(\ell\) are averaged out and the local capacity per reference volume is effectively constant. Formally, there exists \(\ell\) such that for coarse-grained fields, \[\overline{e}_{\mathrm{bg}}^{(\ell)}+\overline{\rho}^{(\ell)}+\overline{e}_{\mathrm{a}}^{(\ell)}=1,\] and each term lies in \([0,1]\).

4.6.2.2 Condition (S2) No net creation of actor content.

The ledger axiom [eq:ledger_local] applies for \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}\) in the intended regime. If a later module proposes exchange between actor and stage beyond this ledger, it must explicitly modify the ledger structure and re-declare the normalization meaning (Major change if it alters core semantics).

4.6.2.3 Condition (S3) Compatible units and dimensions.

The unit-realization \((a,\Delta t,c,v^\ast)\) is fixed and dimensionally consistent with the chosen regime (Part 03). In particular, \(e_{\mathrm{a}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) remain dimensionless fractions.

4.7 4.7 Axiom Applicability: Regime Declarations (When the Axioms “Operate”)

Axioms are not applied in a vacuum; they require regularity, integrability, and scale assumptions. This subsection defines the axiom-operating regime as an explicit checklist of conditions. Any claim that uses an axiom must declare that it is operating within a regime where these conditions hold.

4.7.1 4.7.1 The axiom-operating regime as a condition set

Define the axiom-operating regime \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{ax}}\) as the set of conditions:

4.7.1.1 (R0) Geometric regularity.

Control volumes \(V\subseteq\Omega\) used in ledger statements have Lipschitz boundaries, and the divergence theorem applies.

4.7.1.2 (R1) Kinetic admissibility.

The distribution \(f\) is measurable and satisfies \[f\ge 0,\qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}} f\,dv <\infty,\] and whenever \(\mathbf{S}\) or \(\mathbf{T}\) is used, the corresponding moment integrals are finite: \[\int_{\mathcal{V}} \|v\| f\,dv <\infty,\qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}} \|v\|^2 f\,dv <\infty.\]

4.7.1.3 (R2) Phase admissibility and normalization.

\[(e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\in\mathcal{S} \quad \text{pointwise, where}\quad \mathcal{S}:=\{(u_1,u_2,u_3)\in[0,1]^3:\ u_1+u_2+u_3=1\}.\]

4.7.1.4 (R3) Flux integrability.

\(\mathbf{S}\) is integrable enough to define boundary fluxes: \[\int_{\partial V} |\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}|\,dA <\infty\] for admissible control volumes \(V\) and times \(t\) in question.

4.7.1.5 (R4) Conversion admissibility.

\(\mu\ge 0\) is measurable with \(\delta(\mu)=T^{-1}\), and \(\Gamma(x,t;u)\ge 0\) is measurable in \((x,t)\) and measurable (or continuous) in \(u\in[0,1]\), with \(\delta(\Gamma)=T^{-1}\) and \(\Gamma(x,t;0)=0\).

4.7.1.6 (R5) Mixing/alignment admissibility.

\(\lambda\ge 0\) is measurable and dimensionless, \(k\) is measurable with \(\|k\|=1\), and \(b\) is measurable with \(\|b\|\le 1\), so that \(\mathbf{m}_b\) exists and satisfies \(\|\mathbf{m}_b\|\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

4.7.1.7 (R6) Scale separation for continuum usage (when invoked).

When continuum differential statements are used as approximations to micro dynamics, a scale-separation parameter \[\varepsilon:=\frac{a}{L}\ll 1\] must be declared (Part 03), where \(L\) is the characteristic variation scale of the fields in the claim. If no such \(L\) is declared, claims must be restricted to integral (control-volume) statements only.

4.7.2 4.7.2 Regime declaration format (mandatory for DERIVE claims)

Any DERIVE claim that uses the axioms must explicitly list a regime declaration: \[\begin{aligned} \mathcal{R} = (& \mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{ax}}\ \text{ items used},\ \text{symmetry assumptions},\ \text{boundary conditions},\\ & \text{closure choices (if any)},\ \text{ordering assumptions (if any)} ). \end{aligned}\]

A claim that omits its regime declaration is considered incomplete and is not admissible for gating.

4.7.3 4.7.3 End-of-Part checklist (mandatory)

This Part is complete only if:

  1. VP, \(v^\ast\), \(k\), and \(a_k\) are defined with domains and admissibility ranges (§4.1);

  2. the kinetic primitive \(f\) is defined with support options, positivity, normalization, and moment existence conditions (§4.2);

  3. the ledger axiom is stated in integral form and linked to a local form under explicit regularity (§4.3);

  4. the conversion axiom fixes the meaning and sign conventions of \(\mu\) and \(\Gamma\) and is proven ledger-consistent (§4.4);

  5. mixing/alignment objects \(\lambda\), \(b\), \(m_b\) are defined with bounds, and \(a_k\) is given a canonical formula (§4.5);

  6. the jammed-lattice (stage) assumption is stated as a capacity postulate with explicit conditions for introducing \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)4.6);

  7. the axiom-operating regime \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{ax}}\) is explicitly enumerated and required for any derivation (§4.7).

5 PART 05. State Variables, Moments, and Physical Meaning (Output 5)

This Part consolidates the state variables, moment definitions, and their physical meanings into a single, audit-ready block. It also fixes sign/units conventions, standard boundary/source term templates, and the canonical bookkeeping placement (and sign) of any “energy–volume exchange” term. Finally, it lists minimal physical constraints and gate-ready candidate bounds.

All statements in this Part are intended to be compatible with PART 03–04:

  • three-phase normalization (stage/actor bookkeeping),

  • kinetic primitive \(f(x,v,t)\ge 0\) and moment definitions,

  • ledger axiom in control-volume form,

  • conversion axiom (stored \(\leftrightarrow\) active),

  • mixing/alignment objects \((\lambda,b,\mathbf{m}_b,k,a_k)\).

Whenever optional constraints are introduced, they are clearly marked as candidates (to be treated as HYP or gate conditions in later Parts), not as automatic axioms.

5.1 5.1 Three-phase decomposition: stored \(\rho\) / active \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) / background \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) (normalization rule)

5.1.1 5.1.1 State vector and admissible simplex

At each space–time point \((x,t)\in\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\) we define the three-phase state vector \[\mathbf{e}(x,t) := \big(e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t),\ \rho(x,t),\ e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\big)\in\mathbb{R}^3.\] The admissible set (capacity simplex) is \[\mathcal{S} := \Big\{ (u_1,u_2,u_3)\in\mathbb{R}^3: 0\le u_1,u_2,u_3\le 1,\ \ u_1+u_2+u_3=1 \Big\}.\] Normalization/Capacity rule (LOCK infrastructure). \[\mathbf{e}(x,t)\in\mathcal{S}\quad \text{for all }(x,t)\text{ in the declared validity domain.}\] This is the mathematical encoding of “finite local capacity (jammed stage)”.

5.1.2 5.1.2 Stored fraction, active fraction, total actor fraction, and background fraction

5.1.2.1 Stored fraction (stored actor content).

\[\rho:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to[0,1],\qquad \rho=\rho(x,t).\]

5.1.2.2 Active fraction (moving/transport-capable actor content).

The active fraction is defined kinetically as the zeroth velocity moment of the distribution \(f\): \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) := \int_{\mathcal{V}} f(x,v,t)\,dv, \qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1.\]

5.1.2.3 Total actor fraction.

\[e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) := \rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)\le 1.\]

5.1.2.4 Background fraction (stage complement).

\[e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) := 1-e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)=1-\rho(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\le 1.\] Thus \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is a defined quantity once \((\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\) are known, but it is still convenient to treat it as a state component because it appears in constraints and (in later Parts) may gate regime transitions.

5.1.3 5.1.3 Interpretation and bookkeeping invariants

5.1.3.1 Interpretation (informal but fixed).

  • \(\rho\) measures actor content that is stored (non-transporting at the continuum level).

  • \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) measures actor content that is active (transport-capable) and is represented kinetically by \(f\).

  • \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) measures remaining background/stage capacity fraction (the complement to unity).

5.1.3.2 Bookkeeping invariants (must be preserved).

\[e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1, \qquad e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-e_{\mathrm{tot}}.\] Any model closure or numerical method must preserve these identities (at least within declared tolerances); otherwise it fails the admissibility gate.

5.2 5.2 Moment definitions: \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), \(\mathbf{S}\) (flux), \(\mathbf{T}\) (tensor) and sign/dimension conventions

5.2.1 5.2.1 Kinetic primitive, velocity domain, and admissibility

Let \(\mathcal{V}\subseteq\mathbb{R}^3\) be the velocity domain (bounded or unbounded, as declared by regime). The kinetic primitive is \[f:\Omega\times\mathcal{V}\times\mathbb{R}\to[0,\infty).\] Positivity (LOCK admissibility): \(f\ge 0\).

Moment existence requirements (whenever moments are used): \[\int_{\mathcal{V}} f\,dv<\infty,\qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\|\,f\,dv<\infty,\qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\|^2\,f\,dv<\infty.\] The first integral defines \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), the second defines \(\mathbf{S}\), and the third defines \(\mathbf{T}\).

5.2.2 5.2.2 Zeroth, first, and second moments

5.2.2.1 Zeroth moment: active fraction.

\[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t):=\int_{\mathcal{V}} f(x,v,t)\,dv.\]

5.2.2.2 First moment: flux vector.

\[\mathbf{S}(x,t):=\int_{\mathcal{V}} v\,f(x,v,t)\,dv \in \mathbb{R}^3.\] \(\mathbf{S}\) is the canonical actor flux associated with the total actor content (see §5.2.4).

5.2.2.3 Second moment: transport tensor.

\[\mathbf{T}(x,t):=\int_{\mathcal{V}} (v\otimes v)\,f(x,v,t)\,dv.\] \(\mathbf{T}\) is a symmetric, positive semidefinite tensor whenever the integral exists (see §5.2.6).

5.2.3 5.2.3 Dimension conventions

State fractions are dimensionless: \[\delta(e_{\mathrm{a}})=\delta(\rho)=\delta(e_{\mathrm{bg}})=\delta(e_{\mathrm{tot}})=0.\] Let velocity have dimension \(\delta(v)=LT^{-1}\). Then the moment dimensions are: \[\delta(\mathbf{S})=\delta(v)=LT^{-1},\qquad \delta(\mathbf{T})=2\,\delta(v)=L^2T^{-2}.\] If a reference speed \(c\) exists (Part 03), define dimensionless moments \[\hat{\mathbf{S}}:=\frac{\mathbf{S}}{c},\qquad \hat{\mathbf{T}}:=\frac{\mathbf{T}}{c^2}.\] These are dimensionless and useful for regime comparisons.

5.2.4 5.2.4 Sign conventions and the meaning of “inflow/outflow”

Let \(V\subseteq\Omega\) be a control volume with outward unit normal \(\mathbf{n}\) on \(\partial V\).

5.2.4.1 Outward flux is positive.

The boundary flux of actor content is \[\int_{\partial V} \mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA.\] By convention:

  • \(\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}>0\) contributes to outflow from \(V\),

  • \(\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}<0\) contributes to inflow into \(V\).

5.2.4.2 Inflow/outflow decomposition (useful identity).

Define pointwise on \(\partial V\): \[(\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n})_{+}:=\max(\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n},0), \qquad (\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n})_{-}:=\max(-\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n},0).\] Then \[\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n} = (\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n})_{+} - (\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n})_{-},\] and the net outward flux equals outflow minus inflow.

5.2.5 5.2.5 Derived mean velocity and covariance-like tensor

When \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)>0\), define the mean (drift) velocity \[\mathbf{u}(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{S}(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}.\] If \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=0\), set \(\mathbf{u}(x,t):=\mathbf{0}\) by convention.

Define a covariance-like tensor (second central moment per unit active fraction): \[\boldsymbol{\Sigma}(x,t) := \frac{1}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}\mathbf{T}(x,t) - \mathbf{u}(x,t)\otimes \mathbf{u}(x,t), \qquad (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0).\] This object is positive semidefinite (see §5.2.6) and measures the spread of the velocity distribution around the drift.

5.2.6 5.2.6 Tensor properties and inequalities (gate-ready)

5.2.6.1 Symmetry and positive semidefiniteness.

For any \(\xi\in\mathbb{R}^3\), \[\xi^\top \mathbf{T}(x,t)\,\xi = \int_{\mathcal{V}} (\xi\cdot v)^2\, f(x,v,t)\,dv \ \ge\ 0,\] so \(\mathbf{T}(x,t)\) is symmetric and positive semidefinite.

5.2.6.2 Cauchy–Schwarz inequality for the flux.

Using \(f\ge 0\), \[\|\mathbf{S}\|^2 = \Big\|\int_{\mathcal{V}} v f\,dv\Big\|^2 \le \Big(\int_{\mathcal{V}} f\,dv\Big)\Big(\int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\|^2 f\,dv\Big) = e_{\mathrm{a}}\ \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T}),\] where \[\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})=\int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\|^2 f\,dv.\] Equivalently, \[\|\mathbf{u}\|^2 \le \frac{\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\quad (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0).\]

5.2.6.3 Positive semidefiniteness of the covariance tensor.

For any \(\xi\in\mathbb{R}^3\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\), \[\xi^\top \boldsymbol{\Sigma}\,\xi = \frac{1}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\int_{\mathcal{V}} \big(\xi\cdot (v-\mathbf{u})\big)^2 f\,dv \ \ge\ 0,\] so \(\boldsymbol{\Sigma}\succeq 0\).

5.2.6.4 Bounded-speed consequences (candidate constraint, if \(\mathcal{V}\) is bounded).

If the regime assumes \(\|v\|\le c_{\max}\) for all \(v\in\mathcal{V}\), then: \[\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\| \le \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\| f\,dv \le c_{\max}\int_{\mathcal{V}} f\,dv = c_{\max} e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t),\] and \[\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})(x,t) = \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\|^2 f\,dv \le c_{\max}^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\] Moreover, in positive semidefinite order, \[\mathbf{T}(x,t) = \int_{\mathcal{V}} (v\otimes v)\,f\,dv \preceq \int_{\mathcal{V}} \|v\|^2 \mathbf{I}\,f\,dv \preceq c_{\max}^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,\mathbf{I}.\] If additionally one identifies \(c_{\max}=c\) (Part 03), then the strongest bound becomes the canonical “flux limit” \[\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c\, e_{\mathrm{a}}.\]

5.3 5.3 Alignment moment: \(b\), \(\mathbf{m}_b\) and relation to axis \(k\) (axisymmetry condition)

5.3.1 5.3.1 Bias/orientation function and alignment moment

Let \[b:\Omega\times\mathcal{V}\times\mathbb{R}\to\mathbb{R}^3\] be a measurable bias/orientation function satisfying the admissibility bound \[\|b(x,v,t)\|\le 1\quad \forall(x,v,t).\] Define the alignment moment (vector field) \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t):=\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,v,t)\, f(x,v,t)\,dv \in \mathbb{R}^3.\]

5.3.2 5.3.2 Fundamental bound and normalized alignment

Because \(f\ge 0\) and \(\|b\|\le 1\), \[\|\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\| \le \int_{\mathcal{V}} \|b\| f\,dv \le \int_{\mathcal{V}} f\,dv = e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\] Hence the normalized alignment vector (for \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\)) \[\mathbf{u}_b(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}\] satisfies \(\|\mathbf{u}_b(x,t)\|\le 1\). Define the alignment degree \[A(x,t):=\|\mathbf{u}_b(x,t)\|\in[0,1].\] If \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=0\), set \(\mathbf{u}_b:=\mathbf{0}\) and \(A:=0\).

5.3.3 5.3.3 Unit axis \(k\) and axis-parallel / transverse decompositions

Let \(k(x,t)\in\mathbb{S}^2\) be the unit axis field: \[\|k(x,t)\|=1.\] Define the axis-parallel alignment component (scalar and vector): \[\xi(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}\in[-1,1]\quad (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0),\] \[\mathbf{m}_{\parallel}(x,t):=\big(\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)\big)\,k(x,t), \qquad \mathbf{m}_{\perp}(x,t):=\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)-\mathbf{m}_{\parallel}(x,t).\]

5.3.3.1 Alignment defect.

Define the transverse (axis-misalignment) defect: \[a_k(x,t):= \begin{cases} \dfrac{\|\mathbf{m}_{\perp}(x,t)\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}, & e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)>0,\\[1.0ex] 0, & e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=0. \end{cases}\] Then \(a_k(x,t)\in[0,1]\).

5.3.3.2 Pythagorean relation (normalized).

For \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\), let \(\mathbf{u}_b=\mathbf{m}_b/e_{\mathrm{a}}\). Decompose \[\mathbf{u}_b = (\mathbf{u}_b\cdot k)\,k + \big(\mathbf{u}_b-(\mathbf{u}_b\cdot k)\,k\big).\] Then \[A(x,t)^2 = \|\mathbf{u}_b(x,t)\|^2 = \underbrace{(\mathbf{u}_b\cdot k)^2}_{=\xi(x,t)^2} + \underbrace{\|\mathbf{u}_b-(\mathbf{u}_b\cdot k)\,k\|^2}_{=a_k(x,t)^2},\] so \[A^2 = \xi^2 + a_k^2\qquad (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0).\] This relation is useful as an internal consistency gate.

5.3.4 5.3.4 Axisymmetry (aligned) condition and mixing-dominated condition

5.3.4.1 Axisymmetry/alignment condition (canonical form).

In an aligned (axisymmetric) regime, require that there exists a scalar \(\beta(x,v,t)\) such that \[b(x,v,t)=\beta(x,v,t)\,k(x,t), \qquad |\beta(x,v,t)|\le 1.\] Then \(\mathbf{m}_b\) is parallel to \(k\) and thus \[a_k(x,t)=0, \qquad A(x,t)=|\xi(x,t)|.\]

5.3.4.2 Mixing-dominated (isotropic) condition (minimal form).

In a strongly mixing-dominated regime, impose \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)=\mathbf{0},\] so that \[A(x,t)=0,\qquad \xi(x,t)=0,\qquad a_k(x,t)=0.\] Any weaker mixing statement (e.g. “\(\|\mathbf{m}_b\|\) is small but nonzero”) must be declared explicitly as a hypothesis and must be gated quantitatively (thresholds fixed by pre-registration).

5.4 5.4 Boundary and source terms: standard forms for inflow/outflow/reaction (reactor) terms

This subsection defines a standard accounting template for adding boundary conditions and source/reaction terms while maintaining clear sign conventions and compatibility with the ledger structure.

5.4.1 5.4.1 Generic control-volume balance template

Let \(q(x,t)\) be any scalar state density (dimensionless fraction or dimensional density) with associated flux \(\mathbf{J}_q(x,t)\) and volumetric source (reactor term) \(R_q(x,t)\). The canonical balance law is:

5.4.1.1 Integral (control-volume) form.

For any control volume \(V\subseteq\Omega\), \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V q(x,t)\,dx \;+\; \int_{\partial V} \mathbf{J}_q(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x)\,dA \;=\; \int_V R_q(x,t)\,dx. \label{eq:generic_balance_integral}\] Here \(\mathbf{J}_q\cdot\mathbf{n}>0\) counts as outward flux (loss from \(V\)), consistent with §5.2.4.

5.4.1.2 Local (differential) form (under regularity).

If \(q\) and \(\mathbf{J}_q\) have sufficient regularity, [eq:generic_balance_integral] corresponds to \[\partial_t q(x,t) + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{J}_q(x,t) = R_q(x,t) \label{eq:generic_balance_local}\] in the appropriate weak/strong sense.

5.4.2 5.4.2 Reactor term standard form: production minus destruction

A standard, gate-friendly decomposition of a reactor term is: \[R_q(x,t) = P_q(x,t) - D_q(x,t)\,q(x,t),\] where \[P_q(x,t)\ge 0,\qquad D_q(x,t)\ge 0.\] This form makes sign and admissibility checks transparent:

  • at \(q=0\), the destruction term vanishes and \(R_q=P_q\ge 0\) (inward-pointing at the nonnegativity boundary);

  • if additionally \(P_q\) is bounded, it prevents uncontrolled blow-up from pure production.

Whether such a decomposition is physically intended is model-dependent; when used, it should be declared as a hypothesis and gated.

5.4.3 5.4.3 Phase balances with conversion (canonical bookkeeping)

The conversion axiom provides the canonical “reactor” structure for \(\rho\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\): \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\,\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}) + R_{\rho}^{\mathrm{ext}}, \label{eq:rho_with_ext}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= +\mu\,\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}) + R_{\mathrm{a}}^{\mathrm{ext}}, \label{eq:ea_with_ext}\end{aligned}\] where \(R_{\rho}^{\mathrm{ext}}\) and \(R_{\mathrm{a}}^{\mathrm{ext}}\) represent any external or non-conversion volumetric sources/sinks.

Summing yields the total actor balance: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = R_{\mathrm{tot}}^{\mathrm{ext}}, \qquad R_{\mathrm{tot}}^{\mathrm{ext}}:=R_{\rho}^{\mathrm{ext}}+R_{\mathrm{a}}^{\mathrm{ext}}. \label{eq:etot_with_ext}\] The ledger axiom (closed actor bookkeeping) corresponds to the special case \[R_{\mathrm{tot}}^{\mathrm{ext}}=0.\] Any nonzero \(R_{\mathrm{tot}}^{\mathrm{ext}}\) must be declared explicitly as an extension and must be gated (because it changes the core conservation statement).

5.4.4 5.4.4 Boundary conditions: macroscopic flux prescription

At the macroscopic level, the most direct boundary input is the normal flux: \[\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x)\quad \text{for }x\in\partial\Omega.\] Common boundary condition types:

5.4.4.1 (BC1) No-through-flow (closed boundary).

\[\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=0\quad \text{on }\partial\Omega.\]

5.4.4.2 (BC2) Prescribed normal flux (Neumann-type).

\[\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=s_N(x,t)\quad \text{on }\partial\Omega,\] where \(s_N\) is a given function (positive = net outflow, negative = net inflow).

5.4.4.3 (BC3) Mixed/feedback flux.

\[\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=F\big(x,t;\mathbf{e}(x,t)\big) \quad \text{on }\partial\Omega,\] with \(F\) declared as a hypothesis/implementation choice and gated.

5.4.5 5.4.5 Boundary conditions: kinetic inflow/outflow specification

If the kinetic primitive \(f\) is evolved (later Parts), boundary conditions are naturally specified on phase-space inflow sets. Let \(\mathbf{n}(x)\) be the outward normal at \(x\in\partial\Omega\). Define: \[\Gamma_{-}:=\{(x,v)\in\partial\Omega\times\mathcal{V}: v\cdot\mathbf{n}(x)<0\}\quad \text{(inflow)},\] \[\Gamma_{+}:=\{(x,v)\in\partial\Omega\times\mathcal{V}: v\cdot\mathbf{n}(x)>0\}\quad \text{(outflow)}.\] A standard kinetic boundary condition is: \[f(x,v,t)=f_{\mathrm{in}}(x,v,t)\quad \text{for }(x,v)\in\Gamma_{-}.\] The corresponding macroscopic normal flux is then: \[\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot\mathbf{n}(x) = \int_{\mathcal{V}} (v\cdot\mathbf{n}(x))\, f(x,v,t)\,dv.\] This formula makes the macro/kinetic boundary accounting consistent.

5.5 5.5 Placement of the “energy–volume exchange” term in the ledger (which equation, which sign)

This subsection fixes a bookkeeping convention for any term that represents an exchange between the stage/background and the actor phases driven by an energy-like mechanism. The convention is purely about placement and sign. Whether such a term exists (nonzero) is a separate hypothesis.

Because the framework uses two logically distinct accountings,

  • (i) occupancy ledger for dimensionless capacity fractions \((e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\),

  • (ii) energy (or other extensive) ledger for an energy-like quantity (introduced below as a template),

we distinguish two canonical types of exchange:

  1. Type V: exchange that changes occupancy fractions (actor \(\leftrightarrow\) background capacity transfer);

  2. Type E: exchange that changes energy content without changing occupancy fractions (energy transfer actor \(\leftrightarrow\) background).

Both must be sign-consistent and ledger-consistent.

5.5.1 5.5.1 Type V: occupancy exchange term \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) (fraction-per-time source)

Introduce a scalar source term \[\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}:\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\to\mathbb{R}, \qquad \delta(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}})=T^{-1},\] interpreted as the net rate of transfer between background capacity and actor capacity.

5.5.1.1 Sign convention (canonical).

  • \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t)>0\): background capacity is converted into actor capacity (stage \(\rightarrow\) actor),

  • \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t)<0\): actor capacity is absorbed into background (actor \(\rightarrow\) stage).

This sign convention is locked as a bookkeeping rule.

5.5.1.2 Canonical placement in the actor ledger.

The total actor fraction equation becomes \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t) + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t) = \Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t). \label{eq:etot_with_Xi}\] Equivalently, in control-volume form: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V e_{\mathrm{tot}}\,dx + \int_{\partial V}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA = \int_V \Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\,dx.\] Setting \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\equiv 0\) recovers the closed actor ledger axiom.

5.5.1.3 Canonical induced placement in the background equation.

Since \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-e_{\mathrm{tot}}\), [eq:etot_with_Xi] implies \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) = \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t) - \Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t). \label{eq:ebg_with_Xi}\] This is not an independent postulate; it is the bookkeeping identity required by normalization.

5.5.1.4 How \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) splits between stored and active (optional split parameter).

If one needs a canonical split of \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) between \(\rho\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\), introduce a split weight \[\eta(x,t)\in[0,1]\] and place the terms as: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}) + (1-\eta)\,\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}, \label{eq:rho_with_Xi}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= +\mu\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}) + \eta\,\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}. \label{eq:ea_with_Xi}\end{aligned}\] Then summing [eq:rho_with_Xi] and [eq:ea_with_Xi] reproduces [eq:etot_with_Xi], and using \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}\) reproduces [eq:ebg_with_Xi]. The choice of \(\eta\) is HYP (or SPEC if purely algorithmic) and must be declared and gated if it affects predictions.

5.5.2 5.5.2 Type E: energy transfer term \(Q_{\mathrm{EV}}\) (energy-per-volume-per-time source)

Separately from occupancy, one may need an energy-like ledger. Introduce an energy density (or any extensive density) decomposed by phase: \[u_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t),\quad u_{\rho}(x,t),\quad u_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t),\] with total \[u_{\mathrm{tot}}:=u_{\mathrm{a}}+u_{\rho}+u_{\mathrm{bg}}.\] (Here \(u\) can be physical energy density, or a dimensionless energy proxy times a reference density; the bookkeeping below is dimension-agnostic as long as units are consistent.)

Let \(\mathbf{J}_u\) denote the energy flux (or extensive flux). A generic local energy balance template is: \[\partial_t u_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{J}_u = R_u^{\mathrm{ext}}.\] Now define the energy–volume exchange transfer term \[Q_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t),\] with the canonical sign convention:

  • \(Q_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t)>0\): energy flows from actor to background (actor \(\rightarrow\) stage),

  • \(Q_{\mathrm{EV}}(x,t)<0\): energy flows from background to actor (stage \(\rightarrow\) actor).

5.5.2.1 Canonical placement (phase-resolved).

A standard placement consistent with the sign convention is: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t u_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{J}_{u,\mathrm{a}} &= \cdots - Q_{\mathrm{EV}} + \cdots, \label{eq:ua_with_Q}\\ \partial_t u_{\mathrm{bg}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{J}_{u,\mathrm{bg}} &= \cdots + Q_{\mathrm{EV}} + \cdots, \label{eq:ubg_with_Q}\end{aligned}\] so that (ignoring other terms) the exchange cancels in the total: \[(\partial_t u_{\mathrm{a}}+\partial_t u_{\mathrm{bg}})+\nabla\cdot(\mathbf{J}_{u,\mathrm{a}}+\mathbf{J}_{u,\mathrm{bg}})=0.\] If the background is assumed non-transporting in energy, one may set \(\mathbf{J}_{u,\mathrm{bg}}=\mathbf{0}\) as a modeling choice; this must be declared.

5.5.2.2 Relationship between Type V and Type E (optional coupling).

If occupancy exchange \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) carries an energy cost/credit \(\chi(x,t)\) (energy per unit occupancy fraction), a consistent coupling is: \[Q_{\mathrm{EV}} = \chi(x,t)\,\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}.\] Then \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}>0\) (stage\(\rightarrow\)actor) corresponds to \(Q_{\mathrm{EV}}<0\) if \(\chi>0\) and the actor must receive energy to create actor capacity; conversely \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}<0\) corresponds to \(Q_{\mathrm{EV}}>0\) if actor capacity is absorbed and releases energy to the stage. Which of these couplings is physically intended is a hypothesis, but the sign logic must be consistent with the above conventions.

5.5.2.3 Critical bookkeeping rule.

Type E terms must not be placed in the occupancy ledger unless they truly change occupancy fractions. Energy loss (e.g. attenuation/redshift-like effects) that does not change the amount of actor capacity is a Type E term and belongs in energy equations only. Conversely, any mechanism that changes \((e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\) must appear as a Type V term (or within conversion terms) and must preserve normalization.

5.6 5.6 Minimal physical constraints: positivity / upper/lower bounds / candidate speed and flux limits

This subsection collects the minimal constraints that define physically admissible states and lists common gate-ready candidate bounds. Items marked “candidate” are not automatic axioms unless explicitly elevated; they are recommended gates.

5.6.1 5.6.1 Positivity and simplex admissibility (hard constraints)

5.6.1.1 Kinetic positivity.

\[f(x,v,t)\ge 0.\]

5.6.1.2 Phase bounds and normalization.

\[0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\le 1,\quad 0\le \rho(x,t)\le 1,\quad 0\le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1, \quad e_{\mathrm{bg}}+\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}=1.\] Equivalently, \(\mathbf{e}(x,t)\in\mathcal{S}\).

5.6.1.3 Conversion nonnegativity constraints (for inward-pointing dynamics).

\[\mu(x,t)\ge 0,\qquad \Gamma(x,t;u)\ge 0,\qquad \Gamma(x,t;0)=0.\] These are minimal for preventing the conversion terms from forcing negativity at the boundaries \(\rho=0\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}=0\).

5.6.2 5.6.2 Moment existence and tensor positivity (hard constraints)

5.6.2.1 Finite-moment requirements.

Whenever used, require: \[\int_{\mathcal{V}} f\,dv<\infty,\qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\| f\,dv<\infty,\qquad \int_{\mathcal{V}}\|v\|^2 f\,dv<\infty.\]

5.6.2.2 Transport tensor positivity.

\[\mathbf{T}(x,t)\succeq 0.\] This is automatically true if \(\mathbf{T}\) is defined as a velocity second moment of a nonnegative \(f\), but it becomes a nontrivial gate when closures approximate \(\mathbf{T}\).

5.6.2.3 Covariance positivity.

For \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\), \[\boldsymbol{\Sigma}=\frac{\mathbf{T}}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}-\mathbf{u}\otimes\mathbf{u}\succeq 0.\] This is a strong internal-consistency gate for closure models.

5.6.3 5.6.3 Candidate speed limits (regime-level constraints)

5.6.3.1 Candidate A (bounded support).

Assume \(\mathcal{V}\) is bounded: \[\mathcal{V}\subseteq \{v:\|v\|\le c_{\max}\}.\] Then signal/transport speed is bounded by \(c_{\max}\) at the kinetic level. If the model identifies \(c_{\max}=c=a/\Delta t\), this identification must be declared in the regime.

5.6.3.2 Candidate B (bounded mean speed).

If unbounded \(\mathcal{V}\) is used, one may impose a gate on the mean speed: \[\|\mathbf{u}(x,t)\|=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)} \le c_{\mathrm{eff}}(x,t),\] where \(c_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is a declared effective bound. This is a closure/gate choice, not an automatic consequence.

5.6.4 5.6.4 Candidate flux limits (directly gateable)

5.6.4.1 Flux bound from bounded support (candidate).

If \(\|v\|\le c_{\max}\) holds in the regime, then \[\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c_{\max}\,e_{\mathrm{a}}.\] In dimensionless units where \(c_{\max}=1\), this reads \(\|\hat{\mathbf{S}}\|\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

5.6.4.2 Flux bound from second moment (always valid when moments exist).

Even without bounded support, the Cauchy–Schwarz inequality yields: \[\|\mathbf{S}\|^2 \le e_{\mathrm{a}}\ \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T}).\] This inequality is useful for gating approximate closures: if a closure predicts \((e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T})\) that violates this inequality, it cannot correspond to any nonnegative distribution \(f\).

5.6.5 5.6.5 Candidate admissibility constraints for alignment objects

5.6.5.1 Bias bound (hard admissibility).

\[\|b(x,v,t)\|\le 1.\]

5.6.5.2 Alignment moment bound (implied gate).

\[\|\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\|\le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t).\]

5.6.5.3 Normalized alignment bounds.

For \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\): \[A(x,t)=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\in[0,1], \qquad \xi(x,t)=\frac{\mathbf{m}_b\cdot k}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\in[-1,1], \qquad a_k(x,t)\in[0,1], \qquad A^2=\xi^2+a_k^2.\] Any closure or numerical approximation that violates these bounds fails internal consistency.

5.6.6 5.6.6 Candidate constraints for occupancy exchange \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) (if used)

If a Type V occupancy exchange \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) is introduced, it must not drive the state outside \(\mathcal{S}\). A gate-ready sufficient condition (not necessary) can be formulated as an inward-pointing condition on the simplex faces. For example, ignoring transport for the moment and focusing on local reaction structure, require: \[\rho=0\ \Rightarrow\ \partial_t\rho\ge 0,\qquad e_{\mathrm{a}}=0\ \Rightarrow\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}\ge 0,\qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}=0\ \Rightarrow\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}}\ge 0,\] with \(\partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}}=\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}-\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) and \(\partial_t\rho,\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}\) given by [eq:rho_with_Xi][eq:ea_with_Xi]. Enforcing such conditions may require additional restrictions on \(\Xi_{\mathrm{EV}}\) (e.g. saturations) and/or boundary conditions; any such restrictions are hypotheses that must be declared and gated.

5.6.7 5.6.7 End-of-Part checklist (mandatory)

This Part is complete only if:

  1. the three-phase decomposition \((e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\) is defined and constrained by the simplex \(\mathcal{S}\) with explicit normalization (§5.1);

  2. moments \(e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T}\) are defined from \(f\) with sign conventions and dimension rules fixed (§5.2);

  3. derived quantities \(\mathbf{u}\) and \(\boldsymbol{\Sigma}\) are defined and their positivity/inequalities are stated as internal-consistency gates (§5.2.6);

  4. alignment objects \(b,\mathbf{m}_b,k\) and the axisymmetry relations (including \(a_k\) and \(A^2=\xi^2+a_k^2\)) are defined (§5.3);

  5. standard boundary/source term templates are given for both macroscopic and kinetic forms, with explicit inflow/outflow sign conventions (§5.4);

  6. the canonical placement and sign conventions for “energy–volume exchange” are fixed for both Type V (occupancy exchange) and Type E (energy-only exchange) (§5.5);

  7. minimal physical constraints and candidate speed/flux limits are listed in a gate-ready form (§5.6).

6 PART 06. Core Equations and 1:1 Mapping (Output 6)

This Part specifies the core equation set that every later module must map onto, and it fixes a strict 1:1 correspondence between (i) the legacy mathematical core (often written with overloaded symbols) and (ii) the upgraded meaning layer built in PART 03–05. The objective is to make the theory auditable: every equation has (a) a precise state-variable meaning, (b) a sign convention, (c) a dimensional statement, (d) an explicit closure/truncation location, and (e) a regime declaration under which it is asserted.

Throughout, we assume the primitives and admissibility constraints of PART 04 and the state/moment conventions of PART 05: \[e_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}},\qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}:=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad f\ge 0,\qquad (e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\in\mathcal{S}.\] The canonical moments are \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=\int_{\mathcal{V}} f(x,v,t)\,dv,\quad \mathbf{S}(x,t)=\int_{\mathcal{V}} v f(x,v,t)\,dv,\quad \mathbf{T}(x,t)=\int_{\mathcal{V}} (v\otimes v) f(x,v,t)\,dv,\] and the sign convention for control-volume flux is outward-positive: \[\int_{\partial V}\mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA \ \text{counts net outflow.}\]

6.1 6.1 Role of the continuity equation \(\partial_t e+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0\) (theorem \(\rightarrow\) principle)

6.1.1 6.1.1 The upgraded canonical continuity equation

In the upgraded notation, the continuity equation is not written with a bare \(e\) (bare \(e\) is forbidden by PART 03). The canonical actor-continuity equation is: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t)=0. \label{eq:core_continuity_etot}\] This is the local (differential) form of the integral Ledger Axiom (PART 04) and therefore belongs to the LOCK infrastructure when the regularity assumptions needed for the local form are satisfied.

If external volumetric sources/sinks of total actor content are explicitly introduced (extension), the canonical extended form is: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}=R_{\mathrm{tot}}^{\mathrm{ext}}, \label{eq:core_continuity_etot_ext}\] with \(R_{\mathrm{tot}}^{\mathrm{ext}}\) declared as an extension that must be gated (because it alters the “closed ledger” statement).

6.1.2 6.1.2 Control-volume form (the actual axiom) and equivalence

For any control volume \(V\subseteq\Omega\) with outward unit normal \(\mathbf{n}\), the Ledger Axiom is: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)\,dx \;+\; \int_{\partial V}\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot\mathbf{n}(x)\,dA \;=\;0. \label{eq:core_ledger_integral}\] Under standard regularity (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) locally integrable and \(\mathbf{S}\) with weak divergence), [eq:core_ledger_integral] is equivalent (in distributions) to [eq:core_continuity_etot]. Thus:

This is the precise sense in which the “continuity equation” is promoted from a theorem-like statement to a principle: the integral conservation is the primitive rule, and the PDE is its local representation.

6.1.3 6.1.3 Continuity is about \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\), not about conversion

A common source of confusion (and a frequent legacy overload) is to treat conversion terms as “sources” in the total continuity equation. In the upgraded meaning layer, conversion is an internal transfer between \(\rho\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) and therefore cancels in the total. The conversion axiom is: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:core_conversion_rho}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} &= +\mu\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}). \label{eq:core_conversion_ea}\end{aligned}\] Summing yields [eq:core_continuity_etot]. Thus, in the upgraded framework: \[\begin{aligned} \text{conversion terms belong in the phase equations,}\\ \text{not as net sources in the total continuity equation.} \end{aligned}\]

6.1.4 6.1.4 Background complement equation

Because \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-e_{\mathrm{tot}}\), [eq:core_continuity_etot] implies \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)=\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}(x,t). \label{eq:core_bg_from_continuity}\] This is not an independent law; it is bookkeeping forced by normalization. Any scheme that violates [eq:core_bg_from_continuity] while insisting on \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) is algebraically inconsistent.

6.2 6.2 Moment hierarchy and truncation rules (where/how the system closes)

6.2.1 6.2.1 Generic kinetic transport equation (template)

To explain the origin of the moment hierarchy without committing to a specific microscopic operator, we adopt the following generic kinetic template for the active distribution: \[\partial_t f + v\cdot\nabla_x f + \nabla_v\cdot(\mathbf{F}\,f) = \mathcal{C}[f] + \mathcal{Q}(x,v,t). \label{eq:core_kinetic_template}\] Here:

  • \(\mathbf{F}(x,v,t)\) is a (possibly effective) acceleration field,

  • \(\mathcal{C}[f]\) is a redistribution operator in velocity space (“collisions/mixing/relaxation”),

  • \(\mathcal{Q}\) is a kinetic source term (e.g. injection/removal in phase space).

The exact meaning of \(\mathbf{F}\), \(\mathcal{C}\), and \(\mathcal{Q}\) belongs to later Parts (closures/implementations). In this Part, [eq:core_kinetic_template] is used only to derive the structure of the moment hierarchy and to identify where closure is required.

6.2.2 6.2.2 Moment definitions in multi-index form

For \(n\in\mathbb{N}\), define the \(n\)-th velocity moment (tensor of order \(n\)): \[\mathbf{M}^{(n)}(x,t) := \int_{\mathcal{V}} \underbrace{v\otimes v\otimes\cdots\otimes v}_{n\ \text{times}}\, f(x,v,t)\,dv.\] Then: \[\mathbf{M}^{(0)}=e_{\mathrm{a}},\qquad \mathbf{M}^{(1)}=\mathbf{S},\qquad \mathbf{M}^{(2)}=\mathbf{T}.\]

6.2.3 6.2.3 Hierarchy structure: each equation depends on the next moment

Formally multiplying [eq:core_kinetic_template] by \(v^{\otimes n}\) and integrating over \(v\) yields: \[\partial_t \mathbf{M}^{(n)} + \nabla_x\cdot \mathbf{M}^{(n+1)} = \mathbf{R}^{(n)}_{\mathbf{F}}[f] + \mathbf{R}^{(n)}_{\mathcal{C}}[f] + \mathbf{R}^{(n)}_{\mathcal{Q}}, \label{eq:core_hierarchy_general}\] where:

  • \(\nabla_x\cdot \mathbf{M}^{(n+1)}\) denotes contraction of one spatial derivative index with one tensor index (the natural divergence generalization),

  • \(\mathbf{R}^{(n)}_{\mathbf{F}}[f]\) is the moment contribution from the force term,

  • \(\mathbf{R}^{(n)}_{\mathcal{C}}[f]\) is the moment contribution from the collision/relaxation operator,

  • \(\mathbf{R}^{(n)}_{\mathcal{Q}}\) is the moment of the source term.

The critical point is structural: \[\textbf{the $n$-th moment equation involves the $(n+1)$-th moment via } \nabla_x\cdot \mathbf{M}^{(n+1)}.\] Therefore, without closure assumptions, the system is infinite-dimensional.

6.2.4 6.2.4 Truncation principle (closure rule)

A truncation at order \(N\) means:

  • one evolves moments \(\mathbf{M}^{(0)},\mathbf{M}^{(1)},\dots,\mathbf{M}^{(N)}\) as state variables,

  • one closes the system by providing a constitutive law (closure) for \(\mathbf{M}^{(N+1)}\): \[\mathbf{M}^{(N+1)} \approx \mathcal{K}_{N+1}\big(\mathbf{M}^{(0)},\dots,\mathbf{M}^{(N)}; \theta\big),\] where \(\theta\) is a set of fixed parameters (LOCK) or declared degrees of freedom (HYP/SPEC per Part 02).

6.2.4.1 No reverse injection (rule).

A closure is not allowed to inject observational targets directly by tuning \(\theta\) post hoc. The closure must be:

  • specified before gate evaluation,

  • dimensionally consistent,

  • internally realizable (must not violate inequalities that follow from \(f\ge 0\)),

  • associated with a declared regime of validity.

6.2.5 6.2.5 Core truncation options used in this document

The upgraded core supports the following canonical truncation levels:

6.2.5.1 (T0) Scalar-only diffusion-level truncation (order \(N=0\)).

One evolves \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (and \(\rho\) through conversion) and assumes a constitutive flux law \[\mathbf{S}=\mathcal{J}(e_{\mathrm{a}},\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}},\dots).\] This is the drift-diffusion level.

6.2.5.2 (T1) First-moment truncation (order \(N=1\)).

One evolves \((e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S})\) (and \(\rho\) through conversion) and closes with a constitutive law for \(\mathbf{T}\): \[\mathbf{T}=\mathcal{T}(e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S};\theta_T).\] This is the minimal hyperbolic/relaxation level.

6.2.5.3 (T2) Second-moment truncation (order \(N=2\)).

One evolves \((e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T})\) and closes with \(\mathbf{M}^{(3)}\) (third moment). This is higher-fidelity and more expensive; it is optional and not required for the core mapping in this Part.

The remainder of PART 06 focuses on the (T1) core as the default minimal expressive closure, because it cleanly supports both isotropic (spherical) and axisymmetric (jet) regimes.

6.2.6 6.2.6 Canonical (T1) core system with flux relaxation

A minimal, closure-ready first-moment core system is:

6.2.6.1 Phase equations (conversion + transport).

\[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:core_rho_T1}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= +\mu\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}). \label{eq:core_ea_T1}\end{aligned}\]

6.2.6.2 Flux equation (momentum-like balance with relaxation).

\[\partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} = -\mathbf{B}\,\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}. \label{eq:core_S_T1}\] Here:

  • \(\mathbf{B}(x,t)\) is a (possibly scalar) relaxation-rate operator with dimension \(T^{-1}\); if isotropic, \(\mathbf{B}=B\,\mathbf{I}\),

  • \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}(x,t)\) is an effective “driving” field (dimension \(LT^{-2}\) if interpreted as acceleration),

  • \(\mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}\) collects any declared external flux sources (optional; usually set to \(0\) in the closed core).

Equation [eq:core_S_T1] is a canonical place where “deficit” (effective potential) forcing enters (see §6.5).

6.2.6.3 Closure location.

At (T1), closure is precisely: \[\mathbf{T}=\mathcal{T}(e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S};\theta_T),\] subject to internal realizability constraints (PSD, Cauchy–Schwarz, limiting-regime consistency).

6.2.7 6.2.7 Closure admissibility gates (non-negotiable internal checks)

Any closure \(\mathbf{T}=\mathcal{T}(\cdot)\) used in [eq:core_S_T1] must satisfy:

6.2.7.1 (G1) Dimensional consistency.

\[\delta(\mathbf{T})=L^2T^{-2}.\] If the closure uses a parameter \(\kappa_T\), then \(\delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2}\) and it must be distinct from any \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) with \(\delta(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})=L^{-1}\) (Part 03).

6.2.7.2 (G2) PSD gate (realizability).

\[\mathbf{T}(x,t)\succeq 0.\]

6.2.7.3 (G3) Flux-moment inequality gate.

For any realizable triple \((e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T})\) (coming from some \(f\ge 0\)), \[\|\mathbf{S}\|^2 \le e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T}).\] A closure must not systematically violate this inequality.

6.2.7.4 (G4) Limiting-regime gates.

The closure must reduce to the correct limiting forms in regimes that are declared within its validity:

  • isotropic mixing limit: \(\mathbf{T}\to p(e_{\mathrm{a}})\mathbf{I}\),

  • aligned axisymmetric limit: \(\mathbf{T}\to p_\perp(e_{\mathrm{a}})(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k)+p_\parallel(e_{\mathrm{a}})(k\otimes k)\),

  • low-speed/strong-relaxation diffusion limit: \(\mathbf{S}\to\) drift-diffusion form (see §6.7).

6.3 6.3 Spherical symmetry / static reduction (baseline interpretation regime) and meaning

6.3.1 6.3.1 Spherical symmetry ansatz

Assume spherical symmetry about the origin. Let \[r:=\|x\|,\qquad \hat{r}:=\frac{x}{\|x\|}\quad (r>0).\] Spherical symmetry means that scalar fields depend only on \((r,t)\): \[\rho(x,t)=\rho(r,t),\quad e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t),\quad e_{\mathrm{tot}}(x,t)=e_{\mathrm{tot}}(r,t),\] and the flux is purely radial: \[\mathbf{S}(x,t)=S_r(r,t)\,\hat{r}.\]

6.3.2 6.3.2 Reduced continuity equation

Using \(\nabla\cdot(S_r\hat{r})=\frac{1}{r^2}\partial_r(r^2 S_r)\), the canonical continuity equation becomes \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(r,t) + \frac{1}{r^2}\partial_r\big(r^2 S_r(r,t)\big)=0. \label{eq:spherical_continuity}\] Likewise, the phase equations are: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho(r,t) &= -\mu(r,t)\rho(r,t) + \Gamma\big(r,t; e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t)\big), \label{eq:spherical_rho}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t) + \frac{1}{r^2}\partial_r\big(r^2 S_r(r,t)\big) &= +\mu(r,t)\rho(r,t) - \Gamma\big(r,t; e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t)\big). \label{eq:spherical_ea}\end{aligned}\]

6.3.3 6.3.3 A minimal isotropic closure and the radial flux equation

In a spherical baseline regime it is natural to use an isotropic closure: \[\mathbf{T}(x,t)=p(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t);x,t)\,\mathbf{I}. \label{eq:isotropic_closure}\] A common minimal choice is a linear “pressure-like” law: \[p(e_{\mathrm{a}};x,t)=\kappa_T(x,t)\,e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad \delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2},\] yielding \[\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{I}.\]

Assume also isotropic relaxation \(\mathbf{B}=B\,\mathbf{I}\) and a radial effective driving field \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}=F_r(r,t)\hat{r}\). Then [eq:core_S_T1] reduces to \[\partial_t S_r(r,t) + \partial_r p(r,t) = -B(r,t)\,S_r(r,t) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t)\,F_r(r,t) + R_{S,r}^{\mathrm{ext}}(r,t). \label{eq:spherical_Sr}\] If \(p=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\), then \(\partial_r p = \partial_r(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}})\) (with product rule if \(\kappa_T\) varies in space).

6.3.4 6.3.4 Static reduction and its physical meaning

A static or steady baseline regime means \(\partial_t(\cdot)=0\) for the macroscopic fields. Then [eq:spherical_continuity] becomes: \[\frac{1}{r^2}\partial_r(r^2 S_r)=0 \quad \Longrightarrow \quad r^2 S_r(r)=C\] for some constant \(C\).

6.3.4.1 No-flux static baseline.

If the solution is regular at \(r=0\) (or if one imposes \(S_r(0)=0\)), then necessarily \(C=0\) and \[S_r(r)\equiv 0. \label{eq:static_no_flux}\] In that case, the phase equations reduce to local conversion equilibrium: \[\mu(r)\,\rho(r)=\Gamma\big(r; e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\big), \qquad e_{\mathrm{tot}}(r)=\rho(r)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\ \text{is time-independent.} \label{eq:static_conversion_balance}\]

6.3.4.2 Static balance with deficit driving.

If a nonzero effective driving \(F_r\) exists, the steady flux equation [eq:spherical_Sr] yields \[\partial_r p(r) = -B(r)\,S_r(r) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\,F_r(r) \quad (\text{if }R_{S,r}^{\mathrm{ext}}=0).\] In a strongly relaxing steady regime where \(B\) is large and \(S_r\) adjusts quasi-instantaneously, one obtains the drift-diffusion-type approximation: \[S_r(r)\approx -\frac{1}{B(r)}\partial_r p(r) + \frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)}{B(r)}F_r(r). \label{eq:spherical_drift_diffusion}\] This expresses that the flux is driven by a “pressure” gradient and by an effective body-force term.

6.4 6.4 Axisymmetric / jet-tube regime (baseline jet equations)

6.4.1 6.4.1 Axisymmetric geometry and fields

Let the symmetry axis be the unit vector \(k\), and choose coordinates so that \(k=\hat{z}\). Use cylindrical coordinates \((R,\phi,z)\) with \(R=\sqrt{x^2+y^2}\).

Axisymmetry means \(\partial_\phi(\cdot)=0\). Scalar fields depend on \((R,z,t)\): \[\rho=\rho(R,z,t),\qquad e_{\mathrm{a}}=e_{\mathrm{a}}(R,z,t),\qquad e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}.\] The flux decomposes into radial and axial components: \[\mathbf{S}=S_R(R,z,t)\,\hat{R} + S_z(R,z,t)\,\hat{z}.\]

6.4.2 6.4.2 Reduced continuity equation in cylindrical form

The divergence in axisymmetric cylindrical coordinates is \[\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=\frac{1}{R}\partial_R(R S_R) + \partial_z S_z.\] Therefore: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}(R,z,t) + \frac{1}{R}\partial_R\big(R S_R(R,z,t)\big) + \partial_z S_z(R,z,t)=0. \label{eq:axisym_continuity}\] Phase equations: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:axisym_rho}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \frac{1}{R}\partial_R(R S_R) + \partial_z S_z &= +\mu\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}). \label{eq:axisym_ea}\end{aligned}\]

6.4.3 6.4.3 Axisymmetric closure for \(\mathbf{T}\): transverse vs longitudinal “pressure”

A canonical axisymmetric (anisotropic) closure uses \(k=\hat{z}\) and decomposes \(\mathbf{T}\) into transverse and longitudinal parts: \[\mathbf{T} = p_\perp(e_{\mathrm{a}};x,t)\,(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k) + p_\parallel(e_{\mathrm{a}};x,t)\,(k\otimes k). \label{eq:axisym_T_closure}\] A linear special case is: \[p_\perp=\kappa_\perp(x,t)\,e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad p_\parallel=\kappa_\parallel(x,t)\,e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad \delta(\kappa_\perp)=\delta(\kappa_\parallel)=L^2T^{-2}.\] This closure satisfies \(\mathbf{T}\succeq 0\) if \(p_\perp\ge 0\) and \(p_\parallel\ge 0\).

6.4.3.1 Divergence of the axisymmetric closure.

Writing \(\mathbf{T}\) in components, \[\mathbf{T}=p_\perp\,\mathbf{I} + (p_\parallel-p_\perp)\,k\otimes k,\] so \[\nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} = \nabla p_\perp + \nabla\cdot\big((p_\parallel-p_\perp)\,k\otimes k\big).\] If \(k=\hat{z}\) is constant in space, then \(\nabla\cdot(k\otimes k)=0\) and \[\nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} = \nabla p_\perp + \partial_z(p_\parallel-p_\perp)\,k.\] Thus the radial component is driven by \(\partial_R p_\perp\), and the axial component is driven by \(\partial_z p_\parallel\): \[(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T})\cdot \hat{R}=\partial_R p_\perp, \qquad (\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T})\cdot k=\partial_z p_\parallel.\]

6.4.4 6.4.4 Flux equations in axisymmetric form

Assume a diagonal relaxation operator with possibly different transverse and longitudinal relaxation rates: \[\mathbf{B} = B_\perp(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k) + B_\parallel(k\otimes k), \qquad \delta(B_\perp)=\delta(B_\parallel)=T^{-1}.\] Assume an effective driving field decomposed as \[\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}=F_R\,\hat{R}+F_z\,\hat{z}.\] Then [eq:core_S_T1] yields (componentwise): \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t S_R + \partial_R p_\perp &= -B_\perp\,S_R + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,F_R + (R_S^{\mathrm{ext}})_R, \label{eq:axisym_SR}\\ \partial_t S_z + \partial_z p_\parallel &= -B_\parallel\,S_z + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,F_z + (R_S^{\mathrm{ext}})_z. \label{eq:axisym_Sz}\end{aligned}\] These are the baseline jet-tube moment equations: longitudinal gradients couple to \(p_\parallel\), transverse gradients couple to \(p_\perp\).

6.4.5 6.4.5 Jet-tube (slender) reduction via cross-sectional averaging

For a jet-like regime, one often introduces a tube radius \(R_j(z,t)\) such that the active fraction is concentrated in \(0\le R\le R_j(z,t)\) and decays outside. Define cross-sectional area \[A(z,t):=\pi R_j(z,t)^2.\] Define cross-section averages of scalars: \[\langle q\rangle(z,t) := \frac{1}{A(z,t)}\int_0^{R_j(z,t)} q(R,z,t)\,2\pi R\,dR.\] Define the axial line-density (actor content per unit length): \[\mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{tot}}(z,t):=\int_0^{R_j(z,t)} e_{\mathrm{tot}}(R,z,t)\,2\pi R\,dR = A(z,t)\,\langle e_{\mathrm{tot}}\rangle(z,t),\] and similarly for \(\mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\mathcal{R}\) (line stored).

Integrate the continuity equation [eq:axisym_continuity] over the cross-section. Using the divergence form and the boundary term at \(R=R_j\) yields the 1D balance: \[\partial_t \mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{tot}}(z,t) + \partial_z \mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{tot}}(z,t) = -\underbrace{2\pi R_j(z,t)\,S_R(R_j(z,t),z,t)}_{\text{radial leakage term}}, \label{eq:jet_tube_1d_balance}\] where the axial flux of line-density is \[\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{tot}}(z,t):=\int_0^{R_j(z,t)} S_z(R,z,t)\,2\pi R\,dR.\] If the jet-tube regime assumes negligible radial leakage (a regime declaration), \[S_R(R_j,z,t)\approx 0,\] then the 1D jet-tube continuity reduces to \[\partial_t \mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{tot}}+\partial_z\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{tot}}=0.\] This is the mathematically precise form of “quasi-1D conservation along the tube” and makes explicit the condition under which it is valid.

6.4.5.1 Axisymmetry and alignment connection.

In a strongly aligned jet regime one declares \(a_k\approx 0\) (PART 05) and may additionally assume that \(\mathbf{S}\) is predominantly parallel to \(k\): \[S_R=\mathcal{O}(\varepsilon_{\perp})\ll S_z,\] with an ordering parameter \(\varepsilon_{\perp}\) declared in the regime.

6.5 6.5 Interpretation of the Deficit term (effective gravity / effective potential): the “volume-pressure” viewpoint

6.5.1 6.5.1 What is the “Deficit” term at the core-equation level?

In the upgraded core, a “Deficit” contribution is not a mysterious extra symbol; it is a specific forcing structure in the flux equation [eq:core_S_T1]. The canonical placement is: \[\partial_t \mathbf{S}+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T} = -\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} +\cdots,\] where the deficit forcing is included in \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\) as a gradient of an effective potential: \[\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} = -\nabla \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{other}}, \label{eq:Feff_potential}\] with \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) having dimension \(L^2T^{-2}\) if interpreted as a potential per unit mass (acceleration potential).

Thus the deficit term is the mechanism by which an effective potential landscape biases the transport of the active fraction.

6.5.2 6.5.2 “Volume-pressure” viewpoint: separating pressure-like vs potential-like driving

In the core flux equation, there are two gradient-type drivers:

6.5.2.1 (i) Pressure-like gradients from the closure \(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}\).

If \(\mathbf{T}\) has an isotropic or anisotropic “pressure” structure (e.g. [eq:isotropic_closure] or [eq:axisym_T_closure]), then \(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}\) produces a gradient of a scalar (or two scalars) that behaves like a pressure gradient term.

6.5.2.2 (ii) Potential-like gradients from the deficit field \(-\nabla \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\).

This is an externally specified (or self-consistently computed in later Parts) gradient that produces drift.

The “volume-pressure” viewpoint is the statement that what appears as “effective gravity” in a reduced equation can be interpreted as the combined effect of:

  • a closure-induced pressure-like gradient \(\nabla p\) (or \(\nabla p_\perp\) and \(\partial_z p_\parallel\)),

  • a deficit-induced potential gradient \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(-\nabla \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}})\).

In a steady, strongly relaxing regime, the drift-diffusion approximation reads: \[\mathbf{S}\approx -\mathbf{B}^{-1}\big(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}\big) - \mathbf{B}^{-1}\big(e_{\mathrm{a}}\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\big) + \mathbf{B}^{-1}(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{other}}). \label{eq:drift_diffusion_general}\] For isotropic \(\mathbf{B}=B\mathbf{I}\) and isotropic closure \(\mathbf{T}=p(e_{\mathrm{a}})\mathbf{I}\) this becomes: \[\mathbf{S}\approx -\frac{1}{B}\nabla p(e_{\mathrm{a}}) - \frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} + \frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{other}}. \label{eq:drift_diffusion_isotropic}\] This is the mathematically exact location of the deficit term in the core: it is a drift term in the flux, not a source term in the continuity equation.

6.5.3 6.5.3 Effective gravity language (coordinate meaning)

In a spherical regime with \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}=\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(r)\), define an “effective gravitational acceleration” as \[g_{\mathrm{eff}}(r):=\partial_r \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(r),\] so that the deficit drift term is \[-\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} = -\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}g_{\mathrm{eff}}(r)\,\hat{r}.\] This justifies the language “effective gravity” as an interpretation of a potential gradient. However, the core bookkeeping rule remains: \[\begin{aligned} \textbf{the deficit enters via }\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\textbf{ in the flux equation,}\\ \textbf{not as a net source in the continuity equation.} \end{aligned}\]

6.5.4 6.5.4 Dimensional consistency of deficit forcing

In [eq:core_S_T1], \(\partial_t \mathbf{S}\) has dimension \(LT^{-2}\) and \(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}\) also has dimension \(LT^{-2}\). Therefore: \[\delta(\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S})=T^{-1}\cdot LT^{-1}=LT^{-2}, \qquad \delta(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}})=0\cdot LT^{-2}=LT^{-2}.\] So \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\) must have dimension \(LT^{-2}\) (acceleration dimension), and \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) must have dimension \(L^2T^{-2}\) (potential dimension) if [eq:Feff_potential] is used.

This dimensional bookkeeping is mandatory: any legacy deficit symbol must be mapped into either \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\) or \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) with these dimensions.

6.6 6.6 Legacy mathematical core \(\leftrightarrow\) upgraded meaning-layer mapping table (substitution rules)

6.6.1 6.6.1 Mapping philosophy: forbid overload, require 1:1 meaning

Legacy expressions often reuse a single symbol for multiple meanings (e.g. bare \(e\) may mean “total occupancy”, “active occupancy”, or even “energy-like variable”; bare \(\kappa\) may mean different coefficients). The upgraded rule is:

\[\begin{aligned} \textbf{Each mathematical object appearing in the core must map to exactly one}\\ \textbf{meaning-layer object with fixed dimension.} \end{aligned}\]

Therefore, the mapping must be explicit and total: no legacy symbol remains unmapped.

6.6.2 6.6.2 Canonical substitution rules (minimal set)

The following substitutions are mandatory when rewriting the legacy core into upgraded canonical form:

6.6.2.1 (S1) Replace bare occupancy symbol \(e\).

If a legacy core uses \[\partial_t e + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}=0,\] then in upgraded notation it must be rewritten as \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0,\] unless the legacy context explicitly indicates \(e=e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (active only). In that case, the correct upgraded equation is [eq:core_ea_T1] (with conversion terms), not a closed continuity equation.

6.6.2.2 (S2) Replace bare \(\kappa\).

Bare \(\kappa\) is forbidden. Every occurrence must be rewritten with a role-specific symbol and correct dimension: \[\kappa \mapsto \kappa_T,\ \kappa_\perp,\ \kappa_\parallel,\ \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}},\ldots\] with explicit statements such as \[\delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2},\qquad \delta(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}})=L^{-1}.\]

6.6.2.3 (S3) Replace ambiguous “pressure” or “potential” terms.

Legacy “deficit” terms must be mapped into either:

  • a closure pressure-like scalar \(p(e_{\mathrm{a}})\) inside \(\mathbf{T}\), or

  • an effective potential \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) entering as \(-\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) in \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\),

not into a source term in the continuity equation.

6.6.2.4 (S4) Enforce phase bookkeeping.

Any legacy “reaction” that converts between stored and active must be expressed with \(\mu\) and \(\Gamma\) (or explicitly declared alternatives) in the phase equations [eq:core_rho_T1][eq:core_ea_T1]. It must cancel from the total continuity [eq:core_continuity_etot].

6.6.3 6.6.3 Mapping table template (LaTeX)

The mapping table must be produced as a concrete artifact. A minimal LaTeX template is:

\begin{table}[t]
\centering
\caption{Legacy core $\leftrightarrow$ Upgraded meaning-layer mapping (template).}
\label{tab:core_mapping}
\begin{tabular}{llll}
\hline
Legacy symbol/term & Legacy equation role & Upgraded object & Notes (meaning, dimension, tier) \\
\hline
$e$ & continuity density & $e_{\mathrm{tot}}$ & total actor fraction, dimensionless \\
$\rho$ & (if used) storage density & $\rho$ & stored fraction, dimensionless \\
$f$ & kinetic distribution & $f$ & $f\ge 0$, moments define $e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T}$ \\
$\mathbf{S}$ & flux & $\mathbf{S}$ & outward-positive in control-volume form \\
$\mathbf{T}$ & stress/tensor & $\mathbf{T}$ & PSD; closure at truncation level \\
$\kappa$ & coefficient (overloaded) & $\kappa_T$ or $\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}$ & separate by role: $L^2T^{-2}$ vs $L^{-1}$ \\
Deficit term & effective gravity/potential & $\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}$ or $\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}$ & enters flux eq, not continuity source \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

This template must be expanded to include:

  • explicit dimensions,

  • claim tier (LOCK/DERIVE/HYP/SPEC),

  • first-introduced reference label,

  • any regime restrictions.

6.7 6.7 Basic consistency checks: dimension, conservation, limiting regimes (weak-field / low-speed / isotropic)

6.7.1 6.7.1 Dimensional checks (mandatory gates)

Every equation in the core must satisfy:

  • same dimension on both sides of each equation,

  • addends in sums have identical dimensions.

Key dimensions: \[\delta(e_{\mathrm{a}})=\delta(\rho)=\delta(e_{\mathrm{tot}})=0, \qquad \delta(\mathbf{S})=LT^{-1}, \qquad \delta(\mathbf{T})=L^2T^{-2}.\] Thus: \[\delta(\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}})=T^{-1}, \qquad \delta(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S})=L^{-1}\cdot LT^{-1}=T^{-1},\] and [eq:core_continuity_etot] is dimensionally consistent.

For the flux equation: \[\delta(\partial_t\mathbf{S})=LT^{-2}, \qquad \delta(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T})=L^{-1}\cdot L^2T^{-2}=LT^{-2},\] so the forcing and relaxation terms must also be \(LT^{-2}\): \[\delta(\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S})=LT^{-2}, \qquad \delta(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}})=LT^{-2}.\]

6.7.2 6.7.2 Conservation checks (control-volume invariants)

6.7.2.1 Closed actor conservation.

If \(\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=0\) on \(\partial\Omega\) (closed boundary), then integrating [eq:core_ledger_integral] over \(V=\Omega\) yields: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_\Omega e_{\mathrm{tot}}\,dx = 0.\]

6.7.2.2 Conversion cancellation.

Summing [eq:core_conversion_rho] and [eq:core_conversion_ea] cancels \(\mu\rho\) and \(\Gamma\) exactly. Any model that fails this cancellation (e.g. by inconsistent signs) violates the meaning layer and fails the bookkeeping gate.

6.7.3 6.7.3 Isotropic limit check

In a strongly mixing-dominated regime (PART 05), the alignment moment is negligible: \[\mathbf{m}_b=\mathbf{0}, \qquad A=0.\] The closure should reduce to isotropy: \[\mathbf{T}\approx p(e_{\mathrm{a}})\mathbf{I},\] and if the system is also strongly relaxing with isotropic \(\mathbf{B}=B\mathbf{I}\), then the drift-diffusion approximation [eq:drift_diffusion_isotropic] must hold to leading order in the declared ordering.

6.7.4 6.7.4 Low-speed / strong-relaxation diffusion limit (formal derivation)

Assume a regime in which \(\partial_t\mathbf{S}\) is small compared to \(\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S}\): \[\|\partial_t\mathbf{S}\| = \mathcal{O}(1),\qquad \|\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S}\|=\mathcal{O}(\varepsilon^{-1}),\qquad \varepsilon\ll 1,\] so that \(\mathbf{S}\) is slaved to gradients and forcing. Then from [eq:core_S_T1]: \[\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S}\approx -\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}+e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}},\] hence \[\mathbf{S}\approx -\mathbf{B}^{-1}(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T})+\mathbf{B}^{-1}(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}).\] For isotropic closure \(\mathbf{T}=p(e_{\mathrm{a}})\mathbf{I}\) and isotropic relaxation \(\mathbf{B}=B\mathbf{I}\), this becomes \[\mathbf{S}\approx -\frac{1}{B}\nabla p(e_{\mathrm{a}})+\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}.\] Plugging into the active equation [eq:core_ea_T1] yields a closed scalar PDE for \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (with conversion): \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot\Big(-\frac{1}{B}\nabla p(e_{\mathrm{a}})+\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\Big) = \mu\rho-\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}).\] This is the mathematically complete drift-diffusion-with-conversion limit.

6.7.5 6.7.5 Weak-deficit (weak-field) limit

A weak-deficit regime means that the effective potential (or effective acceleration) is small in a dimensionless sense. For example, with reference scales \((L_0,T_0)\) and \(c_0=L_0/T_0\), define \[\hat{\Phi}_{\mathrm{eff}}:=\frac{\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}}{c_0^2}, \qquad \hat{\nabla}:=L_0\nabla.\] A weak-field ordering can be declared as \[\|\hat{\nabla}\hat{\Phi}_{\mathrm{eff}}\|=\mathcal{O}(\varepsilon_\Phi),\qquad \varepsilon_\Phi\ll 1.\] Then the deficit-induced drift is a small perturbation of the isotropic transport, and the model must reduce continuously to the \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}=0\) case as \(\varepsilon_\Phi\to 0\).

6.7.6 6.7.6 End-of-Part checklist (mandatory)

This Part is complete only if:

  1. the continuity equation is fixed in upgraded form as \(\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0\) and linked to the integral ledger axiom (principle level) (§6.1);

  2. the moment hierarchy structure is stated and the truncation/closure location is explicit, with core (T1) equations identified (§6.2);

  3. spherical symmetry and static reductions are written explicitly with correct divergence forms and interpreted through the flux/closure (§6.3);

  4. axisymmetric jet-tube equations are written explicitly, including anisotropic closure structure and (optionally) cross-sectional reduction with leakage terms (§6.4);

  5. the deficit term is placed unambiguously as a forcing in the flux equation and interpreted consistently with “volume-pressure” (closure) vs “effective potential” (drift) (§6.5);

  6. a concrete mapping philosophy and a mapping-table template are provided, including mandatory substitution rules (bare \(e\), bare \(\kappa\), deficit placement) (§6.6);

  7. basic consistency gates are stated: dimension, conservation, and limiting-regime checks (isotropic, diffusion limit, weak deficit) (§6.7).

7 PART 07. Closure Library & Regime Map (Output 7)

This Part provides (i) a closure library for the core (T1) system and (ii) a regime map with explicit diagnostics, transition gates, and a closure-selection tree. The goal is operational: given \((\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T},\mathbf{m}_b,k,\lambda)\) (or the subset available), one should be able to (a) identify the applicable regime, (b) select an admissible closure, and (c) certify internal consistency (dimension, realizability, limiting behavior).

7.0.0.1 Core equations assumed.

We work with the (T1) core system (PART 06), repeated here for completeness: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\,\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:part07_core_rho}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= +\mu\,\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:part07_core_ea}\\ \partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} &= -\mathbf{B}\,\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}. \label{eq:part07_core_S}\end{aligned}\] Here \(\mathbf{B}\) is a relaxation-rate operator (\(\delta(\mathbf{B})=T^{-1}\)), \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is an effective driving field (\(\delta(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}})=LT^{-2}\)), and \(\mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}\) is an explicitly declared external flux source (often set to \(0\) in a closed core).

7.0.0.2 State and admissibility conventions.

The three-phase bookkeeping is: \[e_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}},\qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}:=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad (e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\in\mathcal{S}.\] The alignment objects (PART 05) are: \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t):=\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,v,t)\,f(x,v,t)\,dv,\qquad A:=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\in[0,1]\ \ (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0),\] \[\xi:=\frac{\mathbf{m}_b\cdot k}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\in[-1,1]\ \ (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0),\qquad a_k:=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b-(\mathbf{m}_b\cdot k)k\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\in[0,1]\ \ (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0),\] and the identity \[A^2=\xi^2+a_k^2\qquad (e_{\mathrm{a}}>0) \label{eq:part07_A_identity}\] is a required internal-consistency gate.

7.0.0.3 Claim-tier note (operational).

Closures are constitutive assumptions and therefore are HYP unless explicitly fixed as LOCK for a specific document version. The selection tree is a SPEC (procedure) whose thresholds must be fixed before any gate evaluation.

7.1 7.1 Isotropic closure: \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T\,e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{I}\ \Rightarrow\) diffusion-type flux (effective law)

7.1.1 7.1.1 Closure definition and admissibility

7.1.1.1 Isotropic linear closure (CL-ISO).

Define \[\mathbf{T}(x,t)=\kappa_T(x,t)\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,\mathbf{I}, \qquad \kappa_T(x,t)\ge 0, \qquad \delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2}. \label{eq:part07_T_iso}\] This closure is admissible (PSD) because \(\mathbf{I}\succeq 0\) and \(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\ge 0\) implies \(\mathbf{T}\succeq 0\).

7.1.1.2 Divergence of the isotropic closure.

Using \(\nabla\cdot(p\mathbf{I})=\nabla p\) for a scalar field \(p\), we obtain: \[\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}=\nabla\big(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\big) =\kappa_T\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\nabla \kappa_T. \label{eq:part07_div_T_iso}\]

7.1.1.3 Relaxation structure for isotropic regimes.

In mixing-dominated isotropic regimes it is standard to use an isotropic relaxation operator \[\mathbf{B}(x,t)=B(x,t)\,\mathbf{I}, \qquad B(x,t)>0, \qquad \delta(B)=T^{-1}. \label{eq:part07_B_iso}\] Anisotropic \(\mathbf{B}\) is treated in §7.4–§7.5.

7.1.2 7.1.2 Diffusion (strong-relaxation) limit: derivation of an effective flux law

Assume (i) \(\mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}=0\) for the core and (ii) a strong-relaxation/low-inertia ordering where \(\partial_t\mathbf{S}\) is subleading compared to \(B\mathbf{S}\). The precise regime statement is: \[\|\partial_t\mathbf{S}\| = \mathcal{O}(1),\qquad \|B\,\mathbf{S}\|=\mathcal{O}(\varepsilon^{-1}),\qquad \varepsilon\ll 1, \label{eq:part07_strong_relax_ordering}\] so that to leading order \[\partial_t\mathbf{S}\approx 0.\]

With [eq:part07_T_iso][eq:part07_B_iso], the flux equation [eq:part07_core_S] becomes \[0 + \nabla(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}})\approx -B\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}.\] Therefore the leading-order constitutive flux law is \[\mathbf{S} \approx -\frac{1}{B}\nabla(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}) +\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part07_S_iso_general}\] Expanding the gradient: \[\mathbf{S} \approx -\frac{\kappa_T}{B}\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}} -\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\nabla\kappa_T +\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part07_S_iso_expanded}\]

7.1.2.1 Diffusion coefficient and drift velocity.

Define the effective diffusion coefficient \[D(x,t):=\frac{\kappa_T(x,t)}{B(x,t)}, \qquad \delta(D)=\frac{L^2T^{-2}}{T^{-1}}=L^2T^{-1}, \label{eq:part07_D_def}\] and define the effective drift velocity \[\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}(x,t):= \frac{1}{B(x,t)}\Big(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}(x,t)-\nabla\kappa_T(x,t)\Big), \qquad \delta(\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}})=LT^{-1}. \label{eq:part07_ueff_def}\] Then [eq:part07_S_iso_expanded] can be written as the standard drift-diffusion form: \[\mathbf{S}\approx -D\,\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part07_S_drift_diffusion}\] If \(\kappa_T\) is spatially constant, \(\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}=\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}/B\).

7.1.3 7.1.3 Effective scalar PDE for \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (with conversion)

Insert [eq:part07_S_drift_diffusion] into the active equation [eq:part07_core_ea]: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} = \mu\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}).\] Thus, in the diffusion limit, \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot\big(-D\,\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}\big) = \mu\rho-\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}). \label{eq:part07_ea_drift_diffusion_reaction}\] Equivalently, \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} = \nabla\cdot(D\,\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}) -\nabla\cdot(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}) +\mu\rho-\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}). \label{eq:part07_ea_ddr_expanded}\] This is the effective law induced by the isotropic closure under strong relaxation.

7.1.3.1 Gate implication: positivity and maximum principle (model-dependent).

Equation [eq:part07_ea_drift_diffusion_reaction] is not automatically positivity-preserving at the PDE level unless further conditions hold (e.g. appropriate boundary conditions, \(D\ge 0\), inward-pointing reaction terms). Therefore, positivity must be enforced as a gate at the solution/implementation level.

7.1.4 7.1.4 Boundary conditions compatible with the drift-diffusion form

Using the standard outward-positive flux convention, a closed boundary for actor content is: \[\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=0\quad\text{on }\partial\Omega.\] With [eq:part07_S_drift_diffusion], this becomes a Neumann-type condition: \[\Big(-D\,\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}\Big)\cdot\mathbf{n}=0 \quad\text{on }\partial\Omega. \label{eq:part07_dd_neumann}\] If instead one prescribes inflow/outflow, one prescribes \(\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=s_N(x,t)\) on \(\partial\Omega\), which translates directly into a boundary condition on \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) via [eq:part07_S_drift_diffusion].

7.1.5 7.1.5 Summary of CL-ISO gates

The isotropic closure and its diffusion reduction are admissible only if:

  1. (Dimension gate) \(\delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2}\), \(\delta(B)=T^{-1}\), hence \(\delta(D)=L^2T^{-1}\).

  2. (PSD gate) \(\kappa_T\ge 0\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\ge 0\) ensure \(\mathbf{T}\succeq 0\).

  3. (Relaxation gate) \(B>0\) (otherwise \(D\) is undefined and relaxation is ill-posed).

  4. (Limit gate) in mixing-dominated regimes, anisotropy diagnostics (defined in §7.3) must be small.

7.2 7.2 Axisymmetric closure: \(b(x,v)=b(x,v\!\cdot\!k)\Rightarrow \mathbf{m}_b\parallel k\) (alignment lemma)

This subsection provides a mathematically explicit lemma that justifies the axisymmetric alignment condition used in jet-type regimes: under axisymmetry, the alignment moment \(\mathbf{m}_b\) is parallel to the axis \(k\) and therefore the alignment defect \(a_k\) vanishes.

7.2.1 7.2.1 Axisymmetry group about \(k\)

Fix a unit axis \(k\in\mathbb{S}^2\). Define the subgroup of rotations that keep \(k\) fixed: \[G_k:=\{Q\in SO(3):\ Qk=k\}.\] Vectors invariant under all \(Q\in G_k\) must be parallel to \(k\). (Indeed, \(G_k\) contains all rotations around \(k\).)

7.2.2 7.2.2 General alignment lemma (rotation-covariant statement)

7.2.2.1 Lemma 7.1 (Axisymmetry \(\Rightarrow \mathbf{m}_b\parallel k\)).

Fix \((x,t)\) and a unit axis \(k=k(x,t)\). Assume:

  1. (Axisymmetric distribution) For all \(Q\in G_k\) and all \(v\in\mathcal{V}\), \[f(x,Qv,t)=f(x,v,t). \label{eq:part07_axisym_f}\]

  2. (Rotation-covariant bias) For all \(Q\in G_k\) and all \(v\in\mathcal{V}\), \[b(x,Qv,t)=Q\,b(x,v,t). \label{eq:part07_axisym_b_covariant}\]

Then the alignment moment \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)=\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,v,t)\,f(x,v,t)\,dv\] is parallel to \(k\), i.e. \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)=m_\parallel(x,t)\,k(x,t)\quad \text{for some scalar }m_\parallel. \label{eq:part07_mb_parallel}\]

7.2.2.2 Proof.

Fix any \(Q\in G_k\). Perform the change of variables \(w:=Qv\) (Jacobian \(=1\) because \(Q\in SO(3)\)). Then \[\begin{aligned} \mathbf{m}_b &=\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,v,t)\,f(x,v,t)\,dv\\ &=\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,Q^{-1}w,t)\,f(x,Q^{-1}w,t)\,dw\\ &=\int_{\mathcal{V}} Q^{-1}b(x,w,t)\,f(x,w,t)\,dw \quad \text{(by \eqref{eq:part07_axisym_b_covariant} and \eqref{eq:part07_axisym_f})}\\ &=Q^{-1}\int_{\mathcal{V}} b(x,w,t)\,f(x,w,t)\,dw =Q^{-1}\mathbf{m}_b.\end{aligned}\] Thus \(Q\mathbf{m}_b=\mathbf{m}_b\) for all \(Q\in G_k\). The only vectors fixed by all rotations about \(k\) are scalar multiples of \(k\). Therefore \(\mathbf{m}_b\parallel k\). \(\square\)

7.2.2.3 Corollary (alignment defect vanishes).

If \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)>0\), then \(a_k(x,t)=\|\mathbf{m}_b-(\mathbf{m}_b\cdot k)k\|/e_{\mathrm{a}}=0\).

7.2.3 7.2.3 Sufficient condition: \(b(x,v)\) depends only on \(v\cdot k\)

A widely used sufficient condition is a direct axis-parallel form: \[b(x,v,t)=\beta\big(x,t;\ v\cdot k(x,t),\ |v|\big)\,k(x,t), \qquad |\beta|\le 1. \label{eq:part07_b_axis_parallel}\] Then, without any symmetry assumption on \(f\) beyond integrability, \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t) = k(x,t)\int_{\mathcal{V}} \beta(\cdot)\,f(x,v,t)\,dv,\] hence \(\mathbf{m}_b\parallel k\) identically. This is the simplest implementation of the “axisymmetric bias” statement in the TOC line: \[b(x,v)=b(x,v\cdot k)\ \Rightarrow\ \mathbf{m}_b\parallel k.\] (Here \(b(x,v\cdot k)\) is understood as a scalar function multiplying \(k\).)

7.3 7.3 Mixing-dominated regime (\(\lambda\) large): diagnostics for unaligned/diffusive behavior

This subsection defines a mixing-dominated regime and provides quantitative diagnostics that justify using isotropic closures and diffusion-limit reductions.

7.3.1 7.3.1 Mixing strength parameter and a bounded weight

Recall \(\lambda(x,t)\ge 0\) is a dimensionless mixing-strength field (PART 05). Define a bounded weight: \[w_\lambda(x,t):=\frac{\lambda(x,t)}{1+\lambda(x,t)}\in[0,1). \label{eq:part07_wlambda}\] Large \(\lambda\) corresponds to \(w_\lambda\approx 1\).

7.3.2 7.3.2 Core diagnostics: alignment, tensor anisotropy, and flux behavior

We define three gate-ready diagnostics. Each diagnostic compares a measurable quantity to a pre-registered threshold. Thresholds are constants (or declared fields) that must be fixed before evaluation.

7.3.2.1 (D1) Alignment-smallness diagnostic.

For \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\) define \(A=\|\mathbf{m}_b\|/e_{\mathrm{a}}\). Mixing dominance expects \[A(x,t)\le \varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{mix}} \quad\text{(small alignment)}. \label{eq:part07_mix_A_small}\] If \(e_{\mathrm{a}}=0\) set \(A=0\).

7.3.2.2 (D2) Tensor anisotropy diagnostic (if \(\mathbf{T}\) is available or reconstructed).

Define the isotropic projection \[\mathbf{T}_{\mathrm{iso}}:=\frac{1}{3}\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})\,\mathbf{I}.\] Define the dimensionless anisotropy index \[\mathcal{A}_T(x,t) := \begin{cases} \dfrac{\|\mathbf{T}(x,t)-\mathbf{T}_{\mathrm{iso}}(x,t)\|_F}{\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T}(x,t))}, & \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})>0,\\[1.2ex] 0, & \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})=0, \end{cases} \label{eq:part07_AT_def}\] where \(\|\cdot\|_F\) is the Frobenius norm. Mixing dominance expects \[\mathcal{A}_T(x,t)\le \varepsilon_T^{\mathrm{mix}}. \label{eq:part07_mix_T_isotropic}\]

7.3.2.3 (D3) Diffusion-residual diagnostic (if the diffusion approximation is claimed).

If one claims the diffusion-limit flux law [eq:part07_S_drift_diffusion], define the residual \[\mathbf{R}_{\mathrm{DD}}:=\mathbf{S} + D\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}} - e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{eff}}, \label{eq:part07_R_DD_def}\] and the normalized error \[\eta_{\mathrm{DD}}(x,t):= \frac{\|\mathbf{R}_{\mathrm{DD}}(x,t)\|}{\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\| + \eta_0}, \qquad \eta_0>0\ \text{(small fixed regularizer)}. \label{eq:part07_eta_DD_def}\] Mixing-dominated diffusion expects \[\eta_{\mathrm{DD}}(x,t)\le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{DD}}^{\mathrm{mix}} \quad \text{in the declared mixing-dominated region.} \label{eq:part07_mix_DD_good}\]

7.3.3 7.3.3 Regime declaration: mixing-dominated set

Define the mixing-dominated regime region \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mix}}\) (in space–time) by: \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mix}} := \Big\{(x,t):\ w_\lambda(x,t)\ge w_{\lambda,\min}^{\mathrm{mix}} \ \wedge\ A(x,t)\le \varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{mix}} \ \wedge\ \mathcal{A}_T(x,t)\le \varepsilon_T^{\mathrm{mix}} \Big\}. \label{eq:part07_Rmix_def}\] If \(\mathbf{T}\) is not directly available, \(\mathcal{A}_T\) may be replaced by a SPEC proxy (e.g. inferred anisotropy from measured flux alignment), but the proxy and its threshold must be pre-registered.

7.3.3.1 Default closure choice in \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mix}}\).

Use CL-ISO [eq:part07_T_iso] and (optionally) the diffusion reduction [eq:part07_S_drift_diffusion] if [eq:part07_strong_relax_ordering] and [eq:part07_mix_DD_good] are satisfied.

7.4 7.4 Partial-alignment regime: diagnostics for channel / hollow / corona behaviors

Partial alignment means that alignment is present but not strong enough to justify a purely 1D jet-tube treatment everywhere, and/or the alignment defect \(a_k\) is not negligible. This regime often exhibits intermediate morphologies such as channels, hollow tubes, or corona/shell patterns.

7.4.1 7.4.1 Alignment and flux-direction diagnostics

Assume a unit axis field \(k(x,t)\in\mathbb{S}^2\) is defined (PART 04–05). Decompose the flux into parallel and perpendicular parts: \[\mathbf{S}_\parallel:=(\mathbf{S}\cdot k)\,k,\qquad \mathbf{S}_\perp:=\mathbf{S}-\mathbf{S}_\parallel.\]

7.4.1.1 Flux-alignment cosine.

Define \[c_S(x,t):= \frac{\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)}{\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|+\eta_0}, \qquad c_S\in[-1,1], \label{eq:part07_cS_def}\] where \(\eta_0>0\) is a fixed regularizer. Large \(c_S\) indicates a flux aligned with \(k\).

7.4.1.2 Transverse leakage ratio.

Define \[\ell_\perp(x,t):= \frac{\|\mathbf{S}_\perp(x,t)\|}{\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|+\eta_0}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part07_leak_ratio}\] In a perfectly collimated regime \(\ell_\perp\approx 0\); in mixing-dominated isotropy \(\ell_\perp\) is not systematically small.

7.4.1.3 Partial-alignment range (diagnostic).

A partial-alignment region is characterized by intermediate alignment: \[\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{mix}} < A(x,t) < 1-\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}} \quad\text{or}\quad a_k(x,t)\gtrsim \varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}}, \label{eq:part07_partial_alignment_range}\] together with a nontrivial but imperfect flux alignment (typical but not mandatory): \[c_S\ \text{moderate-to-large},\qquad \ell_\perp\ \text{non-negligible}.\]

7.4.2 7.4.2 Spatial morphology diagnostics: channel, hollow tube, corona

To diagnose channel/hollow/corona structures one needs geometry. The following diagnostics are written for axisymmetric coordinate systems around \(k\) (as in PART 06), but can be generalized.

Assume coordinates \((R,\phi,z)\) with \(k=\hat{z}\) and \(\partial_\phi(\cdot)=0\) when axisymmetry is claimed.

7.4.2.1 (M1) Channel (solid-core tube) diagnostic.

Define the radial profile at fixed \((z,t)\): \[\bar{e}_{\mathrm{a}}(R;z,t):=\frac{1}{2\pi}\int_0^{2\pi} e_{\mathrm{a}}(R,\phi,z,t)\,d\phi \quad (\text{axisymmetry proxy}).\] A solid-core channel at \((z,t)\) is diagnosed if \[R_{\mathrm{peak}}(z,t):=\arg\max_{R\in[0,R_{\max}]}\bar{e}_{\mathrm{a}}(R;z,t) \approx 0 \quad\text{and}\quad \bar{e}_{\mathrm{a}}(0;z,t)\ \text{is significantly above background}. \label{eq:part07_channel_peak}\] Operationally one enforces \[R_{\mathrm{peak}}(z,t)\le \varepsilon_R^{\mathrm{core}}, \qquad \bar{e}_{\mathrm{a}}(0;z,t)\ge e_{\min}^{\mathrm{core}}.\]

7.4.2.2 (M2) Hollow tube (channel-with-hole) diagnostic.

A hollow tube is diagnosed if the radial profile is not maximal at the axis: \[R_{\mathrm{peak}}(z,t)\ge R_{\min}^{\mathrm{hole}}>0, \label{eq:part07_hollow_peak}\] and the axis value is suppressed: \[H(z,t):=1-\frac{\bar{e}_{\mathrm{a}}(0;z,t)}{\max_{R}\bar{e}_{\mathrm{a}}(R;z,t)+\eta_0} \ge H_{\min}^{\mathrm{hole}}. \label{eq:part07_hollowness}\] Here \(H\) is a “hollowness index” (\(H\approx 1\) means a deep hole).

7.4.2.3 (M3) Corona / shell diagnostic (spherical geometry).

In nearly spherical settings, define the spherical average: \[\langle e_{\mathrm{a}}\rangle(r,t):=\frac{1}{4\pi}\int_{\mathbb{S}^2} e_{\mathrm{a}}(r\omega,t)\,d\omega.\] A corona/shell is diagnosed if \(\langle e_{\mathrm{a}}\rangle(r,t)\) has a maximum at \(r=r_c(t)>0\) and is suppressed near \(r=0\): \[r_c(t):=\arg\max_{r\in[0,r_{\max}]}\langle e_{\mathrm{a}}\rangle(r,t), \qquad r_c(t)\ge r_{\min}^{\mathrm{shell}}, \label{eq:part07_shell_peak}\] \[H_{\mathrm{sph}}(t):=1-\frac{\langle e_{\mathrm{a}}\rangle(0,t)}{\max_{r}\langle e_{\mathrm{a}}\rangle(r,t)+\eta_0} \ge H_{\min}^{\mathrm{shell}}. \label{eq:part07_shell_hollowness}\]

7.4.3 7.4.3 Partial-alignment closure family: interpolated anisotropic closure

Partial alignment suggests that \(\mathbf{T}\) is neither fully isotropic nor in the extreme jet limit. A practical closure family is a controlled anisotropic interpolation that remains PSD and reduces to CL-ISO when mixing dominates.

7.4.3.1 Axisymmetric anisotropic form (baseline).

Use the standard axisymmetric tensor structure (PART 06): \[\mathbf{T} = p_\perp\,(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k) + p_\parallel\,(k\otimes k), \qquad p_\perp\ge 0,\ p_\parallel\ge 0. \label{eq:part07_T_axis_form}\] To parameterize anisotropy while keeping the trace controlled, define a baseline scalar “pressure”: \[p(x,t):=\kappa_T(x,t)\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad \kappa_T\ge 0,\ \delta(\kappa_T)=L^2T^{-2},\] and introduce a dimensionless anisotropy parameter \(\alpha(x,t)\) via \[p_\perp:=p\,(1-\alpha),\qquad p_\parallel:=p\,(1+2\alpha). \label{eq:part07_pperp_ppar_alpha}\] Then \[\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})=2p_\perp+p_\parallel=3p,\] so \(\alpha\) redistributes stress between transverse and longitudinal directions while preserving the total trace scale.

7.4.3.2 PSD constraints on \(\alpha\).

Because \(p\ge 0\), the PSD requirement is equivalent to \[1-\alpha\ge 0,\qquad 1+2\alpha\ge 0 \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad -\frac{1}{2}\le \alpha\le 1. \label{eq:part07_alpha_bounds}\]

7.4.3.3 Interpolation rule: suppress anisotropy under strong mixing.

Define the mixing weight \(w_\lambda=\lambda/(1+\lambda)\) and define a bounded alignment-to-anisotropy map \(g_A:[0,1]\to[0,1]\). A simple gate-friendly choice is: \[g_A(A):= \begin{cases} 0, & A\le A_0,\\[0.5ex] \dfrac{A-A_0}{1-A_0}, & A_0< A < 1,\\[1.0ex] 1, & A=1, \end{cases} \qquad A_0\in[0,1). \label{eq:part07_gA_def}\] Then define \[\alpha(x,t):=\alpha_{\max}\,\big(1-w_\lambda(x,t)\big)\,g_A\big(A(x,t)\big), \qquad \alpha_{\max}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part07_alpha_interp}\] This ensures:

  • if \(\lambda\) is large (\(w_\lambda\approx 1\)), then \(\alpha\approx 0\) and \(\mathbf{T}\approx p\mathbf{I}\) (isotropy);

  • if alignment is weak (\(A\le A_0\)), then \(\alpha=0\) (isotropy);

  • if alignment is strong and mixing is weak, \(\alpha\) can approach \(\alpha_{\max}\) (anisotropy).

Because \(\alpha_{\max}\le 1\), [eq:part07_alpha_bounds] holds (for nonnegative \(\alpha\)) and \(\mathbf{T}\succeq 0\) is guaranteed.

7.4.3.4 Resulting closure (CL-PA: partial-alignment closure).

Combine [eq:part07_T_axis_form][eq:part07_alpha_interp] to define: \[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}} \Big[(1-\alpha)(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k)+(1+2\alpha)(k\otimes k)\Big], \qquad \alpha=\alpha_{\max}(1-w_\lambda)g_A(A). \label{eq:part07_T_partial_alignment_closure}\] This closure is a HYP unless \(\alpha_{\max},A_0\) and the functional form are locked for a version.

7.4.3.5 Optional anisotropic relaxation (consistent with partial alignment).

Similarly one may allow \[\mathbf{B}=B_\perp(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k)+B_\parallel(k\otimes k), \qquad B_\perp>0,\ B_\parallel>0. \label{eq:part07_B_aniso}\] This is a modeling choice that affects jet collimation diagnostics in §7.5.

7.5 7.5 Strong-alignment regime: jet-tube / collimation diagnostics

Strong alignment means that the actor transport is predominantly along the axis \(k\) and the transverse leakage is small. This subsection defines quantitative diagnostics and the corresponding closure choice.

7.5.1 7.5.1 Strong-alignment gate conditions

Define the strong-alignment region \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jet}}\) by the conjunction of gates:

7.5.1.1 (J1) High alignment degree.

\[A(x,t)\ge 1-\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}}. \label{eq:part07_jet_A_high}\]

7.5.1.2 (J2) Small alignment defect.

\[a_k(x,t)\le \varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}}. \label{eq:part07_jet_ak_small}\] Note that [eq:part07_A_identity] implies then \(|\xi|\approx A\approx 1\).

7.5.1.3 (J3) Flux collimation.

Using [eq:part07_cS_def] and [eq:part07_leak_ratio], \[c_S(x,t)\ge 1-\varepsilon_S^{\mathrm{jet}} \quad \text{and/or}\quad \ell_\perp(x,t)\le \varepsilon_\perp^{\mathrm{jet}}. \label{eq:part07_jet_flux_collimation}\]

7.5.1.4 (J4) Stress anisotropy (if \(\mathbf{T}\) is available).

For the axisymmetric form [eq:part07_T_axis_form], define the anisotropy ratio \[r_T(x,t):=\frac{p_\parallel(x,t)}{p_\perp(x,t)+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part07_rT_def}\] Strong alignment typically expects \(r_T\) to be significantly larger than \(1\): \[r_T(x,t)\ge r_{T,\min}^{\mathrm{jet}}>1. \label{eq:part07_rT_gate}\] (If \(p_\perp\) is very small, one must ensure numerical regularity and PSD is maintained.)

7.5.1.5 (J5) Jet-tube geometry gate (if a tube model is used).

If a jet radius \(R_j(z,t)\) and axial scale \(L_z\) are defined, require slenderness: \[\varepsilon_{\mathrm{geom}}:=\frac{\sup_{z,t}R_j(z,t)}{L_z}\ll 1, \label{eq:part07_slenderness}\] and require small radial leakage at the tube boundary: \[|S_R(R_j,z,t)| \le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{leak}}^{\mathrm{jet}}\ |S_z(R_j,z,t)|. \label{eq:part07_leak_boundary_gate}\]

7.5.2 7.5.2 Strong-alignment closure choice (CL-JET)

In \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jet}}\), use the axisymmetric closure [eq:part07_T_axis_form] with a strongly anisotropic parameter choice. A concrete minimal option is to reuse the \(\alpha\)-parameterization: \[p_\perp=p(1-\alpha),\qquad p_\parallel=p(1+2\alpha),\qquad p=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}},\] and enforce \[\alpha(x,t)\ge \alpha_{\min}^{\mathrm{jet}}>0 \quad\text{within }\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jet}}, \label{eq:part07_alpha_jet_gate}\] with \(\alpha_{\min}^{\mathrm{jet}}\le \alpha_{\max}\le 1\).

7.5.3 7.5.3 Collimation balance in the transverse direction (diagnostic equation)

Write the flux equation [eq:part07_core_S] in components relative to \((k,\perp)\) with an anisotropic \(\mathbf{B}\) and axisymmetric \(\mathbf{T}\). In a coordinate system with \(k=\hat{z}\), the leading-order component equations (cf. PART 06) are: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t S_\perp + \nabla_\perp p_\perp &\approx -B_\perp S_\perp + e_{\mathrm{a}}F_\perp, \label{eq:part07_Sperp_balance}\\ \partial_t S_\parallel + \partial_\parallel p_\parallel &\approx -B_\parallel S_\parallel + e_{\mathrm{a}}F_\parallel, \label{eq:part07_Spar_balance}\end{aligned}\] where \(\nabla_\perp\) denotes gradients transverse to \(k\) and \(\partial_\parallel:=k\cdot\nabla\).

7.5.3.1 Transverse collimation condition.

A collimated jet has \(S_\perp\approx 0\) (or \(\ell_\perp\ll 1\)). In a steady/strong-relaxation transverse balance (neglecting \(\partial_t S_\perp\)), [eq:part07_Sperp_balance] yields: \[\nabla_\perp p_\perp \approx e_{\mathrm{a}}F_\perp. \label{eq:part07_transverse_equilibrium}\] This is the mathematically explicit statement that collimation requires either:

  • a transverse “pressure” gradient \(\nabla_\perp p_\perp\) balancing the transverse driving \(e_{\mathrm{a}}F_\perp\) (equilibrium collimation), and/or

  • strong transverse relaxation \(B_\perp\) that suppresses \(S_\perp\) for given forcing (damped collimation).

Equation [eq:part07_transverse_equilibrium] is a diagnostic: if measured fields violate it strongly while claiming \(S_\perp\approx 0\), the jet-collimation regime claim fails.

7.6 7.6 Regime transition conditions (alignment defect \(a_k\), gates, boundary/geometry)

Regime transitions are declared by gate crossings in measurable diagnostics. This subsection defines (i) the regime partitions, (ii) transition triggers, and (iii) boundary/geometry compatibility gates.

7.6.1 7.6.1 Regime partition by diagnostic thresholds

Fix thresholds (LOCK for a given version): \[w_{\lambda,\min}^{\mathrm{mix}},\quad \varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{mix}},\ \varepsilon_T^{\mathrm{mix}},\quad \varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}},\ \varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}},\ \varepsilon_\perp^{\mathrm{jet}},\quad r_{T,\min}^{\mathrm{jet}},\quad A_0,\ \alpha_{\max}.\] Then define:

7.6.1.1 Mixing-dominated region \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mix}}\).

Given by [eq:part07_Rmix_def].

7.6.1.2 Strong-alignment (jet) region \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jet}}\).

Given by [eq:part07_jet_A_high][eq:part07_jet_flux_collimation] (and optionally [eq:part07_rT_gate], [eq:part07_slenderness][eq:part07_leak_boundary_gate] if geometry is used).

7.6.1.3 Partial-alignment region \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{pa}}\).

Define \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{pa}}:=\big(\Omega\times\mathbb{R}\big)\setminus\big(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mix}}\cup\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jet}}\big),\] together with the additional requirement that \(A\) is not negligible (otherwise it would be mixing) and not near-saturated with \(a_k\approx 0\) (otherwise it would be jet). Operationally one can enforce [eq:part07_partial_alignment_range] inside \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{pa}}\).

7.6.2 7.6.2 Transition triggers

Transitions are declared when diagnostics cross thresholds in a controlled way.

7.6.2.1 Mixing \(\rightarrow\) partial alignment.

Occurs when either mixing weakens or alignment grows: \[w_\lambda \downarrow \ \text{below }w_{\lambda,\min}^{\mathrm{mix}} \quad\text{and/or}\quad A \uparrow \ \text{above }\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{mix}} \quad\text{and/or}\quad \mathcal{A}_T\uparrow \ \text{above }\varepsilon_T^{\mathrm{mix}}.\]

7.6.2.2 Partial alignment \(\rightarrow\) strong alignment (jet).

Occurs when alignment saturates and defect collapses: \[A \uparrow \ \text{to }\ge 1-\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}} \quad\text{and}\quad a_k \downarrow \ \text{to }\le \varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}} \quad\text{and}\quad \ell_\perp \downarrow \ \text{to }\le \varepsilon_\perp^{\mathrm{jet}}\] (with optional geometry gates if using tube reduction).

7.6.2.3 Strong alignment \(\rightarrow\) partial/mixing (de-collimation).

Occurs if any of the jet gates fail persistently: \[a_k\uparrow\ \text{or}\ \ell_\perp\uparrow\ \text{or}\ A\downarrow,\] possibly accompanied by increased mixing \(\lambda\).

7.6.2.4 Hysteresis note (allowed but must be declared).

One may allow different up/down thresholds (hysteresis) to avoid regime chatter. If so, all hysteresis parameters must be locked and reported as part of the regime specification; otherwise regime switching becomes post hoc tuning.

7.6.3 7.6.3 Boundary and geometry compatibility gates

Regime claims must be compatible with boundary conditions and with the geometric regularity of the axis field \(k\).

7.6.3.1 (BG1) Boundary flux compatibility.

If the domain boundary is closed: \[\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}=0 \quad \text{on }\partial\Omega,\] then any regime that assumes sustained net outflow through \(\partial\Omega\) is invalid. Conversely, a jet tube exiting a domain must be modeled as an open boundary with prescribed flux or inflow distribution.

7.6.3.2 (BG2) Axis-field regularity (curvature/variation gate).

Axisymmetric closures assume that \(k\) varies slowly compared to the closure scale. Define the transverse gradient magnitude \[\mathcal{K}_k(x,t):=\|(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k)\,\nabla k\|_F,\] and require (for axisymmetric closure validity): \[\mathcal{K}_k(x,t)\,L_{\mathrm{cl}} \le \varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{curv}}, \label{eq:part07_k_curv_gate}\] where \(L_{\mathrm{cl}}\) is the declared closure length scale (e.g. the coarse-graining length) and \(\varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{curv}}\) is a fixed small threshold. If [eq:part07_k_curv_gate] fails, one must either (i) avoid axisymmetric closures there or (ii) explicitly include \(k\)-variation terms in the closure model (a different closure class).

7.6.3.3 (BG3) Axisymmetry consistency gate (if axisymmetry is claimed).

If axisymmetry is claimed in cylindrical coordinates, require small \(\phi\)-variation: \[\frac{\|\partial_\phi e_{\mathrm{a}}\|}{\|e_{\mathrm{a}}\|+\eta_0}\le \varepsilon_\phi^{\mathrm{axi}}, \qquad \frac{\|\partial_\phi \rho\|}{\|\rho\|+\eta_0}\le \varepsilon_\phi^{\mathrm{axi}},\] (with appropriate norms, e.g. local \(L^2\) over a neighborhood). Otherwise the axisymmetric regime label is invalid.

7.7 7.7 Closure selection rules (a branching “selection tree” driven by observation and numerics)

This subsection provides a concrete closure-selection procedure that is:

  • gate-first: it refuses to select a closure if admissibility/realizability gates fail,

  • regime-driven: it selects closures based on pre-registered diagnostics and thresholds,

  • non-tunable: it forbids post hoc parameter tuning to pass gates.

7.7.1 7.7.1 Inputs and computed diagnostics

7.7.1.1 Inputs (data or evolving fields).

At minimum: \[\rho,\ e_{\mathrm{a}},\ \mathbf{S},\ k,\ \lambda,\ \mu,\ \Gamma.\] If available, also: \[\mathbf{T}\ (\text{measured or reconstructed}),\quad \mathbf{m}_b\ (\text{or }A,a_k,\xi).\] If \(\mathbf{m}_b\) is unavailable, one must specify a proxy for alignment (SPEC) and gate it carefully.

7.7.1.2 Computed diagnostics.

Compute: \[w_\lambda=\frac{\lambda}{1+\lambda},\quad A=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}+\eta_0},\quad a_k=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b-(\mathbf{m}_b\cdot k)k\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}+\eta_0},\] \[c_S=\frac{\mathbf{S}\cdot k}{\|\mathbf{S}\|+\eta_0},\quad \ell_\perp=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}- (\mathbf{S}\cdot k)k\|}{\|\mathbf{S}\|+\eta_0},\] and if \(\mathbf{T}\) is present, \[\mathcal{A}_T=\frac{\|\mathbf{T}-\frac{1}{3}\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})\mathbf{I}\|_F}{\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})+\eta_0}.\]

7.7.2 7.7.2 Gate set (must pass before any closure is selected)

7.7.2.1 Gate G0: Phase admissibility (simplex).

\[0\le \rho\le 1,\quad 0\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1,\quad 0\le e_{\mathrm{bg}}:=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1.\]

7.7.2.2 Gate G1: Alignment identity (if \(A,a_k,\xi\) are used).

If \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\) and both \(A\) and \(\xi\) and \(a_k\) are computed, require \[\big|A^2-\xi^2-a_k^2\big|\le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{id}}.\] This is an internal consistency check.

7.7.2.3 Gate G2: Realizability gates for closures involving \(\mathbf{T}\).

Any proposed closure must satisfy: \[\mathbf{T}\succeq 0,\qquad \|\mathbf{S}\|^2\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\ \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})\quad (\text{if }\mathbf{T}\text{ is used}).\]

7.7.2.4 Gate G3: Geometry gates (if axisymmetric/jet closure is chosen).

Require [eq:part07_k_curv_gate] and, if axisymmetry is claimed, small \(\phi\)-variation.

If any mandatory gate fails, the procedure outputs FAIL with the failing gate label; no closure is selected.

7.7.3 7.7.3 The selection tree

The selection tree is expressed as a deterministic branching logic.

INPUT: rho, e_a, S, k, lambda, (optional: m_b or A, a_k, xi), (optional: T), parameters/thresh.

STEP 0 (Compute diagnostics):
  w_lambda, A, a_k, c_S, l_perp, (optional: A_T), (optional: morphology indices).

STEP 1 (Mandatory gates):
  if simplex/admissibility fails -> FAIL[G0]
  if using alignment diagnostics and identity fails -> FAIL[G1]
  if choosing any closure that implies/uses T:
     check PSD + inequality gates -> FAIL[G2] if violated
  if axisymmetric/jet closure candidate:
     check geometry/axis gates -> FAIL[G3] if violated

STEP 2 (Regime identification):
  if (w_lambda >= w_lambda_min_mix) and (A <= epsA_mix) and (A_T <= epsT_mix if available):
       regime := MIXING
  else if (A >= 1 - epsA_jet) and (a_k <= epsk_jet) and (l_perp <= epsperp_jet):
       regime := JET
  else:
       regime := PARTIAL_ALIGNMENT

STEP 3 (Closure selection by regime):
  if regime == MIXING:
       choose CL-ISO: T = kappa_T e_a I
       if strong-relax ordering declared and DD residual is small:
            use diffusion reduction S ≈ -D ∇e_a + e_a u_eff
  if regime == PARTIAL_ALIGNMENT:
       choose CL-PA: axisymmetric form with alpha = alpha_max (1 - w_lambda) g_A(A)
       optionally choose anisotropic B if validated
       if morphology indicates hollow tube (H large):
            allow radially varying p_perp(R,z,t) through kappa_T(R,z,t) (must be declared)
  if regime == JET:
       choose CL-JET: axisymmetric form with alpha >= alpha_min_jet
       use anisotropic relaxation B_perp, B_par if needed
       if tube reduction is invoked:
            enforce leakage gate and use 1D tube balance with explicit leakage term

OUTPUT: regime label + chosen closure class + required gate report.

7.7.4 7.7.4 Closure-selection reporting requirements (artifact rules)

Every run of the selection procedure must output an artifact containing:

  1. the computed diagnostic fields (\(w_\lambda,A,a_k,c_S,\ell_\perp,\mathcal{A}_T,\ldots\)),

  2. the boolean pass/fail result of each gate (with numerical margins),

  3. the selected regime label and closure identifier (CL-ISO / CL-PA / CL-JET),

  4. the parameter set used (threshold values, \(\alpha_{\max}\), \(A_0\), etc.) with version hashes.

This is mandatory for reproducibility (PART 02).

7.7.5 7.7.5 Summary table: regimes, diagnostics, and default closures

Regime map summary (diagnostics \(\rightarrow\) default closure choice). Thresholds are pre-registered constants.
Regime Key diagnostics (typical gates) Default closure Notes
Mixing-dominated \(w_\lambda\ge w_{\lambda,\min}^{\mathrm{mix}}\), \(A\le \varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{mix}}\), \(\mathcal{A}_T\le \varepsilon_T^{\mathrm{mix}}\) CL-ISO: \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{I}\) Diffusion limit if strong relaxation holds
Partial alignment Intermediate \(A\), non-negligible \(a_k\) or moderate \(\ell_\perp\) CL-PA: axisymmetric with \(\alpha=\alpha_{\max}(1-w_\lambda)g_A(A)\) Morphology: channel/hollow/corona diagnostics
Strong alignment (jet) \(A\ge 1-\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}}\), \(a_k\le \varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}}\), \(\ell_\perp\le \varepsilon_\perp^{\mathrm{jet}}\) CL-JET: axisymmetric with \(\alpha\ge \alpha_{\min}^{\mathrm{jet}}\) Jet-tube reduction requires leakage & geometry gates

8 PART 08. Gate Physics: Critical Radius, Choking, Saturation, and Throughput (Output 8)

This Part formalizes the physics of gates as it appears in the upgraded core system: threshold behavior, capacity limits, and finite-throughput effects. Operationally, a “gate” is a rule that (i) switches a mechanism on/off or (ii) clamps a variable to an admissible range when a physical bound would otherwise be violated. The resulting phenomena include: critical radii, saturation plateaus, choking (flux limiting), finite signal speeds, time delays, jet onset, and central relaxation.

8.0.0.1 Core system assumed.

We use the (T1) core (PART 06), repeated for completeness: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\,\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:part08_core_rho}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= +\mu\,\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:part08_core_ea}\\ \partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{T} &= -\mathbf{B}\,\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}. \label{eq:part08_core_S}\end{aligned}\] The bookkeeping phases are \[e_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}},\qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}:=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad (e_{\mathrm{bg}},\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\in\mathcal{S}.\] Dimensions (PART 03/06): \[\delta(\rho)=\delta(e_{\mathrm{a}})=0,\quad \delta(\mathbf{S})=LT^{-1},\quad \delta(\mathbf{T})=L^2T^{-2},\quad \delta(\mu)=\delta(\Gamma)=T^{-1},\quad \delta(\mathbf{B})=T^{-1},\quad \delta(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}})=LT^{-2}.\]

8.1 8.1 Gate definition: on/off decision variables and threshold conditions

8.1.1 8.1.1 Gate variables, decision variables, and hard/soft implementations

A gate is defined by:

  • a real-valued decision variable \(q(x,t)\in\mathbb{R}\),

  • a threshold (critical value) \(q_c\in\mathbb{R}\),

  • and a mapping to a gate state \(G(x,t)\in[0,1]\).

8.1.1.1 Hard (on/off) gate.

The idealized on/off gate is the Heaviside step: \[G_{\mathrm{hard}}(x,t) := H\!\big(q(x,t)-q_c\big) = \begin{cases} 0,& q<q_c,\\ 1,& q\ge q_c. \end{cases} \label{eq:part08_hard_gate}\] Hard gates are analytically convenient but introduce discontinuities.

8.1.1.2 Soft (smoothed) gate.

For numerical stability and weak-solution well-posedness, a smooth approximation is usually preferred. A standard choice is the logistic gate: \[G_{\mathrm{soft}}(x,t) := \sigma\!\left(\frac{q(x,t)-q_c}{\Delta_q}\right), \qquad \sigma(z):=\frac{1}{1+e^{-z}}, \qquad \Delta_q>0, \label{eq:part08_soft_gate_logistic}\] or equivalently a \(\tanh\)-gate: \[G_{\mathrm{soft}}(x,t) := \frac{1}{2}\left[1+\tanh\!\left(\frac{q(x,t)-q_c}{2\Delta_q}\right)\right]. \label{eq:part08_soft_gate_tanh}\] The gate width \(\Delta_q\) must be declared (SPEC) and locked for a given version to avoid post hoc tuning.

8.1.1.3 Gate surface and critical radius.

The gate surface is the set where \(q=q_c\). In spherical settings, when \(q=q(r,t)\) depends only on \(r=\|x\|\), the gate surface becomes a sphere at a critical radius \(r=r_c(t)\) defined implicitly by: \[q(r_c(t),t)=q_c. \label{eq:part08_critical_radius_def}\] If \(q(r,t)\) is monotone in \(r\) for fixed \(t\), the critical radius is unique.

8.1.2 8.1.2 Gate algebra: AND/OR/NOT as deterministic compositions

Multiple gates often act together. We define deterministic compositions that preserve \([0,1]\).

8.1.2.1 NOT.

\[\neg G := 1-G.\]

8.1.2.2 AND.

For \(G_1,\dots,G_n\in[0,1]\), \[G_{\mathrm{AND}}:=\prod_{i=1}^n G_i. \label{eq:part08_gate_and}\] For hard gates this is exact logical AND; for soft gates it is a smooth “all conditions nearly satisfied” operator.

8.1.2.3 OR.

\[G_{\mathrm{OR}}:=1-\prod_{i=1}^n (1-G_i). \label{eq:part08_gate_or}\]

8.1.2.4 Usage rule.

Gate algebra is SPEC: the exact form ([eq:part08_gate_and][eq:part08_gate_or]) and the thresholds used must be fixed before any evaluation. Otherwise the gating system becomes a tuning knob rather than a falsifiable structure.

8.1.3 8.1.3 Standard decision variables used in this document

The following decision variables appear repeatedly:

8.1.3.1 (i) Saturation decision variable.

For conversion saturation we use a dimensionless loading ratio: \[\chi_\Gamma(x,t):=\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}{K_\Gamma(x,t)+\eta_0}, \qquad K_\Gamma>0,\qquad \eta_0>0 \text{ (small fixed regularizer)}. \label{eq:part08_chi_gamma}\] Saturation typically corresponds to \(\chi_\Gamma\gg 1\).

8.1.3.2 (ii) Choking decision variable (flux ratio).

Given a speed limit \(c>0\) (defined in §8.4), define: \[\chi_S(x,t):=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|}{c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+\eta_0}, \qquad \chi_S\in[0,\infty). \label{eq:part08_chi_S}\] Choking corresponds to \(\chi_S\to 1\) (or exceeding 1 in an unconstrained demand model).

8.1.3.3 (iii) Potential/drive decision variable.

If \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}=-\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}+\cdots\) (PART 06), define a drive-to-capacity ratio: \[\chi_F(x,t):=\frac{\|\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}(x,t)\|}{B_{\mathrm{ref}}(x,t)\,c+\eta_0}, \label{eq:part08_chi_F}\] where \(B_{\mathrm{ref}}\) is a declared scalar reference relaxation (e.g. \(B\) in isotropic regimes). In diffusion-like balances, choking is often triggered when \(\chi_F\gtrsim 1\) (see §8.3.3).

8.1.3.4 (iv) Throughput decision variables (surface flux).

For a surface \(\Sigma\) with unit normal \(\mathbf{n}\), define the local normal throughput density: \[j_\Sigma(x,t):=\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x),\] and the integrated throughput: \[\mathcal{J}_\Sigma(t):=\int_\Sigma \mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA. \label{eq:part08_throughput_surface}\]

8.1.3.5 (v) Geometric decision variable (radius).

In spherical problems, \(q=r\) itself is used with a threshold \(r_c\) to declare zones (inner/outer) where different mechanisms/closures apply.

8.2 8.2 Saturation: candidate families for \(\Gamma(e)\) and physical admissibility conditions

8.2.1 8.2.1 What saturates in the core: the active\(\rightarrow\)stored conversion rate

In the upgraded meaning layer (PART 04/06), \(\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\) is the active\(\rightarrow\)stored conversion term. With no transport (\(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0\)), the phase subsystem is: \[\begin{aligned} \dot{\rho} &= -\mu\rho+\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:part08_phase_ode_rho}\\ \dot{e}_{\mathrm{a}} &= +\mu\rho-\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}), \label{eq:part08_phase_ode_ea}\end{aligned}\] and the total actor fraction \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is conserved: \[\dot{e}_{\mathrm{tot}}=0.\] Thus saturation in \(\Gamma\) produces reaction-limited behavior: when \(\Gamma\) hits a maximum, additional active loading cannot be processed faster by conversion alone.

8.2.2 8.2.2 Admissibility requirements for \(\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\)

Because \(\Gamma\) appears as a rate in [eq:part08_core_rho][eq:part08_core_ea], admissibility conditions are non-negotiable gates.

8.2.2.1 (A1) Dimension and non-negativity.

\[\delta(\Gamma)=T^{-1}, \qquad \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\ge 0 \ \ \text{for } e_{\mathrm{a}}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part08_gamma_dim_pos}\]

8.2.2.2 (A2) Zero-input consistency.

No active content implies no active\(\rightarrow\)stored conversion: \[\Gamma(x,t;0)=0. \label{eq:part08_gamma_zero}\]

8.2.2.3 (A3) Boundedness (saturation).

There exists a declared capacity \(\Gamma_{\max}(x,t)\ge 0\) such that \[0\le \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\le \Gamma_{\max}(x,t) \quad \text{for all } e_{\mathrm{a}}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part08_gamma_bounded}\] This encodes processing saturation.

8.2.2.4 (A4) Regularity (for well-posedness and reproducibility).

For each \((x,t)\), the map \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mapsto \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\) is locally Lipschitz on \([0,1]\): \[|\Gamma(e_1)-\Gamma(e_2)|\le L_\Gamma |e_1-e_2| \quad \text{for some }L_\Gamma<\infty. \label{eq:part08_gamma_lipschitz}\] Hard saturation (piecewise linear) is allowed but must be handled carefully in numerics.

8.2.2.5 (A5) Monotonicity (optional but common).

Many physical interpretations require \(\Gamma\) to increase with \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (more active content leads to more conversion up to capacity): \[\partial_{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})\ge 0. \label{eq:part08_gamma_monotone}\] If non-monotone \(\Gamma\) is used, the mechanism and the gate tests must be explicitly stated.

8.2.3 8.2.3 A unifying parameterization: \(\Gamma_{\max}\times g(e_{\mathrm{a}})\) with \(g\in[0,1]\)

A convenient admissible form is: \[\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})=\Gamma_{\max}(x,t)\,g\!\big(e_{\mathrm{a}};K_\Gamma,n,\ldots\big), \label{eq:part08_gamma_g_form}\] where \(g:[0,1]\to[0,1]\) is dimensionless and satisfies \(g(0)=0\). Then [eq:part08_gamma_bounded] is automatic.

8.2.4 8.2.4 Candidate saturation families (library) and their properties

We list standard candidates for \(g(e_{\mathrm{a}})\).

8.2.4.1 (G1) Hill/Michaelis–Menten saturation (smooth, tunable sharpness).

For \(K_\Gamma>0\) and Hill exponent \(n\ge 1\): \[g_{\mathrm{Hill}}(e_{\mathrm{a}}):= \frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}^n}{K_\Gamma^n+e_{\mathrm{a}}^n}. \label{eq:part08_gamma_hill}\] Properties: \[g_{\mathrm{Hill}}(0)=0,\qquad g_{\mathrm{Hill}}(e_{\mathrm{a}})\uparrow 1 \text{ as } e_{\mathrm{a}}\gg K_\Gamma, \qquad 0\le g_{\mathrm{Hill}}\le 1.\] Derivative: \[g'_{\mathrm{Hill}}(e_{\mathrm{a}})= \frac{n K_\Gamma^n e_{\mathrm{a}}^{n-1}}{(K_\Gamma^n+e_{\mathrm{a}}^n)^2}\ge 0.\]

8.2.4.2 (G2) Exponential saturation (smooth, fast approach).

\[g_{\exp}(e_{\mathrm{a}}):=1-\exp\!\left(-\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{K_\Gamma}\right). \label{eq:part08_gamma_exp}\] Properties: \[g_{\exp}(0)=0,\qquad 0\le g_{\exp}<1,\qquad g'_{\exp}(e_{\mathrm{a}})=\frac{1}{K_\Gamma}e^{-e_{\mathrm{a}}/K_\Gamma}\ge 0.\]

8.2.4.3 (G3) Rational saturator (smooth, low-order).

\[g_{\mathrm{rat}}(e_{\mathrm{a}}):=\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{K_\Gamma+e_{\mathrm{a}}}. \label{eq:part08_gamma_rational}\] This is the \(n=1\) Hill case.

8.2.4.4 (G4) Piecewise-linear hard saturation (non-smooth at \(K_\Gamma\)).

\[g_{\mathrm{lin}}(e_{\mathrm{a}}):=\min\left\{\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{K_\Gamma},\,1\right\}. \label{eq:part08_gamma_piecewise}\] This is admissible but non-differentiable at \(e_{\mathrm{a}}=K_\Gamma\).

8.2.4.5 (G5) Shifted logistic (smooth, tunable threshold) with exact \(g(0)=0\).

Define \[\tilde{g}(e_{\mathrm{a}}):=\sigma\!\left(\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}-K_\Gamma}{\Delta_\Gamma}\right),\qquad \tilde{g}_0:=\tilde{g}(0),\] and renormalize: \[g_{\mathrm{log}}(e_{\mathrm{a}}):= \frac{\tilde{g}(e_{\mathrm{a}})-\tilde{g}_0}{1-\tilde{g}_0}, \qquad \Delta_\Gamma>0. \label{eq:part08_gamma_logistic_shifted}\] Then \(g_{\mathrm{log}}(0)=0\) and \(g_{\mathrm{log}}\to 1\) as \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\to 1\) (if \(K_\Gamma<1\) and \(\Delta_\Gamma\) small enough). This form is useful when the onset of conversion is itself gated near a threshold.

8.2.5 8.2.5 Saturation gate: declaring when \(\Gamma\) is effectively saturated

Define the saturation indicator: \[G_{\mathrm{sat}}(x,t):= H\!\left(\frac{\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})}{\Gamma_{\max}(x,t)+\eta_0}-\theta_{\mathrm{sat}}\right) \quad \text{(hard)}, \label{eq:part08_Gsat_hard}\] or the soft version using [eq:part08_soft_gate_logistic]. Here \(\theta_{\mathrm{sat}}\in(0,1)\) is a locked threshold (e.g. \(0.9\)). When \(G_{\mathrm{sat}}\approx 1\) the system is in a reaction-capacity-limited state.

8.3 8.3 Choking: flux upper bounds and conditions for occurrence

8.3.1 8.3.1 The fundamental flux bound from a speed limit

A physically minimal way to enforce finite transport speed is to assume the active-velocity support is bounded: \[\mathcal{V}_c:=\{v\in\mathbb{R}^3:\ \|v\|\le c\}, \qquad f(x,v,t)=0\ \text{for } \|v\|>c, \label{eq:part08_velocity_support_bound}\] where \(c>0\) is the maximal microscopic transport speed.

8.3.1.1 Proposition 8.1 (flux bound).

If [eq:part08_velocity_support_bound] holds and \(f\ge 0\), then \[\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|\le c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t) \quad \text{for all }(x,t). \label{eq:part08_flux_bound_main}\]

8.3.1.2 Proof.

By definition \(\mathbf{S}=\int_{\mathcal{V}_c} v f\,dv\). Then \[\|\mathbf{S}\| = \left\|\int_{\mathcal{V}_c} v f\,dv\right\| \le \int_{\mathcal{V}_c}\|v\| f\,dv \le \int_{\mathcal{V}_c} c\,f\,dv = c\int_{\mathcal{V}_c} f\,dv = c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}.\] \(\square\)

8.3.1.3 Second-moment refinement and closure constraint.

Under [eq:part08_velocity_support_bound], the trace of the second moment satisfies: \[\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})(x,t) = \int_{\mathcal{V}_c} \|v\|^2 f\,dv \le c^2 \int_{\mathcal{V}_c} f\,dv = c^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t). \label{eq:part08_Ttrace_bound}\] Combined with the general realizability inequality (PART 06), \[\|\mathbf{S}\|^2\le e_{\mathrm{a}}\ \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T}),\] we again obtain [eq:part08_flux_bound_main]. Importantly, [eq:part08_Ttrace_bound] imposes a gate constraint on closures: any closure implying \(\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})>c^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}\) violates the speed-support assumption and must be rejected.

8.3.2 8.3.2 Definition of choking and a gate-ready choking ratio

8.3.2.1 Choking ratio.

Using [eq:part08_chi_S], define: \[\chi_S(x,t)=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}\|}{c e_{\mathrm{a}}+\eta_0}.\] In the speed-limited theory, admissibility requires \(\chi_S\le 1\) (up to the small regularizer). Therefore:

8.3.2.2 Definition (choking).

A region is choked if the flux is close to its maximal admissible magnitude: \[\chi_S(x,t)\ge \theta_{\mathrm{choke}}, \qquad \theta_{\mathrm{choke}}\in(0,1)\ \text{locked}. \label{eq:part08_choking_def}\] A natural choice is \(\theta_{\mathrm{choke}}\approx 0.9\).

8.3.3 8.3.3 When does choking occur? (Demand vs capacity)

Choking is triggered when the demand implied by the dynamics exceeds the capacity bound [eq:part08_flux_bound_main]. To formalize this, define an unconstrained demand flux \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\) by the strong-relaxation balance of [eq:part08_core_S] (set \(\mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}}=0\) for the core, and neglect \(\partial_t\mathbf{S}\) in the declared strong-relaxation regime): \[\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}} := \mathbf{B}^{-1}\Big(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}-\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}\Big). \label{eq:part08_S_demand}\] (For isotropic \(\mathbf{B}=B\mathbf{I}\) this is simply \((e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}-\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T})/B\).)

8.3.3.1 Choking condition (generic).

Choking is expected wherever \[\|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\| > c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}. \label{eq:part08_choking_condition_generic}\] In that case the physical system cannot realize the demanded flux without violating the speed limit, so a flux limiter (or a different dynamical regime) must intervene.

8.3.3.2 Choking condition under isotropic closure (CL-ISO).

With \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{I}\) and \(\mathbf{B}=B\mathbf{I}\), \[\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}=\nabla(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}),\] so \[\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}} = -\frac{1}{B}\nabla(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}) +\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}}{B}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part08_S_demand_iso}\] Thus choking occurs where \[\left\| -\nabla(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}) +e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} \right\| > B\,c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}. \label{eq:part08_choking_iso_condition}\] If gradients of \((\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}})\) are negligible compared to the driving, \[\|\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\| > Bc\] is a simple trigger; this connects to the drive ratio \(\chi_F\) in [eq:part08_chi_F].

8.3.4 8.3.4 Flux limiting as a gate: hard and smooth limiters

When [eq:part08_choking_condition_generic] holds, the system must realize an actual flux \(\mathbf{S}\) satisfying [eq:part08_flux_bound_main]. A practical gate-based rule is a limiter mapping: \[\mathbf{S} := \mathcal{L}\big(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}};\ c e_{\mathrm{a}}\big), \qquad \|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}.\]

8.3.4.1 Hard limiter.

\[\mathcal{L}_{\mathrm{hard}}(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}};c e_{\mathrm{a}}) := \begin{cases} \mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}, & \|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}},\\[0.75ex] c e_{\mathrm{a}}\dfrac{\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}}{\|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\|}, & \|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\|> c e_{\mathrm{a}}. \end{cases} \label{eq:part08_limiter_hard}\]

8.3.4.3 Gate view.

The limiter implements the gate \[G_{\mathrm{choke}} = H\!\left(\|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\|-c e_{\mathrm{a}}\right)\] by switching between \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{dem}}\) and a clamped magnitude.

8.3.5 8.3.5 Critical radius from choking (spherical baseline derivation)

In spherical symmetry, \(\mathbf{S}=S_r(r,t)\hat{r}\) and a driving field often has radial magnitude \(F_r(r,t)\). Consider the isotropic strong-relaxation demand [eq:part08_S_demand_iso] and ignore \(\partial_r(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}})\) for a first diagnostic. Then \[S_{r,\mathrm{dem}}(r,t)\approx \frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t)}{B(r,t)}F_r(r,t).\] Choking occurs when \(|S_{r,\mathrm{dem}}|>c e_{\mathrm{a}}\), i.e. \[\frac{|F_r(r,t)|}{B(r,t)} > c. \label{eq:part08_choke_radius_condition}\] Define the choking critical radius \(r_{\mathrm{ch}}(t)\) by equality: \[\frac{|F_r(r_{\mathrm{ch}}(t),t)|}{B(r_{\mathrm{ch}}(t),t)} = c. \label{eq:part08_rch_def}\] If \(|F_r|/B\) is monotone in \(r\), then \(r_{\mathrm{ch}}(t)\) separates an inner choked zone from an outer unchoked zone.

8.3.5.1 Example: inverse-square drive.

If \(|F_r(r)|=K_F/r^2\) and \(B\) is constant, then \[r_{\mathrm{ch}}=\sqrt{\frac{K_F}{B c}}. \label{eq:part08_rch_inverse_square}\] This is a concrete formula for an “emergent critical radius” produced solely by a flux capacity bound.

8.4 8.4 Throughput and speed limitation: minimal structure to introduce an emergent \(c\)

8.4.1 8.4.1 Throughput definitions and bounds

8.4.1.1 Local transport velocity.

When \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\), define the mean transport velocity of the active phase: \[\mathbf{u}(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{S}(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)}. \label{eq:part08_u_def}\] The flux bound [eq:part08_flux_bound_main] implies an emergent speed bound: \[\|\mathbf{u}(x,t)\|\le c. \label{eq:part08_u_bound}\]

8.4.1.2 Surface throughput bound.

For any surface \(\Sigma\), \[|\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}|\le \|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}},\] so \[|\mathcal{J}_\Sigma(t)| = \left|\int_\Sigma \mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA\right| \le \int_\Sigma |\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}|\,dA \le c\int_\Sigma e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dA. \label{eq:part08_throughput_bound_surface}\] In a spherical setting, \[\mathcal{J}(r,t)=4\pi r^2 S_r(r,t),\] and the pointwise bound \(|S_r|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}\) yields: \[|\mathcal{J}(r,t)|\le 4\pi r^2 c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t). \label{eq:part08_throughput_spherical_bound}\]

8.4.2 8.4.2 Minimal micro-to-macro insertion of \(c\)

There are two minimal, upgrade-compatible ways to introduce \(c\).

8.4.2.1 (M1) Velocity-support postulate.

Postulate [eq:part08_velocity_support_bound]. This yields [eq:part08_flux_bound_main] and [eq:part08_u_bound] directly and is the cleanest analytic path.

8.4.2.2 (M2) Lattice step-speed realization.

If the micro-kinematics is realized by a coarse lattice with length step \(a\) and time step \(\Delta t\) (PART 03 unit realization), then the maximal speed is \[c:=\frac{a}{\Delta t}. \label{eq:part08_c_from_lattice}\] If the active phase moves at most one cell per \(\Delta t\), then \(\|v\|\le c\) holds effectively.

Both mechanisms imply the same macroscopic gate: \(\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

8.4.3 8.4.3 How \(c\) gates closure parameters: trace constraints

Speed limitation is not only a flux limiter; it also restricts admissible closures for \(\mathbf{T}\) via [eq:part08_Ttrace_bound].

8.4.3.1 Isotropic closure constraint.

For CL-ISO, \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{I}\), hence \(\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})=3\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\). The trace bound [eq:part08_Ttrace_bound] requires: \[3\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\le c^2 e_{\mathrm{a}} \quad \Longrightarrow \quad \kappa_T\le \frac{c^2}{3}. \label{eq:part08_kappaT_bound}\] Thus \(\kappa_T\) cannot be arbitrarily large if \(c\) is finite.

8.4.3.2 Axisymmetric closure constraint.

For \(\mathbf{T}=p_\perp(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k)+p_\parallel(k\otimes k)\) with \(p_\perp,p_\parallel\ge 0\), \[\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})=2p_\perp+p_\parallel.\] The speed bound requires: \[2p_\perp+p_\parallel \le c^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}. \label{eq:part08_axis_trace_bound}\] Any parameterization (e.g. \(p_\perp=p(1-\alpha)\), \(p_\parallel=p(1+2\alpha)\) with \(p=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\)) must obey [eq:part08_axis_trace_bound] to be compatible with the same \(c\).

8.4.4 8.4.4 Throughput-limited propagation time and a causal bound

From [eq:part08_u_bound], information carried by the active transport cannot propagate faster than \(c\) through the advective channel. Along a path \(\gamma\) of length \(L\), the travel time satisfies: \[t_{\min}\ge \frac{L}{c}. \label{eq:part08_causal_time_bound}\] This is a gate-induced causal bound. (In contrast, pure diffusion models without a flux limiter have infinite-speed tails; the speed limit is the minimal structure that restores a finite transport speed channel.)

8.5 8.5 “Planck-sphere” or an effective minimum scale (optional)

This subsection is optional: it introduces a minimum effective length scale \(\ell_{\min}\) that regularizes singularities, stabilizes gate definitions, and marks the breakdown of continuum approximations.

8.5.1 8.5.1 Minimum scale and coarse-grained fields

Let \(\ell_{\min}>0\) be a declared minimum scale (called “Planck-sphere radius” if one wants to emphasize a fundamental cutoff). Define the ball \[B_{\ell_{\min}}(x):=\{y:\ \|y-x\|\le \ell_{\min}\}, \qquad |B_{\ell_{\min}}|=\frac{4\pi}{3}\ell_{\min}^3.\] For any field \(q(x,t)\), define the coarse-grained field: \[q_{\ell_{\min}}(x,t):= \frac{1}{|B_{\ell_{\min}}|}\int_{B_{\ell_{\min}}(x)} q(y,t)\,dy. \label{eq:part08_coarse_grain_def}\]

8.5.1.1 Gate rule.

All decision variables used in hard gates (§8.1.1) may be evaluated on coarse-grained fields \(q_{\ell_{\min}}\) to avoid pathological triggering from sub-resolution fluctuations.

8.5.2 8.5.2 Regularizing effective potentials and avoiding central singularities

If \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}=-\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}+\cdots\) and \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) has a singular behavior near \(r=0\), replace \(r\) by a regularized radius: \[r_\ell := \sqrt{r^2+\ell_{\min}^2}.\] For example, an inverse-radius effective potential can be regularized as: \[\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}^{(\ell)}(r):=-\frac{K_\Phi}{\sqrt{r^2+\ell_{\min}^2}}, \qquad K_\Phi>0. \label{eq:part08_regularized_potential}\] Then the radial drive is finite at \(r=0\): \[|F_r(r)| = \left|\partial_r \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}^{(\ell)}(r)\right| = \frac{K_\Phi\,r}{(r^2+\ell_{\min}^2)^{3/2}} \le \frac{K_\Phi}{\ell_{\min}^2}. \label{eq:part08_regularized_force_bound}\] This interacts directly with choking: the maximum possible driving is bounded, which can remove unphysical infinite-demand choking at the center.

8.5.3 8.5.3 Minimum-scale impact on critical radii

If a critical radius \(r_c\) is defined by a gate condition (e.g. \(|F_r|/B=c\)), then in the presence of \(\ell_{\min}\) it is natural to enforce: \[r_c^{\mathrm{eff}} := \max\{r_c,\ \ell_{\min}\}. \label{eq:part08_rc_eff}\] This encodes the rule that no meaningful “structure” (gate sphere, shock thickness, core size) can be declared below the minimum effective scale.

8.6 8.6 Observational signals produced by gates: time delay, jet onset, and core relaxation

Gates create distinct, testable signatures because they introduce sharp changes in effective transport/processing behavior.

8.6.1 8.6.1 Time delay from finite throughput and choking

Consider a primarily advective transport channel with mean velocity \(\mathbf{u}=\mathbf{S}/e_{\mathrm{a}}\). Along a streamline, a signal carried by changes in \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) propagates at speed bounded by \(c\): \[\|\mathbf{u}\|\le c.\] Therefore the earliest-arrival time from a source region to an observer at distance \(L\) satisfies [eq:part08_causal_time_bound]: \[t_{\min}\ge \frac{L}{c}.\]

8.6.1.1 Additional delay from choking.

In a choked region, the flux saturates: \[\|\mathbf{S}\|\approx c e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad \chi_S\approx 1,\] and further increases in driving do not increase throughput. If the external driving increases abruptly, the system responds by accumulating gradients (and/or active density) rather than increasing flux. This creates a plateau in signal speed and a delayed response at larger radii.

8.6.1.2 Spherical travel-time estimate (baseline).

If the effective radial transport speed is \(u_r(r,t)=S_r/e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (for \(e_{\mathrm{a}}>0\)), then a quasi-1D travel-time estimate from \(r_1\) to \(r_2\) is: \[t_{\mathrm{travel}}\approx \int_{r_1}^{r_2} \frac{dr}{u_r(r,\cdot)}, \qquad |u_r|\le c. \label{eq:part08_travel_time_integral}\] Choking corresponds to \(|u_r|\approx c\) in some region, fixing a minimal local travel time density \(dr/c\).

8.6.2 8.6.2 Jet onset as a gate-crossing event

Jets (collimated outflows) are naturally described as a regime transition (PART 07): partial alignment \(\rightarrow\) strong alignment. Gate physics contributes an additional mechanism: when driving is strong enough to demand large axial throughput, choking and anisotropic closure selection can combine to generate abrupt, threshold-like collimation.

8.6.2.1 Operational gate for jet onset (summary).

Define the strong-alignment diagnostics (PART 07): \[A=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}},\qquad a_k=\frac{\|\mathbf{m}_b-(\mathbf{m}_b\cdot k)k\|}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}, \qquad \ell_\perp=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}-(\mathbf{S}\cdot k)k\|}{\|\mathbf{S}\|+\eta_0}.\] Then a minimal jet-onset gate is: \[G_{\mathrm{jet}} = H\!\big(A-(1-\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}})\big)\; H\!\big(\varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}}-a_k\big)\; H\!\big(\varepsilon_\perp^{\mathrm{jet}}-\ell_\perp\big). \label{eq:part08_jet_gate}\] When \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}=1\), the closure-selection tree chooses an axisymmetric jet closure (CL-JET) and enables jet-tube diagnostics.

8.6.2.2 Drive-assisted onset (throughput gate).

Additionally, define an axial throughput ratio (if \(k\) is the axis): \[\chi_{\parallel}(x,t):= \frac{\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)}{c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part08_chi_parallel}\] A strong-drive onset can be declared when \(\chi_{\parallel}\) approaches capacity while \(\ell_\perp\) becomes small: \[\chi_{\parallel}\to 1,\qquad \ell_\perp\to 0,\] indicating that the system is saturating axial throughput while suppressing transverse leakage—a robust signature of collimation.

8.6.3 8.6.3 Central relaxation produced by saturation and choking

A central region may become transport-limited (choked) and/or processing-limited (saturated \(\Gamma\)). In such a region, transport no longer efficiently removes active content, and the dynamics reduces (approximately) to local conversion.

8.6.3.1 Reduced local model in a choked/isolated core.

Assume that inside a region \(\Omega_c\): \[\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}\approx 0.\] This can occur either because \(\mathbf{S}\approx 0\) or because it is capacity-limited and nearly divergence-free locally.

Then [eq:part08_core_rho][eq:part08_core_ea] reduce to the local ODE system [eq:part08_phase_ode_rho][eq:part08_phase_ode_ea]. If \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}=E\) is approximately constant locally, then \(\rho=E-e_{\mathrm{a}}\) and \[\dot{e}_{\mathrm{a}} = \mu(E-e_{\mathrm{a}})-\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}). \label{eq:part08_core_reduced_ode}\]

8.6.3.2 Equilibrium and saturation-induced plateaus.

An equilibrium \(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star\) satisfies \[\mu(E-e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star)=\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star). \label{eq:part08_equilibrium_condition}\] If \(\Gamma\) saturates at \(\Gamma_{\max}\), then for large \(E\) or large \(\mu E\) one may reach a regime where \(\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}})\approx \Gamma_{\max}\) over a wide range of \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\). This creates a plateau in the relaxation: the conversion cannot accelerate beyond its capacity, so the core relaxes on the slower of the timescales \(\mu^{-1}\) and the effective slope of \(\Gamma\).

8.6.3.3 Linearized relaxation rate.

Linearize [eq:part08_core_reduced_ode] around \(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star\): \[\dot{\delta e} = -\mu\,\delta e - \Gamma'(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star)\,\delta e =-(\mu+\Gamma'(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star))\,\delta e.\] Thus the relaxation time is \[\tau_{\mathrm{core}}=\frac{1}{\mu+\Gamma'(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star)}. \label{eq:part08_core_relax_time}\] If \(\Gamma\) is strongly saturated at the operating point, \(\Gamma'(e_{\mathrm{a}}^\star)\) is small, and \(\tau_{\mathrm{core}}\approx 1/\mu\) (slow, storage-limited relaxation). If \(\Gamma\) is in its steep response region, \(\Gamma'\) is large and the relaxation can be significantly faster.

8.6.3.4 Observable signature.

A saturated/choked core tends to produce:

  • delayed response to increased external drive (because throughput cannot increase beyond capacity),

  • a transient build-up of gradients or local active fraction,

  • and a characteristic exponential (or near-exponential) relaxation with time constant [eq:part08_core_relax_time] once driving decreases.

8.6.4 8.6.4 Summary: three gate-induced signatures and their diagnostics

8.6.4.1 Time delay.

Bounded by \(L/c\) and amplified by choking. Diagnostics: \(\chi_S\) near 1 in an inner zone, plus delayed changes in \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) at outer radii.

8.6.4.2 Jet onset.

A gate-crossing event in alignment and leakage (and often in axial throughput). Diagnostics: \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}\) in [eq:part08_jet_gate] switches on; simultaneously \(\chi_{\parallel}\) increases while \(\ell_\perp\) decreases.

8.6.4.3 Core relaxation.

Dominated by conversion with saturated \(\Gamma\) and/or suppressed transport. Diagnostics: \(G_{\mathrm{sat}}\approx 1\) (conversion saturated), \(\chi_S\approx 1\) (transport choked), and relaxation time consistent with [eq:part08_core_relax_time].

9 PART 09. Deficit Gravity & Lattice Refraction: Rotation Curves, Lensing, and Colliding Clusters (Output 9)

This Part upgrades the “Deficit” term (PART 06.5) into an observationally testable sector: galaxy rotation curves, gravitational lensing (Einstein rings), and colliding galaxy clusters (separation phenomena). The key conceptual move is a redefinition of the dark-matter inference: instead of postulating an additional collisionless particle species, the mass discrepancy is attributed to an emergent deficit-mediated field generated and transported by the VP medium through inflow/drag/relaxation, with explicit gates and regime conditions.

9.0.0.1 Notation split (avoid symbol collision).

Throughout this Part:

  • \(\rho, e_{\mathrm{a}}, e_{\mathrm{bg}}, \mathbf{S}, \mathbf{T}\) are the dimensionless VP bookkeeping fields (PART 04–08).

  • \(\varrho_{\mathrm{b}}(x)\) is the physical baryonic mass density (units \(ML^{-3}\)).

  • \(G\) is the physical Newton constant (LOCK for observational comparison).

  • \(c\) is the emergent maximal transport speed from PART 08; for lensing/dynamics comparison we identify the observational \(c\) with the physical speed of light (LOCK in the observational layer).

9.0.0.2 Effective gravitational potential and field.

We write the effective potential driving nonrelativistic test-body motion as \[\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(x) = \Phi_{\mathrm{bar}}(x)+\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x), \label{eq:part09_Phi_eff_split}\] with corresponding effective acceleration \[\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{eff}}(x) := -\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(x) = \mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{bar}}(x)+\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}(x), \qquad \mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{bar}}:=-\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{bar}}, \quad \mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}:=-\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}. \label{eq:part09_g_eff_split}\]

9.0.0.3 Baryonic Newtonian piece (for comparison).

The baryonic potential obeys the Poisson equation \[\nabla^2\Phi_{\mathrm{bar}}=4\pi G\,\varrho_{\mathrm{b}}. \label{eq:part09_Phi_bar_Poisson}\] This is not an assumption about the VP sector; it is the operational definition of \(\Phi_{\mathrm{bar}}\) used to compare to standard inference.

9.0.0.4 Deficit piece (VP sector).

The VP sector provides a deficit field and a coupling rule that maps it to \(\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}\). The minimal, gate-friendly definition is:

\[\Delta(x,t) := e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\infty}(t)-e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t) \ge 0, \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\infty}(t):=\lim_{\|x\|\to\infty} e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t). \label{eq:part09_deficit_Delta_def}\] Because \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}\), this is equivalently a relative excess of actor content above the far-field reference: \[\Delta(x,t) = \big(\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\big) - \big(\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}\big)^{\infty}(t).\]

9.0.0.5 Coupling ansatz (HYP; must be LOCKed per version).

We couple deficit to potential by a local constitutive rule \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t):=-\alpha_\Phi\,c^2\,\Delta(x,t), \qquad \alpha_\Phi\ge 0\ \text{(dimensionless, LOCK per version)}. \label{eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling}\] Then the deficit acceleration is \[\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t)= -\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t) = +\alpha_\Phi\,c^2\,\nabla\Delta(x,t). \label{eq:part09_g_def_from_Delta}\] If \(\Delta\) decreases with radius away from a galaxy/cluster, \(\nabla\Delta\) points inward and \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}\) is attractive.

9.0.0.6 Deficit “effective density” (purely for comparison; not a new particle).

Given any potential \(\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}\), one can define an effective density by \[\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t):=\frac{1}{4\pi G}\,\nabla^2\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t) = -\frac{\alpha_\Phi c^2}{4\pi G}\,\nabla^2\Delta(x,t). \label{eq:part09_rho_def_eff}\] This \(\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}\) is not a fundamental particle density in this framework; it is an observational book-keeping object that reproduces the same \(\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}\) under Poisson inversion.

9.1 9.1 Redefining the “dark matter” interpretation (inflow/drag instead of new particles)

9.1.1 9.1.1 What observers actually infer

From kinematics or lensing, one infers an effective field \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{obs}}(x)\) or potential \(\Phi_{\mathrm{obs}}(x)\), then compares it to the baryon-only prediction \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{bar}}\) from [eq:part09_Phi_bar_Poisson]. The mass discrepancy field is \[\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{disc}}(x):=\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{obs}}(x)-\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{bar}}(x). \label{eq:part09_g_disc_def}\] In particle dark matter, one sets \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{disc}}\) equal to the gravity of an additional density \(\varrho_{\mathrm{DM}}\).

9.1.2 9.1.2 VP reinterpretation: discrepancy as deficit-mediated response

In the VP framework, we instead set \[\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{disc}}(x)\equiv \mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}(x), \label{eq:part09_disc_equals_def}\] where \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}\) is generated by the VP deficit field [eq:part09_deficit_Delta_def] and coupling [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling]. This is not a semantic relabeling: it changes what is expected in collisions, dissipation, transport, and time dependence. Specifically:

  • The deficit field is dynamical and obeys VP transport/reaction gates (PART 06–08).

  • The discrepancy can lag, saturate, choke, or detach depending on throughput and relaxation times (PART 08).

  • The field can behave like a refractive index gradient for null geodesics (lensing) without positing extra particles.

9.1.3 9.1.3 Inflow/drag mechanism as the operational meaning

The phrase “inflow/drag” is implemented as follows:

  1. Inflow/throughput: VP active content \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) supports flux \(\mathbf{S}\) (PART 05–07). In steady regimes, conserved or capacity-limited throughputs constrain spatial profiles (PART 08.4).

  2. Drag/relaxation: the flux equation includes a relaxation operator \(-\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S}\) (PART 06), which damps flux demand; under strong relaxation one obtains drift-diffusion reduced laws (PART 07.1).

  3. Deficit potential: spatial variations of background fraction (or equivalently of actor content) produce an effective potential [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling], so transport constraints become gravity-like field constraints.

Thus the “dark matter” inference is reinterpreted as: baryons drive a VP deficit distribution through transport and gating; that deficit distribution produces an additional attractive potential and lensing refraction.

9.2 9.2 Galaxy rotation curves: deriving a flat speed (assumptions, constants, regimes)

9.2.1 9.2.1 Circular-orbit condition

For a test body moving on a circular orbit in an axisymmetric potential \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(R,z)\) in the disk plane \(z=0\), the centripetal balance gives \[\frac{v_c^2(R)}{R} = \left.\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(R,z)\right|_{z=0}. \label{eq:part09_vc_general}\] Equivalently, \[v_c^2(R)=R\,\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{bar}}(R,0)+R\,\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(R,0). \label{eq:part09_vc_split}\] At large \(R\), baryons alone typically give \(R\,\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{bar}}\sim GM_{\mathrm{bar}}(<R)/R\) (declining). A flat curve \(v_c(R)\to V_f\) requires an additional piece with \[R\,\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(R,0)\to V_f^2 \quad (\text{constant}). \label{eq:part09_flat_requirement}\] Integrating this requirement yields the characteristic logarithmic potential: \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(R,0)\approx V_f^2\ln\!\left(\frac{R}{R_0}\right)+\mathrm{const}, \label{eq:part09_log_potential_flat}\] for some reference radius \(R_0\).

9.2.2 9.2.2 How a log potential arises from a transport-controlled deficit field (2D diffusion regime)

A logarithmic profile is the generic harmonic solution in two effective dimensions. In this framework, a flat rotation curve is therefore tied to a regime in which the deficit field is governed by an effectively 2D transport equation in the disk plane.

9.2.2.1 Regime declaration (MIXING, thin disk, quasi-steady).

Assume:

  1. (HYP/SPEC) Outside a core region \(R\ge R_0\), the VP active field is in a mixing-dominated regime (PART 07.3) with an isotropic closure and strong relaxation reduction, so the active dynamics reduces to drift-diffusion.

  2. (SPEC) The relevant deficit field is proportional to \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) in the outer disk plane: \[\Delta(R,0)\approx \Delta_0\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(R,0), \qquad \Delta_0>0\ \text{(LOCK)}. \label{eq:part09_Delta_propto_ea}\] (This is consistent with \(\Delta=e_{\mathrm{bg}}^\infty-e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) and \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=1-\rho-e_{\mathrm{a}}\) when \(\rho\) is negligible in the outer disk.)

  3. (SPEC) The disk is effectively thin compared to the radii of interest so that transport is effectively 2D in \((R,\phi)\) on scales \(\gg\) thickness.

  4. (SPEC) Quasi-steady outer region: \(\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}\approx 0\) for the time window relevant to rotation-curve measurement.

9.2.2.2 Outer-region equation.

From PART 07.1, in a diffusion-dominated regime and neglecting drift and reaction in the outer region, we obtain an approximately harmonic equation: \[\nabla_\perp\cdot\big(D\,\nabla_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}}\big)\approx 0 \quad\text{for } R\ge R_0, \label{eq:part09_outer_harmonic}\] where \(\nabla_\perp\) is the 2D gradient in the disk plane, and \(D=\kappa_T/B\) is the effective diffusion coefficient (PART 07.1).

For constant \(D\) this becomes \(\nabla_\perp^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}=0\) in the outer region.

9.2.2.3 Axisymmetric solution in 2D.

In cylindrical coordinates with axisymmetry (\(\partial_\phi=0\)), the 2D Laplacian is \[\nabla_\perp^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{1}{R}\partial_R(R\partial_R e_{\mathrm{a}}).\] Solving \(\nabla_\perp^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}=0\) gives \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(R,0)=A\ln\!\left(\frac{R}{R_0}\right)+B, \qquad R\ge R_0, \label{eq:part09_ea_log_solution}\] with constants \(A,B\) fixed by boundary/throughput conditions.

9.2.2.4 Coupling to potential and flat speed.

Using [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling] and [eq:part09_Delta_propto_ea] we obtain \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(R,0) \approx -\alpha_\Phi c^2 \Delta_0 e_{\mathrm{a}}(R,0) = -\alpha_\Phi c^2 \Delta_0 \Big[A\ln(R/R_0)+B\Big].\] Thus \[\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(R,0) = -\alpha_\Phi c^2 \Delta_0 \frac{A}{R},\] and the deficit contribution to the circular speed is \[v_{\mathrm{def}}^2(R):=R\partial_R\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(R,0) = -\alpha_\Phi c^2 \Delta_0 A \equiv V_f^2\quad (\text{constant}). \label{eq:part09_flat_speed_from_A}\] Therefore a flat rotation curve emerges if \(A<0\) (so that \(V_f^2>0\) with \(\alpha_\Phi,\Delta_0\ge 0\)), i.e. if \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (hence \(\Delta\)) decreases with radius.

9.2.3 9.2.3 Throughput boundary condition: fixing the amplitude via conserved radial flux

The constant \(A\) is not arbitrary: in the diffusion regime it is set by throughput (PART 08.4). The 2D diffusive flux in the disk plane (neglecting drift) is \[\mathbf{S}_\perp \approx -D\nabla_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}}.\] For an axisymmetric solution [eq:part09_ea_log_solution], \[\partial_R e_{\mathrm{a}}(R,0)=\frac{A}{R}, \qquad S_R(R,0)\approx -D\frac{A}{R}.\] Define the circumferential throughput through a circle of radius \(R\) in the disk plane: \[\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{2D}}(R) := \int_0^{2\pi} S_R(R,0)\,R\,d\phi = 2\pi R\,S_R(R,0) \approx -2\pi D A. \label{eq:part09_J2D_def}\] Thus in the outer harmonic region the throughput is \(R\)-independent (conserved): \[\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{2D}}(R)\approx \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{2D}}=\text{constant},\] and the amplitude is \[A\approx -\frac{\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{2D}}}{2\pi D}. \label{eq:part09_A_from_J2D}\] Substituting into [eq:part09_flat_speed_from_A] yields \[V_f^2 = -\alpha_\Phi c^2 \Delta_0 A \approx \alpha_\Phi c^2 \Delta_0\frac{\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{2D}}}{2\pi D}. \label{eq:part09_Vf_from_throughput}\] This is the precise sense in which “dark matter” is replaced by “inflow/throughput” in the VP picture: the asymptotic flat speed is controlled by a conserved (or capacity-limited) throughput in the VP medium.

9.2.4 9.2.4 Regime and gate checklist for rotation-curve applicability

To use the above derivation as a DERIVE prediction, the following must PASS:

  1. (Thin-disk/2D gate) The deficit transport is effectively 2D on the radii where flatness is claimed.

  2. (Mixing gate) Diagnostics indicate mixing-dominated regime (PART 07.3): small alignment and small tensor anisotropy.

  3. (Diffusion reduction gate) Strong relaxation applies and the diffusion residual is small (PART 07.3 D3).

  4. (Coupling gate) The coupling form [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling] and proportionality [eq:part09_Delta_propto_ea] are LOCK for the version and used consistently.

  5. (Speed-limit gate) If a finite \(c\) is assumed, then \(\kappa_T\) and any closure parameters must satisfy the trace bound constraints implied by PART 08 (e.g. \(\kappa_T\le c^2/3\) in CL-ISO).

9.3 9.3 Gravitational lensing and Einstein rings: refraction (effective refractive index) formalization

This subsection provides a closed weak-field lensing formalism based on an effective refractive index. The load-bearing requirement is: the same \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) that drives rotation curves must also predict lensing, subject to the chosen GR-matching policy in §9.5.

9.3.1 9.3.1 Two-potential weak-field metric and the lensing potential

In the weak-field limit, the most general scalar-perturbed metric relevant for lensing can be written (in a suitable gauge) as \[ds^2 = -\left(1+\frac{2\Phi}{c^2}\right)c^2dt^2 + \left(1-\frac{2\Psi}{c^2}\right) d\ell^2, \label{eq:part09_metric_two_potential}\] where \(\Phi\) and \(\Psi\) are the two gravitational potentials. Nonrelativistic motion responds to \(\Phi\) at leading order; lensing responds to the lensing potential \(\Phi+\Psi\).

9.3.1.1 GR-matching policy (to be fixed).

If one enforces GR matching at leading post-Newtonian order, one sets \[\Phi=\Psi=\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part09_PhiPsi_equals_Phi_eff}\] If not enforced, one must treat the slip \(\Psi-\Phi\) as an additional field and gate it observationally (see §9.5).

9.3.2 9.3.2 Effective refractive index and Fermat principle

In the thin, weak-field regime, light propagation can be expressed via an effective refractive index \(n(x)\) such that the optical path length is \(\int n\,d\ell\) and rays obey Fermat’s principle. A consistent choice (matching [eq:part09_metric_two_potential]) is \[n(x)\approx 1-\frac{2(\Phi(x)+\Psi(x))}{c^2}. \label{eq:part09_n_eff}\] Under the GR-matching policy [eq:part09_PhiPsi_equals_Phi_eff] this becomes \[n(x)\approx 1-\frac{4\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(x)}{c^2}. \label{eq:part09_n_eff_GRmatch}\] Spatial gradients of \(n\) bend rays toward larger \(n\) (equivalently toward more negative \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) if \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}<0\)).

9.3.3 9.3.3 Deflection angle formula

Let the unperturbed light path be along the \(z\)-axis, with transverse coordinates \(\boldsymbol{\xi}\in\mathbb{R}^2\) in the lens plane. To leading order, the deflection angle is \[\boldsymbol{\alpha}(\boldsymbol{\xi}) \approx \int_{-\infty}^{\infty} \nabla_\perp \ln n(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz \approx -\frac{2}{c^2}\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\nabla_\perp\big(\Phi+\Psi\big)(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz, \label{eq:part09_alpha_general}\] where \(\nabla_\perp\) denotes the gradient with respect to \(\boldsymbol{\xi}\). Under GR matching (\(\Phi=\Psi=\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\)), \[\boldsymbol{\alpha}(\boldsymbol{\xi}) \approx -\frac{4}{c^2}\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\nabla_\perp\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz. \label{eq:part09_alpha_GRmatch}\]

9.3.4 9.3.4 Thin-lens equation, convergence, and Einstein ring

In the thin-lens approximation, one defines the projected (effective) surface density \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}(\boldsymbol{\xi}) := \int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\big(\varrho_{\mathrm{b}}+\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}\big)(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz = \Sigma_{\mathrm{b}}(\boldsymbol{\xi})+\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}(\boldsymbol{\xi}). \label{eq:part09_Sigma_eff_def}\] The lensing deflection can be written in the standard form \[\boldsymbol{\alpha}(\boldsymbol{\xi}) = \frac{4G}{c^2} \int_{\mathbb{R}^2} \Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}(\boldsymbol{\xi}') \, \frac{\boldsymbol{\xi}-\boldsymbol{\xi}'}{\|\boldsymbol{\xi}-\boldsymbol{\xi}'\|^2} \,d^2\xi'. \label{eq:part09_alpha_surface_density}\] Define angular variables \(\boldsymbol{\theta}=\boldsymbol{\xi}/D_L\) and the critical surface density \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{crit}} := \frac{c^2}{4\pi G}\frac{D_S}{D_L D_{LS}}, \label{eq:part09_Sigma_crit}\] where \(D_L,D_S,D_{LS}\) are the angular diameter distances lens/source/lens-to-source. The convergence is \[\kappa(\boldsymbol{\theta}) := \frac{\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}(D_L\boldsymbol{\theta})}{\Sigma_{\mathrm{crit}}}. \label{eq:part09_kappa_def}\]

9.3.4.1 Einstein ring (axisymmetric lens).

For an axisymmetric lens, the Einstein ring angle \(\theta_E\) (perfect alignment) satisfies \[\theta_E = \frac{D_{LS}}{D_S}\,\alpha(\theta_E), \label{eq:part09_Einstein_condition}\] and equivalently in terms of enclosed projected mass \[\theta_E^2 = \frac{4G}{c^2}\frac{D_{LS}}{D_LD_S}\,M_{\mathrm{proj}}(<\theta_E), \label{eq:part09_thetaE_mass}\] where \[M_{\mathrm{proj}}(<\theta) := \int_{\|\boldsymbol{\xi}\|\le D_L\theta}\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}(\boldsymbol{\xi})\,d^2\xi. \label{eq:part09_Mproj_def}\]

9.3.4.2 Deficit contribution to lensing.

In this framework, \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}\) is generated by the VP deficit field: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}(\boldsymbol{\xi}) = \int \varrho_{\mathrm{def}}(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz = \frac{1}{4\pi G}\int \nabla^2\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz = -\frac{\alpha_\Phi c^2}{4\pi G}\int \nabla^2\Delta(\boldsymbol{\xi},z)\,dz,\] using [eq:part09_rho_def_eff]. This is a derived comparison object, not a fundamental mass density.

9.4 9.4 Colliding galaxy clusters (e.g. separation phenomena): separation conditions (background vs matter)

This subsection formalizes when a “lensing mass” peak (i.e. a peak in \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) or \(\kappa\)) can separate from the baryonic gas peak during a cluster collision. In particle DM, this is explained by collisionless DM passing through while gas shocks. In the VP deficit picture, separation is possible if the deficit field is advected/transported with a component that does not undergo strong collisional slowing, and if deficit relaxation/diffusion is slow enough that the deficit does not rapidly reattach to the shocked gas distribution.

9.4.1 9.4.1 Minimal transport model for the deficit field

Let \(\Delta(x,t)\) be the deficit scalar [eq:part09_deficit_Delta_def]. A minimal continuum transport form consistent with PART 07 diffusion reductions is: \[\partial_t \Delta + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{J}_\Delta = Q_\Delta - L_\Delta, \label{eq:part09_Delta_transport_general}\] where \(\mathbf{J}_\Delta\) is the deficit flux, and \(Q_\Delta,L_\Delta\) are sources/sinks (e.g. conversion/relaxation terms induced by \(\mu,\Gamma\) and background restoration).

A standard closure for \(\mathbf{J}_\Delta\) is advection–diffusion: \[\mathbf{J}_\Delta = \Delta\,\mathbf{u}_\Delta - D_\Delta \nabla \Delta, \qquad D_\Delta\ge 0, \label{eq:part09_JDelta_advdiff}\] with \(\mathbf{u}_\Delta\) the transport velocity of deficit-carrying structure, and \(D_\Delta\) an effective diffusivity.

9.4.1.1 Relaxation time scale.

Linearizing the net sink \(L_\Delta-Q_\Delta\) around the operating point yields an effective relaxation time \(\tau_\Delta\): \[L_\Delta - Q_\Delta \approx \frac{1}{\tau_\Delta}\,(\Delta-\Delta_{\mathrm{eq}}), \qquad \tau_\Delta>0. \label{eq:part09_tau_Delta_def}\] In VP language, \(\tau_\Delta\) is controlled by conversion/reaction rates (\(\mu,\Gamma'\)) and any background restoration gates (PART 08.2, 08.6).

9.4.2 9.4.2 Separation condition as a timescale and lengthscale inequality

Consider a collision with characteristic duration \(\tau_{\mathrm{coll}}\) and characteristic spatial separation scale \(L_{\mathrm{off}}\) (observed offset between lensing and gas centroids). A necessary condition for persistent separation is:

9.4.2.1 (C1) Slow relaxation (no rapid reattachment).

\[\tau_\Delta \gg \tau_{\mathrm{coll}}. \label{eq:part09_condition_slow_relax}\]

9.4.2.2 (C2) Small diffusion during the collision (no smearing).

\[\sqrt{D_\Delta\,\tau_{\mathrm{coll}}}\ll L_{\mathrm{off}}. \label{eq:part09_condition_small_diffusion}\]

9.4.2.3 (C3) Advection follows a collisionless component rather than shocked gas.

Let \(\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{gal}}\) be the bulk velocity of the collisionless galaxy component and \(\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{gas}}\) that of the shocked gas. Separation requires that \(\mathbf{u}_\Delta\) tracks the former: \[\|\mathbf{u}_\Delta-\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{gal}}\|\ll \|\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{gal}}-\mathbf{u}_{\mathrm{gas}}\|. \label{eq:part09_condition_advection_tracking}\] This is the VP analogue of “collisionless” behavior: not because a new particle is collisionless, but because the deficit-carrying structure is transported with the collisionless component and does not dissipate rapidly.

9.4.3 9.4.3 Background vs matter separation: what separates from what

Observationally, the gas peak traces \(\varrho_{\mathrm{gas}}\) (X-ray). The “mass” peak in lensing traces \(\Phi+\Psi\) (or \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) under GR matching). In this framework:

  • gas peak \(\sim\) baryonic component \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{b}}\),

  • lensing peak \(\sim\) \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}=\Sigma_{\mathrm{b}}+\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}\).

Separation occurs when \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}\) remains peaked near the collisionless component while \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{gas}}\) is displaced by shocks. Conditions [eq:part09_condition_slow_relax][eq:part09_condition_advection_tracking] are the minimal mathematical statement of this mechanism.

9.4.4 9.4.4 Cluster separation gate (PASS/FAIL diagnostic)

Define centroids: \[\mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{gas}}:=\mathrm{centroid}(\Sigma_{\mathrm{gas}}), \qquad \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{lens}}:=\mathrm{centroid}(\kappa)\ \text{or of reconstructed }\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}.\] Define the observed offset magnitude \(d_{\mathrm{obs}}:=\|\mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{lens}}-\mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{gas}}\|\). The model prediction yields \(d_{\mathrm{pred}}\) from the evolved \(\Delta\) and [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling][eq:part09_kappa_def]. The gate is: \[\mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{cluster}} \Longleftrightarrow |d_{\mathrm{pred}}-d_{\mathrm{obs}}|\le \sigma_d \ \ \wedge\ \ \tau_\Delta/\tau_{\mathrm{coll}}\ge \Theta_\tau \ \ \wedge\ \ \sqrt{D_\Delta\tau_{\mathrm{coll}}}/L_{\mathrm{off}}\le \Theta_D, \label{eq:part09_cluster_gate_passfail}\] where \(\sigma_d\) is the observational tolerance and \(\Theta_\tau,\Theta_D\) are LOCK thresholds.

9.5 9.5 Weak-field limit correspondence to GR/Newton: matching order and required equalities

This subsection specifies what it means for the deficit framework to “match GR/Newton in the weak-field limit” and clarifies which terms are required to coincide.

9.5.1 9.5.1 Nonrelativistic motion: Newtonian matching

For a slow test body (\(v\ll c\)), the equation of motion is \[\ddot{\mathbf{x}} = -\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathcal{O}\!\left(\frac{v^2}{c^2}\right). \label{eq:part09_newton_eom}\] Matching Newtonian gravity from baryons alone in a regime where deficit is negligible requires: \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}\to 0 \quad \text{and}\quad \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\to \Phi_{\mathrm{bar}} \quad \text{in the declared ``no-deficit'' regime.} \label{eq:part09_newton_limit_condition}\]

9.5.2 9.5.2 Lensing: GR factor and potential equality

In the two-potential metric [eq:part09_metric_two_potential], lensing depends on \(\Phi+\Psi\) via [eq:part09_alpha_general]. Standard GR in the absence of anisotropic stress implies \[\Phi=\Psi \qquad (\text{PPN parameter }\gamma=1). \label{eq:part09_gamma_equals_one_condition}\] Therefore, the strict GR-matching policy is: \[\Phi=\Psi=\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} \quad \Rightarrow\quad \boldsymbol{\alpha}(\boldsymbol{\xi}) = -\frac{4}{c^2}\int \nabla_\perp\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\,dz, \label{eq:part09_GRmatch_deflection}\] which reproduces the GR factor-of-two enhancement relative to a naive Newtonian particle-deflection estimate.

9.5.2.1 Slip as a falsifiable extension (optional).

If the framework allows a potential slip \(\Psi\ne\Phi\), then dynamics and lensing constrain different combinations: \[\text{dynamics}\sim \nabla\Phi,\qquad \text{lensing}\sim \nabla(\Phi+\Psi).\] This can be used as a gate: the same parameter set must fit both rotation curves and lensing without introducing an arbitrary slip function.

9.5.3 9.5.3 Effective Poisson form and “what counts as matching”

For comparison to standard mass inversion, one may write an effective Poisson equation \[\nabla^2\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} = 4\pi G\big(\varrho_{\mathrm{b}}+\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}\big), \label{eq:part09_Poisson_eff}\] where \(\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}\) is defined by [eq:part09_rho_def_eff]. This equation is not an additional assumption if \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is already defined: it is an identity that defines \(\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}\) as the Poisson-inverted effective density. The physical content of the VP framework is instead:

  • \(\Delta\) is generated by VP transport and gates (PART 06–08),

  • \(\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}\) is produced by the coupling [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling],

  • and therefore \(\varrho_{\mathrm{def}}\) is not freely specifiable but a derived field.

9.5.3.1 Matching order (explicit).

The weak-field matching claims in this document are limited to: \[\text{metric: } \mathcal{O}\!\left(\frac{\Phi}{c^2}\right),\qquad \text{dynamics: } \mathcal{O}\!\left(\frac{v^2}{c^2}\right),\qquad \text{lensing deflection: leading order in }\frac{\Phi}{c^2}. \label{eq:part09_matching_order}\] Any higher-order PPN claims require an explicit extension beyond the present scope.

9.6 9.6 Observational gates: PASS/FAIL framework using RC, lensing, and cluster data

This subsection defines a deterministic PASS/FAIL gate system that consumes observed data products (rotation curves, lensing maps, cluster collision offsets) and outputs a decision under a single LOCKed parameter set. The critical rule is: no retuning per dataset beyond declared nuisance parameters (e.g. distance uncertainties) that must be pre-registered.

9.6.1 9.6.1 Model outputs required for comparison

For each target system (galaxy or cluster), the model must output:

  1. \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(x)\) (or equivalently \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{eff}}(x)\)) from [eq:part09_Phi_eff_split] with [eq:part09_Phi_def_coupling].

  2. Rotation curve prediction \(v_c(R)\) via [eq:part09_vc_general].

  3. Lensing prediction: deflection \(\boldsymbol{\alpha}(\boldsymbol{\theta})\) or convergence \(\kappa(\boldsymbol{\theta})\) via [eq:part09_alpha_surface_density][eq:part09_kappa_def], under the chosen GR-matching policy.

  4. For colliding clusters: time-dependent \(\Delta(x,t)\) evolution (or its centroid) sufficient to predict lensing/gas centroid offsets.

9.6.2 9.6.2 Rotation-curve gate

Given observed rotation curve points \(\{(R_i,v_i,\sigma_i)\}_{i=1}^N\), define \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{RC}} := \sum_{i=1}^N \frac{\big(v_c(R_i)-v_i\big)^2}{\sigma_i^2}, \qquad \chi^2_{\mathrm{RC,red}}:=\frac{\chi^2_{\mathrm{RC}}}{N-\nu_{\mathrm{RC}}}, \label{eq:part09_chi2_RC}\] where \(\nu_{\mathrm{RC}}\) is the number of pre-registered nuisance parameters for that system (e.g. inclination correction), not including global theory parameters.

The gate is \[\mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{RC}} \Longleftrightarrow \chi^2_{\mathrm{RC,red}}\le \Theta_{\mathrm{RC}} \ \ \wedge\ \ \text{all physical/closure gates used to compute }v_c \text{ are PASS.} \label{eq:part09_PASS_RC}\] Here \(\Theta_{\mathrm{RC}}\) is a LOCK threshold (typical choices must be specified per version).

9.6.3 9.6.3 Lensing gate (weak and strong)

9.6.3.1 Weak lensing.

Given observed convergence/shear data \(\{\kappa_{\mathrm{obs}}(\theta_j),\sigma_{\kappa,j}\}\) (or shear \(\gamma\)), compute \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{WL}} := \sum_j \frac{\big(\kappa_{\mathrm{pred}}(\theta_j)-\kappa_{\mathrm{obs}}(\theta_j)\big)^2}{\sigma_{\kappa,j}^2}, \qquad \chi^2_{\mathrm{WL,red}}:=\frac{\chi^2_{\mathrm{WL}}}{N_{\mathrm{WL}}-\nu_{\mathrm{WL}}}. \label{eq:part09_chi2_WL}\]

9.6.3.2 Strong lensing (Einstein ring).

If an Einstein ring angle \(\theta_E\) is observed with uncertainty \(\sigma_E\), define \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{SL}}:=\frac{\big(\theta_{E,\mathrm{pred}}-\theta_{E,\mathrm{obs}}\big)^2}{\sigma_E^2}, \label{eq:part09_chi2_SL}\] with \(\theta_{E,\mathrm{pred}}\) computed from [eq:part09_thetaE_mass] under the chosen policy.

9.6.3.3 Lensing PASS/FAIL.

\[\mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{lens}} \Longleftrightarrow \chi^2_{\mathrm{WL,red}}\le \Theta_{\mathrm{WL}} \ \ \wedge\ \ \chi^2_{\mathrm{SL}}\le \Theta_{\mathrm{SL}} \ \ \wedge\ \ \text{the GR-matching policy gates (e.g.\ }\Phi=\Psi\text{ if claimed) are satisfied.} \label{eq:part09_PASS_lens}\]

9.6.4 9.6.4 Cluster collision gate (separation + lensing consistency)

Use the cluster gate [eq:part09_cluster_gate_passfail] and also require lensing consistency [eq:part09_PASS_lens] for the same system: \[\mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{cluster,total}} \Longleftrightarrow \mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{cluster}} \ \ \wedge\ \ \mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{lens}}. \label{eq:part09_PASS_cluster_total}\]

9.6.5 9.6.5 Global (multi-system) gate: no retuning across systems

Let \(\theta\) denote the global theory parameter vector (LOCK at the document version level), e.g. \[\theta := (\alpha_\Phi,\Delta_0,\text{closure identifiers},\text{gate thresholds},\ldots).\] For a set of systems \(\mathcal{S}\) (galaxies, clusters), define the global PASS condition: \[\mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{global}}(\theta) \Longleftrightarrow \bigwedge_{s\in\mathcal{S}} \left[ \mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{RC}}^{(s)}(\theta) \ \wedge\ \mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{lens}}^{(s)}(\theta) \ \wedge\ \mathrm{PASS}_{\mathrm{cluster,total}}^{(s)}(\theta)\ \text{(if applicable)} \right]. \label{eq:part09_PASS_global}\] Any success that requires changing \(\theta\) across systems is classified as FAIL[tuning] under the PART 02 reproducibility policy.

9.6.5.1 Artifact requirement.

Every PASS/FAIL evaluation must archive:

  • the exact \(\theta\) (parameter hash),

  • the predicted fields (\(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\), \(v_c\), \(\kappa\) or \(\alpha\)),

  • all \(\chi^2\) values and margins to thresholds,

  • and all intermediate gate diagnostics (mixing regime, diffusion residual, speed-limit/trace constraints).

This is mandatory to prevent post hoc narrative fitting.

10 PART 10. Black Hole “Decomposition Reactor”: Removing Singularities, Phase Transition, and Primordial Volume (Output 10)

This Part proposes a reactor interpretation of black-hole cores in the VP framework: the would-be central singularity is replaced by a gated, throughput-limited, conversion-saturated region in which (i) inflow becomes choked (flux-limited), (ii) conversion becomes saturated (finite processing rate), and (iii) a decomposition channel transfers “stored/matter-like” content into a primordial volume reservoir (or directly into the active channel), preventing unbounded central accumulation.

10.0.0.1 Status of this Part.

This Part is primarily HYP+DERIVE: it defines a minimal reactor extension of the core system that (a) remains internally consistent with the LOCK\(\to\)DERIVE\(\to\)GATE discipline, and (b) yields explicit, falsifiable consequences (throughput limits, jet requirements, time-delay signatures, and entropy/ledger inequalities). Any identification with astrophysical black holes must be gated against observations (rotation/lensing/cluster gates from PART 09; jet/variability gates from PART 11+).

10.0.0.2 Core variables retained.

We retain the VP state variables and moments: \[\rho(x,t)\ (\text{stored phase}),\qquad e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\ (\text{active phase}),\qquad \mathbf{S}(x,t)\ (\text{flux}),\qquad \mathbf{T}(x,t)\ (\text{second moment}).\] We also retain the emergent speed limit \(c>0\) and the choking ratio (PART 08): \[\chi_S(x,t):=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|}{c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+\eta_0}, \qquad \eta_0>0\ \text{(small LOCK regularizer)}. \label{eq:part10_chiS}\]

10.0.0.3 Background and primordial volume bookkeeping.

Outside of reactor cores, the minimal 3-phase constraint is \[\rho + e_{\mathrm{a}} + e_{\mathrm{bg}} = 1.\] Inside the reactor we split the background into: \[e_{\mathrm{bg}} = e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}} + e_{\mathrm{pv}},\] where

  • \(e_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t)\ge 0\) is the primordial volume reservoir (PV),

  • \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}(x,t)\ge 0\) is the regular background.

The local normalization is therefore \[\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t)=1, \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)=1-\rho(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t). \label{eq:part10_normalization}\] Thus \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is still determined by \((\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}})\) as before, while \(e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) refines the composition of the background (with \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}=e_{\mathrm{bg}}-e_{\mathrm{pv}}\)).

10.0.0.4 Deficit definition carried forward.

As in PART 09, define the deficit scalar \[\Delta(x,t):=e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\infty}(t)-e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\ge 0, \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\infty}(t):=\lim_{\|x\|\to\infty} e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t), \label{eq:part10_deficit}\] and the constitutive deficit potential coupling (version-level HYP that must be LOCKed): \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t):=-\alpha_\Phi\,c^2\,\Delta(x,t), \qquad \mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t) := -\nabla \Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t)=+\alpha_\Phi c^2 \nabla\Delta(x,t), \qquad \alpha_\Phi\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part10_Phi_def}\]

10.1 10.1 Central singularity replacement: making the core effective via choking and saturation

10.1.1 10.1.1 Reactor zone and the “apparent horizon” as a choking surface

In this framework, the “horizon-like” behavior is not postulated as a geometric singularity; it emerges as a gate surface where transport demand exceeds throughput capacity and the system enters a choked regime.

10.1.1.1 Choking gate.

Fix a choke threshold \(\theta_{\mathrm{choke}}\in(0,1)\) (LOCK). Define \[G_{\mathrm{choke}}(x,t):=H\!\big(\chi_S(x,t)-\theta_{\mathrm{choke}}\big), \label{eq:part10_gate_choke}\] with \(\chi_S\) given by [eq:part10_chiS].

10.1.1.2 Choking surface and critical radius.

In a spherically symmetric baseline (\(\rho=e_{\mathrm{a}}=\rho(r,t),e_{\mathrm{a}}(r,t)\), \(\mathbf{S}=S_r(r,t)\hat r\)), the choking surface is the sphere where \(G_{\mathrm{choke}}\) switches. Define the choking radius \(r_{\mathrm{ch}}(t)\) by the implicit condition \[\chi_S(r_{\mathrm{ch}}(t),t)=\theta_{\mathrm{choke}}. \label{eq:part10_rch}\] For \(r<r_{\mathrm{ch}}\) the flux is near its maximal admissible magnitude. In the hard-limiter idealization, \[\|\mathbf{S}\| \le c e_{\mathrm{a}} \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \text{in the fully choked limit: }\ \ \mathbf{S}(x,t)\approx -c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,\hat{\mathbf{d}}_{\mathrm{in}}(x,t), \label{eq:part10_choked_flux}\] where \(\hat{\mathbf{d}}_{\mathrm{in}}\) is the inward direction (for spherical inflow, \(\hat{\mathbf{d}}_{\mathrm{in}}=\hat r\) and \(S_r\approx -c e_{\mathrm{a}}\)).

10.1.1.3 Interpretation.

If in the inner region the effective driving is inward (e.g. \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\approx -\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is inward) then outward transport cannot exceed the same capacity bound, producing an effective trapping in which signals/outflows are throughput-limited. This is the reactor analogue of an “apparent horizon.”

10.1.2 10.1.2 Saturation gate for conversion and the necessity of a decomposition channel

Conversion saturation is essential: without it, the core could absorb arbitrarily large inflow by unboundedly increasing conversion rates, eliminating a falsifiable bottleneck.

10.1.2.1 Saturation gate for \(\Gamma\).

Let \(\Gamma_{\max}(x,t)\) be the declared conversion capacity and \(\theta_{\mathrm{sat}}\in(0,1)\) a LOCK threshold. Define: \[G_{\mathrm{sat}}(x,t):= H\!\left(\frac{\Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}})}{\Gamma_{\max}(x,t)+\eta_0}-\theta_{\mathrm{sat}}\right). \label{eq:part10_gate_sat}\]

10.1.2.2 Why a decomposition channel is needed.

If inflow is choked ([eq:part10_choked_flux]) and conversion is saturated ([eq:part10_gate_sat]), then the inner region cannot increase throughput nor processing rate to accommodate additional accumulation. A third mechanism is required to prevent indefinite concentration: a channel that reduces the actor content (here represented by \(\rho\) and/or \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\)) by transferring it into background-like reservoir(s), i.e. “primordial volume”.

We therefore introduce in §10.2 a decomposition rate \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t)\) that converts a portion of stored content \(\rho\) into \(e_{\mathrm{pv}}\), triggered by a reactor gate.

10.1.3 10.1.3 Reactor gate and minimal reactor radius with finite gradients

Define a reactor radius \(r_R\) and a minimum smoothing scale \(\ell_{\min}\) (optional but strongly recommended for regularity). Both are SPEC parameters that must be LOCKed per version.

10.1.3.1 Reactor region indicator.

For radius \(r=\|x\|\), define \[G_R(x):=H(r_R-r) \qquad \text{(hard reactor gate)}. \label{eq:part10_GR}\] A soft version can replace \(H\) by a logistic gate; the hard form suffices for analytic statements.

10.1.3.2 Minimum scale regularization.

To avoid unphysical delta-like gradients, evaluate decision variables on coarse-grained fields at scale \(\ell_{\min}\): \[q_{\ell_{\min}}(x,t):=\frac{1}{|B_{\ell_{\min}}|}\int_{B_{\ell_{\min}}(x)} q(y,t)\,dy, \qquad |B_{\ell_{\min}}|=\frac{4\pi}{3}\ell_{\min}^3. \label{eq:part10_coarse_grain}\] We will use this to bound \(\nabla\Delta\) and hence \(\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}\).

10.1.4 10.1.4 Boundedness theorem: finite acceleration and no central divergence under gates

10.1.4.1 Proposition 10.1 (finite deficit acceleration under minimum scale).

Assume:

  1. \(0\le \Delta(x,t)\le \Delta_{\max}\le 1\) (automatic if \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\in[0,1]\)),

  2. \(\Delta\) is evaluated as \(\Delta_{\ell_{\min}}\) from [eq:part10_coarse_grain], so that \(\Delta_{\ell_{\min}}\) is Lipschitz with constant \(\le \Delta_{\max}/\ell_{\min}\) in the sense \[\|\nabla \Delta_{\ell_{\min}}(x,t)\|\le \frac{\Delta_{\max}}{\ell_{\min}},\]

  3. the deficit potential coupling is [eq:part10_Phi_def].

Then the deficit acceleration is uniformly bounded: \[\|\mathbf{g}_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t)\| = \alpha_\Phi c^2 \|\nabla\Delta_{\ell_{\min}}(x,t)\| \le \alpha_\Phi c^2\,\frac{\Delta_{\max}}{\ell_{\min}}. \label{eq:part10_gdef_bound}\]

10.1.4.2 Proof.

Immediate from [eq:part10_Phi_def] and the Lipschitz bound on \(\Delta_{\ell_{\min}}\). \(\square\)

10.1.4.3 Interpretation.

The VP deficit field cannot generate an infinite inward acceleration if (i) \(\Delta\) is bounded by construction and (ii) the theory declares a minimum operational scale \(\ell_{\min}\). This is the core mathematical reason the “central singularity” is replaced by an effective core.

10.1.4.4 Additional bound from choking (finite flux and finite mean speed).

In any regime where the speed-support postulate holds (PART 08), the flux bound \[\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c\,e_{\mathrm{a}} \label{eq:part10_flux_bound}\] implies the mean active transport velocity \(\mathbf{u}:=\mathbf{S}/(e_{\mathrm{a}}+\eta_0)\) satisfies \(\|\mathbf{u}\|\lesssim c\). Thus no “infinite inflow speed” singularity can appear in the active transport channel.

10.1.5 10.1.5 Steady choked core profile (spherical baseline) and regularity at \(r=0\)

To show concretely how the reactor avoids a central blow-up, consider a simplified spherical, quasi-steady baseline: \[\partial_t(\cdot)\approx 0, \qquad \mathbf{S}=S_r(r)\hat r, \qquad \mathbf{S}\ \text{choked inward:}\ S_r(r)\approx -c e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\ \text{for }r\le r_{\mathrm{ch}}.\] We also include a decomposition sink term \(-\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)\rho\) in the \(\rho\) equation (defined precisely in §10.2).

10.1.5.1 Reactor-modified phase equations (steady, radial).

Inside the reactor, the steady phase equations take the form \[\begin{aligned} 0 &= -\mu(r)\rho(r) + \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)) - \Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)\rho(r), \label{eq:part10_steady_rho}\\ \frac{1}{r^2}\frac{d}{dr}\big(r^2 S_r(r)\big) &= \mu(r)\rho(r)-\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)) + \mu_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)\,e_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)-\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}(r)e_{\mathrm{a}}(r), \label{eq:part10_steady_ea_div}\end{aligned}\] where \(\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\) is an optional activation of primordial volume into the active channel and \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}\) is an optional active\(\to\)PV sink; both are defined later and can be set to \(0\) in the minimal reactor.

10.1.5.2 Eliminating \(\rho\) in the simplest minimal case.

Take the minimal case \(\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}=\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}=0\). Then [eq:part10_steady_rho] gives \[\rho(r)=\frac{\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r))}{\mu(r)+\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}. \label{eq:part10_rho_from_ea}\] Substituting into [eq:part10_steady_ea_div] yields \[\frac{1}{r^2}\frac{d}{dr}\big(r^2 S_r(r)\big) = \mu(r)\frac{\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r))}{\mu(r)+\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}-\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)) = -\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r))\,\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}{\mu(r)+\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}\le 0. \label{eq:part10_divS_sign}\] In the fully choked approximation \(S_r\approx -c e_{\mathrm{a}}\) this becomes \[-\frac{c}{r^2}\frac{d}{dr}\big(r^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\big) = -\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r))\,\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}{\mu(r)+\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)},\] or equivalently \[\frac{c}{r^2}\frac{d}{dr}\big(r^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\big) = \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r))\,\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}{\mu(r)+\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(r)}\ge 0. \label{eq:part10_ea_ode_choked}\] Thus \(r^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\) is nondecreasing outward. Regularity at the center requires \(r^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\to 0\) as \(r\to 0\) (since the flux through a vanishing sphere must vanish), which is consistent with \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\) remaining finite. This is a concrete mechanism: decomposition (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}>0\)) forces a sign structure that avoids pathological inward growth.

10.2 10.2 Phase transition hypothesis: matter \(\rightarrow\) primordial volume (or active phase) conversion conditions

10.2.1 10.2.1 Minimal reactor reaction network

We interpret the stored phase \(\rho\) as the “matter-like” content that can be processed by the reactor. The minimal reaction network adds two new channels to the core:

  • Decomposition to primordial volume: \(\rho \to e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) at rate \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t)\rho\).

  • Re-activation (recycling): \(e_{\mathrm{pv}} \to e_{\mathrm{a}}\) at rate \(\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t)e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) (optional; enables jet fueling).

Additionally, one may include an active-to-PV sink \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\to e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) at rate \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)e_{\mathrm{a}}\) to represent irreversible dissipation into background-like volume (optional).

10.2.2 10.2.2 Reactor-extended PDE system (local form)

Inside the reactor, the phase equations are extended to: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t \rho &= -\mu\,\rho + \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}) - \Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\,\rho, \label{eq:part10_rho_PDE}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} &= +\mu\,\rho - \Gamma(x,t;e_{\mathrm{a}}) + \mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\,e_{\mathrm{pv}} - \Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}\,e_{\mathrm{a}}, \label{eq:part10_ea_PDE}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{pv}} &= +\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\,\rho +\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}\,e_{\mathrm{a}} - \mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\,e_{\mathrm{pv}}. \label{eq:part10_epv_PDE}\end{aligned}\] The flux equation retains its general form \[\partial_t \mathbf{S}+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T} = -\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{ext}} + \mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{reac}}, \label{eq:part10_S_PDE}\] where \(\mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{reac}}\) is an optional reactor-induced momentum/flux source (used in §10.4).

10.2.2.1 Algebraic background.

Given [eq:part10_normalization], \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}\) is determined as \[e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}(x,t)=1-\rho(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t), \qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)=1-\rho(x,t)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t). \label{eq:part10_bg_reg_def}\]

10.2.2.2 Positivity and admissibility constraints (GATE).

The system must satisfy: \[0\le \rho,\ e_{\mathrm{a}},\ e_{\mathrm{pv}},\ e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}} \le 1, \qquad \rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}+e_{\mathrm{pv}}\le 1, \label{eq:part10_positivity}\] and all rates must be nonnegative and locally Lipschitz: \[\mu,\ \Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}},\ \Lambda_{\mathrm{a}},\ \mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\ge 0, \qquad \Gamma(\cdot)\ge 0,\quad \Gamma(0)=0,\quad \Gamma\le \Gamma_{\max}. \label{eq:part10_rate_admissibility}\] Any closure for \(\mathbf{T}\) must respect the speed-limit realizability constraints (e.g. \(\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T})\le c^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}\)).

10.2.3 10.2.3 Phase transition as a gated onset of \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\)

We now state explicit gate conditions under which the decomposition channel turns on.

10.2.3.1 Defining a decomposition gate.

Choose thresholds: \[\Delta_c\in(0,1),\quad \theta_{\mathrm{choke}}\in(0,1),\quad \theta_{\mathrm{sat}}\in(0,1),\] and a reactor radius \(r_R\). Define: \[G_{\mathrm{dec}}(x,t) := G_R(x)\; H\!\big(\Delta(x,t)-\Delta_c\big)\; G_{\mathrm{choke}}(x,t)\; G_{\mathrm{sat}}(x,t), \label{eq:part10_Gdec}\] with \(G_R\) from [eq:part10_GR], \(G_{\mathrm{choke}}\) from [eq:part10_gate_choke], and \(G_{\mathrm{sat}}\) from [eq:part10_gate_sat].

10.2.3.2 Decomposition rate.

A minimal choice is \[\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t) := \Lambda_0\,G_{\mathrm{dec}}(x,t), \qquad \Lambda_0>0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part10_Lambda_pv_def}\] A smooth version may replace \(H\) by soft gates; the functional form must be LOCKed.

10.2.3.3 Interpretation.

The decomposition channel is not a free knob: it requires simultaneous evidence of (i) large deficit, (ii) choked throughput, and (iii) saturated conversion. This makes the “reactor” falsifiable: if these conditions are not realized (or not realized where needed), the decomposition does not turn on.

10.2.4 10.2.4 Matter \(\rightarrow\) active conversion (existing \(\mu\) channel) as a second phase transition

The stored-to-active conversion rate \(\mu\) already exists in the core. In the reactor picture, \(\mu\) may itself be gated to increase sharply in the core, representing activation/decomposition of matter-like content into a mobile channel.

10.2.4.1 Activation gate for \(\mu\).

Define a gate (one minimal option): \[G_\mu(x,t) := G_R(x)\; H\!\big(\Delta(x,t)-\Delta_\mu\big), \qquad \Delta_\mu\in(0,1). \label{eq:part10_Gmu}\] Then set \[\mu(x,t):=\mu_{\mathrm{out}} + (\mu_{\mathrm{in}}-\mu_{\mathrm{out}})\,G_\mu(x,t), \qquad 0\le \mu_{\mathrm{out}}\le \mu_{\mathrm{in}}, \label{eq:part10_mu_profile}\] with \(\mu_{\mathrm{out}},\mu_{\mathrm{in}}\) LOCKed per version.

10.2.4.2 Interpretation.

If \(\mu\) is small outside but large inside, stored content is “activated” into the mobile channel primarily in the reactor core. This converts a static accumulation problem into a throughput-limited transport problem, which then couples naturally to choking/jet production.

10.2.5 10.2.5 Recycling onset \(\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\): enabling jets from primordial volume

To interpret AGN/black holes as “recycling centers,” a fraction of primordial volume must re-enter the active channel, primarily along an axis where outflow is permitted.

10.2.5.1 Axis and jet gate.

Let \(k(x,t)\) be the local axis direction (unit vector). Define a jet gate \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}(x,t)\in[0,1]\) using alignment/leakage diagnostics (as in PART 08.6). We will reuse the hard form: \[G_{\mathrm{jet}} = H\!\big(A-(1-\varepsilon_A^{\mathrm{jet}})\big)\; H\!\big(\varepsilon_k^{\mathrm{jet}}-a_k\big)\; H\!\big(\varepsilon_\perp^{\mathrm{jet}}-\ell_\perp\big), \label{eq:part10_Gjet}\] where \(A,a_k,\ell_\perp\) are alignment/leakage diagnostics and \(\varepsilon_*^{\mathrm{jet}}\) are LOCK thresholds.

10.2.5.2 Recycling/activation rate.

A minimal model is \[\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t) := \mu_{\mathrm{pv},0}\,G_R(x)\,G_{\mathrm{jet}}(x,t), \qquad \mu_{\mathrm{pv},0}\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part10_mu_pv_def}\] This forces PV\(\to\)active activation to occur only in the reactor and only when jet conditions are satisfied, avoiding an unconstrained global reactivation.

10.3 10.3 Energy/volume ledger: what is conserved in the reactor and how outputs are partitioned

10.3.1 10.3.1 Volume/occupancy ledger (local and integral)

10.3.1.1 Local occupancy conservation.

By definition [eq:part10_normalization], \[\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}+e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}+e_{\mathrm{pv}} \equiv 1,\] so local occupancy is a LOCK constraint.

10.3.1.2 Actor content and its balance.

Define the actor content \[e_{\mathrm{act}}(x,t):=\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t). \label{eq:part10_eact}\] Adding [eq:part10_rho_PDE] and [eq:part10_ea_PDE] gives the local balance \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{act}} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} = -\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\,\rho -\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}\,e_{\mathrm{a}} +\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\,e_{\mathrm{pv}}. \label{eq:part10_actor_balance}\] Thus, decomposition terms reduce actor content while PV reactivation increases it.

10.3.1.3 Primordial volume balance.

From [eq:part10_epv_PDE], \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{pv}} = +\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\,\rho +\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}\,e_{\mathrm{a}} -\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\,e_{\mathrm{pv}}. \label{eq:part10_pv_balance}\]

10.3.1.4 Conserved “reactor charge.”

Summing [eq:part10_actor_balance] and [eq:part10_pv_balance] yields \[\partial_t(\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}+e_{\mathrm{pv}})+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0. \label{eq:part10_reactor_charge_conservation}\] Therefore the quantity \[q_R(x,t):=\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{pv}}(x,t) \label{eq:part10_qR}\] is transported by \(\mathbf{S}\) with no net sources/sinks; it is the reactor charge.

10.3.1.5 Integral form on a control volume.

Let \(\Omega\) be any fixed control volume with boundary \(\partial\Omega\) and outward normal \(\mathbf{n}\). Integrating [eq:part10_reactor_charge_conservation] yields \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega} q_R\,dV + \int_{\partial\Omega}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA =0. \label{eq:part10_integral_qR}\] Thus all net change in reactor charge is due to boundary throughput, not internal conversion. Internal conversion only repartitions \(q_R\) between \((\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}},e_{\mathrm{pv}})\).

10.3.2 10.3.2 Minimal physical-energy ledger with a radiation reservoir

To connect to observed luminosities (radiation + jets), the reactor must specify where energy released/absorbed by conversion goes. We implement this minimally by introducing an auxiliary radiation energy density \(u_\gamma(x,t)\).

10.3.2.1 Energy scales and definitions (SPEC, version LOCK).

Let \(u_*>0\) be a reference energy density (units \(ML^{-1}T^{-2}\)). Define dimensionless specific energies (per unit phase fraction): \[\epsilon_\rho,\ \epsilon_{\mathrm{a}},\ \epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}\ \ge 0,\] and define the dimensionless internal energy density of VP phases: \[\varepsilon_{\mathrm{VP}}(x,t) := \epsilon_\rho\,\rho + \epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\,e_{\mathrm{a}} + \epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}\,e_{\mathrm{pv}}. \label{eq:part10_eps_VP}\] The corresponding physical energy density is \(u_{\mathrm{VP}}:=u_*\varepsilon_{\mathrm{VP}}\).

10.3.2.2 Energy flux carried by the active channel.

Since only the active channel is transported by \(\mathbf{S}\), define the VP advective energy flux \[\mathbf{J}_{\mathrm{VP}} := u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{S}. \label{eq:part10_J_VP}\] This is the minimal consistent choice: energy per unit active fraction times active flux.

10.3.2.3 Radiation reservoir.

Let \(u_\gamma(x,t)=u_*\varepsilon_\gamma(x,t)\) be the radiation energy density with flux \(\mathbf{J}_\gamma\): \[\partial_t \varepsilon_\gamma + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{j}_\gamma = \mathcal{P}_\gamma, \qquad \mathbf{J}_\gamma := u_*\,\mathbf{j}_\gamma, \label{eq:part10_radiation_ledger}\] where \(\mathcal{P}_\gamma\) is the dimensionless power density injected into radiation.

10.3.2.4 Energy exchange from reactor conversions.

Multiply [eq:part10_rho_PDE] by \(\epsilon_\rho\), [eq:part10_ea_PDE] by \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\), and [eq:part10_epv_PDE] by \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}\), add them, and use \(\nabla\cdot(\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{S})\) from the \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) equation. One obtains \[\partial_t \varepsilon_{\mathrm{VP}} + \nabla\cdot(\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{S}) = (\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}-\epsilon_\rho)\,\mu\rho +(\epsilon_\rho-\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}})\,\Gamma +(\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}-\epsilon_\rho)\,\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\rho +(\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}-\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}})\,\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}e_{\mathrm{a}} +(\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}-\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}})\,\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}e_{\mathrm{pv}}. \label{eq:part10_energy_exchange_VP}\] The right-hand side represents energy not carried by the advective VP energy flux. To enforce total energy conservation, we define the radiation injection as \[\mathcal{P}_\gamma := -\Big[ (\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}-\epsilon_\rho)\,\mu\rho +(\epsilon_\rho-\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}})\,\Gamma +(\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}-\epsilon_\rho)\,\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\rho +(\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}}-\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}})\,\Lambda_{\mathrm{a}}e_{\mathrm{a}} +(\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}-\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}})\,\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}e_{\mathrm{pv}} \Big], \label{eq:part10_Pgamma_def}\] i.e. radiation receives the residual energy not accounted for by advective VP transport.

10.3.2.5 Total energy conservation (local).

Define the total dimensionless energy density \[\varepsilon_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\varepsilon_{\mathrm{VP}}+\varepsilon_\gamma, \qquad \mathbf{j}_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{S}+\mathbf{j}_\gamma. \label{eq:part10_total_energy_def}\] Then [eq:part10_energy_exchange_VP] and [eq:part10_radiation_ledger] with [eq:part10_Pgamma_def] imply the conservation law \[\partial_t \varepsilon_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{j}_{\mathrm{tot}} = 0. \label{eq:part10_total_energy_conservation}\] In physical units: \[\partial_t u_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{J}_{\mathrm{tot}} = 0, \qquad u_{\mathrm{tot}}:=u_*\varepsilon_{\mathrm{tot}}, \quad \mathbf{J}_{\mathrm{tot}}:=u_*\mathbf{j}_{\mathrm{tot}}.\]

10.3.2.6 Interpretation.

The reactor may convert stored content into primordial volume in an exothermic or endothermic way depending on \((\epsilon_\rho,\epsilon_{\mathrm{pv}})\). Any difference is automatically transferred into radiation via [eq:part10_Pgamma_def], yielding a well-defined luminosity output on a control surface.

10.3.3 10.3.3 Observable outputs: luminosity and jet power in the ledger language

Let \(\Sigma\) be an observational surface (e.g. far outside the reactor). Define: \[\begin{aligned} L_{\mathrm{rad}}(t) &:= \int_{\Sigma} \mathbf{J}_\gamma\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA = u_*\int_\Sigma \mathbf{j}_\gamma\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA, \label{eq:part10_Lrad}\\ P_{\mathrm{VP}}(t) &:= \int_{\Sigma} \mathbf{J}_{\mathrm{VP}}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA = u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\int_\Sigma \mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA. \label{eq:part10_Pvp}\end{aligned}\] If the outflow is strongly collimated along an axis (jets), then \(P_{\mathrm{VP}}\) evaluated on a tube cross-section is identified as jet power (see §10.4).

10.4 10.4 Jet supply: necessary conditions for axial emission (connects to PART 11)

10.4.1 10.4.1 Necessary conditions as gates

A reactor supplies a jet only if all of the following hold:

10.4.1.1 (J1) Strong alignment and low transverse leakage.

The jet gate \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}\) from [eq:part10_Gjet] must be ON: \[G_{\mathrm{jet}}=1. \label{eq:part10_J1}\]

10.4.1.2 (J2) Available power source.

There must be a nonzero conversion/decomposition power density in the core, i.e. at least one of \[\mu\rho,\ \Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\rho,\ \mu_{\mathrm{pv}}e_{\mathrm{pv}}\] must be non-negligible in the jet-launch region. In the energy ledger, this is the requirement that the total outward power on \(\Sigma\) is positive: \[L_{\mathrm{rad}}(t)+P_{\mathrm{VP}}(t)>0. \label{eq:part10_J2}\]

10.4.1.3 (J3) Open axial transport channel (anisotropic drag/permeability).

Let \(\mathbf{B}\) be the drag tensor in the \(\mathbf{S}\) equation. Define its axial and transverse components: \[B_\parallel := k\cdot \mathbf{B}k, \qquad \mathbf{B}_\perp := (\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k)\mathbf{B}(\mathbf{I}-k\otimes k).\] A minimal “open axial channel” condition is \[B_\parallel \ll \|\mathbf{B}_\perp\|, \label{eq:part10_open_channel}\] within the launching region. This is a SPEC closure/gate statement: jets require anisotropic permeability.

10.4.1.4 (J4) Throughput capacity not exceeded (axial choking consistency).

Jet throughput is limited by the same speed constraint: \[|\mathbf{S}\cdot k|\le \|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}. \label{eq:part10_jet_capacity_pointwise}\]

10.4.2 10.4.2 Minimal jet-tube throughput and power

Let \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{jet}}\) be a cross-sectional surface orthogonal to \(k\). Define jet throughput \[\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{jet}}(t):=\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{jet}}} \mathbf{S}\cdot k\,dA, \label{eq:part10_Jjet}\] and, using [eq:part10_J_VP], the VP-carried jet power \[P_{\mathrm{jet}}(t):=u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{jet}}(t). \label{eq:part10_Pjet}\] By [eq:part10_jet_capacity_pointwise], \[|\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{jet}}(t)| \le c\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{jet}}} e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dA. \label{eq:part10_Jjet_bound}\]

10.4.3 10.4.3 Reactor-induced axial flux source (minimal closure)

To represent that decomposition/recycling can drive an axial outflow, we introduce a minimal reactor source term in [eq:part10_S_PDE]: \[\mathbf{R}_S^{\mathrm{reac}} := \zeta_{\mathrm{jet}}\,c\,\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\rho\,k, \qquad \zeta_{\mathrm{jet}}\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part10_RSreac}\] This has correct dimensions (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\rho\) is \(T^{-1}\), multiplied by \(c\) gives \(LT^{-2}\)). It is gated because \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\) is gated by [eq:part10_Gdec] and \(k\) is meaningful only when \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}\) is ON.

10.4.3.1 Interpretation.

Equation [eq:part10_RSreac] is the minimal statement: decomposition acts as a source of directed flux along the jet axis. In a more detailed closure, \(\zeta_{\mathrm{jet}}\) could depend on alignment and geometry; in this minimal model it is a LOCK coefficient.

10.5 10.5 AGN/quasar as a “recycling center”: minimal steady model

10.5.1 10.5.1 Control-volume description of an AGN reactor

Let \(\Omega_R\) be a control volume enclosing the reactor core and inner accretion region, with boundary \(\Sigma_R=\partial\Omega_R\) located outside the choked region. Define the inward VP throughput \[\dot{Q}_{\mathrm{in}}(t):= -\int_{\Sigma_R}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA \qquad (\dot{Q}_{\mathrm{in}}>0 \text{ means net inflow}). \label{eq:part10_Qin}\] From [eq:part10_integral_qR], the rate of change of reactor charge inside \(\Omega_R\) is \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega_R}(\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}+e_{\mathrm{pv}})\,dV = \dot{Q}_{\mathrm{in}}(t). \label{eq:part10_charge_balance_Qin}\] In a steady state, the left-hand side vanishes, so \(\dot{Q}_{\mathrm{in}}\) must be balanced by a net outward throughput elsewhere (e.g. jets/winds) across the same surface or by choosing \(\Sigma_R\) as a surface enclosing all outflows such that net flow is zero. In practice one uses separate surfaces for inflow and outflow channels.

10.5.2 10.5.2 Throughput-limited accretion and an emergent luminosity cap

The speed limit implies a pointwise flux bound [eq:part10_flux_bound]. Therefore on any surface \(\Sigma\), \[\left|\int_{\Sigma}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA\right| \le \int_{\Sigma}\|\mathbf{S}\|\,dA \le c\int_{\Sigma} e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dA \le c\int_{\Sigma} 1\,dA = c\,\mathrm{Area}(\Sigma). \label{eq:part10_throughput_area_bound}\] For a sphere of radius \(R\), \[|\dot{Q}(R)|\le 4\pi R^2 c. \label{eq:part10_Q_bound_sphere}\]

10.5.2.1 Energy cap.

Using [eq:part10_Pvp], the VP-carried power through \(\Sigma\) is bounded: \[|P_{\mathrm{VP}}(t)| = u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\left|\int_\Sigma \mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA\right| \le u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\,c\,\mathrm{Area}(\Sigma). \label{eq:part10_Pvp_cap}\] This is an emergent, purely throughput-based cap (distinct in principle from the Eddington limit). Its observational relevance is a gate question, not assumed.

10.5.3 10.5.3 Minimal steady partition: radiation vs jets

Define on a large observational surface \(\Sigma_\infty\): \[L_{\mathrm{rad}}=\int_{\Sigma_\infty}\mathbf{J}_\gamma\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA, \qquad P_{\mathrm{jet}}=u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{jet}}}\mathbf{S}\cdot k\,dA.\] A minimal steady “AGN” output model is: \[L_{\mathrm{AGN}} := L_{\mathrm{rad}} + P_{\mathrm{jet}}. \label{eq:part10_LAGN}\]

10.5.3.1 Recycling-center interpretation.

In steady state, the reactor maintains a nontrivial \(e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) reservoir in the core by balancing creation \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\rho\) and reactivation \(\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}e_{\mathrm{pv}}\). The latter can directly fuel the mobile channel and hence jets, while the energy mismatch is carried by radiation via [eq:part10_total_energy_conservation].

10.5.4 10.5.4 Minimal variability timescales from gates

The reactor produces characteristic timescales:

  • Throughput time: \(t_{\mathrm{thr}}\sim L/c\) for propagation over scale \(L\) (PART 08 causal bound).

  • Conversion time: \(t_\Gamma\sim 1/\Gamma'(\cdot)\) in the unsaturated regime; \(t_\Gamma\sim 1/\mu\) when saturated.

  • Decomposition time: \(t_{\mathrm{pv}}\sim 1/\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}}\) when \(G_{\mathrm{dec}}=1\).

  • Recycling time: \(t_{\mathrm{rec}}\sim 1/\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\) when \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}=1\).

These provide a deterministic variability library: flares can be modeled as gate crossings (e.g. \(G_{\mathrm{dec}}\) switching ON/OFF or \(G_{\mathrm{jet}}\) switching ON/OFF), with response times controlled by the above timescales.

10.6 10.6 Connection to information/entropy ledger (preview of PART 17)

This subsection introduces a minimal entropy/information ledger consistent with the reactor model. The goal is not to assert a final “black hole entropy” law here, but to define a rigorous bookkeeping structure that can be gated and extended.

10.6.1 10.6.1 Mixture entropy of local phase fractions

Define the local mixture entropy density (dimensionless Shannon form) over the nonnegative fractions: \[s_{\mathrm{mix}}(x,t) := -\Big[ \rho\ln\rho + e_{\mathrm{a}}\ln e_{\mathrm{a}} + e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}\ln e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}} + e_{\mathrm{pv}}\ln e_{\mathrm{pv}} \Big], \label{eq:part10_smix}\] with the standard convention \(0\ln 0:=0\). The integrated mixture entropy is \[S_{\mathrm{mix}}(t):=\int_{\Omega} s_{\mathrm{mix}}(x,t)\,dV. \label{eq:part10_Smix}\]

10.6.1.1 Relevance.

Reactor operation typically increases background-like content (\(e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}\) and/or \(e_{\mathrm{pv}}\)) while redistributing \(\rho\) and \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\). The mixture entropy provides a quantitative record of how “mixed” the local composition becomes.

10.6.2 10.6.2 Diffusion-driven entropy production (model inequality)

In mixing-dominated regimes, the active channel reduces to a diffusion law (PART 07.1). Consider the simplified scalar diffusion \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}=\nabla\cdot(D\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}), \qquad D>0, \label{eq:part10_diffusion_ea}\] with no-flux boundary condition \(D\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}\cdot\mathbf{n}=0\) on \(\partial\Omega\).

10.6.2.1 Proposition 10.2 (entropy production for diffusion).

Define \(F(t):=\int_\Omega e_{\mathrm{a}}\ln e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dV\). Then \[\frac{dF}{dt} = -\int_{\Omega} D\,\frac{\|\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}\|^2}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\,dV \le 0. \label{eq:part10_diffusion_entropy_ineq}\] Equivalently, \(\int_\Omega (-e_{\mathrm{a}}\ln e_{\mathrm{a}})\,dV\) is nondecreasing.

10.6.2.2 Proof.

Differentiate: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int e_{\mathrm{a}}\ln e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dV = \int (1+\ln e_{\mathrm{a}})\,\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dV = \int (1+\ln e_{\mathrm{a}})\,\nabla\cdot(D\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}})\,dV.\] Integrate by parts using the no-flux boundary condition: \[= -\int D\nabla(1+\ln e_{\mathrm{a}})\cdot\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dV = -\int D\,\frac{\|\nabla e_{\mathrm{a}}\|^2}{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\,dV \le 0.\] \(\square\)

10.6.2.3 Interpretation.

Mixing/diffusion irreversibly dissipates gradients and increases a natural entropy functional. This provides a rigorous monotonicity statement usable as a GATE in numerical implementations.

10.6.3 10.6.3 Relative-entropy (information) ledger toward equilibrium under reactor reactions

To connect to “information” bookkeeping, define an equilibrium composition \(E^{\mathrm{eq}}=(\rho^{\mathrm{eq}},e_{\mathrm{a}}^{\mathrm{eq}},e_{\mathrm{pv}}^{\mathrm{eq}},e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg,eq}})\) for the local reaction subsystem (e.g. set by \(\mu,\Gamma,\Lambda_{\mathrm{pv}},\mu_{\mathrm{pv}}\) in a steady environment). Then define the local relative entropy (Kullback–Leibler divergence) \[\mathcal{I}(x,t) := \sum_{i\in\{\rho,e_{\mathrm{a}},e_{\mathrm{pv}},e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}\}} i(x,t)\,\ln\!\left(\frac{i(x,t)}{i^{\mathrm{eq}}(x,t)}\right), \label{eq:part10_relative_entropy}\] and integrated information measure \[I(t):=\int_{\Omega}\mathcal{I}(x,t)\,dV. \label{eq:part10_I_def}\]

10.6.3.1 Gated claim (preview).

Under detailed-balance-like constraints on the reaction rates (to be stated in PART 17), \(I(t)\) is a Lyapunov functional that is nonincreasing: \[\frac{dI}{dt}\le 0, \label{eq:part10_I_decay_claim}\] with strict decay unless the system is at equilibrium. In this Part we do not assert detailed balance as a fact; we define the information ledger \(I(t)\) so that a future Part can specify and gate the conditions under which [eq:part10_I_decay_claim] holds.

10.6.4 10.6.4 Reactor implication: entropy production, information loss, and observational handles

In the decomposition reactor picture:

  • Choking (§10.1.1) produces long time delays and trapping, creating large gradient regions that diffusion then dissipates, increasing entropy (Proposition 10.2).

  • Saturation and decomposition (§10.1.2, §10.2.3) convert structured stored content into background-like reservoirs (\(e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) and \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}^{\mathrm{reg}}\)), tending to increase mixture entropy.

  • Recycling into jets (§10.2.5, §10.4) provides an observable channel to test whether PV reactivation is real: jet power/variability must match the energy ledger and throughput caps.

These statements become falsifiable once the gate parameters and rate functions are LOCKed and the RC/lensing/cluster + jet gates are simultaneously applied.

11 PART 11. Jet Generation, Confinement, and Collimation: Spin-Induced Geometric Confinement (Output 11)

This Part formalizes the VP-jet sector as a geometric confinement problem driven by (i) a preferred axis field \(k(x,t)\) (the alignment axis), (ii) a spin field (or rotation diagnostic) that selects \(k\), and (iii) anisotropic transport/drag that suppresses transverse leakage and thereby produces a jet tube with (approximately) conserved axial throughput. The goal is to elevate “jets” from a qualitative picture into a set of LOCK\(\to\)DERIVE\(\to\)GATE statements: precise definitions, invariants, collimation inequalities, stability criteria, and falsification conditions.

11.0.0.1 Standing definitions from previous Parts.

We assume the VP core variables and moments: \[\rho(x,t)\ (\text{stored phase}),\qquad e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\ (\text{active phase}),\qquad e(x,t):=\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\ (\text{actor total}),\] \[\mathbf{S}(x,t)\ (\text{flux of }e),\qquad \mathbf{T}(x,t)\ (\text{second moment / stress-like tensor}).\] We also assume the speed/throughput limit from PART 08 (with a small LOCK regularizer \(\eta_0>0\)): \[\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|\le c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad \mathbf{u}(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{S}(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+\eta_0}, \qquad \|\mathbf{u}\|\lesssim c. \label{eq:part11_speedlimit}\] We use the Heaviside step function \(H(\xi)\) with \(H(\xi)=1\) for \(\xi\ge 0\) and \(H(\xi)=0\) for \(\xi<0\).

11.0.0.2 Operational definition of a jet (for gates).

A jet region is a connected set \(\mathcal{J}\subset \mathbb{R}^3\) on which: \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\ge e_{\mathrm{a,min}}, \qquad \theta_j(x,t)\le \theta_{\max}, \qquad \theta_j(x,t):=\arctan\!\left(\frac{\|\mathbf{S}_\perp(x,t)\|}{|\mathbf{S}_\parallel(x,t)|+\eta_0}\right), \label{eq:part11_jet_def}\] where \(e_{\mathrm{a,min}}>0\) and \(\theta_{\max}\in(0,\pi/2)\) are LOCK thresholds, and \(\mathbf{S}_\parallel,\mathbf{S}_\perp\) are the components of \(\mathbf{S}\) parallel/perpendicular to the local axis \(k(x,t)\): \[\mathbf{S}_\parallel := (\mathbf{S}\cdot k)\,k, \qquad \mathbf{S}_\perp := \mathbf{S}-\mathbf{S}_\parallel, \qquad \|k(x,t)\|=1. \label{eq:part11_S_decomp}\] The quantity \(\theta_j\) is the local opening angle diagnostic. A jet tube is a tubular neighborhood around an axis curve aligned with \(k\) on which [eq:part11_jet_def] holds and side leakage is small (defined precisely in §11.2).

11.1 11.1 Alignment axis \(k\) and its connection to spin: minimal “axisymmetric kernel” assumption

The VP framework contains a primitive unit vector field \(k(x,t)\) that encodes the preferred alignment direction (PART 04). This Part specifies how \(k\) is selected in rotating systems: by a spin or rotation diagnostic, and by an axisymmetric alignment kernel that makes transverse directions statistically equivalent.

11.1.1 11.1.1 Spin diagnostics: global angular momentum and local vorticity

We provide two compatible definitions of “spin direction”; either may be used depending on the application.

11.1.1.1 (A) Global spin direction from angular momentum.

Let a central object (or inner control volume) have physical angular momentum vector \(\mathbf{L}(t)\neq 0\) (units \(ML^2T^{-1}\)). Define the unit spin direction \[\hat{\mathbf{s}}(t):=\frac{\mathbf{L}(t)}{\|\mathbf{L}(t)\|}. \label{eq:part11_spin_global}\]

11.1.1.2 (B) Local spin direction from VP vorticity.

Define the VP mean transport velocity \(\mathbf{u}\) by [eq:part11_speedlimit]. Its vorticity is \[\boldsymbol{\omega}(x,t):=\nabla\times \mathbf{u}(x,t), \qquad \hat{\mathbf{s}}(x,t):= \frac{\boldsymbol{\omega}(x,t)}{\|\boldsymbol{\omega}(x,t)\|+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part11_spin_local}\] Here \(\hat{\mathbf{s}}(x,t)\) is well-defined wherever \(\|\boldsymbol{\omega}\|\) is not too small; \(\eta_0\) prevents division by zero.

11.1.1.3 Spin gate (rotation present).

Jets in this Part are spin-induced. We declare a LOCK threshold \(\omega_{\min}>0\) and define \[G_{\mathrm{spin}}(x,t):=H\!\big(\|\boldsymbol{\omega}(x,t)\|-\omega_{\min}\big) \quad\text{or}\quad G_{\mathrm{spin}}(t):=H\!\big(\|\mathbf{L}(t)\|-L_{\min}\big), \label{eq:part11_Gspin}\] depending on whether a local vorticity or global angular momentum diagnostic is used. When \(G_{\mathrm{spin}}=0\), this Part predicts that persistent, narrow, spin-locked jets should not be forced (see §11.6).

11.1.2 11.1.2 Axisymmetric alignment kernel and the axial-moment lemma

The minimal “axisymmetric kernel” assumption states that the alignment/mixing kernel depends on velocity only through the scalar projection \(v\cdot k\).

11.1.2.1 Distribution-level objects (minimal).

Let \(f(x,v,t)\ge 0\) be the active-phase velocity distribution (PART 04), normalized so that \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=\int_{\mathbb{R}^3} f(x,v,t)\,dv. \label{eq:part11_ea_from_f}\] Let \(b(x,v,t)\) be the (dimensionless) alignment kernel entering the alignment moment(s). The LOCK axisymmetric kernel assumption is: \[b(x,v,t)=\tilde b\!\big(x,\,v\cdot k(x,t),\,t\big), \label{eq:part11_axisymmetric_b}\] i.e. \(b\) is invariant under rotations of \(v\) about \(k\).

11.1.2.2 Alignment moment.

Define the (first) alignment moment vector \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t):=\int_{\mathbb{R}^3} v\, b(x,v,t)\, f(x,v,t)\,dv. \label{eq:part11_mb_def}\] (Other moments can be defined similarly; the present lemma uses only [eq:part11_mb_def].)

11.1.2.3 Lemma 11.1 (axisymmetry forces \(\mathbf{m}_b\parallel k\)).

Assume:

  1. \(k(x,t)\) is a unit vector,

  2. \(b\) is axisymmetric about \(k\) as in [eq:part11_axisymmetric_b],

  3. \(f(x,v,t)\) is itself axisymmetric about \(k\) in the sense that \(f(x,Rv,t)=f(x,v,t)\) for any rotation \(R\) with \(Rk=k\) (this is the “axisymmetric kernel regime”).

Then \(\mathbf{m}_b(x,t)\) is parallel to \(k(x,t)\): \[\mathbf{m}_b(x,t) = m_b(x,t)\,k(x,t) \quad\text{for some scalar }m_b(x,t)\in\mathbb{R}. \label{eq:part11_mb_parallel}\]

11.1.2.4 Proof.

Fix \((x,t)\) and choose coordinates so that \(k=\hat z\). Write \(v=(v_\perp\cos\phi,\,v_\perp\sin\phi,\,v_\parallel)\) in cylindrical velocity coordinates, where \(v_\parallel=v\cdot k\) and \(v_\perp=\|v-(v\cdot k)k\|\). By axisymmetry, both \(f\) and \(b\) depend on \(\phi\) only through invariants, hence are independent of \(\phi\): \[f=f(v_\perp,v_\parallel),\qquad b=\tilde b(v_\parallel).\] Compute \(\mathbf{m}_b\): \[\mathbf{m}_b=\int v\,b\,f\,dv.\] The \(x\)-component is proportional to \(\int v_\perp\cos\phi \,\tilde b(v_\parallel)\,f(v_\perp,v_\parallel)\,dv\), and similarly the \(y\)-component to \(\int v_\perp\sin\phi \,\tilde b(v_\parallel)\,f\,dv\). Since \(\int_0^{2\pi}\cos\phi\,d\phi=0\) and \(\int_0^{2\pi}\sin\phi\,d\phi=0\), the transverse components vanish: \[(\mathbf{m}_b)_x=(\mathbf{m}_b)_y=0.\] Only the \(z\)-component can survive: \[(\mathbf{m}_b)_z=\int v_\parallel \,\tilde b(v_\parallel)\,f(v_\perp,v_\parallel)\,dv.\] Therefore \(\mathbf{m}_b\) is parallel to \(k=\hat z\). Returning to general coordinates gives [eq:part11_mb_parallel]. \(\square\)

11.1.2.5 Interpretation.

In the axisymmetric kernel regime, the only distinguished direction is \(k\). Therefore any odd-in-\(v\) vector moment must align with \(k\). This is the minimal mathematical content behind “a jet is forced to be axial” once a strong axis \(k\) exists.

11.1.3 11.1.3 Spin–axis locking: a projected relaxation law for \(k\)

We now specify a minimal, HYP but mathematically closed law by which \(k\) aligns with the spin direction \(\hat{\mathbf{s}}\).

11.1.3.1 Spin-alignment energy.

Define the misalignment energy density (dimensionless) as \[\mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{spin}}(k,\hat{\mathbf{s}}) := \frac{\kappa_s}{2}\,\|k\times \hat{\mathbf{s}}\|^2 = \frac{\kappa_s}{2}\,\big(1-(k\cdot \hat{\mathbf{s}})^2\big), \qquad \kappa_s\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part11_Espin}\] Minima occur at \(k=\pm \hat{\mathbf{s}}\).

11.1.3.2 Projected relaxation equation.

To preserve \(\|k\|=1\), we evolve \(k\) on the unit sphere using the projection operator \(P_\perp(k):=I-k\otimes k\). A minimal transport+relaxation law is \[\partial_t k + (\mathbf{u}\cdot\nabla)k = -\frac{1}{\tau_k}\,P_\perp(k)\,\nabla_k \mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{spin}}(k,\hat{\mathbf{s}}) = -\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\,P_\perp(k)\,\big(-(k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})\hat{\mathbf{s}}\big), \label{eq:part11_k_evolution_preproj}\] where \(\tau_k>0\) is a LOCK relaxation time and \(\nabla_k\) denotes the gradient with respect to \(k\) in \(\mathbb{R}^3\). Using \(P_\perp(k)\hat{\mathbf{s}}=\hat{\mathbf{s}}-(k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})k\), this becomes \[\partial_t k + (\mathbf{u}\cdot\nabla)k = \frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}(k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})\big(\hat{\mathbf{s}}-(k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})k\big) = -\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\,k\times\big(k\times\hat{\mathbf{s}}\big). \label{eq:part11_k_evolution}\] The last form uses the vector identity \(k\times(k\times\hat{\mathbf{s}})=(k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})k-\hat{\mathbf{s}}\).

11.1.3.3 Unit-length invariance.

Dot [eq:part11_k_evolution] with \(k\): \[k\cdot(\partial_t k + (\mathbf{u}\cdot\nabla)k)= -\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\,k\cdot\big(k\times(k\times\hat{\mathbf{s}})\big)=0,\] so \(\partial_t(\|k\|^2)+(\mathbf{u}\cdot\nabla)(\|k\|^2)=0\). If \(\|k\|=1\) initially, it remains \(1\) along characteristics.

11.1.3.4 Misalignment angle dynamics (local, in a frame where \(\hat{\mathbf{s}}\) is constant).

Define \(\cos\theta:=k\cdot \hat{\mathbf{s}}\). Differentiate along the advective derivative \(D_t:=\partial_t+(\mathbf{u}\cdot\nabla)\): \[D_t(\cos\theta)=D_t(k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})= (D_t k)\cdot \hat{\mathbf{s}},\] and use [eq:part11_k_evolution]: \[(D_t k)\cdot \hat{\mathbf{s}} = -\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\big(k\times(k\times\hat{\mathbf{s}})\big)\cdot \hat{\mathbf{s}} = -\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\big((k\cdot\hat{\mathbf{s}})^2-1\big) = \frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\sin^2\theta.\] Thus \[D_t(\cos\theta)=\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\sin^2\theta, \qquad D_t\theta=-\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\sin\theta\cos\theta. \label{eq:part11_theta_dynamics}\] For \(0<\theta<\pi/2\) we have \(D_t\theta<0\) so the misalignment decreases. The stable equilibria are \(\theta=0\) (alignment) and \(\theta=\pi\) (anti-alignment); \(\theta=\pi/2\) is unstable.

11.1.3.5 Explicit solution in the simplest case (no advection, constant \(\hat{\mathbf{s}}\)).

If \(D_t=\partial_t\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{s}}\) constant, then from [eq:part11_theta_dynamics]: \[\frac{d\theta}{dt}=-\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}\sin\theta\cos\theta =-\frac{\kappa_s}{2\tau_k}\sin(2\theta).\] Using \(\frac{d}{dt}\ln(\tan\theta)=\frac{1}{\sin\theta\cos\theta}\frac{d\theta}{dt}\), we obtain \[\frac{d}{dt}\ln(\tan\theta)=-\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k} \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \tan\theta(t)=\tan\theta(0)\,\exp\!\left(-\frac{\kappa_s}{\tau_k}t\right). \label{eq:part11_theta_solution}\] Therefore the spin-locking time is \(\tau_k/\kappa_s\).

11.1.4 11.1.4 Jet axis gate: requiring spin-locking and alignment quality

We now define gates that control whether a stable axis exists and whether it is sharp enough to produce a narrow jet.

11.1.4.1 Alignment defect \(a_k\) (moment-based definition).

Given \(f(x,v,t)\) and axis \(k(x,t)\), define the longitudinal/transverse second moments \[M_\parallel(x,t):=\int (v\cdot k)^2\,f(x,v,t)\,dv, \qquad M_\perp(x,t):=\int \|v-(v\cdot k)k\|^2\,f(x,v,t)\,dv. \label{eq:part11_Mpar_Mperp}\] Define the alignment defect as the transverse fraction of the kinetic second moment: \[a_k(x,t):=\frac{M_\perp(x,t)}{M_\parallel(x,t)+M_\perp(x,t)}\in[0,1], \qquad 1-a_k=\frac{M_\parallel}{M_\parallel+M_\perp}. \label{eq:part11_ak_def}\] Thus \(a_k\to 0\) means nearly all velocity variance is along \(k\) (strong alignment), while \(a_k\to 1\) means variance is mostly transverse (anti-jet).

11.1.4.2 Alignment quality gate.

Fix a LOCK threshold \(a_{\max}\in(0,1)\) and define \[G_{\mathrm{align}}(x,t):=H(a_{\max}-a_k(x,t)). \label{eq:part11_Galign}\]

11.1.4.3 Spin-locking gate (axis defined and stable).

Fix a LOCK misalignment tolerance \(\theta_{\max}^{(k)}\in(0,\pi/2)\) and define \[G_{k\parallel s}(x,t):= H\!\big(\cos\theta(x,t)-\cos\theta_{\max}^{(k)}\big), \qquad \cos\theta(x,t)=k(x,t)\cdot \hat{\mathbf{s}}(x,t). \label{eq:part11_Gkpar}\]

11.1.4.4 Composite axis gate.

\[G_{\mathrm{axis}}(x,t):=G_{\mathrm{spin}}(x,t)\,G_{k\parallel s}(x,t)\,G_{\mathrm{align}}(x,t). \label{eq:part11_Gaxis}\] When \(G_{\mathrm{axis}}=1\), the system is in a regime where a sharp, spin-locked axis exists and axial moments are forced to be parallel to \(k\) (Lemma 11.1), creating the structural precondition for a jet.

11.2 11.2 Jet-tube conservation laws: re-deriving the axial flux invariant

This subsection re-derives the central invariant: the axial throughput of a jet tube is (approximately) constant in steady state when side leakage is small. This is the rigorous content behind “jet tubes” in the VP ledger language.

11.2.1 11.2.1 The continuity equation and the transported charge

Start from the core continuity equation (PART 06), written for an appropriate conserved charge \(q(x,t)\) with flux \(\mathbf{S}\): \[\partial_t q(x,t) + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}(x,t)=0. \label{eq:part11_continuity_q}\] Depending on the application, \(q\) is chosen as:

  • \(q=e=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (actor total), if internal phase conversion does not create/destroy actor content;

  • \(q=e_{\mathrm{a}}\) (active phase), if one focuses on the transported channel but then must include source terms where \(\mu\rho-\Gamma\neq 0\);

  • \(q=q_R:=\rho+e_{\mathrm{a}}+e_{\mathrm{pv}}\) (reactor charge) inside a reactor model (PART 10), where [eq:part11_continuity_q] holds exactly with the same flux \(\mathbf{S}\).

For jet-tube transport outside the reactor core, it is typical to use \(q=e_{\mathrm{a}}\) with negligible sources, or \(q=e\) with strict conservation. To avoid ambiguity, we keep \(q\) generic and only impose the relevant gate (“sources negligible” or “choose conserved \(q\)”) when needed.

11.2.2 11.2.2 General control-volume transport identity (including moving boundaries)

Let \(\Omega(t)\) be a time-dependent control volume with boundary \(\partial\Omega(t)\) moving with boundary velocity field \(\mathbf{w}(x,t)\), and outward normal \(\mathbf{n}\). The Reynolds transport theorem states: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega(t)} q\,dV = \int_{\Omega(t)} \partial_t q\,dV + \int_{\partial\Omega(t)} q\,(\mathbf{w}\cdot\mathbf{n})\,dA. \label{eq:part11_reynolds}\] Using [eq:part11_continuity_q], we obtain \[\int_{\Omega(t)} \partial_t q\,dV = -\int_{\Omega(t)} \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}\,dV = -\int_{\partial\Omega(t)} \mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA,\] so \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega(t)} q\,dV + \int_{\partial\Omega(t)} \big(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w}\big)\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA =0. \label{eq:part11_transport_identity}\] This is the exact ledger form: the net change of charge in \(\Omega(t)\) equals the net flux of \(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w}\) across the moving boundary.

11.2.3 11.2.3 Definition of a jet tube and the no-leak boundary condition

A jet tube is modeled as a time-dependent tube-like control volume \(\Omega_T(t)\) whose boundary decomposes as \[\partial\Omega_T(t)=\Sigma_-(t)\ \cup\ \Sigma_+(t)\ \cup\ \Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}(t),\] where \(\Sigma_\pm\) are cross-sections (“inlet” and “outlet”) orthogonal to the axis direction, and \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}\) is the lateral surface.

11.2.3.1 Axis coordinate and local cross-sections.

Assume in the thin-tube regime that \(k\) varies slowly along the tube, so a local axial coordinate \(z\) can be defined with \(\partial_z\) approximately equal to \(k\cdot\nabla\). Each cross-section \(\Sigma(z,t)\) is approximately orthogonal to \(k\) at that \(z\).

11.2.3.2 No-leak condition (defining the tube surface).

We define the tube side surface as a (nearly) material surface for the transported charge: \[\big(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w}\big)\cdot \mathbf{n}=0 \quad\text{on }\Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}(t), \label{eq:part11_no_leak}\] i.e. there is no net charge flux through the side boundary in the frame moving with the tube boundary.

In steady tubes with fixed boundaries (\(\mathbf{w}=0\)), [eq:part11_no_leak] reduces to \[\mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{n}=0\quad\text{on }\Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}.\]

11.2.4 11.2.4 Axial throughput invariant

Apply [eq:part11_transport_identity] to \(\Omega_T(t)\) and decompose the boundary integrals: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega_T(t)} q\,dV + \int_{\Sigma_+(t)}(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w})\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA + \int_{\Sigma_-(t)}(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w})\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA + \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}(t)}(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w})\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA =0. \label{eq:part11_tube_balance_full}\] By the no-leak condition [eq:part11_no_leak], the side term vanishes, giving \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega_T(t)} q\,dV + \int_{\Sigma_+(t)}(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w})\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA + \int_{\Sigma_-(t)}(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w})\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA =0. \label{eq:part11_tube_balance}\]

11.2.4.1 Steady, fixed tube (canonical jet-tube invariant).

If the tube is steady and fixed, then \(\mathbf{w}=0\) and \(\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega_T} q\,dV=0\), so \[\int_{\Sigma_+}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA + \int_{\Sigma_-}\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA =0. \label{eq:part11_inout_balance}\] Choosing \(\mathbf{n}\) to point outward, the inlet has \(\mathbf{n}\approx -k\) and the outlet has \(\mathbf{n}\approx +k\). Therefore, defining the axial throughput (axial flux invariant) \[\mathcal{J}(z) := \int_{\Sigma(z)} \mathbf{S}\cdot k\,dA, \label{eq:part11_J_def}\] equation [eq:part11_inout_balance] implies \[\mathcal{J}(z_2)=\mathcal{J}(z_1) \quad\text{for any two cross-sections }z_1,z_2 \text{ in the steady no-leak tube.} \label{eq:part11_J_invariant}\] This is the jet-tube axial invariant: axial throughput is constant along the tube.

11.2.4.2 Non-steady or leaky tubes (diagnostic form).

If the tube is not steady or leakage is nonzero, [eq:part11_tube_balance_full] provides a diagnostic: \[\mathcal{J}(z_2)-\mathcal{J}(z_1) = -\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega(z_1,z_2)} q\,dV - \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}(z_1,z_2)}(\mathbf{S}-q\mathbf{w})\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA, \label{eq:part11_J_diagnostic}\] where \(\Omega(z_1,z_2)\) is the sub-tube between cross-sections \(z_1\) and \(z_2\). Thus deviations from invariance directly measure unsteadiness and side leakage.

11.2.5 11.2.5 Jet-tube invariants for power (link to PART 10)

If the VP energy flux carried by the jet is modeled as in PART 10 by \(\mathbf{J}_{\mathrm{VP}}=u_* \epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{S}\), then the VP-carried jet power through a cross-section is \[P_{\mathrm{jet}}(z)=\int_{\Sigma(z)} \mathbf{J}_{\mathrm{VP}}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA \approx u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\int_{\Sigma(z)} \mathbf{S}\cdot k\,dA = u_*\,\epsilon_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathcal{J}(z). \label{eq:part11_Pjet_from_J}\] Therefore, in a steady no-leak jet tube, \(P_{\mathrm{jet}}(z)\) is constant along \(z\) up to any radiative losses that are explicitly included (e.g. via a separate radiation ledger).

11.3 11.3 Collimation conditions: how defect, boundary, and geometry produce channeling

Collimation is the suppression of transverse flux relative to axial flux. This subsection provides (i) a purely kinematic bound linking collimation to the alignment defect \(a_k\), and (ii) a dynamical mechanism: anisotropic drag/stress and confining forces that keep the jet narrow.

11.3.1 11.3.1 Opening angle and the alignment defect: a rigorous inequality

Recall the local opening angle diagnostic [eq:part11_jet_def] with \(\tan\theta_j=\|\mathbf{S}_\perp\|/(|\mathbf{S}_\parallel|+\eta_0)\). We now connect \(\|\mathbf{S}_\perp\|/\|\mathbf{S}_\parallel\|\) to the second-moment defect \(a_k\) from [eq:part11_ak_def].

11.3.1.1 Proposition 11.2 (Cauchy–Schwarz collimation bound).

Let \(f(x,v,t)\ge 0\) be such that \(e_{\mathrm{a}}=\int f\,dv>0\), and define \(\mathbf{S}\) as the first velocity moment: \[\mathbf{S}(x,t):=\int v\, f(x,v,t)\,dv. \label{eq:part11_S_from_f}\] Let \(M_\parallel,M_\perp\) be defined by [eq:part11_Mpar_Mperp]. Then: \[\|\mathbf{S}_\perp(x,t)\|^2 \le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,M_\perp(x,t), \qquad |\mathbf{S}_\parallel(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)|^2 \le e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,M_\parallel(x,t). \label{eq:part11_CS_bounds}\] Consequently, if \(M_\parallel>0\), the flux anisotropy ratio satisfies \[\frac{\|\mathbf{S}_\perp\|}{|\mathbf{S}_\parallel\cdot k|} \le \sqrt{\frac{M_\perp}{M_\parallel}} = \sqrt{\frac{a_k}{1-a_k}}. \label{eq:part11_opening_angle_bound}\]

11.3.1.2 Proof.

Fix \((x,t)\). Write \(v=v_\parallel k+v_\perp\) with \(v_\parallel=v\cdot k\) and \(v_\perp=v-(v\cdot k)k\). Then \[\mathbf{S}_\perp=\int v_\perp f\,dv, \qquad \mathbf{S}_\parallel\cdot k = \int v_\parallel f\,dv.\] By Cauchy–Schwarz, \[\|\mathbf{S}_\perp\|^2 = \left\|\int v_\perp f\,dv\right\|^2 \le \left(\int f\,dv\right)\left(\int \|v_\perp\|^2 f\,dv\right)=e_{\mathrm{a}} M_\perp,\] and similarly \[|\mathbf{S}_\parallel\cdot k|^2 = \left(\int v_\parallel f\,dv\right)^2 \le \left(\int f\,dv\right)\left(\int v_\parallel^2 f\,dv\right)=e_{\mathrm{a}} M_\parallel.\] Divide the square-roots to obtain [eq:part11_opening_angle_bound]. \(\square\)

11.3.1.3 Operational consequence: opening angle \(\leftrightarrow a_k\).

If \(\theta_j\) is small and \(\eta_0\) negligible compared to \(|\mathbf{S}_\parallel|\), then \(\tan\theta_j\approx \|\mathbf{S}_\perp\|/|\mathbf{S}_\parallel|\), and [eq:part11_opening_angle_bound] implies \[\tan\theta_j \lesssim \sqrt{\frac{a_k}{1-a_k}} \quad\Longrightarrow\quad a_k \gtrsim \frac{\tan^2\theta_j}{1+\tan^2\theta_j}=\sin^2\theta_j. \label{eq:part11_ak_from_theta}\] Thus observed opening angles directly constrain the alignment defect: narrower jets require smaller \(a_k\).

11.3.2 11.3.2 Strong-alignment closure: anisotropic stress and anisotropic drag

To model collimation dynamically, we introduce a strong-alignment (jet) closure in which the second-moment tensor \(\mathbf{T}\) and drag tensor \(\mathbf{B}\) are anisotropic with respect to \(k\).

11.3.2.1 Projectors.

Define the parallel/perpendicular projectors: \[P_\parallel := k\otimes k, \qquad P_\perp := I - k\otimes k. \label{eq:part11_projectors}\]

11.3.2.2 Anisotropic (jet) closure for \(\mathbf{T}\).

In the strong-alignment regime (PART 07.5), a minimal symmetric closure is \[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_\parallel\,e_{\mathrm{a}}\,P_\parallel + \kappa_\perp\,e_{\mathrm{a}}\,P_\perp, \qquad \kappa_\parallel\ge 0,\ \kappa_\perp\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part11_T_aniso}\] Realizability gate. If \(\mathbf{T}\) represents the second velocity moment, then the speed limit implies \[\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{T}) = (\kappa_\parallel+2\kappa_\perp)e_{\mathrm{a}} \le c^2 e_{\mathrm{a}}, \qquad\Rightarrow\qquad \kappa_\parallel+2\kappa_\perp\le c^2, \label{eq:part11_T_trace_gate}\] a GATE constraint.

11.3.2.3 Anisotropic drag.

A minimal anisotropic drag tensor is \[\mathbf{B} = B_\parallel\,P_\parallel + B_\perp\,P_\perp, \qquad B_\parallel\ge 0,\ B_\perp\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part11_B_aniso}\] The “open axial channel” condition (PART 10.4) is the collimation requirement \[B_\parallel \ll B_\perp, \label{eq:part11_open_channel}\] meaning transverse transport is strongly damped while axial transport is relatively free.

11.3.3 11.3.3 Dynamical suppression of transverse flux and a collimation bound

Use the flux equation (PART 06/10 form): \[\partial_t \mathbf{S}+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T} = -\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S, \label{eq:part11_S_eq}\] where \(\mathbf{R}_S\) collects any additional sources (including reactor sources when relevant).

Decompose vectors into parallel/perpendicular components: \[\mathbf{S}=\mathbf{S}_\parallel+\mathbf{S}_\perp,\quad \mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}=\mathbf{F}_\parallel+\mathbf{F}_\perp,\quad \mathbf{R}_S=\mathbf{R}_\parallel+\mathbf{R}_\perp,\] and project [eq:part11_S_eq] with \(P_\perp\).

11.3.3.1 Perpendicular projected equation (with anisotropic closure).

Assume \(k\) varies slowly (thin-tube approximation) so derivatives of \(P_\parallel,P_\perp\) are subleading. Using [eq:part11_T_aniso] and [eq:part11_B_aniso], we obtain approximately \[\partial_t \mathbf{S}_\perp + \nabla_\perp(\kappa_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}}) \approx - B_\perp\,\mathbf{S}_\perp + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_\perp + \mathbf{R}_\perp, \label{eq:part11_Sperp_eq}\] where \(\nabla_\perp:=P_\perp\nabla\).

11.3.3.2 Quasi-steady transverse balance.

In a steady or slowly varying jet core, take \(\partial_t \mathbf{S}_\perp\approx 0\) and \(\mathbf{R}_\perp\approx 0\) (or treat it as small). Then \[\mathbf{S}_\perp \approx \frac{1}{B_\perp}\Big(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_\perp-\nabla_\perp(\kappa_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}})\Big). \label{eq:part11_Sperp_balance}\] Therefore a sufficient condition for strong collimation is \[\|\mathbf{S}_\perp\| \ll |\mathbf{S}_\parallel\cdot k| \quad\Leftarrow\quad \frac{1}{B_\perp}\Big(\|e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_\perp\|+\|\nabla_\perp(\kappa_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}})\|\Big) \ll |\mathbf{S}_\parallel\cdot k|. \label{eq:part11_collimation_condition_general}\] This condition becomes easier to satisfy when \(B_\perp\) is large (strong transverse damping), \(\kappa_\perp\) is small (weak transverse “pressure”), and the transverse driving force is small or inward-restoring.

11.3.3.3 Collimation gate (practical).

Fix a LOCK collimation ratio \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{col}}\ll 1\) and define \[G_{\mathrm{col}}(x,t):= H\!\left(\epsilon_{\mathrm{col}}-\frac{\|\mathbf{S}_\perp(x,t)\|}{|\mathbf{S}_\parallel(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)|+\eta_0}\right). \label{eq:part11_Gcol}\] In strong-alignment regimes, Proposition 11.2 provides a purely kinematic sufficient condition: \[\sqrt{\frac{a_k}{1-a_k}}\le \epsilon_{\mathrm{col}} \quad\Rightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{col}}=1\ \text{(in the idealized moment model)}.\]

11.3.4 11.3.4 Geometric channeling by a confining transverse force: Gaussian jet core and tube radius

A convenient minimal model for confinement is a transverse restoring force (harmonic confinement) toward the axis: \[\mathbf{F}_\perp \approx -\Omega_c^2\,\mathbf{r}_\perp, \qquad \Omega_c>0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK}/\textsf{SPEC})}, \label{eq:part11_confining_force}\] where \(\mathbf{r}_\perp\) is the transverse displacement from the axis. This models geometric channeling caused by defects/boundaries/curvature that effectively push the active phase back toward the axis.

11.3.4.1 No-leak stationary profile (transverse equilibrium).

If the tube boundary is chosen so that \(\mathbf{S}_\perp\approx 0\) in the jet core (no transverse net flux), then [eq:part11_Sperp_balance] reduces to \[\nabla_\perp(\kappa_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}}) \approx e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_\perp. \label{eq:part11_no_leak_balance}\] If \(\kappa_\perp\) is approximately constant across the core, then \[\kappa_\perp \nabla_\perp e_{\mathrm{a}} \approx e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_\perp \quad\Rightarrow\quad \nabla_\perp \ln e_{\mathrm{a}} \approx \frac{1}{\kappa_\perp}\mathbf{F}_\perp.\] Using [eq:part11_confining_force] and taking radial symmetry in the transverse plane (\(r:=\|\mathbf{r}_\perp\|\)), \[\frac{d}{dr}\ln e_{\mathrm{a}}(r) \approx -\frac{\Omega_c^2}{\kappa_\perp}\,r.\] Integrating gives the Gaussian core profile: \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(r) \approx e_{\mathrm{a}}(0)\, \exp\!\left(-\frac{\Omega_c^2}{2\kappa_\perp}\,r^2\right). \label{eq:part11_gaussian_ea}\]

11.3.4.2 Jet radius estimate.

Define the jet radius \(R_j\) as the \(1/e\) radius of \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\): \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_j)=e_{\mathrm{a}}(0)\,e^{-1}.\] From [eq:part11_gaussian_ea], \[R_j \approx \sqrt{\frac{2\kappa_\perp}{\Omega_c^2}}. \label{eq:part11_Rj}\] This expresses a basic design principle: \[\begin{aligned} \text{strong confinement (large }\Omega_c\text{)} &\Rightarrow \text{narrow jet},\\ \text{strong transverse ``pressure'' (large }\kappa_\perp\text{)} &\Rightarrow \text{wider jet}. \end{aligned}\]

11.4 11.4 Stability and instability: conditions for collapse, fragmentation, and disruption

This subsection provides a mathematically closed linear stability analysis for a reduced jet-tube model. The intent is not to reproduce full MHD jet stability, but to define VP-native stability gates tied to \((\kappa_\parallel,\kappa_\perp,B_\parallel,B_\perp)\) and confinement \((\Omega_c)\).

11.4.1 11.4.1 Reduced 1D jet-tube equations (cross-section averaged)

Assume a straight jet along a fixed axis \(k=\hat z\), with a cross-section of area \(A\) that is approximately constant over the segment considered. Define cross-section averages: \[\bar q(z,t):=\frac{1}{A}\int_{\Sigma(z)} q\,dA, \qquad \bar S(z,t):=\frac{1}{A}\int_{\Sigma(z)} \mathbf{S}\cdot k\,dA. \label{eq:part11_cross_avg}\] Assume the tube is no-leak so side flux is negligible (or absorbed into a small error term). Then integrating [eq:part11_continuity_q] over \(\Sigma(z)\) yields the 1D continuity: \[\partial_t \bar q + \partial_z \bar S = 0. \label{eq:part11_1D_continuity}\]

For the axial flux equation, project [eq:part11_S_eq] along \(k\). With the anisotropic closure [eq:part11_T_aniso] and assuming coefficients slowly varying, we approximate \[\partial_t \bar S + \partial_z(\kappa_\parallel \bar e_{\mathrm{a}}) = -B_\parallel \bar S + \bar R_\parallel, \label{eq:part11_1D_S}\] where \(\bar e_{\mathrm{a}}\) is the cross-section average of \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\bar R_\parallel\) is any averaged axial source (e.g. reactor-driven injection in the launching zone; outside the launching zone we set it to \(0\)).

In the simplest conserved-charge regime, take \(q=e_{\mathrm{a}}\) and neglect sources so \(\bar R_\parallel\approx 0\) on the segment.

11.4.2 11.4.2 Longitudinal (compressive) stability: damped wave dispersion

Linearize [eq:part11_1D_continuity][eq:part11_1D_S] about a homogeneous steady state \((\bar e_{\mathrm{a}},\bar S)=(e_0,S_0)\) with constant \(\kappa_\parallel,B_\parallel\) and \(\bar R_\parallel=0\). Let perturbations be \[\delta e(z,t),\ \delta S(z,t)\ \propto\ \exp\!\big(i(kz-\omega t)\big).\] Then [eq:part11_1D_continuity] gives \[-i\omega\,\delta e + ik\,\delta S=0 \quad\Rightarrow\quad \delta S=\frac{\omega}{k}\,\delta e. \label{eq:part11_disp_relation_step1}\] Equation [eq:part11_1D_S] gives \[-i\omega\,\delta S + ik\,\kappa_\parallel\,\delta e = -B_\parallel\,\delta S. \label{eq:part11_disp_relation_step2}\] Substitute [eq:part11_disp_relation_step1] into [eq:part11_disp_relation_step2]: \[-i\omega\left(\frac{\omega}{k}\delta e\right)+ik\kappa_\parallel\delta e = -B_\parallel\left(\frac{\omega}{k}\delta e\right).\] Multiply by \(k/\delta e\): \[-i\omega^2 + i\kappa_\parallel k^2 = -B_\parallel \omega.\] Rearrange: \[\omega^2 + iB_\parallel \omega - \kappa_\parallel k^2 = 0. \label{eq:part11_dispersion_longitudinal}\] The solutions are \[\omega = \frac{-iB_\parallel \pm \sqrt{4\kappa_\parallel k^2 - B_\parallel^2}}{2}. \label{eq:part11_omega_roots}\] Therefore:

  • If \(\kappa_\parallel>0\) and \(B_\parallel\ge 0\), then \(\mathrm{Im}(\omega)=-B_\parallel/2\le 0\), so perturbations do not grow; they either oscillate with damping or decay monotonically.

  • If (unphysical) \(\kappa_\parallel<0\), then \(\omega^2\) effectively changes sign and exponential growth can occur; this is excluded by realizability gates (e.g. [eq:part11_T_trace_gate] with nonnegative coefficients).

Thus longitudinal stability is guaranteed in the physically admissible parameter regime: \[\kappa_\parallel\ge 0,\qquad B_\parallel\ge 0\qquad \Rightarrow\qquad \text{no longitudinal exponential instability in the reduced model.} \label{eq:part11_longitudinal_stability_condition}\]

11.4.3 11.4.3 Transverse (kink-like) stability: confinement vs shear

We model transverse bending of the jet centerline by a displacement field \(\boldsymbol{\xi}(z,t)\in\mathbb{R}^2\) in the plane orthogonal to \(k=\hat z\).

11.4.3.1 Minimal “string with confinement” model.

Define the effective line inertia \(I\) and effective tension \(T\) by cross-section integrals: \[I:=\int_{\Sigma} e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dA \approx A e_0, \qquad T:=\int_{\Sigma} \kappa_\parallel e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dA \approx A \kappa_\parallel e_0, \label{eq:part11_I_T_def}\] in a uniform core approximation. Let transverse damping be \(\nu_\perp>0\) (modeled as proportional to \(B_\perp\)). Let confinement stiffness be \(K_c:=I\Omega_c^2\) with \(\Omega_c>0\) from [eq:part11_confining_force].

Then a minimal linear transverse dynamics is \[I\,\partial_t^2 \boldsymbol{\xi} +\nu_\perp I\,\partial_t \boldsymbol{\xi} +K_c\,\boldsymbol{\xi} - T\,\partial_z^2 \boldsymbol{\xi} =0. \label{eq:part11_transverse_string}\] Plane-wave perturbations \(\boldsymbol{\xi}\propto e^{i(kz-\omega t)}\) yield \[-\omega^2 + i\nu_\perp \omega + \Omega_c^2 + c_T^2 k^2 = 0, \qquad c_T^2:=\frac{T}{I}\approx \kappa_\parallel. \label{eq:part11_transverse_dispersion}\] Equivalently, \[\omega^2 - i\nu_\perp \omega - (\Omega_c^2 + c_T^2 k^2)=0. \label{eq:part11_transverse_dispersion_alt}\] The roots satisfy \(\mathrm{Im}(\omega)\le 0\) when \(\nu_\perp>0\) and \(\Omega_c^2+c_T^2 k^2\ge 0\), so no exponential growth occurs.

11.4.3.2 Destabilizing external shear (Kelvin–Helmholtz analog in minimal form).

Represent external shear as a negative stiffness term \(-\sigma_{\mathrm{sh}}^2 I\,\boldsymbol{\xi}\) (a minimal linearization of shear-driven displacement growth), yielding \[I\,\partial_t^2 \boldsymbol{\xi} +\nu_\perp I\,\partial_t \boldsymbol{\xi} +I(\Omega_c^2-\sigma_{\mathrm{sh}}^2)\boldsymbol{\xi} - T\,\partial_z^2 \boldsymbol{\xi} =0. \label{eq:part11_transverse_shear}\] Then the stability requirement becomes \[\Omega_c^2-\sigma_{\mathrm{sh}}^2 \ge 0 \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \Omega_c \ge \sigma_{\mathrm{sh}}. \label{eq:part11_shear_stability}\] This is a GATE: if measured/environment-inferred shear exceeds confinement, the jet should bend and disrupt.

11.4.4 11.4.4 Radius (sausage-like) stability and diffusive broadening

Two mechanisms can destroy collimation:

  1. Dynamical radius instability (sausage-like): axial variations in cross-section grow.

  2. Diffusive broadening (not exponential but erosive): transverse mixing slowly widens the jet.

11.4.4.1 (i) Sausage-like instability in a 1D variable-area model.

Let the cross-sectional area be \(A(z,t)\) and define axial throughput \(J(z,t):=A(z,t)\bar S(z,t)\). Assume a conserved charge \(q=e_{\mathrm{a}}\) with cross-section mean \(\bar e_{\mathrm{a}}\) and no side leakage. Then mass/charge conservation becomes \[\partial_t\big(A\bar e_{\mathrm{a}}\big) + \partial_z\big(A\bar S\big)=0 \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \partial_t(A\bar e_{\mathrm{a}})+\partial_z J=0. \label{eq:part11_variable_area_cont}\] For the axial momentum/flux equation, use [eq:part11_1D_S] in conservative form multiplied by \(A\) (neglecting \(z\)-derivatives of coefficients): \[\partial_t J + \partial_z\big(A\kappa_\parallel \bar e_{\mathrm{a}}\big)= -B_\parallel J. \label{eq:part11_variable_area_S}\] Linearize about a steady base state \((A,\bar e_{\mathrm{a}},J)=(A_0,e_0,J_0)\) with constant coefficients and \(B_\parallel\ge 0\). Set \(B_\parallel=0\) for conservative stability. Let perturbations \(\delta A,\delta e,\delta J\propto e^{i(kz-\omega t)}\). Then [eq:part11_variable_area_cont] gives \[-i\omega(A_0\delta e+e_0\delta A)+ik\,\delta J=0. \label{eq:part11_sausage_lin1}\] Equation [eq:part11_variable_area_S] gives \[-i\omega\,\delta J + ik\kappa_\parallel(A_0\delta e+e_0\delta A)=0. \label{eq:part11_sausage_lin2}\] Eliminate \(\delta J\) by substituting \(\delta J=\frac{\omega}{k}(A_0\delta e+e_0\delta A)\) from [eq:part11_sausage_lin1] into [eq:part11_sausage_lin2], obtaining \[-i\omega\left(\frac{\omega}{k}\right)(A_0\delta e+e_0\delta A)+ik\kappa_\parallel(A_0\delta e+e_0\delta A)=0.\] If \(A_0\delta e+e_0\delta A\neq 0\), this simplifies to \[\omega^2=\kappa_\parallel k^2. \label{eq:part11_sausage_dispersion}\] Thus the variable-area mode propagates as a wave with speed \(\sqrt{\kappa_\parallel}\) and shows no exponential growth as long as \(\kappa_\parallel\ge 0\). Including \(B_\parallel>0\) adds damping, not growth (as in §11.4.2).

11.4.4.2 (ii) Diffusive broadening gate.

Even without exponential instability, transverse diffusion/mixing can broaden the jet. In the strong-alignment closure [eq:part11_T_aniso], transverse “pressure” corresponds to \(\kappa_\perp\) and transverse damping \(B_\perp\) controls the effective transverse diffusivity \[D_\perp := \frac{\kappa_\perp}{B_\perp+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part11_Dperp}\] A rough broadening time over radius \(R_j\) is \[t_{\mathrm{diff},\perp}\sim \frac{R_j^2}{D_\perp}. \label{eq:part11_tdiff}\] A necessary condition for a jet to remain collimated over an axial distance \(L\) with axial transport speed \(u_\parallel\) is \[t_{\mathrm{diff},\perp}\gg t_{\mathrm{adv}} \quad\text{where}\quad t_{\mathrm{adv}}\sim \frac{L}{u_\parallel}, \qquad u_\parallel:=\frac{\bar S}{\bar e_{\mathrm{a}}+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part11_diffusive_survival}\] This provides a practical GATE: if mixing is too strong (\(D_\perp\) large), the jet becomes a wide wind on the scale \(L\).

11.5 11.5 Observational diagnostics: jet direction as alignment axis (spin diagnostic) and other predictions

This subsection translates the mathematical structure into concrete predictions that can be tested with independent spin/axis diagnostics, jet morphology, and variability.

11.5.1 11.5.1 Core prediction: jet axis \(\approx k \approx\) spin axis

When the composite axis gate [eq:part11_Gaxis] is ON, the system predicts: \[\text{Jet direction} \ \approx\ k \quad\text{and}\quad k \ \approx\ \hat{\mathbf{s}}, \label{eq:part11_axis_prediction_eq}\] with misalignment angle \(\theta\) evolving according to [eq:part11_theta_dynamics] and relaxing as [eq:part11_theta_solution] in the simplest case. Therefore: \[\theta(t)\ \text{decays on timescale}\ \tau_k/\kappa_s, \qquad \theta(t)\approx \arctan\!\Big(\tan\theta(0)e^{-(\kappa_s/\tau_k)t}\Big). \label{eq:part11_theta_timescale}\] Prediction: persistent jets should be closely aligned with independently inferred spin axes in systems where spin is stable over \(\gtrsim \tau_k/\kappa_s\).

11.5.2 11.5.2 Opening angle diagnostics as a direct bound on alignment defect

Proposition 11.2 gives \[\tan\theta_j \lesssim \sqrt{\frac{a_k}{1-a_k}}.\] Thus observed opening angles constrain \(a_k\) through [eq:part11_ak_from_theta]. In particular, a narrow jet with \(\theta_j\ll 1\) implies \[a_k \lesssim \theta_j^2\quad (\theta_j\ll 1), \label{eq:part11_small_angle_ak}\] up to the looseness of the inequality and modeling assumptions. This makes \(a_k\) an operationally inferable quantity from jet morphology.

11.5.3 11.5.3 Jet-tube invariants and energy accounting

If the jet is in the steady no-leak regime, the axial throughput invariant [eq:part11_J_invariant] and jet power relation [eq:part11_Pjet_from_J] imply: \[\mathcal{J}(z)\approx \text{const},\qquad P_{\mathrm{jet}}(z)\approx \text{const}, \label{eq:part11_observable_invariants}\] over segments where radiation losses and entrainment are negligible. Deviations should correlate with the diagnostic terms in [eq:part11_J_diagnostic]: \[\text{(i) strong unsteadiness } \frac{d}{dt}\int q\,dV\neq 0,\quad \text{(ii) side leakage } \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{side}}}\mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA\neq 0.\] This is a concrete observational/numerical check: measure how jet power changes with distance and compare to inferred entrainment/leakage and variability.

11.5.4 11.5.4 Two-sidedness and symmetry in the axisymmetric kernel regime

In the axisymmetric kernel regime (Lemma 11.1), the theory has no preferred sign along \(k\) absent boundary asymmetry. Therefore, bipolar jets (outflows along both \(+k\) and \(-k\)) are the generic expectation, with asymmetry arising from environment/boundary conditions or from explicitly sign-breaking source terms (e.g. one-sided feeding).

11.5.5 11.5.5 Variability: gate-crossing signatures

Jet appearance/disappearance and collimation changes are predicted to occur at gate crossings: \[G_{\mathrm{axis}},\quad G_{\mathrm{col}},\quad \text{and (if reactor-fed) reactor gates from PART 10}.\] Characteristic timescales are inherited from: \[\text{axis locking: } \tau_k/\kappa_s,\qquad \text{transverse confinement: } 1/\Omega_c,\qquad \text{diffusive broadening: } t_{\mathrm{diff},\perp}\sim R_j^2/D_\perp,\] and from any source/throughput dynamics feeding \(\mathbf{R}_S\).

11.6 11.6 Falsification conditions: when jets must not be forced

This subsection lists explicit conditions under which the VP jet mechanism described here predicts that a narrow, persistent, spin-locked jet should not occur. Observing strong jets in these regimes constitutes a direct FAIL of this Part’s mechanism (subject to correct diagnostics and gate evaluation).

11.6.1 11.6.1 Composite jet gate

Define the composite jet gate (for spin-induced, collimated jets) as \[G_{\mathrm{JET}}(x,t):= G_{\mathrm{axis}}(x,t)\,G_{\mathrm{col}}(x,t)\,G_{\mathrm{conf}}(x,t)\,G_{\mathrm{chan}}(x,t)\,G_{\mathrm{pow}}(x,t), \label{eq:part11_GJET}\] where:

  • \(G_{\mathrm{axis}}\) is the axis gate [eq:part11_Gaxis] (spin present, \(k\parallel \hat{\mathbf{s}}\), strong alignment quality),

  • \(G_{\mathrm{col}}\) is the collimation gate [eq:part11_Gcol],

  • \(G_{\mathrm{conf}}\) is a confinement gate requiring \(\Omega_c\ge \Omega_{\min}>0\),

  • \(G_{\mathrm{chan}}\) is an open-channel gate requiring \(B_\perp/B_\parallel \ge \Xi_{\min}\gg 1\),

  • \(G_{\mathrm{pow}}\) is a power/throughput gate requiring sustained injection or driving (e.g. nonzero \(\bar R_\parallel\) in a launch zone, or reactor-fed source from PART 10 when applicable).

Each threshold \((\Omega_{\min},\Xi_{\min},e_{\mathrm{a,min}},\theta_{\max},a_{\max},\omega_{\min},\ldots)\) is LOCK per version.

11.6.2 11.6.2 “No-spin” falsification

If \(G_{\mathrm{spin}}=0\) (rotation below threshold; [eq:part11_Gspin]), then \(G_{\mathrm{axis}}=0\) and thus \(G_{\mathrm{JET}}=0\). \[G_{\mathrm{spin}}=0 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \text{No persistent, narrow, spin-locked jet is forced by this mechanism.} \label{eq:part11_no_spin_prediction}\] Falsification: robust observations of narrow, long-lived, highly collimated jets in systems demonstrably lacking rotation/spin (according to the declared diagnostic) would contradict the spin-induced confinement mechanism.

11.6.3 11.6.3 “No alignment” falsification (large defect or weak axis locking)

If either the alignment defect is too large (\(a_k>a_{\max}\)) or \(k\) is not spin-locked (\(\theta>\theta_{\max}^{(k)}\)), then \(G_{\mathrm{axis}}=0\). \[a_k>a_{\max}\ \ \text{or}\ \ \theta>\theta_{\max}^{(k)} \quad\Longrightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{axis}}=0 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{JET}}=0. \label{eq:part11_no_alignment_prediction}\] Falsification: if a system shows \(a_k\) (inferred from jet opening or other diagnostics) incompatible with strong alignment but nevertheless exhibits a narrow, stable jet, this Part’s alignment-based collimation is invalid.

11.6.4 11.6.4 “No open channel” falsification (isotropic drag/permeability)

If transverse damping is not much stronger than axial damping, then transverse leakage is not suppressed and collimation fails: \[\frac{B_\perp}{B_\parallel} < \Xi_{\min} \quad\Longrightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{chan}}=0 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{JET}}=0. \label{eq:part11_no_channel_prediction}\] Falsification: if independent constraints indicate nearly isotropic transport (no strong anisotropy) yet strong collimated jets persist, the anisotropic confinement mechanism fails.

11.6.5 11.6.5 “No confinement” falsification (defocusing transverse force or excessive shear)

If confinement is absent or shear overwhelms confinement (see [eq:part11_shear_stability]), then kink-like disruption is expected: \[\Omega_c \le \Omega_{\min} \quad\text{or}\quad \sigma_{\mathrm{sh}}>\Omega_c \quad\Longrightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{conf}}=0 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad G_{\mathrm{JET}}=0. \label{eq:part11_no_confinement_prediction}\] Falsification: if observed jets remain stable in environments where confinement is demonstrably weak and shear is large (relative to the declared diagnostics), this Part’s confinement model is contradicted.

11.6.6 11.6.6 “Mixing-dominated” falsification (diffusive destruction of narrow jets)

If transverse diffusivity is too large, jets should broaden over the advection time, per [eq:part11_diffusive_survival]. Define a mixing gate: \[G_{\mathrm{mix}}:=H\!\left(t_{\mathrm{diff},\perp}-\Theta_{\mathrm{mix}}\,t_{\mathrm{adv}}\right), \qquad \Theta_{\mathrm{mix}}\gg 1\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part11_Gmix}\] If \(G_{\mathrm{mix}}=0\), narrow jets are predicted to decay into wide outflows.

11.6.7 11.6.7 Summary: falsification protocol

For each system:

  1. Fix the diagnostics for spin (\(\mathbf{L}\) or \(\boldsymbol{\omega}\)), axis (\(k\)), and alignment defect (\(a_k\)) as declared in LOCK.

  2. Evaluate \(G_{\mathrm{JET}}\) from [eq:part11_GJET] using the LOCK thresholds.

  3. If \(G_{\mathrm{JET}}=0\) but the system shows a persistent, narrow jet consistent with [eq:part11_jet_def] (with the same thresholds), record FAIL[jet-forcing] for this mechanism.

  4. If \(G_{\mathrm{JET}}=1\) but no jet exists, record FAIL[missing-jet] and classify which sub-gate or modeling assumption failed (axis locking, confinement, open channel, power supply, or leakage).

This completes the VP-jet sector as a gated, falsifiable module: jets are not asserted universally, but are forced only in specific regimes, and the regime predictions can be contradicted by data.

12 PART 12. Stars, Sun, and Disks: Low-Pressure Volume Ejection (“Sprinkler”) System (Output 12)

This Part defines and derives the VP interpretation of stellar/solar winds and disk outflows as a low-pressure, partially aligned, multi-aperture ejection mechanism—a “sprinkler” system. In contrast to PART 11 jets (strong alignment + strong geometric confinement producing narrow jet tubes), the sprinkler regime is characterized by:

  • Partial alignment (not strong enough to force jet collimation),

  • Low confinement (transverse trapping is weak; outflow spreads as a wind or wide-angle spray),

  • Open apertures on the surface (“holes” and “channels”), through which active volume can escape,

  • Throughput limitation (the emergent speed limit \(c\) bounds the local flux).

The emphasis is on a LOCK\(\to\)DERIVE\(\to\)GATE module: (i) precise regime definitions and gates, (ii) rigorous control-volume conservation statements, (iii) scaling laws for mass/volume-loss rates and wind profiles, (iv) coupling criteria between disk winds and jets, and (v) observational pass/fail gates.

12.0.0.1 Standing VP variables.

We use the same state variables and moments:

  • \(\rho(x,t)\): stored phase,

  • \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\): active phase,

  • \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\): background,

  • \(\mathbf{S}(x,t)\): flux of actor content,

  • \(\mathbf{T}(x,t)\): second moment tensor,

  • \(\|\mathbf{k}(x,t)\|=1\): alignment axis field.

We use the throughput (speed) limit from PART 08 with a small LOCK regularizer \(\eta_0>0\): \[\|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|\le c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t), \qquad \mathbf{u}(x,t):=\frac{\mathbf{S}(x,t)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)+\eta_0}, \qquad \|\mathbf{u}\|\lesssim c. \label{eq:part12_speedlimit}\] Heaviside gate: \(H(\xi)=1\) for \(\xi\ge 0\), and \(H(\xi)=0\) for \(\xi<0\).

12.0.0.2 Surfaces for stars and disks.

Let \(\Sigma_*(t)\) denote a stellar/solar “launching surface” (e.g. photosphere/corona base) with outward unit normal \(\mathbf{n}(x,t)\). For disks, let \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^\pm(t)\) denote the upper/lower disk surfaces with normals \(\pm \hat z\) in a disk-centered frame.

12.1 12.1 Sprinkler regime definition: partial alignment + low-pressure ejection conditions

This subsection defines the sprinkler regime with explicit gates. The sprinkler is a wind/outflow module that is distinct from the jet module (PART 11). It activates when jet forcing gates are OFF but surface apertures are open and outward drive is present.

12.1.1 12.1.1 Isotropic (wind) closure and effective “volume pressure”

For winds and broad sprays, the baseline closure is isotropic (PART 07.1). We adopt: \[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_T\,e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{I}, \qquad \kappa_T\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part12_isotropic_T}\] Define the effective isotropic “volume pressure” (a VP-native pressure-like scalar) as \[p_v(x,t):=\kappa_T\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t). \label{eq:part12_pv_def}\] This is the minimal scalar that appears as \(\nabla p_v\) in the flux equation.

12.1.1.1 Flux equation under isotropic closure.

Start from the generic flux dynamics (PART 06 form): \[\partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{T} = -\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S, \label{eq:part12_S_eq_general}\] where \(\mathbf{B}\) is a (possibly anisotropic) drag/resistance tensor, \(\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is the effective driving force (including deficit, boundary forcing, etc.), and \(\mathbf{R}_S\) collects optional sources.

Using [eq:part12_isotropic_T], \(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{T}=\nabla(\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}})=\nabla p_v\), so: \[\partial_t \mathbf{S} + \nabla p_v = -\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \mathbf{R}_S. \label{eq:part12_S_eq_isotropic}\]

12.1.2 12.1.2 Quasi-steady constitutive law for the sprinkler flux (with limiter)

In the sprinkler launching layer we often work in a quasi-steady limit for \(\mathbf{S}\): \[\partial_t\mathbf{S}\approx 0\] over timescales longer than the local relaxation time \(1/\|\mathbf{B}\|\). Then [eq:part12_S_eq_isotropic] gives the constitutive approximation \[\mathbf{S}_0 := \mathbf{B}^{-1}\Big(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} - \nabla p_v + \mathbf{R}_S\Big). \label{eq:part12_S0}\] However, the throughput limit [eq:part12_speedlimit] must be enforced. We therefore define a LOCK limiter map \(\mathcal{L}_c:\mathbb{R}^3\to\mathbb{R}^3\) by \[\mathcal{L}_c(\mathbf{q};e_{\mathrm{a}}) := \begin{cases} \mathbf{0}, & \mathbf{q}=\mathbf{0},\\[4pt] \displaystyle \min\!\left(1,\ \frac{c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}}{\|\mathbf{q}\|}\right)\mathbf{q}, & \mathbf{q}\neq \mathbf{0}, \end{cases} \label{eq:part12_limiter}\] and set the sprinkler flux model as \[\mathbf{S} \approx \mathcal{L}_c\!\left(\mathbf{S}_0;\,e_{\mathrm{a}}\right). \label{eq:part12_S_limited}\] By construction, [eq:part12_S_limited] satisfies \(\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}\).

12.1.3 12.1.3 Partial alignment and low confinement: the sprinkler is not a jet

The sprinkler is defined as an outflow regime in which the jet forcing gates from PART 11 are not satisfied. We encode this using alignment-defect thresholds and confinement thresholds.

12.1.3.1 Alignment defect \(a_k\) (recalled).

Using the distribution \(f(x,v,t)\) for the active phase and axis field \(k(x,t)\), define \[M_\parallel:=\int (v\cdot k)^2 f\,dv, \qquad M_\perp:=\int \|v-(v\cdot k)k\|^2 f\,dv, \qquad a_k:=\frac{M_\perp}{M_\parallel+M_\perp}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part12_ak_def}\] Strong jets require \(a_k\ll 1\) (PART 11). Sprinkler outflow uses partial alignment: not too small, not too large.

12.1.3.2 Partial alignment gate (LOCK).

Fix LOCK thresholds \(0<a_{\mathrm{jet}}<a_{\mathrm{spr}}<1\) and define \[G_{\mathrm{part}}(x,t) := H\!\big(a_k(x,t)-a_{\mathrm{jet}}\big)\, H\!\big(a_{\mathrm{spr}}-a_k(x,t)\big). \label{eq:part12_Gpart}\] Thus \(G_{\mathrm{part}}=1\) means alignment is present but not in the “jet-strong” window.

12.1.3.3 Low confinement gate (LOCK).

Let \(\Omega_c(x,t)\ge 0\) be a confinement strength diagnostic (PART 11 used it as a transverse restoring frequency). Fix a LOCK upper bound \(\Omega_{\mathrm{spr,max}}\) and define \[G_{\mathrm{lowconf}}(x,t):=H\!\big(\Omega_{\mathrm{spr,max}}-\Omega_c(x,t)\big). \label{eq:part12_Glowconf}\] This gate enforces that the sprinkler is not in the strong geometric confinement regime that creates narrow jet tubes.

12.1.3.4 Non-jet gate.

Let \(G_{\mathrm{JET}}\) denote the jet gate from PART 11 (composite of axis locking, collimation, confinement, channel, and power gates). Define \[G_{\neg\mathrm{JET}} := 1 - \min(1,G_{\mathrm{JET}}), \label{eq:part12_Gnotjet}\] so that \(G_{\neg\mathrm{JET}}=1\) when the system is not in the jet-forcing regime.

12.1.4 12.1.4 Surface aperture (openness) gate and outward-drive gate

Sprinkler outflow requires open apertures on the launching surface and outward drive.

12.1.4.1 Normal drag and openness.

Let \(\mathbf{B}(x,t)\) be symmetric positive semidefinite. Define the normal resistance on a surface with outward normal \(\mathbf{n}\) as \[B_n(x,t):=\mathbf{n}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{B}(x,t)\,\mathbf{n}(x,t)\ \ge 0. \label{eq:part12_Bn}\] Small \(B_n\) means the surface is permeable (open); large \(B_n\) means the surface is sealed (closed).

12.1.4.2 Geometric “open-line” condition.

In many stellar/disk contexts, outflow is preferentially along a local direction \(k\) (magnetic/rotationally organized). For a surface, open escape requires \(k\) to have a significant outward component. Fix a LOCK tolerance angle \(\theta_{\mathrm{open}}\in(0,\pi/2)\) and define \[G_{k\cdot n}(x,t):=H\!\big(k(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x,t)-\cos\theta_{\mathrm{open}}\big). \label{eq:part12_Gkdotn}\]

12.1.4.3 Aperture (hole) gate (LOCK).

Fix a LOCK normal-resistance threshold \(B_{n,\mathrm{open}}>0\) and define \[G_{\mathrm{open}}(x,t):= H\!\big(B_{n,\mathrm{open}}-B_n(x,t)\big)\,G_{k\cdot n}(x,t). \label{eq:part12_Gopen}\] This declares a surface point open if (i) normal resistance is small, and (ii) the local alignment axis is sufficiently outward.

12.1.4.4 Outward-drive diagnostic.

From [eq:part12_S0], the predicted normal flux (before limiting) is \[S_{0n}(x,t):=\mathbf{S}_0(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x,t) = \mathbf{n}\cdot \mathbf{B}^{-1}\Big(e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} - \nabla p_v + \mathbf{R}_S\Big). \label{eq:part12_S0n}\] We define an outward-drive gate requiring positive outward tendency. Fix a LOCK minimal outward flux \(S_{n,\min}\ge 0\): \[G_{\mathrm{drive}}(x,t):=H\!\big(S_{0n}(x,t)-S_{n,\min}\big). \label{eq:part12_Gdrive}\]

12.1.5 12.1.5 Composite sprinkler gate and regime statement

12.1.5.1 Composite sprinkler gate.

We define the sprinkler gate on the launching surface \(\Sigma\) as \[G_{\mathrm{SPR}}(x,t) := G_{\neg\mathrm{JET}}\, G_{\mathrm{part}}(x,t)\, G_{\mathrm{lowconf}}(x,t)\, G_{\mathrm{open}}(x,t)\, G_{\mathrm{drive}}(x,t), \qquad x\in\Sigma. \label{eq:part12_GSPR}\]

12.1.5.2 Sprinkler regime (definition).

A system is in the sprinkler regime at time \(t\) if the set \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t):=\{x\in\Sigma(t):\ G_{\mathrm{SPR}}(x,t)=1\} \label{eq:part12_Sigma_open}\] has positive area measure: \[\mathrm{Area}\big(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\big)>0. \label{eq:part12_sprinkler_regime_def}\] The sprinkler outflow rate is then defined by integrating the limited flux [eq:part12_S_limited] over the open set (see §12.2).

12.2 12.2 Coronal holes / channels: hole–channel formation and outflow flux

This subsection defines “holes” and “channels” on the stellar/disk surface as connected components of the open set \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\), and derives their contribution to the total outflow.

12.2.1 12.2.1 Holes and channels as connected components of the open set

Let \(\Sigma\) be a smooth 2D manifold (surface) and \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\subset \Sigma\) be defined by [eq:part12_Sigma_open]. We define:

12.2.1.1 Hole.

A hole is a connected component \(\mathcal{H}_i(t)\) of \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\) that is (topologically) simply connected and not long/thin: \[\mathcal{H}_i(t)\ \text{ is a connected component of }\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\ \text{ with a bounded aspect ratio.}\]

12.2.1.2 Channel.

A channel is a connected component \(\mathcal{C}_j(t)\) of \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\) that has large aspect ratio, i.e. it forms a narrow corridor connecting regions: \[\mathcal{C}_j(t)\ \text{ is a connected component of }\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\ \text{ with large aspect ratio.}\]

12.2.1.3 Remark (geometry-free operationalization).

Since aspect ratio requires geometric measurement, the implementation can use a LOCK morphological criterion (e.g. based on geodesic thickness vs length) to classify each component as hole or channel. The theory requires only that \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\) decomposes into disjoint connected components: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)=\left(\bigsqcup_i \mathcal{H}_i(t)\right)\ \sqcup\ \left(\bigsqcup_j \mathcal{C}_j(t)\right), \label{eq:part12_open_decomposition}\] up to a null-measure boundary set.

12.2.2 12.2.2 Total sprinkler throughput as a sum over holes/channels

Define the outward normal flux on the surface: \[S_n(x,t):=\mathbf{S}(x,t)\cdot \mathbf{n}(x,t).\] The sprinkler outflow rate (actor throughput) is \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t) := \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} S_n(x,t)\,dA = \sum_i \int_{\mathcal{H}_i(t)} S_n\,dA + \sum_j \int_{\mathcal{C}_j(t)} S_n\,dA, \label{eq:part12_Qspr_sum}\] where \(\mathbf{S}\) is the limited flux [eq:part12_S_limited]. This is a direct decomposition of the surface integral.

12.2.3 12.2.3 Universal throughput bound from the speed limit

12.2.3.1 Proposition 12.1 (sprinkler throughput bound).

For any surface \(\Sigma\) and any open set \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\subset\Sigma\), the outflow rate satisfies: \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t) \le \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} \|\mathbf{S}(x,t)\|\,dA \le c\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,dA. \label{eq:part12_Qspr_bound}\] In particular, if \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\le 1\), then \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t) \le c\,\mathrm{Area}\big(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\big). \label{eq:part12_Qspr_area_bound}\]

12.2.3.2 Proof.

Since \(\mathbf{n}\) is unit length, \(S_n=\mathbf{S}\cdot\mathbf{n}\le \|\mathbf{S}\|\). Thus \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}=\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}} S_n\,dA \le \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}}\|\mathbf{S}\|\,dA.\] By the speed limit [eq:part12_speedlimit], \(\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}\), giving [eq:part12_Qspr_bound]. Finally \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\le 1\) gives [eq:part12_Qspr_area_bound]. \(\square\)

12.2.3.3 Open-area fraction scaling.

Let \(A_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\mathrm{Area}(\Sigma)\) and define \[f_{\mathrm{open}}(t):=\frac{\mathrm{Area}\big(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\big)}{A_{\mathrm{tot}}}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part12_fopen}\] Then [eq:part12_Qspr_area_bound] implies \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t)\le c\,f_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\,A_{\mathrm{tot}}. \label{eq:part12_Qspr_fopen_bound}\] For a spherical star surface of radius \(R_*\), \(A_{\mathrm{tot}}=4\pi R_*^2\): \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t)\le 4\pi R_*^2\,c\,f_{\mathrm{open}}(t). \label{eq:part12_Qspr_sphere_bound}\]

12.2.4 12.2.4 Minimal hole/channel formation mechanism: thresholding normal resistance

The sprinkler model defines holes/channels by the open gate [eq:part12_Gopen], which depends on \(B_n\) and \(k\cdot n\). We now specify a minimal, mathematically closed way to produce spatially varying \(B_n\) on the surface, without introducing external physics.

12.2.4.1 Surface normal resistance field as a function of defect and background.

Define a LOCK constitutive map \[B_n(x,t)=\mathcal{B}_n\!\big(a_k(x,t),\,e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t),\,\chi(x,t)\big), \qquad \mathcal{B}_n\ge 0, \label{eq:part12_Bn_constitutive}\] where \(\chi(x,t)\) is an optional surface-activity marker (e.g. heating/forcing index) that is treated as an input observable or an internal diagnostic.

A minimal monotone choice is: \[\mathcal{B}_n(a,e_{\mathrm{bg}},\chi) := B_{n0}\,\big(1+\beta_a a+\beta_{\mathrm{bg}} e_{\mathrm{bg}}\big)\,\frac{1}{1+\beta_\chi \chi}, \qquad B_{n0}>0,\ \beta_a,\beta_{\mathrm{bg}},\beta_\chi\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part12_Bn_minimal}\] Then:

  • larger disorder (\(a_k\) large) increases resistance (fewer holes),

  • stronger background/jamming (\(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) large) increases resistance,

  • stronger activity/heating (\(\chi\) large) decreases resistance (more holes).

With [eq:part12_Bn_minimal], the open set \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\) becomes the superlevel set of \(\chi\) (and/or sublevel set of \(a_k,e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)), producing holes/channels as connected components of a thresholded scalar field, which is mathematically well-defined.

12.3 12.3 Stellar wind / solar wind: flux limitation and scaling laws

This subsection derives sprinkler wind scaling laws from (i) spherical (or quasi-spherical) steady transport, (ii) isotropic closure, (iii) drag-limited constitutive flux, and (iv) throughput limitation.

12.3.1 12.3.1 Spherically symmetric steady outflow outside sources

Assume a region outside the launching layer where sources are negligible and the flow is approximately spherically symmetric: \[q=q(r),\quad e_{\mathrm{a}}=e_{\mathrm{a}}(r),\quad \mathbf{S}=S_r(r)\,\hat r,\] and steady: \[\partial_t(\cdot)=0.\] If \(q\) satisfies the continuity equation \[\partial_t q + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0, \label{eq:part12_continuity_q}\] then in spherical coordinates \[\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} = \frac{1}{r^2}\frac{d}{dr}\big(r^2 S_r(r)\big)=0 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad r^2 S_r(r)=\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi}=\text{const}. \label{eq:part12_r2Sr_const}\] Equivalently, \[S_r(r)=\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi r^2}, \label{eq:part12_Sr_Q}\] where \(\dot Q\) is the total outward throughput (wind outflow rate) through a sphere of radius \(r\).

12.3.2 12.3.2 Drag-limited wind profile from isotropic closure

Use the steady isotropic flux equation [eq:part12_S_eq_isotropic] with \(\partial_t\mathbf{S}=0\) and \(\mathbf{R}_S=0\) for the outer wind region: \[\nabla p_v = -\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S} + e_{\mathrm{a}}\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part12_steady_flux_balance}\] Project along \(\hat r\) assuming \(\mathbf{B}\approx B_r(r)\,\mathbf{I}\) (effective isotropic drag in the outer region) so that \((\mathbf{B}\mathbf{S})\cdot \hat r = B_r S_r\): \[\frac{dp_v}{dr} = - B_r(r)\,S_r(r) + e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\,F_r(r), \qquad F_r:=\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}\cdot \hat r. \label{eq:part12_dpdr_balance}\] With \(p_v=\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}\), [eq:part12_Sr_Q], we obtain the scalar ODE: \[\kappa_T \frac{d e_{\mathrm{a}}}{dr} = - B_r(r)\,\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi r^2} + e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\,F_r(r). \label{eq:part12_ea_ODE_general}\]

12.3.2.1 Case 1: pressure-driven diffusion wind (\(F_r\approx 0\)).

If the effective force is negligible compared to pressure-gradient drive in the outer region (\(F_r\approx 0\)), then \[\kappa_T \frac{d e_{\mathrm{a}}}{dr} = - B_r(r)\,\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi r^2}. \label{eq:part12_ea_ODE_diff}\] Integrate from the base radius \(R_*\) to \(r\): \[\kappa_T\big(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)-e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*)\big) = -\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi}\int_{R_*}^{r}\frac{B_r(s)}{s^2}\,ds. \label{eq:part12_ea_integral}\] If \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\to 0\) as \(r\to\infty\) (active phase dilutes far away), then taking \(r\to\infty\) yields a throughput formula: \[\dot Q = 4\pi\,\kappa_T\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*)\left[\int_{R_*}^{\infty}\frac{B_r(s)}{s^2}\,ds\right]^{-1}. \label{eq:part12_Q_from_drag_integral}\] This is a concrete scaling: wind throughput increases with base active fraction \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*)\) and with the pressure coefficient \(\kappa_T\), and decreases with the integrated drag barrier \(\int B_r/s^2\).

12.3.2.2 Constant-drag example (closed form).

If \(B_r(s)\equiv B_0\) for \(s\ge R_*\), then \(\int_{R_*}^{\infty} B_0 s^{-2}ds = B_0/R_*\). Thus \[\dot Q \approx 4\pi\,\kappa_T\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*)\,\frac{R_*}{B_0}. \label{eq:part12_Q_constant_drag}\] Combining [eq:part12_Sr_Q] gives \(S_r(r)\sim (\kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*)R_*/B_0)\,r^{-2}\).

12.3.2.3 Case 2: force-assisted wind (general \(F_r\)).

If \(F_r\) is not negligible, [eq:part12_ea_ODE_general] is a first-order linear ODE: \[\frac{d e_{\mathrm{a}}}{dr} - \frac{F_r(r)}{\kappa_T} e_{\mathrm{a}}(r) = -\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi \kappa_T}\frac{B_r(r)}{r^2}. \label{eq:part12_linear_ODE}\] Introduce the integrating factor \[\mu(r):=\exp\!\left(-\int_{R_*}^{r}\frac{F_r(\xi)}{\kappa_T}\,d\xi\right), \label{eq:part12_integrating_factor}\] then \[\frac{d}{dr}\big(\mu(r)e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\big) = -\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi \kappa_T}\mu(r)\frac{B_r(r)}{r^2}. \label{eq:part12_IF_eq}\] Integrate to infinity under the boundary condition \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(\infty)=0\): \[\mu(R_*)e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*) = \frac{\dot Q}{4\pi \kappa_T}\int_{R_*}^{\infty}\mu(s)\frac{B_r(s)}{s^2}\,ds \quad\Rightarrow\quad \dot Q = 4\pi \kappa_T e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*)\,\left[\int_{R_*}^{\infty}\mu(s)\frac{B_r(s)}{s^2}\,ds\right]^{-1}. \label{eq:part12_Q_general_force}\] This recovers [eq:part12_Q_from_drag_integral] when \(F_r=0\) (then \(\mu\equiv 1\)).

12.3.3 12.3.3 Flux limitation, wind “Mach” number, and non-choking condition

Define the radial transport speed (wind speed diagnostic) as \[u_r(r):=\frac{S_r(r)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part12_ur_def}\] The throughput limit [eq:part12_speedlimit] implies \[|u_r(r)|\le c\,\frac{e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)}{e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)+\eta_0}\lesssim c. \label{eq:part12_ur_bound}\] Define a dimensionless “wind Mach” number relative to the emergent limit: \[\mathcal{M}_c(r):=\frac{|S_r(r)|}{c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)+\eta_0}\in[0,1]. \label{eq:part12_Mc}\] The non-choking sprinkler wind regime is characterized by \[\mathcal{M}_c(r)\le \theta_{\mathrm{choke}}<1 \quad\text{for }r\ge R_*, \label{eq:part12_nonchoke}\] with a LOCK choking threshold \(\theta_{\mathrm{choke}}\) (as in PART 08/10). When \(\mathcal{M}_c\to 1\) in some region, the flow approaches the flux limiter and becomes throughput-choked, which is more jet-like and should be checked against jet gates.

12.3.3.1 Throughput bound in spherical geometry.

Using [eq:part12_Sr_Q] and [eq:part12_speedlimit], \[\frac{\dot Q}{4\pi r^2} = |S_r(r)| \le c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(r) \quad\Rightarrow\quad \dot Q\le 4\pi r^2 c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(r)\quad \forall r\ge R_*. \label{eq:part12_Q_bound_all_r}\] In particular at the base: \[\dot Q \le 4\pi R_*^2 c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(R_*). \label{eq:part12_Q_bound_base}\] If surface openness is partial (holes/channels), replace \(4\pi R_*^2\) by the open area \(A_{\mathrm{open}}=f_{\mathrm{open}}4\pi R_*^2\) as in [eq:part12_Qspr_fopen_bound].

12.3.4 12.3.4 Practical scaling law for the sprinkler wind from surface apertures

In many applications, the wind is determined primarily by surface aperture area and local drive, rather than by a global integral. Using the quasi-steady limited flux [eq:part12_S_limited], define the local predicted normal flux \(S_{0n}\) by [eq:part12_S0n]. Then the realized normal flux is approximately \[S_n(x,t)\approx \min\!\left(c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t),\ \max\!\big(0,S_{0n}(x,t)\big)\right), \qquad x\in\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t), \label{eq:part12_surface_flux_law}\] and \(S_n\approx 0\) on \(\Sigma\setminus \Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}\).

Therefore the sprinkler outflow rate is \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t) = \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} S_n(x,t)\,dA \approx \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} \min\!\left(c e_{\mathrm{a}},\ \max(0,S_{0n})\right)\,dA. \label{eq:part12_Qspr_surface}\]

12.3.4.1 Weak-drive (unsaturated) scaling.

If \(S_{0n}(x,t)\ll c e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\) on the open set, then \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t)\approx \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} S_{0n}(x,t)\,dA. \label{eq:part12_Qspr_weakdrive}\] In particular, if \(S_{0n}\) is roughly constant over open regions, \(S_{0n}\approx \bar S_{0n}\), then \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t)\approx \bar S_{0n}(t)\,A_{\mathrm{open}}(t) =\bar S_{0n}(t)\,f_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\,A_{\mathrm{tot}}. \label{eq:part12_Qspr_linear_fopen}\] This yields a direct observational gate: outflow rate should scale approximately linearly with open area fraction in the unsaturated sprinkler regime.

12.3.4.2 Strong-drive (saturated) scaling.

If \(S_{0n}\gg c e_{\mathrm{a}}\) on the open set, the outflow saturates at the throughput limit: \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t)\approx c\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\,dA, \label{eq:part12_Qspr_saturated}\] recovering the bound [eq:part12_Qspr_bound] as an approximate equality.

12.4 12.4 Disk–jet coupling: regime transitions (disk \(\to\) jet / wind) conditions

This subsection defines a unified regime map for rotating disks: depending on alignment and confinement, the same disk can produce (i) a narrow jet (PART 11), (ii) a wide-angle wind/sprinkler (this Part), or (iii) little/no outflow. We formalize the regime transition conditions as explicit gates.

12.4.1 12.4.1 Disk geometry and vertical outflow variables

Use cylindrical coordinates \((R,\phi,z)\) with disk midplane \(z=0\) and disk surfaces at \(z=\pm H(R)\) for a thickness function \(H(R)>0\). Let \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^\pm\) be the upper/lower surfaces with normals \(\mathbf{n}_\pm=\pm \hat z\).

Define the vertical (surface-normal) flux components: \[S_z^\pm(R,\phi,t):=\mathbf{S}(R,\phi,z=\pm H,t)\cdot (\pm \hat z). \label{eq:part12_Sz_def}\] The disk wind throughput (both sides) is \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{diskwind}}(t) := \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^+} S_z^+\,dA + \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^-} S_z^-\,dA. \label{eq:part12_Qdiskwind}\] Throughput limitation implies \(S_z^\pm\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}\) pointwise on surfaces.

12.4.2 12.4.2 Regime gates for disk outflows: jet vs sprinkler vs none

We define three mutually exclusive (up to boundaries) gates.

12.4.2.1 (i) Jet gate (from PART 11).

Let \(G_{\mathrm{JET}}\) be the composite jet gate (axis locking, strong collimation, confinement, open channel, and power). In disk contexts, the axis is typically close to the spin axis (normal to the disk).

12.4.2.2 (ii) Sprinkler (disk wind) gate.

On \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^\pm\), define the sprinkler gate by [eq:part12_GSPR] with \(\mathbf{n}=\pm \hat z\): \[G_{\mathrm{SPR}}^\pm(R,\phi,t):= G_{\neg\mathrm{JET}}\, G_{\mathrm{part}}\, G_{\mathrm{lowconf}}\, G_{\mathrm{open}}^\pm\, G_{\mathrm{drive}}^\pm.\] The open and drive gates are computed with \(\mathbf{n}_\pm\): \[G_{\mathrm{open}}^\pm = H\!\big(B_{n,\mathrm{open}}-B_n^\pm\big)\, H\!\big(k\cdot (\pm \hat z)-\cos\theta_{\mathrm{open}}\big), \quad B_n^\pm:=(\pm \hat z)\cdot \mathbf{B}(\pm \hat z), \label{eq:part12_Gopen_disk}\] and \(G_{\mathrm{drive}}^\pm:=H(S_{0n}^\pm-S_{n,\min})\) with \[S_{0n}^\pm:=\mathbf{S}_0\cdot (\pm \hat z).\]

12.4.2.3 (iii) No-outflow (closed) gate.

Define \[G_{\mathrm{CLOSED}}^\pm := 1-\min\!\big(1,\ G_{\mathrm{JET}}+G_{\mathrm{SPR}}^\pm\big), \label{eq:part12_Gclosed}\] so that \(G_{\mathrm{CLOSED}}^\pm=1\) means neither jet nor sprinkler wind is forced on that surface patch.

12.4.3 12.4.3 A quantitative regime transition condition

The key transition from disk wind to jet is the activation of strong collimation and strong confinement. We provide a quantitative condition using the opening-angle diagnostic and confinement parameter.

12.4.3.1 Collimation ratio.

Define on a region: \[\mathcal{C}(x,t):=\frac{\|\mathbf{S}_\perp(x,t)\|}{|\mathbf{S}_\parallel(x,t)\cdot k(x,t)|+\eta_0}, \qquad G_{\mathrm{col}}:=H(\epsilon_{\mathrm{col}}-\mathcal{C}), \label{eq:part12_collimation_ratio}\] with LOCK \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{col}}\ll 1\). A jet requires \(G_{\mathrm{col}}=1\), while a sprinkler wind typically has \(\mathcal{C}\) not small, i.e. \(G_{\mathrm{col}}=0\).

12.4.3.2 Transition inequality (sufficient condition).

A sufficient condition for “disk wind \(\to\) jet” transition along a streamline is: \[a_k \le a_{\mathrm{jet}} \quad\text{and}\quad \Omega_c \ge \Omega_{\min} \quad\text{and}\quad \frac{B_\perp}{B_\parallel+\eta_0}\ge \Xi_{\min} \quad\text{and}\quad G_{\mathrm{pow}}=1, \label{eq:part12_wind_to_jet_condition}\] where \((\Omega_{\min},\Xi_{\min})\) are LOCK jet thresholds (PART 11). The first condition is alignment, the second is confinement, the third is anisotropic open channeling, and the fourth is power supply/drive.

12.4.3.3 Reverse transition (jet \(\to\) wind) and broadening.

If either confinement weakens (\(\Omega_c\) drops), or transverse diffusivity increases (see §12.5 for a gate), then the jet broadens into a wind: \[\Omega_c \le \Omega_{\mathrm{spr,max}} \quad\text{or}\quad t_{\mathrm{diff},\perp}\lesssim t_{\mathrm{adv}} \quad\Rightarrow\quad \text{jet collimation is not sustained; outflow becomes sprinkler-like.} \label{eq:part12_jet_to_wind_condition}\]

12.5 12.5 Observation gates: outflow rate, spectra, and correlations with magnetic field / rotation

This subsection defines pass/fail gates for the sprinkler model using measurable quantities: outflow rates, speed/line profiles (proxy for velocity distribution), open-area fraction proxies (holes), and correlations with rotation/spin and magnetic organization.

12.5.1 12.5.1 Gate A: throughput bound (speed-limit consistency)

12.5.1.1 Gate A1 (local).

The model requires the pointwise bound \[\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c e_{\mathrm{a}}.\] In observational terms, if one maps the VP flux to a physical mass/energy flux, the inferred wind speed must not exceed the emergent limit \(c\) in the corresponding mapping. This is a structural gate: persistent violations imply FAIL[speed-limit].

12.5.1.2 Gate A2 (global).

At the surface: \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}(t) \le c\int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)} e_{\mathrm{a}}\,dA \le c\,\mathrm{Area}\big(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}(t)\big), \label{eq:part12_gateA_global}\] so any empirically inferred outflow rate must satisfy the mapped analog of [eq:part12_gateA_global]. Violations imply FAIL[throughput-bound].

12.5.2 12.5.2 Gate B: scaling with open-area fraction (hole/channel proxy)

In the unsaturated sprinkler regime, [eq:part12_Qspr_linear_fopen] predicts \[\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}} \propto f_{\mathrm{open}}, \qquad \text{(holding the mean drive $\bar S_{0n}$ approximately fixed).} \label{eq:part12_gateB_scaling}\] Thus:

  • If \(f_{\mathrm{open}}\) varies significantly (e.g. via changing hole coverage) while other drivers are quasi-stationary, the outflow rate should track \(f_{\mathrm{open}}\) approximately linearly.

  • In the saturated regime, [eq:part12_Qspr_saturated] predicts \(\dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}} \propto \int_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}} e_{\mathrm{a}} dA\) and is less sensitive to further increases in drive.

Deviation from these scalings (under the declared mapping and diagnostics) implies FAIL[open-area-scaling].

12.5.3 12.5.3 Gate C: spectral/velocity signature (flux-limited acceleration)

The sprinkler wind predicts a bounded velocity distribution. Using \(u_n=S_n/(e_{\mathrm{a}}+\eta_0)\) and the limiter [eq:part12_surface_flux_law], the surface-launch normal speed satisfies \(0\le u_n\lesssim c\). Therefore: \[\text{Any inferred persistent component with }u_n>c\ \text{(in the same mapping)}\ \Rightarrow\ \texttt{FAIL[spectral-speed]}. \label{eq:part12_gateC_speed}\] Moreover, the transition from unsaturated to saturated sprinkler outflow occurs when \(S_{0n}\) crosses \(c e_{\mathrm{a}}\); thus changes in drive should produce:

  • growth in outflow rate in the weak-drive regime,

  • saturation (plateauing) in the strong-drive regime.

Failure to observe such saturation behavior when the model predicts \(S_{0n}\gg c e_{\mathrm{a}}\) implies FAIL[saturation].

12.5.4 12.5.4 Gate D: correlation with rotation/spin and magnetic organization (axis field \(k\))

The sprinkler model uses the axis field \(k\) and the openness gate \(G_{k\cdot n}\) in [eq:part12_Gopen]. Therefore the following correlation predictions arise:

12.5.4.1 (D1) Rotation/spin correlation via axis organization.

If the spin diagnostic is based on vorticity \(\boldsymbol{\omega}=\nabla\times\mathbf{u}\) or angular momentum \(\mathbf{L}\) (PART 11), and if spin organizes \(k\) toward outward normals in open regions, then \(f_{\mathrm{open}}\) and/or the average \(k\cdot n\) on open regions should correlate with spin strength: \[\langle k\cdot n\rangle_{\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}} \ \text{increases with}\ \|\boldsymbol{\omega}\|\ \text{or}\ \|\mathbf{L}\|. \label{eq:part12_spin_correlation}\] If strong winds occur with \(k\cdot n\) systematically small (given the declared diagnostic), this contradicts the \(G_{k\cdot n}\) structure and implies FAIL[axis-organization].

12.5.4.2 (D2) Magnetic-organization proxy via anisotropic resistance.

If magnetic field organization is encoded into \(\mathbf{B}\) (e.g. lowering \(B_n\) along open lines), then \(f_{\mathrm{open}}\) is expected to correlate with magnetic open-flux proxies. In VP terms: \[B_n \downarrow\ \Rightarrow\ G_{\mathrm{open}}\uparrow\ \Rightarrow\ f_{\mathrm{open}}\uparrow\ \Rightarrow\ \dot Q_{\mathrm{spr}}\uparrow\ \text{(in unsaturated regime)}. \label{eq:part12_magnetic_proxy}\] If outflow increases while inferred openness proxies decrease (with other drivers held fixed), this implies FAIL[openness-correlation].

12.5.5 12.5.5 Gate E: disk-wind to jet transition test

In disks, the model predicts a regime transition controlled by [eq:part12_wind_to_jet_condition]. An observational gate is:

12.5.5.1 Gate E (transition consistency).

If a system crosses into strong alignment and confinement (e.g. inferred narrowing of opening angle, increased collimation, stronger axis-locking), then the jet gate should turn on, and the outflow morphology should transition from wide-angle wind to narrow jet. Conversely, if the system loses confinement or becomes mixing-dominated, jets should broaden to winds.

Failure of the morphology to track the gate transitions implies FAIL[regime-transition].

12.6 12.6 Extension (optional): minimal prediction cards for planetary systems / disk structure

This optional subsection provides minimal, falsifiable “cards” for how sprinkler winds can shape disk/planetary structures, without importing additional physics beyond the VP ledger and gates.

12.6.1 12.6.1 Surface-density-like reduction by sprinkler loss: a disk depletion criterion

Let \(\Sigma_q(R,t)\) denote a disk “surface reservoir” of a conserved VP charge \(q\) (e.g. active phase or actor content) defined by integrating through the disk thickness: \[\Sigma_q(R,t):=\int_{-H(R)}^{+H(R)} q(R,z,t)\,dz. \label{eq:part12_Sigmaq_def}\] Integrate the continuity equation \(\partial_t q+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0\) over \(z\in[-H,H]\) to obtain a 2D balance: \[\partial_t \Sigma_q + \frac{1}{R}\partial_R\big(R\,\mathcal{F}_R\big) = -\Big(S_z^+(R,t)+S_z^-(R,t)\Big), \label{eq:part12_disk_2D_balance}\] where \(\mathcal{F}_R(R,t):=\int_{-H}^{H} S_R(R,z,t)\,dz\) is the radially integrated flux, and \(S_z^\pm\) are the vertical surface fluxes [eq:part12_Sz_def]. The right-hand side is precisely the sprinkler wind loss per unit area (sum of both surfaces).

12.6.1.1 Depletion vs replenishment.

Define a local depletion timescale due to wind: \[t_{\mathrm{wind}}(R,t):=\frac{\Sigma_q(R,t)}{S_z^+(R,t)+S_z^-(R,t)+\eta_0}. \label{eq:part12_twind}\] Define a radial replenishment timescale \(t_{\mathrm{rad}}\) from \(\mathcal{F}_R\) (model-dependent; can be estimated from observed accretion rate proxies). A minimal gap-opening/depletion criterion is \[t_{\mathrm{wind}}(R,t)\ll t_{\mathrm{rad}}(R,t) \quad\Rightarrow\quad \text{wind-driven depletion dominates; persistent low-$q$ annulus (gap) is expected.} \label{eq:part12_gap_criterion}\] This is a falsifiable gate: if the wind loss is strong enough to dominate replenishment, the disk should show structural depletion signatures at that radius.

12.6.2 12.6.2 Sprinkler gating map as a “structure card”

Define the disk-surface open set by [eq:part12_Sigma_open] on \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^\pm\): \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}^\pm(t)=\{(R,\phi)\in\Sigma_{\mathrm{disk}}^\pm:\ G_{\mathrm{SPR}}^\pm=1\}.\] Then the theory predicts:

  • Ring-like depletion if \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}^\pm\) concentrates in annuli (open in \(R\)-bands),

  • Spiral/patchy depletion if \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}^\pm\) is azimuthally structured (channels),

  • Symmetric two-sided outflow if upper/lower gates are comparable; strong asymmetry requires asymmetric boundary conditions or asymmetric \(B_n\) / \(k\cdot n\) organization.

Thus a minimal prediction card is: map the openness gate fields \((B_n,\,k\cdot n,\,a_k,\,\Omega_c)\) on disk surfaces; the morphology of \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{open}}^\pm\) predicts where depletion/wind signatures should occur.

12.6.3 12.6.3 Coupling to planet formation (minimal, VP-native statement)

If planet formation is sensitive to local reservoir \(\Sigma_q\), then sprinkler winds can regulate growth by controlling \(\partial_t\Sigma_q\) through [eq:part12_disk_2D_balance]. A minimal VP-native criterion for “wind-regulated growth” is: \[\partial_t \Sigma_q \approx -\big(S_z^+ + S_z^-\big) \quad\text{(wind-dominated evolution)} \label{eq:part12_wind_dominated}\] in a region, implying that growth timescales must compete with \(t_{\mathrm{wind}}\) in [eq:part12_twind]. This provides a direct falsification route: if growth signatures require sustained \(\Sigma_q\) while [eq:part12_wind_dominated] is predicted and confirmed by outflow diagnostics, the sprinkler model (or its parameter locks) must be revised.

12.6.3.1 End of optional extension.

The extension adds no new primitives beyond (i) the surface-integrated reservoir \(\Sigma_q\) and (ii) the already-defined sprinkler surface fluxes, and it remains entirely within the VP ledger framework.

13 PART 13. Ontology of Jammed-Lattice Cosmology: Stage/Actor Duality (Output 13)

This Part fixes the ontology of the Jammed Lattice (JL) cosmology module: the Universe is not modeled as “empty vacuum + fields” but as a jammed lattice stage (background medium) hosting actors (VP/quantum excitations). The aim is to prevent category errors (e.g. treating stage stiffness as an actor energy density), and to provide a ledger-consistent placement of exchange terms and cosmological bookkeeping.

Throughout, we adhere to a strict claim-tier notation:

  • LOCK: definitions, sign conventions, dimension conventions, non-negotiable axioms.

  • DERIVE: statements derived from LOCK axioms/definitions plus declared regime assumptions.

  • HYP: additional dynamical hypotheses not forced by LOCK, flagged explicitly.

  • SPEC: optional phenomenological choices (parameterizations, toy models) used for tests.

13.0.0.1 Standing VP notation (actors).

We assume the actor variables already introduced:

  • \(\rho(x,t)\): stored phase,

  • \(e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\): active phase,

  • \(e(x,t):=\rho(x,t)+e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)\),

  • \(\mathbf{S}(x,t)\): actor flux,

  • \(\mathbf{T}(x,t)\): actor second moment / stress-like tensor,

  • \(\|\mathbf{S}\|\le c\,e_{\mathrm{a}}\): throughput limit,

  • \(\mathbf{B}(x,t)\): resistance tensor (drag/permeability) used in flux dynamics.

13.0.0.2 Standing JL notation (stage).

We introduce stage variables:

  • \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\): background stage charge density (nonnegative),

  • \(\mathcal{K}(x,t)\): stage stiffness (nonnegative),

  • \(\mathbf{g}(x,t)\): coarse stage geometry / metric proxy (optional).

The precise meaning is fixed below. Importantly, \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is not a duplicate of actor energy; it is a stage charge used to parameterize stiffness/permeability and to close the background ledger.

13.1 13.1 Jammed lattice stage instead of “empty vacuum”: definition, assumptions, regimes

13.1.1 13.1.1 LOCK definition: the jammed lattice stage

13.1.1.1 LOCK (JL stage microstructure).

Let the stage be a discrete cell complex (lattice) with characteristic cell size \(a>0\) and reference cell volume \(v_\ast>0\). Let \(\mathcal{C}\) denote the set of cells. Each cell \(i\in\mathcal{C}\) carries a stage occupancy/packing variable \(\phi_i(t)\in[0,1]\) (dimensionless packing fraction). Coarse-grain to a continuum field \(\phi(x,t)\).

13.1.1.2 LOCK (jamming threshold and jammed regime).

Fix a jamming threshold \(\phi_J\in(0,1)\) and define the jammed set \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jam}} := \{(x,t):\ \phi(x,t)\ge \phi_J\}. \label{eq:part13_Rjam}\] In \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jam}}\), the stage is structurally locked: large-scale rearrangements are suppressed and only small deformations around a locally jammed configuration are allowed.

13.1.1.3 LOCK (stage deformation field and strain).

Let \(u(x,t)\in\mathbb{R}^3\) be a coarse-grained displacement field of the stage, and define the infinitesimal strain tensor \[\varepsilon(u):=\frac{1}{2}\big(\nabla u+(\nabla u)^{\!\top}\big). \label{eq:part13_strain}\] In the jammed regime, \(u\) is assumed small enough for [eq:part13_strain] to be meaningful (this is a REGIME declaration, not an additional axiom).

13.1.1.4 LOCK (stage stiffness functional).

Define a stage free-energy-like functional (stiffness functional) \[\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{stage}}[u;\mathcal{K},\mathcal{G},\phi] := \int_{\mathbb{R}^3} \left( \frac{\mathcal{K}(x,t)}{2}\big(\nabla\cdot u\big)^2 + \mathcal{G}(x,t)\,\|\varepsilon(u)-\tfrac{1}{3}(\nabla\cdot u)\mathbf{I}\|^2 + V_{\mathrm{jam}}(\phi(x,t)) \right)\,dV, \label{eq:part13_stage_functional}\] with \(\mathcal{K}\ge 0\) the bulk stiffness, \(\mathcal{G}\ge 0\) a shear stiffness, and \(V_{\mathrm{jam}}\ge 0\) a jamming potential that becomes steep for \(\phi\downarrow \phi_J\) from above. The exact \(V_{\mathrm{jam}}\) is not fixed here (SPEC later).

13.1.1.5 Interpretation (LOCK).

The stage is not empty. It has a mechanically meaningful stiffness encoded by \(\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{stage}}\) and by parameters \((\mathcal{K},\mathcal{G},\phi)\). In the JL ontology, “vacuum” corresponds to the stage in a reference jammed configuration, not to a zero-substance state.

13.1.2 13.1.2 DERIVE: stage force balance and relaxation

13.1.2.1 DERIVE (Euler–Lagrange stage balance).

Assume the stage relaxes toward configurations that minimize \(\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{stage}}\) subject to boundary/defect constraints. In the simplest quasi-static stage regime, \[\frac{\delta \mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{stage}}}{\delta u}(x,t)=0 \qquad \text{in }\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{jam}}. \label{eq:part13_stage_equilibrium}\] This implies a balance between bulk compression, shear distortion, and jamming potential forces (through \(\phi\) if \(\phi\) depends on \(u\)).

13.1.2.2 HYP (finite relaxation time).

If the stage is not quasi-static, postulate a dissipative gradient flow with a LOCK relaxation time \(\tau_{\mathrm{bg}}>0\): \[\partial_t u(x,t) = -\frac{1}{\tau_{\mathrm{bg}}}\,\frac{\delta \mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{stage}}}{\delta u}(x,t). \label{eq:part13_stage_relaxation}\] This is an explicit dynamical hypothesis that can be refined; it is not required by actor conservation.

13.1.3 13.1.3 LOCK scale hierarchy and regime of validity

13.1.3.1 LOCK (hierarchy).

We distinguish scales: \[a\ (\text{cell scale})\ \ll\ \ell\ (\text{coarse-grain scale})\ \ll\ L\ (\text{cosmological scale}),\] and define coarse-grained fields (e.g. \(\phi,\mathcal{K},\mathcal{G},e_{\mathrm{bg}},\mathbf{B}\)) by averaging over volumes of size \(\ell^3\).

13.1.3.2 LOCK (JL cosmology regime).

JL cosmology statements are asserted only in regimes where: \[\ell\gg a, \qquad \phi(x,t)\ge \phi_J\ \text{(jamming holds)}, \qquad \text{stage variations are slow on scale }\ell. \label{eq:part13_regime_jl}\] If \(\phi<\phi_J\) over macroscopic regions, the stage is not jammed and this module is not valid there.

13.1.3.3 Operational note.

The JL stage can be treated as a background medium even when its microstructure is not directly observable, provided that its effective parameters \((\mathcal{K},\mathcal{G},\mathbf{B},e_{\mathrm{bg}})\) are inferable by gates from macroscopic phenomena (lensing, rotation curves, cosmic expansion proxies, etc.).

13.2 13.2 Quantum–VP duality: separating quantum (actor) vs lattice (stage) roles

This subsection fixes the role separation. “Quantum” refers to the actor description; “lattice” refers to the stage description. A duality statement is acceptable only when it is explicitly declared as DERIVE (under a mapping) or HYP (if it posits a correspondence not yet derived).

13.2.1 13.2.1 LOCK: stage vs actor degrees of freedom

13.2.1.1 LOCK (actor sector).

Actors are excitations that carry the VP conserved charge(s) \(q\) (e.g. \(e\) or \(e_{\mathrm{a}}\)) and obey actor ledger equations such as \[\partial_t q + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} = \mathcal{R}_q \qquad (\mathcal{R}_q=0\ \text{in closed actor sector; otherwise exchange/source}). \label{eq:part13_actor_continuity}\]

13.2.1.2 LOCK (stage sector).

The stage is a medium characterized by a jammed configuration and its stiffness/permeability fields. Stage variables do not represent transported actor charge. They represent:

  • constraints on motion and conversion (e.g. \(\mathbf{B}\) as resistance/permeability),

  • response of the medium (e.g. stiffness \(\mathcal{K},\mathcal{G}\)),

  • background charge bookkeeping \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) (a scalar internal state that can evolve).

13.2.1.3 LOCK non-identification rule.

\[\text{(Non-identification)}\qquad e_{\mathrm{bg}}\ \text{is not an actor energy density and must not be inserted into actor stress/flux as if it were.} \label{eq:part13_nonidentification}\] Any coupling between \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) and actor variables must be written as explicit exchange or parameter dependence (e.g. \(\mathbf{B}=\mathbf{B}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\)).

13.2.2 13.2.2 HYP: an explicit mapping between a quantum wave description and VP moments

To make “Quantum–VP duality” concrete, we provide a minimal mapping in a restricted regime. This is HYP because it asserts that actor dynamics admits a wave description with specific closures.

13.2.2.1 HYP (wave-to-moment map).

Assume an actor wave amplitude \(\psi(x,t)\in\mathbb{C}\) exists such that \[e_{\mathrm{a}}(x,t)=|\psi(x,t)|^2, \qquad \mathbf{S}(x,t)=\frac{\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}}{m_{\mathrm{eff}}}\,\mathrm{Im}\!\big(\psi^\ast\nabla\psi\big), \label{eq:part13_madelung_map}\] with effective constants \(\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}>0\) and \(m_{\mathrm{eff}}>0\) (parameters; LOCK once chosen for a model). Define the phase \(\psi=\sqrt{e_{\mathrm{a}}}\,e^{i\theta}\), then \[\mathbf{S}=e_{\mathrm{a}}\,\mathbf{u}, \qquad \mathbf{u}=\frac{\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}}{m_{\mathrm{eff}}}\nabla\theta. \label{eq:part13_u_phase}\] This automatically satisfies the continuity equation \(\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0\) if \(\psi\) obeys a Schrödinger-type equation.

13.2.2.2 DERIVE (continuity from Schrödinger).

Assume \(\psi\) satisfies \[i\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}\partial_t\psi = -\frac{\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}^2}{2m_{\mathrm{eff}}}\Delta\psi + V_{\mathrm{eff}}(x,t)\psi, \label{eq:part13_schroedinger_eff}\] where \(V_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is real. Multiply by \(\psi^\ast\), subtract the complex conjugate equation, and divide by \(i\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}\) to obtain \[\partial_t|\psi|^2 + \nabla\cdot\left(\frac{\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}}{m_{\mathrm{eff}}}\mathrm{Im}(\psi^\ast\nabla\psi)\right)=0, \label{eq:part13_cont_from_sch}\] which matches \(\partial_t e_{\mathrm{a}}+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0\) under [eq:part13_madelung_map].

13.2.2.3 HYP (stage enters only via \(V_{\mathrm{eff}}\) and parameter fields).

In the JL ontology, the stage affects the actor wave description through: \[V_{\mathrm{eff}}=V_{\mathrm{eff}}[\,e_{\mathrm{bg}},\mathcal{K},\mathbf{B},\ldots\,], \qquad \hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}=\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}(e_{\mathrm{bg}}),\quad m_{\mathrm{eff}}=m_{\mathrm{eff}}(e_{\mathrm{bg}}), \label{eq:part13_stage_enters_wave}\] but not by identifying \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) with \(|\psi|^2\) or inserting it into actor continuity.

13.2.3 13.2.3 DERIVE: role separation expressed as a conditional equivalence class

13.2.3.1 DERIVE (conditional dual description).

If (i) the actor sector admits a closure that can be written either as VP moment equations or as a wave equation [eq:part13_schroedinger_eff], and (ii) the map [eq:part13_madelung_map] is used, then: \[\text{``Quantum actor description''}\ \equiv\ \text{``VP actor description''}\quad \text{within the declared regime,} \label{eq:part13_conditional_duality}\] while the stage remains an external medium whose parameters feed \(V_{\mathrm{eff}}\) and transport coefficients. This is not a metaphysical identity; it is a model equivalence class under a mapping.

13.2.3.2 Failure mode.

If the actor moment closure cannot be represented by any wave equation of type [eq:part13_schroedinger_eff], then the duality reduces to a heuristic analogy and must be labeled SPEC or removed.

13.3 13.3 Cosmological placement of the energy–volume exchange mechanism (ledger term placement)

This subsection specifies how actor–stage exchange is written in the ledger so that conservation and sign conventions are unambiguous.

13.3.1 13.3.1 LOCK: total ledger charge and sign conventions

13.3.1.1 LOCK (actor charge).

Let \(q_{\mathrm{act}}\) denote the actor conserved charge used for cosmology (model choice). In many modules \(q_{\mathrm{act}}=e\) (actor total), but other choices are possible if accompanied by explicit source terms.

13.3.1.2 LOCK (stage charge).

Let \(q_{\mathrm{stage}}:=e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) denote a scalar stage internal charge (not transported as actor flux, unless explicitly modeled otherwise).

13.3.1.3 LOCK (exchange term).

Define an exchange rate density \(\Xi(x,t)\) with the convention: \[\Xi>0\ \Rightarrow\ \text{actor charge is transferred into the stage (actor $\to$ stage)}. \label{eq:part13_exchange_sign}\]

13.3.1.4 LOCK (closed total ledger).

Define the total charge density \[q_{\mathrm{tot}}:=q_{\mathrm{act}}+e_{\mathrm{bg}}. \label{eq:part13_qtot}\] In the absence of external sources/sinks, the closed JL cosmology ledger demands: \[\partial_t q_{\mathrm{tot}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{act}} + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{bg}} = 0, \label{eq:part13_total_continuity}\] where \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{act}}=\mathbf{S}\) is the actor flux and \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is a possible background flux (often set to \(0\) in the simplest stage model).

13.3.2 13.3.2 DERIVE: actor–stage coupled continuity equations

13.3.2.1 DERIVE (coupled ledger with exchange).

Assume the stage does not transport charge at leading order, \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{bg}}\equiv 0\) (this is a REGIME declaration). Then [eq:part13_total_continuity] is satisfied if and only if: \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t q_{\mathrm{act}} + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S} &= -\Xi(x,t), \label{eq:part13_actor_exchange}\\ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}} &= +\Xi(x,t). \label{eq:part13_stage_exchange}\end{aligned}\] Adding [eq:part13_actor_exchange] and [eq:part13_stage_exchange] yields \[\partial_t(q_{\mathrm{act}}+e_{\mathrm{bg}})+\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=0,\] which is [eq:part13_total_continuity] with \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{bg}}=0\).

13.3.2.2 Interpretation (placement of “energy–volume exchange”).

Any “energy–volume exchange” between actors and the JL stage must appear as a paired term \(\mp\Xi\) in [eq:part13_actor_exchange][eq:part13_stage_exchange]. It must not be inserted into \(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}\) or into \(\mathbf{T}\) by hand; the sign must be consistent with [eq:part13_exchange_sign].

13.3.3 13.3.3 HYP: admissible functional forms of the exchange rate

The exchange rate \(\Xi\) is not fixed by LOCK. We list admissible forms and gates.

13.3.3.1 HYP (local exchange law).

A minimal class is \[\Xi(x,t)=\Xi_0\,\mathcal{G}_{\mathrm{ex}}(x,t)\,\Phi\!\big(q_{\mathrm{act}}(x,t),e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\big), \qquad \Xi_0\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}, \label{eq:part13_Xi_general}\] where:

  • \(\mathcal{G}_{\mathrm{ex}}(x,t)\in[0,1]\) is an exchange gate (e.g. active only under high curvature/deficit, near compact objects, during phase transitions),

  • \(\Phi\) is a nonnegative function enforcing admissibility (e.g. \(\Phi\ge 0\) and vanishing at equilibrium).

13.3.3.2 LOCK admissibility gates.

For physical admissibility and to preserve nonnegativity: \[q_{\mathrm{act}}\ge 0,\quad e_{\mathrm{bg}}\ge 0 \quad\Rightarrow\quad \text{the dynamics must not drive them negative.} \label{eq:part13_nonnegativity_requirement}\] A sufficient gate is: \[\Phi(q_{\mathrm{act}},e_{\mathrm{bg}})=q_{\mathrm{act}}\,\varphi(e_{\mathrm{bg}}), \qquad \varphi\ge 0, \label{eq:part13_Xi_sufficient}\] which ensures \(\Xi=0\) when \(q_{\mathrm{act}}=0\) (no actor charge to transfer).

13.3.3.3 SPEC (relaxation-to-equilibrium exchange).

One convenient toy form is \[\Xi = \Xi_0\,\mathcal{G}_{\mathrm{ex}}\, \big(q_{\mathrm{act}}-q_{\mathrm{eq}}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\big)_+, \qquad (x)_+:=\max(0,x), \label{eq:part13_Xi_relaxation}\] so exchange occurs only when actor charge exceeds an equilibrium level determined by the stage.

13.4 13.4 Re-placing the vacuum energy problem: “lattice stiffness” interpretation

This subsection provides the JL ontology answer to the vacuum energy (cosmological constant) tension: the stage possesses stiffness that affects dynamics, but the absolute stiffness baseline is not automatically an actor energy density and should not be inserted as such.

13.4.1 13.4.1 LOCK: stiffness is a stage property, not an actor energy density

13.4.1.1 LOCK (stiffness baseline).

The functional [eq:part13_stage_functional] includes \(V_{\mathrm{jam}}(\phi)\) and elastic terms. These encode a large baseline energetic cost for deformations in the jammed stage. Denote the reference (background) stage configuration by \(u\equiv 0\) and packing \(\phi=\phi_0(x,t)\), and define the reference stage stiffness density: \[\epsilon_{\mathrm{stiff}}(x,t):=V_{\mathrm{jam}}(\phi_0(x,t)), \qquad \epsilon_{\mathrm{stiff}}\ge 0. \label{eq:part13_eps_stiff}\] This is a stage internal density, not an actor energy density.

13.4.1.2 LOCK (baseline-shift invariance principle).

Only differences in stage stiffness that affect forces/propagation are observable. Therefore the theory declares an invariance: \[V_{\mathrm{jam}}(\phi)\ \mapsto\ V_{\mathrm{jam}}(\phi)+C(t) \quad\text{does not change stage force balance } \frac{\delta\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{stage}}}{\delta u}, \label{eq:part13_baseline_shift_invariance}\] because \(\delta/\delta u\) kills additive constants. This is the JL analog of “pressure is defined up to a constant” in incompressible media.

13.4.1.3 Consequence.

A large baseline value of \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{stiff}}\) is not automatically a large gravitational source; what matters are gradients, defects, and the coupling of stiffness variations to actor propagation and deficit terms (Parts 09–10).

13.4.2 13.4.2 HYP: how stiffness variations enter cosmology (effective deficit / expansion)

13.4.2.1 HYP (stiffness-to-deficit coupling).

Assume the cosmological “deficit” or effective potential that enters actor dynamics depends on spatial/temporal variations of stage stiffness, not on the baseline. A minimal scalar coupling is: \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(x,t) = \alpha_\Phi\,\Delta \ln \mathcal{K}(x,t), \qquad \alpha_\Phi\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK} once set)}. \label{eq:part13_def_from_stiffness}\] This choice ensures invariance under constant rescaling \(\mathcal{K}\mapsto C\mathcal{K}\) (only relative variations matter).

13.4.2.2 Alternative HYP (stress-based coupling).

Using the stage stress derived from [eq:part13_stage_functional], define a coarse stage stress tensor \(\boldsymbol{\sigma}_{\mathrm{stage}}(x,t)\) (the precise form depends on \(u\)). Postulate that only the deviatoric or gradient components act as sources in the effective gravitational sector: \[\Phi_{\mathrm{def}} \sim \nabla\cdot\nabla\cdot\left(\boldsymbol{\sigma}_{\mathrm{stage}}-\frac{1}{3}\mathrm{tr}(\boldsymbol{\sigma}_{\mathrm{stage}})\mathbf{I}\right), \label{eq:part13_def_from_stage_stress}\] again excluding the isotropic baseline.

13.4.2.3 Interpretation.

In this ontology, “vacuum energy” is reinterpreted as a stage stiffness baseline that does not necessarily gravitate as an actor energy density; cosmological effects arise from stiffness variations, defect structures, and the way actor transport interacts with the stage.

13.4.3 13.4.3 DERIVE: a ledger-consistent “cosmological constant” surrogate parameter

Because baseline stiffness shifts are gauge-like [eq:part13_baseline_shift_invariance], a JL-consistent surrogate for a cosmological constant must be constructed from measurable stage parameters, for example, a spatially uniform but time-varying stiffness level relative to a reference epoch: \[\Lambda_{\mathrm{JL}}(t) := \beta_\Lambda \left(\ln\frac{\bar{\mathcal{K}}(t)}{\bar{\mathcal{K}}(t_0)}\right), \qquad \bar{\mathcal{K}}(t):=\frac{1}{V}\int_V \mathcal{K}(x,t)\,dV, \label{eq:part13_lambda_jl}\] where \(V\) is a large comoving averaging volume and \(\beta_\Lambda\) is a LOCK scaling constant in a chosen cosmological mapping. This \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{JL}}\) is explicitly tied to a change in stiffness, not an absolute vacuum energy density.

13.5 13.5 Minimal evolution model for background variables (\(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\), \(\mathbf{B}\), stiffness): hypothesis tiers explicit

This subsection provides a minimal, internally closed background evolution system that can be used for cosmological tests. We explicitly label which parts are LOCK, HYP, SPEC.

13.5.1 13.5.1 LOCK: background variables as constitutive parameters

13.5.1.1 LOCK (constitutive dependence).

The stage internal state \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) parametrizes effective transport coefficients and stiffness: \[\mathcal{K}=\mathcal{K}(e_{\mathrm{bg}}), \qquad \mathcal{G}=\mathcal{G}(e_{\mathrm{bg}}), \qquad \mathbf{B}=\mathbf{B}(e_{\mathrm{bg}}). \label{eq:part13_constitutive_bg}\] Once a model instantiation is chosen, these maps are LOCK.

13.5.1.2 LOCK monotonicity options (declared per model).

Commonly useful monotone assumptions (must be declared; not automatic): \[\frac{d\mathcal{K}}{de_{\mathrm{bg}}}\ge 0\ (\text{stiffer stage with larger }e_{\mathrm{bg}}), \qquad \frac{d}{de_{\mathrm{bg}}}\big(\mathbf{B}\big)\succeq 0\ (\text{more resistive with larger }e_{\mathrm{bg}}). \label{eq:part13_monotonicity_options}\] These are SPEC unless declared as LOCK for a given document version.

13.5.2 13.5.2 HYP: background ledger and relaxation dynamics

13.5.2.1 HYP (stage ledger with exchange and relaxation).

We adopt the coupled exchange ledger [eq:part13_stage_exchange] with an additional relaxation term driving \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) toward a slowly varying target \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)\): \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}} = \Xi(x,t) -\frac{1}{\tau_{\mathrm{bg},e}}\big(e_{\mathrm{bg}}-\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)\big), \qquad \tau_{\mathrm{bg},e}>0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part13_ebg_relax}\] Here \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)\) is a cosmological “baseline” that may be determined by large-scale expansion/aging of the stage. This term is HYP because it adds dynamics beyond pure exchange.

13.5.2.2 HYP (optional diffusion of background state).

If one needs spatial smoothing of \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\), add a background diffusion term with coefficient \(D_{\mathrm{bg}}\ge 0\) (LOCK): \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{bg}} = \Xi -\frac{1}{\tau_{\mathrm{bg},e}}\big(e_{\mathrm{bg}}-\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)\big) + D_{\mathrm{bg}}\,\Delta e_{\mathrm{bg}}. \label{eq:part13_ebg_diffusion}\] This permits defect healing/spread in a mathematically closed PDE.

13.5.3 13.5.3 SPEC: simple parameterizations for \(\mathcal{K}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\) and \(\mathbf{B}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\)

To run cosmological gates one often needs explicit but minimal functions.

13.5.3.1 SPEC (exponential stiffness law).

\[\mathcal{K}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})=\mathcal{K}_0\,\exp(\gamma_K e_{\mathrm{bg}}), \qquad \mathcal{K}_0>0,\ \gamma_K\ge 0\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK once chosen})}. \label{eq:part13_K_exp}\] This makes relative stiffness variations proportional to \(\Delta e_{\mathrm{bg}}\).

13.5.3.2 SPEC (rational permeability/drag law).

A simple resistance scaling is \[\mathbf{B}(e_{\mathrm{bg}}) = \mathbf{B}_0\left(1+\frac{\gamma_B e_{\mathrm{bg}}}{1+\delta_B e_{\mathrm{bg}}}\right), \qquad \mathbf{B}_0\succeq 0,\ \gamma_B,\delta_B\ge 0. \label{eq:part13_B_rational}\] This saturates at large \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) and avoids unbounded resistance unless desired.

13.5.4 13.5.4 DERIVE: consistency gates for the background evolution

13.5.4.1 DERIVE (nonnegativity gate).

Given [eq:part13_ebg_relax] or [eq:part13_ebg_diffusion], to ensure \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\ge 0\) is preserved, it suffices (not necessary) that: \[\Xi(x,t)\ge 0\ \text{whenever } e_{\mathrm{bg}}=0, \qquad \bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)\ge 0, \qquad D_{\mathrm{bg}}\ge 0. \label{eq:part13_nonnegativity_gate_bg}\] Then \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) cannot be driven negative at a minimum point (maximum principle for diffusion terms).

13.5.4.2 DERIVE (boundedness gate under saturation).

If \(\Xi\) is bounded and the relaxation term is present with \(\tau_{\mathrm{bg},e}>0\), then \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) remains bounded in time (in a bounded domain with suitable boundary conditions). This provides numerical stability for cosmology simulations.

13.5.4.3 DERIVE (stage parameter positivity).

If \(\mathcal{K}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})>0\) and \(\mathbf{B}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\succeq 0\) are ensured by construction (as in [eq:part13_K_exp][eq:part13_B_rational]), then the stage functional [eq:part13_stage_functional] remains coercive in the jammed regime and the stage relaxation [eq:part13_stage_relaxation] is well-posed at the linear level.

13.6 13.6 Alignment rules with mainstream concepts and observations: avoiding term confusion

This subsection is a LOCK semantic contract: it prevents accidental equivocation between JL terms and mainstream cosmology/quantum-field terminology. It also enforces the “fact vs interpretation vs alternative mechanism” separation.

13.6.1 13.6.1 LOCK: vocabulary alignment table (semantic, not identity)

13.6.1.1 LOCK semantic alignment rules.

We impose the following rule: No JL term may be labeled with a mainstream term unless the relation is explicitly one of: (i) identity (rare; requires DERIVE), (ii) mapping (declared function/observable), (iii) analogy (SPEC; non-binding).

We record the alignment as:

  • Vacuum (mainstream):

    • JL meaning: reference jammed stage configuration (not empty space).

    • Relation: analogy (LOCK as a naming convention only).

  • Quantum field excitations (mainstream):

    • JL meaning: actor excitations (VP active/stored phases; distribution \(f\), moments \(e_{\mathrm{a}},\rho,\mathbf{S},\mathbf{T}\)).

    • Relation: mapping/conditional equivalence under [eq:part13_madelung_map] and [eq:part13_schroedinger_eff] (HYP\(\to\)DERIVE within regime).

  • Cosmological constant / dark energy (mainstream):

    • JL meaning: effective influence of stage stiffness evolution/variation (e.g. via \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{JL}}(t)\) in [eq:part13_lambda_jl]).

    • Relation: mapping (SPEC until fit to observation gates).

    • Non-identity rule: do not equate to a baseline actor energy density.

  • Metric/geometry (mainstream GR):

    • JL meaning: coarse stage geometry/response proxy \(\mathbf{g}\) (optional).

    • Relation: analogy unless an explicit derivation is provided that actor propagation reproduces a GR-like geodesic principle (HYP in this Part).

13.6.2 13.6.2 LOCK: fact vs interpretation vs alternative mechanism tagging

13.6.2.1 LOCK tagging rule.

Any statement about observations must be tagged as one of:

  • FACT: direct empirical statement (data property).

  • MODEL-INFERENCE: statement depending on a mainstream inference pipeline.

  • JL-MECHANISM: statement asserting an explanation using JL variables and gates.

For example:

  • FACT: “The expansion history \(H(z)\) follows a measured curve within uncertainties.”

  • MODEL-INFERENCE: “Interpreting \(H(z)\) under \(\Lambda\)CDM yields \(\Omega_\Lambda\approx \cdots\).”

  • JL-MECHANISM: “In JL, the same \(H(z)\) is mapped to \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{JL}}(t)\) via [eq:part13_lambda_jl].”

This prevents conflating empirical data with interpretive layers.

13.6.3 13.6.3 LOCK: non-overloading of symbols and stage/actor separation in equations

13.6.3.1 LOCK symbol separation.

The symbol \(\mathbf{B}\) is reserved for the resistance tensor in actor flux dynamics. Any distinct background scalar must not be denoted by \(B\) without a subscript. Therefore: \[\mathbf{B}\ \text{(tensor resistance)}\quad \neq\quad B_{\mathrm{bg}}\ \text{(if any scalar background marker is introduced).} \label{eq:part13_B_symbol_rule}\] Similarly, \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is reserved for stage internal state and must not be used as actor density.

13.6.3.2 LOCK equation separation.

Actor equations may depend on stage variables only through: \[\mathbf{B}=\mathbf{B}(e_{\mathrm{bg}},\ldots),\quad \kappa=\kappa(e_{\mathrm{bg}},\ldots),\quad \Phi_{\mathrm{def}}=\Phi_{\mathrm{def}}(\mathcal{K},\ldots),\quad \Xi=\Xi(q_{\mathrm{act}},e_{\mathrm{bg}},\ldots), \label{eq:part13_allowed_dependencies}\] or through explicitly declared boundary conditions. Direct substitution \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\mapsto q_{\mathrm{act}}\) is forbidden by [eq:part13_nonidentification].

13.6.4 13.6.4 DERIVE: minimal observational interface for JL ontology

The ontology becomes testable only through a declared interface that maps JL variables to observables. At minimum, JL cosmology must specify:

  1. A mapping from stiffness evolution to an effective expansion driver (e.g. \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{JL}}(t)\) in [eq:part13_lambda_jl]).

  2. A mapping from stage inhomogeneity to deficit effects (e.g. [eq:part13_def_from_stiffness] or [eq:part13_def_from_stage_stress]).

  3. A gate-based distinction between actor contributions and stage contributions in any effective “gravity” sector.

Without these mappings, “jammed lattice vacuum” remains semantic and cannot be falsified.

13.6.4.1 End of Part 13.

This Part fixed the ontology and the ledger placement rules: (i) the stage is a jammed lattice with stiffness, (ii) actors carry conserved flux and may admit a quantum dual description only under declared mappings, (iii) actor–stage exchange must be written as paired ledger terms, (iv) the vacuum energy tension is re-placed as a stiffness-baseline issue with baseline-shift invariance, and (v) all mainstream terminology alignment is governed by explicit semantic rules to avoid confusion.

14 PART 14. Lattice Optics: Redshift, Hubble Tension, Time Delay (Output 14)

This Part defines the lattice-optics module inside the Jammed-Lattice (JL) cosmology: photons (or photon-like actors) propagate through a jammed stage and acquire an apparent “cosmological redshift” without invoking (i) global metric expansion as a primitive or (ii) pure Doppler recession as the primary cause. Instead, the redshift is modeled as a cumulative interaction cost (or stage-induced frequency drift) along the optical path. We then show how environment dependence of the optical coupling can generate Hubble-rate discrepancies (a “tension” scenario), and we derive a time-delay/time-dilation relation consistent with the same optical coupling. Finally, we provide strict constraint checks and a PASS/FAIL gate design.

14.0.0.1 Claim tiers.

  • LOCK: definitions, sign conventions, dimensional conventions, gate definitions.

  • DERIVE: results obtained from LOCK plus explicitly stated regime assumptions.

  • HYP: dynamical hypotheses (e.g. time drift of optical index) that are not forced by the ledger alone.

  • SPEC: phenomenological parameterizations and toy functional forms.

14.0.0.2 Optical actors and path geometry.

We model a photon-like signal as an actor wave packet propagating along a ray \(\gamma\) from an emission event \(e\) to an observation event \(o\). Let \(s\) denote a path-length parameter and \(ds\) the stage-proper line element along \(\gamma\): \[D:=\int_{\gamma} ds \label{eq:part14_distance_def}\] is the path length between emitter and observer (in a chosen stage geometry; Euclidean \(ds=\|dx\|\) is a special case). We denote photon energy and frequency by \[E=\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}\omega,\qquad \omega=2\pi\nu, \label{eq:part14_E_omega}\] with an effective constant \(\hbar_{\mathrm{eff}}\) (if one wants explicit duality to a wave description; otherwise treat \(E\) and \(\omega\) as proportional by definition).

14.0.0.3 Observed redshift (definition; LOCK).

The observed redshift is defined kinematically as the ratio of emitted to observed frequency (or energy per photon): \[1+z := \frac{\nu_{\mathrm{em}}}{\nu_{\mathrm{obs}}} = \frac{\omega_{\mathrm{em}}}{\omega_{\mathrm{obs}}} = \frac{E_{\mathrm{em}}}{E_{\mathrm{obs}}}. \label{eq:part14_z_def}\] This definition is model-independent; the model enters only through how \(E\) (or \(\omega\)) evolves along \(\gamma\).

14.1 14.1 Redshift reinterpreted: an interaction-cost model (not Doppler / not expansion)

14.1.1 14.1.1 LOCK: separating mechanisms at the level of equations

We explicitly separate three logically distinct mechanisms that can produce an observed \(z\):

  1. Doppler mechanism: emitter/observer relative motion changes \(\nu\) via kinematics.

  2. Expansion mechanism: a time-dependent global scale factor stretches wavelengths.

  3. Lattice-optics mechanism (this Part): a photon-like actor exchanges energy with the stage during propagation (or experiences stage-induced frequency drift), producing a cumulative change in \(E\) along the path.

In this Part, we assume the third mechanism is present and can be analyzed as a standalone module. Doppler and expansion effects can be included later as additional factors, but they are not used as primitives here.

14.1.2 14.1.2 LOCK: optical coupling coefficient and ledger interpretation

14.1.2.1 LOCK(optical coupling \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)).

Introduce an optical energy-drift coefficient (or interaction-cost coefficient) \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(x,t;\omega)\ge 0, \qquad [\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}]=\mathrm{length}^{-1}, \label{eq:part14_kappa_opt_def}\] which quantifies the fractional decrease of photon energy per unit path length in the declared lattice-optics regime.

14.1.2.2 LOCK(ledger meaning).

Along the ray, energy lost by the optical actor is deposited into the stage (or into a stage bookkeeping channel), i.e. there exists a stage exchange density \(\Xi_{\mathrm{opt}}\) such that (schematically) \[\text{actor energy decreases}\quad \Longleftrightarrow \quad \text{stage bookkeeping increases}.\] The precise stage channel (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) or another internal variable) is not fixed here; only the sign and pairing principle is fixed (cf. PART 13.3).

14.1.2.3 LOCK(achromaticity as a default).

Cosmological redshift is observed to be (to leading order) a uniform scaling of spectra. Therefore, the default lattice-optics assumption is: \[\frac{\partial \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}}{\partial \omega}\approx 0 \quad\text{(redshift is approximately achromatic in the operating regime).} \label{eq:part14_achromatic_assumption}\] Any explicit \(\omega\)-dependence must be treated as a small correction and must pass dispersion/broadening gates (see §14.5).

14.2 14.2 Derivation of \(dE/E=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,dx\) and its regime of validity

This subsection derives the key drift law \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds\] and clarifies the approximation regime in which it is legitimate.

14.2.1 14.2.1 DERIVE (micro-step derivation): small fractional loss per lattice step

14.2.1.1 Setup (REGIME).

Assume the optical actor propagates through the stage in discrete steps of characteristic length \(a>0\) (the lattice micro-scale or an effective scattering length), but with no direction randomization (coherent forward transport).

Let \(E_n\) be the photon energy after \(n\) steps, and assume that each step transfers a small fraction \(\varepsilon\in(0,1)\) of energy to the stage: \[E_{n+1}=(1-\varepsilon)\,E_n. \label{eq:part14_step_loss}\] After \(N\) steps, \[E_N=(1-\varepsilon)^N E_0. \label{eq:part14_discrete_solution}\] If the total traversed distance is \(x=Na\), then \[E(x)=\left(1-\varepsilon\right)^{x/a}E_0 = \exp\!\left(\frac{x}{a}\ln(1-\varepsilon)\right)E_0. \label{eq:part14_exponential_exact}\] For small \(\varepsilon\) (the continuum regime), \(\ln(1-\varepsilon)=-\varepsilon+O(\varepsilon^2)\), so \[E(x)\approx E_0\,\exp\!\left(-\frac{\varepsilon}{a}\,x\right). \label{eq:part14_exponential_approx}\] Define the optical coupling \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}:=\frac{\varepsilon}{a}\ge 0. \label{eq:part14_kappa_from_eps}\] Then [eq:part14_exponential_approx] is the solution of \[\frac{dE}{dx}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}E \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \frac{dE}{E}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,dx. \label{eq:part14_dEdx_law}\]

14.2.1.2 Interpretation.

\(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) measures the per-length interaction cost. The micro-step model shows that the exponential law follows whenever the fractional loss per step is small and (approximately) proportional to current energy.

14.2.2 14.2.2 DERIVE (continuum ray derivation): path-integrated coupling

In a nonuniform stage, \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) may vary with position/time along the ray. Replacing \(dx\) by the path element \(ds\), \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\,ds \quad\Rightarrow\quad \ln\frac{E_{\mathrm{em}}}{E_{\mathrm{obs}}} = \int_{\gamma}\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\,ds. \label{eq:part14_log_integral}\] Using [eq:part14_z_def], we obtain the master redshift relation: \[\ln(1+z)=\int_{\gamma}\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\,ds. \label{eq:part14_redshift_integral}\] If \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) is approximately constant along \(\gamma\), \[1+z\approx e^{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D}, \qquad z\approx e^{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D}-1. \label{eq:part14_z_exp}\] In the low-\(z\) regime (\(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D\ll 1\)), \[z \approx \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D. \label{eq:part14_smallz}\]

14.2.3 14.2.3 DERIVE: an “optical Hubble rate” and its low-\(z\) identification

Define an effective optical Hubble rate along the ray by \[H_{\mathrm{opt}}(s):=c\,\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s), \qquad [H_{\mathrm{opt}}]=\mathrm{time}^{-1}. \label{eq:part14_Hopt_def}\] Then [eq:part14_redshift_integral] becomes \[\ln(1+z)=\frac{1}{c}\int_{\gamma} H_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\,ds. \label{eq:part14_log_z_Hopt}\] If the geometry is approximately Euclidean and rays are approximately straight so that \(D\) is the physical distance, then at low \(z\) \[z\approx \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D=\frac{H_{\mathrm{opt}}}{c}D, \label{eq:part14_Hubble_like}\] which has the same algebraic form as a Hubble law with effective constant \(H_{\mathrm{opt}}\).

14.2.4 14.2.4 Regime of validity (LOCK gates)

The drift law [eq:part14_dEdx_law] is not universally valid. It requires the following LOCK regime conditions:

14.2.4.1 (R1) Weak, cumulative drift.

Per micro-step loss is small: \(\varepsilon\ll 1\) (equivalently \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}a\ll 1\)), so a continuum exponential is legitimate.

14.2.4.2 (R2) Forward coherence (no angular diffusion).

The mechanism must not randomize photon direction at a level that would blur images. Formally, the mean deflection per step must satisfy \[\delta\theta \ll \theta_{\mathrm{res}} \quad \text{(instrument/astrophysical resolution bound).} \label{eq:part14_forward_coherence}\] If the mechanism is scattering-like with appreciable angular diffusion, it fails image-sharpness gates.

14.2.4.3 (R3) Achromaticity to leading order.

The coupling is approximately frequency-independent: [eq:part14_achromatic_assumption].

14.2.4.4 (R4) Controlled fluctuations (no excessive line broadening).

Spatial/temporal fluctuations of \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) along the path must be small enough to avoid spectral line broadening beyond observation; see §14.5.

14.2.4.5 Optional additional attenuation.

If photon number is not conserved (true absorption/extinction), introduce a separate coefficient \(\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\ge 0\): \[\frac{dN}{N}=-\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\,ds, \label{eq:part14_extinction}\] distinct from energy drift. In this Part we keep \(\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\) separate from \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (symbol separation rule).

14.3 14.3 Hubble-tension scenario: local density / effective refractive structure produces deviations

This subsection explains how the same lattice-optics mechanism can produce different “inferred Hubble rates” depending on the environment and distance scale, without requiring inconsistent data reduction. The key is that \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (hence \(H_{\mathrm{opt}}\)) may depend on stage variables such as \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) (and thus on local large-scale structure).

14.3.1 14.3.1 LOCK: environment dependence of \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)

14.3.1.1 LOCK(constitutive dependence).

In JL ontology, optical transport coefficients are stage-controlled. We therefore allow \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}=\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\!\big(e_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t),\ \mathbf{B}(x,t),\ \mathcal{K}(x,t),\ldots\big), \label{eq:part14_kappa_constitutive}\] with the functional form declared and locked once chosen.

14.3.1.2 SPEC(linearized environment model).

A minimal phenomenological model is \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(x,t) = \kappa_0(t)\,\big(1+\eta\,\delta_{\mathrm{bg}}(x,t)\big), \qquad \delta_{\mathrm{bg}}:=\frac{e_{\mathrm{bg}}-\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}}{\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}}, \label{eq:part14_kappa_linear}\] where \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is a large-scale mean, \(\eta\) is a dimensionless sensitivity, and \(\kappa_0(t)\) is the baseline optical drift at epoch \(t\) (possibly slowly varying).

14.3.2 14.3.2 DERIVE: scale-dependent inferred \(H\) from the same redshift law

Given a distance indicator that provides an estimate of path length \(D\) (or a proxy monotonically related to \(D\)), an “inferred Hubble slope” at low \(z\) is essentially the derivative of \(z\) with respect to \(D\). From [eq:part14_redshift_integral], define the local logarithmic slope: \[\frac{d}{dD}\ln(1+z)=\left\langle \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\right\rangle_{\gamma,D}, \label{eq:part14_log_slope}\] where \(\langle\cdot\rangle_{\gamma,D}\) denotes an average of \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) along the segment of the ray of length \(D\). Multiplying by \(c\), the inferred rate is \[H_{\mathrm{inf}}(D):=c\,\frac{d}{dD}\ln(1+z) =c\,\left\langle \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\right\rangle_{\gamma,D} =\left\langle H_{\mathrm{opt}}\right\rangle_{\gamma,D}. \label{eq:part14_Hinf}\] Thus, if \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) is not constant in space/time, then \(H_{\mathrm{inf}}\) depends on distance scale and direction because it is an average along the line of sight.

14.3.2.1 Local vs global difference.

Let \(D_{\mathrm{loc}}\) be the typical depth of the local distance ladder sample and \(D_{\mathrm{glob}}\) that of a high-\(z\) inference. Then \[H_{\mathrm{inf}}(D_{\mathrm{loc}})-H_{\mathrm{inf}}(D_{\mathrm{glob}}) = c\left(\left\langle \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\right\rangle_{\gamma,D_{\mathrm{loc}}}-\left\langle \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\right\rangle_{\gamma,D_{\mathrm{glob}}}\right). \label{eq:part14_tension_difference}\] This is a generic “tension” mechanism: different inference pipelines probe different effective averages of the same underlying field \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\).

14.3.3 14.3.3 DERIVE: anisotropy and “local void / overdensity” signatures

Using [eq:part14_kappa_linear], the directional dependence at low \(z\) becomes \[H_{\mathrm{inf}}(\hat n;D) \approx c\,\kappa_0(t)\left(1+\eta\,\left\langle \delta_{\mathrm{bg}}\right\rangle_{\gamma(\hat n),D}\right). \label{eq:part14_directional_H}\] Therefore the model predicts:

  • If the local region has atypical \(\langle \delta_{\mathrm{bg}}\rangle\), the locally inferred slope differs from the global mean.

  • If \(\delta_{\mathrm{bg}}\) has large-scale anisotropy, then \(H_{\mathrm{inf}}\) is direction-dependent at fixed \(D\).

These are testable gates (see §14.6).

14.4 14.4 Time delay (light curves / clock rates) and its connection to redshift

A central constraint on any non-expansion redshift mechanism is the observed connection between redshift and time dilation of distant transient light curves (and, separately, time delays in gravitational lensing). This subsection derives time relations in lattice optics, and provides a route to connect the same parameters that generate \(z\) to observable delays.

14.4.1 14.4.1 HYP: optical-index picture and time-varying stage (frequency drift without expansion)

To connect time dilation to redshift in a mathematically clean way, we introduce an optical index of the stage \(n(x,t)\ge 1\) (dimensionless), and assume that optical rays propagate with group speed \[v_g(x,t)=\frac{c}{n(x,t)}. \label{eq:part14_vg}\] This does not assume metric expansion; it assumes the stage behaves like a slowly evolving optical medium.

14.4.1.1 HYP(homogeneous-in-space, time-varying index for the cosmological component).

Assume the cosmological part of the index is primarily time dependent: \[n(x,t)=\bar n(t)+\delta n(x,t), \qquad |\delta n|\ll \bar n, \label{eq:part14_n_split}\] where \(\bar n(t)\) captures large-scale stage aging, and \(\delta n\) captures inhomogeneities (responsible for lensing/time delay structure).

14.4.1.2 Key benefit.

In a homogeneous but time-varying medium, frequency drift and time dilation become tightly linked by kinematics of wave propagation in the medium, yielding a built-in consistency check.

14.4.2 14.4.2 DERIVE: redshift and time dilation in a homogeneous time-varying index

Consider a fixed source-observer spatial separation \(D\) (in the chosen stage geometry), and ignore \(\delta n\) for the moment. The ray travel condition is \[\int_{t_{\mathrm{em}}}^{t_{\mathrm{obs}}}\frac{c}{\bar n(t)}\,dt = D. \label{eq:part14_travel_condition}\] Define the travel-time functional \(T(t_{\mathrm{em}}):=t_{\mathrm{obs}}-t_{\mathrm{em}}\) determined implicitly by [eq:part14_travel_condition].

Differentiate [eq:part14_travel_condition] with respect to \(t_{\mathrm{em}}\) (holding \(D\) fixed). Let \(t_{\mathrm{obs}}=t_{\mathrm{obs}}(t_{\mathrm{em}})\). Then \[-\frac{c}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{em}})} + \frac{c}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}\frac{dt_{\mathrm{obs}}}{dt_{\mathrm{em}}}=0,\] hence \[\frac{dt_{\mathrm{obs}}}{dt_{\mathrm{em}}}=\frac{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{em}})}. \label{eq:part14_time_dilation_factor}\] Therefore a small emission interval \(\Delta t_{\mathrm{em}}\) is observed as \[\Delta t_{\mathrm{obs}}=\frac{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{em}})}\,\Delta t_{\mathrm{em}}. \label{eq:part14_dt_relation}\]

14.4.2.1 Frequency drift.

For a dispersionless homogeneous medium, the wave number \(k\) is conserved while the frequency satisfies \(\omega(t)=ck/\bar n(t)\), so \[\frac{\omega_{\mathrm{em}}}{\omega_{\mathrm{obs}}} = \frac{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{em}})}. \label{eq:part14_omega_ratio}\] Comparing [eq:part14_omega_ratio] with [eq:part14_z_def] gives \[1+z=\frac{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{em}})}. \label{eq:part14_z_from_n}\] Combining [eq:part14_dt_relation] and [eq:part14_z_from_n] yields the central lattice-optics time-dilation result: \[\Delta t_{\mathrm{obs}}=(1+z)\,\Delta t_{\mathrm{em}} \qquad \text{(in the homogeneous time-varying index regime).} \label{eq:part14_time_dilation_equals_redshift}\] Thus, in this HYP closure, the light-curve stretch factor equals the redshift factor by construction.

14.4.3 14.4.3 DERIVE: recovering the drift law \(dE/E=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds\) from index drift

From [eq:part14_z_from_n], the differential form is \[d\ln(1+z)=d\ln \bar n. \label{eq:part14_dlogz_dlogn}\] Since \(E\propto \omega \propto 1/\bar n\), we have \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\frac{d\bar n}{\bar n}. \label{eq:part14_dE_over_E_dn}\] Relate \(d\bar n\) to path length \(ds\) via \(dt=\bar n\,ds/c\) (because \(ds = v_g\,dt = (c/\bar n)dt\) implies \(dt=\bar n\,ds/c\)): \[d\bar n=\frac{d\bar n}{dt}\,dt=\frac{d\bar n}{dt}\,\frac{\bar n}{c}\,ds. \label{eq:part14_dn_dt_ds}\] Insert into [eq:part14_dE_over_E_dn]: \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\frac{1}{c}\frac{d\bar n}{dt}\,ds. \label{eq:part14_dE_over_E_kappa}\] Therefore, the interaction-cost coefficient is identified as \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(t)=\frac{1}{c}\frac{d\bar n(t)}{dt}, \label{eq:part14_kappa_equals_dn_dt}\] and the drift law [eq:part14_dEdx_law] follows (with \(dx\to ds\)).

14.4.3.1 Interpretation.

In this representation, “energy loss” is precisely the energy exchanged between the optical actor and a time-evolving stage. The stage aging (increase of \(\bar n\)) is the underlying driver of the redshift, not global expansion.

14.4.4 14.4.4 DERIVE: time-of-flight and lensing-like delays from spatial index variations

Now include inhomogeneities \(\delta n(x,t)\) in [eq:part14_n_split], assumed slowly varying in time over the travel duration so that the dominant cosmological redshift comes from \(\bar n(t)\).

14.4.4.1 Travel time.

The coordinate travel time is \[T = \int_{\gamma}\frac{n(x,t)}{c}\,ds \approx \int_{\gamma}\frac{\bar n(t)}{c}\,ds + \int_{\gamma}\frac{\delta n(x,t)}{c}\,ds. \label{eq:part14_travel_time_split}\] Define the inhomogeneity-induced delay (Shapiro-like optical delay) as \[\Delta T_{\delta n}:=\int_{\gamma}\frac{\delta n(x,t)}{c}\,ds. \label{eq:part14_deltaT}\] This term produces (i) time delays between multiple images in a lensing configuration (different \(\gamma\) paths), and (ii) potential chromatic dispersion if \(\delta n\) depends on \(\omega\) (which is constrained).

14.4.4.2 Key separation.

In a time-independent medium, \(\delta n(x)\) changes travel time and bending but does not by itself produce redshift. Redshift is tied to time dependence of the homogeneous component \(\bar n(t)\) (or, more generally, to \(\partial_t n\) along the ray).

14.5 14.5 Constraint checks: line widths, surface brightness, distance ladder compatibility

This subsection lists hard constraints and derives quantitative conditions on \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (and optional \(\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\), \(n\)-dispersion, fluctuations) required to avoid conflicts.

14.5.1 14.5.1 Spectral line width: controlling fluctuations of \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)

A pure multiplicative redshift scales all frequencies uniformly and preserves narrow spectral lines (aside from instrumental and source effects). In lattice optics, line broadening arises if different photons along the same line of sight experience different effective \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (stochasticity or strong inhomogeneity along the beam).

14.5.1.1 Model of fluctuations.

Write \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)=\bar\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)+\delta\kappa(s), \qquad \langle \delta\kappa\rangle=0, \label{eq:part14_kappa_fluct}\] along the ray. Then from [eq:part14_redshift_integral], \[\ln(1+z)=\int \bar\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds + \int \delta\kappa\,ds. \label{eq:part14_logz_fluct}\] The random part produces dispersion in \(\ln(1+z)\): \[\mathrm{Var}\!\big(\ln(1+z)\big) = \int_0^D\!\!\int_0^D \mathrm{Cov}\!\big(\delta\kappa(s),\delta\kappa(s')\big)\,ds\,ds'. \label{eq:part14_var_logz}\]

14.5.1.2 Short-correlation approximation.

If \(\delta\kappa\) has correlation length \(\ell_c\) and pointwise variance \(\sigma_\kappa^2\), then a standard estimate is \[\mathrm{Var}\!\big(\ln(1+z)\big)\approx \sigma_\kappa^2\,D\,\ell_c. \label{eq:part14_var_approx}\] Since \(E\propto 1+z^{-1}\), fractional energy spread is \[\frac{\sigma_E}{E}\approx \sqrt{\mathrm{Var}(\ln E)}=\sqrt{\mathrm{Var}(\ln(1+z))}. \label{eq:part14_sigmaE}\]

14.5.1.3 Line-broadening gate (LOCK).

Fix an observational tolerance \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{line}}\ll 1\) for allowable fractional broadening attributable to propagation. Require \[\sqrt{\sigma_\kappa^2\,D\,\ell_c}\ \le\ \epsilon_{\mathrm{line}} \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \sigma_\kappa \le \frac{\epsilon_{\mathrm{line}}}{\sqrt{D\,\ell_c}}. \label{eq:part14_line_gate}\] If this cannot be satisfied for cosmological \(D\) without making \(\sigma_\kappa\) absurdly tiny, the mechanism fails.

14.5.2 14.5.2 Dispersion and chromaticity: bounding \(\partial_\omega n\) and \(\partial_\omega \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)

If the stage index depends on frequency, group velocities differ and pulses broaden; if \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) depends on frequency, different spectral components redshift differently.

14.5.2.1 Dispersion parameter.

Define the group index \[n_g(\omega,t):=\bar n(\omega,t)+\omega\,\frac{\partial \bar n}{\partial \omega}(\omega,t). \label{eq:part14_group_index}\] The dispersion-induced pulse broadening for a bandwidth \(\Delta\omega\) over travel time is controlled by \(\partial_\omega n_g\) (details depend on waveform). A minimal gate is to require small fractional variation of \(n_g\) over the observed optical band: \[\left|\frac{\Delta n_g}{n_g}\right| \ll 1 \quad\text{for }\omega \text{ in the relevant band.} \label{eq:part14_dispersion_gate}\]

14.5.2.2 Chromatic-redshift gate.

From [eq:part14_redshift_integral], if \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) depends on \(\omega\) then \[\ln(1+z(\omega))=\int \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(\omega,s)\,ds.\] A minimal achromaticity gate is \[\left|\frac{\partial}{\partial\ln\omega}\ln(1+z(\omega))\right| = \left|\int \frac{\partial \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}}{\partial\ln\omega}\,ds\right| \le \epsilon_{\mathrm{ach}}, \qquad \epsilon_{\mathrm{ach}}\ll 1\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}. \label{eq:part14_achromatic_gate}\]

14.5.3 14.5.3 Surface brightness (Tolman-type) scaling and required additional factors

Let a source have physical emitting area \(A_{\mathrm{em}}\) and intrinsic luminosity \(L\) (energy per unit emission time). Observed flux is \[F=\frac{\text{received energy per unit observer time}}{\text{detector area}}. \label{eq:part14_flux_def}\] In a static Euclidean geometry without stage focusing, the geometric dilution is \(1/(4\pi D^2)\).

14.5.3.1 Energy factor.

Each photon energy is reduced by \((1+z)^{-1}\).

14.5.3.2 Rate factor (time dilation).

If [eq:part14_time_dilation_equals_redshift] holds, arrival rates are reduced by an additional \((1+z)^{-1}\), because \(\Delta t_{\mathrm{obs}}=(1+z)\Delta t_{\mathrm{em}}\).

14.5.3.3 Hence flux scaling (no additional extinction/focusing).

If photon number is conserved and only these two factors apply, then \[F(D,z)\approx \frac{L}{4\pi D^2}\,\frac{1}{(1+z)^2}. \label{eq:part14_flux_scaling}\] This is equivalent to defining an effective luminosity distance \[d_L:=D(1+z). \label{eq:part14_dL_def}\]

14.5.3.4 Surface brightness.

Observed angular area is \(\Omega=A_{\mathrm{em}}/d_A^2\), where \(d_A\) is the angular-diameter distance (geometry + possible refractive focusing). Then surface brightness is \[B:=\frac{F}{\Omega} = \frac{L}{4\pi A_{\mathrm{em}}}\,\frac{d_A^2}{D^2}\,\frac{1}{(1+z)^2}. \label{eq:part14_SB_general}\] If \(d_A\approx D\) (static Euclidean, negligible refractive focusing), then \[B \propto (1+z)^{-2}. \label{eq:part14_SB_minus2}\]

14.5.3.5 Constraint statement.

If observational tests require a stronger dimming law (often quoted as a \((1+z)^{-4}\) Tolman-type behavior in standard expanding models), then a pure lattice-optics \((1+z)^{-2}\) law would be insufficient unless additional effects contribute:

  • extra photon-number attenuation \(\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\) (but must be nearly achromatic to avoid color distortions),

  • refractive focusing changing \(d_A/D\) systematically with \(z\),

  • or a different mapping between \(D\) and observational distance measures.

Therefore surface-brightness tests are a hard gate: the model must declare which additional factor(s) are present and must show consistency with color, spectra, and imaging.

14.5.4 14.5.4 Distance ladder consistency: luminosity distance and magnitude–redshift relation

Astronomical distance ladders typically infer \(d_L(z)\) from standard candles. In lattice optics, the mapping is not assumed; it must be derived from [eq:part14_flux_scaling] plus any extra attenuation.

14.5.4.1 Including extinction.

If photon number is attenuated by [eq:part14_extinction], then \(N\) decreases as \(e^{-\tau_{\mathrm{ext}}}\) with optical depth \[\tau_{\mathrm{ext}}(z):=\int_{\gamma}\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\,ds. \label{eq:part14_tau_ext}\] Flux becomes \[F(D,z)\approx \frac{L}{4\pi D^2}\,\frac{1}{(1+z)^2}\,e^{-\tau_{\mathrm{ext}}(z)}. \label{eq:part14_flux_with_ext}\] This corresponds to an effective luminosity distance \[d_L = D(1+z)\,e^{\tau_{\mathrm{ext}}(z)/2}. \label{eq:part14_dL_with_ext}\]

14.5.4.2 Magnitude relation (log form).

Define distance modulus \(\mu\) by \[\mu = 5\log_{10}\!\left(\frac{d_L}{10\,\mathrm{pc}}\right).\] Then lattice optics predicts \(\mu(z)\) via \(d_L(z)\) computed from:

Distance ladder compatibility is therefore a multi-gate constraint: the model must fit both \(z(D)\) and \(d_L(z)\) consistently.

14.6 14.6 Observation gate design: what data tests what (PASS/FAIL framework)

This subsection specifies a gate suite for lattice optics. Each gate returns PASS/FAIL given a dataset and a declared mapping between observables and model quantities. The purpose is to make the module falsifiable.

14.6.1 14.6.1 Gate set G1: redshift-distance functional form (low-\(z\) and beyond)

14.6.1.1 G1a (low-\(z\) linearity).

At sufficiently low \(z\), [eq:part14_smallz] predicts \(z\approx \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D\) (or with a local average). Define a fit residual \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{lin}}\) for \(z\) vs \(D\) in a low-\(z\) subset. PASS requires: \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{lin}}\le \epsilon_{\mathrm{lin}} \qquad (\epsilon_{\mathrm{lin}}\ \text{a \textsf{LOCK} tolerance}). \label{eq:part14_gate_lin}\]

14.6.1.2 G1b (integral law consistency).

For higher \(z\), the model predicts \(\ln(1+z)=\int \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds\). Given a reconstructed \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\) or a parameterized \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\), PASS requires that the predicted \(\ln(1+z)\) matches observations within tolerance across the sample.

14.6.2 14.6.2 Gate set G2: light-curve time dilation (clock-rate test)

14.6.2.1 Prediction under index-drift closure.

If the model adopts §14.4.1–§14.4.2, then \[\Delta t_{\mathrm{obs}}=(1+z)\Delta t_{\mathrm{em}}.\] Define the observed stretch factor \(s_{\mathrm{obs}}(z)\) (from transient light curves) and test: \[s_{\mathrm{obs}}(z)\approx (1+z)^{\alpha_t}. \label{eq:part14_stretch_powerlaw}\] In the homogeneous index-drift model, \(\alpha_t=1\).

14.6.2.2 Gate G2.

PASS requires \[\left|\alpha_t-1\right|\le \epsilon_t \qquad (\epsilon_t\ \textsf{LOCK} tolerance), \label{eq:part14_gate_time_dilation}\] or, equivalently, that direct residuals between \(s_{\mathrm{obs}}\) and \((1+z)\) are below tolerance.

14.6.2.3 Fail mode.

If the model uses a purely distance-drift law [eq:part14_dEdx_law] without time-varying index (no emission-time dependence), it generically predicts \(\alpha_t\approx 0\) (no macroscopic time dilation), which is a likely FAIL against time-dilation data. Therefore the model must state explicitly whether it adopts the index-drift closure (and accept its implications) or accept failing this gate.

14.6.3 14.6.3 Gate set G3: spectral-line preservation and achromaticity

14.6.3.1 G3a (line-broadening).

Use [eq:part14_line_gate]. PASS requires the inferred propagation-induced broadening satisfies the bound.

14.6.3.2 G3b (chromatic redshift).

Use [eq:part14_achromatic_gate]. PASS requires achromaticity within \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{ach}}\).

14.6.3.3 G3c (dispersion/time-smearing).

Use [eq:part14_dispersion_gate]. PASS requires negligible dispersion-induced smearing over the relevant bands and path lengths.

14.6.4 14.6.4 Gate set G4: surface brightness scaling and color consistency

14.6.4.1 G4a (surface brightness exponent).

Empirically determine the effective exponent \(p\) in \[B(z)\propto (1+z)^{-p}\] after accounting for declared evolution corrections. The model predicts \[p=2 \quad \text{if } d_A\approx D \text{ and no extra attenuation/focusing beyond }(1+z)^{-2}.\] If the model includes additional \(z\)-dependent \(d_A/D\) or \(\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\), it must predict a modified \(p\).

PASS requires predicted \(p\) matches the empirical \(p\) within a tolerance \(\epsilon_B\): \[|p_{\mathrm{pred}}-p_{\mathrm{obs}}|\le \epsilon_B. \label{eq:part14_gate_SB}\]

14.6.4.2 G4b (color / spectral distortions).

If the model uses \(\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}\) to adjust brightness scaling, it must ensure near-achromatic extinction over the band: \[\left|\frac{\partial \tau_{\mathrm{ext}}}{\partial \ln\omega}\right|\le \epsilon_{\mathrm{color}} \label{eq:part14_gate_color}\] to avoid large color distortions inconsistent with observed spectra.

14.6.5 14.6.5 Gate set G5: distance ladder coherence across methods

Different distance probes constrain different combinations of \(z(D)\), \(d_L(z)\), and \(d_A(z)\). Lattice optics must not tune each separately without a shared parameterization.

14.6.5.1 G5 (coherence gate).

Choose a LOCK parameter set \(\theta_{\mathrm{opt}}\) governing: \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(\cdot),\quad \bar n(t),\quad \delta n(x,t),\quad \alpha_{\mathrm{ext}}(\cdot),\quad \text{and geometry }ds.\] PASS requires that a single \(\theta_{\mathrm{opt}}\) jointly fits:

without violating the spectral and time-dilation gates.

14.6.6 14.6.6 Gate set G6: lensing and time-delay tests (inhomogeneity consistency)

Using [eq:part14_deltaT], the model predicts that time delays between multiple images depend on the path integral of \(\delta n\): \[\Delta T_{12}=\frac{1}{c}\left(\int_{\gamma_1}\delta n\,ds-\int_{\gamma_2}\delta n\,ds\right)+\Delta T_{\mathrm{geom}}, \label{eq:part14_lens_delay}\] where \(\Delta T_{\mathrm{geom}}\) is the geometric path-length difference term (also computable from the refracted ray geometry).

PASS requires that the same \(\delta n\) field (or its parameterization via \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) and deficit fields) that explains lensing deflection also explains observed time delays without inducing forbidden dispersion or chromaticity.

14.6.7 14.6.7 Gate set G7: “Hubble tension” signature (environmental correlation test)

From [eq:part14_directional_H], the model predicts an environmental/directional correlation of inferred \(H_{\mathrm{inf}}\) with \(\langle\delta_{\mathrm{bg}}\rangle\).

14.6.7.1 G7.

Construct an estimator of local background contrast along each line of sight and compare with inferred \(H_{\mathrm{inf}}\). PASS requires statistically significant correlation with the predicted sign and magnitude (within uncertainties) and consistency with isotropy constraints (the correlation must not exceed limits from large-scale isotropy observations). If no such correlation is present where the model requires it, the mechanism fails as an explanation of the tension.

14.6.7.2 End of Part 14.

This Part established lattice optics as a falsifiable module: it (i) defines redshift as a path-integrated optical coupling, (ii) derives the exponential drift law and its integral form, (iii) provides a mechanism for scale-dependent inferred Hubble rates via environment-dependent \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\), (iv) connects redshift to time dilation through a time-varying stage index (a specific HYP closure), and (v) sets strict gates against spectral broadening, dispersion, surface brightness scaling, ladder coherence, and lensing/time-delay consistency.

15 PART 15. Dark Energy & Accelerated Expansion: FRW–Ledger Equations and Large-Scale Structure (Output 15)

This Part introduces a homogeneous–isotropic FRW background as a controlled macroscopic bookkeeping layer and connects it to VP/Jammed-Lattice (JL) variables via explicit mapping rules. We then write the FRW-ledger equations (continuity with sources/exchange), define an effective Friedmann-type system (with clear domain/assumptions), derive the acceleration condition \(\ddot a>0\), and extend the module to structure growth plus a large-scale alignment field. Finally, we design a joint PASS/FAIL gate suite for SN/BAO/weak-lensing distances and growth-rate observables.

15.0.0.1 Claim tiers.

  • LOCK: definitions, sign conventions, dimensional conventions, the minimal FRW skeleton, and gate definitions.

  • DERIVE: consequences of LOCK under declared regime assumptions (homogeneity, isotropy, linear perturbations, etc.).

  • HYP: additional dynamical hypotheses (e.g. how JL background variables generate an effective dark component, time variation of coupling constants).

  • SPEC: convenient parameterizations for data-facing fits (e.g. \(w(a)\) ansatz, \(\mu(a,k)\) ansatz).

15.1 15.1 Minimal FRW background setup: rules linking \(a(t)\) and VP variables

15.1.1 15.1.1 LOCK: FRW kinematic skeleton (definitions only)

15.1.1.1 LOCK(FRW line element).

We introduce an FRW background as a macroscopic symmetry-reduced bookkeeping layer: \[ds^2 = -c^2 dt^2 + a(t)^2\, d\Sigma_k^2, \label{eq:part15_frw_metric}\] where \(a(t)>0\) is the scale factor and \(d\Sigma_k^2\) is the maximally symmetric spatial line element with constant curvature parameter \(k\in\{-1,0,+1\}\) (or a continuous curvature normalization if preferred).

15.1.1.2 LOCK(Hubble rate, deceleration).

\[H(t):=\frac{\dot a(t)}{a(t)}, \qquad q(t):=-\frac{\ddot a(t)\,a(t)}{\dot a(t)^2}=-\frac{\ddot a/a}{H^2}. \label{eq:part15_H_q_def}\]

15.1.1.3 LOCK(comoving vs physical volume).

For any fixed comoving region of volume \(V_{\mathrm{com}}\), the physical volume is \[V(t)=a(t)^3\,V_{\mathrm{com}}, \qquad \frac{\dot V}{V}=3H. \label{eq:part15_volume_scaling}\]

15.1.1.4 LOCK(homogeneous background averaging).

For any field \(X(x,t)\), define its FRW background as a spatial average on constant-\(t\) slices over a large comoving domain: \[\bar X(t):=\frac{1}{V_{\mathrm{com}}}\int_{V_{\mathrm{com}}} X(x,t)\,d^3x, \label{eq:part15_background_average}\] with the FRW regime declared to hold only when fluctuations around \(\bar X(t)\) are small on sufficiently large scales.

15.1.2 15.1.2 LOCK: effective cosmological components and sign conventions

15.1.2.1 LOCK(effective fluid components).

We represent the homogeneous content by effective components indexed by \(i\) with energy density \(\rho_i(t)\) and isotropic pressure \(P_i(t)\): \[T^{\mu}{}_{\nu}\big|_{i}=\mathrm{diag}\big(-\rho_i c^2,\ P_i,\ P_i,\ P_i\big) \quad\text{(background level)}. \label{eq:part15_fluid_Tmunu}\] This is a representation. In JL ontology, some components (notably “dark-energy-like”) may be stage-origin and should be treated as MAPPING rather than ontological identity.

15.1.2.2 LOCK(equation-of-state parameter).

\[w_i(t):=\frac{P_i(t)}{\rho_i(t)c^2}. \label{eq:part15_wi_def}\]

15.1.2.3 LOCK(exchange/source sign convention).

We introduce an energy-transfer rate density \(\mathcal{Q}_i(t)\) with units of energy per (volume\(\cdot\)time), and define: \[\mathcal{Q}_i>0\ \Rightarrow\ \text{component $i$ gains energy from other sectors}. \label{eq:part15_Q_sign}\] A closed total ledger requires \[\sum_i \mathcal{Q}_i(t)=0. \label{eq:part15_Q_sum_zero}\]

15.1.3 15.1.3 HYP/LOCK: connecting \(a(t)\) to VP/JL variables (mapping rules)

The FRW \(a(t)\) is LOCK as a kinematic variable once introduced, but its meaning in JL is specified by an explicit mapping rule. We provide two controlled options; one must be chosen and then locked.

15.1.3.1 Option A (HYP \(\to\) LOCK once chosen): observational redshift-matching map via lattice optics.

In PART 14 (index-drift closure), homogeneous lattice optics yields \[1+z=\frac{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}{\bar n(t_{\mathrm{em}})},\] where \(\bar n(t)\) is the homogeneous stage index. Standard FRW kinematics yields \[1+z=\frac{a(t_{\mathrm{obs}})}{a(t_{\mathrm{em}})}.\] Therefore define the redshift-matching map: \[a(t):=\frac{\bar n(t)}{\bar n(t_0)}, \qquad a(t_0)=1\ \text{(normalization)}. \label{eq:part15_a_from_n}\] This makes FRW \(a(t)\) an effective optical scale factor in JL: it need not be literal geometric expansion; it is the homogeneous signal-stretch bookkeeping variable.

15.1.3.2 Derived relation to the optical drift coefficient (DERIVE under Option A).

From PART 14, \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}=(1/c)\,d\bar n/dt\). With [eq:part15_a_from_n], \[\dot a(t)=\frac{1}{\bar n(t_0)}\dot{\bar n}(t)=\frac{c}{\bar n(t_0)}\,\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(t), \qquad H(t)=\frac{\dot a}{a}=\frac{\dot{\bar n}}{\bar n}=\frac{c\,\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}}{\bar n}. \label{eq:part15_H_kappa_relation}\] Thus, in this mapping, \(H\) is the log-derivative of the stage index rather than directly \(c\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\).

15.1.3.3 Option B (SPEC \(\to\) LOCK once chosen): stage-stiffness map.

If one prefers a mapping tied to the JL stiffness (PART 13), one may define \[a(t):=\left(\frac{\bar{\mathcal{K}}(t)}{\bar{\mathcal{K}}(t_0)}\right)^{\sigma_K}, \qquad \sigma_K\in\mathbb{R}\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK} once selected)}, \label{eq:part15_a_from_K}\] or similarly using \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)\): \[a(t):=\left(\frac{\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t)}{\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t_0)}\right)^{\sigma_{\mathrm{bg}}}. \label{eq:part15_a_from_ebg}\] These are SPEC unless justified by a gate (e.g. reproducing the observed redshift–time dilation relation).

15.1.3.4 LOCK(non-identity warning).

Even when a mapping [eq:part15_a_from_n][eq:part15_a_from_ebg] is adopted, it is a mapping, not an identity: \[a(t)\ \text{is a kinematic bookkeeping variable;} \quad \bar n,\ \bar{\mathcal{K}},\ \bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}\ \text{are stage variables.} \label{eq:part15_mapping_not_identity}\]

15.2 15.2 FRW–ledger equations: continuity, source terms, and exchange terms

15.2.1 15.2.1 DERIVE: continuity from the first-law ledger on a comoving volume

Consider component \(i\) in a comoving region of physical volume \(V(t)=a^3V_{\mathrm{com}}\).

15.2.1.1 Ledger statement (LOCK form).

Total energy of component \(i\) in the region is \(U_i=\rho_i c^2 V\). The FRW-ledger form of energy bookkeeping is: \[\frac{dU_i}{dt} = -P_i\,\frac{dV}{dt} + \mathcal{Q}_i(t)\,V(t), \label{eq:part15_first_law_with_Q}\] where \(\mathcal{Q}_i V\) is the net power injected into component \(i\) by exchange with other components (or by external sources if the total is not closed).

15.2.1.2 Derivation.

Using \(U_i=\rho_i c^2 V\), \[\frac{dU_i}{dt} = c^2\left(\dot\rho_i V + \rho_i \dot V\right).\] Insert \(\dot V/V=3H\) from [eq:part15_volume_scaling] and divide [eq:part15_first_law_with_Q] by \(V\): \[c^2\left(\dot\rho_i + 3H\rho_i\right)= -3H P_i + \mathcal{Q}_i.\] Therefore \[\boxed{ \dot\rho_i + 3H\left(\rho_i+\frac{P_i}{c^2}\right)=\frac{\mathcal{Q}_i}{c^2}. } \label{eq:part15_continuity_with_Q}\] Using \(w_i=P_i/(\rho_i c^2)\): \[\boxed{ \dot\rho_i + 3H(1+w_i)\rho_i=\frac{\mathcal{Q}_i}{c^2}. } \label{eq:part15_continuity_w_form}\]

15.2.1.3 Closed total ledger (DERIVE).

Summing [eq:part15_continuity_with_Q] over \(i\) and using [eq:part15_Q_sum_zero] gives \[\dot\rho_{\mathrm{tot}} + 3H\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right)=0, \qquad \rho_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\sum_i\rho_i,\quad P_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\sum_i P_i. \label{eq:part15_total_conservation}\]

15.2.2 15.2.2 LOCK: standard component split and exchange bookkeeping

To connect with the “dark-energy/acceleration” language, we use a standard three-component split (extendable): \[\{\text{matter-like}\ m,\quad \text{radiation-like}\ r,\quad \text{dark/stage-like}\ X\}. \label{eq:part15_three_components}\]

15.2.2.1 LOCK baseline equations of state (model defaults).

\[w_m=0, \qquad w_r=\frac{1}{3}, \qquad w_X(t)\ \text{free (to be inferred/parameterized)}. \label{eq:part15_w_defaults}\]

15.2.2.2 Exchange structure (LOCK).

Define a net transfer \(\mathcal{Q}(t)\) from the actor sector \((m+r)\) into the dark/stage-like sector \(X\) by: \[\mathcal{Q}_X=+\mathcal{Q}, \qquad \mathcal{Q}_m+\mathcal{Q}_r=-\mathcal{Q}. \label{eq:part15_exchange_def}\] If one wishes to keep radiation separately conserved (common), set \(\mathcal{Q}_r=0\) and \(\mathcal{Q}_m=-\mathcal{Q}\).

15.2.2.3 VP/JL correspondence note (non-identity).

A typical mapping is:

  • matter-like component \(m\) \(\leftrightarrow\) coarse stored-phase VP density \(\bar\rho\) (PART 05),

  • radiation-like component \(r\) \(\leftrightarrow\) coarse active-phase VP density \(\bar e_{\mathrm{a}}\),

  • dark/stage-like component \(X\) \(\leftrightarrow\) a functional of stage state \((\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}},\bar{\mathcal{K}},\ldots)\).

The mapping is model-dependent and must be locked once chosen; it is not an ontological identification.

15.2.3 15.2.3 DERIVE: effective \(w_X\) implied by \(\rho_X(t)\) and exchange \(\mathcal{Q}(t)\)

From [eq:part15_continuity_w_form] for \(X\), \[\dot\rho_X + 3H(1+w_X)\rho_X=\frac{\mathcal{Q}}{c^2}.\] Solve algebraically for \(w_X\): \[\boxed{ w_X(t) = -1+\frac{1}{3H(t)\rho_X(t)} \left(\frac{\mathcal{Q}(t)}{c^2}-\dot\rho_X(t)\right). } \label{eq:part15_wx_inferred}\] Thus, given an explicit JL rule producing \(\rho_X(t)\) and \(\mathcal{Q}(t)\) from stage variables, the effective equation-of-state is not chosen; it is implied.

15.2.3.1 Special case: no exchange.

If \(\mathcal{Q}\equiv 0\), \[w_X(t)=-1-\frac{1}{3H}\frac{d}{dt}\ln\rho_X. \label{eq:part15_wx_noQ}\] If \(\rho_X\) is (approximately) constant, then \(w_X\approx -1\).

15.3 15.3 Effective Friedmann-type equations: domain, assumptions, and role of constants

15.3.1 15.3.1 HYP: adopting a GR-form Friedmann closure for the effective background

15.3.1.1 HYP(GR-form closure).

We postulate that the effective FRW bookkeeping variable \(a(t)\) evolves under a GR-form Friedmann system driven by the effective densities/pressures: \[\begin{aligned} H^2 &= \frac{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3}\,\rho_{\mathrm{tot}} -\frac{k c^2}{a^2}, \label{eq:part15_friedmann1}\\ \frac{\ddot a}{a} &= -\frac{4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3}\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{3P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right). \label{eq:part15_friedmann2}\end{aligned}\] Here \(G_{\mathrm{eff}}>0\) is an effective coupling constant (set to Newton \(G\) in a strict GR mapping; left as a LOCK constant once chosen for JL-to-FRW mapping).

15.3.1.2 Domain (LOCK).

The system is defined for \[a(t)>0, \qquad \rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(t)\ge 0, \qquad G_{\mathrm{eff}}>0, \qquad k\in\{-1,0,+1\}\ \text{(or fixed real curvature parameter)}. \label{eq:part15_domain}\]

15.3.1.3 Role of constants.

  • \(G_{\mathrm{eff}}\): sets the conversion between effective energy density and the kinematic rate \(H\).

  • \(k\): encodes spatial curvature contribution to \(H^2\); observationally constrained via distance relations.

  • \(c\): maintains dimensional consistency; \(H\) has units \(1/\mathrm{time}\).

15.3.1.4 JL interpretation (LOCK semantic rule).

Equations [eq:part15_friedmann1][eq:part15_friedmann2] are a macroscopic closure. In JL they are treated as a MAPPING from stage/actor ledger variables to an effective FRW history; they are not forced to represent literal geometric expansion unless independently derived.

15.3.2 15.3.2 DERIVE: consistency relation and \(\dot H\) equation

Differentiate [eq:part15_friedmann1]: \[2H\dot H = \frac{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3}\dot\rho_{\mathrm{tot}} +\frac{2k c^2}{a^3}\dot a.\] Use \(\dot a=aH\) and total conservation [eq:part15_total_conservation]: \[\dot\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}=-3H\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right).\] Then \[2H\dot H = \frac{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3}\left[-3H\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right)\right] +\frac{2k c^2}{a^2}H.\] Divide by \(2H\) (assuming \(H\neq 0\); the \(H=0\) case can be treated by continuity): \[\boxed{ \dot H = -4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right) +\frac{k c^2}{a^2}. } \label{eq:part15_dotH}\] Equation [eq:part15_dotH] is the third standard relation; it is not independent given [eq:part15_friedmann1] and [eq:part15_total_conservation].

15.3.3 15.3.3 SPEC: common data-facing parameterizations for \(w_X\) and exchange

To enable concrete fits, one often parameterizes \(w_X\) and/or \(\mathcal{Q}\).

15.3.3.1 SPEC(CPL \(w\) ansatz).

\[w_X(a)=w_0+w_a(1-a), \label{eq:part15_CPL}\] with constants \((w_0,w_a)\).

15.3.3.2 SPEC(proportional exchange).

Common exchange parameterizations include \[\mathcal{Q}=3\xi H\rho_X c^2, \qquad\text{or}\qquad \mathcal{Q}=3\xi H\rho_m c^2, \label{eq:part15_Q_xi_forms}\] where \(\xi\) is a dimensionless coupling. These are purely phenomenological and must pass stability/constraint gates.

15.4 15.4 Acceleration condition (\(\ddot a>0\)) and required regimes/gate conditions

15.4.1 15.4.1 DERIVE: acceleration criterion in terms of \((\rho,P)\) and \(w_{\mathrm{eff}}\)

From [eq:part15_friedmann2], \[\ddot a>0 \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{3P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}<0. \label{eq:part15_accel_condition_rhoP}\] Define the effective equation-of-state parameter \[w_{\mathrm{eff}}:=\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}c^2}. \label{eq:part15_weff_def}\] If \(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}>0\), \[\boxed{ \ddot a>0 \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad w_{\mathrm{eff}}<-\frac{1}{3}. } \label{eq:part15_accel_condition_weff}\]

15.4.1.1 Multi-component form (DERIVE).

With \(P_i=w_i\rho_i c^2\), \[\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{3P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2} = \sum_i \rho_i(1+3w_i). \label{eq:part15_sum_condition}\] Thus, in a flat background (\(k=0\)) with \(G_{\mathrm{eff}}\) constant, acceleration requires sufficient weight in components with \(w_i<-1/3\) (e.g. \(w_X\approx -1\)).

15.4.2 15.4.2 DERIVE: deceleration parameter \(q\) in density fractions

Define density parameters \[\Omega_i:=\frac{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\rho_i}{3H^2}, \qquad \Omega_k:=-\frac{k c^2}{a^2H^2}, \qquad \sum_i \Omega_i + \Omega_k = 1. \label{eq:part15_omegas_def}\] From [eq:part15_friedmann2] and [eq:part15_H_q_def], \[q = \frac{4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3H^2}\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{3P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right) = \frac{1}{2}\sum_i \Omega_i(1+3w_i). \label{eq:part15_q_omegas}\] Thus \(q<0\) is the acceleration condition.

15.4.3 15.4.3 Required regime/gate conditions (LOCK gate list)

Acceleration in the FRW closure is meaningless unless the FRW regime and the effective-fluid representation are valid. We therefore define the following LOCK gates:

15.4.3.1 Gate A (FRW regime validity).

Background isotropy/homogeneity requires that anisotropic stresses and alignment fields average to zero at background order: \[\overline{\pi_{ij}}=0, \qquad \overline{\mathbf{Q}}=0 \quad\text{(definitions in \S\ref{sec:part15_growth_alignment})}, \label{eq:part15_gate_FRW_isotropy}\] and that perturbations are small on the averaging scale used in [eq:part15_background_average].

15.4.3.2 Gate B (nonnegativity and well-posedness).

Require component densities remain nonnegative in the operating domain: \[\rho_i(t)\ge 0\ \ \forall i, \label{eq:part15_gate_nonneg}\] unless a component is explicitly declared to be an effective signed bookkeeping density with a dedicated stability proof (rare; must be explicit).

15.4.3.3 Gate C (no-phantom unless explicitly stabilized).

As a default stability gate, require \[w_X(t)\ge -1 \label{eq:part15_gate_no_phantom}\] unless the model explicitly allows \(w_X<-1\) and provides a consistent, stable JL origin (otherwise phantom behavior is typically associated with instabilities in many effective-field realizations).

15.4.3.4 Gate D (exchange perturbativity).

Exchange should not be so large that it invalidates component identification. A minimal gate is: \[\left|\frac{\mathcal{Q}}{3H\rho_i c^2}\right|\le \epsilon_Q \quad\text{for relevant } i, \qquad 0<\epsilon_Q\ll 1\ \text{(\textsf{LOCK})}, \label{eq:part15_gate_exchange_small}\] unless the model is explicitly a strong-coupling cosmology with its own controlled regime.

15.4.3.5 Gate E (early-time consistency).

If the FRW closure is used back to early times, then the model must preserve radiation-dominated behavior and not spoil primordial-era constraints. Operationally, this is implemented later as observational gates with early-time datasets (see §15.6).

15.5 15.5 Structure growth and a large-scale alignment field: definitions and diagnostics

This subsection extends the FRW background to perturbations, introduces a large-scale alignment field consistent with VP/JL alignment moments, and provides diagnostic observables.

15.5.1 15.5.1 LOCK: linear density contrast and growth factor

15.5.1.1 LOCK(matter density contrast).

Let \(\rho_m(x,t)=\bar\rho_m(t)\big(1+\delta_m(x,t)\big)\) define the matter density contrast \(\delta_m\).

15.5.1.2 LOCK(growth factor and growth rate).

In the linear regime, \(\delta_m(x,t)=D(t)\,\delta_m(x,t_\ast)\) for each Fourier mode (in standard GR and many near-GR regimes). Define: \[D(a):=\text{linear growth factor}, \qquad f(a):=\frac{d\ln D}{d\ln a}. \label{eq:part15_D_f_def}\] A common observational combination is \(f\sigma_8(a)\).

15.5.2 15.5.2 DERIVE: standard linear growth equation (baseline GR-form)

In the Newtonian subhorizon limit (baseline), linearized continuity+Euler+Poisson yield: \[\boxed{ \ddot\delta_m + 2H\dot\delta_m - 4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\bar\rho_m\,\delta_m = 0 \qquad\text{(baseline growth, $k=0$)}. } \label{eq:part15_growth_baseline}\] In terms of \(a\) as the independent variable, using \(\frac{d}{dt}=aH\frac{d}{da}\), one may rewrite [eq:part15_growth_baseline] as an ODE for \(D(a)\).

15.5.3 15.5.3 HYP: modified-growth closure functions \(\mu(a,k)\) and \(\Sigma(a,k)\)

VP/JL deficit physics and alignment can modify the relation between matter perturbations and potentials. A controlled, data-facing way to encode this is via two functions \(\mu\) and \(\Sigma\):

15.5.3.1 HYP(modified Poisson and lensing relations).

In Fourier space (comoving wave number \(k\)), define Newtonian potential \(\Psi\) (driving motion) and curvature potential \(\Phi\) (entering light deflection). Postulate: \[\begin{aligned} k^2 \Psi &= -4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}} a^2\,\mu(a,k)\,\bar\rho_m\,\delta_m, \label{eq:part15_mu_def}\\ k^2 (\Phi+\Psi) &= -8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}} a^2\,\Sigma(a,k)\,\bar\rho_m\,\delta_m. \label{eq:part15_Sigma_def}\end{aligned}\] Then the gravitational slip parameter is \[\eta_{\mathrm{slip}}(a,k):=\frac{\Phi}{\Psi} = \frac{2\Sigma}{\mu}-1. \label{eq:part15_slip}\]

15.5.3.2 Modified linear growth (DERIVE under [eq:part15_mu_def]).

Replacing \(G_{\mathrm{eff}}\to G_{\mathrm{eff}}\mu(a,k)\) in the source term gives \[\boxed{ \ddot\delta_m + 2H\dot\delta_m - 4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\,\mu(a,k)\,\bar\rho_m\,\delta_m = 0. } \label{eq:part15_growth_modified}\]

15.5.4 15.5.4 LOCK/HYP: introducing a large-scale alignment field

We introduce a large-scale alignment field as a coarse-grained remnant of VP alignment moments (PART 05–07), but constrained to preserve FRW isotropy at background order.

15.5.4.1 LOCK(alignment tensor).

Let \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}(x,t)\) be a unit vector field representing a local preferred axis, and \(\alpha(x,t)\in[0,1]\) an alignment strength. Define the traceless alignment tensor: \[\mathbf{Q}(x,t):=\alpha(x,t)\left(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\otimes\hat{\mathbf{k}}-\frac{1}{3}\mathbf{I}\right), \qquad \mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{Q})=0. \label{eq:part15_Q_def}\] FRW background isotropy requires \(\overline{\mathbf{Q}}=0\) (Gate A).

15.5.4.2 HYP(alignment affects \(\mu,\Sigma\) at perturbation order).

A minimal coupling is to let \(\mu\) and/or \(\Sigma\) depend on \(\mathbf{Q}\) through its scalar invariants (e.g. \(\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{Q}^2)\)) or direction relative to the Fourier mode \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}_{\mathrm{mode}}\): \[\mu(a,k,\hat{\mathbf{k}}_{\mathrm{mode}}) = \mu_0(a,k)\left[1+\mu_Q(a,k)\,\mathrm{tr}(\mathbf{Q}^2)\right] \quad\text{or}\quad \mu=\mu_0\left[1+\tilde\mu_Q\,\hat{\mathbf{k}}_{\mathrm{mode}}\cdot\mathbf{Q}\,\hat{\mathbf{k}}_{\mathrm{mode}}\right], \label{eq:part15_mu_Q_coupling}\] with analogous forms for \(\Sigma\). These are HYP/SPEC choices that must be gated by isotropy and lensing constraints.

15.5.4.3 HYP(minimal evolution for the alignment amplitude).

A minimal relaxation-with-source equation for the coarse alignment amplitude is: \[\dot\alpha + (3H+\lambda_\alpha)\alpha = S_\alpha(t), \qquad \lambda_\alpha\ge 0, \label{eq:part15_alpha_evolution}\] where \(\lambda_\alpha\) is an effective mixing/relaxation rate (related to mixing parameters in earlier Parts), and \(S_\alpha\) is a source (e.g. tidal-field-driven). The precise \(S_\alpha\) is model-specific.

15.5.5 15.5.5 Diagnostics for growth and alignment (LOCK outputs)

We define a minimal set of diagnostics that the model must be able to compute:

15.5.5.1 Growth diagnostics.

15.5.5.2 Alignment diagnostics.

  • Alignment amplitude statistics: \(\langle \alpha\rangle\), \(\langle \alpha^2\rangle\) on large scales.

  • Power spectrum (if modeled stochastically): \(P_\alpha(k)\) or \(P_Q(k)\).

  • Cross-correlation with matter: \(P_{\delta\alpha}(k)\) or \(P_{\delta Q}(k)\).

  • Slip/lensing diagnostics: \(\eta_{\mathrm{slip}}(a,k)\) from [eq:part15_slip].

15.6 15.6 Observation gates: joint PASS/FAIL for SN/BAO/weak lensing and distance–growth coherence

This subsection specifies a joint gate suite. The guiding principle is coherence: the same parameter set must fit distance indicators (expansion history) and growth indicators (structure formation) simultaneously.

15.6.1 15.6.1 LOCK: distance relations computed from \(H(z)\)

Given \(H(z)\) from the FRW system, define the comoving radial distance \[\chi(z):=\int_0^z \frac{c\,dz'}{H(z')}. \label{eq:part15_chi_def}\] Define the transverse comoving distance (curvature dependent) via \[D_M(z):= \begin{cases} \frac{c}{H_0}\frac{1}{\sqrt{\Omega_k}}\sinh\!\big(\sqrt{\Omega_k}\,H_0\chi/c\big), & \Omega_k>0,\\[4pt] \chi, & \Omega_k=0,\\[4pt] \frac{c}{H_0}\frac{1}{\sqrt{-\Omega_k}}\sin\!\big(\sqrt{-\Omega_k}\,H_0\chi/c\big), & \Omega_k<0, \end{cases} \label{eq:part15_DM_def}\] where \(\Omega_k\) is defined in [eq:part15_omegas_def] and \(H_0:=H(z=0)\).

Then the angular diameter and luminosity distances (standard reciprocity; LOCK unless the model includes opacity violating it) are: \[d_A(z)=\frac{D_M(z)}{1+z}, \qquad d_L(z)=(1+z)\,D_M(z). \label{eq:part15_dA_dL}\] If the lattice-optics module introduces photon nonconservation/opacity (PART 14), then [eq:part15_dA_dL] must be replaced by a declared modified mapping; otherwise the model risks inconsistency across Parts.

15.6.2 15.6.2 Gate set SNe: luminosity-distance fit

15.6.2.1 SN observable (LOCK).

Distance modulus: \[\mu(z)=5\log_{10}\!\left(\frac{d_L(z)}{10\,\mathrm{pc}}\right). \label{eq:part15_mu_SN}\]

15.6.2.2 Gate SN (PASS/FAIL).

Given SN data \(\{z_j,\mu^{\mathrm{obs}}_j,\sigma_j\}\) and a model prediction \(\mu(z;\theta)\), define a residual statistic (e.g. chi-square) \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{SN}}(\theta):=\sum_j \frac{(\mu(z_j;\theta)-\mu^{\mathrm{obs}}_j)^2}{\sigma_j^2}. \label{eq:part15_chi2_SN}\] LOCK a threshold \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{SN}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{SN,max}}\) for PASS.

15.6.3 15.6.3 Gate set BAO: geometric distances and \(H(z)\) constraints

BAO analyses constrain combinations of \(D_M(z)\) and \(H(z)\) relative to a standard ruler scale \(r_d\) (drag scale). In a model-agnostic gate, treat \(r_d\) as an external calibrated constant (or a model-derived quantity if early-time physics is included).

15.6.3.1 BAO summary observables (LOCK forms).

Typical BAO constraints use \[\frac{D_M(z)}{r_d}, \qquad H(z)\,r_d, \qquad D_V(z):=\left[(1+z)^2 d_A(z)^2\,\frac{cz}{H(z)}\right]^{1/3}. \label{eq:part15_BAO_defs}\]

15.6.3.2 Gate BAO.

Define \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{BAO}}(\theta)\) analogously to [eq:part15_chi2_SN] using the BAO covariance. PASS requires \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{BAO}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{BAO,max}}\).

15.6.4 15.6.4 Gate set WL: weak-lensing and lensing-potential consistency

Weak lensing is sensitive to the lensing potential \((\Phi+\Psi)\) and thus to \(\Sigma(a,k)\) in [eq:part15_Sigma_def].

15.6.4.1 LOCK(lensing sensitivity).

At linear order, the lensing convergence/shear power spectra depend on \(D_M(z)\) and the matter power spectrum multiplied by \(\Sigma^2(a,k)\) (schematically).

15.6.4.2 Gate WL.

Given weak-lensing two-point data (cosmic shear) and its covariance, define \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{WL}}(\theta)\) for the predicted lensing spectra computed with:

PASS requires \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{WL}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{WL,max}}\).

15.6.5 15.6.5 Gate set GR: growth-rate (RSD/cluster) constraints

Redshift-space distortions and related probes constrain \(f\sigma_8(z)\).

15.6.5.1 Gate GR.

Compute \(f\sigma_8(z)\) from \(D(a)\) and compare with observed points to obtain \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{GR}}(\theta)\). PASS requires \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{GR}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{GR,max}}\).

15.6.6 15.6.6 Joint coherence gate: distance–growth consistency (the decisive PASS/FAIL)

15.6.6.1 LOCK(single parameter set).

Let the cosmology parameter vector be \[\theta_{\mathrm{cos}}=\{H_0,\Omega_{m0},\Omega_{r0},\Omega_{X0},k,\ w_X(\cdot)\ \text{or}\ \rho_X(\cdot),\ \mathcal{Q}(\cdot),\ \mu(\cdot),\Sigma(\cdot)\ \text{(if used)},\ \text{nuisance}\}.\] A LOCK requirement is that one \(\theta_{\mathrm{cos}}\) is used across all gates.

15.6.6.2 Joint statistic.

\[\chi^2_{\mathrm{joint}}(\theta) := \chi^2_{\mathrm{SN}}+\chi^2_{\mathrm{BAO}}+\chi^2_{\mathrm{WL}}+\chi^2_{\mathrm{GR}} +\chi^2_{\mathrm{priors}}, \label{eq:part15_joint_chi2}\] where \(\chi^2_{\mathrm{priors}}\) includes any locked priors (e.g. nonnegativity, Gate C, early-time consistency if invoked).

15.6.6.3 PASS/FAIL rule (LOCK).

PASS requires: \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{SN}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{SN,max}},\ \chi^2_{\mathrm{BAO}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{BAO,max}},\ \chi^2_{\mathrm{WL}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{WL,max}},\ \chi^2_{\mathrm{GR}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{GR,max}}, \quad\text{and}\quad \chi^2_{\mathrm{joint}}\le \chi^2_{\mathrm{joint,max}}. \label{eq:part15_pass_fail_joint}\] Any single violation triggers FAIL with a labeled reason.

15.6.6.4 Interpretation.

Distance-only fits can be achieved by tuning \(w_X(a)\), but growth data constrain \(\mu(a,k)\) and the combination of \(\rho_m\) and potentials. The joint gate therefore discriminates:

  • expansion-history explanations (via \(w_X\) and \(\mathcal{Q}\)),

  • modified-gravity/deficit explanations (via \(\mu,\Sigma\)),

  • and alignment-induced anisotropic/scale-dependent effects (via \(\mathbf{Q}\) couplings).

15.6.6.5 End of Part 15.

This Part provided: (i) a minimal FRW skeleton and explicit JL\(\to\)FRW mapping options for \(a(t)\), (ii) FRW-ledger continuity equations with exchange, (iii) a Friedmann-type closure with clear domain/assumptions and derived consistency relations, (iv) a precise acceleration criterion and regime gates, (v) a perturbation-level structure-growth system with optional alignment-field modifications, and (vi) a joint SN/BAO/WL/growth PASS/FAIL framework enforcing distance–growth coherence under a single parameter set.

16 PART 16. The Early Universe: Horizon, Asymmetry, Perturbations, CMB/BBN Gates (Output 16)

This Part specifies a controlled early-universe module for the VP/Jammed-Lattice (JL) framework. The goals are: (i) to declare plausible initial-condition scenarios (lattice formation/jamming onset/phase transition) and the exact variables that must be initialized, (ii) to provide an alternative to the horizon problem using the previously defined transport/throughput/choking–saturation logic, (iii) to propose (optionally) a minimal baryogenesis-like mechanism in a gate-based language, (iv) to define perturbation generation/propagation with a complete set of spectral objects and damping operators, (v) to write CMB signatures (TT/TE/EE, polarization, ISW, lensing, and spectral-distortion gates), (vi) to state BBN coherence gates linking the expansion (or effective-FRW) history to primordial yields.

16.0.0.1 Claim tiers.

  • LOCK: definitions, sign conventions, regime declarations, and PASS/FAIL gate definitions.

  • DERIVE: results following from LOCK plus explicitly declared approximations (e.g. homogeneity, linear perturbations).

  • HYP: additional dynamical hypotheses (e.g. time dependence of throughput speed, jamming critical dynamics, CP-bias mechanisms).

  • SPEC: simple parameterizations for data-facing fits (e.g. \(P_{\mathcal{R}}\) as a power law, phenomenological washout).

16.0.0.2 Unit conventions.

Unless explicitly stated, we keep \(c\) in the cosmological kinematics and horizons. For early-universe microphysics (weak interaction rates, thermal densities) we may temporarily use natural units \(\hbar=c=k_B=1\) inside a subsection and then reinsert \(c\) by dimensional analysis; the gate definitions are unit-agnostic once one is consistent.

16.1 16.1 Initial-condition scenarios (lattice formation / jamming onset / phase transition)

16.1.1 16.1.1 LOCK: minimal early-universe state vector

To make the early module reproducible, we define the minimal background+perturbation state vector at an initialization time \(t_\ast\) (chosen after the onset event that makes the effective description valid): \[\mathcal{S}_\ast := \left\{ a_\ast,\ H_\ast,\ k;\ \rho_{m\ast},\ \rho_{r\ast},\ \rho_{X\ast};\ \theta_{\mathrm{opt}\ast};\ \theta_{\mathrm{grav}\ast};\ \mathcal{P}_\ast \right\}. \label{eq:part16_state_vector}\] Here:

  • \(a_\ast:=a(t_\ast)\), \(H_\ast:=H(t_\ast)\) are the effective-FRW variables (PART 15).

  • \(k\) is the FRW curvature parameter (fixed once chosen).

  • \(\rho_{m},\rho_{r},\rho_X\) are effective matter-like, radiation-like, and dark/stage-like energy densities (PART 15).

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{opt}}\) is the lattice-optics parameter set (PART 14), e.g. \(\{\bar n(t),\delta n,\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}},\alpha_{\mathrm{ext}},\ldots\}\) depending on the chosen closure.

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{grav}}\) collects gravitational/deficit modification functions if used, e.g. \(\mu(a,k)\) and \(\Sigma(a,k)\) (PART 15), and any alignment couplings.

  • \(\mathcal{P}_\ast\) is the perturbation initialization package: primordial spectra, phases, correlation length, and isocurvature fractions (defined in §16.4).

16.1.1.1 LOCK well-posedness constraints.

At \(t=t_\ast\) we require: \[a_\ast>0,\qquad \rho_{i\ast}\ge 0\ \ (\forall i),\qquad \sum_i \mathcal{Q}_i(t_\ast)=0\ \ \text{if total ledger is declared closed}. \label{eq:part16_wellposed}\] If a component is declared as an effective signed bookkeeping density, this must be explicitly stated and accompanied by a stability gate; otherwise negativity is a FAIL.

16.1.2 16.1.2 LOCK: a jamming order parameter and onset time

We introduce a jamming order parameter \(J(t)\in[0,1]\) to label the stage regime: \[J(t)=0:\ \text{unjammed/fluid-like stage (high mobility)},\qquad J(t)=1:\ \text{jammed stage (rigid lattice-like)}. \label{eq:part16_J_def}\] A jamming onset time \(t_J\) is defined by a threshold condition, e.g. \[J(t_J)=J_c,\qquad 0<J_c<1\ \ \text{(\textsf{LOCK} once chosen)}. \label{eq:part16_jamming_onset}\]

16.1.2.1 HYP: minimal jamming kinetics (optional).

A minimal relaxational model is \[\dot J = \Gamma_J(t)\,(1-J) - \mu_J(t)\,J, \qquad \Gamma_J,\mu_J\ge 0, \label{eq:part16_J_kinetics}\] with \(\Gamma_J\) an “onset” rate and \(\mu_J\) an “unjamming” rate; the onset scenario specifies their functional forms.

16.1.3 16.1.3 Initial-condition scenarios (HYP menu)

We classify three canonical scenario families. One must be selected (or a hybrid explicitly defined) for a concrete model.

16.1.3.1 Scenario S1 (unjammed \(\to\) jammed formation).

  • Pre-onset (\(t<t_J\)): \(J\approx 0\) and the stage supports extremely efficient mixing/transport (large throughput speed, large effective diffusion coefficient, or both).

  • Onset (\(t\approx t_J\)): a rapid transition raises \(J\) toward 1, freezing large-scale correlations and defining the effective-FRW variables and the VP coarse-grained phases.

  • Post-onset (\(t>t_J\)): the standard VP/JL effective description operates (Parts 4–15 apply).

This scenario is designed to address the horizon problem by pre-onset equilibration plus post-onset freezing.

16.1.3.2 Scenario S2 (pre-jammed with a background phase transition).

  • Stage is jammed already (\(J\approx 1\)) at the earliest effective times.

  • A phase transition in background variables (e.g. \(\bar n(t)\) or \(\bar{\mathcal{K}}(t)\)) changes the macroscopic mapping to FRW and/or changes transport coefficients (e.g. \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)).

This scenario shifts the “initial-condition problem” into a controlled transition in stage constitutive parameters.

16.1.3.3 Scenario S3 (reactor-driven onset).

  • A very early “reactor” epoch (in the sense of Parts 8 and 10) drives rapid exchange between actor energy and stage background (e.g. \(\mathcal{Q}\neq 0\) in PART 15).

  • The exchange has a stable attractor that erases sensitivity to micro-initial conditions.

This scenario addresses fine-tuning by dynamical attractors in the ledger equations.

16.1.4 16.1.4 LOCK: mapping micro-stage variables to effective FRW initial data

We record a minimal mapping template (to be instantiated by the model) from VP/JL variables to effective FRW densities: \[\rho_m(t)=\mathcal{M}_m[\bar\rho(t),v_\ast,\ldots],\qquad \rho_r(t)=\mathcal{M}_r[\bar e_a(t),v_\ast,\ldots],\qquad \rho_X(t)=\mathcal{M}_X[\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t),\bar{\mathcal{K}}(t),\ldots]. \label{eq:part16_M_maps}\] Here \(v_\ast\) is the reference volume (PART 04). The explicit forms \(\mathcal{M}_i\) are LOCK once chosen; they must obey: \[\rho_i\ge 0,\qquad [\rho_i]=\mathrm{energy}/\mathrm{volume}. \label{eq:part16_map_constraints}\]

16.1.4.1 LOCK: effective scale factor mapping choice.

PART 15 offers mapping options; the early-universe module must pick one. In particular, if the lattice-optics (index-drift) mapping is used: \[a(t)=\frac{\bar n(t)}{\bar n(t_0)},\qquad H(t)=\frac{\dot{\bar n}}{\bar n}. \label{eq:part16_a_H_mapping}\] This makes early-universe claims about \(a(t)\) equivalent to claims about \(\bar n(t)\).

16.1.4.2 LOCK: temperature proxy (for BBN and recombination interfaces).

To interface with BBN/CMB computations, we define an effective radiation temperature \(T(t)\) by: \[\rho_r(t)=\frac{\pi^2}{30}\,g_\ast(T)\,T(t)^4 \quad\text{(natural units for this relation)}, \label{eq:part16_rho_T_def}\] where \(g_\ast(T)\) is the effective relativistic degrees-of-freedom function (treated as standard microphysics input, unless the model modifies it). This is a LOCK definition of \(T\) as a proxy variable.

16.2 16.2 Alternative to the horizon problem: transport/throughput/choking–saturation mechanisms

16.2.1 16.2.1 LOCK: multiple horizons (photon, stage, diffusive)

We distinguish the relevant causal/equilibration horizons:

16.2.1.1 (H1) Photon (signal) horizon.

For signals traveling at speed \(v_\gamma(t)\) (typically \(c\) in standard FRW, or \(c/n\) in a medium), define the comoving horizon: \[r_\gamma(t):=\int_{t_{\mathrm{min}}}^{t}\frac{v_\gamma(t')}{a(t')}\,dt'. \label{eq:part16_r_gamma}\]

16.2.1.2 (H2) Stage-transport horizon.

For equilibration of a stage/background variable (e.g. \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)) with characteristic transport speed \(v_{\mathrm{st}}(t)\), define: \[r_{\mathrm{st}}(t):=\int_{t_{\mathrm{min}}}^{t}\frac{v_{\mathrm{st}}(t')}{a(t')}\,dt'. \label{eq:part16_r_stage}\]

16.2.1.3 (H3) Diffusive horizon (mixing-dominated).

If the equilibration is dominated by diffusion with physical diffusion coefficient \(D_{\mathrm{st}}(t)\), then the mean-square comoving displacement is \[\langle \Delta x^2\rangle(t) = 2\int_{t_{\mathrm{min}}}^{t}\frac{D_{\mathrm{st}}(t')}{a(t')^2}\,dt', \qquad r_{\mathrm{diff}}(t):=\sqrt{\langle \Delta x^2\rangle(t)}. \label{eq:part16_r_diff}\]

Here \(t_{\mathrm{min}}\) is the earliest time at which the effective description is meaningful. In scenario S1, \(t_{\mathrm{min}}<t_J\) may exist in a pre-onset regime; in S2/S3, \(t_{\mathrm{min}}\) is the earliest jammed/defined epoch.

16.2.2 16.2.2 LOCK: throughput-limited transport speed from flux bounds

Parts 06–08 introduced flux \(S\) and throughput limits. For any transported density \(e\) with flux \(S\), the advective transport speed is \(v\sim |S|/e\). Therefore, if the model declares a flux bound \[|S|\le S_{\max}(e,\ldots), \label{eq:part16_flux_bound}\] then a LOCK transport-speed bound follows: \[v_{\mathrm{st}}(t)\le v_{\max}(t):=\frac{S_{\max}(t)}{e(t)}. \label{eq:part16_vmax_def}\] A particularly simple throughput closure is: \[|S|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)\,e, \qquad\Longrightarrow\qquad v_{\mathrm{st}}(t)\le c_{\mathrm{th}}(t), \label{eq:part16_throughput_closure}\] where \(c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)\) is an emergent throughput speed (distinct from the observed low-energy light speed \(c\) unless locked equal).

16.2.2.1 HYP: jamming-controlled throughput speed.

To solve the horizon problem, one may posit that early unjammed stages have much larger throughput: \[c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)=c\;g(J(t)), \qquad g(J)\gg 1\ \text{for}\ J\approx 0,\quad g(J)\approx 1\ \text{for}\ J\approx 1, \label{eq:part16_cth_J}\] with a specific function \(g\) locked once adopted.

16.2.3 16.2.3 DERIVE: a horizon-solution condition as an inequality

Let \(t_\ast\) denote the last-scattering (or more generally decoupling) time relevant for the CMB, and let \(\chi_\ast\) be the comoving distance to that surface in the effective-FRW history: \[\chi_\ast:=\int_{t_\ast}^{t_0}\frac{c}{a(t)}\,dt \quad\text{(or in redshift form }\chi_\ast=\int_0^{z_\ast} \frac{c\,dz}{H(z)}\text{)}. \label{eq:part16_chi_star}\] Large-angle CMB correlations correspond to comoving scales \(\sim \chi_\ast\) (order unity fraction of it). Therefore a minimal stage-equilibration condition to avoid a horizon problem is: \[r_{\mathrm{eq}}(t_\ast)\ \gtrsim\ \chi_\ast, \label{eq:part16_horizon_gate_condition}\] where \(r_{\mathrm{eq}}\) is the relevant equilibration horizon (choose \(r_{\mathrm{st}}\) for advective transport or \(r_{\mathrm{diff}}\) for diffusive mixing).

16.2.3.1 Interpretation.

If the stage (or the actor–stage exchange dynamics) can equilibrate the relevant thermodynamic/optical variables over \(\sim \chi_\ast\) before \(t_\ast\), then the observed near-uniformity is not paradoxical.

16.2.4 16.2.4 Mechanism class M1: enlarged early transport speed (variable-throughput causal cone)

Assume an early epoch where \(c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)\gg c\) (e.g. \(J\approx 0\) in Scenario S1). Then \[r_{\mathrm{st}}(t_\ast)\ge \int_{t_{\mathrm{min}}}^{t_\ast}\frac{c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)}{a(t)}\,dt. \label{eq:part16_r_stage_cth}\] If \(c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)\) scales sufficiently strongly at early times, the integral can be enhanced.

16.2.4.1 DERIVE: power-law illustration (no numerical commitment).

Suppose for \(t\in(t_{\mathrm{min}},t_J)\) one has \[a(t)\propto t^{p},\qquad c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)\propto a(t)^{-s}, \label{eq:part16_powerlaw_ansatz}\] with \(p>0\) and \(s\ge 0\). Then \(c_{\mathrm{th}}/a\propto a^{-(1+s)}\propto t^{-p(1+s)}\) and \[\int^{t_J}\frac{c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)}{a(t)}dt\ \propto\ \int^{t_J} t^{-p(1+s)}\,dt, \label{eq:part16_integral_scaling}\] which is strongly enhanced for \(p(1+s)\ge 1\) (log-divergent at equality and power-divergent if larger). The LOCK gate for the model is to show that the adopted \(a(t)\) and \(c_{\mathrm{th}}(t)\) satisfy [eq:part16_horizon_gate_condition] while also passing BBN/CMB constraints below.

16.2.5 16.2.5 Mechanism class M2: diffusion/mixing dominated equilibration (large \(D_{\mathrm{st}}\))

If the early stage is mixing-dominated (large mixing parameter \(\lambda\) in Parts 05–07), then a diffusive description is appropriate. The comoving diffusion horizon is [eq:part16_r_diff].

16.2.5.1 HYP: jamming-controlled diffusion coefficient.

A minimal choice is \[D_{\mathrm{st}}(t)=D_0\,h(J(t)), \qquad h(J)\gg 1\ \text{for}\ J\approx 0,\quad h(J)\approx 1\ \text{for}\ J\approx 1, \label{eq:part16_D_J}\] with \(D_0\) setting the late-time scale (locked once adopted).

16.2.5.2 LOCK diffusion horizon gate.

The diffusion mechanism solves the horizon problem if \[r_{\mathrm{diff}}(t_\ast)=\sqrt{2\int_{t_{\mathrm{min}}}^{t_\ast}\frac{D_{\mathrm{st}}(t')}{a(t')^2}\,dt'}\ \gtrsim\ \chi_\ast. \label{eq:part16_diff_gate}\]

16.2.6 16.2.6 Mechanism class M3: choking–saturation attractor (initial-condition erasure)

Parts 08 and 10 introduced saturation and choking. An early epoch with strong exchange and saturation can produce a rapid approach to a spatially uniform attractor.

16.2.6.1 HYP: homogeneous attractor for a background variable.

Let \(E(t)\) denote a coarse background energy-like variable (e.g. \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) or an effective \(X\)-sector density). Consider a saturating source–sink: \[\dot E = \Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}(E)\ -\ \mu_{\mathrm{cv}}\,E, \qquad \Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}(E)\xrightarrow[E\to\infty]{}\Gamma_\infty, \qquad \mu_{\mathrm{cv}}>0, \label{eq:part16_attractor_ODE}\] where \(\mu_{\mathrm{cv}}\) is a conversion/damping coefficient (notation separated from the modified-gravity \(\mu(a,k)\) in PART 15).

If \(\Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}\) is monotone increasing and saturating, the fixed point is \[E_\ast:\quad \Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}(E_\ast)=\mu_{\mathrm{cv}}E_\ast, \label{eq:part16_fixed_point}\] and linear stability requires \[\left.\frac{d}{dE}\big(\Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}(E)-\mu_{\mathrm{cv}}E\big)\right|_{E_\ast} = \Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}'(E_\ast)-\mu_{\mathrm{cv}}<0. \label{eq:part16_stability_condition}\] If stable, then \(E(t)\) rapidly approaches \(E_\ast\) largely independent of initial \(E(t_{\mathrm{min}})\).

16.2.6.2 Spatial homogenization.

If in addition transport is fast (M1 or M2), spatial variations \(\delta E\) are damped; the attractor provides amplitude homogenization, while transport provides spatial homogenization.

16.2.6.3 LOCK: attractor gate.

If the model invokes attractor erasure, it must demonstrate: \[\tau_{\mathrm{relax}} \ll t_\ast, \qquad \tau_{\mathrm{relax}}^{-1}:=\mu_{\mathrm{cv}}-\Gamma_{\mathrm{sat}}'(E_\ast)>0, \label{eq:part16_attractor_gate}\] and simultaneously satisfy BBN/CMB energy-injection and perturbation constraints (below).

16.3 16.3 Matter–antimatter asymmetry (optional): a gate-based minimal model

This subsection is optional (“if possible”). It provides a minimal framework to generate a nonzero matter–antimatter asymmetry using gate-biased conversion rates. It does not claim uniqueness; it defines a falsifiable structure.

16.3.1 16.3.1 LOCK: asymmetry variables and bookkeeping

Let \(n_+(t)\) and \(n_-(t)\) denote number densities of two conjugate actor populations (interpretable as matter vs antimatter, or two CP-conjugate species). Define: \[n_B(t):=n_+(t)-n_-(t), \qquad n_\Sigma(t):=n_+(t)+n_-(t). \label{eq:part16_nB_def}\] Define a photon (or radiation quanta) number density proxy \(n_\gamma(t)\) and the asymmetry yield: \[\eta_B(t):=\frac{n_B(t)}{n_\gamma(t)}. \label{eq:part16_etaB_def}\] In adiabatic expansion with conserved photon number, \(n_\gamma\propto a^{-3}\); if lattice optics modifies photon number, this must be consistently included (see Part 14 opacity separation).

16.3.2 16.3.2 LOCK: Sakharov-like gate conditions in the JL language

To obtain \(\eta_B\neq 0\) from a symmetric initial condition, three structural requirements (gates) are needed:

16.3.2.1 Gate B1 (asymmetry-violating interaction).

There must exist a process that changes \(n_B\), i.e. a conversion channel with \(n_+\leftrightarrow\) (stage) and \(n_-\leftrightarrow\) (stage), or \(+\leftrightarrow -\) transitions, such that \[\frac{d}{dt}\left(a^3 n_B\right)\neq 0 \label{eq:part16_gate_B1}\] in the relevant epoch.

16.3.2.2 Gate B2 (CP-bias).

Rates for conjugate processes must differ: \[\Gamma_+(t)\neq \Gamma_-(t). \label{eq:part16_gate_B2}\]

16.3.2.3 Gate B3 (out-of-equilibrium / gate switching).

There must be a departure from equilibrium, implemented here as gate switching (e.g. choking/saturation thresholds turning on/off conversion) such that detailed balance does not enforce \(n_B\to 0\).

These are LOCK structural gates; the micro-origin is HYP.

16.3.3 16.3.3 HYP: CP-biased conversion through an alignment-dependent gate

A minimal CP-bias can be implemented by letting conversion rates depend on an alignment pseudoscalar built from a large-scale alignment field \(\mathbf{Q}\) (PART 15) and a chiral/pseudoscalar stage quantity \(\Pi(t)\) (model-defined). Define a dimensionless CP-bias parameter: \[\epsilon_{\mathrm{CP}}(t):=\frac{\Gamma_+(t)-\Gamma_-(t)}{\Gamma_+(t)+\Gamma_-(t)}, \qquad |\epsilon_{\mathrm{CP}}|\le 1. \label{eq:part16_epsilonCP_def}\] A simple gate-biased rate model is \[\Gamma_\pm(t)=\Gamma(t)\left(1\pm \epsilon_{\mathrm{CP}}(t)\right)\,\Theta\!\big(G(t)\big), \label{eq:part16_Gamma_pm}\] where \(\Theta(G)\) is a gate function (0/1 or smooth step) determined by a gate variable \(G(t)\) (e.g. saturation level, choking threshold, or jamming order parameter), and \(\Gamma(t)\ge 0\) is the base conversion rate.

16.3.4 16.3.4 DERIVE: Boltzmann-type evolution and freeze-out yield

Assume number densities satisfy: \[\dot n_\pm + 3H n_\pm = -\Gamma_\pm\left(n_\pm-n_\pm^{\mathrm{eq}}\right) - W(t)\,\left(n_\pm-n_\mp\right), \label{eq:part16_boltzmann_pm}\] where \(n_\pm^{\mathrm{eq}}\) are equilibrium densities (possibly equal), and \(W(t)\ge 0\) is a washout rate that tends to erase asymmetry.

Subtract the \(-\) equation from the \(+\) equation to obtain an equation for \(n_B\): \[\dot n_B + 3H n_B = -\Gamma_+\left(n_+-n_+^{\mathrm{eq}}\right)+\Gamma_-\left(n_--n_-^{\mathrm{eq}}\right)-2W\,n_B. \label{eq:part16_nB_evolution_exact}\] If \(n_+^{\mathrm{eq}}=n_-^{\mathrm{eq}}=:n^{\mathrm{eq}}\) and define \(n_\Sigma\) as in [eq:part16_nB_def], then to leading order in small \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{CP}}\) one can write: \[\dot n_B + 3H n_B \approx \epsilon_{\mathrm{CP}}\,\Gamma\,\Theta(G)\,\left(n_\Sigma-2n^{\mathrm{eq}}\right) - 2W\,n_B. \label{eq:part16_nB_source_washout}\]

16.3.4.1 Freeze-out approximation.

If the gate switches off at \(t=t_{\mathrm{off}}\) (i.e. \(\Theta(G)\to 0\)) and washout becomes negligible after that, then \(a^3 n_B\) becomes conserved. The final yield is approximately: \[a(t)^3 n_B(t)\Big|_{t\to \infty} \approx \int_{t_{\mathrm{min}}}^{t_{\mathrm{off}}} a(t')^3\, \epsilon_{\mathrm{CP}}(t')\,\Gamma(t')\,\Theta(G(t'))\, \left(n_\Sigma(t')-2n^{\mathrm{eq}}(t')\right)\,dt', \label{eq:part16_nB_integral_solution}\] modulated by washout if \(W\) is non-negligible (include factor \(\exp(-2\int W dt)\) in the integrand).

16.3.4.2 LOCK: baryogenesis gates.

If the model includes this module, it must satisfy:

  • Gate B-Obs: \(\eta_B\) predicted by [eq:part16_etaB_def] and [eq:part16_nB_integral_solution] lies in the observational band (external LOCK interval).

  • Gate B-Washout: washout does not erase the produced asymmetry: \(\int_{t_{\mathrm{prod}}}^{t_{\mathrm{off}}} W dt \lesssim O(1)\) (precise threshold locked by the model).

  • Gate B-BBN/CMB: the implied baryon density \(\Omega_{b}\) (or \(\rho_{b}\)) is consistent with BBN and CMB constraints (see §16.6 and §16.5).

16.4 16.4 Perturbations: generation and propagation (spectrum, correlation length, damping mechanisms)

16.4.1 16.4.1 LOCK: metric perturbations and gauge-invariant spectra

We use the Newtonian gauge for scalar perturbations: \[ds^2 = -(1+2\Psi)c^2 dt^2 + a(t)^2(1-2\Phi)\,d\Sigma_k^2. \label{eq:part16_newtonian_gauge}\] Define the comoving curvature perturbation \(\mathcal{R}\) (gauge-invariant). Its Fourier modes \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathbf{k}}\) define the primordial power spectrum: \[\left\langle \mathcal{R}_{\mathbf{k}}\,\mathcal{R}_{\mathbf{k}'}\right\rangle = (2\pi)^3\,\delta^{(3)}(\mathbf{k}+\mathbf{k}')\,P_{\mathcal{R}}(k), \qquad k:=\|\mathbf{k}\|. \label{eq:part16_PR_def}\] The dimensionless spectrum is \[\Delta_{\mathcal{R}}^2(k):=\frac{k^3}{2\pi^2}P_{\mathcal{R}}(k). \label{eq:part16_DeltaR_def}\]

16.4.1.1 LOCK: isocurvature variables.

For each component \(i\), define density contrast \(\delta_i:=\delta\rho_i/\bar\rho_i\). The gauge-invariant isocurvature mode between \(i\) and \(j\) is \[S_{ij}:=\frac{\delta_i}{1+w_i}-\frac{\delta_j}{1+w_j}. \label{eq:part16_isocurvature_def}\] CMB strongly constrains isocurvature; thus the model must declare the isocurvature fractions in \(\mathcal{P}_\ast\) and gate them (see §16.5).

16.4.2 16.4.2 SPEC: a minimal primordial spectrum parameterization

To keep the module operational, we introduce the standard data-facing parameterization: \[\Delta_{\mathcal{R}}^2(k) = A_s\left(\frac{k}{k_\ast}\right)^{n_s-1}, \label{eq:part16_powerlaw_spectrum}\] with amplitude \(A_s>0\), pivot \(k_\ast\), and tilt \(n_s\) (constants or slowly varying). This is SPEC; the micro-origin is supplied by the generation scenario below.

16.4.3 16.4.3 Generation mechanisms: jamming onset and/or gate noise (HYP options)

We provide two generation options; either can feed [eq:part16_powerlaw_spectrum].

16.4.3.1 Option G1 (HYP): critical jamming fluctuations + freeze-out.

Assume a near-critical jamming onset produces long-range fluctuations of a stage field \(\varphi\) (e.g. \(J\), \(\bar n\), or \(\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)). In the critical regime, a two-point function may scale as \[\langle \varphi(\mathbf{x})\varphi(\mathbf{0})\rangle \sim \frac{1}{|\mathbf{x}|^{\gamma}}\,f\!\left(\frac{|\mathbf{x}|}{\xi}\right), \qquad \xi=\text{correlation length}, \label{eq:part16_critical_correlation}\] with cutoff function \(f\). Freeze-out at \(t=t_J\) sets \(\xi_J=\xi(t_J)\) and imprints a spectrum \(P_\varphi(k)\); the model then supplies a mapping \(\mathcal{R}=\mathcal{C}\,\varphi\) (linearized) giving \[P_{\mathcal{R}}(k)=\mathcal{C}^2\,P_{\varphi}(k) \label{eq:part16_R_from_phi}\] for the primordial curvature spectrum.

16.4.3.2 Option G2 (HYP): gate-noise injection + transport filtering.

Assume stochastic gate switching (choking/saturation events) injects fluctuations at some micro-scale \(k_{\mathrm{inj}}\), and subsequent mixing/transport acts as a low-pass or band-pass filter. A generic representation is: \[P_{\mathcal{R}}(k) = P_{\mathrm{inj}}(k)\,|T_{\mathrm{st}}(k)|^2, \label{eq:part16_injection_filter}\] where \(P_{\mathrm{inj}}(k)\) is an injected spectrum (e.g. localized around \(k_{\mathrm{inj}}\)) and \(T_{\mathrm{st}}(k)\) is a stage transfer function determined by early transport physics (diffusion, advection, or both).

16.4.4 16.4.4 LOCK/DERIVE: propagation equations and damping operators

For scalar perturbations, a standard gauge-invariant propagation equation for the Mukhanov variable \(v\) is \[v'' + \left(c_s^2 k^2 - \frac{z''}{z}\right)v = 0, \qquad v:=z\mathcal{R}, \label{eq:part16_mukhanov_sasaki}\] where primes denote derivatives w.r.t. conformal time \(\eta\) defined by \(d\eta=dt/a\), \(c_s\) is the effective sound speed, and \(z(\eta)\) depends on the background and the effective fluid content. This is a LOCK propagation form for any mechanism once a background closure is declared.

16.4.4.1 Damping by diffusion/mixing (effective).

If mixing induces scale-dependent damping, it can be represented by adding a friction term: \[v'' + 2\Gamma_d(\eta,k)\,v' + \left(c_s^2 k^2 - \frac{z''}{z}\right)v = 0, \label{eq:part16_damped_mukhanov}\] with \(\Gamma_d\ge 0\) an effective damping rate. In the simplest diffusion-like case, the transfer function becomes approximately Gaussian: \[P_{\mathcal{R}}(k)\ \longrightarrow\ P_{\mathcal{R}}(k)\,\exp\!\left[-\left(\frac{k}{k_D}\right)^2\right], \qquad k_D^{-2}(\eta)\sim \int^{\eta}\! d\eta'\,D_{\mathrm{com}}(\eta'), \label{eq:part16_silk_like_damping}\] where \(D_{\mathrm{com}}=D_{\mathrm{phys}}/a^2\) is a comoving diffusion coefficient. This parallels Silk damping logic but is stated here as a general LOCK operator form.

16.4.5 16.4.5 LOCK: perturbation gates (adiabaticity, isocurvature, Gaussianity)

To keep the module falsifiable, we define minimal gates:

16.4.5.1 Gate P1 (adiabatic dominance).

If the model claims adiabatic initial conditions, it must satisfy \[S_{ij}(k)\approx 0\quad \text{for all relevant $(i,j)$ and observable $k$}, \label{eq:part16_gate_P1}\] within observational tolerances.

16.4.5.2 Gate P2 (isocurvature allowance).

If isocurvature is present, define an isocurvature fraction \(\beta_{\mathrm{iso}}\) (model-dependent; e.g. ratio of isocurvature to total power at pivot). Then \(\beta_{\mathrm{iso}}\) must lie below the observational upper bound (external LOCK number). Exceeding it is FAIL[isocurvature].

16.4.5.3 Gate P3 (non-Gaussianity).

If the generation mechanism is nonlinear (gate switching), it may generate non-Gaussianity. Define the bispectrum amplitude parameter(s) (e.g. \(f_{\mathrm{NL}}\) in a chosen template) and require them to lie within observational bounds. Otherwise FAIL[nonGaussian].

16.5 16.5 CMB signatures: anisotropy, polarization, ISW, and qualitative/quantitative predictions

16.5.1 16.5.1 LOCK: line-of-sight solution and angular power spectra

Let \(\eta_0\) be conformal time today and \(\eta_\ast\) at last scattering. The CMB temperature and polarization angular power spectra are written as: \[C_\ell^{XY} = 4\pi\int_0^\infty \frac{dk}{k}\, \Delta_{\mathcal{R}}^2(k)\, \Delta_\ell^{X}(k)\,\Delta_\ell^{Y}(k), \qquad X,Y\in\{T,E,B\}, \label{eq:part16_Cl_def}\] where \(\Delta_\ell^{X}(k)\) are transfer functions.

A general line-of-sight representation is \[\Delta_\ell^{T}(k) = \int_0^{\eta_0} d\eta\ S_T(k,\eta)\,j_\ell\!\big(k(\eta_0-\eta)\big), \label{eq:part16_LOS_T}\] and similarly for polarization \[\Delta_\ell^{E}(k) = \int_0^{\eta_0} d\eta\ S_E(k,\eta)\,j_\ell\!\big(k(\eta_0-\eta)\big), \label{eq:part16_LOS_E}\] with \(j_\ell\) spherical Bessel functions and sources \(S_T,S_E\) determined by the background, recombination history, and perturbation dynamics (including any modified gravity functions).

16.5.2 16.5.2 DERIVE: Sachs–Wolfe and ISW contributions

The temperature anisotropy along direction \(\hat{\mathbf{n}}\) can be decomposed into standard terms: \[\frac{\Delta T}{T}(\hat{\mathbf{n}}) = \left[\Theta_0 + \Psi\right]_{\eta_\ast} +\hat{\mathbf{n}}\cdot \mathbf{v}_b(\eta_\ast) + \int_{\eta_\ast}^{\eta_0} d\eta\ \left(\Phi'+\Psi'\right), \label{eq:part16_T_decomposition}\] where \(\Theta_0\) is the monopole temperature perturbation at last scattering, \(\mathbf{v}_b\) is the baryon velocity (Doppler term), and the integral is the Integrated Sachs–Wolfe (ISW) effect.

16.5.2.1 ISW sensitivity to late-time potential evolution.

The ISW term is nonzero if potentials evolve: \[\left(\frac{\Delta T}{T}\right)_{\mathrm{ISW}} = \int_{\eta_\ast}^{\eta_0} (\Phi'+\Psi')\,d\eta. \label{eq:part16_ISW}\] In the VP/JL framework, \(\Phi\) and \(\Psi\) can evolve due to:

  • a dark/stage-like component \(X\) changing \(H(z)\) (PART 15),

  • modified gravity/deficit functions \(\mu,\Sigma\) (PART 15),

  • alignment-induced anisotropic stress (through \(\Phi\neq\Psi\)).

Therefore the ISW gate is a sensitive consistency check between Parts 15 and 16.

16.5.3 16.5.3 HYP: additional anisotropy from lattice-optics inhomogeneity

If the redshift mechanism involves a path integral \(\ln(1+z)=\int \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}} ds\) (PART 14), then spatial fluctuations \(\delta\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) induce direction-dependent redshift and thus temperature anisotropy.

16.5.3.1 Linearized relation.

Let \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}=\bar\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}+\delta\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\). Then \[\delta\ln(1+z)(\hat{\mathbf{n}}) = \int_{\gamma(\hat{\mathbf{n}})} \delta\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds. \label{eq:part16_delta_logz}\] Since observed temperature scales approximately as \(T_{\mathrm{obs}}\propto (1+z)^{-1}\) for a blackbody mapping, the induced anisotropy is \[\left(\frac{\Delta T}{T}\right)_{\kappa} \approx -\delta\ln(1+z) = -\int_{\gamma(\hat{\mathbf{n}})} \delta\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds. \label{eq:part16_kappa_anisotropy}\]

16.5.3.2 LOCK gate CMB-\(\kappa\) (anisotropy bound).

If the model includes inhomogeneous lattice-optics drift, it must ensure that the power contributed by [eq:part16_kappa_anisotropy] does not exceed observed anisotropy levels. Operationally: compute its contribution to \(C_\ell^{TT}\) and require it to be subdominant unless it is intentionally used as the primary anisotropy source (which would then require fitting the full spectrum).

16.5.4 16.5.4 Polarization (E/B) and alignment-induced parity signatures

16.5.4.1 LOCK: polarization spectra.

Polarization is decomposed into E and B modes with spectra \(C_\ell^{EE},C_\ell^{BB},C_\ell^{TE}\) using [eq:part16_Cl_def]. In standard scalar-only primordial perturbations, \(C_\ell^{BB}\) arises primarily from lensing (or tensors). Any additional B-mode source must be explicitly declared.

16.5.4.2 HYP: alignment-induced statistical anisotropy.

A large-scale alignment field can produce a preferred direction \(\hat{\mathbf{n}}_A\) and quadrupolar modulation of the primordial spectrum: \[P_{\mathcal{R}}(\mathbf{k}) = P_{\mathcal{R}}(k)\left[1+g_\ast\left(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\cdot \hat{\mathbf{n}}_A\right)^2\right], \qquad |g_\ast|\ll 1. \label{eq:part16_quadrupolar_modulation}\] This produces off-diagonal covariance in multipole space. It is strongly constrained; thus it is a high-risk HYP requiring a tight gate.

16.5.4.3 LOCK gate CMB-ANI (statistical isotropy).

If [eq:part16_quadrupolar_modulation] or analogous anisotropy is present, require the inferred \(g_\ast\) lies within observational bounds; otherwise FAIL[anisotropy].

16.5.5 16.5.5 Spectral-distortion gates (blackbody preservation)

A nonstandard redshift mechanism must preserve the observed near-blackbody nature of the CMB. Energy injection into photons after thermalization epochs can create \(\mu\)-type and \(y\)-type distortions. Without committing to specific numerical bounds, we define the gate structure.

16.5.5.1 LOCK: distortion variables.

Let \(\mu_{\mathrm{CMB}}\) be a chemical-potential-type distortion parameter and \(y_{\mathrm{CMB}}\) the Compton-\(y\) parameter.

16.5.5.2 LOCK gate CMB-SPEC.

The model must ensure \[|\mu_{\mathrm{CMB}}|\le \mu_{\max}, \qquad |y_{\mathrm{CMB}}|\le y_{\max}, \label{eq:part16_distortion_gate}\] where \((\mu_{\max},y_{\max})\) are LOCK observational thresholds. Any mechanism that changes photon energy non-adiabatically at late times must compute its predicted \((\mu_{\mathrm{CMB}},y_{\mathrm{CMB}})\).

16.5.5.3 Connection to lattice optics.

If lattice optics is purely a homogeneous adiabatic scaling (\(\bar n(t)\) mapping), it preserves a blackbody with temperature rescaling; if it includes stochastic/inhomogeneous energy exchange or photon-number nonconservation, it risks producing distortions and must pass [eq:part16_distortion_gate].

16.6 16.6 BBN constraints: coherence gates linking expansion history and primordial nucleosynthesis

This subsection defines BBN consistency gates. The core sensitivity is to the expansion rate \(H(T)\) in the range \(T\sim \mathrm{MeV}\) to \(\sim 0.01\,\mathrm{MeV}\) (in standard units), and to any extra energy density or modified coupling that changes freeze-out timing.

16.6.1 16.6.1 LOCK: expansion rate as a function of temperature

Using the temperature proxy [eq:part16_rho_T_def], and including possible extra components, the total energy density at early times is \[\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(T) = \rho_r(T) + \rho_m(T) + \rho_X(T) + \rho_{\mathrm{extra}}(T), \label{eq:part16_rhotot_T}\] where \(\rho_{\mathrm{extra}}\) includes any additional stage/actor species present at BBN.

Under the GR-form closure (PART 15), \[H(T)^2 = \frac{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3}\,\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(T) \quad\text{(for $k/a^2$ negligible at BBN; if not, include it explicitly).} \label{eq:part16_H_T}\]

16.6.1.1 LOCK: speed-up factor.

Define the expansion speed-up factor relative to a reference (standard) expansion \(H_{\mathrm{ref}}(T)\): \[S(T):=\frac{H(T)}{H_{\mathrm{ref}}(T)}. \label{eq:part16_speedup_def}\] BBN constraints can be cast as bounds on \(S(T)\) over the relevant temperature window.

16.6.2 16.6.2 DERIVE: weak freeze-out temperature sensitivity

In standard BBN logic, the neutron–proton ratio freezes out when the weak interaction rate \(\Gamma_{\mathrm{wk}}(T)\) drops below the expansion rate \(H(T)\): \[\Gamma_{\mathrm{wk}}(T_f)\approx H(T_f). \label{eq:part16_freezeout_condition}\] In natural units, a rough scaling is \(\Gamma_{\mathrm{wk}}(T)\propto G_F^2 T^5\), while \(H(T)\propto \sqrt{G_{\mathrm{eff}}}\,T^2\) in radiation domination. Therefore the freeze-out temperature scales as \[T_f \propto \left(\frac{\sqrt{G_{\mathrm{eff}}}}{G_F^2}\right)^{1/3} \times \left[g_\ast(T_f)\right]^{1/6} \times S(T_f)^{1/3}, \label{eq:part16_Tf_scaling}\] where \(S(T_f)\) captures deviations from the reference expansion history. Hence faster expansion (\(S>1\)) increases \(T_f\) and generally increases the neutron fraction.

16.6.3 16.6.3 DERIVE: helium-4 mass fraction dependence (minimal analytic estimate)

The neutron-to-proton ratio at freeze-out is approximately \[\left(\frac{n}{p}\right)_{f}\approx \exp\!\left(-\frac{\Delta m}{T_f}\right), \label{eq:part16_np_freezeout}\] with \(\Delta m\) the neutron–proton mass difference.

Between freeze-out and nucleosynthesis onset at time \(t_{\mathrm{nuc}}\), neutrons decay with lifetime \(\tau_n\): \[\left(\frac{n}{p}\right)_{\mathrm{nuc}} \approx \left(\frac{n}{p}\right)_{f}\exp\!\left(-\frac{t_{\mathrm{nuc}}-t_f}{\tau_n}\right). \label{eq:part16_np_decay}\] A minimal estimate for the helium-4 mass fraction is then \[Y_p \approx \frac{2(n/p)_{\mathrm{nuc}}}{1+(n/p)_{\mathrm{nuc}}}. \label{eq:part16_Yp_approx}\] Thus \(Y_p\) is sensitive to \(T_f\) and to the time-temperature relation \(t(T)\) (via \(H(T)\)). Any model that modifies \(H(T)\) must compute its implied \(Y_p\) (and, for full rigor, other abundances via a reaction network).

16.6.4 16.6.4 LOCK: effective extra radiation as \(\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}\)

Extra relativistic energy density at BBN is commonly encoded as an effective \(\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}\): \[\rho_{\mathrm{rad}}(T) = \rho_\gamma(T)\left[1+\frac{7}{8}\left(\frac{4}{11}\right)^{4/3}N_{\mathrm{eff}}\right], \qquad N_{\mathrm{eff}}=N_{\mathrm{eff,ref}}+\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}. \label{eq:part16_Neff_def}\] In the VP/JL model, any stage/actor relativistic-like component present during BBN contributes to \(\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}\) as a mapping: \[\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}(T) :=\mathcal{N}\!\left[\rho_{\mathrm{extra}}(T)\right], \label{eq:part16_DNeff_mapping}\] where \(\mathcal{N}\) is fixed by [eq:part16_Neff_def]. This is a LOCK bookkeeping definition once the reference convention is fixed.

16.6.5 16.6.5 LOCK: BBN PASS/FAIL gates

We define the BBN gate suite:

16.6.5.1 Gate BBN-H (expansion history at MeV).

Over the BBN-sensitive temperature window \(T\in[T_{\max},T_{\min}]\) (locked), require: \[|S(T)-1|\le \epsilon_{\mathrm{BBN}}(T), \label{eq:part16_BBN_H_gate}\] where \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{BBN}}(T)\) is an allowed deviation envelope (external or model-locked).

16.6.5.2 Gate BBN-\(Y_p\) (helium).

Compute \(Y_p\) (at minimum using [eq:part16_Yp_approx] as a rough diagnostic, and with a full network for a production-grade test) and require: \[Y_p\in [Y_{p,\min},Y_{p,\max}] \quad\text{(\textsf{LOCK} observational interval).} \label{eq:part16_BBN_Yp_gate}\]

16.6.5.3 Gate BBN-D/H (deuterium) and others.

For each tracked abundance \(X\in\{\mathrm{D/H},\ ^3\mathrm{He/H},\ ^7\mathrm{Li/H},\ldots\}\) require \[X_{\mathrm{pred}}\in [X_{\min},X_{\max}] \quad\text{(locked intervals).} \label{eq:part16_BBN_abundance_gate}\]

16.6.5.4 Gate BBN-\(N_{\mathrm{eff}}\).

If the model adds relativistic degrees of freedom at BBN, require \[\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}(T_{\mathrm{BBN}})\le \Delta N_{\mathrm{eff,max}} \label{eq:part16_BBN_Neff_gate}\] with \(T_{\mathrm{BBN}}\) a representative BBN temperature and \(\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff,max}}\) an observationally locked bound.

16.6.5.5 Cross-gate coherence with CMB/BAO.

If early-time physics determines the sound horizon \(r_s\) and drag scale \(r_d\) used in BAO (PART 15), then the same early model must be used consistently in BAO fits. Otherwise FAIL[early-time incoherence].

16.6.5.6 End of Part 16.

This Part provided: (i) a minimal early-universe state vector and initialization constraints, (ii) explicit horizon definitions and a horizon-solution gate in terms of stage transport/mixing, (iii) an optional gate-based baryogenesis structure with explicit rate equations and freeze-out yield, (iv) a complete perturbation/spectrum framework with damping operators and isocurvature/non-Gaussian gates, (v) CMB line-of-sight formalism including ISW and additional lattice-optics anisotropy channels plus spectral-distortion gates, and (vi) BBN coherence gates linking \(H(T)\) and extra-energy content to primordial yields.

17 PART 17. Information Paradox & Cyclic Universe: An Entropy Ledger and a Recycling Cosmos (Output 17)

This Part upgrades the VP/Jammed-Lattice (JL) framework with an explicit information/entropy ledger and uses it to (i) reformulate the black-hole information paradox as a bookkeeping problem about where records live, (ii) model evaporation/recycling as a rate–flux–saturation evolution of a “reactor core,” (iii) state precise monotonicity/non-monotonicity conditions and forbidden scenarios for the entropy ledger, (iv) define (hypothetical) cyclic/bounce conditions as regime transitions consistent with Parts 10–16, (v) list candidate observational signatures, and (vi) provide a rigorous consistency gate checklist that detects contradictions across the theory stack.

17.0.0.1 Claim tiers.

  • LOCK: definitions, sign conventions, ledger identities, and PASS/FAIL gate definitions.

  • DERIVE: consequences of LOCK under explicitly stated regime assumptions (closed system, unitary microdynamics, coarse graining, etc.).

  • HYP: additional dynamical hypotheses (e.g. concrete recycling channels, bounce/reset maps, special saturation laws).

  • SPEC: simple parameterizations for data-facing fits (e.g. oscillatory primordial features, phenomenological GW templates).

17.0.0.2 Notational separation (collision avoidance).

Throughout this Part:

  • \(\mathcal{Q}\) continues to denote energy exchange between effective cosmological components as in PART 15.

  • \(\mu\) from earlier Parts denotes storage\(\leftrightarrow\)mobility conversion (PART 04/10); to avoid confusion, we will not use \(\mu\) for anything else here.

  • \(\mu(a,k)\) and \(\Sigma(a,k)\) (PART 15) remain reserved for modified growth/lensing functions; they are not used as rates.

  • Entropy is denoted by \(S\) (dimensionless if von Neumann; or in \(k_B\) units if thermodynamic). When needed we write \(S/k_B\) explicitly.

17.1 17.1 Reformulating the information paradox as a ledger problem: what is “recorded”?

17.1.1 17.1.1 LOCK: registers (where information can live) and entropy definitions

We define an explicit decomposition of the global state into registers (subsystems). The minimal tri-partition for black-hole evolution is: \[\mathcal{H}_{\mathrm{tot}} = \mathcal{H}_{B} \otimes \mathcal{H}_{R} \otimes \mathcal{H}_{S}, \label{eq:part17_H_decomposition}\] where

  • \(B\) = core register (the black-hole “reactor core” degrees of freedom in the VP/JL sense; not necessarily a geometric interior),

  • \(R\) = radiation/outflow register (all emitted quanta and propagating excitations that have escaped the core gates),

  • \(S\) = stage register (JL background/microstate memory of the jammed lattice, including any background variables and hidden degrees not captured by coarse macroscopic fields).

If an external environment is included, add \(\mathcal{H}_E\); here we keep the minimal closed model for clarity.

17.1.1.1 LOCK(density matrices).

Let \(\rho_{BRS}(t)\) be the global density matrix and define reduced states by partial trace: \[\rho_B=\mathrm{Tr}_{RS}\rho_{BRS},\quad \rho_R=\mathrm{Tr}_{BS}\rho_{BRS},\quad \rho_S=\mathrm{Tr}_{BR}\rho_{BRS}, \quad\text{etc.} \label{eq:part17_reduced_states}\]

17.1.1.2 LOCK(von Neumann entropy).

For any register \(X\) with state \(\rho_X\): \[S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X):= -\mathrm{Tr}\big(\rho_X\ln\rho_X\big). \label{eq:part17_vN_entropy}\] This is dimensionless. If we want thermodynamic entropy in SI units, use \(S_{\mathrm{th}}(X):=k_B S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X)\).

17.1.1.3 LOCK(mutual information as “record” measure).

For registers \(X,Y\) define mutual information: \[I(X:Y):=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(Y)-S_{\mathrm{vN}}(XY)\ \ge 0. \label{eq:part17_mutual_information}\] Interpretation: \(I(X:Y)\) quantifies the amount of correlation, hence recorded relational information, between \(X\) and \(Y\).

17.1.1.4 LOCK(global purity / unitarity regime).

In the closed, unitary regime we assume: \[\rho_{BRS}(t)=U(t)\,\rho_{BRS}(0)\,U(t)^\dagger, \qquad S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS)=\text{constant}. \label{eq:part17_unitary_global}\] In particular, if the initial global state is pure then \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS)=0\) for all \(t\).

17.1.2 17.1.2 DERIVE: ledger identities for a closed tripartite system

Assume the global state is pure, so \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS)=0\). Then: \[S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BS),\qquad S_{\mathrm{vN}}(B)=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(RS),\qquad S_{\mathrm{vN}}(S)=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BR). \label{eq:part17_pure_state_equalities}\] These are exact entropic equalities; they define the information ledger constraints under global purity.

17.1.2.1 Strong subadditivity (always).

For any tripartite state: \[S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BR)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(RS)\ \ge\ S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS)=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BS), \label{eq:part17_strong_subadditivity}\] where the last equality uses purity if applicable. This inequality becomes a LOCK gate for any proposed entropy evolution: violating it is an immediate FAIL[SSA].

17.1.3 17.1.3 LOCK: the “information paradox” as a ledger mismatch

The classical paradox can be stated as a mismatch between two ledger statements:

  • (P1) Unitary closure (LOCK regime): the closed system \(BRS\) evolves unitarily so fine-grained information is not destroyed [eq:part17_unitary_global].

  • (P2) Thermal outflow (HYP behavior): the outflow register \(R\) is (approximately) thermal and uncorrelated with the rest at late times, which would imply \(R\) carries no purification of the initial state.

If (P2) were exact while the core disappears, then \(R\) would remain highly mixed and the final global state would not be pure, contradicting (P1). Therefore, in a closed unitary ledger, at least one of the following must hold:

  1. \(R\) is not exactly thermal; it contains correlations that purify it (the “Page-like” resolution).

  2. The core \(B\) does not fully disappear (a remnant register remains).

  3. The stage register \(S\) stores correlations such that the accessible radiation looks thermal but global purity is maintained.

  4. The system is not closed/unitary in the effective description (then the ledger must include an external \(E\) register).

In the VP/JL ontology, option (3) is natural: the jammed lattice (stage) provides a large correlation/memory sink, but the model must then specify how and whether those records can be retrieved or remain hidden.

17.1.4 17.1.4 LOCK: entropy bookkeeping in a control-volume (ledger axiom for entropy)

We import the control-volume ledger structure (PART 04) and apply it to entropy. Consider a control region \(\Omega(t)\) surrounding the core (or a cosmological region). Define:

  • \(S_\Omega(t)\): total coarse-grained thermodynamic entropy in \(\Omega\) (in \(k_B\) units or dimensionless; choose and lock),

  • \(\Phi_S\): entropy flux across the boundary \(\partial\Omega\) (outward positive),

  • \(\Sigma_S\ge 0\): internal entropy production rate (nonnegative by the second law at the coarse-grained level),

  • \(\Xi_S\): entropy exchange term between actor and stage degrees within \(\Omega\) that changes the coarse-grained partition without changing the global fine-grained entropy (a “relabeling”/“hiding” term).

The entropy ledger is then written as: \[\frac{d}{dt}S_\Omega = -\oint_{\partial\Omega}\Phi_S\cdot d\mathbf{A} +\Sigma_S +\Xi_S. \label{eq:part17_entropy_ledger_control_volume}\] Interpretation:

  • The flux term accounts for entropy carried away by outflows (radiation, jets, matter).

  • \(\Sigma_S\ge 0\) accounts for irreversible mixing, coarse-graining, dissipation.

  • \(\Xi_S\) accounts for entropy repartition between actor-accessible and stage-hidden registers; \(\Xi_S\) may have either sign for a subsystem entropy, but the global coarse-grained entropy must still satisfy a monotonicity gate (below).

17.1.5 17.1.5 LOCK: what counts as a “record” in JL

We define “record” as the presence of stable correlations stored in some register. Operationally: \[\text{A record of register }X\text{ in }Y\ \Longleftrightarrow\ I(X:Y)\ \text{is non-negligible and persistent on the regime timescale.} \label{eq:part17_record_definition}\] In JL, three record channels are distinguished:

  1. Radiative records: correlations inside \(R\) and between \(R\) and the rest (accessible in principle by measuring radiation).

  2. Core records: correlations stored in \(B\) (accessible only by interacting with the core gates).

  3. Stage records: correlations stored in \(S\) (potentially inaccessible to low-energy observers if stage microstates are hidden; must be declared).

17.2 17.2 Evaporation & recycling: black-hole evolution via event rates, fluxes, and saturation

17.2.1 17.2.1 LOCK: reactor-core state variables and energy ledger

We model the black hole as a VP/JL reactor core with gating (Parts 8 and 10). Define the core energy-like storage variable: \[E_B(t)\ \ge\ 0, \label{eq:part17_core_energy_def}\] and (optionally) a core “volume/entropy capacity” proxy \(C_B(t)\) that counts effective degrees of freedom available in the core: \[C_B(t)\ \ge\ 0. \label{eq:part17_core_capacity_def}\] \(C_B\) is not assumed to equal geometric area unless a separate mapping is introduced; it is a LOCK core descriptor once chosen.

17.2.1.1 LOCK(energy flux decomposition).

Define the instantaneous power flows:

  • \(P_{\mathrm{in}}(t)\ge 0\): energy inflow power into the core (accretion, capture),

  • \(P_R(t)\ge 0\): energy outflow power from the core into the radiation/outflow register \(R\) (includes jets and all escaping excitations),

  • \(P_S(t)\ge 0\): energy transferred from the core into the stage register \(S\) (stored as background/stage excitations).

Then the core energy ledger is: \[\boxed{ \dot E_B(t)=P_{\mathrm{in}}(t)-P_R(t)-P_S(t). } \label{eq:part17_core_energy_ledger}\]

17.2.1.2 LOCK(throughput bound / choking).

As in PART 08, assume outflows are throughput-limited by a choking bound: \[P_R(t)\ \le\ P_{R,\max}\!\big(E_B(t),C_B(t);\theta_R\big), \qquad P_S(t)\ \le\ P_{S,\max}\!\big(E_B(t),C_B(t);\theta_S\big), \label{eq:part17_power_choking_bounds}\] with parameter sets \(\theta_R,\theta_S\) locked once chosen.

17.2.2 17.2.2 LOCK: event-rate and saturation laws

We represent conversion/emission as events that occur at rates. Let \(N(t)\) denote the cumulative number of core-processing events (an abstract event counter). Define the event rate: \[\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}(t):=\dot N(t)\ \ge\ 0. \label{eq:part17_event_rate_def}\] Associate an average energy processed per event \(\varepsilon_{\mathrm{evt}}(t)\ge 0\); then a processed power is: \[P_{\mathrm{proc}}(t)=\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}(t)\,\varepsilon_{\mathrm{evt}}(t). \label{eq:part17_processed_power}\] Split processed power into channels: \[P_R(t)=\eta_R(t)\,P_{\mathrm{proc}}(t),\qquad P_S(t)=\eta_S(t)\,P_{\mathrm{proc}}(t),\qquad \eta_R,\eta_S\in[0,1],\quad \eta_R+\eta_S\le 1, \label{eq:part17_channel_efficiencies}\] where the inequality allows for internal dissipation that stays in the core (or is accounted in \(C_B\)).

17.2.2.1 LOCK(saturation).

We adopt a saturating rate law of the form: \[\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}(t) = \Gamma_{\max}\, g_\Gamma\!\left(\frac{E_B(t)}{E_{\mathrm{sat}}}\right)\, \mathcal{G}(t), \qquad 0\le g_\Gamma(x)\le 1,\quad g_\Gamma(0)=0,\quad \lim_{x\to\infty}g_\Gamma(x)=1, \label{eq:part17_saturating_rate}\] where

  • \(\Gamma_{\max}\) is a maximum processing rate (locked constant),

  • \(E_{\mathrm{sat}}\) is a saturation energy scale (locked constant),

  • \(\mathcal{G}(t)\in[0,1]\) is a gate factor (on/off or smooth step) controlled by core state variables (choking, saturation, alignment, etc.).

A canonical saturating choice (example; SPEC unless derived) is: \[g_\Gamma(x)=\frac{x}{1+x}. \label{eq:part17_gGamma_example}\]

17.2.3 17.2.3 DERIVE: evaporation-only and recycling-inclusive regimes

17.2.3.1 Evaporation-only regime (DERIVE under \(P_{\mathrm{in}}=0\), \(P_S=0\)).

If the core is isolated and does not dump energy into the stage register (\(P_{\mathrm{in}}=0\), \(P_S=0\)), then [eq:part17_core_energy_ledger] becomes: \[\dot E_B(t)=-P_R(t)\le 0. \label{eq:part17_evap_only}\] So \(E_B(t)\) is nonincreasing. If, in addition, \(P_R(E_B)>0\) for all \(E_B>0\), the core energy will decrease until either \(E_B\to 0\) or until the effective description breaks (e.g. a remnant threshold).

17.2.3.2 Core lifetime (general DERIVE).

Assuming \(P_R\) depends only on \(E_B\) and is positive: \[t_{\mathrm{end}}-t_0=\int_{E_B(t_{\mathrm{end}})}^{E_B(t_0)} \frac{dE}{P_R(E)}. \label{eq:part17_lifetime_integral}\] Thus:

  • if \(\int_{0}^{E_0}\frac{dE}{P_R(E)}<\infty\), then complete evaporation (\(E_B\to 0\)) occurs in finite time;

  • if the integral diverges at a positive \(E_{\mathrm{rem}}>0\) due to \(P_R(E)\to 0\), a remnant-like terminal energy arises.

17.2.3.3 Recycling-inclusive regime (DERIVE under \(P_S\neq 0\)).

If energy is transferred into the stage register, [eq:part17_core_energy_ledger] reads: \[\dot E_B(t)=P_{\mathrm{in}}(t)-P_R(t)-P_S(t), \qquad P_S(t)\ge 0. \label{eq:part17_recycling_regime}\] Even without radiation, \(P_S\) can drain the core energy into the stage; conversely, if the stage feeds the core (allowed only if explicitly declared, i.e. negative \(P_S\)), the sign convention must be updated globally. Here we LOCK \(P_S\ge 0\) (core \(\to\) stage).

17.2.3.4 Recycling fraction.

Define the instantaneous recycling fraction: \[f_{\mathrm{rec}}(t):=\frac{P_S(t)}{P_R(t)+P_S(t)}\in[0,1]\quad\text{(when }P_R+P_S>0\text{)}. \label{eq:part17_recycling_fraction}\] \(f_{\mathrm{rec}}\) measures how much of the processed energy ends up in stage memory/background rather than in outgoing radiation.

17.2.4 17.2.4 LOCK: entropy and information flux from the core

We introduce an entropy flux associated with each energy flux channel. Define effective temperatures (or more generally, entropy-per-energy ratios) for each channel: \[\alpha_R(t):=\frac{dS_R}{dE_R},\qquad \alpha_S(t):=\frac{dS_S}{dE_S}, \label{eq:part17_alpha_entropy_per_energy}\] where \(S_R\) is the entropy carried into \(R\) and \(S_S\) into \(S\).

Then the entropy flux rates are: \[\dot S_R(t)=\alpha_R(t)\,P_R(t),\qquad \dot S_S(t)=\alpha_S(t)\,P_S(t), \label{eq:part17_entropy_flux_rates}\] and the core entropy ledger (coarse-grained thermodynamic) is: \[\dot S_B(t)=\dot S_{\mathrm{in}}(t)-\dot S_R(t)-\dot S_S(t)+\Sigma_B(t), \qquad \Sigma_B(t)\ge 0, \label{eq:part17_core_entropy_ledger}\] where \(\Sigma_B\) is internal entropy production in the core and \(\dot S_{\mathrm{in}}\) is entropy brought in by accretion.

17.2.4.1 LOCK(information flux capacity bound).

Information flux (as correlation-carrying capacity) is bounded by entropy flux. Define a coarse upper bound: \[\dot I_{\mathrm{out}}(t)\ \le\ \dot S_R(t) \label{eq:part17_info_flux_bound}\] when \(S_R\) is measured in nats (or divide by \(\ln 2\) to use bits). This bound expresses that each nat of entropy flow can carry at most one nat of classical information capacity in a coarse channel accounting (a minimal bookkeeping inequality; more refined channel bounds may be used if the microphysics is specified).

17.2.5 17.2.5 HYP: a Page-like purification channel via stage records

In a unitary global ledger, late-time purification of radiation requires correlations to build within \(R\) and/or between \(R\) and \(S\). We encode this with a gate-controlled “correlation release” term.

Define the radiation fine-grained entropy \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)\) and an effective emission entropy rate \(\dot S_R\) from [eq:part17_entropy_flux_rates]. Then a minimal correlation-corrected ledger for \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)\) is: \[\boxed{ \frac{d}{dt}S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R) = \dot S_R(t)\ -\ \dot I_{\mathrm{rel}}(t), \qquad \dot I_{\mathrm{rel}}(t)\ge 0, } \label{eq:part17_radiation_entropy_ledger}\] where \(\dot I_{\mathrm{rel}}\) is the rate at which correlations are released into \(R\) that reduce its fine-grained entropy (equivalently, increase its internal purification).

17.2.5.1 LOCK(Page-like gate condition).

A Page-like non-monotonic curve for \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)\) requires: \[\exists\, t_P:\quad \dot S_R(t_P)=\dot I_{\mathrm{rel}}(t_P), \qquad \dot I_{\mathrm{rel}}(t)>\dot S_R(t)\ \text{for some }t>t_P. \label{eq:part17_page_time_condition}\] If the model claims unitary evaporation without remnants, it must provide a mechanism that realizes [eq:part17_page_time_condition] while satisfying all gates below (especially entropy production and consistency with earlier Parts).

17.3 17.3 The entropy ledger: monotonicity, non-monotonicity, and forbidden scenarios

17.3.1 17.3.1 LOCK: fine-grained vs coarse-grained entropies and the ledger split

For each register \(X\in\{B,R,S\}\) we distinguish: \[S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X)\quad\text{(fine-grained, exact)}, \qquad S_{\mathrm{cg}}(X)\quad\text{(coarse-grained, thermodynamic)}. \label{eq:part17_fine_coarse_split}\] Coarse-graining increases entropy: \[S_{\mathrm{cg}}(X)\ \ge\ S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X). \label{eq:part17_coarse_ge_fine}\] This inequality is a LOCK monotonicity fact: violating it indicates an inconsistent definition of \(S_{\mathrm{cg}}\).

17.3.1.1 LOCK(global coarse-grained entropy).

Define the total coarse-grained entropy of the closed system: \[S_{\mathrm{cg,tot}}:=S_{\mathrm{cg}}(B)+S_{\mathrm{cg}}(R)+S_{\mathrm{cg}}(S). \label{eq:part17_Scg_total}\] We do not subtract mutual information here; \(S_{\mathrm{cg}}\) already includes ignorance due to coarse-graining and can double-count correlations. The gate we impose is on its time derivative (below), not on its absolute value.

17.3.2 17.3.2 LOCK: generalized second-law gate for the closed VP/JL system

We impose a coarse-grained second-law gate:

17.3.2.1 Gate GSL (LOCK).

For a closed system \(BRS\) in the valid regime of the effective description, \[\boxed{ \frac{d}{dt}S_{\mathrm{cg,tot}}(t)\ \ge\ 0. } \label{eq:part17_GSL}\] Interpretation: the effective description (with its coarse-graining) must not generate a net decrease of total thermodynamic entropy.

17.3.2.2 Consistency with fine-grained unitarity (DERIVE).

If the global evolution is unitary and the global state is pure, then \[S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS)=0 \quad\Rightarrow\quad \frac{d}{dt}S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS)=0. \label{eq:part17_fine_grained_constant}\] There is no contradiction with [eq:part17_GSL] because coarse-grained entropy can increase even when the fine-grained entropy is constant.

17.3.3 17.3.3 DERIVE: when can subsystem entropy be non-monotonic?

Subsystem entropies (fine-grained) are not constrained to be monotone under unitary evolution. In particular, for a pure global state, \[S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BS) \label{eq:part17_R_equals_BS}\] and either side can rise or fall depending on how correlations are redistributed.

17.3.3.1 Ledger decomposition using mutual information (DERIVE).

For any bipartition \((R : BS)\): \[I(R:BS)=S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BS)-S_{\mathrm{vN}}(RBS)=2S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R) \quad (\text{if }S_{\mathrm{vN}}(RBS)=0). \label{eq:part17_mutual_info_pure_bipartition}\] Thus, the growth and decay of \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)\) is exactly the growth/decay of correlations between \(R\) and the complement. This gives a clear ledger meaning: the “information paradox” is about correlation routing.

17.3.4 17.3.4 LOCK: forbidden scenarios (consistency inequalities)

We enumerate forbidden scenarios as explicit PASS/FAIL conditions.

17.3.4.1 Forbidden F1: SSA violation.

Any proposed dynamics leading to violation of strong subadditivity [eq:part17_strong_subadditivity] is forbidden: \[\texttt{FAIL[SSA]}\quad \text{if}\quad S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BR)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(RS)<S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)+S_{\mathrm{vN}}(BRS). \label{eq:part17_fail_SSA}\]

17.3.4.2 Forbidden F2: negative coarse-grained total entropy production in a closed regime.

\[\texttt{FAIL[GSL]}\quad \text{if}\quad \frac{d}{dt}S_{\mathrm{cg,tot}}<0 \ \text{while the system is declared closed and within validity.} \label{eq:part17_fail_GSL}\]

17.3.4.3 Forbidden F3: correlation release exceeding channel capacity.

Using [eq:part17_info_flux_bound] as a minimal capacity bound: \[\texttt{FAIL[cap]}\quad \text{if}\quad \dot I_{\mathrm{rel}}(t)>\dot S_R(t) \ \text{in the same units (nats per time).} \label{eq:part17_fail_capacity}\] If a refined capacity bound is adopted, replace [eq:part17_info_flux_bound] accordingly.

17.3.4.4 Forbidden F4: purification without a memory partner.

If the core \(B\) vanishes and the stage \(S\) is declared inaccessible with no retrieval channel, then a late-time decrease of \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(R)\) must be explained by correlations within \(R\) alone. If the model claims \(R\) remains exactly thermal (maximally mixed) while also claiming unitarity and no remnant, this is forbidden: \[\texttt{FAIL[info]}\quad \text{if}\quad \big(\text{unitary closed}\big)\wedge \big(B\to \varnothing\big)\wedge \big(\rho_R \text{ remains thermal at late times}\big). \label{eq:part17_fail_info}\] (Here \(B\to\varnothing\) means the effective core register disappears with no remaining degrees of freedom.)

17.3.4.5 Forbidden F5: macroscopic entropy reset without exporting entropy to hidden registers.

If the cosmology claims a cyclic reset (next subsection) where macroscopic entropy drops, the ledger must include an equal-or-larger increase of hidden entropy in the stage register: \[\texttt{FAIL[reset]}\quad\text{if}\quad \Delta S_{\mathrm{cg,macro}}<0 \ \text{and}\ \Delta S_{\mathrm{cg,hidden}} < -\Delta S_{\mathrm{cg,macro}}. \label{eq:part17_fail_reset}\]

17.4 17.4 Cyclic/bounce conditions: universe reset as a regime transition (HYP labeling)

This subsection is explicitly HYP at the dynamical level, but the gate structure is LOCK. The key principle is: \[\text{``Cyclic'' at the macroscopic level may correspond to a non-cyclic, entropy-increasing microstate evolution with hidden stage memory.} \label{eq:part17_macro_micro_cycle_principle}\]

17.4.1 17.4.1 LOCK: effective-FRW bounce conditions (kinematic)

If the model interprets \(a(t)\) as an effective-FRW scale factor (PART 15), then a bounce at \(t=t_b\) is defined by: \[a(t_b)=a_b>0,\qquad H(t_b)=0,\qquad \dot H(t_b)>0. \label{eq:part17_bounce_def}\] Equivalently, \(\dot a(t_b)=0\) and \(\ddot a(t_b)>0\).

Under the GR-form closure (PART 15), \[H^2=\frac{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}{3}\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}-\frac{k c^2}{a^2}. \label{eq:part17_friedmann_recall}\] Imposing \(H(t_b)=0\) yields: \[\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(t_b)=\frac{3 k c^2}{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\,a_b^2}. \label{eq:part17_bounce_density_condition}\] Thus, with \(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}\ge 0\) as a default gate, a GR-form bounce requires \(k>0\) (closed geometry) unless the Friedmann form is modified (which must then be declared and gated).

Using the derived relation \(\dot H\) (PART 15), \[\dot H = -4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}}{c^2}\right)+\frac{k c^2}{a^2}, \label{eq:part17_dotH_recall}\] the condition \(\dot H(t_b)>0\) implies \[-4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\left(\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(t_b)+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}(t_b)}{c^2}\right)+\frac{k c^2}{a_b^2}>0. \label{eq:part17_dotH_positive_condition}\] Substituting [eq:part17_bounce_density_condition] gives: \[\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(t_b)+\frac{P_{\mathrm{tot}}(t_b)}{c^2}<\frac{1}{3}\rho_{\mathrm{tot}}(t_b). \label{eq:part17_bounce_EOS_condition}\] This shows that, even with \(k>0\), the effective equation of state near the bounce must be sufficiently negative (or the model must modify the closure).

17.4.2 17.4.2 LOCK: “bounce” in the optical mapping interpretation

If the model adopts the optical mapping (PART 15) where \[a(t)=\frac{\bar n(t)}{\bar n(t_0)}, \qquad H(t)=\frac{\dot{\bar n}}{\bar n}, \label{eq:part17_optical_mapping_recall}\] then a bounce condition [eq:part17_bounce_def] is equivalent to: \[\dot{\bar n}(t_b)=0,\qquad \ddot{\bar n}(t_b)>0. \label{eq:part17_optical_bounce_condition}\] In this interpretation, a “bounce” is a turning point of the homogeneous stage index rather than literal geometric contraction/expansion. This distinction must be kept explicit in claims and gates.

17.4.3 17.4.3 HYP: a cycle map driven by black-hole recycling

We formalize a cycle as a map between macroscopic state vectors (compare PART 16): \[\mathcal{S}^{(n)}_{\mathrm{in}} \ \xrightarrow{\ \text{cosmic evolution}\ }\ \mathcal{S}^{(n)}_{\mathrm{out}} \ \xrightarrow{\ \mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{rec}}\ }\ \mathcal{S}^{(n+1)}_{\mathrm{in}}, \label{eq:part17_cycle_map}\] where:

  • \(\mathcal{S}^{(n)}_{\mathrm{in}}\) is the “initial” state vector for cycle \(n\) (as in PART 16),

  • \(\mathcal{S}^{(n)}_{\mathrm{out}}\) is the “end-of-cycle” state vector (late-time diluted state, black-hole population, stage memory),

  • \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{rec}}\) is a HYP recycling/reset operator representing a regime transition (e.g. a global jamming transition, saturation release, or stage-index turning event).

17.4.3.1 HYP recycling trigger.

Let \(X(t)\) be a global trigger variable (examples: mean stage background \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\), global jamming order \(J\), or integrated core-processing measure). A generic trigger is: \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{rec}}\ \text{activates when}\quad X(t)=X_c \quad\text{with a locked threshold }X_c. \label{eq:part17_recycle_trigger}\] The trigger must be defined in terms of previously locked variables (Parts 10–16) to avoid circularity.

17.4.4 17.4.4 LOCK: cyclicity gates (macroscopic recurrence with hidden entropy accounting)

17.4.4.1 Gate C1 (macroscopic recurrence within tolerance).

Define the set of macroscopic observables \(\mathcal{O}(\mathcal{S})\) (e.g. \(\{H_0,\Omega_{m0},n_s,A_s,\ldots\}\)) and require: \[\left\|\mathcal{O}\!\left(\mathcal{S}^{(n+1)}_{\mathrm{in}}\right)-\mathcal{O}\!\left(\mathcal{S}^{(n)}_{\mathrm{in}}\right)\right\| \le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{cyc}} \quad\text{for all large }n, \label{eq:part17_gate_C1}\] with a locked tolerance \(\varepsilon_{\mathrm{cyc}}\).

17.4.4.2 Gate C2 (no second-law violation: entropy export to hidden registers).

Let \(S_{\mathrm{cg,macro}}\) be the coarse-grained entropy in the macroscopically accessible registers (e.g. radiation+matter fields) and \(S_{\mathrm{cg,hidden}}\) be the coarse-grained entropy in stage microstate memory that is not reset macroscopically. Then any reset that reduces \(S_{\mathrm{cg,macro}}\) must satisfy: \[\Delta S_{\mathrm{cg,macro}} + \Delta S_{\mathrm{cg,hidden}}\ \ge\ 0. \label{eq:part17_gate_C2}\]

17.4.4.3 Gate C3 (compatibility with early-universe gates).

The next-cycle initial data must satisfy the early-universe gate suite in PART 16 (CMB/BBN, perturbation constraints). In this Part we express it as: \[\mathcal{S}^{(n+1)}_{\mathrm{in}}\in \mathfrak{G}_{\mathrm{early}} \quad\text{where }\mathfrak{G}_{\mathrm{early}}\text{ is the set of PASS states for PART 16}. \label{eq:part17_gate_C3}\]

17.4.4.4 Gate C4 (black-hole population closure).

If the recycling trigger depends on black-hole processing, the integrated black-hole processing per cycle must be finite and well-defined: \[\int_{\text{cycle }n} \left(P_R(t)+P_S(t)\right)\,dt < \infty, \qquad \int_{\text{cycle }n} \Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}(t)\,dt < \infty. \label{eq:part17_gate_C4}\]

17.5 17.5 Candidate observational signatures: residual imprints in background radiation, gravitational waves, and large-scale structure

This subsection is primarily SPEC/HYP: we list candidate imprint classes and define computable template forms and gates. The model must not merely assert “signatures”; it must map them to the already-defined perturbation and expansion frameworks (Parts 14–16).

17.5.1 17.5.1 SPEC: primordial spectrum features from a bounce/reset transfer function

A generic way to encode bounce/reset imprints is a multiplicative transfer function on the primordial curvature spectrum: \[P_{\mathcal{R}}(k)=P_0(k)\,T_{\mathrm{cyc}}(k), \qquad P_0(k)=\frac{2\pi^2}{k^3}\,A_s\left(\frac{k}{k_\ast}\right)^{n_s-1}. \label{eq:part17_PR_with_transfer}\] A minimal oscillatory template (example SPEC) is: \[T_{\mathrm{cyc}}(k)= 1 + A_{\mathrm{osc}}\, \cos\!\left(\omega \ln\frac{k}{k_b}+\varphi\right)\, \exp\!\left[-\left(\frac{k}{k_d}\right)^2\right], \label{eq:part17_Tcyc_template}\] with amplitude \(A_{\mathrm{osc}}\), frequency \(\omega\), phase \(\varphi\), and damping scale \(k_d\).

17.5.1.1 Gate OBS-P1 (CMB fit compatibility).

Insert [eq:part17_PR_with_transfer] into the CMB pipeline of PART 16 (line-of-sight integral) and require that the resulting \(C_\ell^{TT},C_\ell^{TE},C_\ell^{EE}\) pass the CMB gates (PART 16). Otherwise FAIL[CMB-spectrum].

17.5.2 17.5.2 SPEC: stochastic gravitational-wave background from recycling/bounce

Define the GW energy density fraction per logarithmic frequency: \[\Omega_{\mathrm{GW}}(f):=\frac{1}{\rho_c}\frac{d\rho_{\mathrm{GW}}}{d\ln f}, \qquad \rho_c:=\frac{3H_0^2}{8\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}}. \label{eq:part17_OmegaGW_def}\] A generic SPEC template is a broken power law: \[\Omega_{\mathrm{GW}}(f)= \Omega_0 \begin{cases} \left(\dfrac{f}{f_b}\right)^{n_1}, & f<f_b,\\[6pt] \left(\dfrac{f}{f_b}\right)^{n_2}, & f\ge f_b, \end{cases} \label{eq:part17_OmegaGW_broken_power}\] with break frequency \(f_b\) and slopes \((n_1,n_2)\) determined by the bounce/recycling dynamics.

17.5.2.1 Gate OBS-GW (multi-probe consistency).

Any predicted \(\Omega_{\mathrm{GW}}(f)\) must satisfy all relevant constraints implied by the CMB/BBN expansion history gates (PART 16) and not introduce extra radiation energy density that violates \(\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}\) or the BBN \(H(T)\) gate. Operationally: \[\Omega_{\mathrm{GW}}\ \Rightarrow\ \rho_{\mathrm{extra}}(T)\ \Rightarrow\ \Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}(T_{\mathrm{BBN}})\le \Delta N_{\mathrm{eff,max}} \quad\text{and}\quad S(T)\ \text{passes BBN gate}. \label{eq:part17_GW_to_BBN_gate}\]

17.5.3 17.5.3 HYP: residual stage-memory imprints (alignment/anisotropy remnants)

If the stage retains long-lived memory across cycles, it can seed large-scale alignment fields (PART 15) or statistical anisotropy (PART 16). A minimal imprint is a quadrupolar modulation of the primordial spectrum: \[P_{\mathcal{R}}(\mathbf{k}) = P_{\mathcal{R}}(k)\left[1+g_\ast\left(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\cdot \hat{\mathbf{n}}_A\right)^2\right], \qquad |g_\ast|\ll 1, \label{eq:part17_anisotropy_modulation_recall}\] or an isocurvature fraction seeded by stage variables.

17.5.3.1 Gate OBS-ANI.

The model must keep anisotropy/isocurvature within the observational bounds enforced in PART 16: \[|g_\ast|\le g_{\ast,\max}, \qquad \beta_{\mathrm{iso}}\le \beta_{\mathrm{iso,max}}. \label{eq:part17_gate_OBS_ANI}\] Violations produce FAIL[anisotropy] or FAIL[isocurvature].

17.5.4 17.5.4 HYP: CMB spectral-distortion remnants from recycling

Any recycling that injects energy into the radiation sector after thermalization epochs risks \(\mu\)-type or \(y\)-type distortions (PART 16). If the recycling map \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{rec}}\) produces a non-adiabatic energy injection \(\Delta E_\gamma\) into photons at late times, a conservative ledger gate is: \[|\mu_{\mathrm{CMB}}|\le \mu_{\max}, \qquad |y_{\mathrm{CMB}}|\le y_{\max}, \label{eq:part17_distortion_gate_recall}\] with the same thresholds as PART 16. Violation is FAIL[distortion].

17.6 17.6 Consistency gates: a checklist against Parts 10–16 (conflict detection)

This subsection is LOCK: it defines an explicit checklist that must be evaluated for any Part-17 cyclic/recycling claim. Each gate is a yes/no statement. A single violation is a FAIL with a tagged reason.

17.6.1 17.6.1 Gates linking to Part 10 (black hole reactor) and Part 08 (gate physics)

17.6.1.1 Gate X10-1 (no singularity reintroduced).

If Part 10 replaces a singularity with choking/saturation, Part 17 must not reintroduce an ill-defined divergence (e.g. infinite rate, infinite entropy production) in the core model: \[\texttt{FAIL[core-div]}\quad\text{if}\quad \Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}},\ P_R,\ P_S,\ \Sigma_B\ \text{diverge in the declared operating regime.} \label{eq:part17_gate_X10_1}\]

17.6.1.2 Gate X10-2 (compatibility of saturation laws).

Any saturation function used here (e.g. \(g_\Gamma\) in [eq:part17_saturating_rate]) must be consistent with the saturation/throughput definitions in PART 08: \[\texttt{FAIL[sat-mismatch]}\quad\text{if}\quad P_R>P_{R,\max}\ \text{or}\ P_S>P_{S,\max}\ \text{in a regime declared ``choked.''} \label{eq:part17_gate_X10_2}\]

17.6.2 17.6.2 Gates linking to Part 11 (jets) and Part 12 (stellar/disc outflows)

17.6.2.1 Gate X11-1 (jet channel accounting).

If jets are an outflow channel (PART 11), their power must be counted inside \(P_R\) and their entropy flux must be counted in \(\dot S_R\): \[\texttt{FAIL[jet-ledger]}\quad\text{if}\quad P_{\mathrm{jet}}\ \text{is claimed but omitted from }P_R\ \text{or from the entropy ledger.} \label{eq:part17_gate_X11_1}\]

17.6.2.2 Gate X12-1 (no contradiction with low-pressure “sprinkler” regimes).

If Part 12 defines low-pressure outflows, then any global recycling must not force those systems into incompatible compulsory behavior without a regime transition declaration. Operationally: \[\texttt{FAIL[regime]} \quad\text{if}\quad \text{a Part-17 mechanism overrides Part-12 regime selection without declaring a gate/transition.} \label{eq:part17_gate_X12_1}\]

17.6.3 17.6.3 Gates linking to Part 13–14 (stage ontology and lattice optics)

17.6.3.1 Gate X14-1 (optical mapping consistency).

If Part 15 uses the optical mapping \(a(t)=\bar n(t)/\bar n(t_0)\), then any bounce/reset in \(a(t)\) must correspond to a well-defined evolution of \(\bar n(t)\): \[\texttt{FAIL[opt-map]}\quad\text{if}\quad a(t)\ \text{is reset but }\bar n(t)\ \text{cannot be consistently defined across the transition.} \label{eq:part17_gate_X14_1}\]

17.6.3.2 Gate X14-2 (spectral-distortion gate).

Any recycling/entropy dump affecting photons must pass the distortion gates [eq:part17_distortion_gate_recall]. Otherwise FAIL[distortion].

17.6.4 17.6.4 Gates linking to Part 15 (dark energy/acceleration, growth) and Part 16 (early universe, CMB/BBN)

17.6.4.1 Gate X15-1 (FRW-ledger coherence).

If the effective cosmology is described by FRW-ledger equations (PART 15), then any cycle/reset must be implementable either as:

  • a legitimate solution of the FRW-ledger system with declared components and exchanges, or

  • a declared regime transition where the effective FRW mapping changes, with explicit matching conditions.

Otherwise FAIL[FRW-coherence].

17.6.4.2 Gate X15-2 (distance–growth coherence).

Any modifications introduced by cyclicity (e.g. altered \(H(z)\) history) must still satisfy the joint distance–growth gate suite of PART 15 (SN/BAO/WL/growth), unless the Part-17 model explicitly replaces late-time cosmology with a new mapping and redefines the gate suite consistently.

17.6.4.3 Gate X16-1 (BBN).

The expansion history and extra energy densities implied by a cycle/bounce must pass BBN gates (PART 16): \[\texttt{FAIL[BBN]}\quad\text{if}\quad S(T)\ \text{or }\Delta N_{\mathrm{eff}}(T_{\mathrm{BBN}})\ \text{violates the BBN bounds.} \label{eq:part17_gate_X16_1}\]

17.6.4.4 Gate X16-2 (CMB anisotropy/polarization).

Any primordial feature or anisotropy must pass the CMB gates (PART 16): \[\texttt{FAIL[CMB]}\quad\text{if}\quad C_\ell^{TT},C_\ell^{TE},C_\ell^{EE}\ \text{or isocurvature/non-Gaussianity exceed allowed bounds.} \label{eq:part17_gate_X16_2}\]

17.6.5 17.6.5 Gates internal to Part 17 (information/entropy ledger integrity)

17.6.5.1 Gate I1 (SSA).

Must satisfy [eq:part17_strong_subadditivity] at all times in the unitary regime.

17.6.5.2 Gate I2 (coarse-grained second law).

Must satisfy [eq:part17_GSL] in any regime declared closed and within validity.

17.6.5.3 Gate I3 (capacity).

Must satisfy [eq:part17_info_flux_bound] (or a stronger, model-specified channel capacity bound).

17.6.5.4 Gate I4 (Page-like requirement if claiming unitary evaporation without remnants).

If the model claims a unitary evaporation to no remnant, it must provide a mechanism that can realize [eq:part17_page_time_condition] without violating I1–I3.

17.6.5.5 End of Part 17.

This Part delivered: (i) a precise register-based information ledger and a definition of “records” as mutual information, (ii) a black-hole evolution model expressed as energy/entropy fluxes with choking/saturation and event-rate laws, (iii) explicit monotonicity and forbidden-scenario gates (SSA, GSL, capacity, reset accounting), (iv) kinematic bounce conditions in FRW and in the optical mapping, (v) candidate observational imprint templates with gates back to CMB/BBN, and (vi) a concrete cross-Part checklist detecting contradictions with Parts 10–16.

18 PART 18. Mathematical Formalization: The Rigorous Layer Stack from Kinetics \(\to\) Moments \(\to\) Closure (Output 18)

This Part provides a mathematically explicit bridge from the kinetic description (distribution-level dynamics) to the moment hierarchy and finally to closure rules that yield PDE-level models used throughout Parts 06–16. The goal is not stylistic elegance; the goal is a rigorous, checkable layer stack with:

  • a minimal kinetic equation with clearly stated assumptions on interaction/collision terms,

  • a complete derivation of the moment identities (including boundary terms),

  • positivity/entropy/energy estimates that justify regime reductions,

  • precise hyperbolic vs. parabolic conditions for the closed PDEs,

  • correspondence gates to Newton/GR weak-field behavior and to quantum (actor) excitations,

  • an explicit “approximation ledger” that tracks assumptions, errors, and tolerances.

18.0.0.1 Claim tiers (applied to this Part).

  • LOCK: mathematical definitions, sign conventions, function spaces, gate definitions, and identities that follow from integration by parts.

  • DERIVE: moment equations, entropy/energy inequalities, and regime reductions under explicitly declared scaling limits.

  • HYP: specific modeling choices for kernels, forces, and stage-memory couplings that are not forced by LOCK.

  • SPEC: simple parametric forms (e.g. BGK collision operator, exponential gates) meant for implementable prototypes.

18.0.0.2 Compatibility note (with Parts 04–08).

The theory uses a ledger principle (control-volume conservation), a conversion axiom (storage \(\leftrightarrow\) mobility), and a gating system (choking/saturation/throughput). Part 18 rebuilds those objects from kinetic/moment mathematics and makes explicit which parts are identities vs. assumptions.

18.1 18.1 Minimal kinetic equation: assumptions, collision term, and interaction kernels

18.1.1 18.1.1 LOCK: domains, unknowns, and admissible states

18.1.1.1 Space and time.

Let \(t\in[0,T]\). Let \(\Omega\subseteq\mathbb{R}^d\) be the spatial domain with \(d=3\) in physical applications. We allow two standard choices (choose one and lock it for any specific theorem run):

  • Periodic box: \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\) (no physical boundary; simplest energy identities).

  • Bounded domain: \(\Omega\subset\mathbb{R}^d\) with smooth boundary \(\partial\Omega\) (requires boundary conditions).

18.1.1.2 Velocity domain.

Let \(V\subseteq\mathbb{R}^d\) be the velocity domain. To incorporate throughput limits (Part 08) as an exact mathematical constraint, we optionally use a bounded velocity ball: \[V = B_{c_{\mathrm{th}}}(0):=\{v\in\mathbb{R}^d:\ |v|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}\}, \label{eq:part18_V_ball}\] with a fixed throughput speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}>0\) (LOCK if adopted). Alternatively, one may set \(V=\mathbb{R}^d\) with weighted integrability; the analysis below states both options when relevant.

18.1.1.3 Mobile distribution (actor mobility phase).

The mobile/transported phase is described by a distribution \[f=f(t,x,v)\ge 0,\qquad (t,x,v)\in[0,T]\times\Omega\times V. \label{eq:part18_f_def}\]

18.1.1.4 Stored phase (actor storage reservoir).

The stored phase is described by a nonnegative scalar field \[\rho=\rho(t,x)\ge 0,\qquad (t,x)\in[0,T]\times\Omega. \label{eq:part18_rho_def}\]

18.1.1.5 Stage/background register (optional in the kinetic layer).

A background/stage variable \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}=e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t,x)\ge 0\) may be included if the kinetic layer exchanges budget with the stage. In Part 18, \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) appears only as a source/sink coupling term; its own dynamics may be specified either kinetically or at the moment/PDE level (Parts 13–16). We keep it explicit when defining conservation gates.

18.1.1.6 Admissible state class (LOCK).

For well-posedness and finiteness of moments we impose: \[f\in L^1(\Omega\times V)\cap L^\infty(\Omega\times V), \qquad \rho\in L^1(\Omega)\cap L^\infty(\Omega), \label{eq:part18_admissible_basic}\] and, when \(V=\mathbb{R}^d\), we also require finite second velocity moment: \[\int_{\Omega}\int_{\mathbb{R}^d} |v|^2 f(t,x,v)\,dv\,dx < \infty. \label{eq:part18_second_moment_finite}\] If \(V=B_{c_{\mathrm{th}}}(0)\), the second moment is automatically bounded by \(c_{\mathrm{th}}^2\|f\|_{L^1}\).

18.1.2 18.1.2 LOCK: the kinetic–conversion system (general form)

We define a kinetic equation for \(f\) coupled to a conversion equation for \(\rho\). Let \(F=F(t,x,v)\) be an effective force field (may encode deficit gravity, alignment forces, etc.). Let \(Q[f]\) be a collision/mixing operator (internal redistribution in velocity space). Let \(\mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]\) and \(\mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f]\) be conversion operators (storage\(\leftrightarrow\)mobility).

18.1.2.1 Mobile phase (kinetic equation).

\[\boxed{ \partial_t f + v\cdot\nabla_x f + \nabla_v\cdot\big(F f\big) = Q[f] + \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] - \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f] + \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}[e_{\mathrm{bg}}]. } \label{eq:part18_kinetic_general}\]

18.1.2.2 Stored phase (conversion/balance equation).

\[\boxed{ \partial_t \rho = \mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f] - \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] + \mathcal{J}_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}[e_{\mathrm{bg}}]. } \label{eq:part18_rho_general}\] Here \(\mathcal{R}\) are the integrated rates associated with \(\mathcal{C}\) and are constrained by conservation gates (below).

18.1.2.3 LOCK: conservation coupling constraints (ledger compatibility).

To ensure that storage\(\leftrightarrow\)mobility conversion is a redistribution (not creation) within the actor sector, we impose: \[\int_V \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]\,dv = \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho], \qquad \int_V \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f]\,dv = \mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f], \label{eq:part18_conversion_consistency}\] pointwise in \((t,x)\).

If the stage exchange terms are absent (\(\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}=\mathcal{J}_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}=0\)) and if \(Q\) is conservative in the \(1\)-moment (see §18.1.4), then the total actor budget is conserved up to boundary flux: \[\partial_t\Big(\rho + \int_V f\,dv\Big) + \nabla_x\cdot\Big(\int_V v f\,dv\Big)=0 \quad\text{(formal identity; rigorous under boundary assumptions).} \label{eq:part18_actor_continuity_preview}\] This is the kinetic origin of the Part 06 core continuity law \(\partial_t e+\nabla\cdot S=0\) when \(e\) is identified with the total actor budget.

18.1.3 18.1.3 LOCK/SPEC: minimal realizations of conversion operators

To operationalize [eq:part18_conversion_consistency] we provide a minimal, strictly positive conversion realization.

18.1.3.1 LOCK: injection kernel and its normalization.

Let \(M=M(v)\ge 0\) be a fixed injection kernel on \(V\) such that \[\int_V M(v)\,dv = 1. \label{eq:part18_M_normalization}\] \(M\) can encode preferred directions (alignment axis \(k\)) by depending on \(v\cdot k\), but any such choice must be LOCK-declared to avoid hidden tuning.

18.1.3.2 SPEC: linear conversion rates.

Let \(\mu\ge 0\) be a storage\(\to\)mobility conversion rate and let \(\gamma(v)\ge 0\) be a mobility\(\to\)storage capture rate. Define: \[\mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] := \mu\,\rho\,M(v), \qquad \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f] := \gamma(v)\,f, \label{eq:part18_conversion_C_spec}\] and therefore \[\mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] = \int_V \mu \rho M(v)\,dv = \mu\rho, \qquad \mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f] = \int_V \gamma(v) f\,dv. \label{eq:part18_conversion_R_spec}\] Then [eq:part18_conversion_consistency] holds identically.

18.1.3.3 Positivity preservation (conversion part).

With [eq:part18_conversion_C_spec], the conversion contributions preserve nonnegativity because they are of “gain minus loss” type with nonnegative coefficients.

18.1.4 18.1.4 LOCK: collision/mixing operator assumptions (kernel-level)

The collision/mixing operator \(Q[f]\) encodes mixing, alignment, and relaxation toward a local equilibrium. We state a minimal assumption set that is sufficient to derive the moment identities and entropy dissipation.

18.1.4.1 Assumption set Q (generic).

\(Q\) is an operator acting on nonnegative \(f\) such that:

  1. Locality in \((t,x)\) (LOCK): \(Q[f](t,x,\cdot)\) depends on \(f(t,x,\cdot)\) only (no spatial nonlocality inside \(Q\)), unless explicitly declared otherwise.

  2. Mass (budget) conservation (LOCK): \[\int_V Q[f]\,dv = 0. \label{eq:part18_Q_mass_conservation}\]

  3. Entropy dissipation (LOCK gate form): define \(H(f):=\int_V f\ln f\,dv\) (for \(f>0\), extended by continuity at \(f=0\)). Then \[\int_V Q[f]\ \ln f\ dv \ \le\ 0. \label{eq:part18_Q_entropy_dissipation}\]

  4. Positivity preservation (LOCK): if \(f\ge 0\) then the kinetic equation with \(Q\) does not create negative values (precise statement depends on the chosen well-posedness framework).

18.1.4.2 SPEC: BGK-type collision operator (implementable).

A simple collision model consistent with [eq:part18_Q_mass_conservation] and [eq:part18_Q_entropy_dissipation] is \[Q_{\mathrm{BGK}}[f] := \frac{1}{\tau}\Big(\mathcal{M}[f]-f\Big), \label{eq:part18_BGK_def}\] where \(\tau>0\) is a relaxation time and \(\mathcal{M}[f]\) is a “local equilibrium” distribution with the same conserved moments as \(f\) (at minimum, the \(1\)-moment; optionally also \(v\)- and \(|v|^2\)-moments). For the budget-only conservation, one may take \[\mathcal{M}[f](v) := e_a\,M_0(v), \qquad e_a(t,x):=\int_V f\,dv, \qquad \int_V M_0(v)\,dv=1, \label{eq:part18_BGK_budget_only}\] with a fixed \(M_0\ge 0\).

18.1.5 18.1.5 LOCK: boundary conditions (and boundary term bookkeeping)

If \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\), boundary terms vanish identically.

If \(\Omega\) is bounded, we must specify boundary conditions for \(f\) (and possibly for \(\rho\) if surface processes exist). Let \(n(x)\) be the outward unit normal at \(x\in\partial\Omega\) and define inflow/outflow boundary sets: \[\Gamma_\pm := \{(x,v)\in \partial\Omega\times V:\ \pm\, v\cdot n(x) > 0\}. \label{eq:part18_boundary_sets}\]

A standard LOCK boundary for conservative kinetic energy identities is specular reflection: \[f(t,x,v)=f\big(t,x,v-2(v\cdot n(x))n(x)\big) \quad\text{for }(x,v)\in\Gamma_-. \label{eq:part18_specular_bc}\] Specular reflection ensures no net flux of the \(1\)-moment through the boundary if no additional source terms are applied.

Alternatively, absorbing or injection boundaries encode external driving; those must be added as explicit inflow data on \(\Gamma_-\) and then the ledger includes boundary flux as a source/sink.

18.2 18.2 Moment theorems and closure justification: positivity, energy estimates, and boundaries

18.2.1 18.2.1 LOCK: moment definitions (kinetic \(\to\) macroscopic variables)

Define the standard velocity moments of \(f\) (all are functions of \((t,x)\)):

18.2.1.1 Mobile budget density.

\[e_a(t,x):=\int_V f(t,x,v)\,dv. \label{eq:part18_ea_def}\]

18.2.1.2 Flux (first moment).

\[S(t,x):=\int_V v\, f(t,x,v)\,dv. \label{eq:part18_flux_def}\]

18.2.1.3 Second moment (stress/pressure tensor).

\[T(t,x):=\int_V v\otimes v\ f(t,x,v)\,dv. \label{eq:part18_T_def}\]

18.2.1.4 Third moment (for higher closure).

\[U(t,x):=\int_V v\otimes v\otimes v\ f(t,x,v)\,dv. \label{eq:part18_U_def}\]

18.2.1.5 Total actor budget density (storage + mobility).

\[e_{\mathrm{act}}(t,x):=\rho(t,x)+e_a(t,x). \label{eq:part18_e_act_def}\] If a stage variable \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) is included in the conserved ledger, the total is \[e_{\mathrm{tot}}(t,x):=\rho(t,x)+e_a(t,x)+e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t,x). \label{eq:part18_e_tot_def}\]

18.2.1.6 Throughput/finite-speed gate (moment form).

If \(V=B_{c_{\mathrm{th}}}(0)\) then automatically \[|S(t,x)| \le \int_V |v| f\,dv \le c_{\mathrm{th}} \int_V f\,dv = c_{\mathrm{th}}\, e_a(t,x). \label{eq:part18_flux_speed_bound}\] This is exactly the “choking”-style inequality \(|S|\le c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a\) at the kinetic level, hence it is LOCK once \(V\) is bounded.

18.2.2 18.2.2 DERIVE: moment equations (including conversion and force terms)

We derive the moment equations from [eq:part18_kinetic_general] by multiplying by test functions and integrating over \(v\).

18.2.2.1 Lemma 18.2.2-A (moment integration rule; LOCK).

Assume \(f\) is sufficiently regular and integrable so that differentiation under the integral is valid and boundary terms in \(v\) vanish (e.g. \(f\) compactly supported in \(v\) or decays fast; or \(V\) bounded with \(f=0\) on \(\partial V\) if needed). Then: \[\int_V \nabla_v\cdot(F f)\,dv = 0. \label{eq:part18_v_divergence_zero}\] Proof. Integration by parts in \(v\); boundary term vanishes by the hypothesis. \(\square\)

18.2.2.2 (i) Budget equation for the mobile phase.

Integrate [eq:part18_kinetic_general] over \(v\) and use [eq:part18_Q_mass_conservation] and [eq:part18_v_divergence_zero]: \[\partial_t e_a + \nabla_x\cdot S = \int_V \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]\,dv - \int_V \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f]\,dv + \int_V \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,dv. \label{eq:part18_mobile_budget_eq}\] Using [eq:part18_conversion_consistency] this becomes \[\boxed{ \partial_t e_a + \nabla_x\cdot S = \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] - \mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f] + J_{a,\mathrm{bg}}, } \label{eq:part18_mobile_budget_eq_simplified}\] where \(J_{a,\mathrm{bg}}:=\int_V \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,dv\).

18.2.2.3 (ii) Budget equation for the stored phase.

From [eq:part18_rho_general]: \[\boxed{ \partial_t \rho = \mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f] - \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] + J_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}. } \label{eq:part18_stored_budget_eq}\]

18.2.2.4 (iii) Actor-sector continuity equation (DERIVE).

Sum [eq:part18_mobile_budget_eq_simplified] and [eq:part18_stored_budget_eq]: \[\partial_t (\rho+e_a) + \nabla_x\cdot S = J_{a,\mathrm{bg}} + J_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}. \label{eq:part18_actor_continuity_with_bg}\] If the actor sector is closed (LOCK for that run) then \(J_{a,\mathrm{bg}}+J_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}=0\) and we recover \[\boxed{ \partial_t e_{\mathrm{act}} + \nabla_x\cdot S = 0, \qquad e_{\mathrm{act}}=\rho+e_a. } \label{eq:part18_actor_continuity_closed}\] This is the rigorous kinetic origin of the Part 06 “core continuity.”

18.2.2.5 (iv) Flux (first-moment) equation (DERIVE).

Multiply [eq:part18_kinetic_general] by \(v\) and integrate over \(v\). Using \(\int_V v\,\nabla_v\cdot(Ff)\,dv = -\int_V F f\,dv\) (integration by parts), we get: \[\partial_t S + \nabla_x\cdot T = -\int_V F f\,dv + \int_V v\,Q[f]\,dv + \int_V v\Big(\mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]-\mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f]\Big)\,dv + \int_V v\,\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,dv. \label{eq:part18_flux_equation_general}\] If \(Q\) conserves the first moment (momentum-like conservation), \[\int_V v\,Q[f]\,dv = 0, \label{eq:part18_Q_momentum_conservation}\] then the \(Q\) term drops. If not, it typically produces a damping/relaxation term \(-\lambda S\) (alignment/mixing drag), which must be specified and gated.

18.2.2.6 (v) Second-moment equation (DERIVE).

Multiply by \(v\otimes v\) and integrate: \[\partial_t T + \nabla_x\cdot U = -\int_V \big(F\otimes v + v\otimes F\big) f\,dv + \int_V v\otimes v\ Q[f]\,dv +\int_V v\otimes v\Big(\mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}-\mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}\Big)\,dv +\int_V v\otimes v\,\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,dv. \label{eq:part18_second_moment_equation}\] The appearance of \(U\) is the fundamental reason closure is required.

18.2.2.7 Boundary terms (spatial).

All divergence terms above satisfy, for any smooth \(\Omega\), \[\int_{\Omega} \nabla_x\cdot S\ dx = \int_{\partial\Omega} S\cdot n\ dA, \qquad \int_{\Omega} \nabla_x\cdot T\ dx = \int_{\partial\Omega} (T n)\ dA, \label{eq:part18_spatial_boundary_divergence}\] which is the exact mathematical content of the control-volume ledger principle.

18.2.3 18.2.3 LOCK: positivity and maximum principle gates

18.2.3.1 Gate POS-1 (nonnegativity preservation).

A kinetic model is PASS on positivity if: \[f(0,x,v)\ge 0,\ \rho(0,x)\ge 0 \ \Longrightarrow\ f(t,x,v)\ge 0,\ \rho(t,x)\ge 0 \quad\forall t\in[0,T]. \label{eq:part18_gate_POS1}\] For [eq:part18_conversion_C_spec] and BGK collisions [eq:part18_BGK_def] with \(\mathcal{M}[f]\ge 0\), this gate is satisfied in standard well-posedness frameworks.

18.2.3.2 Gate POS-2 (budget boundedness).

If \(V=B_{c_{\mathrm{th}}}(0)\) and \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\), then from [eq:part18_actor_continuity_closed], \[\int_{\Omega} e_{\mathrm{act}}(t,x)\,dx = \int_{\Omega} e_{\mathrm{act}}(0,x)\,dx \quad\text{(closed actor sector)}, \label{eq:part18_total_actor_mass_conserved}\] so the total actor budget is conserved. In bounded domains, the boundary flux \(\int_{\partial\Omega} S\cdot n\,dA\) is the ledger term.

18.2.3.3 Gate POS-3 (flux bound / choking).

If \(V=B_{c_{\mathrm{th}}}(0)\), the flux bound [eq:part18_flux_speed_bound] holds automatically. If \(V=\mathbb{R}^d\), the model must impose (as LOCK closure or as an explicit flux limiter) an inequality of the form \[|S|\le c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a \label{eq:part18_flux_limiter_gate}\] to remain compatible with throughput constraints.

18.2.4 18.2.4 DERIVE: entropy and energy estimates (formal \(\to\) gate form)

18.2.4.1 (A) Kinetic entropy dissipation (fine-grained).

Define the local entropy density in velocity space: \[\mathcal{H}(t,x):=\int_V f(t,x,v)\ln f(t,x,v)\,dv. \label{eq:part18_local_entropy_density}\] Multiply [eq:part18_kinetic_general] by \(\ln f\) and integrate over \(v\). Under standard regularity and boundary hypotheses in \(v\), the transport terms become spatial flux divergences and the collision term dissipates entropy: \[\partial_t \mathcal{H} + \nabla_x\cdot \Big(\int_V v f\ln f\ dv\Big) = \int_V Q[f]\ln f\ dv + \int_V \Big(\mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}-\mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}+\mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\Big)\ln f\ dv. \label{eq:part18_entropy_balance_local}\] By [eq:part18_Q_entropy_dissipation], \(\int Q[f]\ln f\le 0\). The conversion terms can increase or decrease \(\mathcal{H}\); thus the appropriate gate is not that \(\mathcal{H}\) decreases, but that the total coarse-grained entropy in the closed system satisfies the second-law gate (Part 17; also §18.5 below).

18.2.4.2 (B) \(L^1\) energy estimate for the actor sector (closed case).

Assume \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\), no stage exchange, and conservative \(Q\). Integrate [eq:part18_actor_continuity_closed]: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega} e_{\mathrm{act}}\,dx = 0. \label{eq:part18_L1_conservation}\] This is the \(L^1\)-level conserved energy/budget estimate.

18.2.4.3 (C) \(L^2\)-type stability estimate (prototype).

Let \(\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle\) denote the \(L^2(\Omega\times V)\) inner product. In the simplest setting \(F=0\), \(J=0\), and \(Q_{\mathrm{BGK}}\) with budget-only equilibrium [eq:part18_BGK_budget_only], one obtains \[\frac{1}{2}\frac{d}{dt}\|f\|_{L^2(\Omega\times V)}^2 = \left\langle f, Q_{\mathrm{BGK}}[f]\right\rangle + \left\langle f, \mu\rho M-\gamma f\right\rangle, \label{eq:part18_L2_balance_start}\] and \[\left\langle f, Q_{\mathrm{BGK}}[f]\right\rangle = \frac{1}{\tau}\left(\langle f,\mathcal{M}[f]\rangle-\|f\|_{L^2}^2\right) \le \frac{1}{2\tau}\|\mathcal{M}[f]\|_{L^2}^2 - \frac{1}{2\tau}\|f\|_{L^2}^2, \label{eq:part18_BGK_L2_dissipation}\] by Young’s inequality. This yields a Grönwall-type bound on \(\|f\|_{L^2}\) provided \(\|\mathcal{M}[f]\|_{L^2}\) can be controlled by \(\|f\|_{L^2}\) (true for many normalized equilibria on bounded \(V\)). The exact constants depend on \(M_0\) and the geometry; the point is that collision and capture provide damping. This is the analytic origin of stability in the diffusion regime.

18.2.5 18.2.5 DERIVE: closure as a scaling limit (fast relaxation \(\Rightarrow\) reduced PDE)

Closure becomes mathematically justified when a small parameter separates timescales. Introduce a non-dimensional small parameter \(\varepsilon>0\) (Knudsen-like): \[\varepsilon:=\frac{\text{microscopic relaxation time}}{\text{macroscopic transport time}}, \label{eq:part18_epsilon_def}\] and consider a scaled kinetic equation in which collisions are fast: \[\partial_t f^\varepsilon + v\cdot\nabla_x f^\varepsilon = \frac{1}{\varepsilon}Q[f^\varepsilon] + \text{(lower-order conversion/force terms)}. \label{eq:part18_scaled_kinetic}\] The rigorous diffusion/hydrodynamic limit typically uses:

  • a local equilibrium manifold \(\mathcal{E}=\{f:\ Q[f]=0\}\),

  • a spectral gap of the linearized operator around equilibrium (coercivity),

  • uniform moment bounds in \(\varepsilon\).

18.2.5.1 Definition (local equilibrium; LOCK).

A distribution \(f^{\mathrm{eq}}\) is a local equilibrium if \[Q[f^{\mathrm{eq}}]=0. \label{eq:part18_equilibrium_def}\] In many models, equilibria are of the form \(f^{\mathrm{eq}}(t,x,v)=e_a(t,x)\,M_0(v)\) (isotropic) or depend on \((e_a,S)\) (anisotropic, aligned).

18.2.5.2 Theorem 18.2.5-A (diffusion closure; DERIVE template).

Assume:

  1. \(Q\) is entropy dissipative and has an equilibrium manifold \(\{e_a M_0\}\) with \(\int M_0\,dv=1\),

  2. the linearized operator \(\mathcal{L}\) around \(M_0\) has a spectral gap on the orthogonal complement of the conserved modes,

  3. \(f^\varepsilon\) admits uniform bounds in \(L^1\cap L^\infty\) and second moment,

  4. conversion/force terms are \(O(1)\) in \(\varepsilon\) (not scaling like \(1/\varepsilon\)).

Then as \(\varepsilon\to 0\), \(f^\varepsilon \to f^{\mathrm{eq}}=e_a M_0\) and the flux satisfies a constitutive law \[S = -D\,\nabla_x e_a \quad\text{(plus lower-order drift terms if $F\neq 0$)}, \label{eq:part18_fick_law}\] where the diffusion tensor \(D\) is computable from a cell problem involving \(\mathcal{L}^{-1}\): \[D_{ij} = -\int_V v_i\, \chi_j(v)\,dv, \qquad \mathcal{L}\chi_j = v_j M_0, \label{eq:part18_diffusion_tensor_cell_problem}\] and \(e_a\) solves the diffusion equation (with conversion sources from \(\rho\)): \[\partial_t e_a = \nabla_x\cdot(D\nabla_x e_a) + \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]-\mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f^{\mathrm{eq}}] + J_{a,\mathrm{bg}}. \label{eq:part18_diffusion_equation_ea}\] Proof template. Use entropy dissipation to show convergence to the equilibrium manifold, identify the first-order correction via Hilbert expansion, and pass to the limit in the moment equation for \(e_a\). \(\square\)

18.2.5.3 Connection to Part 07 isotropic closure.

In the isotropic equilibrium \(f^{\mathrm{eq}}=e_a M_0\), one obtains \[T = \int_V v\otimes v\ e_a M_0\,dv = e_a\ \kappa_T I, \qquad \kappa_T:=\frac{1}{d}\int_V |v|^2 M_0(v)\,dv, \label{eq:part18_isotropic_T_closure}\] which is exactly the “\(T=\kappa_T e_a I\)” closure (Part 07) but now derived as an equilibrium identity.

18.2.5.4 Hyperbolic/ballistic closure (aligned regime; DERIVE/HYP).

If collisions are weak (large \(\varepsilon\)) and throughput-limited velocities dominate, then transport is approximately ballistic: \[\partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot S \approx \text{(conversion)}, \qquad \partial_t S + \nabla\cdot T \approx \text{(forces + relaxation)}. \label{eq:part18_ballistic_moment_pair}\] A typical aligned closure is \[T \approx \frac{S\otimes S}{e_a} + p(e_a)\,I, \label{eq:part18_aligned_closure}\] which becomes hyperbolic when the resulting flux Jacobian is symmetrizable and has real eigenvalues (see §18.3).

18.3 18.3 Stability and canonicity: linearization and hyperbolic/parabolic regime conditions

18.3.1 18.3.1 LOCK: closed moment systems and admissible closures

A closure is a map that expresses higher moments in terms of lower ones. In the \((e_a,S)\) closure level we require a constitutive relation \[T = \mathcal{T}(e_a,S;\theta_{\mathrm{cl}}), \label{eq:part18_T_closure_general}\] with parameters \(\theta_{\mathrm{cl}}\) fixed by the chosen regime (Part 07).

18.3.1.1 Closure admissibility gates (LOCK).

A closure \(\mathcal{T}\) is admissible if it satisfies:

  1. Symmetry: \(T=T^\top\).

  2. Positivity: for any vector \(\xi\in\mathbb{R}^d\), \[\xi^\top T \xi \ge 0 \quad\text{whenever } f\ge 0 \text{ (i.e.\ $T$ must be positive semidefinite).} \label{eq:part18_T_positive_semidefinite_gate}\]

  3. Consistency with equilibrium: in isotropic limit \(S=0\), \(T=\kappa_T(e_a) e_a I\) for some \(\kappa_T(e_a)\ge 0\) (if the model claims isotropy closure).

  4. Throughput consistency: if the model enforces \(|S|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\), the closure must not imply finite-time propagation faster than \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) (made precise below).

18.3.2 18.3.2 DERIVE: linearization about homogeneous equilibrium

Assume a homogeneous equilibrium (or base state): \[e_a(t,x)=\bar e_a,\qquad S(t,x)=0,\qquad \rho(t,x)=\bar\rho, \qquad (\text{and }e_{\mathrm{bg}}=\bar e_{\mathrm{bg}}\text{ if present}), \label{eq:part18_base_state}\] with constants \(\bar e_a,\bar\rho\ge 0\).

Consider perturbations \(e'\), \(S'\), \(\rho'\) with small amplitude: \[e_a=\bar e_a + e',\qquad S=S',\qquad \rho=\bar\rho+\rho'. \label{eq:part18_perturbations_def}\]

From [eq:part18_mobile_budget_eq_simplified] and [eq:part18_flux_equation_general] (ignoring external forcing for the stability classification), the linearized system takes the schematic form \[\partial_t e' + \nabla\cdot S' = \mathcal{L}_e(\rho',e',S'), \label{eq:part18_linear_e}\] \[\partial_t S' + \nabla\cdot\big(T'\big) = \mathcal{L}_S(\rho',e',S'), \label{eq:part18_linear_S}\] where \(T'\) is obtained from the closure linearization: \[T' = \left.\partial_{e_a}\mathcal{T}\right|_{(\bar e_a,0)} e' + \left.\partial_{S}\mathcal{T}\right|_{(\bar e_a,0)}\!\cdot S'. \label{eq:part18_T_linearization}\] (Here \(\partial_S\mathcal{T}\) is a rank-3 tensor acting linearly on \(S'\).)

18.3.2.1 Fourier mode analysis.

On \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\), take Fourier modes \(e'(t,x)=\hat e(t) e^{ik\cdot x}\), \(S'(t,x)=\hat S(t)e^{ik\cdot x}\). Then \(\nabla\cdot S' \mapsto i k\cdot \hat S\) and \(\nabla\cdot T' \mapsto i\,\mathcal{A}(k)\hat U\) where \(\hat U\) stacks \((\hat e,\hat S)\). The eigenvalues determine growth/decay and wave speeds.

18.3.3 18.3.3 LOCK/DERIVE: parabolic diffusion regime

In the diffusion regime, the flux is slaved to gradients: \[S = -D\nabla e_a, \label{eq:part18_diffusion_closure_S}\] and therefore the closed equation is \[\partial_t e_a = \nabla\cdot(D\nabla e_a) + \text{(conversion/stage terms)}. \label{eq:part18_diffusion_closed_equation}\] This is parabolic if \(D\) is symmetric positive definite: \[\xi^\top D \xi \ge d_{\min}|\xi|^2,\qquad d_{\min}>0. \label{eq:part18_parabolicity_condition}\]

18.3.3.1 Gate PAR (well-posed diffusion).

The diffusion closure is PASS if: \[D=D^\top,\qquad D\succeq d_{\min} I \ \text{(for some }d_{\min}>0), \qquad \text{and conversion terms are locally Lipschitz in }(e_a,\rho). \label{eq:part18_gate_PAR}\] This ensures standard existence/uniqueness and maximum principles for \(e_a\) (modulo boundary conditions).

18.3.4 18.3.4 LOCK/DERIVE: hyperbolic finite-speed regime (Cattaneo/telegraph closure)

Diffusion implies infinite propagation speed, which conflicts with a strict throughput gate if interpreted literally. A standard finite-speed regularization consistent with fast relaxation from kinetic theory is the Cattaneo law: \[\tau_S \partial_t S + S = -D\nabla e_a, \qquad \tau_S>0, \label{eq:part18_cattaneo_law}\] coupled with continuity \(\partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot S = \text{(sources)}\). Eliminating \(S\) gives the telegraph-type equation: \[\tau_S \partial_t^2 e_a + \partial_t e_a = \nabla\cdot(D\nabla e_a) + \text{(time-derivatives of sources)}. \label{eq:part18_telegraph_eq}\] In the homogeneous source-free case, the characteristic wave speed is \[c_{\mathrm{eff}} = \sqrt{\lambda_{\max}(D)/\tau_S}, \label{eq:part18_effective_speed}\] where \(\lambda_{\max}(D)\) is the largest eigenvalue of \(D\).

18.3.4.1 Gate HYP-speed (throughput consistency).

If the model enforces a strict throughput speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\), then require \[c_{\mathrm{eff}} \le c_{\mathrm{th}} \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \lambda_{\max}(D)\le \tau_S c_{\mathrm{th}}^2. \label{eq:part18_gate_HYP_speed}\] Violation is FAIL[speed].

18.3.4.2 Gate HYP-wellposed (hyperbolic stability).

The Cattaneo system is PASS if \(\tau_S>0\) and \(D\succeq 0\), with appropriate boundary conditions (e.g. no-flux or compatible inflow/outflow). It is strictly hyperbolic in the short-time limit when \(D\) is positive definite.

18.3.5 18.3.5 DERIVE: symmetrizable hyperbolic moment closures (entropy variables)

For higher-fidelity hyperbolic models that keep \(S\) dynamically, we consider a first-order system: \[\partial_t \begin{pmatrix} e_a\\ S \end{pmatrix} + \sum_{j=1}^d \partial_{x_j} \begin{pmatrix} S_j\\ T_{1j}\\ \vdots\\ T_{dj} \end{pmatrix} = \text{(sources)}. \label{eq:part18_first_order_moment_system}\] A closure \(T=\mathcal{T}(e_a,S)\) yields a quasilinear system \[\partial_t U + \sum_{j=1}^d A_j(U)\,\partial_{x_j}U = \text{(sources)}, \qquad U:=(e_a,S)\in \mathbb{R}^{1+d}. \label{eq:part18_quasilinear_system}\]

18.3.5.1 Definition (symmetrizable hyperbolic; LOCK).

The system is symmetrizable hyperbolic if there exists a symmetric positive definite matrix \(H(U)\) (a symmetrizer) such that for each \(j\), \[H(U)\,A_j(U) \ \text{is symmetric}. \label{eq:part18_symmetrizer_def}\] A sufficient construction is often obtained from a convex entropy \(\eta(U)\): \[H(U)=\nabla^2 \eta(U)\succ 0. \label{eq:part18_entropy_hessian_symmetrizer}\]

18.3.5.2 Gate SH (hyperbolic canonicity).

A moment closure is PASS for hyperbolic canonicity if it admits a convex entropy \(\eta(U)\) that symmetrizes the flux Jacobians. This gate is the mathematical implementation of “stability/canonicity” at the PDE level.

18.4 18.4 Correspondence limits: Newton/GR weak field, and matching to quantum (actor) excitations

18.4.1 18.4.1 LOCK: weak-field and low-velocity limit definitions

To compare with Newtonian and GR weak-field regimes, we declare the limiting conditions.

18.4.1.1 Weak-field potentials.

Let \(\Phi\) be an effective gravitational/deficit potential used in the force term: \[F(t,x,v) = -\nabla_x \Phi(t,x). \label{eq:part18_force_potential}\] Weak-field means \[\left|\frac{\Phi}{c^2}\right|\ll 1, \qquad \left|\frac{\nabla\Phi}{c^2}\right|L \ll 1, \label{eq:part18_weak_field_conditions}\] for a representative lengthscale \(L\).

18.4.1.2 Low-velocity (Newtonian) regime.

For mobile velocities: \[\frac{|v|}{c}\ll 1 \quad\text{(or more generally, characteristic speeds $\ll c$).} \label{eq:part18_low_velocity_condition}\]

These are LOCK regime declarations: any “Newton correspondence” claim must explicitly state that these conditions apply.

18.4.2 18.4.2 DERIVE: Newtonian correspondence from kinetic moments

Assume \(F=-\nabla\Phi\) and ignore relativistic corrections. Consider the first-moment equation [eq:part18_flux_equation_general] without collision momentum production and with no conversion contribution to momentum (e.g. injection kernel is isotropic so \(\int v\,\mu\rho M\,dv=0\) and capture is isotropic so it only damps \(S\)): \[\partial_t S + \nabla\cdot T = -\int_V (-\nabla\Phi)\,f\,dv - \lambda S + \cdots = e_a \nabla\Phi - \lambda S + \cdots \label{eq:part18_momentum_like_with_potential}\] If in a pressureless/strongly aligned regime \(T\approx S\otimes S/e_a\) and \(S=e_a u\) (define velocity field \(u\)), then \(T\approx e_a u\otimes u\) and the equation becomes \[\partial_t(e_a u) + \nabla\cdot(e_a u\otimes u) = e_a \nabla\Phi - \lambda e_a u + \cdots \label{eq:part18_euler_like}\] which is an Euler-like momentum equation with a force \(+\nabla\Phi\) and drag \(-\lambda u\) (sign convention depends on whether \(F=-\nabla\Phi\) is an attractive force; if attractive, the physical acceleration is \(- \nabla\Phi\); one must fix this in Part 09’s deficit interpretation). The correspondence gate is that the acceleration term matches Newton: \[\text{Gate NEWT-ACC:}\qquad \dot u \approx -\nabla\Phi \quad\text{in the pressureless, low-drag limit.} \label{eq:part18_gate_NEWT_ACC}\] This provides a clear test: if the model’s deficit force has the wrong sign or scaling, it fails the Newtonian correspondence at the moment level.

18.4.2.1 HYP: Poisson closure for \(\Phi\).

To connect to Newton/GR weak-field, one may impose a Poisson-like equation: \[-\Delta\Phi = 4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\ \rho_{\mathrm{src}}, \label{eq:part18_poisson_like}\] where \(\rho_{\mathrm{src}}\) is the appropriate source density (which may differ from baryonic density if deficit/stage effects contribute). This is HYP unless derived from the VP stage elasticity (Parts 09, 13).

18.4.3 18.4.3 DERIVE: GR weak-field consistency gates (metric potentials)

In GR weak-field (scalar perturbations), one writes the perturbed metric as in Part 16: \[ds^2 = -(1+2\Psi)c^2 dt^2 + a(t)^2(1-2\Phi)\,d\Sigma_k^2. \label{eq:part18_metric_weak_field}\] To match the VP/JL effective force description with GR, a minimal gate set is:

18.4.3.1 Gate GR-1 (Newtonian limit of \(\Psi\)).

In the nonrelativistic limit, the geodesic acceleration is \(-\nabla\Psi\). Therefore if the kinetic force is \(F=-\nabla\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\), then one requires \[\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}} \equiv \Psi \quad\text{(up to a constant gauge shift)} \label{eq:part18_gate_GR1}\] in the weak-field regime.

18.4.3.2 Gate GR-2 (lensing potential).

Light bending depends on \(\Phi+\Psi\). If the model uses modified lensing/growth functions (Part 15), then the kinetic/moment force sector must reproduce the same \(\Phi,\Psi\) used in the CMB/lensing computations. Concretely: \[\text{Gate GR-2:}\qquad \text{the $(\Phi,\Psi)$ implied by the force/closure must equal the $(\Phi,\Psi)$ used in the lensing kernel.} \label{eq:part18_gate_GR2}\]

18.4.3.3 Gate GR-3 (slip consistency).

If the model predicts anisotropic stress (e.g. via alignment fields), then \(\Phi\neq\Psi\) may occur. The predicted slip \(\Phi-\Psi\) must be consistent across:

  • the moment system (via effective stress terms),

  • the cosmological growth/lensing parameterization (Part 15),

  • the CMB ISW/lensing gates (Part 16).

Otherwise FAIL[slip-coherence].

18.4.4 18.4.4 DERIVE/HYP: matching to quantum (actor) excitations via Wigner kinetics

This subsection connects the “actor” (quantum excitation) layer to the kinetic \(f\) layer.

18.4.4.1 LOCK: Wigner transform definition (one-particle density matrix).

Let \(\hat\rho^{(1)}(t)\) be a one-particle density operator (or reduced density matrix) of the actor sector. The Wigner function \(W(t,x,p)\) is defined by \[W(t,x,p) := \frac{1}{(2\pi\hbar)^d}\int_{\mathbb{R}^d} e^{-\frac{i}{\hbar}p\cdot y} \left\langle x+\frac{y}{2}\right|\hat\rho^{(1)}(t)\left|x-\frac{y}{2}\right\rangle \,dy. \label{eq:part18_wigner_def}\] In semiclassical regimes, \(W\) is approximately nonnegative and behaves like a classical phase-space density.

18.4.4.2 DERIVE: semiclassical limit \(\hbar\to 0\) yields kinetic transport.

For a Hamiltonian \(\hat H=\frac{\hat p^2}{2m}+V(\hat x)\), the von Neumann equation \(\partial_t\hat\rho^{(1)}=\frac{1}{i\hbar}[\hat H,\hat\rho^{(1)}]\) implies a Wigner equation whose leading order in \(\hbar\) is the classical Liouville equation: \[\partial_t W + \frac{p}{m}\cdot \nabla_x W - \nabla_x V\cdot \nabla_p W = O(\hbar^2). \label{eq:part18_wigner_liouville}\] Identifying \(v=p/m\) and \(f\approx W\) yields the transport part of [eq:part18_kinetic_general]. Interactions and decoherence generate collision terms \(Q[f]\) in the kinetic limit (quantum Boltzmann / Lindblad-to-Boltzmann reductions).

18.4.4.3 HYP: quantum-to-VP conversion and stage memory.

If the VP/JL ontology asserts that actor excitations convert into stage/background degrees (and vice versa), then the conversion operators in [eq:part18_conversion_C_spec] represent the semiclassical limit of a quantum open-system coupling between actor and stage registers. In that case the following gate is required:

18.4.4.4 Gate Q-UNIT (global unitarity vs. effective dissipation).

If the global actor+stage system is unitary (Part 17), then any effective collision/conversion operator that appears dissipative in the actor-only description must be realizable as a partial-trace reduction of a unitary evolution on a larger Hilbert space. Operationally, the effective entropy increase in the actor sector must be accompanied by entropy/mutual-information bookkeeping with the stage register. Failure is FAIL[unitarity-ledger].

18.5 18.5 Approximation-layer management: which approximations allow which errors (the error ledger)

This subsection defines the approximation ledger: a structured method to track approximations and bound their induced error. This is essential because Parts 06–16 rely on reduced models (moments + closures), and those reductions are only meaningful within declared regimes.

18.5.1 18.5.1 LOCK: model stack and projection operators

Define a hierarchy of models:

  • Level K (kinetic): the full \((f,\rho)\) system [eq:part18_kinetic_general][eq:part18_rho_general].

  • Level M\(_n\) (moment hierarchy): equations for moments up to order \(n\) (requires moments up to \(n+1\)).

  • Level C\(_n\) (closed moments): impose a closure to express moments of order \(n+1\) in terms of \(\le n\).

  • Level R (reduced PDE): diffusion/telegraph/Euler-like reductions used in regime maps (Part 07) and cosmology modules (Parts 14–16).

Let \(\Pi_n\) denote the moment projection mapping a distribution \(f\) to its first \(n\) moments: \[\Pi_0[f]=e_a,\qquad \Pi_1[f]=(e_a,S),\qquad \Pi_2[f]=(e_a,S,T),\ \ldots \label{eq:part18_projection_def}\]

A closure defines an approximate reconstruction (lifting) operator \(\mathcal{L}_n\) mapping moments back to a surrogate distribution: \[f_{\mathrm{cl}} := \mathcal{L}_n\big(\Pi_n[f]\big), \qquad \Pi_n[f_{\mathrm{cl}}]=\Pi_n[f] \quad\text{(consistency requirement).} \label{eq:part18_lifting_def}\]

18.5.2 18.5.2 LOCK: error variables and norms

Define the kinetic closure error: \[g := f - f_{\mathrm{cl}}, \label{eq:part18_g_def}\] and the moment residual at level \(n\): \[\mathcal{R}_{n+1} := M_{n+1}[f] - M_{n+1}[f_{\mathrm{cl}}], \label{eq:part18_moment_residual_def}\] where \(M_{n+1}\) denotes the \((n{+}1)\)-th moment tensor (e.g. \(M_2=T\), \(M_3=U\)).

Choose a norm to measure errors. A minimal choice is \[\|g\|_{L^2(\Omega\times V)} \quad\text{and}\quad \|\mathcal{R}_{n+1}\|_{L^2(\Omega)}. \label{eq:part18_error_norms}\] For diffusion limits, relative entropy norms may be stronger; for hyperbolic systems, Sobolev \(H^s\) norms are typically used.

18.5.3 18.5.3 DERIVE: a generic differential inequality (error ledger equation)

Assume:

  • the kinetic equation is well-posed and sufficiently smooth,

  • the closure reconstruction \(f_{\mathrm{cl}}\) is smooth in the retained moments,

  • the collision operator yields coercivity on the complement of conserved modes (spectral gap).

Then \(g\) satisfies an equation obtained by subtracting the “closed” kinetic surrogate from the full kinetic equation: \[\partial_t g + v\cdot\nabla_x g = \frac{1}{\varepsilon}\big(Q[f]-Q[f_{\mathrm{cl}}]\big) + \mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{res}}, \label{eq:part18_g_equation}\] where \(\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{res}}\) contains:

  • force differences (if \(F\) depends on moments),

  • conversion differences (if conversion depends on \(f\) beyond retained moments),

  • explicit closure residual terms from truncating higher moments.

Under a spectral gap assumption, \[\left\langle g,\ Q[f]-Q[f_{\mathrm{cl}}]\right\rangle \le -\lambda_\ast \|g_\perp\|^2, \label{eq:part18_spectral_gap_coercivity}\] where \(g_\perp\) is the component orthogonal to the conserved modes and \(\lambda_\ast>0\).

Taking an \(L^2\) energy estimate yields \[\frac{1}{2}\frac{d}{dt}\|g\|_{L^2}^2 \le -\frac{\lambda_\ast}{\varepsilon}\|g_\perp\|^2 + \|g\|_{L^2}\ \|\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{res}}\|_{L^2}. \label{eq:part18_error_energy_ineq}\] Therefore, \[\frac{d}{dt}\|g\|_{L^2} \le \|\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{res}}\|_{L^2} \quad\text{(and typically }-\frac{\lambda_\ast}{\varepsilon}\|g_\perp\| \text{ damping is present).} \label{eq:part18_error_gronwall_form}\] Integrating, \[\|g(t)\|_{L^2} \le \|g(0)\|_{L^2} + \int_0^t \|\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{res}}(s)\|_{L^2}\,ds, \label{eq:part18_error_integral_bound}\] and with damping the bound improves.

18.5.3.1 Error ledger interpretation.

The closure is valid on \([0,T]\) if: \[\int_0^T \|\mathcal{F}_{\mathrm{res}}(s)\|_{L^2}\,ds \le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{tol}} \label{eq:part18_error_ledger_gate}\] for a locked tolerance \(\varepsilon_{\mathrm{tol}}\). Otherwise the reduction is FAIL[closure-error] and one must:

  • increase the retained moment order \(n\),

  • change the closure family (Part 07 selection tree),

  • or change the regime declaration (the model is being used outside its validity window).

18.5.4 18.5.4 LOCK: approximation parameters and explicit “error budget” categories

We define canonical small parameters (the model may not need all; unused parameters must be set to \(0\) or removed):

  • \(\varepsilon\) (relaxation/Knudsen): controls kinetic \(\to\) diffusion/hydrodynamic limits.

  • \(\delta_{\mathrm{aniso}}\) (anisotropy): quantifies departure from isotropy (e.g. \(|S|/(c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a)\) or higher-order anisotropy norms).

  • \(\eta_{\mathrm{rel}}\) (relativistic correction): scales terms of order \((|v|/c)^2\) or \(|\Phi|/c^2\).

  • \(\beta_{\mathrm{bg}}\) (stage-coupling strength): measures actor–stage exchange magnitude relative to actor transport.

  • \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{geom}}\) (geometry/curvature): measures curvature gradients relative to local patch size (for using local Cartesian approximations).

18.5.4.1 LOCK: error budget ledger statement.

Any reduced model output must declare the total error budget as the sum of category contributions: \[\mathrm{Err}_{\mathrm{tot}} \le \mathrm{Err}_{\varepsilon} +\mathrm{Err}_{\delta_{\mathrm{aniso}}} +\mathrm{Err}_{\eta_{\mathrm{rel}}} +\mathrm{Err}_{\beta_{\mathrm{bg}}} +\mathrm{Err}_{\epsilon_{\mathrm{geom}}} +\cdots, \label{eq:part18_total_error_budget}\] and PASS requires \(\mathrm{Err}_{\mathrm{tot}}\le \mathrm{Err}_{\max}\) with \(\mathrm{Err}_{\max}\) locked per application (e.g. galaxy RC vs. CMB).

18.6 18.6 Theorem–Lemma–Proof template linkage (to Appendix B)

This subsection standardizes how rigorous statements are written so that each Part can reference a unified proof library (Appendix B). The content below is LOCK for document structure.

18.6.1 18.6.1 LOCK: statement taxonomy and dependency rules

Every formal claim must be one of:

  • Definition: introduces an object or property.

  • Assumption: declares a hypothesis (must include tier tag HYP or LOCK).

  • Lemma: local technical result supporting a theorem.

  • Proposition: medium-weight claim, often constructive.

  • Theorem: central claim; must list assumptions and gates.

  • Corollary: direct consequence of a theorem.

  • Gate: PASS/FAIL criterion with explicit computable conditions.

18.6.1.1 Dependency rule (LOCK).

A theorem in Part \(p\) may depend on:

  • definitions and LOCK axioms from Parts \(\le p\),

  • explicitly listed HYP assumptions (must be enumerated),

  • lemmas/theorems already proved (or referenced) in Appendix B.

Hidden dependencies are forbidden; if a theorem uses a fact, it must cite its number or restate it as an assumption.

18.6.2 18.6.2 LOCK: LaTeX proof skeletons (drop-in templates)

Below are standardized LaTeX skeletons. (Appendix B will contain the environment declarations; here we show usage.)

18.6.2.1 Definition template.

\[\text{\textbf{Definition (NAME).}}\quad \text{State the object, domain, and constraints.} \label{eq:part18_def_template}\]

18.6.2.2 Assumption template.

\[\text{\textbf{Assumption (A\#; Tier=\textsf{LOCK/HYP}).}}\quad \text{List precise hypotheses, including regularity and bounds.} \label{eq:part18_assumption_template}\]

18.6.2.3 Lemma template.

\[\text{\textbf{Lemma (L\#).}}\quad \text{Statement.} \label{eq:part18_lemma_template}\] Proof. 

  • Step 1: reduce to a standard identity (integration by parts / known inequality).

  • Step 2: control boundary terms using declared boundary conditions.

  • Step 3: conclude the bound/identity.

\(\square\)

18.6.2.4 Theorem template.

\[\text{\textbf{Theorem (T\#; Tier=\textsf{DERIVE}).}}\quad \text{Statement with explicit assumptions (A\#) and consequences.} \label{eq:part18_theorem_template}\] Proof. 

  • Step 0 (setup): specify norms, spaces, and the PDE/ODE framework.

  • Step 1 (a priori estimate): derive the controlling inequality (entropy/energy).

  • Step 2 (compactness or contraction): show existence/uniqueness.

  • Step 3 (limit/closure): justify passage to the reduced model if needed.

  • Step 4 (gates): verify all PASS conditions and record failure modes.

\(\square\)

18.6.2.5 Gate template.

\[\text{\textbf{Gate (G\#).}}\quad \text{PASS iff explicit inequalities/identities hold; otherwise FAIL with tag.} \label{eq:part18_gate_template}\]

19 PART 19. Observational & Numerical Test Suite: Test Matrix and Adjudication (Output 19)

This Part defines the test operating system for the VP/Jammed-Lattice (VP/JL) framework: a standardized, reproducible, and falsifiable pipeline that maps \[\text{Claim} \;\to\; \text{Prediction} \;\to\; \text{Dataset} \;\to\; \text{Gate} \;\to\; \text{PASS/FAIL}.\] It is not optional “validation language.” It is the mechanism that prevents hidden tuning, prevents circular inference, and enforces cross-phenomenon consistency. It also formalizes numerical verification/validation (V&V), convergence, sensitivity, and artifact reporting as first-class LOCK objects.

19.0.0.1 Claim tiers in this Part.

  • LOCK: the test matrix format, parameter policies, dataset split rules, numerical protocols, and PASS/FAIL gate definitions.

  • DERIVE: how a given model instance induces a prediction map and a likelihood, and how joint tests combine.

  • HYP: any new “mechanism” introduced to explain a dataset beyond previously locked primitives.

  • SPEC: concrete choices of optimizer/MCMC, grids, priors, and benchmark thresholds (once chosen they must be locked for that test family).

19.0.0.2 Core principle (anti-tuning).

No claim is considered validated unless it passes:

  1. an in-scope gate (goodness-of-fit on the intended dataset),

  2. at least one null test (no spurious success when the cause is removed),

  3. at least one cross-validation or out-of-sample gate,

  4. a multi-phenomenon coherence gate if the claim is presented as a single-cause explanation of multiple phenomena.

19.1 19.1 Test matrix standard: Claim \(\to\) Prediction \(\to\) Dataset \(\to\) Gate

19.1.1 19.1.1 LOCK: identifiers, versioning, and immutable records

Every test must have immutable identifiers:

  • Claim ID: C-XX.YY (e.g. C-09.2 for “rotation-curve flatness mechanism”).

  • Test ID: T-XX.YY-ZZ where ZZ enumerates variants (e.g. T-09.2-01).

  • Model build ID: a hash of the exact code + config (e.g. gitSHA + config hash).

  • Dataset ID: D-... including preprocessing version and split seed.

  • Artifact ID: A-... for every produced figure/table/chain/residual file.

All IDs must be written into a machine-readable manifest file (example: manifest.json or manifest.yaml) that is archived with outputs.

19.1.2 19.1.2 LOCK: the prediction map and observation model

For each test, define:

  • Parameter vector \(\theta\in\Theta\) (allowed degrees of freedom).

  • Prediction map \(\mathcal{P}\) that maps parameters into a predicted data vector: \[\hat y(\theta) = \mathcal{P}(\theta) \in \mathbb{R}^n. \label{eq:part19_prediction_map}\]

  • Observation model linking the true model output to measured data: \[y = \hat y(\theta) + \epsilon, \qquad \mathbb{E}[\epsilon]=0, \qquad \mathrm{Cov}(\epsilon)=C. \label{eq:part19_observation_model}\]

Here \(y\in\mathbb{R}^n\) is the observed data vector and \(C\in\mathbb{R}^{n\times n}\) is the data covariance matrix (or an explicitly specified approximation).

19.1.3 19.1.3 LOCK: residuals, goodness-of-fit, and likelihood

19.1.3.1 Residual definition.

\[r(\theta) := y - \hat y(\theta). \label{eq:part19_residual_def}\]

19.1.3.2 Weighted residual norm and chi-square.

If \(C\) is positive definite, define: \[\chi^2(\theta) := r(\theta)^{\mathsf T} C^{-1} r(\theta). \label{eq:part19_chi2_def}\] Define degrees of freedom: \[\nu := n - k_{\mathrm{eff}}, \label{eq:part19_dof_def}\] where \(k_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is the effective number of fitted parameters for that test under the parameter policy of §19.2. The reduced chi-square is \[\chi^2_{\nu} := \frac{\chi^2}{\nu}. \label{eq:part19_reduced_chi2_def}\]

19.1.3.3 Gaussian likelihood (LOCK default, unless otherwise specified).

\[\mathcal{L}(\theta) := p(y\mid \theta) = \frac{1}{\sqrt{(2\pi)^n \det C}} \exp\!\left(-\frac{1}{2}\chi^2(\theta)\right). \label{eq:part19_gaussian_likelihood}\] If non-Gaussian noise is used (Poisson counts, heavy tails), the likelihood must be stated explicitly and locked.

19.1.3.4 Model comparison metrics (optional but standardized).

For point-estimate fitting with maximum likelihood \(\hat\theta\), define: \[\begin{aligned} \mathrm{AIC} &:= 2k_{\mathrm{eff}} - 2\ln\mathcal{L}(\hat\theta), \label{eq:part19_AIC}\\ \mathrm{BIC} &:= k_{\mathrm{eff}}\ln n - 2\ln\mathcal{L}(\hat\theta). \label{eq:part19_BIC}\end{aligned}\] If Bayesian evidence is computed: \[Z := \int_{\Theta} \mathcal{L}(\theta)\,\pi(\theta)\,d\theta, \label{eq:part19_evidence_def}\] with prior \(\pi(\theta)\) explicitly defined and locked.

19.1.4 19.1.4 LOCK: Gate definitions (PASS/FAIL logic)

A Gate is a computable predicate \(G\) that outputs PASS or FAIL. For a test to PASS, it must satisfy all mandatory gates.

19.1.4.1 Gate family (minimum set).

For each test, define at least:

  • Fit gate: a threshold on \(\chi^2_\nu\) or on p-value or on an information criterion relative to a baseline.

  • Null gate: a check that the same procedure does not succeed when the cause is disabled.

  • Robustness gate: stability under data split, perturbations, or numerical resolution changes.

  • Coherence gate: if a single cause is claimed for multiple datasets, the same parameters (or constrained transforms) must fit all simultaneously.

19.1.4.2 Canonical thresholds (can be overridden only by locked domain-specific rules).

A default, conservative LOCK gate set: \[\begin{aligned} \text{G-FIT:}\quad & 0.8 \le \chi^2_{\nu}(\hat\theta) \le 1.2, \label{eq:part19_gate_fit_default}\\ \text{G-PVAL:}\quad & p\text{-value}(\hat\theta)\ge 0.05, \label{eq:part19_gate_pval_default}\\ \text{G-BASE:}\quad & \Delta \mathrm{BIC} := \mathrm{BIC}_{\mathrm{VP/JL}}-\mathrm{BIC}_{\mathrm{baseline}} \le -6, \label{eq:part19_gate_bic_default}\end{aligned}\] where the baseline must be declared (e.g. \(\Lambda\)CDM for cosmology; Newton+DM halo for rotation curves; GR+plasma jet models for AGN jets). The criterion [eq:part19_gate_bic_default] is optional if a baseline is not meaningful; if omitted, the omission must be justified and locked.

19.1.5 19.1.5 LOCK: test matrix template (standard form)

Standard test matrix row format (LOCK). Each test must be instanced as one row (or a small block) with immutable IDs.
Test ID Claim ID Tier Prediction Dataset Gate(s)
T-XX.YY-ZZ C-XX.YY LOCK/DERIVE/HYP/SPEC \(\hat y=\mathcal{P}(\theta)\); explicit equation(s), regime assumptions, and outputs Dataset ID; preprocessing; split seed; cov \(C\) G-FIT, G-NULL, G-ROB, G-COH; thresholds; baseline comparison

19.1.5.1 LOCK: mandatory attachments per matrix row.

Each test row must link to:

  • config file (parameters, priors, solver settings),

  • dataset manifest (source, preprocessing, split, covariance),

  • code version/build hash,

  • outputs (residuals, plots, summary tables),

  • PASS/FAIL decision with explicit gate values.

19.2 19.2 Parameter estimation policy: allowed degrees of freedom and no re-fitting on the same data

19.2.1 19.2.1 LOCK: parameter partitions (LOCK/DERIVE/FIT) and transforms

Partition all parameters into disjoint sets: \[\theta = (\theta_{\mathrm{lock}},\ \theta_{\mathrm{derive}},\ \theta_{\mathrm{fit}}). \label{eq:part19_theta_partition}\]

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{lock}}\): fixed constants and definitions (e.g. unit realizations, universal constants, fixed closure choices).

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{derive}}\): computed deterministically from \(\theta_{\mathrm{lock}}\) and explicit inputs (no data fitting).

  • \(\theta_{\mathrm{fit}}\): permitted to vary during inference; these are the only true degrees of freedom.

Any reclassification (e.g. moving a parameter from LOCK to FIT) is a major methodological change and must trigger a new versioned test suite run and invalidate previous PASS statuses.

19.2.1.1 LOCK: parameter transforms and constraints.

If constraints exist (positivity, speed limits, stability), enforce them via transforms: \[\theta_{\mathrm{fit}} = \mathcal{T}(\phi),\qquad \phi\in\mathbb{R}^m, \label{eq:part19_param_transform}\] e.g. \(\kappa=\exp(\phi)\) to enforce \(\kappa>0\), or logistic maps for bounded parameters. The transform \(\mathcal{T}\) must be recorded in the manifest.

19.2.2 19.2.2 LOCK: priors, hyperparameters, and “no hidden tuning”

If Bayesian inference is used, priors must be explicit: \[\pi(\theta_{\mathrm{fit}})=\text{(explicit PDF with fixed hyperparameters)}. \label{eq:part19_prior_def}\] Hyperparameters (prior widths, regularization weights, smoothing scales) are themselves parameters. They must be either:

  • LOCK (fixed), or

  • included in \(\theta_{\mathrm{fit}}\) and then counted in \(k_{\mathrm{eff}}\) and subjected to the same data split policy.

Undeclared hyperparameter tuning is FAIL[tuning].

19.2.3 19.2.3 LOCK: no re-fitting on the same dataset rule (data reuse prohibition)

Define a dataset split: \[D = D_{\mathrm{train}} \cup D_{\mathrm{val}} \cup D_{\mathrm{test}}, \qquad D_{\mathrm{train}}\cap D_{\mathrm{val}}=\varnothing,\ D_{\mathrm{train}}\cap D_{\mathrm{test}}=\varnothing,\ D_{\mathrm{val}}\cap D_{\mathrm{test}}=\varnothing. \label{eq:part19_dataset_split}\] The split is determined by a locked seed and recorded in the dataset manifest.

19.2.3.1 LOCK: rule.

  1. Training: \(\theta_{\mathrm{fit}}\) may be fitted only on \(D_{\mathrm{train}}\).

  2. Model selection: closure family choice, hyperparameters, stopping rules may be chosen only using \(D_{\mathrm{val}}\).

  3. Final adjudication: PASS/FAIL must be evaluated only on \(D_{\mathrm{test}}\).

Any use of \(D_{\mathrm{test}}\) for selection or tuning invalidates the test and triggers FAIL[data-leak].

19.2.3.2 Same dataset re-fit prohibition across claims.

If two claims are tested on the same dataset \(D\), then: \[\theta_{\mathrm{fit}} \text{ may be re-fit for a new claim only if a new, disjoint } D_{\mathrm{test}} \text{ is reserved.} \label{eq:part19_refit_prohibition}\] Otherwise, the second test must reuse the previously fitted parameters (or use a strictly nested parameter subset) and will be adjudicated as an out-of-sample check.

19.2.4 19.2.4 DERIVE: joint inference for “one cause, many phenomena”

If a single mechanism is claimed to explain multiple datasets \(D_1,\dots,D_M\), then the correct evaluation is joint: \[\mathcal{L}_{\mathrm{joint}}(\theta) = \prod_{i=1}^{M} \mathcal{L}_i(\theta), \qquad \ln\mathcal{L}_{\mathrm{joint}} = \sum_{i=1}^{M}\ln\mathcal{L}_i. \label{eq:part19_joint_likelihood}\] For Gaussian likelihoods with independent datasets: \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{joint}}(\theta)=\sum_{i=1}^{M}\chi_i^2(\theta). \label{eq:part19_joint_chi2}\]

19.2.4.1 LOCK: coherence gate.

If a claim asserts common-cause explanation, it must pass: \[\text{G-COH:}\quad \chi^2_{\nu,\mathrm{joint}}(\hat\theta_{\mathrm{joint}})\ \text{passes the same fit gate and does not require dataset-specific re-tuning.} \label{eq:part19_gate_coh}\]

19.3 19.3 Null tests and cross-validation: does the same cause explain multiple effects simultaneously?

19.3.1 19.3.1 LOCK: null test categories

A null test is a test where the proposed causal ingredient is disabled while preserving all other conditions, and the model must fail to produce the claimed success. Let \(m(\theta)\) denote the model mechanism, and let \(\theta_{\mathrm{cause}}\subset\theta_{\mathrm{fit}}\) denote parameters that activate the mechanism. Define a null operator \(\mathcal{N}\) that disables the cause: \[\mathcal{N}:\ \theta \mapsto \theta^{(0)} \quad\text{such that}\quad \theta^{(0)}_{\mathrm{cause}}=0\ \text{(or baseline values)}, \qquad \theta^{(0)}_{\mathrm{rest}}=\theta_{\mathrm{rest}}. \label{eq:part19_null_operator}\]

Mandatory null categories:

  • Cause-off null (N1): set the mechanism amplitude to zero.

  • Permutation null (N2): shuffle labels or randomize sky/galaxy assignments that should destroy causal alignment but preserve marginal distributions.

  • Jackknife null (N3): remove subsets (regions, time segments) and verify stability of the inferred cause.

  • Synthetic null (N4): run the pipeline on synthetic data generated by a baseline model; verify that the VP/JL mechanism is not spuriously “detected.”

19.3.2 19.3.2 LOCK: null gates (quantitative FAIL conditions)

Let \(\Delta\chi^2\) denote the improvement relative to a baseline or relative to cause-off: \[\Delta\chi^2 := \chi^2(\theta^{(0)}) - \chi^2(\hat\theta), \label{eq:part19_delta_chi2}\] where \(\hat\theta\) is the fitted solution with the cause active and \(\theta^{(0)}\) is the null (cause-off) parameter vector.

19.3.2.1 Gate G-NULL (default).

A claim that relies on the cause must satisfy: \[\text{G-NULL:}\quad \Delta\chi^2 \ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}, \label{eq:part19_gate_null}\] with a locked \(\Delta\chi^2_{\min}\) chosen by domain and degrees of freedom (example SPEC: \(\Delta\chi^2_{\min}=25\) for a strong multi-parameter detection claim). If \(\Delta\chi^2\) is small, the “cause” is not actually required and the claim is downgraded or fails as causal.

19.3.2.2 Anti-overfit null (baseline success should not be replicable by randomization).

Let \(\hat\theta_{\mathrm{perm}}\) be the best-fit on permuted data. Require: \[\text{G-NULL-PERM:}\quad \chi^2(\hat\theta_{\mathrm{perm}}) \ge \chi^2(\hat\theta) + \delta_{\mathrm{perm}}, \label{eq:part19_gate_perm}\] with \(\delta_{\mathrm{perm}}>0\) locked. Otherwise FAIL[spurious].

19.3.3 19.3.3 LOCK: cross-validation protocols

19.3.3.1 K-fold cross-validation.

Partition \(D_{\mathrm{train}}\) into \(K\) folds \(F_1,\dots,F_K\). For each \(j\), fit on \(D_{\mathrm{train}}\setminus F_j\) and evaluate on \(F_j\). Define CV score: \[\mathrm{CV} := \frac{1}{K}\sum_{j=1}^{K}\chi^2_{F_j}(\hat\theta^{(-j)}), \label{eq:part19_cv_score}\] where \(\hat\theta^{(-j)}\) is fit without fold \(j\).

19.3.3.2 Spatial/sky-patch CV (cosmology/lensing/CMB).

Replace folds by disjoint sky patches \(\mathcal{S}_j\) to test anisotropy/foreground sensitivity: \[\mathrm{CV}_{\mathrm{sky}} := \frac{1}{K}\sum_{j=1}^K \chi^2_{\mathcal{S}_j}(\hat\theta^{(-j)}). \label{eq:part19_cv_sky}\]

19.3.3.3 Time-split CV (transients, AGN, light curves).

Use early-time segments for training and late-time for testing to prevent leakage.

19.3.3.4 Gate G-ROB (robustness).

Require the dispersion of CV scores is limited: \[\text{G-ROB:}\quad \mathrm{StdDev}\Big(\chi^2_{F_j}(\hat\theta^{(-j)})\Big) \le \sigma_{\max}, \label{eq:part19_gate_rob}\] with \(\sigma_{\max}\) locked. Large dispersion indicates instability or hidden dependence on subsets.

19.4 19.4 Numerical protocol: lattice/continuum solvers, convergence, sensitivity, and seed rules

19.4.1 19.4.1 LOCK: verification vs. validation

19.4.1.1 Verification (V).

Does the code solve the equations it claims to solve? This is tested by manufactured solutions and convergence.

19.4.1.2 Validation (V).

Do the equations model reality in the intended regime? This is tested by the observational gates.

Both are required. Passing validation without verification is forbidden: FAIL[no-V&V].

19.4.2 19.4.2 LOCK: discretization definitions and CFL/stability constraints

Let \(u\) denote any field (e.g. \(e_a, S, \rho\)). For a spatial grid with spacing \(h\) and timestep \(\Delta t\): \[u_h^n \approx u(t_n, x_i),\qquad t_n=n\Delta t. \label{eq:part19_discrete_notation}\]

19.4.2.1 CFL condition (hyperbolic).

If the closed system is hyperbolic with max characteristic speed \(c_{\max}\), require: \[\frac{c_{\max}\Delta t}{h}\le \mathrm{CFL}_{\max}, \label{eq:part19_CFL}\] with \(\mathrm{CFL}_{\max}\) locked for the chosen scheme.

19.4.2.2 Parabolic stability (explicit diffusion).

For diffusion with coefficient \(D_{\max}\): \[\Delta t \le \frac{h^2}{2d\,D_{\max}}\times \sigma_{\mathrm{stab}}, \label{eq:part19_diffusion_stability}\] where \(\sigma_{\mathrm{stab}}\in(0,1)\) is a safety factor locked.

19.4.3 19.4.3 LOCK: convergence tests and Richardson extrapolation

Let \(u_{h}\) be the numerical solution at resolution \(h\). A scheme of order \(p\) satisfies: \[\|u_h - u\| \le C h^{p}, \label{eq:part19_order_def}\] in an appropriate norm.

19.4.3.1 Practical convergence rate estimate.

Using three resolutions \(h, h/2, h/4\): \[p_{\mathrm{est}} = \log_2\left(\frac{\|u_{h}-u_{h/2}\|}{\|u_{h/2}-u_{h/4}\|}\right). \label{eq:part19_p_est}\]

19.4.3.2 Richardson extrapolation (to estimate continuum limit).

If the error behaves like \(C h^p\), then: \[u_{\mathrm{ext}} \approx u_{h/2} + \frac{u_{h/2}-u_{h}}{2^p-1}. \label{eq:part19_richardson}\]

19.4.3.3 Gate NUM-CONV.

A numerical result is admissible only if: \[\text{NUM-CONV:}\quad p_{\mathrm{est}}\ge p_{\min} \quad\text{and}\quad \|u_{h/2}-u_{h/4}\|\le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{num}}, \label{eq:part19_gate_numconv}\] with locked \(p_{\min}\) and \(\varepsilon_{\mathrm{num}}\) per solver family.

19.4.4 19.4.4 LOCK: sensitivity analysis and uncertainty propagation

19.4.4.1 Local sensitivity.

For scalar prediction \(g(\theta)\), define sensitivity vector: \[s_i := \frac{\partial g}{\partial \theta_i}\Big|_{\hat\theta}. \label{eq:part19_sensitivity_def}\] If \(\theta\) has covariance \(\Sigma_\theta\), propagate uncertainty (first order): \[\mathrm{Var}[g]\approx s^{\mathsf T}\Sigma_\theta s. \label{eq:part19_error_propagation}\]

19.4.4.2 Global sensitivity (finite differences).

For step \(\delta_i\): \[s_i \approx \frac{g(\hat\theta+\delta_i e_i)-g(\hat\theta-\delta_i e_i)}{2\delta_i}. \label{eq:part19_sensitivity_fd}\] All \(\delta_i\) must be declared and locked.

19.4.4.3 Gate SENS.

A claimed effect that is the basis of a major conclusion must not be entirely dominated by a numerically fragile direction: \[\text{SENS:}\quad \frac{|s_i|\sigma_{\theta_i}}{|g(\hat\theta)|}\le \eta_{\max}\ \ \text{for all ``nuisance'' parameters}, \label{eq:part19_gate_sens}\] with locked \(\eta_{\max}\) and nuisance parameter list.

19.4.5 19.4.5 LOCK: randomness and seed rules

If any stochastic element exists (MCMC, stochastic PDE, randomized data splits), all seeds must be fixed and recorded: \[\texttt{seed} \in \mathbb{N},\qquad \texttt{seed}=\text{recorded in manifest.} \label{eq:part19_seed}\] Non-reproducible results are FAIL[repro].

19.5 19.5 Mandatory deliverables: residuals, error bars, baselines, and report format

19.5.1 19.5.1 LOCK: required numerical files (machine-readable artifacts)

Each test must output at minimum:

  • Predictions: \(\hat y(\hat\theta)\) as a vector file (CSV/NPY) with index alignment to data.

  • Residuals: \(r(\hat\theta)\) [eq:part19_residual_def].

  • Covariance: \(C\) (or diagonal error bars) and the method of construction.

  • Fit summary: \(\hat\theta\), \(\chi^2\), \(\chi^2_\nu\), p-value, AIC/BIC (if computed), and baseline comparisons.

  • Chains/posteriors: if Bayesian, the posterior samples, acceptance rates, diagnostics.

  • Convergence report: numerical convergence metrics (§19.4.3).

  • Manifest: all IDs, versions, seeds, hardware notes, solver settings.

19.5.2 19.5.2 LOCK: required plots and tables (human-readable artifacts)

Mandatory plots (at least):

  • Data vs. prediction (with error bars).

  • Residuals vs. independent variable (time, radius, redshift, multipole \(\ell\), frequency, etc.).

  • Standardized residuals: \(z_i = r_i/\sigma_i\) (or \(C^{-1/2}r\)) histogram and QQ-plot for Gaussianity check when applicable.

  • Baseline comparison: overlay VP/JL vs. baseline model.

  • If multi-dataset: joint residual summary and parameter coherence plot.

19.5.3 19.5.3 LOCK: reporting format (structured and auditable)

Each test produces:

  • a one-page executive card summarizing PASS/FAIL and key numbers,

  • a full report with sections:

    1. test definition (matrix row instantiation),

    2. dataset description and preprocessing,

    3. model/prediction equations and regime declaration,

    4. inference method and parameter policy compliance,

    5. results (with residuals),

    6. gate evaluation (explicit values and thresholds),

    7. failure analysis if FAIL,

    8. reproducibility appendix (seeds, code hash, environment).

Any missing mandatory section is FAIL[report].

19.6 19.6 PASS/FAIL example sets: minimal rules for cosmology, galaxies, black holes, and jets

This subsection provides example gate packs. They are templates: once adopted for a project, they become LOCK for that project and cannot be modified without version bump and re-running the suite.

19.6.1 19.6.1 Cosmology gate pack (example)

19.6.1.1 Scope.

Tests for Parts 14–16 outputs: redshift/optical mapping, FRW-ledger acceleration, early-universe signatures.

19.6.1.2 Datasets (abstract categories; instantiate with Dataset IDs).

  • Distance indicators (e.g. SN-like Hubble diagram): \((z_i,\mu_i,\sigma_i)\).

  • BAO-like constraints: \((z_i, D_i, C_i)\).

  • Growth constraints: \((z_i, f\sigma_8(z_i), \sigma_i)\).

  • CMB summary constraints or full spectra (if available in the project scope).

19.6.1.3 Prediction examples.

Distance modulus: \[\hat \mu(z;\theta) = 5\log_{10}\!\left(\frac{D_L(z;\theta)}{10\,\mathrm{pc}}\right), \qquad D_L(z;\theta) = (1+z)\,D_M(z;\theta), \label{eq:part19_mu_prediction}\] where \(D_M\) is the transverse comoving distance determined by the model’s \(H(z;\theta)\) (standard FRW) or by the optical mapping rules (if used).

19.6.1.4 Gates (example).

  • COS-FIT: each dataset category satisfies [eq:part19_gate_fit_default] on its test split.

  • COS-JOINT: joint likelihood satisfies [eq:part19_gate_coh].

  • COS-BASE: relative to a declared baseline, \(\Delta\mathrm{BIC}\le -6\) on test split (if baseline is included).

  • COS-NULL: cause-off (e.g. \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}=0\) in lattice-optics redshift) must worsen fit: [eq:part19_gate_null].

  • COS-CMB/BBN: if the model touches early-universe expansion history, it must pass the early-universe gates of Part 16 as instantiated in the project.

19.6.2 19.6.2 Galaxy gate pack (example)

19.6.2.1 Scope.

Tests for Part 09 (deficit gravity/lattice refraction) and rotation curves/lensing.

19.6.2.2 Dataset categories.

  • Rotation curves: \((r_i, v_i, \sigma_i)\) for many galaxies.

  • Lensing-like profiles: shear/convergence profiles with covariances.

  • Cluster separation tests (bullet-like systems) if in scope.

19.6.2.3 Prediction examples.

Rotation velocity prediction: \[\hat v(r;\theta) = \sqrt{r\,\partial_r \Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(r;\theta)}, \label{eq:part19_rotation_velocity_prediction}\] where \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) is computed from the VP/JL deficit mechanism as locked in Part 09.

19.6.2.4 Gates (example).

  • GAL-FIT: each galaxy passes \(\chi^2_\nu\le 1.2\) on its test split.

  • GAL-POP: population-level goodness: the median \(\chi^2_\nu\) across the sample satisfies \(\le 1.1\) and the upper quartile satisfies \(\le 1.5\) (locked thresholds).

  • GAL-COH: shared parameters (if claimed universal) remain consistent across galaxies: posterior overlap gate, e.g. \[|\theta_{\mathrm{univ}}^{(g)}-\theta_{\mathrm{univ}}^{(h)}|\le 2\sqrt{\sigma_g^2+\sigma_h^2} \quad\forall g,h \label{eq:part19_galaxy_coherence_gate}\] for a locked set of universal parameters.

  • GAL-NULL: cause-off (disable deficit or lattice effect) must degrade the fit: [eq:part19_gate_null].

19.6.3 19.6.3 Black hole gate pack (example)

19.6.3.1 Scope.

Tests for Part 10 (reactor, singularity removal) and Part 17 (information/entropy ledger predictions, if any observable proxy exists).

19.6.3.2 Dataset categories (project-dependent).

  • Shadow size / photon ring constraints (if used).

  • Accretion luminosity and variability statistics (if used).

  • Gravitational-wave ringdown or inspiral constraints (if used).

19.6.3.3 Prediction examples.

If the model predicts an effective “core throughput” or saturation leading to a capped flux, one can test a generic saturation law for an observable \(O\): \[\hat O(\theta) = O_{\max}\, \frac{X(\theta)}{1+X(\theta)}, \label{eq:part19_saturation_observable}\] where \(X(\theta)\) is a model-derived control variable (e.g. dimensionless core energy ratio) defined and locked in Part 08/10.

19.6.3.4 Gates (example).

  • BH-FIT: fit gate on the chosen observable datasets.

  • BH-ROB: numerical convergence gate NUM-CONV for any PDE/kinetic simulation used to generate predictions.

  • BH-NULL: no spurious fit improvement on permuted/synthetic baseline data.

  • BH-LEDGER: if a claim uses entropy/throughput constraints to justify removing singular behavior, it must not introduce divergences numerically; treat as a numerical stability gate plus a physical inequality gate (e.g. bounded flux).

19.6.4 19.6.4 Jet gate pack (example)

19.6.4.1 Scope.

Tests for Part 11 (jet generation/collimation) and any axis-alignment predictions.

19.6.4.2 Dataset categories.

  • Jet direction vs. inferred spin/axis proxies (if available).

  • Collimation profiles: opening angle vs. distance.

  • Stability statistics: knotting/fragmentation frequency vs. model stability criteria.

19.6.4.3 Prediction examples.

If the model predicts a preferred axis \(k\) and a jet direction \(\hat{\ell}\), test the alignment distribution: \[\cos\alpha := \hat{\ell}\cdot k, \qquad \hat p(\cos\alpha;\theta)\ \text{predicted}, \label{eq:part19_alignment_angle}\] and compare to observed histogram \(p_{\mathrm{obs}}\) using, e.g., a likelihood for binned counts or a KS distance.

19.6.4.4 Gates (example).

  • JET-ALIGN: reject isotropic null if the model claims alignment, but do not permit post-hoc bin selection: \[\text{JET-ALIGN:}\quad \mathrm{KS}(p_{\mathrm{obs}},\hat p)\le \delta_{\mathrm{KS,max}} \label{eq:part19_gate_jet_KS}\] with \(\delta_{\mathrm{KS,max}}\) locked.

  • JET-NULL: permute axes among objects; fit must collapse (G-NULL-PERM).

  • JET-ROB: results stable under subsampling and numerical resolution (G-ROB + NUM-CONV).

19.6.4.5 End of Part 19.

This Part locked a full validation OS: (i) a standard test matrix (Claim\(\to\)Prediction\(\to\)Dataset\(\to\)Gate), (ii) a strict parameter estimation and data-splitting policy that forbids re-fitting leakage, (iii) null tests and cross-validation gates to prevent spurious causal claims, (iv) numerical verification protocols (convergence, sensitivity, seeds), (v) mandatory machine/human-readable artifacts (residuals, covariances, baselines, reports), (vi) example PASS/FAIL gate packs for cosmology, galaxies, black holes, and jets.

20 PART 20. Verification Operating System (PASS.rules), Registries, and Release Workflow (Output 20)

This Part defines the verification operating system for the VP/Jammed-Lattice (VP/JL) document suite. It formalizes: (i) three registries as single sources of truth (SSOT), (ii) a machine-checkable PASS.rules standard with mandatory and optional rules, (iii) explicit prohibitions against calibration leakage and reverse-injection, (iv) an archive schema with immutable artifact identifiers, (v) a versioning/changelog policy with compatibility and breaking-change declarations, and (vi) a release checklist that enforces the “LOCK \(\to\) DERIVE \(\to\) GATE” completion discipline.

20.0.0.1 Tier discipline (context).

LOCK objects are immutable inputs (definitions/constants/axioms). DERIVE objects are logically derived from LOCK plus explicitly declared assumptions. GATE objects adjudicate (PASS/FAIL) via consistency checks and external tests. Part 20 locks the infrastructure that prevents the document from silently drifting between tiers.

20.1 20.1 Three registries: (a) Symbols, (b) Claims, (c) Constants (SSOT)

20.1.1 20.1.1 LOCK: registry concept and SSOT axiom

20.1.1.1 Definition (SSOT Registry; LOCK).

A registry is a structured map (key \(\to\) record) such that: \[\text{Every key has exactly one authoritative record, and every authoritative record is addressable by exactly one key.} \label{eq:part20_ssot_def}\] Formally, for registry \(R\) with key set \(\mathcal{K}_R\) and record set \(\mathcal{V}_R\), the registry is a bijection: \[R:\mathcal{K}_R \to \mathcal{V}_R \quad \text{is bijective.} \label{eq:part20_registry_bijection}\] If multiple records exist for the same key or the same record is reachable from multiple keys, the build is FAIL[SSOT].

20.1.1.2 Registry integrity gate.

\[\texttt{PASS[SSOT]}\ \Longleftrightarrow\ R \text{ is bijective and all required fields validate (schema-valid).} \label{eq:part20_ssot_gate}\]

20.1.2 20.1.2 LOCK: Symbol Registry (SR) specification

20.1.2.1 Purpose.

Prevent symbol collisions and semantic drift across Parts and releases.

20.1.2.2 Definition (Symbol Registry SR; LOCK).

Let \(\Sigma\) be the set of symbols used in the document suite. The symbol registry is: \[\mathrm{SR}:\Sigma \to \mathcal{R}_\Sigma, \label{eq:part20_SR_map}\] where each record \(\mathrm{SR}(\sigma)\) is a tuple \[\mathrm{SR}(\sigma)= \big(\mathrm{name},\ \mathrm{meaning},\ \mathrm{tier},\ \mathrm{domain},\ \mathrm{dimension},\ \mathrm{units},\ \mathrm{dependencies},\ \mathrm{origin},\ \mathrm{status}\big). \label{eq:part20_SR_record}\]

20.1.2.3 Required SR fields (LOCK).

For each symbol \(\sigma\):

  • name: canonical LaTeX string (e.g. \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}).

  • meaning: human-readable definition (single sentence + formal definition).

  • tier: one of {LOCK, DERIVE, HYP, SPEC}.

  • domain: admissible domain, e.g. \(t\in[0,T]\), \(x\in\Omega\), \(v\in V\).

  • dimension: physical dimension in a locked basis (e.g. \([L]^a[T]^b[M]^c\) or dimensionless).

  • units: if dimensional, a declared unit realization (SI or project units).

  • dependencies: list of upstream symbols this definition depends on (DAG edges).

  • origin: where first introduced (Part/Section/Equation label).

  • status: active / deprecated / reserved.

20.1.2.4 No-ambiguity axiom (LOCK).

A symbol must have a single meaning: \[\forall \sigma\in\Sigma,\quad \mathrm{SR}(\sigma)\ \text{is unique and contains exactly one formal definition.} \label{eq:part20_symbol_unicity}\] If two different meanings share the same LaTeX symbol string, the build is FAIL[symbol-collision].

20.1.2.5 Reserved/forbidden symbols (LOCK).

SR must include a list: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{reserved}}\subset \Sigma,\qquad \Sigma_{\mathrm{forbidden}}\subset \Sigma,\] such that: \[\sigma\in \Sigma_{\mathrm{forbidden}}\ \Rightarrow\ \sigma \notin \Sigma_{\mathrm{used}}, \label{eq:part20_forbidden_symbols}\] and reserved symbols cannot be assigned without explicit approval in the changelog (see §20.5).

20.1.3 20.1.3 LOCK: Claim Registry (CR) specification

20.1.3.1 Purpose.

Make every claim traceable to its assumptions, derivations, predictions, datasets, and gates.

20.1.3.2 Definition (Claim Registry CR; LOCK).

Let \(\mathcal{C}\) be the set of claims. The claim registry is: \[\mathrm{CR}:\mathcal{C}\to \mathcal{R}_C, \label{eq:part20_CR_map}\] where each claim record is: \[\mathrm{CR}(c)= \big(\mathrm{tier},\ \mathrm{statement},\ \mathrm{assumptions},\ \mathrm{dependencies},\ \mathrm{predictions},\ \mathrm{tests},\ \mathrm{gates},\ \mathrm{status}\big). \label{eq:part20_CR_record}\]

20.1.3.3 Required CR fields (LOCK).

For each claim \(c\):

  • tier: LOCK/DERIVE/HYP/SPEC.

  • statement: a formal statement (equations/inequalities) plus natural language.

  • assumptions: explicit list of assumptions (IDs) used in the claim.

  • dependencies: upstream claims and/or definitions (IDs) required.

  • predictions: explicit prediction maps \(\mathcal{P}\) (Part 19) with outputs.

  • tests: test IDs (Part 19) that adjudicate the claim.

  • gates: gate IDs and thresholds used for PASS/FAIL.

  • status: active/deprecated/retracted.

20.1.3.4 Claim closure rule (LOCK).

No claim may be advertised as “supported” without at least one adjudicating test: \[\texttt{Supported}(c)=\texttt{true}\ \Rightarrow\ \mathrm{CR}(c).\mathrm{tests}\neq\varnothing. \label{eq:part20_claim_needs_tests}\] Violation is FAIL[untested-claim].

20.1.4 20.1.4 LOCK: Constant Registry (KSR, SSOT for constants)

20.1.4.1 Purpose.

Prevent silent changes to constants, unit realizations, and “effective constants” used by closures and gates.

20.1.4.2 Definition (Constant Registry KSR; LOCK).

Let \(\mathcal{K}\) be the set of constants (including “effective constants” declared in closures). The constant registry is: \[\mathrm{KSR}:\mathcal{K}\to \mathcal{R}_K, \label{eq:part20_KSR_map}\] with record: \[\mathrm{KSR}(k)= \big(\mathrm{symbol},\ \mathrm{value},\ \mathrm{units},\ \mathrm{dimension},\ \mathrm{uncertainty},\ \mathrm{source},\ \mathrm{tier},\ \mathrm{scope},\ \mathrm{status}\big). \label{eq:part20_KSR_record}\]

20.1.4.3 Required KSR fields (LOCK).

  • symbol: LaTeX representation tied to SR entry.

  • value: numeric value or symbolic expression.

  • units and dimension: must match SR.

  • uncertainty: numeric uncertainty or explicit “unknown” (if HYP/SPEC).

  • source: provenance (reference, measurement, or “defined constant”).

  • tier: LOCK if fixed by definition/measurement; otherwise SPEC with fitting policy.

  • scope: global, module-specific, or test-specific.

  • status: active/deprecated.

20.1.4.4 SSOT enforcement (LOCK).

All numeric values in text, equations, and code must be referential, not duplicated: \[\text{Any appearance of a constant value in the suite must resolve to exactly one } \mathrm{KSR}(k). \label{eq:part20_no_constant_duplication}\] Violation is FAIL[constant-dup].

20.2 20.2 PASS.rules: Mandatory 10 + Optional 10 (fixed as project standards)

20.2.1 20.2.1 LOCK: PASS.rules as a formal decision function

Let \(\mathcal{T}\) be the set of executed tests (Part 19). Each test \(t\in\mathcal{T}\) produces a result record \(\mathrm{Res}(t)\) containing gate evaluations and artifacts.

Define the rule evaluation function: \[\mathrm{EvalRule}(r;\ \mathrm{SR},\mathrm{CR},\mathrm{KSR},\{\mathrm{Res}(t)\}_{t\in\mathcal{T}})\in\{\texttt{PASS},\texttt{FAIL}\}. \label{eq:part20_evalrule_def}\]

Define the global adjudication: \[\boxed{ \mathrm{PASS\_SUITE}= \bigwedge_{r\in\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mandatory}}}\ \mathrm{EvalRule}(r)=\texttt{PASS} \ \ \wedge\ \ \bigwedge_{r\in\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}}\ \mathrm{EvalRule}(r)=\texttt{PASS}, } \label{eq:part20_pass_suite_def}\] where \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mandatory}}\) is the fixed mandatory set of 10 rules and \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}\) is a project-chosen fixed subset of the optional 10 rules (possibly empty, but selection must be locked per project).

20.2.1.1 Project locking requirement.

Once a project selects \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}\), the selection is immutable for that project version line: \[\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}^{(v)}=\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}^{(v')}\ \text{for all minor/patch updates }v\to v', \label{eq:part20_ruleset_locking}\] and changing it requires a breaking-change declaration (see §20.5).

20.2.2 20.2.2 LOCK: Mandatory 10 rules (must always hold)

Below, each rule is LOCK and yields PASS/FAIL with a failure tag.

20.2.2.1 M1 — Registry schema validity.

\[\text{M1 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \mathrm{SR},\mathrm{CR},\mathrm{KSR} \text{ all validate against their schemas and are bijective SSOT maps.} \label{eq:part20_M1}\] Else FAIL[M1-schema].

20.2.2.2 M2 — Symbol unicity and no collision.

\[\text{M2 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall \sigma\in\Sigma_{\mathrm{used}},\ \mathrm{SR}(\sigma)\ \text{exists and is unique, and } \sigma\notin\Sigma_{\mathrm{forbidden}}. \label{eq:part20_M2}\] Else FAIL[M2-symbol].

20.2.2.3 M3 — Dimensional consistency for every equation labeled DERIVE.

Let \(\mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{DERIVE}}\) be the set of derived equations with labels. For each equation \(E\in\mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{DERIVE}}\), let \(\mathrm{Dim}(E_{\mathrm{LHS}})\) and \(\mathrm{Dim}(E_{\mathrm{RHS}})\) be computed from SR/KSR. \[\text{M3 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall E\in\mathcal{E}_{\mathrm{DERIVE}},\quad \mathrm{Dim}(E_{\mathrm{LHS}})=\mathrm{Dim}(E_{\mathrm{RHS}}). \label{eq:part20_M3}\] Else FAIL[M3-dim].

20.2.2.4 M4 — LOCK immutability.

Let \(\Delta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}\) be the set of changes affecting any LOCK object (definitions/axioms/constants). \[\text{M4 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \Delta_{\mathrm{LOCK}}=\varnothing\ \text{within a non-breaking release}. \label{eq:part20_M4}\] Else FAIL[M4-lock-mutation].

20.2.2.5 M5 — No “orphan” constants: all numeric constants must resolve to KSR.

Let \(\mathcal{N}\) be the set of numeric literals in equations/code that are intended as constants. \[\text{M5 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall n\in\mathcal{N},\ \exists!\,k\in\mathcal{K}\ \text{s.t.}\ n=\mathrm{KSR}(k).\mathrm{value}\ \text{(by reference, not duplication)}. \label{eq:part20_M5}\] Else FAIL[M5-constant].

20.2.2.6 M6 — Claim-to-test coverage.

Let \(\mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{advertised}}\) be claims marked as active and presented as supported. \[\text{M6 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall c\in \mathcal{C}_{\mathrm{advertised}},\quad \mathrm{CR}(c).\mathrm{tests}\neq\varnothing\ \text{and all listed tests have results.} \label{eq:part20_M6}\] Else FAIL[M6-coverage].

20.2.2.7 M7 — Gate completeness: every test must have explicit gates and thresholds.

For each test \(t\), let \(\mathcal{G}(t)\) be its gate set. \[\text{M7 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall t\in\mathcal{T},\quad \mathcal{G}(t)\neq\varnothing\ \text{and each gate has a numeric/logic threshold declared.} \label{eq:part20_M7}\] Else FAIL[M7-gates].

20.2.2.8 M8 — Reproducibility: seeds, environment, and artifact hashes recorded.

For each test \(t\), let \(\mathrm{Res}(t)\) include seed(s) and environment hash \(\mathrm{EnvHash}(t)\) and artifact hashes. \[\text{M8 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall t\in\mathcal{T},\quad \mathrm{Res}(t)\ \text{contains seeds, EnvHash, and SHA-256 hashes for all artifacts.} \label{eq:part20_M8}\] Else FAIL[M8-repro].

20.2.2.9 M9 — No data leakage: strict train/val/test separation (Part 19).

Let \(D_{\mathrm{train}},D_{\mathrm{val}},D_{\mathrm{test}}\) be the split for each dataset ID. \[\text{M9 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \text{no parameter fitting or model selection step uses }D_{\mathrm{test}}\ \text{and the split is recorded/immutable.} \label{eq:part20_M9}\] Else FAIL[M9-leak].

20.2.2.10 M10 — Report completeness: mandatory deliverables exist for every test (Part 19).

\[\text{M10 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \forall t\in\mathcal{T},\quad \text{all mandatory artifacts (predictions, residuals, covariances, report card, manifest) exist and hash-check.} \label{eq:part20_M10}\] Else FAIL[M10-report].

20.2.3 20.2.3 LOCK: Optional 10 rules (project may select and lock)

Each optional rule is available; the project selects a subset \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}\) and locks it.

20.2.3.1 O1 — Baseline superiority (information criterion).

\[\text{O1 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \Delta\mathrm{BIC}\le -6\ \text{(or project-locked threshold) on test split for each baseline-comparable test.} \label{eq:part20_O1}\] Else FAIL[O1-bic].

20.2.3.2 O2 — Null test strength.

\[\text{O2 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \Delta\chi^2 \ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}\ \text{in cause-off null tests (Part 19), per test family.} \label{eq:part20_O2}\] Else FAIL[O2-null].

20.2.3.3 O3 — Cross-validation stability.

\[\text{O3 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \mathrm{StdDev}\big(\chi^2_{F_j}(\hat\theta^{(-j)})\big)\le \sigma_{\max}\ \text{(locked)}. \label{eq:part20_O3}\] Else FAIL[O3-cv].

20.2.3.4 O4 — Numerical convergence (grid refinement).

\[\text{O4 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow p_{\mathrm{est}}\ge p_{\min}\ \text{and}\ \|u_{h/2}-u_{h/4}\|\le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{num}}\ \text{(locked)}. \label{eq:part20_O4}\] Else FAIL[O4-numconv].

20.2.3.5 O5 — Sensitivity boundedness.

\[\text{O5 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \frac{|s_i|\sigma_{\theta_i}}{|g(\hat\theta)|}\le \eta_{\max}\ \text{for nuisance directions (locked list)}. \label{eq:part20_O5}\] Else FAIL[O5-sens].

20.2.3.6 O6 — Multi-phenomenon coherence (joint fit).

\[\text{O6 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \chi^2_{\nu,\mathrm{joint}}(\hat\theta_{\mathrm{joint}})\ \text{passes fit gates and parameters are shared without dataset-specific retuning.} \label{eq:part20_O6}\] Else FAIL[O6-coh].

20.2.3.7 O7 — Stability under preprocessing variations.

\[\text{O7 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \text{within a locked set of admissible preprocessing variants, the PASS/FAIL decision is invariant.} \label{eq:part20_O7}\] Else FAIL[O7-prep].

20.2.3.8 O8 — Independent replication.

\[\text{O8 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \text{a second independent implementation (different codebase or solver) reproduces key metrics within locked tolerances.} \label{eq:part20_O8}\] Else FAIL[O8-repl].

20.2.3.9 O9 — Formal proof coverage for DERIVE theorems.

\[\text{O9 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \text{every theorem labeled \textsf{DERIVE} references a proof module (Appendix B) or provides a complete proof in-text.} \label{eq:part20_O9}\] Else FAIL[O9-proof].

20.2.3.10 O10 — Documentation completeness and changelog discipline.

\[\text{O10 PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \text{every change has a changelog entry, including motivation, affected IDs (SR/CR/KSR), and backward-compatibility classification.} \label{eq:part20_O10}\] Else FAIL[O10-changelog].

20.2.4 20.2.4 LOCK: example PASS.rules file (schema-like)

The following is an illustrative machine-readable rules file. Once adopted, it becomes SSOT for the project.

PASS.rules:
  version: 1
  mandatory:
    - M1-schema
    - M2-symbol
    - M3-dim
    - M4-lock-mutation
    - M5-constant
    - M6-coverage
    - M7-gates
    - M8-repro
    - M9-leak
    - M10-report
  optional_selected:
    - O2-null
    - O4-numconv
    - O6-coh
  thresholds:
    fit:
      chi2nu_min: 0.8
      chi2nu_max: 1.2
    null:
      delta_chi2_min: 25
    bic:
      delta_bic_max: -6
    numerical:
      p_min: 1.8
      eps_num: 1.0e-3
    cv:
      sigma_max: 0.2
  baselines:
    cosmology: LCDM
    galaxy_rc: Newton+DM_halo
    jets: GRMHD_standard
  enforcement:
    lock_immutability: strict
    test_split: strict
    artifact_hash: sha256

20.3 20.3 Prohibition rules: NO-CAL / EVAL-ONLY / reverse-injection and post-hoc tuning bans

20.3.1 20.3.1 LOCK: prohibition taxonomy

We classify prohibited behaviors into three types:

  • Leakage: using evaluation data to tune a model.

  • Reverse injection: feeding derived outputs back into locked inputs or choosing definitions to fit results.

  • Post-hoc tuning: adjusting thresholds, hyperparameters, preprocessing, or priors after seeing test performance.

Any violation yields an immediate FAIL with a non-negotiable tag.

20.3.2 20.3.2 LOCK: NO-CAL rule (no calibration on evaluation/test data)

20.3.2.1 Rule NO-CAL (LOCK).

No calibration step may use evaluation/test information. Formally, let \(A\) denote the algorithm that outputs fitted parameters/hyperparameters/closure selections: \[(\hat\theta,\hat h,\widehat{\mathrm{closure}})=A(D_{\mathrm{train}},D_{\mathrm{val}};\ \text{seeds, config}), \label{eq:part20_A_def}\] then NO-CAL requires: \[\frac{\partial(\hat\theta,\hat h,\widehat{\mathrm{closure}})}{\partial D_{\mathrm{test}}}=0, \label{eq:part20_no_cal_condition}\] meaning \(D_{\mathrm{test}}\) is not an input, directly or indirectly (no manual selection after looking).

20.3.2.2 Operational enforcement.

\[\texttt{FAIL[NO-CAL]}\quad\text{if any configuration or selection decision is made after observing test metrics on }D_{\mathrm{test}}. \label{eq:part20_no_cal_fail}\]

20.3.3 20.3.3 LOCK: EVAL-ONLY rule (evaluation dataset is read-only)

20.3.3.1 Rule EVAL-ONLY (LOCK).

All evaluation/test datasets are read-only and may only be used for: \[\text{computing }\chi^2,\ \mathcal{L},\ \text{and gate predicates, with fixed parameters and fixed preprocessing.} \label{eq:part20_eval_only_def}\] No back-propagation of evaluation results into any upstream choice is permitted.

20.3.3.2 FAIL condition.

\[\texttt{FAIL[EVAL-ONLY]}\quad\text{if the evaluation run triggers any update of parameters, hyperparameters, closure choice, symbol/constant definitions, or thresholds.} \label{eq:part20_eval_only_fail}\]

20.3.4 20.3.4 LOCK: reverse-injection ban (no backward definition fitting)

20.3.4.1 Definition (reverse injection; LOCK).

Reverse injection occurs when an object declared LOCK is selected/modified to satisfy a desired downstream result. Let \(L\) denote the set of locked objects (SR/CR/KSR entries with tier LOCK). Let \(Y\) denote downstream evaluation outcomes (test metrics, PASS/FAIL decisions). Reverse injection is the existence of a dependency: \[L \leftarrow Y \quad\text{(locked inputs depend on outcomes)}. \label{eq:part20_reverse_injection_dependency}\] This is forbidden.

20.3.4.2 Gate (RI).

\[\texttt{PASS[RI]} \Longleftrightarrow \text{the dependency graph is acyclic with all edges oriented } \textsf{LOCK}\to\textsf{DERIVE}\to\textsf{GATE}. \label{eq:part20_RI_gate}\] Violation is FAIL[reverse-injection].

20.3.5 20.3.5 LOCK: post-hoc tuning ban list

The following are explicitly forbidden unless done before any evaluation and recorded as a versioned configuration change (which triggers a new test suite run):

  • Changing priors/hyperparameters after seeing \(D_{\mathrm{test}}\) performance.

  • Selecting a closure family based on \(D_{\mathrm{test}}\) residuals.

  • Changing preprocessing (filters, cuts, binning) to improve \(D_{\mathrm{test}}\) fit.

  • Changing gate thresholds (e.g. widening the PASS range) after seeing failures.

  • Changing constants/units to improve a fit.

20.3.5.1 FAIL tag.

\[\texttt{FAIL[posthoc]}\quad\text{if any such modification occurs after evaluation results are known.} \label{eq:part20_posthoc_fail}\]

20.4 20.4 Archive schema: file tree, metadata, and artifact identifiers

20.4.1 20.4.1 LOCK: content-addressable artifact identifiers

20.4.1.1 Definition (Artifact ID; LOCK).

Every output artifact \(a\) (file or bundle) receives a content hash: \[\mathrm{AID}(a):=\mathrm{SHA256}(\mathrm{bytes}(a)). \label{eq:part20_AID_def}\] Artifacts are immutable: modifying the bytes changes the ID.

20.4.1.2 Artifact manifest.

For each test run, create a manifest containing: \[\mathcal{M}=\{(\mathrm{path}_i,\ \mathrm{AID}_i,\ \mathrm{type}_i,\ \mathrm{producer}_i,\ \mathrm{timestamp}_i)\}_{i=1}^{N}. \label{eq:part20_manifest_def}\] Hash of the manifest itself is also recorded (self-sealing).

20.4.2 20.4.2 LOCK: file tree standard (project archive layout)

A standard archive tree (illustrative; exact names may be locked by project):

archive_root/
  README.md
  manifest.json
  registries/
    symbols.yaml
    claims.yaml
    constants.yaml
  builds/
    build_meta.yaml
    env/
      python_freeze.txt
      system_info.txt
      container_digest.txt
  data/
    D-.../
      raw/                # immutable raw snapshots (or references)
      processed/          # versioned preprocessing outputs
      splits/             # train/val/test indices with seeds
      covariance/         # C matrices or error models
      dataset_manifest.yaml
  tests/
    T-.../
      config.yaml
      logs/
      outputs/
        predictions.csv
        residuals.csv
        summary.json
        plots/
        chains/
      test_report.pdf
      report_card.md
  releases/
    vX.Y.Z/
      release_notes.md
      release_manifest.json
      checks/
        checklist.yaml
        gate_summary.json

20.4.2.1 LOCK constraint: immutability boundaries.

  • raw/ is immutable; changes require new Dataset ID.

  • processed/ is immutable per preprocessing version.

  • splits/ are immutable once declared for a dataset version.

20.4.3 20.4.3 LOCK: metadata schema requirements

Each manifest.json must include at minimum:

  • project name and version,

  • SR/CR/KSR hashes,

  • code build hash (e.g. git SHA) and dependency lockfile hash,

  • run timestamp and timezone,

  • seeds,

  • dataset IDs and split seeds,

  • list of tests executed and their PASS/FAIL outcomes,

  • artifact list with SHA-256 IDs.

Missing fields produce FAIL[manifest].

20.5 20.5 Versioning and changelog: compatibility and breaking-change declarations

20.5.1 20.5.1 LOCK: semantic versioning for a scientific theory suite

Use a three-part version number: \[v = \texttt{MAJOR.MINOR.PATCH}.\]

20.5.1.1 PATCH.

PATCH increments are editorial/formatting fixes that do not change: \[\text{any \textsf{LOCK} object, any equation meaning, any test definition, or any gate threshold.} \label{eq:part20_patch_rule}\]

20.5.1.2 MINOR.

MINOR increments may add:

  • new sections, new claims marked HYP/SPEC,

  • new tests/gates (without changing existing thresholds),

  • new optional rules (without changing mandatory set),

but must preserve backward compatibility: \[\text{Existing IDs and meanings remain valid; old tests remain runnable with unchanged results given same inputs.} \label{eq:part20_minor_rule}\]

20.5.1.3 MAJOR (breaking change).

MAJOR increments occur when any of the following changes:

  • a LOCK definition/axiom is modified,

  • a constant value in KSR changes,

  • a symbol meaning changes or a collision is resolved by reassignment,

  • PASS.rules mandatory set changes or selected optional set changes,

  • a gate threshold changes in a way that can flip prior PASS/FAIL outcomes,

  • a dataset split policy changes or evaluation protocol changes.

Such changes require explicit breaking-change declarations and migration notes.

20.5.2 20.5.2 LOCK: changelog record format and impact tagging

Each changelog entry must specify:

  • Change ID and date,

  • Type: PATCH/MINOR/MAJOR,

  • Affected IDs: SR symbols, CR claims, KSR constants, tests, gates,

  • Rationale: why the change is necessary,

  • Impact: which results may change and why,

  • Migration: required actions to update old artifacts/configs.

20.5.2.1 Compatibility gate.

\[\texttt{PASS[compat]} \Longleftrightarrow \text{the release's type tag matches the actual set of changes (no hidden MAJOR changes).} \label{eq:part20_compat_gate}\] Violation is FAIL[hidden-breaking].

20.6 20.6 Release checklist: completion conditions for “LOCK \(\to\) DERIVE \(\to\) GATE”

20.6.1 20.6.1 LOCK: release states and required completion items

Define three release states:

  • Draft: registries may be incomplete; tests may be missing.

  • Candidate: registries complete; mandatory tests executed; failures analyzed.

  • Release: all mandatory rules PASS and the selected optional rules PASS; archives sealed.

20.6.2 20.6.2 LOCK: checklist items (must be satisfied for Release)

A release is permitted only if all checklist items pass:

  1. LOCK freeze: SR and KSR entries marked LOCK are frozen; no unreviewed diffs remain.

  2. Registry integrity: M1–M5 are PASS.

  3. Claim coverage: M6 is PASS for all advertised claims.

  4. Gate completeness: M7 is PASS; each test has explicit gates and thresholds.

  5. Reproducibility: M8 is PASS; all seeds and environment hashes exist.

  6. Data discipline: M9 (NO-CAL/EVAL-ONLY compliance) is PASS.

  7. Deliverables: M10 is PASS; residuals, covariances, baselines, reports exist and hash-check.

  8. Optional rules (project-selected): all selected optional rules are PASS.

  9. Archive sealing: manifest and all artifact hashes are computed; archive_root is write-protected (or equivalently, content-addressable snapshot is created).

  10. Release notes: changelog is complete and compatibility tag is correct (PASS[compat]).

20.6.3 20.6.3 LOCK: formal release gate

Let \(\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{req}}=\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{mandatory}}\cup\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{selected}}\). Let \(\mathrm{ChecklistOK}\) denote all items in §20.6.2.

\[\boxed{ \texttt{RELEASE\_PASS} \Longleftrightarrow \left(\bigwedge_{r\in\mathcal{R}_{\mathrm{req}}}\mathrm{EvalRule}(r)=\texttt{PASS}\right) \ \wedge\ \mathrm{ChecklistOK} \ \wedge\ \texttt{PASS[RI]}\ \wedge\ \texttt{PASS[compat]}. } \label{eq:part20_release_pass}\]

20.6.3.1 Failure discipline.

If RELEASE_PASS is false, the release is blocked and the failure must be recorded as a structured ticket: \[\mathrm{FAIL\_TICKET}= (\mathrm{tag},\ \mathrm{location},\ \mathrm{evidence},\ \mathrm{proposed\ fix},\ \mathrm{owner},\ \mathrm{target\ version}). \label{eq:part20_fail_ticket}\] No manual override is permitted for mandatory rules; overrides (if any) may exist only for optional rules and must be explicitly recorded in the release notes as a deviation (which itself can be made forbidden by project policy).

20.6.3.2 End of Part 20.

This Part locked: (i) three SSOT registries (symbols, claims, constants), (ii) a formal PASS.rules decision system with mandatory and optional rules, (iii) explicit prohibitions (NO-CAL, EVAL-ONLY, reverse-injection, post-hoc tuning), (iv) an immutable archive schema with content-addressable artifacts, (v) a versioning/changelog policy with strict breaking-change declarations, and (vi) a release checklist and a formal release gate enforcing “LOCK \(\to\) DERIVE \(\to\) GATE” completion.

21 APPENDIX A. Notation & Mapping (Notation & Mapping) (Output A1)

This Appendix is the operational single place to (i) prevent symbol collisions, (ii) enforce dimensional/unit consistency, and (iii) maintain an explicit mapping between legacy notation and the upgraded (current) notation. It is designed to be both human-auditable and machine-checkable via the registries introduced in Part 20.

21.0.0.1 Scope and SSOT rule.

This Appendix provides (a) the schema and (b) a minimal core subset of entries. The authoritative, complete versions must be stored in the registries: \[\text{Symbol Registry (SR)},\qquad \text{Constant Registry (KSR)},\qquad \text{Claim Registry (CR)}.\] Any symbol, constant, or claim used in the main text must resolve to exactly one registry entry (Part 20, SSOT).

21.0.0.2 Typesetting policy (locked).

  • Scalars: italic (\(e_a,\rho,\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)).

  • Vectors: bold (\(\mathbf{x},\mathbf{v},\mathbf{S},\mathbf{k}\)).

  • Second-order tensors: bold uppercase (\(\mathbf{T},\mathbf{D}\)) or explicit dyadic notation (\(v\otimes v\)).

  • Sets/domains: calligraphic or blackboard (\(\Omega,\mathbb{R}^d,V\)).

  • Entropy: use plain \(S\) with explicit subscripts/superscripts (never bare \(S\) without a qualifier); flux uses bold \(\mathbf{S}\).

21.0.0.3 Dimensional basis (locked).

To avoid committing prematurely to a specific physical identification (energy vs. volume vs. other conserved “budget”), we use an abstract conserved quantity dimension \([B]\) (“budget”) together with length \([L]\) and time \([T]\): \[[L]=\text{length},\qquad [T]=\text{time},\qquad [B]=\text{VP/JL conserved budget unit}.\] If one later identifies \([B]\) with SI energy, then \([B]=[M][L]^2[T]^{-2}\), but Appendix A remains valid without that identification.

21.1 A.1 Symbol Registry table (reserved/forbidden/synonyms)

21.1.1 A.1.1 Symbol Registry record schema (SR; locked)

Each symbol entry must include the following fields (see Part 20): \[(\mathrm{name},\ \mathrm{meaning},\ \mathrm{tier},\ \mathrm{domain},\ \mathrm{dimension},\ \mathrm{units},\ \mathrm{dependencies},\ \mathrm{origin},\ \mathrm{status},\ \mathrm{synonyms}).\]

  • name: canonical LaTeX symbol string (unique key).

  • meaning: formal definition (equation) + brief natural-language gloss.

  • tier: LOCK/DERIVE/HYP/SPEC.

  • domain: where the symbol is defined (e.g. \(t\in[0,T]\), \(\mathbf{x}\in\Omega\)).

  • dimension: in \([B],[L],[T]\) basis.

  • units: SI or project unit realization (if applicable).

  • dependencies: upstream symbols required for the definition (DAG edges).

  • origin: first introduction reference (Part/Section/Equation label).

  • status: active / deprecated / reserved.

  • synonyms: allowed aliases (must be marked deprecated if not canonical).

21.1.2 A.1.2 Reserved symbols (locked list)

Reserved symbols may not be reassigned without a breaking-change release (Part 20):

  • Fundamental constants (if used): \(c_0\) (vacuum light speed), \(\hbar\), \(k_B\), \(G\).

  • Cosmology: \(a(t)\) (scale factor), \(H(t)\) (Hubble parameter), \(\Omega_i\) (density parameters).

  • Information criteria: \(\mathrm{AIC}\), \(\mathrm{BIC}\), \(Z\) (Bayesian evidence).

  • Unit vectors: \(\hat{\mathbf{n}}\) (generic unit direction), with explicit subscripts.

21.1.3 A.1.3 Forbidden symbols (locked list)

Forbidden symbols are disallowed to prevent repeated high-impact collisions:

  • Bare \(S\) used without qualifier (confuses entropy vs. flux).

  • Bare \(T\) used without qualifier (confuses tensor vs. temperature).

  • Bare \(e\) without subscript (confuses total vs. mobile vs. background; also collides with elementary charge in mainstream notation).

  • Bare \(\kappa\) without subscript (confuses closure, optical attenuation, curvature, conductivity).

If any forbidden usage appears in text/code, the build is FAIL[symbol-forbidden].

21.1.4 A.1.4 Core symbol registry (minimal subset; illustrative but internally consistent)

21.1.4.1 Note.

This table is a minimal core subset; the complete list must live in SR (Part 20). Dimensions are given in the \((B,L,T)\) basis.

Core symbol registry subset (SR; minimal illustrative entries).
Symbol Meaning (formal definition / gloss) Dimension Tier
\(t\) time coordinate \([T]\) LOCK
\(\mathbf{x}\) spatial coordinate (\(\mathbf{x}\in\Omega\subseteq\mathbb{R}^d\)) \([L]\) LOCK
\(\mathbf{v}\) velocity coordinate (\(\mathbf{v}\in V\)) \([L][T]^{-1}\) LOCK
\(\Omega\) spatial domain (periodic \(\mathbb{T}^d\) or bounded) LOCK
\(V\) velocity domain (\(V=\mathbb{R}^d\) or \(B_{c_{\mathrm{th}}}(0)\)) LOCK
\(f(t,\mathbf{x},\mathbf{v})\) mobile-phase distribution; \(e_a:=\int_V f\,d\mathbf{v}\) \([B][L]^{-3-d}[T]^d\) LOCK
\(\rho(t,\mathbf{x})\) stored-phase budget density \([B][L]^{-3}\) LOCK
\(e_a(t,\mathbf{x})\) mobile budget density: \(e_a=\int_V f\,d\mathbf{v}\) \([B][L]^{-3}\) LOCK
\(e_{\mathrm{bg}}(t,\mathbf{x})\) stage/background budget density (if used) \([B][L]^{-3}\) LOCK/HYP
\(e_{\mathrm{act}}\) actor budget density: \(e_{\mathrm{act}}=\rho+e_a\) \([B][L]^{-3}\) DERIVE
\(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) total budget density: \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_a+e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) \([B][L]^{-3}\) DERIVE/HYP
\(\mathbf{S}(t,\mathbf{x})\) flux: \(\mathbf{S}=\int_V \mathbf{v}\,f\,d\mathbf{v}\) \([B][L]^{-2}[T]^{-1}\) LOCK
\(\mathbf{T}(t,\mathbf{x})\) 2nd moment tensor: \(\mathbf{T}=\int_V \mathbf{v}\otimes \mathbf{v}\,f\,d\mathbf{v}\) \([B][L]^{-1}[T]^{-2}\) LOCK
\(\mathbf{U}(t,\mathbf{x})\) 3rd moment tensor: \(\mathbf{U}=\int_V \mathbf{v}^{\otimes 3}\,f\,d\mathbf{v}\) \([B][T]^{-3}\) LOCK
\(\mathbf{k}\) alignment axis (unit vector) LOCK/HYP
\(a_k\) alignment defect parameter(s) (regime control) HYP
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{mix}}\) mixing/relaxation rate (if used as scalar) \([T]^{-1}\) HYP/SPEC
\(b(\mathbf{x},\mathbf{v})\) alignment kernel / directional bias function HYP
\(m_b(\mathbf{x})\) alignment moment (e.g. \(m_b=\int b f\,d\mathbf{v}\)) \([B][L]^{-3}\) DERIVE/HYP
\(\kappa_T\) isotropic closure constant in \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_a \mathbf{I}\) \([L]^2[T]^{-2}\) HYP/SPEC
\(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) optical attenuation coefficient in \(dE/E=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,dx\) \([L]^{-1}\) HYP/SPEC
\(\mathbf{D}\) diffusion tensor in \(\mathbf{S}=-\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a\) \([L]^2[T]^{-1}\) DERIVE/SPEC
\(\tau\) kinetic relaxation time (collision time) \([T]\) SPEC
\(\tau_S\) flux relaxation time (Cattaneo/telegraph) \([T]\) SPEC
\(\mu_{\mathrm{conv}}\) storage\(\to\)mobility conversion rate \([T]^{-1}\) SPEC
\(\gamma(\mathbf{v})\) mobility\(\to\)storage capture rate kernel \([T]^{-1}\) SPEC
\(\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}\) event rate (Part 17 reactor/evaporation) \([T]^{-1}\) HYP/SPEC
\(c_0\) vacuum light speed (reserved) \([L][T]^{-1}\) LOCK
\(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) throughput speed (finite-speed gate; may equal \(a/\Delta t\)) \([L][T]^{-1}\) LOCK/HYP
\(v_\ast\) reference volume scale \([L]^3\) LOCK
\(a\) reference length scale (cell/lattice scale; not cosmological \(a(t)\)) \([L]\) LOCK
\(\Delta t\) reference time step \([T]\) LOCK

21.2 A.2 Units & dimensions table (base, derived, nondimensional groups)

21.2.1 A.2.1 Base units and realizations (locked)

We lock the abstract dimensional basis \((B,L,T)\): \[[B]=\text{budget unit},\qquad [L]=\mathrm{m},\qquad [T]=\mathrm{s}.\] A project may also lock a mapping \([B]\to \mathrm{J}\) (joule) if budget is identified as energy. If so, then: \[[B]=\mathrm{J}=\mathrm{kg}\,\mathrm{m}^2\,\mathrm{s}^{-2}.\] If budget is not identified with SI energy, the numerical values in KSR must be provided in project budget units.

21.2.2 A.2.2 Derived dimensions and common operators (locked)

21.2.2.1 Derived dimensions.

\[\begin{aligned} &= [L][T]^{-1}, \\ [\nabla] &= [L]^{-1}, \\ [\partial_t] &= [T]^{-1}, \\ [e_a]=[\rho]=[e_{\mathrm{bg}}] &= [B][L]^{-3}, \\ [\mathbf{S}] &= [e_a][\mathbf{v}] = [B][L]^{-2}[T]^{-1}, \\ [\mathbf{T}] &= [e_a][\mathbf{v}]^2 = [B][L]^{-1}[T]^{-2}, \\ [\kappa_T] &= [\mathbf{T}]/[e_a] = [L]^2[T]^{-2}, \\ [\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}] &= [L]^{-1}, \\ [\mathbf{D}] &= [L]^2[T]^{-1}, \\ [\mu_{\mathrm{conv}}]=[\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}]=[\lambda_{\mathrm{mix}}] &= [T]^{-1}.\end{aligned}\]

21.2.2.2 Dimensional consistency gate (local).

For any derived equation labeled DERIVE, the left-hand and right-hand sides must match in \((B,L,T)\) dimensions: \[\mathrm{Dim}(\mathrm{LHS})=\mathrm{Dim}(\mathrm{RHS}).\] Violation is FAIL[dim] (see Part 20).

21.2.3 A.2.3 Canonical nondimensionalization (locked template)

Choose reference scales (the project must lock them as SSOT constants in KSR): \[x_\ast := a,\qquad t_\ast := \Delta t,\qquad v_\ast := c_{\mathrm{th}}:=\frac{a}{\Delta t},\qquad e_\ast := \text{(reference budget density)}.\] Define dimensionless variables: \[\tilde{\mathbf{x}}:=\frac{\mathbf{x}}{a},\qquad \tilde t:=\frac{t}{\Delta t},\qquad \tilde{\mathbf{v}}:=\frac{\mathbf{v}}{c_{\mathrm{th}}},\qquad \tilde e_a:=\frac{e_a}{e_\ast},\qquad \tilde\rho:=\frac{\rho}{e_\ast}. \label{eq:appendixA_dimless_vars}\] Define dimensionless flux and tensor: \[\tilde{\mathbf{S}} := \frac{\mathbf{S}}{e_\ast c_{\mathrm{th}}},\qquad \tilde{\mathbf{T}} := \frac{\mathbf{T}}{e_\ast c_{\mathrm{th}}^2}. \label{eq:appendixA_dimless_moments}\] In these units the strict throughput bound becomes: \[|\tilde{\mathbf{S}}|\le \tilde e_a. \label{eq:appendixA_dimless_flux_bound}\]

21.2.4 A.2.4 Standard dimensionless groups (locked definitions)

The following dimensionless numbers appear repeatedly across Parts 07–19:

21.2.4.1 Anisotropy / choking ratio.

\[\delta_{\mathrm{aniso}} := \frac{|\mathbf{S}|}{c_{\mathrm{th}}\,e_a}\in[0,1]\quad (\text{if the throughput gate is enforced}). \label{eq:appendixA_delta_aniso}\]

21.2.4.2 Optical depth (lattice optics).

For a path length \(L_{\mathrm{path}}\): \[\tau_{\mathrm{opt}} := \int_{\text{path}} \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds, \qquad\text{(constant $\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}$ case: }\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}=\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}L_{\mathrm{path}}\text{)}. \label{eq:appendixA_optical_depth}\]

21.2.4.3 Knudsen-like ratio (kinetic vs. macroscopic).

If \(\ell_{\mathrm{mfp}}\) is a mean-free-path proxy and \(L\) a macroscopic scale: \[\varepsilon := \frac{\ell_{\mathrm{mfp}}}{L}, \label{eq:appendixA_knudsen}\] used to justify diffusion/hydrodynamic closures (Part 18).

21.2.4.4 Péclet number (advection vs. diffusion).

With characteristic speed \(U\) and diffusion scale \(D\): \[\mathrm{Pe}:=\frac{U L}{D}. \label{eq:appendixA_peclet}\]

21.2.4.5 Saturation ratio (gated kinetics / reactor).

For a saturating control variable \(E\): \[\chi_{\mathrm{sat}}:=\frac{E}{E_{\mathrm{sat}}}. \label{eq:appendixA_saturation_ratio}\]

21.2.4.6 Dimensionless diffusion/closure constants.

\[\tilde{\kappa}_T := \frac{\kappa_T}{c_{\mathrm{th}}^2},\qquad \tilde{\mathbf{D}} := \frac{\mathbf{D}}{a c_{\mathrm{th}}}. \label{eq:appendixA_dimless_closure}\]

21.3 A.3 Legacy \(\to\) upgrade mapping table (names/signs/constant splits)

21.3.1 A.3.1 Mapping principles (locked)

A mapping entry must specify exactly one of the following transformation types:

  • Rename (one-to-one): \(\sigma_{\mathrm{legacy}}\mapsto \sigma_{\mathrm{new}}\).

  • Split (one-to-many): \(\sigma_{\mathrm{legacy}}\mapsto (\sigma_{\mathrm{new},1},\dots)\) with an explicit decomposition identity.

  • Merge (many-to-one): \((\sigma_{\mathrm{legacy},1},\dots)\mapsto \sigma_{\mathrm{new}}\) with explicit aggregation identity.

  • Sign convention change: \(\sigma_{\mathrm{new}} = -\sigma_{\mathrm{legacy}}\) (must be labeled).

  • Constant separation: a single legacy constant is replaced by a family of constants with subscripts.

Each mapping must pass a dimensional consistency check: \[\mathrm{Dim}(\sigma_{\mathrm{legacy}})=\mathrm{Dim}(\sigma_{\mathrm{new}})\quad \text{(or of the composed expression)}.\] Violation is FAIL[mapping-dim].

21.3.2 A.3.2 Canonical legacy\(\to\)upgrade mapping templates (locked format)

Legacy\(\to\)Upgrade mapping table (template + core examples).
Legacy symbol Legacy meaning Upgrade symbol(s) Upgrade meaning / explicit mapping identity
\(e\) “total budget density” (ambiguous in legacy) \(e_{\mathrm{act}}\) or \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) Split/clarify: \(e_{\mathrm{act}}:=\rho+e_a\), \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}:=\rho+e_a+e_{\mathrm{bg}}\). Legacy \(e\) must be mapped to one of these explicitly.
\(e\) “mobile energy density” (legacy sometimes) \(e_a\) Rename: \(e_a:=\int_V f\,d\mathbf{v}\) is the mobile budget density.
\(\rho\) “matter density” (legacy) \(\rho\) (stored) and/or \(\rho_{\mathrm{mat}}\) Disambiguate: use \(\rho\) for stored actor budget density; if baryonic/matter density is needed, use \(\rho_{\mathrm{mat}}\) (separate SR entry).
\(S\) “flux” or “entropy” (collision) \(\mathbf{S}\) (flux), \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}\)/\(S_{\mathrm{cg}}\) (entropy) Collision resolution: flux is always bold \(\mathbf{S}=\int \mathbf{v}f\,d\mathbf{v}\); entropy is \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X)\) or \(S_{\mathrm{cg}}(X)\) with explicit qualifier.
\(T\) “temperature” or “tensor” (collision) \(\mathbf{T}\) (tensor), \(T_{\mathrm{temp}}\) (temperature) Collision resolution: \(\mathbf{T}=\int \mathbf{v}\otimes\mathbf{v} f\,d\mathbf{v}\); temperature uses \(T_{\mathrm{temp}}\) only.
\(\kappa\) single “kappa constant” (legacy) \(\kappa_T,\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}},\kappa_{\mathrm{geom}},\dots\) Constant split: \(\kappa_T\) for closure \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_a\mathbf{I}\), \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) for attenuation \(dE/E=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}dx\), other uses must be subscripted; bare \(\kappa\) forbidden.
\(c\) “speed of light” vs “throughput speed” \(c_0,\ c_{\mathrm{th}}\) Clarify: \(c_0\) reserved for vacuum light speed; \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) for throughput/finite-speed gate (may be emergent).
\(\Gamma\) “rate” vs Lorentz factor ambiguity \(\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}\) or \(\gamma_L\) Rename: event rate \(\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}\) (Part 17); Lorentz factor \(\gamma_L\) (never \(\Gamma\)).

21.3.3 A.3.3 Mapping validation gates (locked)

21.3.3.1 Gate MAP-1 (dimensional preservation).

Every mapping row must satisfy dimension consistency (in \((B,L,T)\) basis): \[\mathrm{Dim}(\text{legacy expression})=\mathrm{Dim}(\text{upgrade expression}).\] Else FAIL[MAP-1].

21.3.3.2 Gate MAP-2 (continuity law preservation).

If legacy text used a continuity law \[\partial_t e + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}=0,\] then the upgraded variables must preserve the same identity for the intended conserved quantity: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{act}}+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}=0 \quad \text{(closed actor sector)}\] or \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{tot}}+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{tot}}=0 \quad \text{(if stage flux is included)}.\] If the mapping changes the meaning of “conserved quantity” without an explicit tier upgrade (LOCK\(\to\)HYP) and a new gate, it is FAIL[MAP-2].

21.3.3.3 Gate MAP-3 (sign convention audit).

Any sign flip must be explicit and localized (one row) and must update all dependent equations consistently. Hidden sign flips are FAIL[MAP-3].

21.4 A.4 Standard resolutions for common collision cases (\(e\), \(\kappa\), \(B\), etc.)

This subsection lists the highest-frequency collisions and the standard resolution rules. These rules are LOCK and apply globally across the suite.

21.4.1 A.4.1 Collision-resolution table (locked)

Common symbol collisions and standard resolutions (locked).
Symbol Collision meanings Standard resolution (must-follow)
\(e\) (total vs mobile vs background; also elementary charge in mainstream) Never use bare \(e\). Use \(e_a\) (mobile), \(\rho\) (stored), \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\) (stage), \(e_{\mathrm{act}}=\rho+e_a\), \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}=\rho+e_a+e_{\mathrm{bg}}\). If electric charge is needed, use \(q\); if elementary charge, use \(e_0\).
\(\mathbf{S}\) / \(S\) (flux vs entropy) Flux is always bold \(\mathbf{S}\). Entropy is always \(S_{\mathrm{vN}}(X)\) or \(S_{\mathrm{cg}}(X)\) (or \(S_{\mathrm{th}}\)) with explicit qualifier. Bare \(S\) is forbidden.
\(\mathbf{T}\) / \(T\) (tensor vs temperature) Moment tensor is \(\mathbf{T}\). Temperature is \(T_{\mathrm{temp}}\) (or \(\Theta\)) only. Bare \(T\) forbidden.
\(\kappa\) (optical attenuation vs closure constant vs curvature vs conductivity) No bare \(\kappa\). Use subscripts: \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (attenuation, \([L]^{-1}\)), \(\kappa_T\) (closure, \([L]^2[T]^{-2}\)), \(\kappa_{\mathrm{geom}}\) (curvature or geometric constant, with explicit dimension), \(\kappa_{\mathrm{cond}}\) (conductivity, if ever used, with explicit SI units).
\(B\) (background/stiffness vs magnetic field vs Bayesian evidence/BIC) Background/stiffness: \(B_{\mathrm{stage}}\) or \(K_{\mathrm{stiff}}\). Magnetic field: bold \(\mathbf{B}_{\mathrm{mag}}\). Bayesian evidence: \(Z\); BIC reserved for \(\mathrm{BIC}\) (never \(B\)).
\(c\) (vacuum light speed vs throughput/emergent speed) \(c_0\) reserved for vacuum light speed. \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) for throughput gate speed (may be emergent but must be declared). Do not use bare \(c\).
\(H\) (Hubble parameter vs entropy functional \(H(f)\)) Hubble parameter: \(H(t)\) (cosmology). Entropy functional: use \(\mathcal{H}[f]\) (calligraphic) and local entropy density \(\mathcal{H}(t,\mathbf{x})\) if needed. Do not use \(H\) for entropy.
\(\mu\) (conversion rate vs chemical potential vs CMB \(\mu\)-distortion) Conversion rate: \(\mu_{\mathrm{conv}}\). Chemical potential: \(\mu_{\mathrm{chem}}\). CMB spectral distortion: \(\mu_{\mathrm{CMB}}\). No bare \(\mu\).
\(\Gamma\) / \(\gamma\) (event rate vs Lorentz factor) Event rate: \(\Gamma_{\mathrm{evt}}\) (capital gamma). Lorentz factor: \(\gamma_L\) (lowercase) only.
\(a\) (cell length scale vs cosmological scale factor) Cosmological scale factor: \(a(t)\) only. Cell/length scale: \(a_{\mathrm{cell}}\) or \(\ell_{\mathrm{cell}}\) (never \(a\) alone) and stored in KSR.
\(k\) (FRW curvature index vs alignment axis) FRW curvature index: \(k_{\mathrm{curv}}\in\{-1,0,+1\}\). Alignment axis: bold \(\mathbf{k}\) (unit vector). Never use bare \(k\) without subscript/boldface.
\(\lambda\) (mixing rate vs wavelength) Mixing rate: \(\lambda_{\mathrm{mix}}\) with units \([T]^{-1}\). Wavelength: \(\lambda_{\mathrm{ph}}\) with units \([L]\).

21.4.2 A.4.2 Enforcement notes (locked)

21.4.2.1 Lint rule.

A document build must run a symbol-lint step that scans for forbidden bare symbols: \[\{e,\ S,\ T,\ \kappa,\ c,\ \mu,\ \lambda,\ k\}\] and verifies that each appearance is either (i) boldface when required or (ii) subscripted as mandated above. Any violation produces FAIL[lint-symbol].

21.4.2.2 Registry update discipline.

If a collision is discovered, it must be resolved by:

  1. updating SR with a canonical symbol and marking the old ambiguous form as deprecated,

  2. updating the legacy\(\to\)upgrade mapping table (A.3) to include the resolution,

  3. bumping version according to Part 20 (breaking change if meanings change).

21.4.2.3 End of Appendix A.

Appendix A defined: (A.1) the symbol registry schema and a core symbol list with reserved/forbidden rules, (A.2) a dimension/unit system with canonical nondimensionalization and standard dimensionless groups, (A.3) an explicit legacy\(\to\)upgrade mapping format with validation gates, (A.4) standard resolutions for the most frequent symbol collisions to prevent semantic drift.

22 APPENDIX B. Mathematical Block Library (Lemma, Theorem, and Proof Templates) (Output A2)

This Appendix is a reusable library of mathematically complete blocks (lemmas, propositions, theorems, gates, and proof skeletons) that can be copied into the main text (Parts 04–20) with minimal edits. The blocks are designed to be:

  • Tier-safe: each block declares what is LOCK (identity/definition), DERIVE (inference), and what requires HYP/SPEC.

  • Audit-ready: assumptions are explicitly listed; boundary terms are never silently dropped.

  • Dimension-safe: every block can be paired with a dimension check using Appendix A (and Part 20 rule M3).

  • Gate-compatible: each result is accompanied by a PASS/FAIL form when appropriate.

22.0.0.1 Notation policy.

Symbols should be consistent with Appendix A: flux is bold \(\mathbf{S}\); second moment tensor is bold \(\mathbf{T}\); avoid forbidden bare symbols (\(e,S,T,\kappa,c,\mu,\lambda,k\) without qualifiers).

22.0.0.2 A minimal “math discipline” convention.

Whenever a proof uses integration by parts, it must explicitly state what happens to boundary terms (periodic domain, no-flux, inflow/outflow, specular reflection, or decay at infinity). Unjustified boundary term removal is FAIL[boundary] in the verification OS (Part 20).

22.1 B.1 Conservation / Ledger Lemma Templates

This subsection provides templates for converting local conservation laws into control-volume (ledger) statements, including boundary flux bookkeeping, and their discrete analogs (finite volume / finite difference).

22.1.1 B.1.1 Divergence theorem and control-volume ledger (continuous PDE)

22.1.1.1 Lemma B.1.1 (Control-volume ledger identity; LOCK).

Let \(\Omega\subseteq\mathbb{R}^d\) be a domain with piecewise smooth boundary \(\partial\Omega\) and outward unit normal \(\mathbf{n}\). Let \(u=u(t,\mathbf{x})\) be a scalar field and \(\mathbf{F}=\mathbf{F}(t,\mathbf{x})\) a vector field satisfying sufficient regularity so that the following computations are valid. Assume \(u\) satisfies a balance law \[\partial_t u + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{F} = q \quad\text{in }(0,T)\times\Omega, \label{eq:B11_balance_law}\] where \(q=q(t,\mathbf{x})\) is a source term. Then for any control volume \(V\subseteq \Omega\) with piecewise smooth boundary \(\partial V\), \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V u\,d\mathbf{x} = -\int_{\partial V} \mathbf{F}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA +\int_V q\,d\mathbf{x}. \label{eq:B11_control_volume}\]

Proof. Integrate [eq:B11_balance_law] over \(V\): \[\int_V \partial_t u\,d\mathbf{x} + \int_V \nabla\cdot \mathbf{F}\,d\mathbf{x} = \int_V q\,d\mathbf{x}.\] Exchange derivative and integral (regularity assumption) to obtain \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_V u\,d\mathbf{x} + \int_V \nabla\cdot \mathbf{F}\,d\mathbf{x} = \int_V q\,d\mathbf{x}.\] Apply the divergence theorem: \[\int_V \nabla\cdot \mathbf{F}\,d\mathbf{x} = \int_{\partial V}\mathbf{F}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA.\] Rearrange to get [eq:B11_control_volume]. \(\square\)

22.1.1.2 Gate form (ledger PASS/FAIL).

Given a computed \((u,\mathbf{F},q)\), define the ledger residual for any \(V\): \[\mathrm{Res}_{\mathrm{ledger}}(t;V) := \frac{d}{dt}\int_V u\,d\mathbf{x} +\int_{\partial V}\mathbf{F}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA -\int_V q\,d\mathbf{x}. \label{eq:B11_ledger_residual}\] Then PASS[ledger] iff \(\mathrm{Res}_{\mathrm{ledger}}(t;V)=0\) (analytically) or \(|\mathrm{Res}_{\mathrm{ledger}}|\le \varepsilon\) (numerically, with a locked tolerance).

22.1.2 B.1.2 Actor-sector continuity from kinetic+conversion system (mobile+stored ledger)

22.1.2.1 Lemma B.1.2 (Kinetic-to-ledger continuity; DERIVE template).

Let \(f(t,\mathbf{x},\mathbf{v})\ge 0\) be a kinetic distribution on \((0,T)\times\Omega\times V\) and \(\rho(t,\mathbf{x})\ge 0\) a stored budget density on \((0,T)\times\Omega\). Assume the coupled system \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t f + \mathbf{v}\cdot\nabla_{\mathbf{x}} f + \nabla_{\mathbf{v}}\cdot(\mathbf{F} f) &= Q[f] + \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] - \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f] + \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}, \label{eq:B12_kinetic}\\ \partial_t \rho &= \mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f] - \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho] + \mathcal{J}_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}, \label{eq:B12_rho}\end{aligned}\] with the conversion consistency constraints (pointwise in \((t,\mathbf{x})\)): \[\int_V \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]\,d\mathbf{v}=\mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho], \qquad \int_V \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}[f]\,d\mathbf{v}=\mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f]. \label{eq:B12_conversion_consistency}\] Assume further: \[\int_V Q[f]\,d\mathbf{v}=0, \qquad \int_V \nabla_{\mathbf{v}}\cdot(\mathbf{F} f)\,d\mathbf{v}=0 \quad\text{(boundary/decay condition in velocity)}. \label{eq:B12_Q_and_vdiv}\] Define moments: \[e_a(t,\mathbf{x}) := \int_V f\,d\mathbf{v}, \qquad \mathbf{S}(t,\mathbf{x}) := \int_V \mathbf{v}\,f\,d\mathbf{v}, \qquad e_{\mathrm{act}}:=\rho+e_a. \label{eq:B12_moments}\] Then the actor-sector continuity law holds: \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{act}} + \nabla_{\mathbf{x}}\cdot \mathbf{S} = J_{\mathrm{act,bg}}, \qquad J_{\mathrm{act,bg}}:=\int_V \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,d\mathbf{v}+\mathcal{J}_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}. \label{eq:B12_actor_continuity}\] In the closed actor-sector case (\(J_{\mathrm{act,bg}}=0\)), the right-hand side vanishes.

Proof. Integrate [eq:B12_kinetic] over \(V\): \[\partial_t \int_V f\,d\mathbf{v} + \nabla_{\mathbf{x}}\cdot \int_V \mathbf{v}f\,d\mathbf{v} + \int_V \nabla_{\mathbf{v}}\cdot(\mathbf{F}f)\,d\mathbf{v} = \int_V Q[f]\,d\mathbf{v} +\int_V \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}\,d\mathbf{v}-\int_V \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}\,d\mathbf{v}+\int_V \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,d\mathbf{v}.\] Use [eq:B12_Q_and_vdiv] to drop the \(Q\) and velocity-divergence terms. Use [eq:B12_conversion_consistency] to rewrite conversion integrals: \[\partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = \mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}[\rho]-\mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}[f]+\int_V \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,d\mathbf{v}.\] Now add [eq:B12_rho]: \[\partial_t(\rho+e_a)+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = \left(\mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}-\mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}+\mathcal{J}_{\rho,\mathrm{bg}}\right) +\left(\mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f}-\mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}+\int_V \mathcal{J}_{\mathrm{bg}}\,d\mathbf{v}\right),\] so conversion cancels and yields [eq:B12_actor_continuity]. \(\square\)

22.1.2.2 Gate form (conversion cancellation).

If the measured discrepancy \[\Delta_{\mathrm{conv}} := \int_V \mathcal{C}_{\rho\to f}\,d\mathbf{v}-\mathcal{R}_{\rho\to f} \quad\text{or}\quad \int_V \mathcal{C}_{f\to\rho}\,d\mathbf{v}-\mathcal{R}_{f\to\rho}\] is nonzero beyond tolerance, declare FAIL[conv-ledger].

22.1.3 B.1.3 Global conservation under boundary conditions (periodic/no-flux/inflow)

22.1.3.1 Lemma B.1.3 (Global budget identity and boundary classification; LOCK).

Let \(u,\mathbf{F},q\) satisfy [eq:B11_balance_law] on \(\Omega\). Then: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega}u\,d\mathbf{x} = -\int_{\partial\Omega}\mathbf{F}\cdot \mathbf{n}\,dA + \int_{\Omega}q\,d\mathbf{x}. \label{eq:B13_global}\] In particular:

  • Periodic domain: \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\) implies the boundary integral is identically zero.

  • No-flux boundary: if \(\mathbf{F}\cdot \mathbf{n}=0\) on \(\partial\Omega\), then \(\frac{d}{dt}\int_\Omega u=\int_\Omega q\).

  • Closed system: if additionally \(q=0\), then \(\int_\Omega u\) is conserved.

  • Inflow/outflow: boundary flux must be treated as an explicit ledger entry; claiming conservation without controlling it is FAIL[boundary-ledger].

Proof. Apply Lemma B.1.1 with \(V=\Omega\). \(\square\)

22.1.4 B.1.4 Discrete conservation (finite volume telescoping flux)

22.1.4.1 Lemma B.1.4 (Discrete finite-volume conservation; DERIVE template).

Consider a mesh partition \(\Omega=\cup_i \Omega_i\) with cell volumes \(|\Omega_i|\). Let \(u_i^n\) approximate the cell average of \(u\) at time step \(n\). A conservative finite-volume update has the form \[u_i^{n+1} = u_i^n -\frac{\Delta t}{|\Omega_i|}\sum_{f\in\partial\Omega_i} \Phi_{i,f}^n +\Delta t\ q_i^n, \label{eq:B14_fv_update}\] where \(\Phi_{i,f}^n\) is the numerical flux through face \(f\) (outward from cell \(i\)) and \(q_i^n\) is a cell source approximation. Assume flux antisymmetry on interior faces: if face \(f\) is shared by cells \(i\) and \(j\), then \[\Phi_{i,f}^n = -\Phi_{j,f}^n. \label{eq:B14_flux_antisym}\] Then the discrete global sum satisfies \[\sum_i |\Omega_i| u_i^{n+1} = \sum_i |\Omega_i| u_i^{n} -\Delta t \sum_{f\subseteq \partial\Omega} \Phi_{f}^n +\Delta t \sum_i |\Omega_i| q_i^n, \label{eq:B14_discrete_global}\] where the boundary flux sum runs only over boundary faces and \(\Phi_f^n\) denotes the outward boundary flux.

Proof. Multiply [eq:B14_fv_update] by \(|\Omega_i|\) and sum over \(i\): \[\sum_i |\Omega_i|u_i^{n+1} = \sum_i |\Omega_i|u_i^{n} -\Delta t\sum_i \sum_{f\in\partial\Omega_i}\Phi_{i,f}^n +\Delta t\sum_i |\Omega_i| q_i^n.\] Interior face contributions cancel by [eq:B14_flux_antisym], leaving only boundary faces, yielding [eq:B14_discrete_global]. \(\square\)

22.1.4.2 Gate form (discrete ledger).

Define discrete ledger residual \[\mathrm{Res}^{n}_{\mathrm{disc}} := \sum_i |\Omega_i| (u_i^{n+1}-u_i^{n}) +\Delta t \sum_{f\subseteq\partial\Omega}\Phi_f^n -\Delta t \sum_i |\Omega_i|q_i^n.\] Then PASS[disc-ledger] iff \(\mathrm{Res}^{n}_{\mathrm{disc}}=0\) up to floating-point tolerance.

22.2 B.2 Templates for Deriving Effective Equations from Closures

This subsection provides standardized derivations turning moment closures into closed PDEs (diffusion, telegraph/Cattaneo, hyperbolic moment systems), and (optionally) deriving those closures from a kinetic relaxation limit.

22.2.1 B.2.1 Diffusion equation from isotropic closure (moment-level)

22.2.1.1 Proposition B.2.1 (Isotropic diffusion closure \(\Rightarrow\) diffusion PDE; DERIVE).

Assume the continuity law for a scalar density \(e_a(t,\mathbf{x})\) and flux \(\mathbf{S}(t,\mathbf{x})\): \[\partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = q_e, \label{eq:B21_continuity}\] and assume a Fick-type closure \[\mathbf{S} = -\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a, \label{eq:B21_fick}\] where \(\mathbf{D}=\mathbf{D}(t,\mathbf{x})\) is a symmetric positive semidefinite diffusion tensor (possibly constant). Then \(e_a\) satisfies the diffusion equation \[\partial_t e_a = \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a) + q_e. \label{eq:B21_diffusion}\]

Proof. Insert [eq:B21_fick] into [eq:B21_continuity]: \[\partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot(-\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a)=q_e,\] so \(\partial_t e_a = \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a)+q_e\). \(\square\)

22.2.1.2 Gate form (parabolicity).

If \(\mathbf{D}=\mathbf{D}^\top\) and \(\xi^\top \mathbf{D}\xi\ge d_{\min}|\xi|^2\) for some \(d_{\min}>0\) (uniformly), then the PDE is uniformly parabolic and is PASS[PAR]. If \(\mathbf{D}\) is not symmetric or not positive semidefinite, declare FAIL[PAR].

22.2.2 B.2.2 Telegraph/Cattaneo closure for finite-speed transport

22.2.2.1 Proposition B.2.2 (Cattaneo closure \(\Rightarrow\) telegraph equation; DERIVE).

Assume \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= q_e, \label{eq:B22_continuity}\\ \tau_S \partial_t \mathbf{S} + \mathbf{S} &= -\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a + \mathbf{g}, \label{eq:B22_cattaneo}\end{aligned}\] with \(\tau_S>0\), symmetric diffusion tensor \(\mathbf{D}\succeq 0\), and a forcing term \(\mathbf{g}\). Then \(e_a\) satisfies the telegraph-type equation \[\tau_S \partial_t^2 e_a + \partial_t e_a = \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a) +\nabla\cdot \mathbf{g} +\tau_S \partial_t q_e + q_e. \label{eq:B22_telegraph}\]

Proof. Take \(\nabla\cdot\) of [eq:B22_cattaneo]: \[\tau_S \partial_t (\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}) + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = -\nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a)+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{g}.\] From [eq:B22_continuity], \(\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}=q_e-\partial_t e_a\). Substitute: \[\tau_S \partial_t (q_e-\partial_t e_a) + (q_e-\partial_t e_a) = -\nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a)+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{g}.\] Rearrange to obtain [eq:B22_telegraph]. \(\square\)

22.2.2.2 Gate form (finite-speed constraint).

In the homogeneous case (\(q_e=\mathbf{g}=0\)) with constant \(\mathbf{D}\), the characteristic speed scale is \[c_{\mathrm{eff}}^2 = \lambda_{\max}(\mathbf{D})/\tau_S.\] A throughput constraint \(c_{\mathrm{eff}}\le c_{\mathrm{th}}\) becomes the gate \[\lambda_{\max}(\mathbf{D}) \le \tau_S c_{\mathrm{th}}^2.\] Violation is FAIL[speed].

22.2.3 B.2.3 Hyperbolic moment closure: symmetrizable template

22.2.3.1 Theorem B.2.3 (Symmetrizable hyperbolic template; DERIVE).

Let \(U(t,\mathbf{x})\in\mathbb{R}^m\) satisfy a quasilinear system \[\partial_t U + \sum_{j=1}^d A_j(U)\,\partial_{x_j}U = R(U), \label{eq:B23_quasilinear}\] where \(A_j(U)\) are \(m\times m\) matrices and \(R(U)\) is a source. Assume there exists a smooth, symmetric positive definite matrix \(H(U)\) (a symmetrizer) such that for each \(j\), \[H(U)A_j(U)\ \text{is symmetric}. \label{eq:B23_sym_condition}\] Then [eq:B23_quasilinear] is (locally) well-posed in Sobolev spaces under standard regularity assumptions, and admits an energy identity/estimate of the form \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_{\Omega} \frac{1}{2} U^{\mathsf T} H(U) U\,d\mathbf{x} \le \int_{\Omega} U^{\mathsf T} H(U) R(U)\,d\mathbf{x} + \text{(boundary flux terms)}. \label{eq:B23_energy_estimate}\]

Proof (template).

  1. Multiply [eq:B23_quasilinear] on the left by \(U^{\mathsf T}H(U)\).

  2. Use symmetry of \(H(U)A_j(U)\) to rewrite the transport term as a divergence plus lower-order commutator terms arising from \(U\)-dependence of \(H\).

  3. Integrate over \(\Omega\) and apply the divergence theorem to isolate boundary flux terms.

  4. Bound commutator and source terms using Sobolev embedding and Grönwall’s inequality.

\(\square\)

22.2.3.2 Gate form (hyperbolic canonicity).

Declare PASS[SH] iff a convex entropy \(\eta(U)\) exists with Hessian \(\nabla^2\eta(U)=H(U)\succ 0\) satisfying [eq:B23_sym_condition]. If no such \(H(U)\) exists (or it is not positive definite in the regime), declare FAIL[SH].

22.2.4 B.2.4 Kinetic relaxation \(\Rightarrow\) Fick law (Hilbert expansion template)

22.2.4.1 Theorem B.2.4 (Fast relaxation \(\Rightarrow\) diffusion closure; DERIVE template).

Consider a scaled kinetic equation on \(\Omega\times V\) (for simplicity omit conversion and force terms): \[\partial_t f^\varepsilon + \mathbf{v}\cdot\nabla_{\mathbf{x}} f^\varepsilon = \frac{1}{\varepsilon}Q[f^\varepsilon], \label{eq:B24_scaled_kinetic}\] where \(0<\varepsilon\ll 1\) and \(Q\) satisfies:

  • Mass conservation: \(\int_V Q[g]\,d\mathbf{v}=0\) for all admissible \(g\).

  • Equilibrium manifold: there exists \(M_0(\mathbf{v})\ge 0\) with \(\int_V M_0\,d\mathbf{v}=1\) such that \(Q[e_a M_0]=0\) for any scalar \(e_a\).

  • Coercivity/spectral gap: the linearization \(\mathcal{L}\) of \(Q\) around \(M_0\) is invertible on the orthogonal complement of the conserved mode and admits a bounded inverse in a suitable space.

Assume a formal Hilbert expansion \[f^\varepsilon = f_0 + \varepsilon f_1 + \varepsilon^2 f_2 + \cdots, \label{eq:B24_hilbert_series}\] with \(f_0=e_a(t,\mathbf{x})M_0(\mathbf{v})\). Then to leading order the flux obeys Fick’s law \[\mathbf{S} = \int_V \mathbf{v} f^\varepsilon\,d\mathbf{v} \approx -\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a, \label{eq:B24_fick}\] where \(\mathbf{D}\) is defined by the cell problem: \[\mathcal{L}\boldsymbol{\chi}(\mathbf{v}) = \mathbf{v}M_0(\mathbf{v}), \qquad \mathbf{D} = -\int_V \mathbf{v}\otimes \boldsymbol{\chi}(\mathbf{v})\,d\mathbf{v}. \label{eq:B24_cell_problem}\] Consequently \(e_a\) satisfies a diffusion equation at macroscopic scales.

Proof (template). Insert [eq:B24_hilbert_series] into [eq:B24_scaled_kinetic] and match powers of \(\varepsilon\):

  • \(O(\varepsilon^{-1})\): \(Q[f_0]=0\), hence \(f_0=e_a M_0\).

  • \(O(1)\): \(\partial_t f_0 + \mathbf{v}\cdot\nabla f_0 = \mathcal{L}f_1\).

  • Project onto the conserved mode (integrate over \(\mathbf{v}\)) to get the continuity equation for \(e_a\).

  • Solve the cell problem for \(f_1\) in the orthogonal complement to obtain \(f_1=-\boldsymbol{\chi}\cdot\nabla e_a\).

  • Compute \(\mathbf{S}=\int \mathbf{v}(f_0+\varepsilon f_1)\,d\mathbf{v}\); the \(\int\mathbf{v}f_0\) term vanishes for isotropic \(M_0\), leaving [eq:B24_fick].

\(\square\)

22.2.4.2 Gate form (derivation validity).

Declare PASS[diff-limit] iff: (i) \(M_0\) is isotropic (or the anisotropy is explicitly controlled), (ii) coercivity holds for \(\mathcal{L}\), (iii) uniform moment bounds justify truncation. Otherwise declare FAIL[diff-limit] or upgrade the tier to HYP.

22.3 B.3 Stability / Boundary Conditions / Maximum Principle Templates

This subsection provides proof templates for stability estimates (energy methods), boundary-condition handling, and maximum principles (positivity/bounds) for diffusion-type equations.

22.3.1 B.3.1 \(L^2\) energy estimate template (linear transport + damping)

22.3.1.1 Lemma B.3.1 (\(L^2\) energy estimate for advection-damping; DERIVE).

Let \(u(t,\mathbf{x})\) solve \[\partial_t u + \mathbf{b}(\mathbf{x})\cdot \nabla u + \lambda(\mathbf{x})u = q(t,\mathbf{x}) \quad\text{in }(0,T)\times\Omega, \label{eq:B31_adv_damp}\] with \(\lambda(\mathbf{x})\ge \lambda_{\min}\ge 0\) and \(\mathbf{b}\) sufficiently smooth. Assume either:

  • \(\Omega=\mathbb{T}^d\) (periodic), or

  • \(\mathbf{b}\cdot \mathbf{n}=0\) on \(\partial\Omega\) (no normal advection flux), or

  • inflow boundary conditions are specified so that boundary terms are controlled.

Then \[\frac{1}{2}\frac{d}{dt}\|u(t)\|_{L^2(\Omega)}^2 +\lambda_{\min}\|u(t)\|_{L^2(\Omega)}^2 \le \frac{1}{2\lambda_{\min}}\|q(t)\|_{L^2(\Omega)}^2 \quad(\lambda_{\min}>0), \label{eq:B31_energy_ineq}\] with the natural modification for \(\lambda_{\min}=0\) (drop the \(\lambda_{\min}\) terms and use Grönwall with \(\|\nabla\cdot\mathbf{b}\|_{L^\infty}\) if needed).

Proof. Multiply [eq:B31_adv_damp] by \(u\) and integrate: \[\frac{1}{2}\frac{d}{dt}\int_\Omega u^2\,d\mathbf{x} +\int_\Omega u\,\mathbf{b}\cdot\nabla u\,d\mathbf{x} +\int_\Omega \lambda u^2\,d\mathbf{x} = \int_\Omega q u\,d\mathbf{x}.\] Use \(\int u\,\mathbf{b}\cdot\nabla u = \frac{1}{2}\int \mathbf{b}\cdot\nabla(u^2) = \frac{1}{2}\int_{\partial\Omega} u^2 \mathbf{b}\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA - \frac{1}{2}\int_\Omega (\nabla\cdot\mathbf{b})u^2\,d\mathbf{x}\). Under periodic or \(\mathbf{b}\cdot\mathbf{n}=0\) boundary assumptions, the boundary term vanishes; if \(\nabla\cdot\mathbf{b}=0\) it also vanishes; otherwise it is bounded by \(\|\nabla\cdot\mathbf{b}\|_{L^\infty}\|u\|_{L^2}^2\) and absorbed via Grönwall. Bound the RHS using Cauchy–Schwarz and Young: \[\int q u \le \frac{1}{2\lambda_{\min}}\|q\|_{L^2}^2 + \frac{\lambda_{\min}}{2}\|u\|_{L^2}^2.\] Combine with \(\int \lambda u^2\ge \lambda_{\min}\|u\|_{L^2}^2\) to obtain [eq:B31_energy_ineq]. \(\square\)

22.3.1.2 Gate form (stability).

Declare PASS[stab-L2] iff the derived estimate closes with nonnegative damping and controlled boundary terms; else FAIL[stab-L2].

22.3.2 B.3.2 Maximum principle template (diffusion + reaction)

22.3.2.1 Theorem B.3.2 (Maximum principle for diffusion-reaction; DERIVE).

Let \(u(t,\mathbf{x})\) solve \[\partial_t u = \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla u) + r(u,\mathbf{x},t) \quad\text{in }(0,T)\times\Omega, \label{eq:B32_diff_react}\] with \(\mathbf{D}(\mathbf{x},t)=\mathbf{D}^\top\succeq d_{\min}\mathbf{I}\) (uniformly parabolic). Assume either periodic boundary conditions or homogeneous no-flux boundary conditions \[(\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\cdot\mathbf{n}=0 \quad\text{on }(0,T)\times\partial\Omega. \label{eq:B32_noflux}\] Assume \(r\) satisfies: \[r(u,\mathbf{x},t)\ge 0\ \text{whenever }u=0 \qquad\text{(no creation of negative values at the lower boundary).} \label{eq:B32_reaction_condition}\] If \(u(0,\mathbf{x})\ge 0\) for all \(\mathbf{x}\in\Omega\), then \(u(t,\mathbf{x})\ge 0\) for all \((t,\mathbf{x})\).

Proof (template). Consider the negative part \(u_-:=\max\{-u,0\}\). Multiply [eq:B32_diff_react] by \(u_-\) and integrate over \(\Omega\): \[\int_\Omega \partial_t u\ u_-\,d\mathbf{x} = \int_\Omega \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\ u_-\,d\mathbf{x} + \int_\Omega r(u,\mathbf{x},t)\ u_-\,d\mathbf{x}.\] Observe that \(\partial_t u\ u_- = \frac{1}{2}\partial_t(u_-^2)\) almost everywhere. For the diffusion term, integrate by parts: \[\int_\Omega \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\ u_-\,d\mathbf{x} = -\int_\Omega (\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\cdot \nabla u_-\,d\mathbf{x} +\int_{\partial\Omega} u_- (\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA.\] The boundary term vanishes by [eq:B32_noflux] (or periodicity). On the set where \(u_- > 0\), we have \(u=-u_-\) and \(\nabla u = -\nabla u_-\), so \[-(\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\cdot\nabla u_- = (\mathbf{D}\nabla u_-)\cdot \nabla u_- \ge d_{\min}|\nabla u_-|^2\ge 0.\] Also, \(u_->0\) implies \(u<0\), and [eq:B32_reaction_condition] ensures the reaction term does not drive \(u\) further negative in the barrier sense; more precisely, one uses that \(r(u)u_-\le 0\) whenever \(r\) is nondecreasing near \(0\) or satisfies a one-sided Lipschitz condition. A sufficient condition is \(r(u)\ge 0\) at \(u=0\) and \(r\) locally Lipschitz, enabling a comparison argument. Thus: \[\frac{d}{dt}\int_\Omega \frac{1}{2}u_-^2\,d\mathbf{x} + \int_\Omega (\mathbf{D}\nabla u_-)\cdot\nabla u_-\,d\mathbf{x} \le 0,\] so \(\|u_-(t)\|_{L^2}^2\) is nonincreasing. Since \(u_-(0)=0\), it follows \(u_-(t)=0\) for all \(t\), hence \(u\ge 0\). \(\square\)

22.3.2.2 Gate form (positivity).

Declare PASS[POS] iff: (i) \(\mathbf{D}\) is uniformly elliptic, (ii) boundary terms are no-flux/periodic or otherwise controlled, (iii) reaction terms satisfy a one-sided positivity condition at \(u=0\). Otherwise FAIL[POS].

22.3.3 B.3.3 Boundary-condition handling template (energy flux bookkeeping)

22.3.3.1 Lemma B.3.3 (Boundary term ledger for energy methods; LOCK).

Let \(u\) satisfy a PDE whose energy estimate yields an identity of the form \[\frac{d}{dt}\mathcal{E}(t) + \mathcal{D}(t) = \mathcal{B}(t) + \mathcal{S}(t), \label{eq:B33_energy_balance}\] where \(\mathcal{E}\) is an energy, \(\mathcal{D}\ge 0\) is a dissipation, \(\mathcal{B}\) is the boundary flux contribution, and \(\mathcal{S}\) collects volume source terms. Then any claim of stability must explicitly classify \(\mathcal{B}(t)\) as one of:

  • Zero by geometry: periodic domain.

  • Zero by boundary condition: no-flux, specular reflection, or exact cancellation condition.

  • Controlled by inflow data: \(\mathcal{B}(t)\le C\|u_{\mathrm{in}}\|^2\) with locked \(C\).

  • Uncontrolled: if none of the above applies, the stability claim is invalid (FAIL[boundary]).

Proof. This is a bookkeeping lemma: it states the required classification for correctness. \(\square\)

22.3.3.2 Example instantiation: diffusion with no-flux.

For \(\partial_t u = \nabla\cdot(\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\) and \(\mathcal{E}=\frac{1}{2}\|u\|_{L^2}^2\), integration by parts yields \[\frac{d}{dt}\frac{1}{2}\|u\|_{L^2}^2 + \int_\Omega (\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\cdot\nabla u\,d\mathbf{x} = \int_{\partial\Omega} u(\mathbf{D}\nabla u)\cdot\mathbf{n}\,dA.\] No-flux boundary makes \(\mathcal{B}=0\), hence \(\mathcal{E}\) is nonincreasing.

22.3.4 B.3.4 Stability for telegraph/Cattaneo systems (energy method template)

22.3.4.1 Proposition B.3.4 (Energy estimate for Cattaneo system; DERIVE template).

Consider \[\begin{aligned} \partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} &= 0, \label{eq:B34_cattaneo_e}\\ \tau_S \partial_t \mathbf{S} + \mathbf{S} &= -\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a, \label{eq:B34_cattaneo_S}\end{aligned}\] with \(\tau_S>0\) and constant symmetric \(\mathbf{D}\succeq 0\) on a periodic domain (or boundary conditions that kill flux terms). Define the energy \[\mathcal{E}(t):=\frac{1}{2}\int_\Omega \left(e_a^2 + \tau_S\, \mathbf{S}^{\mathsf T}\mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S}\right)d\mathbf{x}, \label{eq:B34_energy_def}\] assuming \(\mathbf{D}\) is positive definite so \(\mathbf{D}^{-1}\) exists (if only semidefinite, restrict to the range or regularize). Then \[\frac{d}{dt}\mathcal{E}(t) + \int_\Omega \mathbf{S}^{\mathsf T}\mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S}\,d\mathbf{x} = 0. \label{eq:B34_energy_decay}\]

Proof (template). Multiply [eq:B34_cattaneo_e] by \(e_a\) and integrate: \[\frac{1}{2}\frac{d}{dt}\int e_a^2 = -\int e_a \nabla\cdot \mathbf{S} = \int \nabla e_a\cdot \mathbf{S} \quad\text{(boundary terms vanish)}.\] Multiply [eq:B34_cattaneo_S] on the left by \(\mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S}\) and integrate: \[\tau_S \int \partial_t \mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S} + \int \mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S} = -\int \nabla e_a\cdot \mathbf{S}.\] Recognize \(\int \partial_t \mathbf{S}\cdot \mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S} = \frac{1}{2}\frac{d}{dt}\int \mathbf{S}^{\mathsf T}\mathbf{D}^{-1}\mathbf{S}\). Add the two identities; the coupling \(\int \nabla e_a\cdot\mathbf{S}\) cancels, yielding [eq:B34_energy_decay]. \(\square\)

22.3.4.2 Gate form (dissipative stability).

Declare PASS[Cattaneo-stab] if \(\tau_S>0\) and \(\mathbf{D}\succ 0\) (or appropriately handled semidefinite case) and boundary terms vanish/are controlled.

22.4 B.4 Weak-Field Correspondence Templates (Newton / GR)

This subsection provides templates to demonstrate (or test) correspondence with Newtonian gravity and GR in the weak-field limit. These are templates: they specify the exact steps and gates required. Any deviation must be explicitly justified and tier-labeled.

22.4.1 B.4.1 Newtonian correspondence from an effective potential (moment-level template)

22.4.1.1 Assumptions (weak-field Newton template; LOCK + HYP).

  • LOCK: weak-field regime is declared: \(|\Phi|/c_0^2\ll 1\) and typical speeds \(|u|/c_0\ll 1\).

  • HYP: the effective force entering the momentum-like equation is conservative: \[\mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} = -\nabla \Phi. \label{eq:B41_force_potential}\]

  • DERIVE: the moment system yields an acceleration equation for a velocity field \(u\): \[\partial_t u + (u\cdot\nabla)u = \mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}} + \text{(pressure/drag terms)}. \label{eq:B41_euler_like}\]

22.4.1.2 Theorem B.4.1 (Newtonian acceleration gate; DERIVE template).

Assume that in the pressureless and low-drag limit (a declared regime), \[\partial_t u + (u\cdot\nabla)u \approx -\nabla\Phi. \label{eq:B41_newton_accel}\] Then test-particle trajectories satisfy Newton’s law: \[\ddot{\mathbf{x}}(t) \approx -\nabla\Phi(\mathbf{x}(t),t). \label{eq:B41_newton_trajectory}\]

Proof. Along a trajectory with \(\dot{\mathbf{x}}=u(t,\mathbf{x})\), the material derivative satisfies \[\ddot{\mathbf{x}} = \frac{D}{Dt}u = \partial_t u + (u\cdot\nabla)u,\] hence [eq:B41_newton_trajectory] follows from [eq:B41_newton_accel]. \(\square\)

22.4.1.3 Gate NEWT-ACC (mandatory for any “Newton-consistent” claim).

\[\texttt{PASS[NEWT-ACC]}\Longleftrightarrow \text{in the declared weak-field/low-speed regime, the derived acceleration equals }-\nabla\Phi\text{ to the target order.} \label{eq:B41_gate_NEWT_ACC}\] Otherwise FAIL[NEWT-ACC].

22.4.1.4 HYP extension: Poisson closure gate.

If the model claims Poisson correspondence, it must explicitly state a Poisson-like equation: \[-\Delta\Phi = 4\pi G_{\mathrm{eff}}\,\rho_{\mathrm{src}}, \label{eq:B41_poisson}\] and declare what \(\rho_{\mathrm{src}}\) is (baryons only, baryons+stage, or deficit field). Then the gate is: \[\texttt{PASS[Poisson]} \Longleftrightarrow \text{the chosen }\rho_{\mathrm{src}}\text{ and }G_{\mathrm{eff}}\text{ are fixed and consistent across all uses.}\] If \(\rho_{\mathrm{src}}\) changes between galaxy RC and lensing without an explicit tier upgrade, declare FAIL[source-drift].

22.4.2 B.4.2 GR weak-field template: metric potentials, lensing, and slip

22.4.2.1 Metric ansatz (weak-field scalar perturbations; LOCK).

Use the standard weak-field scalar-perturbed metric (in longitudinal gauge) on an FRW background: \[ds^2 = -(1+2\Psi)c_0^2 dt^2 + a(t)^2(1-2\Phi)\,d\mathbf{x}^2. \label{eq:B42_metric}\] Weak-field means \(|\Psi|\ll 1\), \(|\Phi|\ll 1\) and gradients small in appropriate units.

22.4.2.2 Lemma B.4.2 (Nonrelativistic geodesic acceleration; DERIVE template).

For nonrelativistic motion (\(|u|/c_0\ll 1\)), the spatial geodesic equation reduces to \[\ddot{\mathbf{x}} \approx -\nabla\Psi. \label{eq:B42_geodesic_accel}\]

Proof (template). Compute Christoffel symbols to first order in \(\Psi,\Phi\); in the nonrelativistic limit the dominant term in the spatial geodesic equation is \(-\Gamma^i_{00}c_0^2\approx -\partial_i\Psi\). \(\square\)

22.4.2.3 Lemma B.4.3 (Lensing potential; DERIVE template).

In the weak-field limit, light deflection and lensing are controlled by the combination \[\Phi_{\mathrm{lens}} := \frac{\Phi+\Psi}{2}, \label{eq:B42_lensing_potential}\] and, for a thin lens approximation, the deflection angle is proportional to the transverse gradient of the line-of-sight integral of \(\Phi+\Psi\): \[\boldsymbol{\alpha} \propto \int \nabla_\perp(\Phi+\Psi)\,d\ell. \label{eq:B42_deflection}\]

Proof (template). Expand null geodesics in [eq:B42_metric] to first order; the time delay and transverse deflection depend on \(\Phi+\Psi\). \(\square\)

22.4.2.4 Definition (gravitational slip; LOCK).

\[\eta_{\mathrm{slip}} := \frac{\Phi}{\Psi}. \label{eq:B42_slip_def}\] In GR with negligible anisotropic stress, \(\Phi=\Psi\) hence \(\eta_{\mathrm{slip}}=1\).

22.4.2.5 Gate GR-COH (mandatory coherence gate).

If a model uses an effective potential \(\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}\) for dynamics and also predicts lensing, then it must produce a consistent pair \((\Phi,\Psi)\) such that: \[\texttt{PASS[GR-COH]}\Longleftrightarrow \begin{cases} \text{(Dynamics)}\quad \mathbf{F}_{\mathrm{eff}}=-\nabla\Psi\ \text{(by Lemma B.4.2)},\\ \text{(Lensing)}\quad \text{predicted lensing uses }\Phi+\Psi\ \text{(by Lemma B.4.3)},\\ \text{(Slip)}\quad \eta_{\mathrm{slip}}\ \text{is predicted and used consistently in all modules.} \end{cases} \label{eq:B42_gate_GR_COH}\] Any mismatch (e.g. using \(\Psi\) for dynamics but effectively using only \(\Phi\) for lensing without declaring slip) is FAIL[GR-COH].

22.4.3 B.4.3 Optical/“refractive” reinterpretation template (time delay and redshift-like attenuation)

Many VP/JL frameworks introduce an “effective optical” mechanism (attenuation, time delay, or refractive index). This template forces it into a consistent small-parameter expansion and a testable form.

22.4.3.1 Assumption (effective refractive index; HYP).

Assume light propagation can be described by an effective refractive index field \[n(\mathbf{x}) = 1 + \delta n(\mathbf{x}), \qquad |\delta n|\ll 1 \label{eq:B43_refractive_index}\] over the relevant region (weak optical regime). Then the travel time along a path \(\gamma\) satisfies \[T[\gamma] = \frac{1}{c_0}\int_\gamma n(\mathbf{x})\,ds = \frac{1}{c_0}\int_\gamma \left(1+\delta n(\mathbf{x})\right)ds. \label{eq:B43_travel_time}\]

22.4.3.2 Lemma B.4.4 (First-order time delay; DERIVE).

Relative to vacuum propagation, the first-order extra delay is \[\Delta T = \frac{1}{c_0}\int_\gamma \delta n(\mathbf{x})\,ds. \label{eq:B43_time_delay}\]

Proof. Subtract the \(n\equiv 1\) travel time from [eq:B43_travel_time]. \(\square\)

22.4.3.3 Lemma B.4.5 (First-order deflection by Fermat principle; DERIVE template).

Under small \(\delta n\) and small deflection, the transverse deflection angle satisfies (schematically) \[\boldsymbol{\alpha} \approx \int \nabla_\perp \delta n\,ds \quad\text{(up to a sign convention and geometry factors that must be fixed once and locked).} \label{eq:B43_deflection_index}\]

Proof (template). Use Fermat principle: stationary optical path length \(\int n ds\) under transverse perturbations. Linearize Euler–Lagrange equations in \(\delta n\) and small angles to obtain [eq:B43_deflection_index]. \(\square\)

22.4.3.4 Gate OPT-COH (mandatory for any refractive/lattice-optics claim).

\[\texttt{PASS[OPT-COH]}\Longleftrightarrow \text{the same }n(\mathbf{x})\text{ (or }\delta n\text{) produces both time-delay and deflection predictions and is used consistently across redshift/time-delay/lensing modules.} \label{eq:B43_gate_OPT_COH}\] If different \(n\) are used for different phenomena without explicit tier upgrade and joint test support (Part 19), declare FAIL[OPT-COH].

22.4.4 B.4.4 “Weak-field match order” template (explicit expansion order and remainder)

22.4.4.1 Definition (match order; LOCK).

A correspondence statement “matches GR/Newton to order \(N\)” means: there exist model outputs \(X_{\mathrm{model}}\) and reference outputs \(X_{\mathrm{ref}}\) such that, under a small parameter \(\epsilon\) (e.g. \(\epsilon\sim |\Phi|/c_0^2\) or \(\epsilon\sim |u|/c_0\)), \[X_{\mathrm{model}} - X_{\mathrm{ref}} = O(\epsilon^{N+1}) \quad\text{as }\epsilon\to 0, \label{eq:B44_match_order_def}\] with an explicit bound \[|X_{\mathrm{model}} - X_{\mathrm{ref}}|\le C\,\epsilon^{N+1} \label{eq:B44_match_order_bound}\] for a constant \(C\) declared (or bounded) in the regime.

22.4.4.2 Gate MATCH-\(N\).

\[\texttt{PASS[MATCH-$N$]}\Longleftrightarrow \text{the model provides an explicit expansion and a remainder bound of the form \eqref{eq:B44_match_order_def}--\eqref{eq:B44_match_order_bound}.} \label{eq:B44_gate_match}\] If only a qualitative statement is given without remainder control, the claim must be tiered as HYP rather than DERIVE.

22.4.4.3 End of Appendix B.

Appendix B provided a complete set of reusable, mathematically explicit templates: B.1 for conservation/ledger identities (continuous and discrete), B.2 for deriving closed effective equations from closures (diffusion, telegraph, hyperbolic symmetrization, kinetic relaxation), B.3 for stability and maximum principle proofs with explicit boundary bookkeeping, B.4 for weak-field correspondence checks to Newton/GR (including lensing and optical/refractive templates) with explicit PASS/FAIL gates.

23 APPENDIX C. Saturation \(\Gamma(e)\) & Flux Limiting \(|\mathbf{S}|\) Candidate Catalog (Output A3)

This Appendix is a catalog of admissible functional families for:

  • saturation / processing / event-rate laws \(\Gamma(e)\), and

  • flux bounds / flux-limiters that enforce a finite throughput (“choking”) constraint on \(|\mathbf{S}|\).

It also provides (i) regime-based rules to select constant families such as \(\kappa_T\) and \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\), and (ii) a sensitivity/identifiability checklist that must be completed before declaring any fitted parameter “measured” or “universal” (Part 19–20 verification OS).

23.0.0.1 Tier intent.

This Appendix defines LOCK admissibility criteria and templates. Specific choices of a law (a particular \(\Gamma\) family, a particular flux-limiter form, specific numerical thresholds) are typically SPEC unless they are derived from locked axioms or a locked micro-model. Claims that “a specific family is correct” remain HYP until validated by the test suite.

23.0.0.2 Minimal notation.

Let \(e=e(t,\mathbf{x})\ge 0\) denote the control budget density relevant to the mechanism (commonly \(e_a\) or \(e_{\mathrm{act}}\) or \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\); Appendix A). Let \(\Gamma(e)\) denote a rate (units \([T]^{-1}\)) controlling a saturated processing/transition/event channel. Let \(\mathbf{S}(t,\mathbf{x})\) denote the flux (units \([B][L]^{-2}[T]^{-1}\)).

23.1 C.1 Candidate families for \(\Gamma(e)\) (monotone / saturating / truncated): forms, constraints, pros & cons

23.1.1 C.1.1 LOCK: admissibility constraints for a saturation law

23.1.1.1 Definition C.1.1 (Admissible saturation law; LOCK).

A function \(\Gamma:[0,\infty)\to[0,\infty)\) is an admissible saturation law for a budget density \(e\ge 0\) if it satisfies:

  1. Nonnegativity: \[\Gamma(e)\ge 0\quad \forall e\ge 0. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_nonneg}\]

  2. Baseline consistency (commonly required): \[\Gamma(0)=0, \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_zero}\] unless the mechanism explicitly allows background events at zero control density (then this must be tiered HYP and tested).

  3. Monotonicity (for “more supply \(\Rightarrow\) no less processing”): \[\Gamma'(e)\ge 0\quad \text{for a.e.\ }e>0, \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_monotone}\] or (if not differentiable) \(\Gamma\) is nondecreasing.

  4. Finite-capacity saturation (for a true saturation gate): there exists \(\Gamma_{\max}\in(0,\infty)\) such that \[0\le \Gamma(e)\le \Gamma_{\max}\quad \forall e\ge 0, \qquad \lim_{e\to\infty}\Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_bounded}\] If \(\Gamma\) is intended only as a low-density approximation, boundedness may be dropped but then it is not a saturation law and must not be used for “singularity removal” arguments.

  5. Regularity (for well-posed PDE coupling): \(\Gamma\) is locally Lipschitz: \[\forall E>0,\quad \exists L_E<\infty\ \text{s.t.}\ |\Gamma(e_1)-\Gamma(e_2)|\le L_E|e_1-e_2|\quad \forall e_1,e_2\in[0,E]. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_Lipschitz}\] If a hard threshold is used (non-Lipschitz), it must be handled as a SPEC numerical gate with explicit discontinuity management.

  6. Dimensional correctness: \[=[T]^{-1}. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_dim}\] Therefore any parametric form must be built from a rate scale \(\Gamma_0\) times a dimensionless function of dimensionless arguments.

23.1.2 C.1.2 LOCK: minimal physical “sanity” inequalities

Even before data-fitting, saturation laws used in a throughput argument should satisfy: \[0\le \Gamma(e)\le \Gamma_{\max}, \qquad 0\le \Gamma'(e)\le L, \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_sanity}\] for some declared constant \(L\) (global or regime-local). This prevents pathological “instantaneous” activation, helps numerical stability, and supports maximum-principle style positivity arguments when \(\Gamma\) appears as a sink/source term.

23.1.3 C.1.3 Catalog: monotone unbounded families (not true saturation, but useful low-\(e\) limits)

These families are often useful as asymptotic low-density approximations: \[\Gamma(e)\approx \Gamma_0 \left(\frac{e}{e_0}\right)^{p} \quad\text{for }e\ll e_{\mathrm{sat}}, \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_powerlaw_low}\] but they cannot be used as saturation mechanisms unless explicitly truncated/capped.

23.1.3.1 (U1) Linear.

\[\Gamma(e)=\gamma_1 e, \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_linear}\] with \(\gamma_1\) having units \([T]^{-1}[e]^{-1}\).

  • Pros: simplest; identifiable in low-\(e\) regime.

  • Cons: unbounded; violates finite-capacity arguments; can drive stiff dynamics at high \(e\).

23.1.3.2 (U2) Power law.

\[\Gamma(e)=\Gamma_0 \left(\frac{e}{e_0}\right)^p,\qquad p>0. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_powerlaw}\]

  • Pros: flexible; can represent threshold-like behavior with large \(p\).

  • Cons: unbounded; can be non-identifiable with \((\Gamma_0,e_0)\) scaling; requires truncation to remain physical for saturation purposes.

23.1.3.3 Required upgrade for unbounded families.

If used, these must be declared as SPEC low-density approximations with an explicit cutoff: \[\Gamma(e)=\min\{\Gamma_{\max},\Gamma_0 (e/e_0)^p\},\] or by a smooth cap (below).

23.1.4 C.1.4 Catalog: bounded saturating families (true saturation candidates)

All families below are naturally expressed in the canonical form [eq:appendixC_Gamma_g_param].

23.1.4.1 (S1) Capped linear (hard truncation).

\[g(x)=\min\{x,1\}, \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\min\left\{\frac{e}{e_{\mathrm{sat}}},1\right\}. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_capped_linear}\]

  • Pros: transparent; two-regime interpretation (linear then saturated); easy to fit.

  • Cons: not differentiable at \(e=e_{\mathrm{sat}}\); may cause numerical kinks; derivative discontinuity complicates gradient-based inference.

23.1.4.2 (S2) Michaelis–Menten / rational saturation.

\[g(x)=\frac{x}{1+x}, \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\frac{e}{e+e_{\mathrm{sat}}}. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_MM}\]

  • Pros: smooth; monotone; saturates; interpretable half-saturation point (\(\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{sat}})=\Gamma_{\max}/2\)).

  • Cons: high-\(e\) approach is \(1-1/x\) (slow); parameters \((\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}})\) can be correlated without wide dynamic range.

23.1.4.3 (S3) Hill saturation (tunable sharpness).

\[g(x)=\frac{x^n}{1+x^n}, \qquad n\ge 1, \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\frac{e^n}{e^n+e_{\mathrm{sat}}^n}. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_Hill}\]

  • Pros: smooth; \(n\) controls threshold sharpness; includes Michaelis–Menten as \(n=1\).

  • Cons: \(n\) is often weakly identifiable unless data cover both sub- and super-saturation regimes; large \(n\) can mimic a step and create stiff inference.

23.1.4.4 (S4) Exponential approach.

\[g(x)=1-e^{-x}, \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\left(1-e^{-e/e_{\mathrm{sat}}}\right). \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_exp}\]

  • Pros: smooth; rapid saturation; well-behaved derivatives; simple interpretation via characteristic scale \(e_{\mathrm{sat}}\).

  • Cons: lacks a rational tail; may saturate “too early” depending on the mechanism; still parameter correlation possible.

23.1.4.5 (S5) Hyperbolic tangent saturation (smooth clamp).

\[g(x)=\tanh(x), \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\tanh\!\left(\frac{e}{e_{\mathrm{sat}}}\right). \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_tanh}\]

  • Pros: smooth; saturates quickly; derivative bounded by \(1/e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) scaled by \(\Gamma_{\max}\).

  • Cons: the half-saturation point is not exactly at \(e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) (it is at \(e_{\mathrm{sat}}\operatorname{arctanh}(1/2)\)); interpretability is slightly less direct than MM/Hill.

23.1.4.6 (S6) Logistic saturation (sigmoid around a threshold).

Introduce a threshold \(e_0\) and steepness \(\alpha>0\): \[g(e)=\frac{1}{1+\exp(-\alpha(e-e_0))}, \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\left(\frac{1}{1+\exp(-\alpha(e-e_0))}-\frac{1}{1+\exp(\alpha e_0)}\right)\Big/\left(1-\frac{1}{1+\exp(\alpha e_0)}\right). \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_logistic_zeroed}\] The normalization above enforces \(g(0)=0\) and \(\lim_{e\to\infty}g(e)=1\).

  • Pros: explicit threshold location; controllable sharpness; smooth.

  • Cons: introduces extra parameters \((\alpha,e_0)\) which can be degenerate; can be difficult to fit without dense sampling near threshold.

23.1.4.7 (S7) Smooth capped power law (soft truncation).

A smooth alternative to hard truncation: \[g(x)=\frac{x^p}{(1+x^p)^{1/p}} \quad (p\ge 1), \qquad \Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\frac{(e/e_{\mathrm{sat}})^p}{\left(1+(e/e_{\mathrm{sat}})^p\right)^{1/p}}. \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_softcap}\]

  • Pros: smooth; behaves like \(x\) at small \(x\) and saturates to \(1\) at large \(x\); \(p\) tunes sharpness.

  • Cons: extra parameter \(p\) may be weakly identifiable; interpretation less standard.

23.1.5 C.1.5 Catalog: threshold / gate-like truncated families (piecewise, step, and smoothed step)

These are used when the mechanism is intended to represent a gate turning on above a critical density \(e_{\mathrm{gate}}\).

23.1.5.1 (T1) Hard step (Heaviside).

\[\Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\,H(e-e_{\mathrm{gate}}), \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_step}\] where \(H\) is the Heaviside step function.

  • Pros: simplest gate; clear threshold interpretation.

  • Cons: discontinuous; non-Lipschitz; gradient-based inference fails; numerical solutions may be sensitive; requires explicit discontinuity management and must be treated as SPEC.

23.1.5.2 (T2) Ramp gate (piecewise linear).

\[\Gamma(e)= \begin{cases} 0, & e\le e_{\mathrm{gate}},\\ \Gamma_{\max}\,\dfrac{e-e_{\mathrm{gate}}}{\Delta e}, & e_{\mathrm{gate}}<e<e_{\mathrm{gate}}+\Delta e,\\ \Gamma_{\max}, & e\ge e_{\mathrm{gate}}+\Delta e, \end{cases} \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_ramp}\] with \(\Delta e>0\) a smoothing width in density space.

  • Pros: captures threshold + finite activation width; easy to interpret.

  • Cons: not \(C^1\) at the joints unless further smoothed; introduces \((e_{\mathrm{gate}},\Delta e)\) which may be correlated.

23.1.5.3 (T3) Smoothed step (error function).

\[\Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}\,\frac{1}{2}\left(1+\operatorname{erf}\left(\frac{e-e_{\mathrm{gate}}}{\sqrt{2}\,\sigma_e}\right)\right), \label{eq:appendixC_Gamma_erf}\] with smoothing width \(\sigma_e>0\).

  • Pros: smooth; approximates hard gate; stable gradients.

  • Cons: requires data around the threshold to identify \((e_{\mathrm{gate}},\sigma_e)\); can be re-parameterized redundantly.

23.1.6 C.1.6 Summary table: \(\Gamma(e)\) families and typical use cases

\(\Gamma(e)\) candidate catalog summary (admissible families).
Family Formula (canonical) Key parameters Typical use / notes
Capped linear \(\Gamma=\Gamma_{\max}\min\{e/e_{\mathrm{sat}},1\}\) \(\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) Transparent 2-regime; non-smooth kink.
Michaelis–Menten \(\Gamma=\Gamma_{\max}\frac{e}{e+e_{\mathrm{sat}}}\) \(\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) Smooth; interpretable half-sat; common default.
Hill \(\Gamma=\Gamma_{\max}\frac{e^n}{e^n+e_{\mathrm{sat}}^n}\) \(\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}},n\) Tunable sharpness; \(n\) often weakly identifiable.
Exponential \(\Gamma=\Gamma_{\max}(1-e^{-e/e_{\mathrm{sat}}})\) \(\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) Fast approach; smooth derivatives.
Tanh \(\Gamma=\Gamma_{\max}\tanh(e/e_{\mathrm{sat}})\) \(\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) Smooth clamp; bounded slope.
Step/ramp/erf gate-like \(\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{gate}},\Delta e/\sigma_e\) Threshold mechanisms; must manage discontinuities if hard.

23.2 C.2 Candidate families for \(|\mathbf{S}|\) upper bounds and flux-limiters (choking conditions and physical interpretation)

23.2.1 C.2.1 LOCK: flux bound from bounded velocity support (kinetic origin)

A mathematically clean way to guarantee a flux bound is to impose a bounded velocity support at the kinetic level.

23.2.1.1 Lemma C.2.1 (Flux bound from bounded velocity support; DERIVE).

Let \(f(t,\mathbf{x},\mathbf{v})\ge 0\) and define \[e_a(t,\mathbf{x}) := \int_V f\,d\mathbf{v}, \qquad \mathbf{S}(t,\mathbf{x}) := \int_V \mathbf{v}f\,d\mathbf{v}.\] Assume the velocity domain is bounded by a throughput speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}>0\): \[V \subseteq \{\mathbf{v}\in\mathbb{R}^d:\ |\mathbf{v}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}\}. \label{eq:appendixC_velocity_support}\] Then \[|\mathbf{S}(t,\mathbf{x})| \le c_{\mathrm{th}}\,e_a(t,\mathbf{x}) \qquad \text{for all }(t,\mathbf{x}). \label{eq:appendixC_flux_bound_basic}\]

Proof. By the triangle inequality and \(f\ge 0\): \[|\mathbf{S}| = \left|\int_V \mathbf{v} f\,d\mathbf{v}\right| \le \int_V |\mathbf{v}| f\,d\mathbf{v} \le c_{\mathrm{th}}\int_V f\,d\mathbf{v} = c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a.\] \(\square\)

23.2.1.2 Interpretation.

[eq:appendixC_flux_bound_basic] is a throughput or causality-like constraint: the flux cannot exceed “density \(\times\) speed limit.”

23.2.1.3 LOCK gate (throughput).

Once \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) is declared and locked (KSR), the model must enforce: \[\boxed{ \texttt{PASS[THROUGHPUT]}\Longleftrightarrow |\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a\ \text{everywhere in the declared regime}. } \label{eq:appendixC_gate_throughput}\] Any violation is FAIL[THROUGHPUT].

23.2.2 C.2.2 LOCK: “choking indicator” and choke activation condition

Many closures produce a raw flux \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}\) (e.g. diffusion \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}=-\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a\)) that can exceed the throughput bound. Define the choking indicator: \[\chi_{\mathrm{choke}} := \frac{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}{S_{\max}}, \qquad S_{\max}:=c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a \ \ (\text{default}). \label{eq:appendixC_choke_indicator}\] Then: \[\text{Choking active} \Longleftrightarrow \chi_{\mathrm{choke}}>1. \label{eq:appendixC_choke_active}\]

23.2.2.1 Alternative \(S_{\max}\) definitions (project must choose and lock).

Depending on which sector carries throughput: \[S_{\max}= c_{\mathrm{th}}\,e_a, \qquad\text{or}\qquad S_{\max}=c_{\mathrm{th}}\,e_{\mathrm{act}}, \qquad\text{or}\qquad S_{\max}=c_{\mathrm{th}}\,e_{\mathrm{tot}}, \label{eq:appendixC_Smax_options}\] but mixing these across modules without an explicit tier upgrade is forbidden (Part 20 reverse-injection / coherence rules).

23.2.3 C.2.3 Catalog: hard and smooth flux clamping operators (post-closure limiters)

Let \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}\) be a raw flux prediction from a closure. A flux limiter is a map \[\mathcal{L}:\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}\mapsto \mathbf{S}\] that enforces \(|\mathbf{S}|\le S_{\max}\).

23.2.3.1 (F1) Hard clamp (projection onto the ball).

\[\mathbf{S} = \begin{cases} \mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}, & |\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|\le S_{\max},\\[4pt] S_{\max}\dfrac{\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}}{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}, & |\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|> S_{\max}. \end{cases} \label{eq:appendixC_flux_hard_clamp}\]

  • Pros: strict enforcement; simplest; transparent.

  • Cons: not differentiable at \(|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|=S_{\max}\); can cause convergence issues in gradient methods; introduces non-smooth dynamics.

23.2.3.2 (F2) Smooth clamp via hyperbolic tangent.

\[\mathbf{S} = S_{\max}\tanh\!\left(\frac{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}{S_{\max}}\right) \frac{\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}}{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|+\varepsilon}, \qquad \varepsilon>0\ \text{(numerical regularizer)}. \label{eq:appendixC_flux_tanh_clamp}\]

  • Pros: smooth; stable gradients; strict bound as \(\varepsilon\to 0\).

  • Cons: introduces a smoothing scale \(\varepsilon\) (must be locked); can under-shoot near threshold depending on tuning.

23.2.3.3 (F3) Rational clamp.

\[\mathbf{S}= \frac{\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}}{1+\frac{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}{S_{\max}}} = \frac{S_{\max}\,\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}}{S_{\max}+|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}. \label{eq:appendixC_flux_rational_clamp}\]

  • Pros: smooth; easy; naturally interpolates between linear and saturated flux.

  • Cons: does not exactly equal \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}\) even below threshold unless \(|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|\ll S_{\max}\); may bias low-flux regime slightly.

23.2.3.4 (F4) Smooth “soft-min” clamp.

Define the scalar limiter \[\ell(z):=\frac{1}{z}\log(1+z),\qquad z:=\frac{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}{S_{\max}}, \label{eq:appendixC_softmin_limiter}\] and set \[\mathbf{S}= \ell\!\left(\frac{|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|}{S_{\max}}\right)\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}. \label{eq:appendixC_flux_softmin}\] Then \(|\mathbf{S}|\le S_{\max}\log(1+z)\) which grows sublinearly and effectively limits flux.

  • Pros: smooth; tunable by scaling inside \(\ell\).

  • Cons: does not enforce a hard bound unless modified; best used as a “soft” limiter.

23.2.4 C.2.4 Catalog: flux-limited diffusion (FLD) style limiters (gradient-based)

If the raw closure is diffusive: \[\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}=-\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a,\] then a physically motivated limiter is to modify the diffusion coefficient by a scalar limiter \(\lambda(R)\) that depends on a dimensionless gradient measure \(R\).

23.2.4.1 General FLD form.

Assume isotropic \(\mathbf{D}=D\mathbf{I}\) for simplicity (tensor generalization is straightforward). Define \[\mathbf{S}= -D\,\lambda(R)\,\nabla e_a, \label{eq:appendixC_FLD_form}\] where \(R\) is chosen such that the bound \(|\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a\) is enforced.

23.2.4.2 A canonical choice of \(R\) (dimensionless).

Let \(D\) have units \([L]^2[T]^{-1}\). Then \(D|\nabla e_a|\) has units of flux. Define \[R:=\frac{D|\nabla e_a|}{c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a+\varepsilon}, \qquad \varepsilon>0\ \text{(regularizer)}. \label{eq:appendixC_R_def}\] Then enforce: \[\lambda(R)\le \frac{1}{R} \quad\Rightarrow\quad |\mathbf{S}| = D\lambda(R)|\nabla e_a| \le c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a + \varepsilon. \label{eq:appendixC_FLD_bound_condition}\]

23.2.4.3 Example limiter families (admissible if they satisfy [eq:appendixC_FLD_bound_condition]).

  • (FLD1) Rational limiter: \[\lambda(R)=\frac{1}{1+R}. \label{eq:appendixC_lambda_rational}\]

  • (FLD2) “Square-root” limiter: \[\lambda(R)=\frac{1}{\sqrt{1+R^2}}. \label{eq:appendixC_lambda_sqrt}\]

  • (FLD3) Hyperbolic-tangent limiter: \[\lambda(R)=\frac{\tanh(R)}{R+\varepsilon}. \label{eq:appendixC_lambda_tanh}\]

All satisfy \(\lambda(R)\sim 1\) as \(R\to 0\) (recover diffusion) and \(\lambda(R)\sim 1/R\) as \(R\to\infty\) (recover saturation at the throughput bound).

23.2.4.4 Pros/cons.

  • Pros: integrates limiter into PDE structure; smooth; avoids piecewise clamping; physically interpretable as interpolating between diffusion and free-streaming at speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\).

  • Cons: introduces regularizers and choices of \(R\) that must be locked; can create nonlinear diffusion; identifiability of \(D\) may degrade (only combinations appear).

23.2.5 C.2.5 Catalog: dynamic flux closure (Cattaneo/telegraph) as an alternative to explicit clamping

Instead of post-processing \(\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}\), treat \(\mathbf{S}\) as a dynamic variable with a relaxation time \(\tau_S\): \[\tau_S \partial_t \mathbf{S} + \mathbf{S} = -\mathbf{D}\nabla e_a. \label{eq:appendixC_Cattaneo_again}\] Combined with \(\partial_t e_a + \nabla\cdot\mathbf{S}=q_e\), this yields a telegraph-type equation and supports finite-speed propagation (Appendix B). A throughput constraint can be imposed by parameter bounds such as \[\lambda_{\max}(\mathbf{D})\le \tau_S c_{\mathrm{th}}^2,\] or by a separate LOCK gate requiring \(|\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\).

23.2.5.1 Pros/cons.

  • Pros: avoids non-smooth clamping; provides a principled hyperbolic-parabolic interpolation; can be derived from kinetic relaxation (Appendix B).

  • Cons: introduces additional state variable and timescale \(\tau_S\); parameter degeneracy with \(\mathbf{D}\) is common (only \(\mathbf{D}/\tau_S\) may be identifiable in some regimes).

23.2.6 C.2.6 Summary table: flux bound candidates

Flux bound / limiter catalog summary.
Method Enforcement Notes / typical use
Kinetic bounded support \(|\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\) by Lemma C.2.1 Cleanest; requires velocity-domain truncation or equivalent micro-assumption.
Hard clamp explicit projection onto \(|\mathbf{S}|\le S_{\max}\) Strict but non-smooth; simplest at PDE level.
Smooth clamp smooth saturating map (tanh/rational) Stable gradients; requires regularizer choices.
FLD-style limiter \(-D\lambda(R)\nabla e_a\) with \(\lambda\le 1/R\) Interpolates diffusion \(\leftrightarrow\) free-streaming; nonlinear diffusion.
Cattaneo/telegraph dynamic \(\mathbf{S}\) with relaxation time Finite-speed; adds \(\tau_S\); may still require throughput gate.

23.3 C.3 Regime-based selection rules for constant families (\(\kappa_T\), \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\), etc.)

This subsection standardizes how to choose and lock constant families that appear in closures and “optical” mappings. All constants are SSOT-managed in KSR (Part 20). Bare, ambiguous constants are forbidden (Appendix A collision rules).

23.3.1 C.3.1 LOCK: dimensional roles and bounding inequalities

23.3.1.1 Closure constant \(\kappa_T\) (isotropic second-moment closure).

If one uses the isotropic closure \[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_T\, e_a\, \mathbf{I}, \label{eq:appendixC_T_isotropic}\] then \([\kappa_T]=[L]^2[T]^{-2}\), i.e. a speed-squared scale.

23.3.1.2 Bound from bounded velocity support (recommended).

If \(|\mathbf{v}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}\) and \(f\ge 0\), then \[\operatorname{tr}\mathbf{T}=\int_V |\mathbf{v}|^2 f\,d\mathbf{v}\le c_{\mathrm{th}}^2 \int_V f\,d\mathbf{v}=c_{\mathrm{th}}^2 e_a. \label{eq:appendixC_trace_T_bound}\] Under [eq:appendixC_T_isotropic], \(\operatorname{tr}\mathbf{T}=d\kappa_T e_a\), hence \[\boxed{ \kappa_T \le \frac{c_{\mathrm{th}}^2}{d}. } \label{eq:appendixC_kappaT_bound}\] This is a strong LOCK admissibility inequality for isotropic closures.

23.3.1.3 Optical attenuation constant \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\).

If the “lattice optics” mapping uses \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,dx, \label{eq:appendixC_opt_atten}\] then \([\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}]=[L]^{-1}\) and the optical depth is \[\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}=\int \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\,ds, \qquad E(s)=E(0)\,e^{-\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}}. \label{eq:appendixC_opt_depth_again}\] This implies an identifiability warning: typically only \(\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}\) is directly constrained by attenuation-like observations; separating \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) from distance calibration requires independent distance information (see §23.4).

23.3.2 C.3.2 Regime map for constant selection (template)

Constants should be selected by a declared regime (Part 07 regime map). A minimal regime classifier uses (examples): \[\delta_{\mathrm{aniso}}=\frac{|\mathbf{S}|}{c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a}\in[0,1], \qquad \lambda_{\mathrm{mix}}, \qquad a_k, \qquad \text{geometry/boundary class}.\] The project must define a regime map and then choose constants accordingly.

23.3.2.1 Regime R1: strongly mixed, near-isotropic (diffusion-like).

  • Closure: isotropic \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_a \mathbf{I}\) with \(\kappa_T\) bounded by [eq:appendixC_kappaT_bound].

  • Flux: diffusion or FLD with a limiter ensuring \(|\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\).

  • Typical rule: treat \(\kappa_T\) as LOCK if derived from micro-velocity support; otherwise SPEC with strict coherence tests.

23.3.2.2 Regime R2: partially aligned (channel/holes/corona).

Use an anisotropic closure with respect to a unit axis \(\mathbf{k}\): \[\mathbf{T} = \kappa_{\parallel} e_a\,(\mathbf{k}\otimes\mathbf{k}) + \kappa_{\perp} e_a\,(\mathbf{I}-\mathbf{k}\otimes\mathbf{k}), \label{eq:appendixC_T_aniso}\] where \(\kappa_{\parallel},\kappa_{\perp}\) are speed-squared scales. Admissibility bounds analogous to [eq:appendixC_trace_T_bound] require: \[0\le \kappa_{\perp}\le \kappa_{\parallel}\le c_{\mathrm{th}}^2, \qquad \text{and}\quad \kappa_{\parallel}+(d-1)\kappa_{\perp}\le c_{\mathrm{th}}^2. \label{eq:appendixC_kappa_aniso_bounds}\]

  • Pros: resolves jet/channel vs diffusion behaviors with controlled anisotropy.

  • Cons: adds parameters and identifiability risks; must be justified by data requiring anisotropy (Part 19 tests and null tests).

23.3.2.3 Regime R3: strongly aligned (jet-tube / collimation).

  • Use [eq:appendixC_T_aniso] with \(\kappa_{\parallel}\gg \kappa_{\perp}\) (but still obey [eq:appendixC_kappa_aniso_bounds]).

  • Enforce throughput strongly; choking indicator should be near unity along the tube if the mechanism implies “maxed throughput.”

  • Constants may become geometry-dependent; any such dependence must be explicit and treated as HYP/SPEC with additional tests.

23.3.2.4 Regime R4: optical/redshift/time-delay (lattice optics).

  • Primary constant: \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\).

  • Rule: \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) must be declared either universal (global constant) or environment-dependent via an explicit law (e.g. \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}=\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(e_{\mathrm{bg}})\)).

  • Coherence: the same \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (or the same environment-dependence law) must be used consistently across redshift, time-delay, and deflection modules; otherwise FAIL[OPT-COH] (Appendix B).

23.3.3 C.3.3 LOCK: constant selection workflow (anti-drift rule)

For any constant family \(\kappa_\bullet\):

  1. Declare its meaning and tier in SR/KSR (Part 20). Never introduce a numeric constant in-text without KSR.

  2. Fix the regime of validity (R1–R4 or project-defined) and state which closure family uses it.

  3. Apply admissibility bounds (e.g. [eq:appendixC_kappaT_bound], [eq:appendixC_kappa_aniso_bounds]).

  4. Decide universality scope:

    • Universal constant: must pass multi-dataset coherence gates (Part 19 joint fits).

    • Object-specific nuisance: must be counted in \(k_{\mathrm{eff}}\) and prohibited from explaining multiple phenomena as a single-cause claim.

  5. Lock test policy: which datasets fit it (train/val) and which datasets evaluate it (test) under NO-CAL/EVAL-ONLY rules (Part 20).

23.4 C.4 Sensitivity & identifiability checklist (structural + practical) for \(\Gamma\) and flux-limit parameters

This subsection is a mandatory checklist to prevent non-identifiable (or weakly identifiable) parameters from being presented as physical constants. It applies to:

  • saturation parameters \((\Gamma_{\max},e_{\mathrm{sat}},n,e_{\mathrm{gate}},\sigma_e,\dots)\),

  • flux limiter parameters (e.g. \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\), limiter smoothing \(\varepsilon\), diffusion \(D\), relaxation time \(\tau_S\)),

  • closure constants (\(\kappa_T,\kappa_{\parallel},\kappa_{\perp}\)),

  • optical constants (\(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)).

23.4.1 C.4.1 Structural identifiability: symmetry and scaling checks (must-do)

23.4.1.1 Checklist SI-1 (dimensionless reparameterization).

Rewrite the model predictions in terms of dimensionless groups (Appendix A). If two parameters always appear as a product or ratio, they are not separately identifiable without additional information.

23.4.1.2 Example: attenuation and distance.

From [eq:appendixC_opt_atten], \(E(L)=E(0)e^{-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}L}\). If the data constrain only attenuation over unknown \(L\), then only \(\tau=\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}L\) is identifiable. Separating \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) from \(L\) requires an independent distance ladder or geometric constraint.

23.4.1.3 Example: diffusion vs relaxation time.

In many regimes, telegraph/Cattaneo reduces effectively to diffusion with coefficient \(\mathbf{D}\), while characteristic speed depends on \(\mathbf{D}/\tau_S\). If observations probe only late-time diffusion, \(\tau_S\) can be unidentifiable; if they probe wavefront speed, \(\mathbf{D}/\tau_S\) is identifiable but \(\mathbf{D}\) and \(\tau_S\) separately may not be.

23.4.1.4 Checklist SI-2 (relabeling invariances).

Search for transformations \(\theta\mapsto \theta'\) such that predictions are unchanged: \[\hat y(\theta')=\hat y(\theta)\ \ \text{for all admissible inputs}. \label{eq:appendixC_invariance}\] Any continuous invariance implies non-identifiability (a flat direction in parameter space).

23.4.1.5 Checklist SI-3 (saturation family degeneracies).

For \(\Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}g(e/e_{\mathrm{sat}})\):

  • If data never enter the saturated regime (\(e\ll e_{\mathrm{sat}}\)), then \(\Gamma_{\max}\) and \(e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) are not separately identifiable; only the low-\(e\) slope matters: \[\Gamma(e)\approx \Gamma_{\max}\frac{e}{e_{\mathrm{sat}}}\quad \Rightarrow\quad \Gamma_{\max}/e_{\mathrm{sat}}\ \text{is identifiable, not each separately.}\]

  • If data live only in the saturated regime (\(e\gg e_{\mathrm{sat}}\)), then only \(\Gamma_{\max}\) is identifiable; \(e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) is not.

Therefore, identifying both requires a dataset spanning both regimes (or multiple datasets probing different \(e\) ranges).

23.4.2 C.4.2 Practical identifiability: Fisher matrix, correlation, and conditioning (must-do)

Let \(\theta\in\mathbb{R}^k\) be the fitted parameter vector and \(\hat y(\theta)\in\mathbb{R}^n\) the prediction vector with covariance \(C\). Define the Fisher information matrix: \[\mathbf{I}(\theta)= \left(\frac{\partial \hat y}{\partial \theta}\right)^{\mathsf T} C^{-1} \left(\frac{\partial \hat y}{\partial \theta}\right). \label{eq:appendixC_fisher}\]

23.4.2.1 Checklist PI-1 (rank and conditioning).

Compute eigenvalues \(\lambda_1\ge \cdots \ge \lambda_k\ge 0\) of \(\mathbf{I}(\hat\theta)\). If \(\lambda_k\approx 0\) (within numerical tolerance), at least one direction is practically unidentifiable. Define a condition number: \[\kappa(\mathbf{I}) := \frac{\lambda_1}{\max\{\lambda_k,\epsilon_{\mathrm{rank}}\}}, \label{eq:appendixC_fisher_condition}\] and require a locked threshold: \[\texttt{PASS[ID-FISHER]}\Longleftrightarrow \kappa(\mathbf{I})\le \kappa_{\max}. \label{eq:appendixC_gate_id_fisher}\] Otherwise, declare FAIL[ID-FISHER] and reduce/reparameterize the model.

23.4.2.2 Checklist PI-2 (posterior correlation and effective degrees of freedom).

If Bayesian inference is used, compute the posterior correlation matrix \(\mathrm{Corr}(\theta)\). If \(|\mathrm{Corr}_{ij}|\approx 1\) for many pairs, parameters are effectively redundant. Report \(k_{\mathrm{eff}}\) (effective number of parameters) and use it in information criteria (Part 19).

23.4.2.3 Checklist PI-3 (profile likelihood).

For each parameter \(\theta_i\), compute the profile likelihood: \[\mathcal{L}_{\mathrm{prof}}(\theta_i) := \max_{\theta_{j\ne i}} \mathcal{L}(\theta). \label{eq:appendixC_profile_likelihood}\] Flat or multi-modal profiles indicate weak identifiability or model misspecification. This must be reported in the test artifacts.

23.4.3 C.4.3 Identifiability pitfalls specific to flux limiting (must address)

23.4.3.1 Pitfall FLUX-1 (diffusion/limiter degeneracy).

In FLD [eq:appendixC_FLD_form], if data are mostly in the high-gradient regime, the effective flux is near \(c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a\) and becomes insensitive to \(D\): \[|\mathbf{S}|\approx c_{\mathrm{th}} e_a,\] so \(D\) becomes unidentifiable. Conversely, in low-gradient regimes, the limiter is inactive and \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) becomes unidentifiable.

23.4.3.2 Resolution rule.

A credible inference of both \(D\) and \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) requires data covering both low- and high-gradient conditions (or separate datasets for each), and explicit null tests that remove one regime.

23.4.3.3 Pitfall FLUX-2 (smoothing regularizer as hidden hyperparameter).

Parameters like \(\varepsilon\) in [eq:appendixC_flux_tanh_clamp] or [eq:appendixC_R_def] can act as hidden tuners. They must be either:

  • LOCK fixed numerical tolerances justified by resolution/precision, or

  • included in \(\theta_{\mathrm{fit}}\) and counted in \(k_{\mathrm{eff}}\) with strict NO-CAL policy.

23.4.3.4 Pitfall FLUX-3 (changing \(S_{\max}\) definition across modules).

Switching between \(S_{\max}=c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\) and \(S_{\max}=c_{\mathrm{th}}e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) can artificially improve fits. This is a reverse-injection risk and is forbidden without a versioned, tested change.

23.4.4 C.4.4 Identifiability checklist: minimum required deliverables (audit artifacts)

For any test suite run that fits saturation/flux parameters, the following deliverables are mandatory (Part 19–20 style):

  1. Dimensionless parameterization list (Appendix A) and explicit mapping to physical parameters.

  2. Fisher matrix \(\mathbf{I}(\hat\theta)\), its eigenvalues, and condition number.

  3. Posterior correlation matrix (or bootstrap covariance) and a statement of \(k_{\mathrm{eff}}\).

  4. Profile likelihood plots (or equivalent) for each nontrivial parameter.

  5. A regime-coverage report: histograms/summary of \(e/e_{\mathrm{sat}}\) and \(\chi_{\mathrm{choke}}\) across the dataset.

  6. Null tests:

    • \(\Gamma\) cause-off: set \(\Gamma_{\max}=0\) (or disable the channel) and show degradation,

    • flux-limiter off: remove limiting (or set \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\to\infty\)) and show it fails physical/gate tests,

    • permutation/synthetic nulls to detect spurious fitting.

23.4.4.1 End of Appendix C.

Appendix C provided: (C.1) admissibility constraints and a full catalog of \(\Gamma(e)\) families (unbounded low-\(e\), bounded saturations, threshold gates) with pros/cons, (C.2) flux bound candidates and limiter catalogs with mathematically explicit choking indicators and throughput gates, (C.3) regime-based rules for selecting constant families (including rigorous bounds like \(\kappa_T\le c_{\mathrm{th}}^2/d\)), (C.4) a complete structural + practical identifiability checklist and required audit artifacts for saturation/flux parameters.

24 APPENDIX D. Phenomenon-Specific Mini-Model Cards (for Quick Experiments) (Output A4)

This Appendix provides compact, quick-experiment mini-model cards for core phenomena addressed in Parts 09–16. Each card is written as a minimal, auditable pipeline: \[\text{Minimal Inputs} \;\to\; \text{Minimal Model Equations} \;\to\; \text{Minimal Outputs} \;\to\; \text{Gates (PASS/FAIL)}.\] The intent is not to replace the full theory, but to supply a standardized, reproducible first-pass experiment kit compatible with the verification OS (Part 19–20).

24.0.0.1 Tier discipline (applies to all cards).

  • LOCK: shared definitions, units, registry rules, and gate forms (Part 20; Appendix A).

  • DERIVE: calculations that follow uniquely from the declared mini-model equations.

  • HYP: any new mechanism/functional dependence not already locked (e.g. environment-dependent \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)).

  • SPEC: specific numerical thresholds, priors, optimizer choices, smoothing tolerances, and selected functional families.

24.0.0.2 Common evaluation backbone (locked).

All cards must define: (i) a prediction map \(\hat y(\theta)=\mathcal{P}(\theta)\), (ii) residuals \(r=y-\hat y\), (iii) a goodness-of-fit (e.g. \(\chi^2\) or likelihood) and explicit gates (Part 19), (iv) null tests (cause-off) and cross-validation when feasible.

24.0.0.3 Notation (locked).

Flux is always bold \(\mathbf{S}\). Speed limits are \(c_0\) (vacuum light speed, reserved) and \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) (throughput speed). No forbidden bare symbols (Appendix A).

24.1 D.1 Galaxy Rotation Curve Card (minimal inputs / minimal outputs / gates)

24.1.1 D.1.1 Purpose and regime declaration

24.1.1.1 Goal.

Given a baryonic mass model for a galaxy and a minimal “deficit” extension, predict the circular speed curve \(v(r)\) and test against rotation-curve data.

24.1.1.2 Declared regime (LOCK for this card).

Axisymmetric, approximately stationary disk/halo system; weak-field, low-speed: \[\frac{|\Phi_{\mathrm{eff}}(r)|}{c_0^2}\ll 1, \qquad \frac{v(r)}{c_0}\ll 1. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_weakfield}\] The dynamics are summarized by an effective radial acceleration \(a_{\mathrm{eff}}(r)\).

24.1.2 D.1.2 Minimal inputs

24.1.2.1 Data inputs (Dataset ID D-RC-...).

  • Measured radii and circular speeds: \(\{(r_i, v_i, \sigma_i)\}_{i=1}^{n}\).

  • Distance and inclination calibration metadata (either locked or treated as nuisance parameters with explicit priors).

24.1.2.2 Model inputs (baryonic mass model).

A minimal baryonic model supplies enclosed baryonic mass \(M_b(r)\) (or equivalently a Newtonian baryonic speed curve \(v_b(r)\)): \[v_b(r)^2 := \frac{G\,M_b(r)}{r} \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad a_b(r):=\frac{v_b(r)^2}{r}=\frac{G\,M_b(r)}{r^2}. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_baryonic_accel}\] Here \(G\) is treated as reserved (LOCK) if standard gravity is retained in the weak-field limit.

24.1.3 D.1.3 Minimal model equations

24.1.3.1 Core definition (LOCK for the card).

The predicted circular speed is defined by \[\hat v(r;\theta) := \sqrt{r\,a_{\mathrm{eff}}(r;\theta)}, \label{eq:appendixD_D1_vhat_def}\] where the effective acceleration is decomposed into baryonic + deficit: \[a_{\mathrm{eff}}(r;\theta)=a_b(r) + a_{\mathrm{def}}(r;\theta_{\mathrm{def}}), \qquad \theta=(\theta_{\mathrm{def}},\theta_{\mathrm{nui}}). \label{eq:appendixD_D1_accel_split}\]

24.1.3.2 Deficit acceleration family (minimal SPEC choice).

For quick experiments, use a two-parameter saturating “flat-tail” deficit: \[a_{\mathrm{def}}(r;\theta_{\mathrm{def}}) := \frac{v_f^2}{r+r_c}, \qquad \theta_{\mathrm{def}}=(v_f,r_c), \qquad v_f>0,\ r_c>0. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_deficit_family}\] This yields: \[\hat v(r)^2 = v_b(r)^2 + v_f^2\frac{r}{r+r_c},\] so \(\hat v(r)\to v_f\) as \(r\to\infty\), while at small \(r\) the deficit contribution is suppressed.

24.1.3.3 Admissibility constraints (locked for this card).

\[v_f>0,\quad r_c>0, \qquad a_{\mathrm{def}}(r)\ge 0, \qquad \lim_{r\to 0} r\,a_{\mathrm{def}}(r)=0. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_admissibility}\] The last condition enforces that the deficit term does not introduce a singular central \(v^2\) contribution.

24.1.3.4 Optional coupling to baryons (promotes coherence; HYP if asserted universal).

If one wants to reduce degrees of freedom, impose a scaling ansatz: \[v_f^2 = \alpha\,G\,\frac{M_b(R_\ast)}{R_\ast}, \label{eq:appendixD_D1_baryon_coupling}\] with a chosen reference radius \(R_\ast\) (e.g. disk scale length) and a dimensionless coupling \(\alpha>0\). This converts \((v_f,r_c)\) into \((\alpha,r_c)\) and supports cross-galaxy coherence tests.

24.1.4 D.1.4 Minimal outputs

24.1.4.1 Primary outputs (artifact set A-RC-...).

  • Predicted curve \(\hat v(r;\hat\theta)\) on the data radii and on a fine grid.

  • Residuals \(r_i := v_i-\hat v(r_i;\hat\theta)\) and standardized residuals \(z_i=r_i/\sigma_i\).

  • Best-fit parameters \(\hat\theta\) with uncertainties (or posterior samples).

  • Summary metrics: \(\chi^2\), \(\chi^2_\nu\), AIC/BIC vs a baseline model (Part 19).

24.1.5 D.1.5 Gates (PASS/FAIL)

24.1.5.1 Likelihood and chi-square (locked).

Assuming independent Gaussian errors: \[\chi^2(\theta)=\sum_{i=1}^{n}\frac{\left(v_i-\hat v(r_i;\theta)\right)^2}{\sigma_i^2}. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_chi2}\]

24.1.5.2 G-FIT-RC (fit gate; SPEC thresholds must be locked in PASS.rules).

\[\texttt{PASS[G-FIT-RC]}\Longleftrightarrow \chi^2_\nu(\hat\theta)\in[\chi^2_{\nu,\min},\chi^2_{\nu,\max}]. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_gate_fit}\]

24.1.5.3 G-NULL-RC (cause-off null).

Set deficit off: \[\theta_{\mathrm{def}}\mapsto \theta_{\mathrm{def}}^{(0)}=(v_f=0), \label{eq:appendixD_D1_null_def}\] and require improvement: \[\texttt{PASS[G-NULL-RC]}\Longleftrightarrow \Delta\chi^2:=\chi^2(\theta^{(0)})-\chi^2(\hat\theta)\ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_gate_null}\]

24.1.5.4 G-COH-RC (coherence across galaxies; required if universality is claimed).

If \(\alpha\) in [eq:appendixD_D1_baryon_coupling] is asserted universal: \[\texttt{PASS[G-COH-RC]}\Longleftrightarrow \alpha\ \text{fits multiple galaxies jointly without galaxy-specific retuning beyond declared nuisances.} \label{eq:appendixD_D1_gate_coh}\]

24.1.5.5 G-WEAK (weak-field sanity).

\[\texttt{PASS[G-WEAK]}\Longleftrightarrow \max_i \frac{\hat v(r_i;\hat\theta)}{c_0}\ll 1\ \ \text{(numerically verified)}. \label{eq:appendixD_D1_gate_weak}\]

24.2 D.2 Lensing / Einstein Ring Card

24.2.1 D.2.1 Purpose and regime declaration

24.2.1.1 Goal.

Given a lens mass model and a minimal “effective lensing potential” extension, predict: (i) Einstein radius \(\theta_E\) (strong lens), or (ii) tangential shear \(\gamma_t(R)\) (weak lens), and gate against lensing data.

24.2.1.2 Declared regime (LOCK for this card).

Thin-lens, weak-field geometry; small deflection angles. Distances are angular diameter distances \(D_l, D_s, D_{ls}\) supplied by a chosen background geometry model (which must be explicitly declared).

24.2.2 D.2.2 Minimal inputs

24.2.2.1 Geometry inputs.

\[D_l,\quad D_s,\quad D_{ls}, \label{eq:appendixD_D2_distances}\] either from a locked background cosmology or from a declared distance model.

24.2.2.2 Lens data inputs (choose one).

  • Strong lens: measured Einstein radius \(\theta_E\) with uncertainty \(\sigma_{\theta}\).

  • Weak lens: measured tangential shear profile \(\{(R_i,\gamma_{t,i},\sigma_i)\}_{i=1}^n\) (or convergence profile).

24.2.2.3 Lens baryonic model input.

Projected surface mass density \(\Sigma_b(R)\) or enclosed projected mass \(M_b(<R)\).

24.2.3 D.2.3 Minimal model equations

24.2.3.1 Critical surface density (LOCK).

\[\Sigma_{\mathrm{crit}} := \frac{c_0^2}{4\pi G}\frac{D_s}{D_l D_{ls}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D2_Sigmacrit}\]

24.2.3.2 Effective lensing surface density (minimal SPEC/HYP).

Introduce an effective enhancement factor \(A_{\mathrm{lens}}\ge 0\) and/or an additive “deficit” surface density \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}\): \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}(R;\theta)=A_{\mathrm{lens}}\Sigma_b(R) + \Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}(R;\theta_{\mathrm{def}}). \label{eq:appendixD_D2_Sigmaeff}\] The simplest quick test sets \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}=0\) and fits \(A_{\mathrm{lens}}\) as a single parameter. If a deficit profile is included, a minimal two-parameter family is: \[\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}(R;\theta_{\mathrm{def}}) = \frac{\Sigma_0}{1+(R/R_c)^2}, \qquad \theta_{\mathrm{def}}=(\Sigma_0,R_c),\quad \Sigma_0>0,\ R_c>0. \label{eq:appendixD_D2_Sigmadef_family}\]

24.2.3.3 Convergence and mean convergence (DERIVE).

\[\kappa(R;\theta):=\frac{\Sigma_{\mathrm{eff}}(R;\theta)}{\Sigma_{\mathrm{crit}}}, \qquad \bar\kappa(<R;\theta):=\frac{2}{R^2}\int_{0}^{R} \kappa(R';\theta)\,R'\,dR'. \label{eq:appendixD_D2_kappa}\]

24.2.3.4 Einstein radius prediction (strong lens; DERIVE).

For an axially symmetric lens, the Einstein radius \(R_E=D_l\theta_E\) satisfies: \[\bar\kappa(<R_E;\theta)=1, \qquad \hat\theta_E(\theta)=\frac{R_E(\theta)}{D_l}. \label{eq:appendixD_D2_Einstein_condition}\]

24.2.3.5 Tangential shear prediction (weak lens; DERIVE).

\[\hat\gamma_t(R;\theta)=\bar\kappa(<R;\theta)-\kappa(R;\theta). \label{eq:appendixD_D2_gamma_t}\]

24.2.3.6 Slip/coherence placeholder (only if mixing dynamics and lensing; see Appendix B).

If a separate dynamical potential is used in rotation curves, introduce a slip parameter \[\eta_{\mathrm{slip}}=\Phi/\Psi\] and enforce the GR-coherence gate (Appendix B, PASS[GR-COH]). In this mini-model, slip can be absorbed into \(A_{\mathrm{lens}}\) as an effective scaling, but only if declared explicitly.

24.2.4 D.2.4 Minimal outputs

  • Predicted \(\hat\theta_E\) (strong lens) or predicted shear \(\hat\gamma_t(R_i)\) (weak lens).

  • Residuals and standardized residuals.

  • Best-fit \(\hat\theta\) and model comparison vs baseline (baryons-only; or baryons+standard DM halo if included).

24.2.5 D.2.5 Gates (PASS/FAIL)

24.2.5.1 Strong lens chi-square (single datum).

\[\chi^2(\theta)=\frac{\left(\theta_E-\hat\theta_E(\theta)\right)^2}{\sigma_{\theta}^2}. \label{eq:appendixD_D2_chi2_strong}\]

24.2.5.2 Weak lens chi-square (profile).

\[\chi^2(\theta)=\sum_{i=1}^{n}\frac{\left(\gamma_{t,i}-\hat\gamma_t(R_i;\theta)\right)^2}{\sigma_i^2}, \label{eq:appendixD_D2_chi2_weak}\] or \(\chi^2=r^{\mathsf T}C^{-1}r\) if a covariance matrix is provided.

24.2.5.3 G-FIT-LENS.

\[\texttt{PASS[G-FIT-LENS]}\Longleftrightarrow \chi^2_\nu(\hat\theta)\ \text{passes the locked fit threshold.} \label{eq:appendixD_D2_gate_fit}\]

24.2.5.4 G-NULL-LENS (cause-off).

Set \(A_{\mathrm{lens}}=1\) and \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}=0\) (baryons-only) as the cause-off null, and require improvement: \[\Delta\chi^2 \ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}.\]

24.2.5.5 G-COH-DYN-LENS (if combined with dynamics).

If the same mechanism is claimed to explain both rotation curves and lensing, enforce a joint-parameter coherence gate: \[\texttt{PASS[G-COH-DYN-LENS]}\Longleftrightarrow \text{shared parameters explain both datasets jointly without dataset-specific retuning.} \label{eq:appendixD_D2_gate_coh}\]

24.3 D.3 Black Hole–Jet Card (activation conditions / scaling)

24.3.1 D.3.1 Purpose and regime declaration

24.3.1.1 Goal.

Provide a minimal, testable gating-and-scaling model for (i) jet activation (on/off) and (ii) jet power and collimation trends, using saturation \(\Gamma(e)\) and alignment/throughput concepts (Parts 08–11; Appendix C).

24.3.1.2 Declared regime (LOCK for this card).

Treat the central engine as a quasi-stationary “core” control volume with characteristic size \(r_{\mathrm{core}}\) and volume \[V_{\mathrm{core}}:=\frac{4\pi}{3}r_{\mathrm{core}}^3. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_Vcore}\] A budget inflow rate \(\dot B_{\mathrm{in}}\) feeds the core (input proxy from observation).

24.3.2 D.3.2 Minimal inputs

24.3.2.1 Observational proxies (Dataset ID D-BHJ-...).

  • Black hole mass \(M\) (and uncertainty).

  • Accretion proxy \(\dot B_{\mathrm{in}}\) (e.g. from luminosity; treated as input with uncertainty).

  • Jet observable(s): jet power \(P_{\mathrm{jet}}\), radio luminosity proxy, opening angle \(\theta_{\mathrm{jet}}\), or on/off classification.

  • Optional spin proxy \(s\in[0,1]\) or an axis proxy for alignment tests.

24.3.2.2 Model constants / choices (KSR/SR).

  • Choose a saturation law \(\Gamma(e)\) from Appendix C (family + parameters).

  • Choose a throughput speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) (locked or fitted with strict policy).

  • Choose an alignment defect parameter \(a_k\) (or proxy) controlling collimation fraction.

24.3.3 D.3.3 Minimal model equations

24.3.3.1 Core budget density definition (DERIVE).

Define the core budget density \(e_{\mathrm{core}}\) by \[B_{\mathrm{core}} := e_{\mathrm{core}} V_{\mathrm{core}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_Bcore}\]

24.3.3.2 Minimal steady-state core balance (ledger; HYP but explicit).

Assume a steady-state balance between inflow and processing: \[\dot B_{\mathrm{in}} = \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{core}})\,B_{\mathrm{core}} + \dot B_{\mathrm{leak}}, \label{eq:appendixD_D3_core_balance}\] where \(\dot B_{\mathrm{leak}}\ge 0\) is an isotropic leakage term (may be set to \(0\) in the simplest closure). With \(\dot B_{\mathrm{leak}}=0\), this yields an implicit equation for \(e_{\mathrm{core}}\): \[\dot B_{\mathrm{in}} = \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{core}})\,e_{\mathrm{core}}V_{\mathrm{core}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_ecore_implicit}\]

24.3.3.3 Jet fraction from alignment (minimal SPEC).

Let \(f_{\mathrm{jet}}\in[0,1]\) denote the fraction of processed outflow channeled into a collimated jet. Use a monotone alignment function of the defect parameter \(a_k\): \[f_{\mathrm{jet}}(a_k)=\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{a_k}{a_0}\right)^m}, \qquad a_0>0,\ m\ge 1. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_fjet}\] This is a Hill/logistic-type gate: small defect \(\Rightarrow\) strong collimation.

24.3.3.4 Jet power prediction (DERIVE).

Define the processed outflow budget rate \[\dot B_{\mathrm{proc}} := \Gamma(e_{\mathrm{core}})\,B_{\mathrm{core}},\] and predict jet power (in budget units per time; map to physical units if \([B]\) is identified): \[\hat P_{\mathrm{jet}}(\theta) := f_{\mathrm{jet}}(a_k)\,\dot B_{\mathrm{proc}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_Pjet}\] A strict ledger inequality holds: \[0\le \hat P_{\mathrm{jet}} \le \dot B_{\mathrm{in}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_Pjet_bound}\]

24.3.3.5 Jet activation (on/off) gate (minimal SPEC with explicit thresholds).

Define saturation ratio \[\chi_{\mathrm{sat}}:=\frac{e_{\mathrm{core}}}{e_{\mathrm{sat}}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_chisat}\] Define activation conditions: \[\text{Jet ON} \Longleftrightarrow \chi_{\mathrm{sat}}\ge \chi_{\mathrm{sat}}^{\mathrm{on}} \ \ \wedge\ \ f_{\mathrm{jet}}(a_k)\ge f_{\mathrm{jet}}^{\mathrm{on}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_jet_on}\] All thresholds must be locked per project (PASS.rules).

24.3.3.6 Collimation angle proxy (HYP but minimal and testable).

If anisotropic closure constants \(\kappa_{\parallel},\kappa_{\perp}\) are used (Appendix C), a minimal proxy for jet opening angle is \[\hat\theta_{\mathrm{jet}}\approx \arctan\!\left(\sqrt{\frac{\kappa_{\perp}}{\kappa_{\parallel}}}\right), \qquad 0<\kappa_{\perp}\le \kappa_{\parallel}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_theta_jet}\]

24.3.4 D.3.4 Minimal outputs

  • Predicted jet power \(\hat P_{\mathrm{jet}}\) (and optionally \(\hat\theta_{\mathrm{jet}}\)).

  • Predicted ON/OFF classification from [eq:appendixD_D3_jet_on].

  • Inferred core state \(e_{\mathrm{core}}\) (solving [eq:appendixD_D3_ecore_implicit]).

  • Residuals and test summary (Part 19 artifacts).

24.3.5 D.3.5 Gates (PASS/FAIL)

24.3.5.1 G-LEDGER-BHJ (core budget consistency).

\[\texttt{PASS[G-LEDGER-BHJ]}\Longleftrightarrow \left|\dot B_{\mathrm{in}}-\Gamma(e_{\mathrm{core}})e_{\mathrm{core}}V_{\mathrm{core}}-\dot B_{\mathrm{leak}}\right|\le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{ledger}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_gate_ledger}\]

24.3.5.2 G-FIT-BHJ (scaling fit).

Fit \(\hat P_{\mathrm{jet}}\) to observed \(P_{\mathrm{jet}}\) (or proxy) via \(\chi^2\); require a locked threshold.

24.3.5.3 G-NULL-BHJ.

Disable either saturation (\(\Gamma_{\max}=0\)) or collimation (\(f_{\mathrm{jet}}\equiv 0\)) and require the model fails to reproduce jet power distributions: \[\Delta\chi^2\ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}.\]

24.3.5.4 G-BOUND-BHJ.

\[\texttt{PASS[G-BOUND-BHJ]}\Longleftrightarrow 0\le \hat P_{\mathrm{jet}}\le \dot B_{\mathrm{in}} \ \text{for all fitted objects}. \label{eq:appendixD_D3_gate_bound}\]

24.4 D.4 Redshift / Hubble Tension Card

24.4.1 D.4.1 Purpose and regime declaration

24.4.1.1 Goal.

Test a minimal “lattice optics” mapping between optical depth and observed redshift, and assess whether environment dependence can generate a Hubble-tension-like discrepancy without post-hoc tuning.

24.4.1.2 Declared regime (LOCK for this card).

Small per-step energy loss along a path; cumulative optical depth may be moderate. Use path coordinate \(s\) with \(ds\) in length units.

24.4.2 D.4.2 Minimal inputs

24.4.2.1 Dataset categories.

  • Hubble diagram-like data: \(\{(z_i,\mu_i,\sigma_i)\}\) where \(\mu\) is distance modulus, or equivalently fluxes/magnitudes.

  • Time-dilation proxy (optional but recommended): observed stretch factor vs \(z\) for transient light curves.

  • Environment proxy along the line of sight (optional): an indicator of local density/background state (for testing environment-dependent \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\)).

24.4.3 D.4.3 Minimal model equations

24.4.3.1 Optical attenuation-to-redshift mapping (HYP but explicit).

Assume photon energy \(E\) obeys: \[\frac{dE}{E}=-\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\,ds, \label{eq:appendixD_D4_energy_loss}\] so \[E_{\mathrm{obs}} = E_{\mathrm{emit}}\exp\!\left(-\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}\right), \qquad \tau_{\mathrm{opt}}:=\int_{\text{path}}\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\,ds. \label{eq:appendixD_D4_tau}\] Define the redshift as the ratio of emitted to observed photon energy: \[1+z := \frac{E_{\mathrm{emit}}}{E_{\mathrm{obs}}}=\exp(\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}). \label{eq:appendixD_D4_z_tau}\]

24.4.3.2 Time dilation consistency (HYP, must be tested).

Assume observed time intervals dilate by the same factor: \[\Delta t_{\mathrm{obs}} = (1+z)\,\Delta t_{\mathrm{emit}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D4_time_dilation}\]

24.4.3.3 Flux and effective luminosity distance (DERIVE under [eq:appendixD_D4_time_dilation]).

For a source of bolometric luminosity \(L\) at geometric distance \(D\) (non-expanding geometry for the mini-model), energy loss contributes one \((1+z)\) and time dilation contributes another \((1+z)\): \[F=\frac{L}{4\pi D^2(1+z)^2}. \label{eq:appendixD_D4_flux}\] Define an effective luminosity distance: \[D_{L,\mathrm{eff}} := D(1+z), \qquad F=\frac{L}{4\pi D_{L,\mathrm{eff}}^2}. \label{eq:appendixD_D4_DLeff}\] Distance modulus prediction: \[\hat\mu(z;\theta)=5\log_{10}\!\left(\frac{D_{L,\mathrm{eff}}(z;\theta)}{10\,\mathrm{pc}}\right). \label{eq:appendixD_D4_mu_pred}\]

24.4.3.4 Homogeneous \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (minimal SPEC).

If \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)\equiv \kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) constant along the path, then \[1+z=\exp(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}D), \qquad D(z)=\frac{1}{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}}\ln(1+z), \qquad D_{L,\mathrm{eff}}(z)=\frac{1+z}{\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}}\ln(1+z). \label{eq:appendixD_D4_homogeneous_mapping}\]

24.4.3.5 Environment dependence to model “tension” (optional HYP).

Use a two-zone model: \[\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}(s)= \begin{cases} \kappa_{\mathrm{loc}}, & s\le D_{\mathrm{loc}},\\ \kappa_{\mathrm{far}}, & s> D_{\mathrm{loc}}, \end{cases} \label{eq:appendixD_D4_two_zone}\] so \(\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}=\kappa_{\mathrm{loc}}\min\{D,D_{\mathrm{loc}}\}+\kappa_{\mathrm{far}}\max\{D-D_{\mathrm{loc}},0\}\) and \(z=\exp(\tau_{\mathrm{opt}})-1\). This yields different effective slopes at low vs high distance, producing a tension-like discrepancy in inferred \(H\)-like parameters. All zone boundaries and parameters must be locked or fit with strict split policy (Part 20 NO-CAL).

24.4.4 D.4.4 Minimal outputs

  • Predicted \(\hat\mu(z_i)\) and residuals.

  • Predicted time-dilation scaling from [eq:appendixD_D4_time_dilation] if tested.

  • Fitted \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}\) (or \((\kappa_{\mathrm{loc}},\kappa_{\mathrm{far}},D_{\mathrm{loc}})\)) with identifiability diagnostics (Appendix C).

24.4.5 D.4.5 Gates (PASS/FAIL)

24.4.5.1 G-FIT-SN (Hubble diagram fit).

Compute \(\chi^2\) on the test split; require locked threshold.

24.4.5.2 G-TD (time dilation gate).

If light-curve stretch data are used, test \[\texttt{PASS[G-TD]}\Longleftrightarrow \Delta t_{\mathrm{obs}}/\Delta t_{\mathrm{emit}} \approx 1+z \ \text{within uncertainties and without post-hoc selection.} \label{eq:appendixD_D4_gate_timedilation}\]

24.4.5.3 G-NULL-OPT (cause-off).

Set \(\kappa_{\mathrm{opt}}=0\) (so \(z=0\) in this mechanism) and confirm the model cannot fit the redshift-dependent trends: \[\Delta\chi^2\ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}.\]

24.4.5.4 G-ID-OPT (identifiability).

Must pass the identifiability checklist in Appendix C (Fisher conditioning, profile likelihood, regime coverage).

24.5 D.5 Accelerated Expansion / Structure Growth Card

24.5.1 D.5.1 Purpose and regime declaration

24.5.1.1 Goal.

Provide a minimal FRW-level background model (for \(H(z)\)) plus a minimal linear-growth equation, with an explicit exchange term (ledger) and an effective gravity modifier, enabling joint tests against distance and growth data.

24.5.1.2 Declared regime (LOCK for this card).

Homogeneous/isotropic background described by scale factor \(a(t)\) and Hubble parameter \(H=\dot a/a\). Linear perturbations treated in the subhorizon, pressureless-matter approximation for growth.

24.5.2 D.5.2 Minimal inputs

  • Background expansion probes: SN-like \(\mu(z)\), BAO-like distances, or \(H(z)\) points.

  • Growth probes: \(f\sigma_8(z)\) or similar linear-growth measurements.

  • Baryon/matter density normalization (either locked from external measurement or treated as nuisance with declared priors).

24.5.3 D.5.3 Minimal model equations

24.5.3.1 Two-sector ledger (HYP but explicit and testable).

Define actor-sector energy density \(\rho_m(a)\) (pressureless) and stage-sector density \(\rho_X(a)\) (effective). Impose exchange: \[\begin{aligned} \frac{d\rho_m}{dt} + 3H\rho_m &= +Q, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_rho_m}\\ \frac{d\rho_X}{dt} + 3H(1+w_X)\rho_X &= -Q, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_rho_X}\end{aligned}\] where \(w_X\) is an effective equation-of-state parameter (constant or specified function), and \(Q\) is an exchange term.

24.5.3.2 Minimal exchange ansatz (SPEC family for quick tests).

Use \[Q = \xi\,H\,\rho_X, \qquad \xi\in\mathbb{R}, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_Q_ansatz}\] which is dimensionally consistent and common in interacting-sector phenomenology. Other choices are permitted but must be explicitly declared and tested.

24.5.3.3 Friedmann equation (LOCK structure; content depends on declared baseline).

Assume \[H(a)^2 = \frac{8\pi G}{3}\left(\rho_m(a)+\rho_X(a)\right), \label{eq:appendixD_D5_friedmann}\] with \(G\) the gravitational constant (or \(G_{\mathrm{eff}}\) if explicitly modified; see below).

24.5.3.4 Acceleration condition (DERIVE).

\[\frac{\ddot a}{a} = -\frac{4\pi G}{3}\left(\rho_m + (1+3w_X)\rho_X\right) \quad \text{(if exchange does not modify the background equation form beyond $\rho$'s).} \label{eq:appendixD_D5_acceleration}\] Acceleration requires \(\ddot a>0\), equivalently \[\rho_m + (1+3w_X)\rho_X < 0, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_accel_condition}\] which is only possible if \(w_X<-1/3\) and \(\rho_X\) dominates, or if the effective model deviates (then the deviation must be explicit).

24.5.3.5 Distance predictions (DERIVE).

Define \[E(z):=\frac{H(z)}{H_0}, \qquad D_C(z)=c_0\int_{0}^{z}\frac{dz'}{H(z')}, \qquad D_L(z)=(1+z)D_C(z), \label{eq:appendixD_D5_distances}\] and \(\hat\mu(z)\) as in [eq:appendixD_D4_mu_pred] with \(D_L\).

24.5.3.6 Linear growth (SPEC but standard).

Let \(\delta(a)\) be the linear matter overdensity. Use the growth equation \[\delta''(a) + \left(\frac{3}{a}+\frac{H'(a)}{H(a)}\right)\delta'(a) -\frac{3}{2}\frac{\Omega_m(a)}{a^2}\,\mu(a)\,\delta(a)=0, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_growth}\] where primes denote \(d/da\), \[\Omega_m(a)=\frac{8\pi G\rho_m(a)}{3H(a)^2}, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_Omega_m}\] and \(\mu(a)\) is an effective gravity modifier. For a minimal quick test, take \[\mu(a)=1+\mu_0\,\frac{1}{1+(a/a_\mu)^p}, \qquad \mu_0>-1,\ a_\mu>0,\ p\ge 1, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_mu_ansatz}\] or set \(\mu\equiv 1\) if no modified growth is claimed.

24.5.3.7 Observable \(f\sigma_8\) (DERIVE).

Define growth rate \[f(a):=\frac{d\ln\delta}{d\ln a}, \label{eq:appendixD_D5_f_def}\] and predict \[\widehat{f\sigma_8}(z)=f(a)\,\sigma_8(a), \qquad \sigma_8(a)=\sigma_{8,0}\frac{\delta(a)}{\delta(1)}. \label{eq:appendixD_D5_fsigma8}\]

24.5.4 D.5.4 Minimal outputs

  • \(H(z)\), \(D_L(z)\), and \(\hat\mu(z)\) predictions.

  • Growth solution \(\delta(a)\) and \(\widehat{f\sigma_8}(z)\).

  • Joint residuals and joint gate summary (Part 19).

24.5.5 D.5.5 Gates (PASS/FAIL)

24.5.5.1 G-FIT-BG (background fit).

Fit \(\hat\mu(z)\) and/or BAO distances; require \(\chi^2_\nu\) within locked bounds.

24.5.5.2 G-FIT-GROWTH (growth fit).

Fit \(\widehat{f\sigma_8}(z)\); require locked bounds.

24.5.5.3 G-COH-BG-GROWTH (joint coherence).

\[\texttt{PASS[G-COH-BG-GROWTH]}\Longleftrightarrow \text{the same parameter vector }\theta\text{ fits both background and growth jointly (no dataset-specific retuning).} \label{eq:appendixD_D5_gate_coh}\]

24.5.5.4 G-NULL-INT (exchange-off null).

Set \(\xi=0\) in [eq:appendixD_D5_Q_ansatz] and require the targeted improvement is non-spurious: \[\Delta\chi^2\ge \Delta\chi^2_{\min}.\]

24.6 D.6 Early Universe (CMB/BBN) Card

24.6.1 D.6.1 Purpose and regime declaration

24.6.1.1 Goal.

Provide a minimal, compressed-observable early-universe gate: given an expansion history \(H(z)\) (or \(H(a)\)) from the chosen background model, compute a small set of standard early-universe derived quantities that strongly constrain the model:

  • CMB acoustic scale \(\theta_\ast\) (and optionally “shift parameters”),

  • BBN expansion-rate consistency at nucleosynthesis temperatures (via an expansion-rate ratio gate).

This card is intentionally minimal and does not replace full Boltzmann/BBN networks; it is a fast PASS/FAIL screening tool.

24.6.2 D.6.2 Minimal inputs

24.6.2.1 Background inputs.

  • \(H(z)\) from the background model (card D.5 or another declared source).

  • Baryon and radiation density parameters (either locked or fit with explicit priors).

24.6.2.2 CMB compressed data inputs (Dataset ID D-CMB-...).

Provide measured values (with covariance) of one of the following compressed sets:

  • acoustic scale \(\theta_\ast\) (or \(\ell_\ast\)) and baryon density proxy,

  • shift parameters \((R,\ell_A)\) with covariance,

or use a project-defined compressed summary.

24.6.2.3 BBN gate inputs (Dataset ID D-BBN-...).

Provide observed primordial abundances (e.g. helium mass fraction \(Y_p\) and deuterium ratio) or, for a minimal gate, a constraint on the expansion rate ratio at BBN epochs.

24.6.3 D.6.3 Minimal model equations

24.6.3.1 Recombination redshift (minimal fixed input or fitted nuisance).

Let \(z_\ast\) denote the recombination redshift used for the compressed CMB evaluation. For the mini-model card, treat \(z_\ast\) as an external fixed value (locked) or a nuisance with a narrow prior; do not tune it post-hoc.

24.6.3.2 Sound speed (baryon-photon fluid; LOCK form).

Define baryon-to-photon ratio \[R_b(z):=\frac{3\rho_b(z)}{4\rho_\gamma(z)}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_Rb}\] Then the sound speed is \[c_s(z)=\frac{c_0}{\sqrt{3(1+R_b(z))}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_cs}\]

24.6.3.3 Comoving sound horizon at recombination (DERIVE).

\[r_s(z_\ast)=\int_{z_\ast}^{\infty}\frac{c_s(z)}{H(z)}\,dz. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_rs}\]

24.6.3.4 Comoving angular diameter distance (DERIVE).

Assuming spatial flatness for the mini-model (must be declared; otherwise provide curvature correction explicitly), \[D_A(z_\ast)=\frac{1}{1+z_\ast}\,c_0\int_{0}^{z_\ast}\frac{dz}{H(z)}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_DA}\]

24.6.3.5 Acoustic angular scale (DERIVE).

\[\hat\theta_\ast(\theta)=\frac{r_s(z_\ast)}{D_A(z_\ast)}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_theta_star}\] Optionally, the multipole acoustic scale is \[\hat\ell_A(\theta)=\pi\frac{D_A(z_\ast)}{r_s(z_\ast)}=\frac{\pi}{\hat\theta_\ast}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_lA}\]

24.6.3.6 BBN expansion-rate ratio gate (compressed; HYP but explicit).

Define a ratio at a representative BBN epoch (e.g. \(z_{\mathrm{BBN}}\) or temperature \(T_{\mathrm{BBN}}\)): \[S_{\mathrm{BBN}} := \frac{H_{\mathrm{model}}(z_{\mathrm{BBN}})}{H_{\mathrm{ref}}(z_{\mathrm{BBN}})}, \label{eq:appendixD_D6_SBBN}\] where \(H_{\mathrm{ref}}\) is a declared reference expansion history (e.g. standard radiation-dominated scaling). The project must lock the definition of \(z_{\mathrm{BBN}}\) (or \(T_{\mathrm{BBN}}\)) and \(H_{\mathrm{ref}}\).

24.6.4 D.6.4 Minimal outputs

  • Predicted \(\hat\theta_\ast\) (and optionally \(\hat\ell_A\)) with residuals vs compressed CMB data.

  • Predicted \(S_{\mathrm{BBN}}\) (or a more detailed BBN proxy if provided).

  • A combined “early-universe” gate summary: CMB gate + BBN gate.

24.6.5 D.6.5 Gates (PASS/FAIL)

24.6.5.1 G-CMB (compressed CMB fit gate).

If using \(\theta_\ast\) alone: \[\chi^2_{\mathrm{CMB}}(\theta)=\frac{\left(\theta_\ast^{\mathrm{obs}}-\hat\theta_\ast(\theta)\right)^2}{\sigma_{\theta_\ast}^2}, \qquad \texttt{PASS[G-CMB]}\Longleftrightarrow \chi^2_{\mathrm{CMB}}\le \chi^2_{\max}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_gate_CMB}\] If using a vector of compressed parameters, use \(r^{\mathsf T}C^{-1}r\).

24.6.5.2 G-BBN (BBN expansion-rate gate).

Require the model does not deviate beyond a locked tolerance: \[\texttt{PASS[G-BBN]}\Longleftrightarrow |S_{\mathrm{BBN}}-1|\le \epsilon_{\mathrm{BBN}}. \label{eq:appendixD_D6_gate_BBN}\] The tolerance \(\epsilon_{\mathrm{BBN}}\) must be locked before evaluation (NO-CAL).

24.6.5.3 G-EARLY-COH (early-universe coherence).

\[\texttt{PASS[G-EARLY-COH]}\Longleftrightarrow \text{the same background }H(z)\text{ that fits late-time data also passes G-CMB and G-BBN without parameter retuning.} \label{eq:appendixD_D6_gate_coh}\]

24.6.5.4 End of Appendix D.

Appendix D delivered six mini-model cards: D.1 rotation curves, D.2 lensing/Einst rings, D.3 black hole–jet activation/scaling, D.4 redshift/Hubble-tension-like tests, D.5 accelerated expansion and structure growth, D.6 early-universe compressed CMB/BBN gates. Each card specifies minimal inputs, explicit equations, minimal outputs, and auditable PASS/FAIL gates compatible with the Part 19–20 verification OS.

25 APPENDIX E. Numerical & Data Reproducibility Package Guide (Output A5)

This Appendix specifies a reproducibility package that must accompany any numerical or data-driven claim in this document suite. It is designed to be:

  • SSOT-consistent: all symbols/constants/claims reference the registries (Part 20).

  • Machine-checkable: manifests and logs can be validated by scripts.

  • Auditable: every PASS/FAIL gate is linked to a dataset, parameter set, and artifact hash.

Any result without a complete package is considered FAIL[repro] by default.

25.0.0.1 Tier intent.

This Appendix defines LOCK structure (schemas, required fields, folder layout, minimal protocols). Project-specific thresholds (tolerances, priors, split ratios), computing environment choices, and dataset selections are SPEC but must be declared before evaluation (NO-CAL; Part 20).

25.0.0.2 Naming conventions (locked).

  • All identifiers are ASCII, lowercase, hyphen-separated: rotation-curve, lens-strong, cmb-compressed.

  • Timestamps are UTC ISO-8601: 2025-12-20T00:00:00Z.

  • Every run has a unique run_id and a content hash artifact_sha256.

25.0.0.3 Minimal reproducibility guarantee.

Given a package, an independent reviewer must be able to:

  1. locate the exact dataset version and preprocessing steps,

  2. re-run the pipeline with identical seeds,

  3. recover identical summary metrics and within-tolerance identical numerical outputs,

  4. see all FAIL records (not just successes).

25.1 E.1 Data manifest (required columns / metadata)

25.1.1 E.1.1 LOCK: dataset package structure

Each dataset used in any test must ship with a data manifest file: \[\texttt{data/manifest.csv}\quad \text{or}\quad \texttt{data/manifest.jsonl}, \label{eq:appendixE_manifest_path}\] and a dataset card (human-readable): \[\texttt{data/dataset\_card.md}. \label{eq:appendixE_dataset_card_path}\] The manifest is the machine-checked SSOT for file paths, checksums, split tags, and preprocessing provenance.

25.1.2 E.1.2 LOCK: manifest schema (CSV columns or JSONL keys)

25.1.2.1 Required fields (minimum).

Each record corresponds to a logical data unit (a file, or a row-group within a file if sharded). The following fields are mandatory:

  • dataset_id: stable dataset identifier, e.g. d-rc-sparc-v1.

  • record_id: unique per dataset, e.g. ngc2403-rc.

  • file_path: relative path under data/, e.g. raw/ngc2403.csv.

  • sha256: content hash of the raw file.

  • source_ref: citation string or DOI/arXiv/bibkey (not a URL requirement; references live in refs.bib).

  • license: license label or policy tag (e.g. public, cc-by, restricted).

  • acquired_utc: timestamp of acquisition in UTC.

  • schema_version: manifest schema version, e.g. 1.0.

25.1.2.2 Split and evaluation fields (required for any supervised fit/eval).

  • split: one of train, val, test, holdout, blind.

  • task: task label, e.g. rotation-curve-fit, lens-thetaE, cmb-theta-star.

  • target_fields: comma-separated list of targets, e.g. v,mu,gamma_t.

  • weight_field: if non-uniform weights are used, specify the column name; else none.

25.1.2.3 Preprocessing provenance fields (required).

  • preprocess_pipeline_id: identifier of preprocessing pipeline, e.g. pp-rc-v2.

  • preprocess_commit: git commit hash of preprocessing code.

  • preprocess_params_sha256: hash of serialized preprocessing parameters/config.

  • generated_file_path: path to the processed output (if applicable), e.g. processed/ngc2403.parquet.

  • generated_sha256: content hash of processed output.

25.1.3 E.1.3 Example manifest (CSV snippet)

25.1.3.1 Example (CSV header + two rows).

This is an illustrative example of the required fields (not exhaustive):

dataset_id,record_id,file_path,sha256,source_ref,license,acquired_utc,schema_version,split,task,target_fields,weight_field,preprocess_pipeline_id,preprocess_commit,preprocess_params_sha256,generated_file_path,generated_sha256
d-rc-sparc-v1,ngc2403-rc,raw/ngc2403.csv,3b2f...,ref:SPARC2016,public,2025-12-20T00:00:00Z,1.0,test,rotation-curve-fit,"r,v,sigma_v",none,pp-rc-v2,a1c9...,9e77...,processed/ngc2403.parquet,8c90...
d-lens-strong-v1,sdssj0037-thetaE,raw/sdssj0037.json,1aa1...,doi:10.xxxx/abcd,cc-by,2025-12-20T00:00:00Z,1.0,test,lens-thetaE,"thetaE,sigma_thetaE",none,pp-lens-v1,44ef...,0a21...,processed/sdssj0037.parquet,77dd...

25.1.4 E.1.4 Dataset card template (human-readable; LOCK headings)

Each dataset must include data/dataset_card.md with the following headings:

# Dataset Card: <dataset_id>

## Summary
- What this dataset measures
- Intended tasks (task labels)
- Known limitations

## Provenance
- Sources (DOI/arXiv/bibkey), acquisition time, license

## Schema
- Column definitions and units
- Primary keys
- Missingness patterns

## Splits
- How train/val/test were assigned
- Any object-level grouping to prevent leakage

## Preprocessing
- Pipeline ID, commit hash, parameters (with hashes)
- Any filtering rules (quality flags)

## Ethical / Legal
- License, usage constraints, attribution requirements

## Change Log
- Dataset version history

25.2 E.2 Seed / sampling / convergence standard

25.2.1 E.2.1 LOCK: seed policy and determinism contract

25.2.1.1 Determinism contract.

A run is declared deterministic if:

  1. All pseudorandom number generators are seeded from a single master seed.

  2. Any nondeterministic kernels (e.g. GPU operations) are either disabled or configured to deterministic modes.

  3. Data shuffling order and parallelism are fixed and logged.

25.2.1.2 Master seed and derived seeds.

Define a master seed \(s_0\in\mathbb{N}\), and derive component seeds via a hash function: \[s_{\mathrm{comp}} := \operatorname{hash64}(\texttt{run\_id} \Vert \texttt{component\_name} \Vert s_0), \label{eq:appendixE_seed_hash}\] where \(\operatorname{hash64}\) is a locked hash-to-integer function (documented in code). This prevents accidental seed reuse across components.

25.2.1.3 Required logged seeds.

At minimum, log:

  • seed_master (\(s_0\)),

  • seed_data_shuffle,

  • seed_init_params,

  • seed_mcmc (if used),

  • seed_bootstrap (if used).

25.2.2 E.2.2 Sampling protocols (optimization, MCMC, bootstrap)

25.2.2.1 Optimization runs (SPEC but standardized fields).

Any optimizer-based fit must log:

  • optimizer name and version,

  • objective function definition (e.g. \(\chi^2\), negative log-likelihood),

  • termination criteria (see below),

  • parameter bounds and transformations,

  • initial point strategy (seeded),

  • number of restarts (seeded).

25.2.2.2 MCMC runs (SPEC but standardized fields).

MCMC-based inference must log:

  • sampler name and version,

  • number of chains, warmup steps, sampling steps,

  • diagnostics thresholds: \(\hat R\), effective sample size (ESS),

  • prior specification (hash of prior config),

  • thinning (if any) and rationale.

25.2.2.3 Bootstrap (SPEC but standardized fields).

Bootstrap uncertainty must log:

  • resampling unit (row-wise, object-wise, block-wise),

  • number of bootstrap replicates,

  • resampling seed and any stratification rules.

25.2.3 E.2.3 LOCK: convergence criteria (minimum required tests)

25.2.3.1 Numerical PDE/ODE solvers.

For any numerical integration or PDE solver, convergence must be assessed with a refinement study. Define a resolution parameter \(h\) (e.g. grid spacing or time step). For a quantity of interest \(Q(h)\), require that for at least three refinement levels \(h_1>h_2>h_3\): \[\left|Q(h_2)-Q(h_3)\right|\le \varepsilon_{\mathrm{conv}}, \label{eq:appendixE_conv_threshold}\] where \(\varepsilon_{\mathrm{conv}}\) is a locked tolerance (can scale with \(|Q|\) if declared). If an order of convergence is expected, estimate: \[p_{\mathrm{est}}= \frac{\log\left(\frac{|Q(h_1)-Q(h_2)|}{|Q(h_2)-Q(h_3)|}\right)}{\log\left(\frac{h_1}{h_2}\right)} \label{eq:appendixE_order_est}\] and report it.

25.2.3.2 Optimization convergence.

At minimum, require: \[\|\nabla \mathcal{L}(\hat\theta)\|\le \varepsilon_{\nabla}, \qquad |\mathcal{L}_{k+1}-\mathcal{L}_{k}|\le \varepsilon_{\mathcal{L}}, \label{eq:appendixE_opt_convergence}\] with locked tolerances \(\varepsilon_{\nabla},\varepsilon_{\mathcal{L}}\). If gradients are unavailable, use step-size and objective-stability criteria.

25.2.3.3 MCMC convergence.

At minimum, require: \[\hat R \le 1+\varepsilon_R, \qquad \mathrm{ESS}\ge \mathrm{ESS}_{\min}, \label{eq:appendixE_mcmc_convergence}\] with locked thresholds \(\varepsilon_R\) and \(\mathrm{ESS}_{\min}\).

25.2.3.4 Gate form.

\[\begin{aligned} \texttt{PASS[G-CONV]}\Longleftrightarrow\ & \text{all declared convergence criteria (solver/optimizer/sampler)}\\ &\text{are satisfied and logged.} \end{aligned} \label{eq:appendixE_gate_conv}\] Otherwise FAIL[G-CONV].

25.3 E.3 Artifact folder structure example

25.3.1 E.3.1 LOCK: artifact identity and hashing

Each run produces an artifact bundle with:

  • run_id (unique),

  • artifact_sha256 (hash of the entire artifact directory content, in a canonical order),

  • code_commit (git commit hash),

  • env_lockfile_sha256 (hash of environment lock).

These identifiers must be printed in the main report header.

25.3.2 E.3.2 Folder tree (example; LOCK top-level layout)

25.3.2.1 Example artifact directory tree.

artifacts/
  run-2025-12-20T00-00-00Z-9f2c1a/
    README.md
    run_meta.json
    registries/
      symbol_registry.json
      constant_registry.json
      claim_registry.json
    data/
      manifest.csv
      dataset_card.md
      raw/                # optional, if license allows
      processed/
    config/
      model_config.yaml
      preprocess_config.yaml
      pass_rules.yaml
      priors.yaml         # if Bayesian
    logs/
      stdout.log
      stderr.log
      timing.json
      seeds.json
      git_status.txt
      hardware.json
      packages.txt
    results/
      params_bestfit.json
      params_posterior.nc      # or .csv/.json, if MCMC
      predictions.parquet
      residuals.parquet
      metrics.json
      fisher.npy
      profile_likelihood/
        theta1.csv
        theta2.csv
    figures/
      fig1_rotation_curve.pdf
      fig2_lensing_shear.pdf
      fig3_hubble_diagram.pdf
      fig4_growth_fsigma8.pdf
    tables/
      table_fit_summary.tex
      table_gate_summary.tex
      table_params.tex
    fail/
      FAIL_index.csv
      FAIL_detail_001.md
      FAIL_detail_002.md
    notebook/
      exploratory.ipynb         # optional; must not be required to reproduce
    scripts/
      reproduce.sh
      validate_manifest.py
      compute_metrics.py

25.3.2.2 Locked rule: “no hidden dependencies.”

The run must be reproducible by executing scripts/reproduce.sh (or equivalent) without manual steps. Notebooks may exist, but cannot be the only path to reproduction.

25.3.3 E.3.3 Required run_meta.json fields (LOCK)

25.3.3.1 Minimum JSON keys.

{
  "run_id": "...",
  "artifact_sha256": "...",
  "created_utc": "...",
  "code_commit": "...",
  "code_dirty": false,
  "env_lockfile_sha256": "...",
  "python_version": "...",
  "platform": "...",
  "hardware": { "cpu": "...", "gpu": "...", "ram_gb": ... },
  "dataset_ids": ["..."],
  "tasks": ["..."],
  "model_id": "...",
  "preprocess_pipeline_id": "...",
  "pass_rules_id": "...",
  "seeds": { "master": ..., "data_shuffle": ..., "init_params": ... }
}

Any missing key is FAIL[meta].

25.4 E.4 Report template (tables / figures / FAIL log)

25.4.1 E.4.1 LOCK: report sections and required content

Every run must produce a report file: \[\texttt{report/report.pdf}\quad \text{and}\quad \texttt{report/report.tex}. \label{eq:appendixE_report_paths}\] The LaTeX source ensures text-based audit and diffing.

25.4.1.1 Required report sections (headings must appear).

1. Executive summary (what was tested, PASS/FAIL headline)
2. Data and preprocessing (manifest + splits + hashes)
3. Model specification (equations + parameter list + priors/bounds)
4. Training/validation policy (NO-CAL, EVAL-ONLY compliance)
5. Results (tables + figures + residual diagnostics)
6. Gate evaluation (PASS/FAIL per gate with tolerances)
7. Sensitivity / identifiability (Fisher, profiles, correlations)
8. Null tests and ablations (cause-off, permutation, etc.)
9. Failure log (all FAIL records, including resolved ones)
10. Reproduction instructions (single command + expected outputs)

25.4.2 E.4.2 Table templates (minimal LOCK schemas)

25.4.2.1 Table: parameter summary.

Each parameter row must include: \[(\text{name},\ \text{meaning},\ \text{prior/bounds},\ \hat\theta,\ \text{uncertainty},\ \text{tier},\ \text{dataset role}).\] Example LaTeX tabular header:

\begin{tabular}{lllllll}
\hline
Param & Meaning & Prior/Bounds & Best-fit & Unc. & Tier & Role \\
\hline
...
\end{tabular}

25.4.2.2 Table: gate summary.

Each gate row must include: \[(\text{gate\_id},\ \text{definition ref},\ \text{metric},\ \text{threshold},\ \text{result},\ \text{PASS/FAIL},\ \text{artifact refs}).\] Example header:

\begin{tabular}{lllllll}
\hline
Gate & Definition & Metric & Threshold & Value & Status & Evidence \\
\hline
...
\end{tabular}

25.4.2.3 Table: dataset summary.

Must include dataset hashes and split sizes.

\begin{tabular}{lllll}
\hline
Dataset & Split & N & Raw sha256 & Processed sha256 \\
\hline
...
\end{tabular}

25.4.3 E.4.3 Figure templates (required plots; LOCK minimal set)

At minimum, include:

  • Prediction vs data plot for each task (rotation curve, shear, Hubble diagram, growth).

  • Residual diagnostics: histogram and residual vs predictor plot.

  • Convergence plot: refinement study or optimizer/sampler traces.

  • Identifiability plot: profile likelihood for each key parameter.

All figures must include: (i) dataset ID, (ii) run ID, (iii) parameter set hash, and (iv) axis units.

25.4.4 E.4.4 FAIL record format (mandatory; LOCK)

All failures must be recorded, even if later fixed. A failure record is a Markdown file under fail/ with the following fields:

# FAIL Record: <fail_id>

## Summary
- Gate or rule violated: <gate_id or rule_id>
- Severity: (blocker / major / minor)
- First detected (UTC): ...
- Detected in run: <run_id>
- Status: (open / mitigated / resolved)

## Evidence
- Metric/value: ...
- Threshold: ...
- Files: (paths + hashes)
- Figure/table refs: ...

## Root cause analysis
- What happened
- Why it happened (mechanism)
- Whether it is a model issue, data issue, or implementation issue

## Fix / mitigation
- Patch PR / commit: ...
- Verification rerun: <run_id>
- Residual risk

## Lessons learned
- Prevent recurrence (new rule, new test, lint)

25.4.4.1 FAIL index (LOCK).

A CSV index fail/FAIL_index.csv must exist with at least: \[(\text{fail\_id},\ \text{gate\_id},\ \text{status},\ \text{first\_detected},\ \text{run\_id},\ \text{short\_summary}).\]

25.4.5 E.4.5 Reproduction instructions block (LOCK)

The report must include a literal code block with a single command to reproduce, e.g.:

# Reproduce this run
./scripts/reproduce.sh --run_id run-2025-12-20T00-00-00Z-9f2c1a

# Validate manifests and gate checks
python scripts/validate_manifest.py artifacts/run-.../data/manifest.csv
python scripts/compute_metrics.py artifacts/run-.../

The expected output files and their hashes (or tolerances) must be stated.

25.4.5.1 End of Appendix E.

Appendix E defined a complete reproducibility package: (E.1) data manifests and dataset cards with required fields and provenance hashes, (E.2) seed/sampling determinism and minimum convergence criteria with gates, (E.3) a canonical artifact folder structure and mandatory run metadata, (E.4) a report template with required tables/figures and a strict FAIL logging standard.

26 APPENDIX F. Glossary, Index, and FAQ (Output A6)

This Appendix is a reader-facing and audit-facing reference:

  • F.1 Glossary: unambiguous definitions of core terms (stage, actor, ledger, gate, regime, choking, saturation, etc.).

  • F.2 FAQ: common misunderstandings and explicit “what this model does/does not claim” clarifications.

  • F.3 Index: a structured index of symbols, theorems/lemmas, gates, and dataset keywords.

26.0.0.1 Tier policy.

Definitions here are LOCK insofar as they reference the Symbol Registry (Appendix A) and PASS.rules (Part 20). Interpretive statements are tier-tagged and must not be promoted to DERIVE unless proven (Appendix B).

26.0.0.2 Notation and collision policy.

This Appendix enforces the global collision rules (Appendix A): no bare \(e\), no bare \(S\) (entropy vs flux), no bare \(T\) (tensor vs temperature), no bare \(\kappa\), no bare \(c\).

26.1 F.1 Glossary (stage, actor, ledger, gate, regime, choking, saturation, etc.)

26.1.1 F.1.1 Core conceptual terms (document-specific; LOCK meanings)

26.1.1.1 Stage (“the stage”).

Definition (LOCK). The stage is the background substrate or infrastructure that carries “background” variables (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)) and provides a medium in which actor variables evolve. When invoked, the stage is represented by stage variables in the Symbol Registry and must appear explicitly in the ledger (Part 04–06).

26.1.1.2 Actor (“the actor”).

Definition (LOCK). The actor refers to the mobile and stored sectors associated with localized phenomena. In the minimal decomposition (Appendix A), \[e_{\mathrm{act}} := \rho + e_a, \label{eq:appendixF_actor_def}\] where \(\rho\) is the stored sector and \(e_a\) is the mobile sector (both are budget densities).

26.1.1.3 Ledger (“the ledger”).

Definition (LOCK). A ledger is a conservation/balance statement that accounts for: \[\text{Accumulation} = \text{Inflow} - \text{Outflow} + \text{Sources} - \text{Sinks},\] implemented as an integral control-volume identity (Appendix B, Lemma B.1.1) or its discrete analog (Lemma B.1.4). Any claim of conservation must specify what is conserved (which density), the domain, boundary conditions, and any exchange terms.

26.1.1.4 Gate (PASS/FAIL gate).

Definition (LOCK). A gate is a binary decision rule with a declared metric, threshold, and evaluation dataset(s), with explicit PASS/FAIL outcomes recorded (Part 20, PASS.rules). A gate is not an intuitive statement; it is an operational test.

26.1.1.5 Regime (“regime map”).

Definition (LOCK). A regime is a region of state-space and parameter-space in which a specific closure and approximation layer is declared valid. Regimes are defined by dimensionless indicators (Appendix A) and by inequality conditions (Part 07–08, Appendix C).

26.1.1.6 Choking.

Definition (LOCK). Choking refers to activation of a flux limitation mechanism when a raw flux would exceed a throughput bound. Given a throughput speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) and density \(e_a\), \[|\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}\,e_a \label{eq:appendixF_choking_bound}\] is the canonical throughput gate (Appendix C). Choking is active when \(|\mathbf{S}_{\mathrm{raw}}|>c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\) (Appendix C).

26.1.1.7 Saturation.

Definition (LOCK). Saturation refers to boundedness of a rate or processing function \(\Gamma(e)\): \[0\le \Gamma(e)\le \Gamma_{\max},\qquad \lim_{e\to\infty}\Gamma(e)=\Gamma_{\max}. \label{eq:appendixF_saturation_def}\] A rate law that is unbounded is not a saturation law and must not be used for “capacity” arguments unless explicitly truncated (Appendix C).

26.1.1.8 Throughput.

Definition (LOCK). Throughput is the maximal transport rate of budget through a medium, controlled by \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) and the local density. In dimensionless form: \[\delta_{\mathrm{aniso}} := \frac{|\mathbf{S}|}{c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a}\in[0,1] \quad \text{(throughput enforced).} \label{eq:appendixF_delta_aniso}\]

26.1.1.9 Closure.

Definition (LOCK). A closure is a rule that expresses higher moments (e.g. \(\mathbf{T}\)) in terms of lower moments (e.g. \(e_a\) and \(\mathbf{S}\)), closing the moment hierarchy (Part 06–07; Appendix B). Examples: isotropic closure \(\mathbf{T}=\kappa_T e_a \mathbf{I}\), or anisotropic closures aligned with \(\mathbf{k}\).

26.1.1.10 Deficit (effective gravity / effective potential term).

Definition (LOCK+HYP). In this document suite, deficit is a label for any additional effective contribution to dynamics or lensing beyond baryonic modeling, often treated as an emergent effect of transport/drag or stage-actor exchange (Part 09). It must be specified by explicit equations and be tested by joint gates (rotation curves + lensing coherence).

26.1.1.11 Stage–actor exchange.

Definition (LOCK). Any term that transfers budget between actor and stage sectors, appearing as a source/sink in the ledger. Examples: \(J_{\mathrm{act,bg}}\) in Appendix B, Eq. [eq:B12_actor_continuity].

26.1.1.12 Claim tiers: LOCK / DERIVE / HYP / SPEC.

Definition (LOCK).

  • LOCK: definitions, axioms, and fixed conventions that must not drift.

  • DERIVE: results proven from LOCK inputs + explicitly declared assumptions.

  • HYP: hypotheses or mechanisms not yet validated; must be test-gated.

  • SPEC: specific modeling and engineering choices (priors, thresholds, dataset splits, numerical tolerances).

26.1.2 F.1.2 Operational terms (verification OS; LOCK)

26.1.2.1 PASS.rules.

Definition (LOCK). The project-wide rulebook specifying required gates, thresholds, and prohibited practices (Part 20). No evaluation is valid unless PASS.rules is included in the artifact package (Appendix E).

26.1.2.2 NO-CAL / EVAL-ONLY.

Definition (LOCK). NO-CAL: no post-hoc calibration or retuning on evaluation datasets. EVAL-ONLY: evaluation datasets are not used for fitting, choosing thresholds, or selecting models.

26.1.2.3 Reverse injection.

Definition (LOCK). A prohibited practice: using observational constraints to back-infer or redefine upstream locked inputs/definitions after the fact. Example: changing the meaning of \(e\) or switching \(S_{\max}\) definitions between modules to improve fits. Reverse injection is FAIL[rev-inject].

26.1.2.4 SSOT (single source of truth).

Definition (LOCK). Registries (symbols/constants/claims) are the only authoritative sources. Using an in-text constant without registry entry is FAIL[SSOT] (Part 20).

26.1.3 F.1.3 Quick glossary table (compact reference)

Quick glossary (compact). Full definitions in text above and in registries.
Term Meaning (locked summary)
Stage Background substrate with explicit stage variables (e.g. \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\)).
Actor Localized sector: stored \(\rho\) + mobile \(e_a\); \(e_{\mathrm{act}}=\rho+e_a\).
Ledger Control-volume conservation/balance identity (continuous or discrete).
Gate Operational PASS/FAIL test with metric + threshold + dataset.
Regime Declared validity region for approximations/closures; defined by indicators.
Choking Flux limiting activation when raw flux exceeds throughput bound.
Saturation Bounded processing/rate law \(\Gamma(e)\) approaching \(\Gamma_{\max}\).
Closure Rule closing moment hierarchy (e.g. \(\mathbf{T}\) in terms of \(e_a\)).
Deficit Effective extra contribution to dynamics/lensing beyond baryons; must be explicit and jointly tested.
NO-CAL No post-hoc tuning on evaluation data.
EVAL-ONLY Evaluation datasets used only for evaluation, not training/selection.
SSOT Registry-based single source of truth for symbols/constants/claims.

26.2 F.2 Frequently Asked Questions (misunderstanding prevention)

This FAQ is intentionally blunt: it is designed to prevent semantic drift and to block predictable categories of misuse.

26.2.1 F.2.1 Conceptual FAQ

26.2.1.1 FAQ 1: Is this “just dark matter with a new name”?

Answer. No. The framework explicitly distinguishes: (i) adding a new matter component as an extra source term, versus (ii) producing effective dynamics/lensing via transport/ledger/gate mechanisms. However, if the mini-model introduces an additive \(\Sigma_{\mathrm{def}}\) or \(a_{\mathrm{def}}\) and treats it as an arbitrary profile, it is phenomenologically equivalent to adding an effective mass component. Therefore, any claim of distinction requires additional structure: shared parameters, coherence gates across rotation curves and lensing, and successful null tests (Part 19; Appendix D).

26.2.1.2 FAQ 2: What exactly is conserved in the “ledger”?

Answer. Only the explicitly declared budget density is conserved/balanced. For example, in the closed actor sector the continuity law is \[\partial_t e_{\mathrm{act}}+\nabla\cdot \mathbf{S}=0,\] where \(e_{\mathrm{act}}=\rho+e_a\). If a stage sector is included, then exchange terms appear and conservation may apply only to a total \(e_{\mathrm{tot}}\) (Appendix B).

26.2.1.3 FAQ 3: Does the framework automatically remove singularities?

Answer. No. “Singularity removal” requires explicit mechanisms that enforce finite capacities: saturation laws \(\Gamma(e)\) and/or throughput constraints \(|\mathbf{S}|\le c_{\mathrm{th}}e_a\). If those mechanisms are not present, the claim is invalid. If they are present, one must still prove regularity (Appendix B) or demonstrate numerical stability and convergence (Appendix E).

26.2.1.4 FAQ 4: Is the throughput speed \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) the speed of light?

Answer. Not necessarily. \(c_0\) is reserved for the vacuum speed of light. \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) is a model throughput speed used to bound flux. If \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\) is set equal to \(c_0\), it must be declared and tested; if it differs, the physical interpretation must be explicit. Using bare \(c\) is forbidden (Appendix A).

26.2.1.5 FAQ 5: Can you choose a different \(\Gamma(e)\) or flux limiter for each phenomenon?

Answer. You can choose different SPEC models for exploration, but any claim of a single mechanism explaining multiple phenomena requires:

  • shared parameters across datasets (coherence gate),

  • fixed definitions of \(e\), \(S_{\max}\), and the regime map,

  • NO-CAL/EVAL-ONLY compliance,

  • identifiability checks (Appendix C),

  • a versioned, registry-tracked change log (Part 20).

Otherwise, it is categorized as retuning and fails the verification OS.

26.2.1.6 FAQ 6: What is the difference between “closure” and “hypothesis”?

Answer. A closure is a mathematical step to close the hierarchy; a hypothesis is a claim about the correct form of that closure in reality. Closures may be used as SPEC modeling choices; claims about their correctness are HYP until gated.

26.2.1.7 FAQ 7: Is the “lattice optics” redshift model compatible with standard time dilation?

Answer. It must be tested, not assumed. If the model defines \(1+z=\exp(\tau_{\mathrm{opt}})\) from energy loss, then a consistent time-dilation rule is an additional HYP (Appendix D). The combined mapping must pass time-dilation gates; otherwise the mechanism fails.

26.2.1.8 FAQ 8: If the model fits rotation curves, does it automatically fit lensing?

Answer. No. Dynamics and lensing are controlled by potentially different combinations of metric potentials in weak-field GR. Any joint claim requires the GR-coherence gate (Appendix B, PASS[GR-COH]) and joint evaluation (Part 19).

26.2.1.9 FAQ 9: What prevents overfitting or “explaining everything”?

Answer. The verification OS: claim tiers, locked registries, NO-CAL/EVAL-ONLY, null tests, cross-validation, and identifiability checks. A model that adds parameters without passing identifiability gates is rejected (Appendix C; Part 20).

26.2.1.10 FAQ 10: Why so many rules and gates?

Answer. Because without them, one can unknowingly reintroduce the target conclusions by tuning or by drifting definitions. The gates force explicit, reproducible evidence and are part of the theory’s operational meaning.

26.2.2 F.2.2 Technical FAQ (implementation and reproducibility)

26.2.2.1 FAQ 11: What is the minimum artifact package required to claim a PASS?

Answer. At minimum: data manifest + dataset card, locked configuration files (model, preprocessing, PASS.rules), seeds and run metadata, predictions/residuals/metrics files, figures and tables, and a FAIL log (Appendix E). Missing any of these yields FAIL[repro].

26.2.2.2 FAQ 12: Are notebooks sufficient as evidence?

Answer. No. Notebooks may accompany a run, but a single-command reproduction script must exist, and all key outputs must be generated by that script (Appendix E).

26.2.2.3 FAQ 13: How are symbol conflicts prevented in code?

Answer. Use the Symbol Registry as SSOT and implement a lint step that scans for forbidden bare symbols and mismatched dimensions (Appendix A, Part 20). A build that fails lint is FAIL[lint-symbol].

26.2.2.4 FAQ 14: What if two datasets disagree?

Answer. That is a valid outcome. The system records FAIL and requires explanation. The resolution may be: (i) revise the hypothesis, (ii) restrict the regime of validity, (iii) identify data/systematic issues, but never by post-hoc retuning of evaluation results.

26.3 F.3 Index (symbols / theorems / gates / dataset keywords)

This section provides an index template. In the final compiled document, these items should be auto-generated from registries and labels.

26.3.1 F.3.1 Symbol index template

26.3.1.1 Policy (LOCK).

Every symbol in the text must appear in the symbol index with: (i) the canonical symbol, (ii) a short meaning, (iii) a pointer to its SR entry (Appendix A), (iv) first occurrence label.

26.3.1.2 Example symbol index entries (illustrative).

  • \(e_a\): mobile budget density; SR entry SR:e_a; first use: §21.1.4.

  • \(\rho\): stored budget density; SR entry SR:rho; first use: §21.1.4.

  • \(e_{\mathrm{bg}}\): background budget density; SR entry SR:e_bg; first use: §21.1.4.

  • \(\mathbf{S}\): flux; SR entry SR:S_flux; first use: §21.1.4.

  • \(\Gamma(e)\): saturation rate; SR entry SR:Gamma; first use: §23.1.

  • \(c_{\mathrm{th}}\): throughput speed; KSR entry KSR:c_th; first use: §23.2.1.

26.3.2 F.3.2 Theorem/Lemma/Proposition index template

26.3.2.1 Policy (LOCK).

Each theorem/lemma/proposition must have: (i) label, (ii) statement type, (iii) dependencies (which LOCK axioms/definitions), (iv) where it is used.

26.3.2.2 Example entries (illustrative).

  • Lemma B.1.1: control-volume ledger identity; used in Parts 04–06, Appendix E gate checks.

  • Proposition B.2.2: Cattaneo \(\Rightarrow\) telegraph; used in Part 08 throughput modeling.

  • Gate OPT-COH: optical coherence; used in Part 14 and Appendix D.4.

26.3.3 F.3.3 Gate index template

26.3.3.1 Policy (LOCK).

Each gate must be indexed by: \[(\text{gate\_id},\ \text{definition label},\ \text{metric},\ \text{threshold source},\ \text{datasets},\ \text{artifacts}).\]

26.3.3.2 Example gate entries (illustrative).

26.3.4 F.3.4 Dataset keyword index template

26.3.4.1 Policy (LOCK).

Each dataset must be indexed by: \[(\text{dataset\_id},\ \text{phenomenon},\ \text{task},\ \text{split},\ \text{source\_ref},\ \text{license}).\] The dataset index must match the manifest (Appendix E) exactly.

26.3.4.2 Example dataset keyword entries (illustrative).

  • d-rc-...: rotation curves; task rotation-curve-fit.

  • d-lens-strong-...: Einstein radius; task lens-thetaE.

  • d-sn-...: Hubble diagram; task distance-modulus.

  • d-cmb-compressed-...: acoustic scale; task cmb-theta-star.

  • d-bbn-...: nucleosynthesis gate; task bbn-expansion-rate.

26.3.4.3 End of Appendix F.

Appendix F provided: (F.1) a locked glossary of core terms with explicit operational meaning, (F.2) a FAQ designed to prevent common misunderstandings and enforce tier discipline, (F.3) index templates for symbols, theorems, gates, and datasets, intended for auto-generation from registries and labels.

27 APPENDIX G. Gate Verdict Ledger and Adjudication Log (pangjeong)

This appendix is a structured adjudication log for the GATE layer. Each gate is evaluated against declared data or internal consistency checks, and the outcome is recorded using a restricted vocabulary:

  • PASS: the stated gate inequality / criterion is satisfied within locked tolerances.

  • FAIL: the stated criterion is violated.

  • INC: inconclusive (insufficient data, ambiguous mapping, or competing systematics dominate).

  • UNASSESSED: not yet executed for this release.

27.0.0.1 Optional regime diagnostic (turbulence analogy).

For some VP closures, a small set of global parameters can describe a large fraction of systems well, while a minority exhibit large residuals because the laminar approximation (single-scale, near-homogeneous closure) is stressed by additional structure. In the author’s vacuum-inflow galaxy-validation workflow, this idea is summarized by a dynamical complexity index based on reduced-\(\chi^2\) and a descriptive partition into {laminar, transition, turbulent} regimes (explicitly phenomenological, not literal fluid turbulence) . For consistency across VP volumes, this release’s Python verdict bundle therefore also reports, per executed gate row, an optional complexity index \[C_{\rm dyn}:=\log_{10}\!\left(\frac{\chi^2/\nu}{\mathrm{median}(\chi^2/\nu)}\right) \qquad (\nu=\mathrm{dof}),\] and attaches a descriptive regime label using the same thresholds as in the galaxy paper. These labels do not override the PASS/FAIL rule; they only flag where additional physics (e.g. turbulence-like fluctuations, environment dependence, or additional closure degrees of freedom) may be required, as developed more fully in the VP fluid-dynamics volume .

27.0.0.2 Evidence policy (recommended).

For each verdict, archive the supporting artifact(s) (plots, fit reports, scripts, hashes) in the same Zenodo deposition or in a DOI-linked bundle, and reference them by stable path + hash (or DOI) in the table below.

27.1 Template table (fill as tests are executed)

This release note. Rows for the table below are auto-generated from the accompanying Python verdict bundle (see and in the supplementary zip).

Gate ID Part Gate / test Verdict Evidence (artifact)
Gate ID Part Gate / test Verdict Evidence (artifact)
G1 & 14 & Redshift–distance functional form (low-\(z\) and beyond) & PASS (proxy) &

27.1.0.1 How to use.

For a released record, replace UNASSESSED with PASS/FAIL/INC and replace TBD with a concrete evidence pointer (e.g., + sha256 hash, or a Zenodo DOI for an attached bundle).